JP7236018B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a reel-type game machine (slot machine), one game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer circumference. As a result of stopping the reel by making full use of a reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, a predetermined pattern is displayed on the effective line. (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up, a special game state in which the profit state for the player is higher than in the normal game state (a game state in which the lottery probability of a small winning combination is higher than in the normal game state) ) is common. Here, in a reel-type gaming machine, when an image for presentation to increase the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a manner synchronized with the spinning and stopping operations of the reels. , and when operating the spinning drum stopping device, etc., it is configured to enjoy predicting the result of the game while comparing the pattern displayed on the spinning drum and the image for production displayed on the display. There are many things.

JP 2017-018215

There has been a demand for a game machine capable of transmitting appropriate information to the outside of the game machine, and there has been a demand for constructing a control process for transmitting appropriate information to the outside of the game machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect is
a reel;
a stop switch;
start switch and
In a game machine equipped with
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to output counting notification information to the outside of the game machine,
Hall control/fraud monitoring information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine every first cycle,
The gaming machine installation information is configured to be able to be output to the outside of the gaming machine every second period,
The gaming machine performance information is configured to be able to be output to the outside of the gaming machine every third cycle,
The counting notification information includes the counting serial number and the number of counting points.
The counting serial number included in the first counting notification information after the power is turned on is "0", and the counting serial number included in subsequent counting notification information is a value within the range of "1" to "M (M is a numerical value)". is configured to be
The gaming machine installation information includes information on the ID number of the main control chip,
The game machine performance information includes information on the total number of input points after the power is turned on,
At the first timing when the first cycle and the second cycle overlap, the gaming machine installation information is output, and at the second timing when the first cycle has passed from the first timing, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is output. configured to be
At the third timing when the first cycle, the second cycle, and the third cycle overlap, the gaming machine installation information is output, and at the fourth timing when the first cycle has passed from the third timing, the gaming machine Configured so that performance information may be output
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to transmit appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine, and to configure control processing for transmitting appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment with the door opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of the medal slot in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. 4A and 4B are a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangements in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a symbol combination list 3 in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the reel-type game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small wins, replay wins, and bonus appearance rates in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flow chart on the side of the main control board in the reel-type game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart of setting change device control processing on the main control board side in the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flow chart of unrecoverable error processing on the main control board side in the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of game progress control processing (first game) on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of game progress control processing (second sheet) on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of game progress control processing (third sheet) on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of internal lottery execution processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (first sheet) on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (second sheet) on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (third sheet) on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flow chart of condition device number management processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of remaining game number management processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of RT state transition control processing on the main control board side in the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flow chart of game interval transition control processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the spinning drum drive control process on the main control board side in the spinning drum game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flow chart of the spinning drum drive control process on the main control board side in the spinning drum game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram of reel rotation in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flow chart of power-off processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of the pushing order display in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of sub-side program start processing on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of sub-main loop processing on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flow chart of the sub-side power-off processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of 1-command processing on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flow chart of effect-related determination processing at the time of start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flow chart of the battle effect execution enable/disable determination process on the sub control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flow chart of AT production determination processing on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flow chart of the restoration permission/inhibition effect determination process on the sub control board side in the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flow chart of processing when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flow chart of processing during AT when the start lever is operated on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flow chart of special precursor processing at the time of start lever operation on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flow chart of special processing for adding when the start lever is operated on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flow chart of the advantageous BB internal processing when the start lever is operated on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flow chart of processing at the time of reception of the first reel stop on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flow chart of the second reel stop receiving process on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flow chart of the effect-related decision processing at the time of third reel stop on the sub-control board side in the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flow chart of processing at the time of reception of third reel stop on the side of the sub control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of menu screen display control processing on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flow chart of standby screen display control processing on the side of the sub-control board in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to a standby screen in the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an operation diagram of a winning game for replay applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 61 is an operation diagram of a winning game for replay applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 62 is an operation diagram of a winning game for replay applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 63 is an operation diagram of a replay winning game applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 4 is a side sectional view schematically showing the relative positions of the reel and hopper; It is a perspective view which shows the structure inside a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the arrangement of the medal auxiliary tank HS and the full detection electrode DE. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the size and position of full detection electrodes and screws BS; It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel band. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of game progress control processing (third sheet) on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of freeze execution determination processing at the start of rotation on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of reel rotation start preparation processing on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of freeze execution determination processing at the time of stop on the main control board side in the reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is an image diagram of execution of an AT start effect in a reel-type gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image of a lamp unit lighting configuration applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 78 shows an example of a state-based notification mode applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 79 is an example of a payout configuration applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 80 is an example 1 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 81 is an example 2 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 82 is an example 3 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 83 is an example 4 of the lighting mode of the max bet lamp applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 84 is an example 1 of action at the time of operating the settlement button applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the present example. FIG. 85 is an example 2 of the action at the time of operating the settlement button applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 86 is an example 3 of the action at the time of operating the settlement button applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 87 is an example 4 of the operation at the time of operating the settlement button applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 88(a) is a timing chart showing a first aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power shutdown, and FIG. It is a timing chart showing the aspect of. FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89(b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. 4 is a table showing the relationship between , power supply state, and situation. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a process of adding the number of credits, a process of paying out game medals, and a process of outputting a game medium imparted sound. 91 is a front view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 94 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first pressing order navigation when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 95 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 96 is an image diagram of the start timing of the first push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 97 is an image diagram of the start timing of the second push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of the start timing of the third push order navigation when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of a reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 100 is an image diagram of start timing of push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the present example. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of start timing of push order navigation including the reel window frame lamp when there is a wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the present example. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of start timing of push order navigation including sound when there is no wait in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the present example. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of start timing of push order navigation including sound when there is a wait in AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the present example. FIG. 104 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 105 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 106 is an image diagram of the end timing of the third push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won in the AT state, which can be applied to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 107 is an image diagram of the end timing of the first push order navigation when the push order replay role is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 108 is an image diagram of the end timing of the second push order navigation when the push order replay role is won in the AT state, which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example. FIG. 109 is an image diagram of changes in the display mode of reel stop control and push order navigation in the AT state, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing detection modes of game medals by the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of game progress control processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of medal insertion error processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the relationship between detection of game medals by the first insertion sensor and the second insertion sensor and credit addition processing on the main control board side, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. be. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of error detection by the shoot sensor on the main control board side, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first insertion sensor, the second insertion sensor, and the shoot sensor, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 116 is a front view of a medal returning member applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a side view of a medal return member applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals flowing down the medal returning member, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a trajectory diagram of game medals paid out to the medal receiving port, applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing how game medals are detected by the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor when the hopper motor is driven, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is an image diagram of a disk rotation mode from when the hopper motor is driven until when the hopper motor is stopped, which can be applied to the reel-type game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 shows the main control board when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during settlement processing, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a first pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub control board side based on a control command transmitted from the side; FIG. 123 shows the main control board when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during settlement processing, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a second pattern diagram showing the audio output processing on the sub control board side based on the control command transmitted from the side; FIG. 124 shows the main control board when communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during the wait period, which can be applied to the reel-type game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub control board side based on a control command transmitted from the side; FIG. 125 shows a case where communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub-control board is disabled during medal payout processing from the hopper, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. 1 is a first pattern diagram showing audio output processing on the sub control board side based on a control command transmitted from the main control board side of FIG. FIG. 126 shows a case in which communication is restored after communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disabled during medal payout processing from the hopper, which can be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. 10 is a second pattern diagram showing the audio output processing on the sub-control board side based on the control command transmitted from the main control board side of FIG. FIG. 127 is a table of numbers applicable to this example. FIG. 128 is a front view of a main board case applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 129 is a front view of a main control board accommodated in a main board case applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 130 is a perspective view and a side view of a main board case applicable to a reel-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 131 is a structural pattern diagram of a gate portion of a main board case applicable to a reel-type gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 132 is an image diagram of the inside of the medal selector at the time of inserting game medals applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 133 is an example of an operation diagram showing the relationship between the power-off process and the game medal credit addition process applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 134 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between power-off processing and game medal credit addition processing applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 135 is an image diagram of the inside of the chute main body when game medals are inserted, which can be applied to the reel-type game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 136 is an example of an operation diagram showing the relationship between power-off processing applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the eighth embodiment and count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter. FIG. 137 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between power-off processing applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the eighth embodiment and count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter. FIG. 138 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between power-off processing applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the eighth embodiment and count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter. FIG. 139 is an example of an action diagram showing the relationship between the power-off process and the payout number counting process of game medals applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 140 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends after the stop button sensor is turned off, which is applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. be. FIG. 141 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, which can be applied to the reel-type game machine according to the ninth embodiment. is. FIG. 142 is an example of an image diagram showing the relationship between stop button operation and reel stop control when the four-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off, applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. is. FIG. 143 is a display example of a performance display device applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 145 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing on the main control board side applicable to the reel-type game machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 146 is a flowchart of ratio calculation processing in the second ROM/RAM area applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of ratio display processing in the second ROM/RAM area applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a flowchart of game progress control processing (third sheet) (variant 1) on the main control board side applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing (variant 2) on the main control board side applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 150 is a test display example of the performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 151 is a test display example of the performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 152 shows a configuration relating to stopping and automatic settlement in a reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram of each mode transition in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram of selection of in-mode items in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram at the time of notification in the reel-type gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 156 is a display example of a performance display device applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 157 is a functional block diagram of a medalless reel-type game machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 158 shows an example of communication contents of a connection cable related to a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 159 is an example of a gaming machine information notification command relating to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 160 is an example of a count notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 161 is an example of a lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 162 is an example of a lending/receiving result response command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a flow regarding a gaming machine information notification command relating to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 164 is a flow regarding a lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 165 is a flow regarding a lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 166 is a flow regarding a lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 167 is a flow regarding a count notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 168 is an example of gaming machine information (when HC/fraud monitoring information is set) relating to a medalless reel-type gaming machine according to a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a flow 1 regarding the count notification command and the lending notification command related to the medal-less reel-type game machine according to the modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 170 is a flow 2 regarding the count notification command and the lending notification command related to the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 171 is a flow 3 regarding the count notification command and the lending notification command related to the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to the modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 172 is a flow relating to a case where communication between the game machine and the SC board according to the medal-less reel-type game machine according to the modified example from the thirteenth embodiment is interrupted. FIG. 173 is a flow relating to a case where a communication error occurs during settlement relating to a medalless reel-type game machine according to a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 174 is a flow regarding a case where a communication error occurs during lending of a medalless reel-type game machine according to a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 175 is a flow relating to serial number update processing relating to a medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a flow relating to gaming machine information notification control processing relating to a medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 177 is a flow relating to gaming machine information notification control processing relating to a medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to a modified example from the thirteenth embodiment.

First, the meaning of each term used in this specification will be explained. "Random numbers" are random numbers used in lotteries (computer-based lotteries, sometimes referred to as lotteries) to determine certain game content in reel-type gaming machines, and are used in addition to narrowly defined random numbers. It also includes pseudo-random numbers (for example, hard random numbers as random numbers, built-in random numbers generated by a main control chip including a CPU, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number" related to the special role for transitioning to the special game and the winning role (small role, replay role), etc. can be mentioned. "CPU" has the same meaning as that well known in the industry, and is not limited to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.), processing performance, etc. used. “Electrical interruption (power supply interruption)” refers to the fact that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine has fallen below a certain level, regardless of whether or not the power switch provided on the gaming machine is operated. It also includes interruption of power supply due to unforeseen circumstances such as unit damage or power failure. "ROM" is synonymous with what is well known in the industry, and physically retains information (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, it is "1" if the element configuration is conductive, "0" if the element configuration does not RAM is synonymous with what is well known in the industry, and holds information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is applied, it is "1" if it is charged, and "1" if it is not charged). It becomes "0."It is generally configured so that backup power is supplied to part or all of the data held in the RAM when power is cut off.). The "game state" is, for example, a special game state in which game medals can be easily acquired and is advantageous to the player (so-called jackpot game, bonus game, type 1 BB, type 2 BB, etc.). ), the replay probability variable gaming state (RT state) in which the winning rate of the replaying role is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the replaying role is a predetermined value, and the winning role reel stop order for winning a prize, an AT (assist time) state that can notify the stop position, an ART (assist replay time) state that is a combination of the RT state and the AT state, and the like. In addition, even in the normal game state, RT state, AT state, transition lottery probability to ART state is different, high probability normal game state, low probability normal game state, etc. (In this example, it is called a lottery state ). In addition, there is no problem even if the game state is combined {Furthermore, these game states and functions (for example, the lottery for transition to the AT state, output of notification instructions related to the order of stopping the reels, etc.) control the progress of the game. There is no problem even if everything is mounted on the main control board side}. Also, in this example, the AT state and the RT state are described separately, and the RT state is called "RT1" and the AT state is called the "normal game state". As a state related to ART, the state related to ART may be referred to as a "normal game state" or the like. "Winning combination" is the type of condition device (or condition device number) won by internal lottery (sometimes referred to as internal lottery). The "notification state" is a state related to an AT that can execute push order navigation, which will be described later. Even in a game in which a conditional device in which push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ depending on the reel stop order, even if the game is won. , and AT are configured to be in the "notification state" if the push order navigation is executable. The "counter value" is also called "the number of executable information games", and is the number of remaining AT games or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the "informative game executable number" is 1 or more (including the game that has become "0"), push order navigation, which will be described later, can be executed. In addition, as the "executable number of information games", the difference number of game media (the number of payouts minus the number of insertions) obtained based on the winning of a small combination (mainly the bell combination of pushing order), The number of wins of the top bell role may be employed. In addition, the "special notification state" is a state that is most advantageous to the player among states related to AT, and is called an "additional specialized state" in this example. A "specific condition" is a condition under which the AT counter value can be subtracted. "Type 1 special accessories" are accessories that increase the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increase the probability that the conditional device for winning for each specified number will be activated. It is activated when the player is hit and can continue to operate until the result of the number of games not exceeding 12 is obtained, and is sometimes called RB (regular bonus). "Type 1 Special Accessory Continuous Operation Device" is a device that can continuously operate the 1st Class Special Accessory, and operates when a combination of specific symbols is displayed and in a predetermined case. It is called BB (big bonus) or first type BB. "Type 2 Special Accessory" refers to an accessory that activates a conditional device related to winning regardless of the result of the winning lottery. The operation is terminated when the bonus is reached, and is sometimes referred to as CB (Challenge Bonus). "Type 2 Special Accessory Continuous Operation Device" is a device that can continuously operate the Type 2 Special Accessory, and operates when a combination of specific symbols is displayed and in a predetermined case. , and is sometimes called MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. "Normal accessories" are accessories that increase the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increase the probability that the conditional device related to winning for each specified number is activated. It is activated when a combination is displayed and terminated when the result of one game is obtained, and is sometimes called SB (single bonus). The "all JACIN type" is a configuration in which it is assumed that the player has been JACIN when the type 1 BB combination wins, and the RB is always in progress during the execution of the type 1 BB. In addition, the "JACIN lottery type" is a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed when the first type BB is executed. In addition, the "non-controlled reel" is a reel in which the pull-in control that can be executed after performing the stop operation is not executed, and the reel stops at the reel position closest to the reel position where the stop operation is received. reel. The "all CB type" is a configuration that is always in CB when the second type BB is executed. The "CB shift lottery type" is a configuration in which non-CB and CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

Note that this embodiment is only an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step related to various processes, the timing of turning on and off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. Also, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described.

(this embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the reel-type game machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, the basic structure of the front side of the reel-type game machine P according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 1 (part of the structure is shown in FIG. 2). The reel-type gaming machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or base), reel units installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control unit. It consists of a substrate M (a substrate on which a main control chip C including a CPUMC is mounted) and a sub-control substrate S (a substrate on which a sub-control chip SC including a CPUSC is mounted). These will be described in order below.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for making the game state visible, a mechanism for allowing input of game media, a mechanism for operating the reel units, other mechanisms, and the like. Specifically, as a mechanism for visually recognizing the game state, reel window D160, insertion number display lamp D210, start lamp D180, replay lamp D290, insertion possible lamp D300, special game state display device D250, credit number A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (also referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous interval display device YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of game media and inputting the number of bets (number of bets), a medal insertion slot D170, a bet button D220, and a mechanism for enabling the payment of the inserted game media are settling. A button D60 is attached. A start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached as mechanisms for operating the reels. It should be noted that the reel-type gaming machine in this embodiment is equipped with a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a checkout button D60, a sub-input button SB, a cross key SB2, and the like. It is equipped with an operation console that protrudes to the side. Each element will be described in detail below.

<Mechanism for making game state visible>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for making the game state visible will be described. The reel window D160 is a transparent member made of synthetic resin or the like that constitutes a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed within the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. In addition, the input number display lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (insert game medals required to start one game) are lit. is configured as follows. Specifically, the inserted number display lamp D210 is composed of three LEDs (lamps) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In this case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: goes out, and the 3-bet lamp D213: goes out. : lights up, 3 bet lamp D213: lights off, and when the number of bets is 3, 1 bet lamp D211: lights up, 2 bet lamp D212: lights up, 3 bet lamp D213: lights up (replay This is not the case in the next game in which is displayed stopped, details will be described later). The start lamp D180 is composed of an LED, and lights up when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is accepted), and is turned on when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid (operation is not accepted). It is configured to turn off in certain cases. Further, the replay lamp D290 is composed of an LED, and is configured to be lit when the replay stop display is triggered and turn off when the next game after the replay stop display is completed. In addition, the insertable lamp D300 lights up (may blink) when the inserting of game medals into the medal inserting slot D170 is effective, or when the operation of the bet button D220 is effective, and the inserting of game medals is enabled. It is configured to be turned off when the bet button D220 is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Also, the special game state display device D250 is composed of a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. In addition, the special game state display device D250 may not be provided. is displayed, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided. The credit amount display device D200 is composed of a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (credit amount) stored in the gaming machine as the player's own medals. In addition, the payout number display device (press order display device) D270 is composed of a 7-segment display, and displays the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button). D43 (stopping order of D43) can make a difference in the winning hand. is generally configured so that the profit rate (the number of payouts, the RT state after that, etc.) given to the player can be different} is established, the reel that is most advantageous to the player The stop order is configured to be notified (this notification is sometimes referred to as push order navigation). In this way, the number-of-payouts display device (push-order display device) D270 is configured to be able to display two types of display: the number of game medals currently being paid out and the order in which the reels are stopped in order to maximize the profit for the player. The display mode is such that the player does not misunderstand which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. In addition, the AT counter value display device D280 allows the game to be played according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as the first information display unit) among the AT-related states (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games in which the player can stay in an advantageous AT-related state (in this example, also referred to as a push-order navigation state or an information game, the details of which will be described later), which is guaranteed when the player progresses. is configured as follows. It should be noted that the AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided, and in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 may be configured to display the number of games in which the AT state can be maintained. can recognize the number of games in which the state regarding the advantageous AT is guaranteed, and can be a user-friendly gaming machine. The payout number display device (pressing order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a payout number display device and a push order display device.

In addition, the advantageous section indicator YH is composed of an LED, and is configured to be lit in the case of the "advantageous section" and to be extinguished in the case of not being the "advantageous section" (the lighting and extinguishing timings are described later). Here, in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example, as in the conventional reel-type gaming machine, game medals can be easily acquired, and a special game state (so-called jackpot game, bonus game, etc.) is advantageous for the player. , 1st type BB, 2nd type BB, etc.), the winning rate of the replay role is higher (or lower) than the normal game state where the winning rate of the replay role is a predetermined value The replay probability variable gaming state (RT state), the stopping order of the reels for winning the winning combination, the AT (assist time) state that can notify the stopping position, and the RT state and the AT state. Composite ART (assist replay time) state, etc. can be taken, but apart from these "game states", one of three "game sections", "normal section", "waiting section" and "advantage section" can be set. In this example, the "waiting section" is not set, and either the "normal section" or the "advantageous section" is set. Among these, the "advantageous section" is positioned as being relatively more advantageous for the player than other "game sections". "advantageous section" is associated. That is, when the "game state" is the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous interval indicator YH lights up. Similarly, since this is done on the side of the main control board that controls the progress of the game, whether or not the progress of the game is relatively advantageous to the player can be determined by the lighting/light-out status of the advantageous zone indicator YH. It is possible to truthfully transmit to the player. As will be described later, if the "advantageous section" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal section" is forcibly set. The state related to AT is also forcibly terminated (information to maintain the state during AT is cleared and initialized), so changing the set "game section" does not affect the transition of "game state". As a result, it is possible to automatically suppress the remarkably increased gambling nature due to the "game state" such as the AT state and the ART state, which have a relatively high degree of design freedom. of. As described above, if the "advantageous section" continues until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), the "normal section" is forcibly set, that is, the "advantageous section" ends. However, the end condition of the "advantageous section" is not limited to this. The end condition of the "advantageous section" in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example is "a push that can win a small win with the largest number of payouts among the small wins that constitute the push order (play with push order). Execution of forward navigation once (for example, if there are small wins of 7, 3, and 1 as small wins that make up the push order navigator, the 7 wins with the highest number of payouts can be acquired. Then, if there is a pushing order combination in which 7 cards or 1 card can be obtained depending on the pushing order and a pushing order combination in which 3 cards can be obtained depending on the pushing order, the pushing order navigation that can obtain 3 cards is referred to here. (does not apply to push order navigation)", or "won any of BB, RB, MB", and "arbitrary end conditions (not won in 40G1 set loop lottery (AT), fixed 32G The end condition is that the progress (fake omen, etc.)” or the “advantageous section 1500G” is satisfied. In addition, in the case of specifications where there is no push order bell combination (eg, there is a replay push order for transitioning to the RT state, but there is no small combination with a different payout number depending on the push order), The condition for ending the advantageous section, ie, “one press-order navigator capable of acquiring the small winning combination with the largest number of payouts”, is excluded. In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning combination that constitutes the winning combination is composed of a small winning combination corresponding to an 11-card combination and a small combination corresponding to a 1-card combination. Execution of push order navigating that can win a small win once" refers to notification of a push order that makes it possible to win 11 medals (11 wins are possible).

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, the main part of the mechanism for enabling the input of game media will be described. The medal slot D170 is a slot for inserting game medals, and game medals inserted into the slot are guided into the gaming machine in a state where medals can be accepted. In addition, an insertion receiving sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided as sensors for detecting the insertion of medals inside the gaming machine, and the medals are guided into the gaming machine. When it is determined that game medals have been inserted normally, the inserted medals can be detected as bet medals. Also, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by the player, and configured to bet accumulated medals (credit medals) by operation. In addition, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and can be operated to refund accumulated medals (credit medals) and/or bet medals to the player. there is The game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are arranged to be paid out to the ejection port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be capable of starting the motion of the reels by operation. The stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player. By operating the respective stop buttons, the operation of the reels can be stopped sequentially. It is

<Other mechanisms provided in the front door DU>
Next, the essential parts of other mechanisms provided on the front door DU will be described with reference to the perspective view of FIG. On the front door DU, as a mechanism for increasing the interest of the game, there is an effect display device S40 for displaying effects such as an advance notice effect and a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 that can be lit in various lighting modes (not shown), a door substrate D for relaying signals, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals, a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, and a middle panel (middle decorative panel) made of synthetic resin or the like. , an upper panel D130 and a lower panel D140, and the like. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part of the back side of the front door DU so that the display section for displaying effects and the like can be visually recognized through the see-through area formed on the upper panel. Also, the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 have light emitting sources that emit light according to the progress of the game of the reel-type game machine P, and decorative lamps are provided on the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, respectively. A unit D150 is provided, and an LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130 (the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 may be collectively referred to as lamp units). ). Further, a door substrate D is attached below the reel window D160 on the back surface of the front door DU, and this door substrate D receives input signals from the aforementioned stop button D40, start lever D50, checkout button D60, and the like. is input, and has the function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to the main control board M, which will be described later. Corresponding to the medal insertion slot D170, a medal selector DS, which will be described later in detail, is provided near the door substrate D on the back of the front door DU, and detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. It has a function of carrying out an authenticity check, guiding proper medals to a hopper H40, which will be described later, and returning improper medals to a medal receiving tray D230, which will be described later. Furthermore, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the right and left sides below the door substrate D. As shown in FIG. The middle panel is the upper side of the operator console and the lower side of the upper panel D130, and is the panel part including the aforementioned reel window. Further, the sub-input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the console D190 described above are used for operations on the menu screen, which will be described later, and button repeated hitting effects on the sub-control board S side. This is a member used for the progress of mini-games (for example, the success or failure of entering the "AT state") and the like. The front door DU of the reel-type game machine P has a medal receiving tray D230 for receiving game medals (or simply called medals) discharged from the discharge port D240, and the opening/closing state of the front door DU can be detected. A door switch D80 is provided. In addition, a keyhole D260 is provided in the front door DU, and a key (door key) that matches the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {and twisted in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. It is configured so that the front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in this embodiment, an error state (door open error, etc.) can be canceled by inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 {in addition, twisting it in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)}. there is A bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220. The bet button lamp S50 is composed of an LED controlled by the sub-control board S. The bet button lamp S50 lights up (or blinks). ), the player can perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is valid. A stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (provided for each of the three stop buttons: the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). is composed of LEDs controlled by the sub-control board S, and the presence or absence and/or lighting color of the stop button lamp S60 indicates to the player that the operation of the stop button D40 is valid. can be perceived by It should be noted that only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the active stop button D40 is lit in the lighting color corresponding to the active stop button D40. For example, the left stop button D41 is disabled. , when the middle stop button D42 is effective and the right stop button D43 is effective, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is turned on, and the right stop button is turned on. Like the lighting of the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the button D43, the lighting modes of the three stop button lamps S60 are configured to be different from each other. Further, by changing the lighting color and lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (they may be different such as lighting/blinking or low speed/high speed flashing), push order navigation is executed. In the game, it may be configured so that the player can easily identify the stop button that should be stopped at present. When winning the push order bell that becomes the maximum payout number), the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button flashes in white, the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button After that, when the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button is turned off. The stop button lamp may be flashed in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button may be illuminated in blue.

Next, the back box (also called cabinet or base) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to substantially the center of the back box so that a part thereof can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a drive source (stepping motor, etc.) for the reel M50. The reel M50 also includes a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel portion is formed of synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of patterns are drawn on the outer circumference of the reel portion (on the reel band MO). Further, it is configured to allow the respective reel portions to be rotated and stopped based on the operation of each stop button in the start lever D50 and the stop button D40. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. The outer circumference of the reel can be visually recognized as if it were illuminated by the light transmitted through. Above the reel M50, a reel board K, which will be described later, for driving each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53) is stored.

Further, above the reel M50, a main control board M, which will be described later and controls the entire game, is housed. A sub-control board S, which will be described later, is stored for controlling various effects performed using the . The main control board M includes a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), and a setting/reset key switch M20 for changing setting values and canceling errors. A button M30 is connected. Although neither the setting key switch M20 nor the setting/reset button M30 are shown in FIG. If not, it may be provided in a position where human access is difficult).

A hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals are provided below the reel M50, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire reel-type game machine P. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the outlet D240. A power switch E10 for turning on the power of the reel-type gaming machine P is also provided on the front surface of the power board E (sometimes referred to as a power supply unit E). Details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal Selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 inside the reel-type game machine P. As shown in FIG. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s serving as a path for game medals inserted from the medal insertion opening D170 near the door substrate D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s is an ejection opening D240 for game medals. A coin shooter D90 or the like is provided for leading to the The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the size and accepting only the game medals conforming to the standard dimensions. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been dropped are configured to be paid back to the ejection port D240 by the blocker D100. When the player inserts game medals before operating the start lever D50 (in a state in which the insertion of game medals is valid), the game medals are sorted by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only those satisfying the standards are selected. Tokens that are thrown into the hopper H40 and do not meet the standards are returned to the outlet D240 through the coin shooter D90. On the other hand, when game medals are inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state in which the insertion of game medals is not valid), regardless of whether the standard is met, the inserted game medals is returned to the outlet D240 through the coin shooter D90. Further, inside the insertion receiving sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path), there is provided a sensor related to medal insertion, which will be described later in detail. and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the signal thereof is supplied to the main control board M, which will be described later.

Next, the sensor for inserting medals will be described in detail. Game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 first pass through the insertion acceptance sensor D10s. The insertion acceptance sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medals pass, the two protruding mechanisms are pushed down to turn on and allow the game medals to pass normally through the path. . Also, with such a configuration, when a foreign object that is not a game medal (a foreign object that does not satisfy the standard, for example, a diameter smaller than that of a game medal) is thrown in, the two protruding mechanisms are pushed down. not. Since such medals cannot be maintained in an upright state, they cannot pass through the path (the medals fall down) and are returned to the ejection port D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that an error has occurred (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) even when the ON time continues for a predetermined time or longer. .

When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, it passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing. This insertion sensor (first insertion sensor D20s and second insertion sensor D30s) is composed of two sensors (arranged adjacent to each other with an interval smaller than the standard diameter of game medals), and each sensor is turned on.・Various errors can be detected by monitoring the off state (the order of transition of the combination of on/off of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, etc.) and the ON/OFF time. is configured to

<Medal Dispensing Device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to the front view and top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. The medal payout device H operates the checkout button in a state where credits (game medals electronically stored inside the game machine) or bet medals (medals inserted to start a game) are present. or when game medals are paid out as a result of winning a prize. When operating, the hopper motor H80 is first driven to rotate the disk H50 around the disk rotation axis H50a. The rotation causes the game medals in the medal payout device H to displace the release urging means H70 and flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the release port D240. The payout sensor (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) is composed of two sensors. Various errors can be detected by monitoring the transition order of off combinations, etc.) and the time of on/off. More specifically, for example, when passing through the game medal exit H60 normally, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70, the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off to the second payout sensor H20s. 1st payout sensor H10s = off · 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → 1st payout sensor H10s = on · 2nd payout sensor H20s = off → 1st payout sensor H10s = on · 2nd payout sensor H20s = on → 1st payout Sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off, second payout sensor H20s = off. , to be an error.

Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the reel-type game machine in this embodiment. In the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the specified number (the maximum number of game medals that can be bet in one game) is 3, and the number of frames on the left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53 is 20 frames. , the effective line for which a prize is determined is one line of "left reel M51 upper stage, middle reel M52 middle stage, right reel M53 lower stage". The maximum number of payouts is 11, and the minimum number of payouts is 1 (association between the winning combination and the number of payouts will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is "replay role → small win (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus", for example, when the replay role and bonus are established at the same time , the symbol combination for the replaying combination is stopped and displayed, and the bonus cannot be won. Also, if the bell and watermelon are established, if you press the stop button at a position where you can draw both (a position within 4 frames to the stop position where you win a prize), give priority to a small combination with a large number of payouts. It is designed to pull. The configuration shown in the figure is only an example, and the number of frames on each reel can be changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), or the configuration of effective lines can be changed (for example, 3 horizontal lines, 2 diagonal lines, 5 lines). There is no problem even if the line is changed to 1 line of the left reel M51 lower stage, the middle reel M52 middle stage, and the right reel M53 upper stage). In addition, as a pull-in control when a small winning combination in which different benefits are given to the player depending on the pressing order is won, a small combination with a large number of payouts is provided when the operation is performed in a predetermined correct pressing order. (number of sheets priority control), and if the incorrect pressing order is different from the correct pressing order, it is possible to stop display (in a position within 4 frames from the stop operation A control (quantity priority control) is performed to draw in the symbols that increase the possibility of winning (among the combination of multiple symbols that can be won, the possibility of winning is the highest) among the symbols that are arranged.

Next, FIG. 6 is a reel arrangement list of the reel-type game machine in this embodiment. As shown in the figure, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 each have 20 frames (numbers 0 to 19), and the symbols are "Black Seven", "White Seven", and " Sheep", "Blank", "Bell", "Replay A", "Replay B", "Watermelon A", "Watermelon B", and "Cherry". Here, "blank" is a symbol included in a symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination like other symbols. As a combination, for example, "watermelon B, replay A, blank" is replay 02. The configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the types of symbols are increased, decreased, or changed.

7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of symbol combinations for each conditional device, and as will be described later, any Either one of the symbol combinations is configured to be stopped and displayed on the effective line (one line described above). Even if the symbols of the same kind are not aligned on the activated lines, the same symbols are arranged in a row on lines other than the activated lines from the player's point of view (in the case of watermelon, the symbols are arranged in the middle row). It is configured so that three watermelon patterns are aligned in a straight line on any one of the reels, such as horizontally aligned. In addition, in the present embodiment, the combination of symbols for a type 1 BB role (which is a role product continuous operation device related to a so-called type 1 special role product, but may be hereinafter simply referred to as a BB role) is combined, 1 type BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A, ends with more than 264 payouts) "sheep, sheep, sheep" and 1 type BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B, 132 sheets ``Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven'', which will end when more than 132 payouts are paid out), and ``White Seven, White Seven, It has three pattern combinations with White Seven. In the present embodiment, when the type 1 BB role is won and the BB is executed (the character is activated), during the execution of the BB, in all the games during the BB, one The lottery table is referred to, and a winning combination other than the accessory (small combination, replay combination) is drawn (a method that does not switch the table to be referred to when the combination is selected during the execution of one BB). , and hereinafter may be referred to as an all-JACIN type). The format of the type 1 BB combination is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the table to be referred to in the combination lottery can be switched during execution of one BB. In addition, when the RT state is "RT1", when the symbol combination corresponding to the 14th to 16th replay 04 is stopped and displayed, it is configured to shift to RT0 (for details of the RT state, described later). Since "RT0" is an RT state that is more disadvantageous to the player than "RT1", the transition from "RT1" to "RT0" is sometimes referred to as falling. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to No. 17, which is to be replayed 05, is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. When the corresponding symbol combination for replay 05 is stop-displayed, "white seven" can be stop-displayed in the lower stages of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). In addition, when the pushing order bell, which is the conditional device of "winning-A1" to "winning-A6" described later, is won, the reels are stopped in the most advantageous pushing order for the player, and the 21st to 27th Symbol combinations corresponding to ``winning 01'' to ``winning 03'' are stopped and displayed, and 11 game medals are paid out. , 39 to 56, the symbol combinations of "winning 08" to "winning 11" are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In addition, "-" in the figure indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. If the bell is stop-displayed above, 11 game medals can be acquired regardless of which symbols are stop-displayed on the active line of the middle reel M52.

Next, FIG. 10 is a condition device list in this embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, the condition device number is called the winning number, and the condition device number may be called the winning number hereinafter. In this embodiment, the replay combination is provided from replay-A to replay-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6), and the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53 Accordingly, the replay combination to be stopped and displayed is configured to be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the rightmost column "Condition Device", a plurality of The third column from the right is "Condition Device (Name)", which is configured so that the type of condition device can be stopped and displayed, and the condition devices with the same winning number among the plurality of types of condition devices are shown in the items. Specifically, for example, in the "replay-A" condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, according to the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53, 01", "Replay 02", and "Replay 03" can be stop-displayed. In addition, "condition device (name)" may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a conditional device related to a replay such as "replay 01" may be referred to as a replay combination, and a conditional device such as "win 01" in which game medals are paid out upon winning may be referred to as a minor combination. A conditional device in which BB is started by a stop display such as "Type 1 BB-A" is sometimes referred to as a BB role. In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB hand and the small hand are won in duplicate, and in such a case, the symbols corresponding to the won small hand are stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at positions where the symbols can be displayed, the symbols corresponding to the BB win are not stopped and displayed, and the symbols corresponding to the small win are stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbols are not stop-displayed (cannot be retracted), the symbols corresponding to the small win are not stop-displayed and the symbols corresponding to the BB win are not displayed. is configured to stop displaying. Specifically, for example, if you win the "1 type BB-B + winning-C" which is the condition device of the winning number 21, the cherry that is "winning 12" or "winning 13" and the "1 type BB -B" can be stopped. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of left reel M51→middle reel M52→right reel M53, (1) at the first stop, symbol numbers 0 to 4 (FIG. 6 ) is positioned, symbol number 4 corresponding to "win 12" stops on the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. And regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "win 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, "win 13" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol numbers 6, 11, or 16 corresponding to . (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are positioned on the upper stage of the left reel M51 in the first stop, "1" is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to the seed BB-B" stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing when the pattern numbers 14 to 18 are positioned in the middle row of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, "1" is displayed in the middle row of the middle reel M52. The right stop button D43 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol number 18 corresponding to the seed BB-B" is stopped and then the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are positioned on the lower stage of the right reel M53 at the third stop. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to the "type 1 BB-B" is stopped on the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stop-displayed. (3-3) In the second stop, when the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing when the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are positioned in the middle row of the middle reel M52, "1" is displayed in the middle row of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to the seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and none of the conditional devices are stopped and displayed.

Next, the "role" item shows what kind of role the "condition device (name)" has, and the "normal replay" corresponding to the winning number 1 is Regardless of the order of pressing the stop button, it is a conditional device related to the replay in which the replay combination that does not shift to the RT state is stopped and displayed. This is a conditional device related to the replay in which a replay combination whose state does not change is stopped and displayed. The range of symbol numbers 18 to 2, the range of symbol numbers 9 to 13 on the middle reel M52, and the range of symbol numbers 5 to 10 on the left reel M51 are located at the bottom of each reel. By operating the button, "White Seven" is stop-displayed in the lower row of the right reel M53, the middle reel M52 and the left reel M51. there is In addition, in the game where you won the replay-B and won the AT extra lottery, you won the AT extra lottery by executing the effect (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "White Seven" by pressing backward. It is configured to notify the player of the fact. The "forward press black 7 matching replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a conditional device related to replay in which replay hands that do not transition to the RT state are stopped and displayed regardless of the order of pressing the stop button, but the forward press ( The reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53), the range of symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing when the range of symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located at the bottom of each reel, "Black Seven" is displayed on the bottom of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. is displayed in a stopped state, and the black sevens appear to be arranged in the lower row from the player's point of view. In addition, in the game where you won the replay-C and won the AT extra lottery, you won the AT extra lottery by executing the effect (details will be described later) that instructs you to aim for "Black Seven" by pressing forward. It is configured to notify the player of the fact.

In addition, "RT maintenance RP1** (three options)" corresponding to the winning number 4 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated). ), it is a conditional device in which the replay combination to be stopped and displayed can be different, and when the first stop reel is the left reel M51, replay 01, replay 02, or replay 03 in which the RT state does not shift. is stop-displayed, and when the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stop-displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP*1* (3 options)" corresponding to the winning number 5 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the middle reel M52, the replay 03 to which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the left reel M51 or the right reel M53 is set as the stop reel, the replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. In addition, "RT maintenance RP**1 (three choices)" corresponding to the winning number 6 determines whether the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53 (which stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the right reel M53, replay 01 or replay 03 to which the RT state does not shift is displayed as a stop display. When the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, a replay 04 in which the RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are conditional devices in which the winning small combination can be different depending on which of the six options the reel stop order is set. For example, "left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3", and in the case of "123", stop in the pressing order of "left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53". For example, in the case of "Winner A-1" (winning number 7), "123" = "Left→Middle→Right" is stopped in order (the correct order is pressed) to obtain the maximum number of wins. The symbol combination of "winner 01" that can obtain 11 game medals is stopped and displayed. Incidentally, "123", etc. of the "push order bell 123" indicates the push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum winning number can be obtained for the winning number. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pressing order other than the pressing order in which the maximum winning number can be acquired, that is, when the pressing order is not correct, one coin is paid out. In the state related to AT such as "AT state", navigate the pressing order of the replay role and the pressing order of the bell (display the pressing order for the highest profit on the pressing order display device D270), and enter the "normal game state" A plurality of game states with different profit rates for the player can be created such that the pressing order is not navigated to states related to AT such as . Incidentally, the state regarding AT will be described later.

In addition, the "common bell" corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of winning medals, even if any of the winning 04 to winning 07 stops. It is a conditional device that can be obtained, and is sometimes called a bell that can be pressed in any order. In addition, "Watermelon A" corresponding to winning number 15 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in a parallel line. At 14, three watermelons A are arranged in the middle of each reel. Also, "Watermelon B" corresponding to winning number 16 is configured so that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) can be easily arranged in a diagonal line. At 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward to the right, such as watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. In addition, the "BB medium weak rare small combination (diagonal bell alignment)" corresponding to the winning number 17 is a conditional device in which three bells can be aligned on the active line. It is a condition device in which the AT addition lottery is executed by doing. In addition, the ``BB medium strong rare small combination (with V-shaped bells)'' corresponding to the winning number 18 is a conditional device in which bells can be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel M51, the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and the upper stage of the right reel M53. , Details will be described later, but it is a conditional device in which an AT extra lottery is executed by winning during BB.

Next, in the item of "bonus winning information", numerical values from 0 to 3 are assigned to each winning number. In this embodiment, the bonus winning information is set to 0 for winning numbers that do not include a bonus (BB role), and the winning number that includes a bonus (BB role) is a winning number (19) that includes one type of BB-A. 1 for bonus winning information, 2 for winning numbers (20 to 23) including one type BB-B, 3 for bonus winning information for winning numbers (24 to 27) including one type BB-C and By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information relating to the presence or absence of which BB has been established and which BB combination has been won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "winning/replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are distributed for each winning number. In this embodiment, the winning/replay winning information is set to 0 for the winning numbers (winning number 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the replay combination and the minor combination. , 1 to 18 winning/replay winning information is sorted for each condition device with respect to the winning number including the replay combination or minor combination. When the main control board M stores the winning/replay winning information, it is possible to store the information as to which replay combination or minor combination has been won. The details of the winning/replay winning information will be described later.

Next, in the item of "effect group number", numerical values from 0 to 11 are distributed for each winning number. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. Details of the effect group number will be described later.

Next, in the item of "ball-out group number", numerical values from 0 to 13 are assigned to each winning number. A main control board M stores a payout ball group number, and the stored payout ball group number is used when executing a lottery (for example, an AT lottery, an AT additional lottery) for an AT, thereby executing a lottery process for an AT. It is possible to reduce the amount of programs and data to be used. Incidentally, even if the conditional device with the payout ball group number of 0 is won, the AT lottery and the AT additional lottery are not executed. On the other hand, when a conditional device whose payout ball group number is not 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT additional lottery can be executed. Details of the payout ball group number will be described later. In addition, even when a conditional device with a payout group number of 0 is won, the AT lottery or AT additional lottery may be executed. It is preferable to configure the lottery result to always be a loss (non-win) when the AT lottery or the AT extra lottery is executed by winning the conditional device that becomes 0.

Next, FIG. 11 shows the lottery probability that the winning numbers (also referred to as conditional device numbers and winning hands) and bonuses (also referred to as BB and BB hands) related to the minor winning combination and the replaying combination in this embodiment are determined by the winning combination lottery means. (also referred to as winning rate). In the figure, the winning rate of winning numbers is illustrated.

First, the lottery probabilities at "RT0", "RT1" and "RT2" when the BB is not activated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of the winning combination (particularly, the replay combination) may differ depending on the RT state. rate) is higher in the case of "RT1" than in other RT states. In addition, "replay 04" (so-called fall replay role) that can be stopped and displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6, and in a situation where it is "RT1" and no bonus has been won, the symbol corresponding to the replay role When the combination is stopped and displayed, it will shift to "RT0") is mainly won in "RT1" and almost does not appear in "RT0". In addition, in "RT2", "replay 04" which can be stop-displayed at winning numbers 4 to 6 can appear, but even if "re-game 04" is stop-displayed, the RT state does not shift. In addition, when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed in "RT1", it has shifted to "RT0", that is, a fall effect (for example, the effect display device S40) is an effect to notify that the RT state has fallen , and "Replay 04" is stop-displayed at "RT0", the falling effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, even though "replay 04" is stopped and displayed, the fall performance is not executed, so that the player can recognize that he or she has won the BB, and enjoyment of the game. can enhance sexuality. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the effect sound output by the stop display of "replay 04" and the replay role other than "replay 04" (for example, "replay" in which the RT state does not shift) 01") may be configured to be different from the effect sound output when "Replay 04") is stopped and displayed. can be configured easily. In addition, a state related to AT in which push order navigation does not occur (for example, "normal game state", sometimes referred to as non-AT game state) and a state related to AT in which push order navigation can occur (for example, " It may stay in "RT1" in both cases of "AT in progress state" and "AT gaming state". At this time, when a winning number that may shift (fall) from "RT1" to "RT0" is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall in the non-AT game state is played. It may be configured not to output based on the operation of the start lever D50. As a result, it is possible to shift the game state without letting the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to "RT0" in the non-AT game state. On the other hand, when in the AT game state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the replay combination in which the RT state does not fall is stopped and displayed. forward navigation). As a result, the player can operate the stop button D40 after the notification of the special effect sound, being careful not to drop the RT state. In addition, "Replay 05" (replay role that can inform that you have won the AT extra lottery when stopped in AT state) that can be stopped and displayed at winning number 2 or 3 is mainly "RT1". It appears in , and almost does not appear in other RT states. It should be noted that the state transition regarding the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination that serves as a replay combination will be described later. Further, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can execute the pressing order navigation for notifying the player of the most advantageous reel stopping order. . There is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. Also, in this embodiment, the bonus is configured to overlap with the small winning combination, and overlaps with part of the watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Specifically, winning numbers 21 to 23 and winning numbers 25 to 27 are conditional devices in which bonuses and minor wins overlap.

In addition, in the situation of "RT2", since the BB is won and the BB is not activated, the BB wins of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (single wins that do not overlap with the minor wins) BB hand, sometimes referred to as single BB hand or single BB), the new winning of the BB hand becomes invalid, and only the winning of the minor hand becomes valid. Specifically, for example, in the case of "RT2" and winning (carried over) the 1st class BB-A, if the winning number 24 "1st class BB-C" is won , the type 1 BB-C associated with the winning number 24 becomes invalid. In other words, the situation is the same as when winning the lottery number 0 "losing". It should be noted that the type 1 BB-A carried over continues to be elected. In addition, in the situation of "RT2", the BB is won and the BB is not activated, so the minor and BB wins of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 If a duplicate conditional device is won, the new winning of the BB combination becomes invalid, and only the winning of the minor combination becomes valid. Specifically, for example, under the condition that it is "RT2" and has won (carried over) 1st class BB-A, winning number 21 "1st class BB-B + Prize-C" was won In this case, the type 1 BB-B associated with the winning number 21 is invalidated, and only winning-C is validated. In other words, the situation is the same as when winning the winning number 14 “winning-C”. It should be noted that the type 1 BB-A carried over continues to be elected. In addition, the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small combination, and may overlap with a part of the replay combination. For example, part of the replaying hands of winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus hand. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the conditional device including the RT transition replay (replay combination to which the RT state can be shifted), the bonus is won even when the conditional device including the RT transition replay is won. Even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so it is possible to make the player have expectations. Note that, in the case of such a configuration, even if the RT transition replay is stopped and displayed, the RT state is controlled so as not to transition. As a result, the player should be in the RT state (transition to the RT state with a relatively low replay probability), but the replay probability is not low (frequently winning replays), etc. Therefore, it is possible to heighten interest in the game such that there is a high possibility of winning the bonus.

Next, the lottery probability in "one kind of BB-A, B, and C" when the BB is activated will be described in detail. In this embodiment, during the BB operation, the winning number 13 "common bell", the winning number 17 "BB medium weak rare small combination (diagonal bell alignment)" and the winning number 18 "BB medium strong rare small combination" (V-shaped bell alignment)" can be won, and during the operation of the BB won in the "AT state", "BB medium weak rare small combination (diagonal bell alignment)" can be won. Alternatively, when winning the "BB medium-strong rare small combination (with V-shaped bell)", an AT additional lottery is executed (details will be described later).

In addition, the upper part of the figure shows an example of the appearance rate of a minor combination when the set value is 1, and in the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. , and as shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value (6 levels in this example). Specifically, the number of entries in setting 1 is 3204, the number of entries in setting 2 is 3404, the number of entries in setting 3 is 3604, the number of entries in setting 4 is 3904, the number of entries in setting 5 is 4204, the number of entries in setting 6 is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. With this configuration, for example, when a player progresses a game while counting the number of appearances of common bells (the number of wins), the common bells are frequently won, thereby increasing The game can be played while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Also, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. In addition, although the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to differ depending on the set value, the AT lottery, the AT additional lottery, and the high-probability state transition lottery, which will be described later, are not executed depending on the winning of the common bell. It is configured so as not to affect the status transition lottery (also referred to as AT lottery).

In addition, the middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when there is push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as "AT state", the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of payouts per game in the case of It is the ratio of the number of paid out medals to the number of inserted medals when the game is played with three bets. The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). In addition, the average number of payouts per game is "the sum of the number of re-playing positions (the sum of the number of positions for the winning numbers 1 to 6) x the number of payouts in the re-playing role (3 cards) + small winning combination (11 cards). Sum of numbers (minor combination appearance rate) of winning numbers (sum of numbers for winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts for small combination (11-card combination) (11 cards) / total sum of all numbers (65536) )” can be calculated as follows. Also, the expected increase/decrease value of medals per game can be calculated as "average number of payouts per game/number of inserted medals per game (3)". In addition, the number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted when playing one game) is 3, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, an increase or decrease in medals per game is expected. It is configured to have a value greater than one. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the medal increase/decrease expected value per game is relatively the largest in "RT1". It should be noted that the numerical values in the figure do not take into consideration the increase or decrease in medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game progresses in a situation where push order navigation occurs (when operated in the optimum operation mode, also referred to as when operated in the advantageous operation mode), medals increase in "RT1". In "RT0" and "RT2", although not shown, the expected increase/decrease in medals per game is less than 1 under the condition that the push order navigation does not occur. will decrease. In addition, in the present embodiment, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game is greater than 1 when there is push order navigation even in "RT0" or "RT2", but it is not limited to this. ” or “RT2”, the medal increase/decrease expected value per game may be smaller than 1 when there is push order navigation. It should be noted that when the symbol combination for the replay role is stopped and displayed, the number of bets (3 symbols) in the previous game is actually automatically bet. Calculations are made on the assumption that 3 cards are paid out. One game may be called one game.

In addition, the average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is "RT0", and is 4.737915039 when the RT state is "RT1". is "RT2", it is 3.67137146. In addition, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is "RT0", and is 1.579305013 when the RT state is "RT1". is 1.223790487 when is "RT2", and when there is push order navigation, the RT state of "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. Note that the numerical value is a value when the setting is 1. It should be noted that the winning number and bonus lottery probability for the above-mentioned small winning combination and replaying combination are only examples, and for example, the expected medal increase/decrease value per game in "RT2" where BB is internally established (when there is push order navigation (expected medal increase/decrease value) may be configured to be less than one. With such a configuration, in the case where the push order navigation occurs and when it is "RT2" (when the BB is internally established), when the bonus is not arranged in the game in which the bonus can be arranged However, the number of medals you have will gradually decrease, and if you are in a situation where push order navigation occurs and it is "RT2" (when BB is internally established), you can intentionally It is possible to prevent a strategy that increases the number of medals possessed by not arranging the bonuses in the game. Specifically, it is preferable to design the probability of losing in “RT2” to be higher than the winning probability of all small winnings (winning-A1 to winning-I) that win in “RT2”. It is preferable to set the winning probability of the replay role so that it is designed to It is preferable to design so that it does not become too much). In addition, in "RT2" of this example, the total winning probability of all small winnings is 18784/65536, the total winning probability of all replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of losing is It is 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and is designed so that the probability of losing is higher than the total winning probability of all small wins.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-A is assigned the same numerical value of 40 to all settings 1-6. In addition, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-C is assigned the same numerical value of 160 for all settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, the appearance rate of type BB-B is 160 for setting 1, 180 for setting 2, 200 for setting 3, and 200 for setting 4. 220 is assigned, setting 5 is assigned 240, and setting 6 is assigned 270. That is, the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B differs in the numbers assigned depending on the set values. In this way, 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C are BBs with no set difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C are sometimes referred to as BB with no set difference and bonus with no set difference) 1 type BB-B functions as BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B is sometimes called BB with setting difference or bonus with setting difference). In addition, regardless of the RT state, the appearance rate of 1 type BB-A, 1 type BB-B, and 1 type BB-C is uniform (between "RT0" and "RT1"). Note that the appearance rate of type 1 BB-A and type BB-C (total) is the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rate of type 1 BB-B (total) differs depending on the set value. In addition, the total appearance rate of 1 type BB-B is the same even if the set value is different, but the appearance rate for each winning number may be configured to be different depending on the set value. Even when configured, the type BB-B may be referred to as BB with setting difference.

Next, a schematic electrical configuration of the reel-type game machine P according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the reel-type game machine according to the present embodiment has a main control board M for controlling the progress of the game, a sub-control board S, a door board D, a reel board K, a power supply board E, a relay board IN, A setting key switch M20, a setting/reset button M30, etc. are connected so as to be able to exchange data. The solid line portion in the figure indicates the movement related to data exchange, and the dashed line portion in the figure indicates the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this. For example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN or the door board D without passing through the main control board.

A main control board (also referred to as main control means, main board, main control means, main board, or main game section) M is a board that governs the progress of the entire game performed in the reel-type game machine P. A main control chip C is mounted on the main control board M, and a CPUC 100 (also referred to as CPUMC), a built-in ROMC 110, a built-in RAMC 120, etc. are connected to the main control chip C via a bus so that data can be exchanged with each other. It has been installed. Then, the main control board M receives a signal or the like indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and controls the sub control board S, the door board D, and the drum board. By outputting a control command (or a control signal) to K or the like, the operation of these various boards is controlled {for example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information ), the sub-control board S can execute push order navigation on the effect display device S40}.

Also, the sub-control board (sometimes referred to as sub-control means, sub-board, sub-control means, sub-board, sub-game part) S also has a sub-control chip SC mounted thereon, like the main control board M described above. The sub control chip SC is provided with a CPUSC 100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, which are connected by a bus so as to be able to exchange data with each other. Also, the sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a reel backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. is connected. Here, the spin drum backlight S30 is a light provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub control board S analyzes the control command received from the main control board M and outputs drive signals to various LED lamps S10, speaker S20, effect display device S40, spinning drum backlight S30, etc., thereby enabling various is performing. In addition, in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the player can select nine ranges of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel, the upper, middle, and lower stages of the middle reel, and the upper, middle, and lower stages of the right reel. A plurality of LEDs are provided as the reel backlight S30 so as to be individually identifiable. As an example, the LED corresponding to the upper row of the left reel lights up and all the other LEDs go out, so that the player can identify that the upper row of the left reel is lit up. Further, in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example, when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the player can change the lighting mode of the spinning drum backlight S30 to notify the player that the predetermined symbol combination has been stopped and displayed. back lamp effect (sometimes referred to as backlight effect) suggested to can be executed.

On the door substrate D, there are the aforementioned insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, the stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and the start button for starting the rotation of the reel M50. A lever D50, a checkout button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) or inserted game medals to end the game, various display panels D70 for displaying the game status {not shown, but the above-mentioned The input number display lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the replay lamp D290, the input possible lamp D300, the special game state display device D250, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270, the credit amount display device D200, the advantageous section display unit YH, etc.}, door switch D80 for judging whether the front door is open or closed, canceling errors, and changing set values, game medals judged to be unsuitable after being inserted (or , and other foreign matter) to the outlet D240. Further, the door board D is connected to the main control board M described above so that data can be exchanged. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the checkout button D60, etc., provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal relating to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. In addition, a signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s detects the passage of game medals is also supplied to the main control board M through the door board D.

Also connected to the reel board K are a reel motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a reel sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like. The spinning drum substrate K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the spinning drum motor K10 while detecting the rotational position of the reel M50 by the spinning drum sensor K20. there is Further, in the reel-type game machine of the present embodiment, a so-called step motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used as the reel motor K10. The step motor is set to 480 steps as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols of approximately uniform size are set on each reel (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53), and the number of steps corresponding to one symbol is is set to 24 steps (=480/20). There is no problem even if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

Also, the medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and based on the control signal from the main control board M, pays out a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 10). perform the action to release. The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for judging whether or not medals have been paid out normally and for measuring the number of game medals paid out, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotating is connected.

These various control boards and the power consumed by the boards are supplied from a power supply board E (a board that controls the presence or absence of power supply by means of a power switch E10). In FIG. 12, the dashed arrow indicates how power is supplied from the power supply board E. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control board M and the sub control board S are directly supplied with power from the power supply board E, and the various boards (door board D, reel board K, relay board IN) are Power is supplied through the main control board M. A predetermined amount of AC voltage (for example, 100 V) is supplied to the power supply board E, and after this power is converted into a specified DC voltage, it is supplied to each control board and board.

The main control board M also includes a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change settings), and a setting/reset key switch M20 for changing setting values and canceling errors. Button M30, is connected. The main control board M also includes reel control means for controlling rotation and stopping of the reels M50 (left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53), and an "AT in progress state" which is a state related to AT advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing an AT transition lottery for shifting to , and an AT add-on lottery for increasing the number of AT remaining games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can be stayed in the "AT state". and an AT addition lottery means to be executed.

13 to 36 are flow charts showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in this embodiment.

The flowchart mainly consists of processing steps (indicated by rectangles), judgments (indicated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (indicated by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, etc. ing. Further, when the details of the processing steps are shown in a separate flowchart, those referring to the separate flowchart are shown as subroutines (indicated by rectangles with double lines on the left and right sides). . Here, in the development stage of a game machine, game machines with different specifications are sometimes developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (subroutines that are not normally used) are configured not to be left behind, thereby preventing execution of processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraud.

First, FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the reel-type game machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, in step 1000, after turning on the power of the reel-type game machine P, in step 1002, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes timer interrupt initialization (here, timer interrupt is started). Instead, it only sets the type of timer interrupt, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, the flowchart related to timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes serial communication settings (speed, data length, data transmission method settings) etc. as main control chip C function settings. Next, at step 1006, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the head address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, checks whether the data stored in the built-in RAMC 120 is held correctly), and generates power-off recovery data. Next, at step 1010, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, at step 1014, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

If Yes at step 1014, at step 1016, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off flag in the RAM (turned on at step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (at step 1006). check result) to determine whether or not the power failure recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes at step 1016, at step 1020, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M restores the stack pointer based on the data relating to the stack pointer saved in the process at power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the RAM area and determines whether the data related to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes at step 1036, at step 1038, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes reading of the input port. Next, at step 1040 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set at step 1002 . Next, at step 1042, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completion flag, and returns to the power-off processing in accordance with the returned stack pointer.

If No at step 1016, at step 1024, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, at step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

Further, if No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, to be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area ). Next, at step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing, which will be described later.

If No at step 1014, at step 1028, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on/off the power-off flag in the RAM (turned on at step 1904) and the checksum state of all RAMs (step 1904). 1006) to determine whether the power failure recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes at step 1028, at step 1030, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding the storage area for storing the set values (set value data) in the RAM. For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034 . The range not included in the RAM initialization range is not limited to the storage area for storing set values (set value data), but includes the total number of games in the "advantageous section", the total number of game sections (advantageous section + Normal section) The number of games, the result of calculating the rate of staying in the "advantageous section", etc. are also ranges that are not included in the initialization range of the RAM. By configuring in this way, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the "advantageous section" in the game (advantageous section ratio). Further, the processing for calculating the advantageous section ratio is configured to be calculated at the timing when the unit game ends. Also, the advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, the order of "advantageous section ratio -> continuous character ratio per 6000 games -> character ratio per 6000 games -> cumulative continuous character ratio -> cumulative character ratio" is repeated at intervals of 5 seconds. Is displayed. In addition, the continuous role ratio is "the number of payouts while RB is operating / the total number of payouts", and the "number of payouts while RB, CB, or SB is operating". / total number of payouts”. On the other hand, if No at step 1028, at step 1032, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including the storage area for storing the set values (set value data) in the RAM. Set (for example, set in the register area) and proceed to step 1034 . Next, at step 1034 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes the RAM area within the initialization range determined at step 1030 or step 1032 . Next, at step 1100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process, which will be described later.

Although not shown, the initial value (value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is preferably configured so as not to be the value at which the special game is executed. (In order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the special game execution determination process is executed due to noise or fraud immediately after the start of the program processing). In addition, although not shown, when storing random numbers such as winning random numbers in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured, and the bytes storing the information related to the random numbers have It is preferable to store only information related to the random number (other information such as various timer values is not stored) (when operating other data stored in the same byte, noise etc. (to prevent information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flow chart of the setting change device control process related to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also called a setting change mode. First, at step 1102, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes it with the start address of the process). Next, at step 1104, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, at step 1106, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the set values (set value data) are managed as 1 to 6, it is necessary to initialize the RAM and return the set value to "1" when it becomes "0". Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the setting value (setting value data) as 0 to 5, the correction processing of the setting value (setting value data) after executing the RAM initialization (step 1106 and processing of step 1108) can be made unnecessary, and it is possible to shorten the processing time and reduce the processing capacity. If Yes at step 1106, at step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the set value (set value data) to a predetermined value (for example, 0=the most disadvantageous value for the player), and proceeds to step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, if No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110 as well. Next, at step 1110, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays an error display LED (for example, payout number display device D270) indicating that the setting change device is in operation (for example, "88" for lighting all segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the setting display LED (not shown) (the display related to the set value is a numerical value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 transition to As described above, the number-of-payouts display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. Because of such a configuration, for example, when a failure occurs in a part of the 7-segment LED (there is a segment that cannot be turned on), incorrect information may be reported when announcing the pressing order. could be. In order to prevent such a situation, all the 7 segments of the payout number display device D270 are lit "88" while the setting change device is in operation. It is possible to prevent giving benefits. In addition, as a configuration related to the display of setting values (setting value data), a setting value display RAM for storing data obtained by adding 1 to a setting value (setting value data) in a storage area for storing setting values. It may be configured to have an area and refer to the storage area to display the set value. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1110, a process for transmitting a command indicating that the sub control board S is in the setting change mode is executed.

Next, at step 1112, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting/reset button M30 has been switched from OFF to ON. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (if the set value (set value data) exceeds 5 as a result of addition, , the set value (set value data) is 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1112 , the process proceeds to step 1116 . Next, at step 1116, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the start lever D50 has been switched from OFF to ON. If No in step 1116, the process proceeds to step 1112, and the processing of steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. If Yes at step 1116, at step 1118, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has been switched from ON to OFF. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, if Yes at step 1118, at step 1120, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (not shown) that the operation of the setting change device has ended, and turns off the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is erased, and the game progress control process of step 1200 is performed. Although not shown, after executing the process of step 1120, a process for transmitting a command indicating to end the setting change mode to the sub control board S side is executed.

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of unrecoverable error handling according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in other flowcharts). First, in step 1302, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits interrupts (the flow chart relating to timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not executed thereafter). Next, at step 1304, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the output port address and the number of output ports. Next, at step 1306, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6 in this example, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors). Next, at step 1308, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, display output to various LEDs and drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, at step 1310, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the output to each output port is completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (some error has occurred when executing this process), and is repeated, and when the power supply voltage drops, a reset signal is input and the operation ends. (That is, since it enters into an infinite loop, it does not accept any operation prompting return). If No in step 1310, the process proceeds to step 1306. FIG. Note that the processing of steps 1306 to 1310 is processing for clearing the output to the LED/motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, the information regarding the error and the progress of the game at the time of error occurrence are transmitted to the hall computer). (It is possible to output to

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first game) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 1202, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the stack pointer (initializes it with the top address of the process). Next, at step 1203, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the data in the RAM area necessary for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, the winning line, etc.). In step 1203, the data used in the previous game {for example, condition device number (winning number), effect group number, instruction information} are cleared (data "0" for clearing the RAM address). data) is also included in the RAM. It should be noted that the condition device number, effect group number, instruction information, etc. may be overwritten with the number selected when the next game is executed without clearing. Next, at step 1204, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, "RT0" etc.) in the game (sets the RT state determined at step 1704 in FIG. 27). Next, at step 1205, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) regarding the RT state set at step 1204. FIG. Note that the process of setting the RT state may be executed at step 1704 in FIG. Also, in step 1704, a command related to the RT state (a command to the sub-side) may be set. Further, when the RT state is transmitted to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit it, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the "advantageous section". Next, in step 1206, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the AT-related state (for example, "AT state" etc.) in the game (steps 1420, 1429 in FIG. 21, steps 1435 in FIG. 22, Step 1439, step 1443, step 1444-3, step 1444-4 of FIG. 23 set the state for the AT determined). Next, at step 1207, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub-side) regarding the AT state set at step 1206. FIG. 21, step 1438 of FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 of FIG. 23. Further, when the state regarding AT is transmitted to the sub side, it is not always necessary to transmit, and the state regarding AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is the "advantageous section". Next, at step 1208, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the game interval (for example, "advantageous interval") in the game (the game interval determined at steps 3510, 3516, and 3520 in FIG. 31 is set). Next, at step 1208-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the game section set at step 1208. Next, at step 1209, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, it includes a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) that stores the medals overflowing from the medal dispensing device H, and two full detection electrodes DE (details will be described later) that can enter the medal auxiliary tank HS. It is determined by the conduction/non-conduction of the current by (doing) (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is judged to be full). If Yes in step 1209 , go to step 1218 .

On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the full medal error flag (for example, updates the full medal error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). ). Next, at step 1212, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the error number corresponding to the medal full error with the 7-segment LED (for example, the accumulation display LED or the acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been canceled (for example, if the current from the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS is non-conducting and the set/ (whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and step 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214 , the process proceeds to step 1212 . Next, at step 1218, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M permits reception of medal insertion (in the next game of the replaying role, the insertion operation is automatically executed), and the next process (step 1220 processing). Here, in step 1218, blocker D100 turn-on processing (processing for forming a medal flow path) is performed. Specifically, when a replay combination is established in the previous game, on condition that the current accumulated number (credits) is less than a predetermined value (50 credits in this example), turn-on processing of the blocker D100 is performed. Execute. In other words, when the current number of stored credits (credits) is a predetermined value, the blocker D100 is not turned on. On the other hand, when the replay combination was not established in the previous game, the turn-on processing of the blocker D100 is uniformly executed. With this configuration, even if a replay combination is established, if the accumulated number (credits) does not reach a predetermined value, the game medals can be inserted, such as "RT1". When staying in the RT state (for example, "RT1") in which the probability of winning the replay role is higher than in the RT state, or when the replay role is difficult to recognize as a replay role by appearance (replay disguised as a small role: Even if a combination of bell-bell-bell and cherry on the left reel stops on the invalid line, the player can play the game with good rhythm (without discomfort).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the game progress control process (second game) relating to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 1220, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not game medals have been betted or saved (credits do not exist). If Yes at step 1220, at step 1221, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, the condition is satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on). Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the setting display LED (although not shown, it may be a payout amount display device D270, a credit amount display device D200, and an input amount display lamp D210). The value is displayed (transition to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. When the setting change mode transition condition is satisfied, a process for transmitting a command indicating to start the setting change mode to the sub control board S side, and when the setting change mode end condition is satisfied, the setting change mode is executed. is executing processing to send a command indicating that the In the case of No at step 1220 or step 1221, at step 1224, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes management relating to insertion of game medals and settlement. Next, at step 1225, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M confirms the number of acceptable game medals. Next, at step 1226, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. In the case of Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is ON (in this embodiment, medal insertion is It has two insertion sensors for detection, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). In the case of Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (first input sensor D20s or second input sensor D20s or second input sensor D30s). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that the received one game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). In the case of Yes at step 1230, at step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that one normal game medal has been inserted. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the credit is the upper limit (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum (3 in this example). is determined, and when it is determined as Yes, the blocker D100 is controlled to be OFF (a state in which no medal flow path is formed). If No in step 1230 , the process of step 1230 is repeated.

Next, at step 1232, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the settlement button D60 has been operated. In the case of Yes at step 1232, at step 1233, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there are any remaining credits or bet game medals. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and the game is played. Execute payout of one medal. Next, at step 1236, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in this embodiment, the sensor for detecting the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes in step 1236 , the process proceeds to step 1247 . Here, although not clearly stated in the flow chart, if the previous game was a replay role, only the remaining number of credits is subject to settlement.

On the other hand, if No at step 1236, at step 1241, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the hopper has been driven (after the timing of the process at step 1234). . Specifically, whether or not the state in which it is determined that medals have not been paid out has continued for a predetermined period of time even though the hopper drive signal has been sent to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating). determine whether or not If Yes at step 1241, at step 1242, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the empty medal error flag (for example, updates the empty medal error flag area with a value corresponding to turning on). Next, at step 1244, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays an empty medal error. Next, at step 1245, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the empty medal error has been canceled (for example, whether or not the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the empty medal error flag (for example, updates the empty medal error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and step 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245 , the process proceeds to step 1244 .

Next, at step 1247, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal that was being paid out has been completed). In the case of Yes at step 1247 , at step 1248 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag and proceeds to step 1233 . If No in step 1241 or step 1247 , the process proceeds to step 1236 .

On the other hand, if No at step 1232 or step 1233, at step 1251, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the start lever D50 is valid (for example, a specified number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted). ) and whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. If Yes at step 1251, at step 1253, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If Yes at step 1253, at step 1254, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains a random number, turns off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (step 3600). On the other hand, if No at step 1253, at step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the set value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, at step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. If No in step 1251 , the process proceeds to step 1220 .

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 3600, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes internal lottery execution processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1259, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state of the AT is a state in which an AT additional lottery is possible. Here, in this example, the states related to the AT in which the AT addition lottery can be executed are "AT state", "addition specialization state", "specialization precursor state", and "advantageous BB state". In the "advantageous BB internal middle game", the AT counter value can be greater than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent the player from having an advantage in the "advantageous BB inside game" if the player dares not arrange the BB symbol combinations. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the AT extra lottery can be executed in the "advantageous BB inside game", and in the case of such a configuration, the AT extra lottery is won in the "advantageous BB inside game". It is also possible to notify the winning of the AT addition lottery at the timing when the BB ends, or the number of remaining AT games after the number of AT games has been added, without notifying the player immediately.

If Yes at step 1259 , at step 1500 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing for adding the number of games, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1400 . On the other hand, if the result of step 1259 is No, the process proceeds to step 1400 as well. In this game number addition execution process, it is possible to execute a lottery using a different lottery table according to the state of AT, but the lottery probability does not differ according to the set value (the same lottery table is used). a lottery) is preferred. Next, at step 1400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes AT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1450, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a condition device number management process, which will be described later.

Here, the states for the AT in this example are listed and detailed (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) A "low probability state" is a state in which an AT has not been won (the right to shift to an "AT state" has not been acquired) and a bonus combination has not been won. Note that the "low-probability state" is a so-called "normal state", so it may also be referred to as a "normal state." (2) “Normal BB internal game” is a state in which a BB role is won in a “low-probability state”, the BB role is not won, and the AT lottery is not won. (3) "Normal BB state" means that when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in a situation where the BB role is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, Alternatively, it is a state executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stop-displayed in the "normal BB internal game". (4) "High probability state" is a state in which the AT lottery has not been won (the right to shift to "AT state" has not been acquired) and a bonus combination has not been won. , is a state in which it is easier to win an AT than in the above-described “low probability state”. In addition, as will be described later, in the case of a new transition to the "high probability state", it is configured not to transition to the "low probability state" until the number of high securing obstacle games has passed (5) "AT state ' is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, if a continuation lottery (to be described later) is won, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter, and the "AT state" continues. is a state in which the player has acquired the right to shift to the "additional specialized state", which is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT in progress state". (7) "Additional specialization state" is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively more likely to be added than in the "AT in progress state". (8) “advantageous BB internal game” means winning the BB role in the “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, and the BB role is It is in a state of not winning a prize. (9) "Standby BB internal game" is a state in which the BB role is won in the "low probability state", the AT lottery is won with the BB role, and the BB role is not won. . (10) "advantageous BB state" means that a symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is won in the "high probability state", "AT state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state". A state executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the ``advantageous BB internal game'', or winning the BB role in the ``low probability state'', and , when the AT lottery is won with the BB role and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stop-displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stop-displayed in the ``waiting BB internal game''. It is a state that is executed when (12) "Restoration possible/impossible effect state" is a state related to the AT that is shifted when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the subsequent lottery, which will be described later, is not won. In the "state for effecting whether or not to revive", a revival lottery, which will be described later, is executed, and if the revival lottery is won, the state shifts to "AT state" (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the revival lottery is not performed. If you win, you will be moved to the "low probability state".

Next, at step 1550, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts rotating all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a pull-in point creation request (a request to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53, and the stop order (requested appropriately according to the stop position of other reels). If Yes in step 1261 - 1 , in step 1262 the CPUC 100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point and proceeds to step 1263 . On the other hand, if the answer to step 1261-1 is No, the process proceeds to step 1263 as well. In this way, in the "BB internal middle game", in the game in which the pressing order bell was won, the stop button was not stopped in the correct pressing order that resulted in 11 payouts (for example, in the case of winning-A1, Even when the stop buttons are not stopped in the order of "left → middle → right") (when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the incorrect answer), the reel stop control results in a symbol combination that results in 11 payouts. Designed to win. Next, at step 1263, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks whether reel stop reception is acceptable. Next, at step 1264, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any stop button (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If Yes at step 1264, at step 1265, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, if the result of step 1264 is No, the process proceeds to step 1266 as well. Next, at step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes all reel stop check processing. Next, at step 1267, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not all the reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) have stopped. If Yes at step 1267, at step 1268, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stop possible position data. Next, at step 1269, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (it is abnormal if it does not match the winning combination determined by the internal lottery). is determined to be). In step 1269, it is determined whether the combination of displayed symbols is normal or not. When the stop button is operated in an operation mode that allows the winning combination to win a prize, the position of the reel that actually stopped was not normal (the winning combination determined by an internal lottery Even if the winning combination does not appear to be stopped from the player's point of view, if the reel stop control is normally completed by processing inside the gaming machine, game medals based on the winning of the winning combination may be awarded. It is configured to perform payouts. If Yes in step 1269 , the process proceeds to step 1274 . On the other hand, if No at step 1269, at step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, at step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process proceeds to step 1261-1.

Next, at step 1274, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes payout processing of game medals according to winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a winning to pay out game medals {the game medals acquired by winning exceed the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). If so, the game medals are paid out}. In the case of Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven), and pays out one game medal. . Next, at step 1277, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that one game medal is being paid out). If Yes at step 1277 , the process proceeds to step 1286 .

On the other hand, if No at step 1277, at step 1279, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after driving the hopper (after the timing of the process at step 1276). . If Yes at step 1279, at step 1280, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the empty medal error flag (for example, updates the empty medal error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, at step 1281, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays an empty medal error display using the 7-segment LED. Next, at step 1282, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the empty medal error has been cleared (for example, whether or not the set/reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the empty medal error flag (for example, updates the empty medal error flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and step 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282 , the process proceeds to step 1281 .

Next, at step 1286, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal that was being paid out has been completed). If Yes at step 1286 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag at step 1288 and proceeds to step 1290 . If No in step 1279 or step 1286 , the process proceeds to step 1277 . Next, at step 1290, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning at step 1275 of Yes) has been completed. If Yes in step 1290 , the process proceeds to step 3400 . If No in step 1286, the process proceeds to step 1277; if No in step 1275, the process proceeds to step 3400;

Next, at step 3400, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes remaining game number management processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1700, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes RT state transition control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1750, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes AT state start control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 3500, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a game interval transition control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes game end processing (for example, clearing the number of bets, game state transition processing, etc.), and proceeds to the next processing (step 1202 processing).

Next, FIG. 19 is a flow chart of internal lottery execution processing related to the subroutine of step 3600 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table used when executing an internal lottery in which winning numbers and numbers to be compared with obtained random numbers are stored). and go to step 3604 . Next, at step 3604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains the winning number associated with the set internal lottery table address. Winning/replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. In addition, if a bonus and a minor winning combination are won at the same time, or a bonus and a replay winning combination are won at the same time, both the winning/replay winning information and the bonus winning information will be obtained from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, at step 3606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers that have the same payout ball group number and the same set number for comparison with the acquired random number. remembered. For example, the winning ball group number 2 includes 9 winning numbers 4 to 12, and the numbers are the same for the consecutive 3 winning numbers 4 to 6, which are the pushing order replay roles. Since the set numbers are the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the push order bell combination, the number of repetitions related to the push order replay combination is 3, and the push order bell is repeated. The number of repetitions related to the role is 6. The lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 4 to 6, which are the push-order replay roles, and the lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 7-12, which are the push-order bell roles, are a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, at step 3608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M obtains the payout ball group number associated with the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

Next, at step 3610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires set value data. Next, at step 3612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, at step 3614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the obtained random number exists in the internal lottery table retrieved this time). If Yes at step 3614, it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, so the internal lottery table address after that is not determined (lottery), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259). On the other hand, if No at step 3614, at step 3616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, at step 3618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining iteration count. If Yes in step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processing of steps 3610 to 3618 is repeatedly executed until the number of repetitions remaining is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No at step 3618, at step 3620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address associated with the next ball group number to be put out), proceeds to step 3604, and proceeds to step 3604. Execute the following processes. The specific processing of the internal lottery will be described later.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the number-of-games addition execution process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT-related state is the "AT in progress state", the "predictive state of specialization", or the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the payout ball group number related to the game is an AT extra combination (a winning number that can add the number of remaining AT games in the "AT state"). , and in this example, it is replay-B, replay-C, and win-D). If Yes in step 1504 , the process proceeds to step 1514 . Further, if No in step 1502, in other words, if the state regarding AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the payout ball group number regarding the game is a BB extra combination (" In "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can be added to the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, whether it is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I) judge. If Yes at step 1512 , go to step 1514 ; if No at step 1512 , go to step 1518 . If No at step 1504, at step 1506, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT-related state is the "additional specialized state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the payout ball group number for the game is a specialization middle extra role (in the "additional specialization state", the number of remaining AT games can be added and In the "AT state", it is a winning number that does not add the number of remaining AT games, and in this example, it is replay-A, replay-D1 to D3, winning-A1 to A6). (2, 13 in this example). If Yes in step 1508 , go to step 1514 . If No in step 1506 or step 1508 , the process proceeds to step 1518 .

Next, at step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the lottery table for the number of additional games when winning, and determines the number of AT additional games based on the ball-out group number related to the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined by which range the latched random number falls within). Determining the number of AT-added games is also referred to as executing an AT-added lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of AT additional games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a command (a command to the sub control board S side) related to the determined number of AT-added games, and when the sub control board S receives the command, It is possible to recognize whether or not AT game number addition has been executed and how many games the number of games to be added is set), and the process proceeds to step 1518 . In the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are the payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including bonuses, a lottery related to AT (AT lottery, AT additional lottery) can be executed. .

Here, the lottery table shown in the margin of the figure is an example of the lottery table for the number of additional games when winning. AT state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", and "advantageous BB state"). The number of AT additional games is determined by lottery from "0" to "300", and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. Incidentally, when "0" is determined, the number of AT remaining games does not increase (when "0" is determined, it may be referred to as non-winning in the AT additional lottery).

In addition, the average value (expected value) of the number of AT-additional games in the case of winning an additional role at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. In the case, {Number of games (600) x Number of AT games (0) + Number of games (100) x Number of games (10) + Number of games (300) x Number of games (30) + Number of games ( 24) x number of AT-added games (100)}/total number of entries (1024) = 12.1 (games).

Next, when the winning combination is Replay-B or Replay-C, {Set number (500)*AT additional game number (0)+Set number (200)*AT additional game number (50)+ Number of entries (300) x Number of AT games added (100) + Number of entries (24) x Number of AT games added (300)}/Total number of entries (1024) = 46.1 (games) be able to.

Next, when the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1 to D3, and Winning-A1 to A6, {number of games (300) x number of AT-added games (10) + number of games (600) x AT additional game number (30) + number of AT addition (124) x AT additional game number (50)}/total number of entries (1024) = 26.61 (games). In addition, when the winning combination is Replay-A or Replay-D1~D3, Winning-A1~A6, the number of AT games will be added only when the state regarding AT is "Additional specialized state". It's becoming

Next, when the winning combination is a BB medium-low rare combination, {set number (800) x AT additional game number (0) + set number (100) x AT additional game number (10) + set number (100 )*number of AT-added games (30)+number of entries (24)*number of AT-added games (100)}/total number of entries (1024)=6.3 (games).

Next, when the winning combination is the BB medium-strong rare combination, {set number (300)*AT additional game number (0)+set number (300)*AT additional game number (30)+set number (400 )*number of AT-added games (50)+number of entries (24)*number of AT-added games (300)}/total number of entries (1024)=35.4 (games).

In this embodiment, when the AT extra lottery is executed, the average value of the AT extra game count may vary depending on the type of winning combination. Mean values are configured not to differ. Here, when the configuration is such that the AT additional lottery is executed based on the winning number, for example, when the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are executed in the same process as the AT additional lottery, the winning number is 7. However, as in the present embodiment, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 can be determined by executing the AT addition lottery based on the payout ball group number. In the case of executing the same processing as the AT additional lottery in and, only by judging whether the payout ball group number is 2, the processing related to the AT additional lottery of either the winning number 7 or the winning number 8 is also executed. can be done.

Returning to the explanation of the flow chart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may judge based on the winning number (or winning/replay winning information, or ball-out group number, etc.) related to the game. ) determines whether or not it is a winning number related to replay-B (replay with reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which the white seven can be aligned with the invalid line by stopping with reverse push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added by replay-B. Determine whether it is not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a reverse-press instruction command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and reverse-pressing (“right → middle → left”) disables the line. ) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, if No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a reverse-press avoidance command (a command to the sub-control board S side, other than reverse-pressing (“right→middle→left”)). Indicate the pressing order and execute an effect to prevent the white sevens from being aligned on the invalid line) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1526 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1518 , the process proceeds to step 1526 . Next, at step 1526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the winning number (or the winning/replay winning information, or the ball-out group number, etc.) relating to the game is replay-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a forward pressing black 7 replay, which is a replay in which black sevens can be aligned with an invalid line by stopping by forward pressing. In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of AT games was added by replay-C. Determine whether it is not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a forward push instruction command (a command to the sub-control board S side). ) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a forward press avoidance command (a command to the sub-control board S side, other than the forward press (“left → middle → right”)). Instructing the pressing order and executing an effect for not aligning the black sevens on the invalid line) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Note that even if No in step 1526, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). In the present embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, reverse push avoidance command, forward push instruction command, and forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives these commands to Although the control board S side is configured to be able to execute an effect related to the pushing order navigation, it is not limited to this, and when the AT addition lottery is won, it is related to the fact that the AT addition lottery has been won and the number of AT addition games. A command (for example, a command related to the number of AT-added games related to the processing of step 1517) is transmitted to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S side receives the command, the sub control board S side push order navigation You may comprise so that the execution timing of the production|presentation and the production|presentation aspect regarding may be determined. As an example, if replay-B is a winning game, and the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the mode of directing the reverse push is selected. Alternatively, in the game in which the command is received on the sub control board S side, the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and a predetermined condition after that (for example, a specific replay role (for example, replay It may be configured to execute an effect of instructing a pushing order in which 7 matching is possible on an invalid line in a game in which game-B or C) is won. Alternatively, in a game in which the replay-B is a winning game and the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and then (For example, after a predetermined number of games (a continuous effect may be executed at the same time, in which case the final game of the continuous effect) is satisfied. (For example, display "+30G") may be executed.In this example, the effect display device S40 also displays the number of AT remaining games. This display may be the same as or different from the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side. In the game where B is the winning game and the command is received on the side of the sub-control board S (the game with the addition of the number of AT games), the effect of instructing the reverse push is not executed, and the subsequent predetermined conditions are satisfied. As an example of executing the AT game number addition effect in the game played, when a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) that arouses the winning of the bonus on the sub control board S side is executed (Bonus inside Since the winning probability of replay-B is low (including 0%), if the player is notified of the pushing order in which 7 matching is possible, the player will recognize that the bonus has not been won). There is a case where the board S side is executing a special effect.In addition, the sub control board S side judges that the AT addition lottery has been won on the main control board M side and the number of remaining AT games has been added. As the information, (1) information about the AT remaining game number is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side after the AT addition lottery.After that, on the sub control board S side, the AT remaining game number transmitted last time is transmitted. and the information about the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time, and grasp the number of AT add-on games won in the AT add-on lottery. A command relating to the number of AT-additional games received is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.In addition, when the AT-additional lottery is not won, a command indicating that the AT-additional lottery is not won is sent to the sub-control board S side. , and when the sub-control board S side receives the command, the sub-control board S side may determine the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.As an example, re-game-B is It's a winning game Then, in the game in which the command was received on the sub control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games was not added), press the middle button (operating the middle stop button as the first stop, and the order of pressing to avoid 7 matching) may be configured to select and execute an effect mode for instructing . The information for the sub-control board S to determine that the AT addition lottery was executed on the main control board M side, but the number of AT remaining games was not added includes (1) information about the number of AT remaining games. It is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side after the AT addition lottery. Thereafter, on the side of the sub-control board S, the difference between the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted last time and the information on the number of AT remaining games transmitted this time is calculated, and the number of AT addition games won in the AT addition lottery is grasped. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the AT remaining game number transmitted this time from the information on the AT remaining game number transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery was not won), (2) Main control board A command indicating that the number of AT added games is 0 as a result of the AT added lottery on the M side is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state of the AT is a state of an AT capable of executing the AT lottery. In this embodiment, the AT lottery can be executed only in the "high-probability state" state. After that, when the BB role wins, it shifts to the "advantageous BB state", and when the executed BB ends, it shifts to the "AT in progress state", and the AT counter indicates the initial number of AT games. A value of 50 times will be set. Even if the BB is won in the "low probability state", the game shifts to the "normal BB internal game" and does not shift to the "AT state" thereafter. It should be noted that the game is not limited to this, and may be constructed such that when BB is won in the "normal game state", AT lottery can be won with the BB role as a trigger. In such a configuration, when the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the AT lottery is won with the BB role as a trigger, the process shifts to the "advantageous BB internal game", and then the BB is won. By aligning them, you will transition to the "advantageous BB state". In addition, in the state in which the BB is won in the "normal game state" and the BB is not aligned, the game section may be the "advantageous section" or the "waiting section". In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device for the game is an AT lottery hand (in this example, a BB hand with no set difference, the first type BB-A or the first Seed BB-C). In the present embodiment, there are two types of winning numbers (winning numbers 19 and 24) for BB with no set difference and winning numbers (winning numbers 25, 26 and 27) in which BB with no set difference and small wins overlap. Both are AT lottery roles. If Yes at step 1404 , at step 1406 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state of AT for the next and subsequent games to be “advantageous BB internal game”, and proceeds to step 1410 . Also, if step 1402 or step 1404 is No, the process proceeds to step 1410 . In this embodiment, when the AT-related states are different, the AT winning rate (whether it can be won or not) for the AT lottery is different. , the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same even if the set value is different (If you win the BB in the "high probability state", you will always win the AT regardless of the set value = then " (transition to "AT in progress state").

Next, at step 1410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state of the AT for the next and subsequent games has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding AT is the "low probability state". In the case of Yes at step 1412, at step 1414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion hand (a small player that can shift from a "low probability state" to a "high probability state" by winning). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is a winning combination (Cherry). If Yes at step 1414, at step 1416, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/2, and there is no problem if it is changed if it does not differ depending on the set value). Execute a high-probability state transition lottery. Next, at step 1418, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high-probability state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 1418 , at step 1420 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state of AT for the next and subsequent games to be “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430 .

If No at step 1412, at step 1424, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding AT is the "high probability state". In the case of Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the counter value of the high-security obstacle counter KHc to 1 (this is the final game of high-security obstacle, and is the 10th game after entering the "high probability state"). ). In the case of Yes at step 1426, at step 1428, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the low-probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in this embodiment, when the state regarding AT is "high probability state", the game section is "advantageous section", and when the game section is "advantageous section", the pressing order The "advantageous section" does not end unless navigation is executed one or more times or a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500 games) the "advantageous section" continues. Even if you win the low-probability state transition lottery, the "high-probability state" will not end if the low-probability transition conditions are not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been executed at least once. ). In addition, if the BB role is won during the "advantageous section" and the BB is executed, the "advantageous section" can be played at any time even if the push order navigation has not been executed even once in the "advantageous section". It may be configured to be terminated. In the case of Yes at step 1428 , at step 1429 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state of AT for the next and subsequent games to be “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430 . Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied when the push order navigation is executed once. In addition, a combination with a maximum number of payouts of 8 and a combination with a maximum number of payouts of 11 are provided as the winning combination (the winning combination differs depending on the order in which the reels are stopped and the profit rate of the player differs). In this case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the pressing order navigation for a combination with a large maximum payout number of 11 is executed once. It should be noted that even if No in step 1410 , step 1414 , step 1418 , step 1424 , step 1426 or step 1428 , the process proceeds to step 1430 . As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state is newly shifted to the "high probability state", 10 high-probability-problem games are set in the high-probability-probability counter KHc until the counter value becomes 0. is configured not to transition to a "low probability state". In addition, such a lottery method is only an example. For example, the low-probability state transition lottery is not executed for 10 games after shifting to the "high-probability state" (staying in the "high-probability state" is guaranteed. ), a lottery may be executed to shift from the "high probability state" to the "low probability state" with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the 10 games have elapsed. In addition, the AT lottery combination (low-probability AT lottery combination, high-probability AT lottery combination) and state promotion combination have the same winning probability for all set values.

Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding AT is "state during AT". If Yes at step 1430, at step 1431, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state is the "AT state", the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, Suica B 1/2 probability when winning , you can acquire the right to transition to "additional specialization state" and transition to "specialization precursor state", while the state related to AT is "AT state" , When the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if Watermelon B is won, a lottery (specialized state transition lottery) is not executed, and transition to the "predictive state of specialization" and the "additional specialization state" is not performed. In addition, it is not limited to this, and even if the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery to win the watermelon B and acquire the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" (also called the specialization state transition lottery) ) may be configured to be executed, and configured as such, and in a situation where the AT counter value is 3 or less, watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the “additional specialization state” is granted. If the lottery is won, the AT counter value may be set so that the "predictive state of specialization" or the "additional specialization state" can occur from the next game after winning the lottery. becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), it may be configured so that it can be (shifted to) a “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, and the game that wins the lottery After a predetermined number of games have been played, the "predictive state of specialization" or the "additional specialization state" may be established (transitioned to). In addition, when shifting to the "additional specialization state", it is not necessary to go through the "prediction state of specialization". You may In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a specialization transition role (a small lottery that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transition to the "additional specialization state"). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is watermelon B). If Yes at step 1432, at step 1433, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a special state transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, at step 1434, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialized state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes at step 1434, at step 1435, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to be the "specialized precursor state", and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No at step 1431, at step 1436, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game). judge. In the case of Yes at step 1436, at step 1437, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (2/3 in this example). Next, at step 1438, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuation lottery has been won. If Yes at step 1438, at step 1439, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onward to be "state during AT", and shifts to step 1444-1 (at step 1444-1. The number of AT initial games (50 in this example) will be set in the AT counter to fill it. On the other hand, if No at step 1438, at step 1443, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT from the next game onward to be the "state for revival possible/impossible effect", and proceeds to step 1444-1. Note that even if No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434 or step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1444-1. Thus, in the present embodiment, the continuation lottery is executed in the AT final game, and when the continuation lottery is won, the AT counter M60 is set to the initial value of 50 games again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into consideration, the AT of 50 games per one set continues to loop at ⅔. In addition, the execution timing of the continuation lottery is not limited to the AT final game, for example, the first game of AT (the first game that newly becomes "AT state" or after the initial value is set to the AT counter M60 It may be configured to perform a continuation lottery in the first game). With such a configuration, it is already determined whether or not the next set (AT pertaining to winning the continuation lottery) will be executed (whether or not the AT continues) in the "state during AT". The performance during the AT can be made different between when the continuation lottery is won and when the continuation lottery is not won, for example, when the continuation lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60. is 1 or more (during the execution of AT), the BGM can be changed (a song is played, etc.), or an effect can be executed in which it is definite that the player has won the continuous lottery.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control process according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state of the AT is the restoration possibility/prohibition effect state. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a revival role It is determined whether or not it is a combination that can shift to the "AT state", in other words, a combination that can pull back the AT. Here, in the present embodiment, the resurrection hand is a hand that includes any one of watermelon A, watermelon B, cherry, and a bonus hand (only BB hand with no set difference, not including BB hand with set difference). It is said that if the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection role, it will win the resurrection lottery. If Yes at step 1444-2, at step 1444-3, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT from the next game onward to be "state during AT", and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state shiftable condition. On the other hand, if No at step 1444-2, at step 1444-4, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state of AT for the next and subsequent games to be "low probability state", and proceeds to step 1445. It should be noted that even if No in step 1441 - 1 , the process proceeds to step 1445 . As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the final AT game is played and the continuation lottery is not won, the game moves to the "recovery possibility state" and is revived in the "recovery decision state". If the player wins the lottery, it is configured to shift to the "AT state" from the next game. In addition, although the ``resurrection possible/impossible effect state'' is ``advantageous section'', the lottery related to AT in the ``AT state'' (AT additional lottery, continuation lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the revival lottery can be executed. The execution mode of lottery relating to AT is different between the "state during AT" and the "state for revival possible/impossible effect".

Next, at step 1445, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state of the AT for the next and subsequent games has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state transition condition regarding AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. is satisfied when 10 games, which is the number of premonitory games, have been completed in "state"). In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state of the AT after the next game, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. If the number of precursor games is digested in "precursor state", it will be decided as "additional specialization state"). It should be noted that even if No in step 1445 or step 1446 , the process proceeds to step 1448 . Next, at step 1448, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a high security failure counter value command (in this example, a command to the sub side, the current high security failure counter value, in other words, a high probability state is guaranteed). A command relating to the number of remaining games played) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1449-1. Next, at step 1449-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding the AT from the next game onwards is determined to be "advantageous BB internal game". If Yes at step 1449-1, at step 1449-2, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (
processing of step 1450). Note that even if No in step 1499-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1450).

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to differ depending on the lottery state, and if the BB role (BB role with no set difference) is won in the "low probability state", the AT transition lottery is won. On the other hand, if you win the BB role (no set difference BB role) in the "high probability state", you will win the AT transition lottery (then you will be in the "AT state" However, it is not limited to this, and the condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery role, and the states related to the AT that are the “advantageous section” are “high probability state A” and “high probability state B", if you win the condition device A in the "high probability state A", you win the AT transition lottery at 1/10, and the condition device in the "high probability state B" It may be constructed such that when A is won, the AT transfer lottery is won at 1/2. In addition, when the AT transition lottery is won, the state related to AT is shifted to "AT ready state" which is a preparation state until shifting to "AT in progress state". 10 games have passed since the transition to the "state"), the transition to the "AT state" may be made.

Next, FIG. 24 is a flow chart of conditional device number management processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, at step 1451, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is the "advantageous section". In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a command (a command on the side of the sub-control board S) relating to the winning/re-game winning information. information). Next, in step 1454, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a combination with a pressing order (a condition device in which the winning combination differs depending on the pressing order, for example, winning-A1). Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the instruction number (also referred to as the push order number) during the game based on the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and instructs. The number is stored in a RAM address (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information relating to the order of pressing, and in this example, is determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub-control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub-control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. It should be noted that the instruction number is determined even when the push order navigation is not executed (although not shown, the instruction number becomes the initial value based on clearing the instruction number). Incidentally, when the pressing order guessing game is executed, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pressing order guessing game may be determined. Next, at step 1460, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). See FIG. 34 for the image). Next, at step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) the command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined at step 1458, and proceeds to step 1472. (Refer to FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub control board side). In this example, displaying the stopping order of the reels that gives the highest profit to the player on the pressing order display device D270 and the performance display device S40 is referred to as pressing order navigation, pressing order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the push order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the push order of "left→middle→right" is displayed as "=1" on the push order display device D270. It is configured to display "=1" both in the case of the push order bell and in the case of the push order replay. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and in a game relating to the pressing order bell, the pressing order navigation of "left→middle→right" is displayed on the pressing order display device D270, and in a game relating to the pressing order replay, " The configuration may be such that the display mode differs depending on whether the push order navigation of "left→middle→right" is displayed on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of display modes of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of winning/re-game winning information.

If No at step 1451 or step 1454, at step 1468, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes mask processing on the winning/replay winning information of the game, and stores the masked information at a predetermined address in the RAM. memorize to Here, when the prize winning/re-game winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub control board S side, if the winning/re-game winning information is recognized by a fraudulent act, the profit related to the game will not be high. A different pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub control board S is executed after masking the winning/replay winning information related to the game {processing to make the winning/replay winning information (especially information related to the order of pushing) confidential}. , so that the high-profit pushing order cannot be recognized. In addition, as a method of mask processing in the present embodiment, it is preferable to use a plurality of winning/replay winning information (winning/replay winning information with similar roles). A plurality of prize winning/replay winning information that can be stopped and displayed by a symbol combination serving as a replay role is treated as one effect group number (for example, prize/replay winning information 4 to 6 are treated as effect group 4, etc.). It is configured to transmit the group number to the sub control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also, in such a case, a plurality of winning/replay winning information among the existing winning/replay winning information such as the effect group number are treated as one winning/replay winning information, and the winning/replay winning information after mask processing is processed. It is desirable to provide the game winning information (for example, the winning/replay winning information 4 to 6 is replaced with the winning/replay winning information 19 (newly provided winning/replay winning information 19) which is the winning/replay winning information after mask processing).・ Replay winning information), etc.). In addition, based on the state of AT on the main control board M, if it is determined that the game is to report the operation information (push order navigation), the sub-control board S side transmits winning/replay winning information, The effect group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side in the game in which the operation information is not notified. In such a configuration, the command associated with the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub control board S side, or may be configured not to be transmitted.

Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets (for example, sets in the register area) a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing, and step Go to 1472. Next, at step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (which enables the sub side to recognize whether or not the bonus has been won) (for example, register area) and proceed to the next process (process of step 1550). In this embodiment, the winning/replay winning information and the bonus winning information are derived from the winning number, and the derivation method will be described later. In addition, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as an example of the display of the push order navigation, in the case of the "AT state", (1) when the fall replay combination is included → the fall replay combination is not displayed in a stopped state. (2) In the case of bells (1-card/11-card hand)→Navigating the pressing order in which the number of payouts is the largest, and so on. Thus, in this embodiment, when the game section is the "advantageous section", the winning/replay winning information (the type of winning combination and the most advantageous pressing order for the player) is displayed on the sub-control board S side. can be specified) and an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous pushing order for the player), while the game section is a "normal section", the sub control board S It is configured to be able to transmit the effect group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) to the side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning/replay winning information related to the game, including the winning/replay winning information in which the game result and the player's profit differ depending on the pressing order, is directly sent to the sub control board S side. On the other hand, in a game section that is not an "advantageous section", winning/replay winning information related to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the player's profit differ depending on the order of pressing. In the case of winning information, it is configured to transmit to the sub-control board S side the performance group number in which the information relating to the pressing order is kept secret.

In addition, when the game section is not the "advantageous section", etc., when transmitting the winning/re-game winning information determined by the main control board M to the sub control board S, mask processing is executed to determine the effect group number. , and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S. Note that the performance group number is the winning/replay winning information, and the winning/replay winning information related to a winning combination that has a similar role (for example, a replay combination including a falling replay combination, a bell in order of pushing, etc.). are grouped and numbered. The prize winning/replay winning information related to the game is masked {processing to make the winning/replay winning information (especially information related to the order of pushing) confidential} before being transmitted to the sub-control board S. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information related to the winning/replay winning information from being recognized by an illegal act, and to prevent the recognition of the pressing order (reel stop order) that is highly profitable for the game.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flow chart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, at step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is zero. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is the time (in this example, 4.1 seconds) that should be ensured from one game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). is a timer that measures In the case of Yes at step 1552, at step 1554, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) to the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 and starts the game. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes infinite loop processing. Next, at step 1556, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information regarding the reel stop order and the information regarding the pressing order for the finished game. Next, at step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the stopped reels and the pull-in point creation request related to the finished game. Next, at step 1560, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data relating to the finished game. Next, at step 1562, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an output request for waiting for the start of reel rotation related to the game. Next, at step 1564, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command for the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1260). In other words, the processing of steps 1562 and 1564 enables transmission of a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reels should start rotating.

Next, FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the number-of-remaining-games management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, at step 3402, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is the "advantageous section". Although the details will be described later, the "advantageous section" is one of the game sections, and the state of the game is advantageous to the player, such as when the state related to AT is "state during AT". It is a game section that is easy to set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 (a decrement counter and initially to 1500, which is the maximum number of games that can be stayed in the "advantageous section"). 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the counter that is set as a value and can be decremented every game during the period of the “advantageous interval”.

Next, in step 3408, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding AT is "state during AT". If Yes at step 3408, at step 3410, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the AT counter value. Next, in step 3412, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT-related state is a high-probability state. In the case of Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc by 1, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). Note that even if No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT-related state that can be displayed by the push-order navigation is the "AT state", the AT counter value is subtracted every game, but the "advantageous BB state", " In the case of "advantageous BB internal game", "predictive specialization state" or "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is not decremented even if the game is executed. That is, when the AT counter value remains (one or more remains) and the state is shifted from the "AT state" to the "specialized precursor state", the AT counter value is maintained and the "AT state" is changed. state”→“specialization precursor state”→“additional specialization state”. Even if the AT-related state is "AT in progress", the AT counter value can be prevented from being decremented by 1 when a winning number including a bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not decremented, but the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is decremented. can be controlled. For example, when the AT counter value is "30" and the number of remaining AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "30", the game is executed and the bonus is won, the AT counter value is "30". or "30+α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT addition lottery related to the game, is stored. You may display "29" as the number of remaining AT games, or "29 + α", which is the value obtained by adding the value "α" obtained by the AT additional lottery ("α" obtained by the additional lottery is , without notification in the game, in a specific game after the game (at the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or the game that meets the predetermined conditions after the end of the bonus game) may be notified). Then, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is decremented by 1 for each game even in the "advantageous BB internal game", and an effect suggesting bonus confirmation (for example, a bonus confirmation screen) is output. It can be configured so that the number of AT remaining games is subtracted for each game up to. By constructing in this way, when a bonus is won in a state in which push-order navigation can be executed, such as "AT state", it is possible to prevent the player from immediately grasping that the bonus has been won. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, continuous performance over a plurality of games is executed by using the performance display device S40 or the like to raise the interest of the game. The number of AT remaining games displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is over is "30" or a value of "30" or more when winning the addition result of the AT addition lottery and notifying the result of the addition. can be controlled to display When the AT counter value is "1" and the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", the game is executed and the bonus is won. The display related to the number of AT remaining games is "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect over multiple games is executed to incite whether the bonus is won or not, and the AT counter value is "1". , Winning number (or winning/replay winning information, or winning ball group number) with which a game can be executed and AT additional lottery can be executed when the AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1". is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes "0" and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes "0". In addition, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing continuous effects may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of AT remaining games is large.

Next, FIG. 27 is a flow chart of RT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, at step 1702, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transferable condition is satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transferable conditions are execution of RAM clear (initialization of RAM), stop display of replay (in this example, stop display of replay 04), win/start of BB・It is configured so that it can be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition is possible and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state transition enable condition (RT state transition in FIG. 28). see the figure), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1750). It should be noted that even in the case of No in step 1702, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1750). In this embodiment, the RT state transition control process is executed after all reels are stopped, but when shifting to "RT1", the transition timing may shift to when the lever is turned on. The timing for transitioning the RT state (storing the RT number in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are four RT states, "RT0" to "RT2" and "1 type BB-A, B, C", and the RT states are fulfilled by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure. will be transferred. As a specific example of transition to the RT state, when the RT state is "RT1", RAM initialization is executed, or when replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the state shifts to "RT0". Replay 04 is displayed as being stopped, specifically, when "Replay-D1" is won in a situation where the RT state is "RT1", and the left stop button is operated as the first stop. , replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and "RT1" is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, when "replay-D1" is won in a situation where the RT state is "RT1", if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, replay 04 is stopped and displayed. , the RT state transitions from "RT1" to "RT0".

Also, when the RT state is "RT0" or "RT1", the BB role is won, and the BB role is not won in the winning game (the conditional device related to 1 type BB-A, B, C is activated ) and the RT state shifts to "RT2". Also, when the BB role is won in "RT2" (1 types BB-A, B, C are activated), the game shifts to "1 types BB-A, B, C". Also, when BB ends in "1 type BB-A, B, C" (operation of 1 type BB-A, B, C ends), it shifts to "RT1". It should be noted that when the state regarding AT is "low probability state", the BB is won, and when the BB ends, the RT state will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player. Since the state is a state where the push order navigation does not occur, when winning "Replay-D1 to D3", the wrong push order (the first stop is the left button, the middle button, and the right button, One of the three options is the correct pressing order and the replays other than the replay 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three options are the incorrect pressing order and the replay 04 is stopped and displayed). By stopping the replay 04, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, and the game shifts from "RT1" to "RT0". Also, if the state related to AT is "high probability state", "AT state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", BB is elected, and when BB ends, RT state will shift to "RT1", which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to AT is a state where push order navigation occurs, and even when "replay-D1 to D3" is won, replay 04 can navigate the order of pressing correct answers that are not displayed stop, so that "RT1" can be maintained.

Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control process according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, at step 1752, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT state transferable condition is satisfied in the game. In addition, the AT state transition possible conditions are, for example, (1) when the BB with no set difference won in the "high probability state" ends, (2) when the continuation lottery is won, (3) when the revival lottery is won Sufficient if In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, triggered by the new shift to the "AT precursor state", sets the number of AT initial games (in this example, 50) to "During AT state”) is set in the AT counter M60, and the process proceeds to step 1756. It should be noted that even if No in step 1752 , the process proceeds to step 1756 . Next, at step 1756, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding AT is a high probability state. In the case of Yes at step 1756, at step 1758, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding AT in the next game is a high probability state. If Yes at step 1758, at step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the number of high security failure games (10 in this example) to the high security failure counter, and proceeds to the next process (step 3500). Transition. Note that even if No in step 1756 or step 1758, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB internal game", by winning the BB, it shifts to the "advantageous BB state" and AT game in the "advantageous BB state" If the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter will exceed 50 when the BB ends and the state transitions from the "advantageous BB state" to the "AT state". Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 in the "advantageous BB state" and then transitions to the "AT state", the AT counter is set to 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30). become. At this time, if an effect is performed to inform the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state", the player is notified that the number of AT initial games is 80 at the start of the "AT state". It is desirable to notify the player, but as another method of notification, it is possible to dare not perform an effect to notify the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is notified that 30 games have been added during AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT state" or when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method of performing a notification effect is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly grasp whether the number of AT games has been increased in the "advantageous BB state" or how many games the number of games has been increased. It is possible to heighten interest in the additional performance that suddenly occurs for unknown reasons during AT (a state in which push-order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the processing for setting the initial AT number of games is not limited to this example. Alternatively, the number of AT initial games may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the AT state transition control process of step 1400 described above. In addition, the number of games set in the AT counter M60 (the number of AT initial games) is configured to be subtracted from the time the game is played after the BB ends (the state regarding the AT is "AT state"). (Do not start subtraction during BB). Also, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M. FIG.

Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, "low probability state", "normal BB internal game", "normal BB state", "high probability state", "AT state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state" , ``advantageous BB internal game'', ``advantageous BB state'', and ``restoration possibility state''. The state will change. For example, when watermelon B is won in the "at-during state" and the special state transition lottery that wins in 1/2 is won, the state shifts to the "special precursor state". Further, when 10 games have passed (completed) after shifting to the "predictive state of specialization", the state is shifted to the "additional specialization state". In addition, as the game section, three AT-related states of "low probability state", "normal BB internal game", and "normal BB state" are set in the "normal section", and "high probability state", "AT during State", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB internal game", "advantageous BB state", "recovery possibility state" 7 AT related states are in "advantageous section" set. That is, even if the state of the seven ATs that are the "advantageous section" is transitioned (transitioned), if 1500 games have passed without setting the "normal section", the "advantageous section" is forcibly terminated. It is set to "Normal section". Further, in the case of the information game state in which the push order navigation is displayed, that is, the "AT state", the "predictive state of specialization", or the state of "additional specialization", even if the replay 04 is stopped and displayed. Also, the game state is maintained.

As described above, if the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0 in the "AT in progress state" and the continuous lottery is not won, the "restoration possible/impossible effect state" is entered. When winning the resurrection lottery in the "resurrection possible/impossible effect state", the player can return to the "AT in progress state" again. On the other hand, if the revival lottery is not won in the ``restoration availability effect state'', the state shifts to the ``low probability state'', and the ``advantageous section'' becomes the ``normal section''.

In the "high probability state", when the BB without set difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) is elected, the BB without set difference is activated, and when the "advantageous BB state" ends, "AT state ”. Also, when you win BB without set difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) in "AT state", BB without set difference is activated, and "advantageous BB state" ends, " "In AT state". In addition, when winning BB with no set difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C) in the "recovery possibility state", BB with no set difference is activated, and "advantageous BB state" ends also shifts to "state during AT" (to win the revival lottery). In addition, when the BB with a set difference (1 type BB-B) is elected in the ``state for revival possibility/refusal effect'', the BB with a set difference is activated, and when the ``advantageous BB state'' ends, the BB with a set difference is alone. If it is a winning number (winning number 20) related to the BB role of , it will be in a "low probability state" after the BB is over (because the BB role with the setting difference will not win the revival lottery), and the BB with the setting difference is rare. If the winning number (winning numbers 21 to 23) overlaps with the role, it will be in the "AT state" after the BB is over (because the rare role will win the resurrection lottery).

Also, in the case of "advantageous section" and "high probability state", BB with set difference (1 type BB-B) is elected, BB with set difference is activated, and when "advantageous BB state" ends, Move to "high probability state".

In addition, the state related to AT that transitions after the end of the “advantageous BB state” is after the BB that was elected during AT (“AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”) (setting difference For both BB with BB and BB with no set difference), transition to the state related to AT at the time of BB winning among "AT state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", and non-AT during ( After finishing the BB with no set difference won in the "high probability state"), the state shifts to the "AT state". In addition, after the BB with a setting difference that is won during non-AT (“high probability state”), the game shifts to the “high probability state”.

In addition, the state regarding AT is not limited to that of this embodiment, for example, AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in "low probability state" or "high probability state". It may be configured to shift to the "precursive state" by winning , and shift to the "AT state" after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. An AT lottery is executed by winning the lottery, and if the AT lottery is not won, the game shifts to a "fake omen state", and after 16 to 32 games, shifts to a "low probability state" or "high probability state". may be configured to Also, as the game section, a "waiting section" different from the "advantageous section" and the "normal section" may be provided. If you win "BB + Cherry" overlapping with Cherry and win the AT lottery, the state inside BB until "BB" of "BB + Cherry" wins is configured to be a "waiting interval". may In this way, by providing a "waiting interval", if the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT lottery is not won, and if the BB is won in the "low probability state" and the AT During the period until the BB symbol combination is complete (until the advantageous section indicator lights up), the advantageous section indicator YH is off, so you won't win the AT lottery. It is possible to incite the player whether or not there is. Also, if BB wins in the "additional specialization state", it may be configured so that the "additional specialization state" is restarted after the BB ends. Execute an AT add-on lottery that is different from the BB that won in the "AT state" as a BB that won in the "add-on specialized state" The number of AT games is added, and the number of games per game is relatively large). In addition, when BB is elected in the "specialized precursor state", it may be configured to shift to the "additional specialized state" after the end of the BB. It may be configured such that the AT addition lottery is executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the "addition specialization state".

Next, FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the game interval transition control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, there are game sections as sections related to the state of the game. It has two game sections, the "advantageous section" which is a profitable section. As for the description of the flowchart, first, at step 3508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is the "normal section". In the case of Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game interval after the next game as the game interval corresponding to the current AT state and current game situation, and proceeds to step 3528. do. On the other hand, if No in step 3508, in other words, if the game section is the "advantageous section", in step 3514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is 0. In other words, it is determined whether or not the "advantageous section" has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears all AT-related information (thus, the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of staying games in the "specialization precursor state", etc.) is cleared. becomes 0). On the other hand, if No at step 3514, at step 3518, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the optional advantageous interval end condition is a condition for ending the "advantageous interval" other than when the counter value of the advantageous interval remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, when the AT counter value is 0 or when the push order navigation is performed a predetermined number of times. In the case of No in step 3518 , that is, in the case that any advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step 3515 . Thus, in this embodiment, when the "advantageous section" ends and the "normal section" is set after the next game, information related to AT (the number of AT continuation games, the number of AT remaining games, etc.) information) are all cleared, so the conditions for becoming the "advantageous section" again in the subsequent "normal section" will not be relaxed. The AT-related information cleared by the processing of step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous interval) includes the counter value of the advantageous interval remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the game state, and the like. In addition, these information will also be cleared by RAM clearing at the time of setting change. , Information related to "reserved number of sheets" etc. is also cleared. , "number of stored sheets", etc. are not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of setting change is different from the clear range at the end of the "advantageous section" (for example, at the time of executing the process of step 3515). By clearing the RAM when changing the settings, it may be configured to retain the "condition device related to the accessory continuous operation device (BB)" and the "RT state". Also, the addresses in the range cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the "advantageous section" continuous, it is possible to perform clearing with a simple process of designating the top address to be cleared and the range of addresses to be cleared during the clearing process. Further, when the "advantageous section" ends, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command indicating that the "advantageous section" has ended. However, even if the sub-control board S side receives the command, it is configured not to erase the game history such as the fact that it was in the "advantageous section" and information related to how many games were executed in the "AT state". ing. However, when the RAM is cleared at the time of setting change, the game history such as the fact that it was an "advantageous section" on the side of the sub-control board S and the information related to how many games were executed in the "AT state" will also be deleted.

In addition, when the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, (1) when the state regarding the current AT is "high probability state" (2) If the current AT state is "advantageous BB internal game" in the next game, the AT state will be "low probability state" in the next game. (3) If the current state of AT is "advantageous BB state", the state of AT in the next game will be "normal BB state" (4) Currently If the state related to the AT is "AT state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state" or "state for resurrection possibility state", the state related to AT in the next game will be "low probability state” (because the AT related information is cleared).

Next, at step 3516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the game period after the next game to the "normal period". Next, at step 3517, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous interval indicator YH because the "advantageous interval" has ended, and the process proceeds to step 3528. Although the advantageous interval indicator YH is turned off when the “advantageous interval” ends and the “normal interval” is set, the detailed extinguishing timing is not limited to the timing of this embodiment. For example, the advantageous interval indicator YH may be turned off when game medals are inserted for a game in which the "advantageous interval" ends and the game becomes the "normal interval". In other words, it suffices to turn off the advantageous zone indicator YH before the start lever D50 is operated to enable the start of the next game. On the other hand, in the case of Yes at step 3518 , at step 3520 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game as an “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528 .

Next, at step 3528, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M has decided to newly set the "advantageous section" in the next game (decided to set the "normal section" to the "advantageous section"). Determine whether or not If Yes at step 3528, at step 3530, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value to the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value to be set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) that is common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M lights up the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1293). Incidentally, even if No in step 3528, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1293). In this embodiment, the lighting processing of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the advantageous section indicator YH is illuminated. The timing is from the start lever operation timing in the game before the new "advantageous section" (game in the "normal section") to the timing at which game medals can be inserted in the game in the new "advantageous section" (the new "advantageous section" game). If the game before becoming a "advantageous section" was a game related to replaying, set the period appropriately until the timing when the operation of the start lever in the game becoming a new "advantageous section" becomes effective). good too.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flow chart of timer interrupt processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in this embodiment. The processing of this subroutine is executed when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and after that, a predetermined time (T in this example, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set). is performed periodically).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC 100, checking an input port for a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, at step 1604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power cutoff is currently detected (in this interrupt process). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes power-off processing, which will be described later. On the other hand, if Yes at step 1604, at step 1606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting/reset button M30, the power failure detection signal, the input reception sensor D10s, and the first input sensor. D20s, second input sensor D30s, first payout sensor H10s, second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence or absence of operation with these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T be done).

Next, at step 1610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on/off the door switch flag and setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU can be opened without being affected by noise. can also be detected). Next, at step 6100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes spinning drum drive control processing for all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) (processing related to drive control of the reel M50). will be described later). Next, at step 1612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes at step 1612 , at step 1613 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (the number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D 280 , and proceeds to step 1614 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1612 , the process proceeds to step 1614 . Incidentally, if the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, at step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all the error flags (not shown, but the inserted medals reverse flow error flag, the number of inserted medals error flag, the inserted medals It is determined whether or not flags related to errors such as payout abnormality error flag, payout medal retention error flag, door switch flag, etc. are all off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side, indicating that no error has been detected) (for example, register area) and go to step 1622 . On the other hand, if No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, indicating that an error has been detected) (for example, register area) and go to step 1622 . In step 1620, the information on the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the Information setting processing may not be executed (step 1618 may be omitted). Furthermore, the error detection command may be executed only when an error occurs from a state in which no error has occurred, or may be executed from a state in which a first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as a second error (for example, paid-out medal retention error).

Next, at step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if set in the register area at step 1618 or step 1620, control command is sent). Here, as commands to be sent to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button is operated as the first stop) command related to the second reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button is transmitted as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), Sent immediately after all reels have stopped), Command related to the stop timing of the stop display pattern (Sent immediately after the stop button is operated to stop the display pattern), winning/replay Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (only during the advantageous section)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever), commands related to RT status (all reels (sent after stopping until the next game starts), commands related to the state of AT (sent after all reels stop until the next game starts), High security counter value command (sent immediately after start lever operation), AT remaining game number command (between all reels stopping and next game starting, or immediately after start lever operation) command (sent after all reels are stopped and before the next game is started), etc. Next, at step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel-type game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the error information output by the external signal includes a door opening error, an abnormal insertion error, an abnormal dispensing error, an insertion reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. is configured to cause an error in Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on output data of LEDs (7-segment LED lamps, etc.) (for example, among a plurality of 7-segment LED units, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit is lit, and 7-segment LED units are turned on. (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, at step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changing the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 need not be executed. Next, at step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes software random number management processing (update processing of random numbers managed by software, etc.). Next, in step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, at step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the abnormality flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal random number update state is normal (whether or not the error flag bit indicating the update state error is set). judge. In the case of Yes at step 1636, at step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt end processing, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1602). On the other hand, if No at step 1634 or step 1636, at step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal random number error indication (eg, sets an error number in the register area). Next, at step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-described unrecoverable error processing.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the reel driving control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 of FIG. 32 in this embodiment. In this processing, the processing for one reel is illustrated, but it should be supplemented that the processing corresponding to each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 is executed. First, at step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, the timing after execution of the process of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If Yes at step 6102 , at step 6104 , the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106 . On the other hand, if No in step 6102, the process proceeds to step 6106 as well.

Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the reel acceleration state start timing (when the reel rotation start standby state ends and the execution of the reel acceleration processing starts). It is determined whether or not the processing execution timing) has been reached. If Yes at step 6106, at step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, at step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel acceleration processing, and proceeds to step 6112. Incidentally, when the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this process. On the other hand, if the result in step 6106 is No, the process proceeds to step 6112 as well.

Next, at step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes all the interrupt processes corresponding to the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, the "interruption execution count" in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 to be described later). timing) is reached. In the case of Yes at step 6114, at step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state. Next, at step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes reel constant speed maintenance processing, and proceeds to step 6120. FIG. It should be noted that even if No in step 6112 or step 6114 , the process proceeds to step 6120 .

Next, at step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, after the CPUMC of the main control board M reaches the reel constant speed state (after executing the processing of step 6116), the reel sensor detects the reel (corresponding to the processing of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not the index provided on the reel to be played has been detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided, for example, in a convex shape on the peripheral side surface of the reel, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by a reel sensor. Signals from the reel sensors are electrically connected to the main control board M. When the reel sensor detects (turns off) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M to detect that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes at step 6122 , it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects that a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) has elapsed since the reel drive state changed to the reel constant speed state. determine whether or not If No in step 6124 , it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become constant, and the process proceeds to step 6130 . Thus, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotational speed is normally constant by detecting the index within a predetermined time after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In this example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times (it is configured so that 400 steps can be rotated by interrupt processing 400 times), and when the reel rotation speed is constant, It is longer than the time required for one rotation (one round) of the reel (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the time value for executing the interrupt process 336 times). With this configuration, it is possible to determine how far the distance between the index and the reel sensor (the distance until the reel is rotated and the index is detected by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel driving state becomes the constant speed state. However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects the index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured so that it can

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes at step 6124, at step 6126, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel acceleration state. Next, at step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the reel re-acceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. Thus, in this example, if the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, , the reel drive state is renewed to the reel acceleration state, and reel re-acceleration processing (the stepping motor excitation mode is the same as the reel acceleration processing) is executed. It should be noted that even if the result in step 6120 is No, the process proceeds to step 6130 . Note that the reel re-acceleration process does not have to be the same process as the reel acceleration process described above. may be executed differently.

Next, FIG. 34 is a flow chart of reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 of FIG. 32 in this embodiment. First, at step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the start timing of the reel deceleration standby state (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends). It is determined whether or not it has reached If Yes at step 6130 , at step 6132 , the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration standby state, and proceeds to step 6134 . On the other hand, if step 6130 is No, the process also proceeds to step 6134 .

Next, at step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (timing to start executing reel deceleration processing) has been reached. If Yes at step 6136, at step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts decelerating the reel (reel deceleration processing). Next, at step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the process of step 6142. It should be noted that even if No in step 6134 or step 6136 , the process proceeds to step 6142 .

Next, at step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is the reel deceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end execution of reel deceleration processing) has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 6144, at step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel stop state, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1612). Note that even if No in step 6142 or step 6144, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1612).

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, the rotation of the stepping motor is started based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, the constant speed is maintained thereafter (reel When the drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, but the rotational speed may not actually reach the constant speed). When one of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor having four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem if it is not a four-phase stepping motor). Rotation is controlled by phase excitation. That is, by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited), the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction. In the same figure, the column of "Phase to be excited" shows how to designate which phase among Φ0 to Φ3 is to be excited (details will be described later).

In addition, as shown in the "reel rotation speed image" in the upper part of the same figure, the drive state from the start of rotation of the stepping motor to the stop is divided into six, and the stepping motor is rotated according to the drive pattern corresponding to each drive state. Drive controlled. Here, the drive state includes a "reel stop state", "reel rotation start standby state", "reel acceleration state", "reel constant speed state", "reel deceleration standby state", and "reel deceleration state". In the "reel rotation speed image", the vertical axis is the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases upward, and the horizontal axis is time, which is illustrated so that time passes in the right direction. there is In addition, the example shown in the same figure illustrates the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur. Not (cases where reel rotation failure occurs will be described later).

The "reel stop state" indicates a state in which the reel is stopped. In the "reel stop state", the reel is in a stationary state, and all four phases of the stepping motor are is not energized.

Next, when the start lever D50 is operated in the "reel stop state", the reel drive state is updated to the "reel rotation start waiting state" at the timing (1) in the figure. . Here, the "reel rotation start standby state" indicates a state of waiting from the operation of the start lever D50 to the start of acceleration processing of the stepping motor (reel acceleration processing). This waiting period is a period until the reel driving state shifts from the "reel stop state" to the "reel acceleration state". For example, the time is counted from the time when the reel drive state changed to the "reel acceleration state" in the previous game, and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. If it is done, it will be "reel rotation start waiting state".

Next, at the timing (2) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start waiting state" to the "reel acceleration state". Here, the "reel acceleration state" is a state in which the reel is accelerated from a stationary state to reach a constant speed. In this example, when the timer interrupt processing is executed 220 times ("100+60+30+15+8+4+2+1=220", refer to the number of interrupt executions in the reel acceleration state in the lower left of the figure), the acceleration state ends (reel driving state is changed to "reel constant speed status”). Next, at the timing (3) in the figure, in other words, at the timing when the "reel acceleration state" is terminated by the execution of the timer interrupt process one more time, the reel rotational speed reaches a constant speed. At this timing, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state". Next, at the timing of (4) in the figure, after the reel drive state is updated from the "reel rotation start waiting state" to the "reel acceleration state", the timer interrupt process is executed 220 times, whereby the reel is driven. The state is updated to "reel constant speed state". Thus, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the "reel acceleration state" for one timer interrupt process. The configuration is such that interrupt processing is executed only once for the combination of phases to be excited, ie, φ3, φ0. is in the excitation mode (when reel rotation abnormality does not occur). With this configuration, the acceleration process can be stably executed until the reel rotational speed reaches a constant speed.

Here, the lower part of the figure is the "stepping motor excitation image". In the figure, an image of step motor excitation when the reel driving state is the "reel acceleration state" and an image of the step motor excitation when the reel driving state is the "reel constant speed state" are illustrated. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel acceleration state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of the figure. The "phase to be excited" is the combination of the phases to be excited, and the "interrupt execution count" indicates the number of times the interrupt process is executed to excite the combination of the phases to be excited. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the stepping motor is excited for 220 times of timer interrupt processing. KB) 60 interrupt processes at "φ0, φ1" → (KC) 30 interrupt processes at "φ1" → (KD) 15 interrupt processes at "φ1, φ2" → (KE) "φ2 → (KF) 4 interrupts at "φ2, φ3" → (KG) 2 interrupts at "φ3" → (KH) Interrupt at "φ3, φ0" It is configured to excite the step motor (stepping motor) by executing interrupt processing such as processing once (the number of times interrupt processing is executed is just an example, and there is no problem if it is changed). In this way, in this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the number of interrupt processes executed in one combination of phases to be excited is gradually reduced.

Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state" will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of the figure. In this example, when the reel is in the constant speed state (when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed), the interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) ``φ0'' → (TB) at ``φ0, φ1'' 1 interrupt processing → (TC) 1 interrupt processing at “φ1” → (TD) 1 interrupt processing at “φ1, φ2” → (TE) 1 interrupt processing at “φ2” → (TF) 1 interrupt process at "φ2, φ3" → (TG) 1 interrupt process at "φ3" → (TH) 1 interrupt process at "φ3, φ0" → (TA) " φ0” interrupt processing once → (TB) ”φ0, φ1” interrupt processing once → . . . is configured to excite a step motor (stepping motor). In this way, in this example, when the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed, the number of times the interrupt process is executed for each combination of phases to be excited is one.

Next, in the situation where the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", at the timing of (5) in the figure, the stop button corresponding to one of the reels is operated, and the reel drive state is changed to the "reel deceleration standby state". ” is updated. Here, the "reel constant speed state" is a state in which the rotational speed of the reel is constant (a state in which the combination of phases to be excited is switched for each interrupt processing), and the "reel deceleration standby state ” indicates the state from when the stop button is operated by the player to when the stop control is started (in the reel deceleration waiting state, the reels are slipping corresponding to the number of slipping frames). . The period of this driving state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

Next, at timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and deceleration of the reels is started. When the reel driving state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined period of time to stop the rotation of the reel. A four-phase excitation that excites all is performed. Then, when excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the figure, and the reel stops.

As described above, in the reel game machine according to the present example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration process (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration process) is executed. If the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, it is not determined whether or not the reels have been normally accelerated during the reel acceleration process. In addition, whether the reels are normally accelerated, in other words, whether the reels are at a constant speed (whether reel rotation failure has occurred) is determined by the processing of step 6124 (reel drive state changes to reel constant speed state). However, in the process of step 6124, since the reel sensor did not detect the index, the reel has not reached a constant speed (reel rotation failure has occurred). has occurred), the reel re-acceleration process is executed, that is, the reel acceleration process is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by not determining whether or not the reel acceleration has been normally performed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, even if the reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the , when the reel rotation failure is resolved and the reel rotation speed can be brought to a constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. When the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined period of time after being updated to , the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process, and by executing the reel re-acceleration process, It is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the player cannot proceed with the game (the stop button cannot be operated). Further, by not executing the process of determining whether or not the acceleration of the reels has been normally executed during the execution of the reel acceleration process, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for the process relating to the rotation of the reels. In addition, since it is configured in this way, when reel rotation failure occurs while the reel acceleration processing is being executed by the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example, the following actions are taken. becomes.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving state is updated to reel acceleration state → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel acceleration processing is completed → Reel driving state is updated to reel constant speed state → Reel constant speed maintenance processing is executed → Reel constant speed Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the speed maintenance process→Detection of reel rotation failure→Execution of reel re-acceleration process.
It should be noted that the reel rotation failure means that the rotation of the reel is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160, etc.), or the reel is accelerated due to the occurrence of step-out. is not executed normally. In this manner, the game can be smoothly progressed by executing the reel re-acceleration process even when the reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel constant speed maintenance process.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Reel driving status is updated to reel acceleration → Reel acceleration processing is executed → Reel rotation failure occurs during reel acceleration processing → Reel acceleration processing is continued → Reel acceleration processing is completed →Renewal of reel drive state to reel constant speed state→Execution of reel constant speed maintenance processing→Detection of reel rotation failure→Execution of reel re-acceleration processing. In this way, even if reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel re-acceleration processing is executed when the reel rotation failure is detected after that, so that the game can be smoothly progressed. can be done. In addition, as described above, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel acceleration processing is continued to be executed, and the same interrupt as in the case where the reel rotation failure does not occur When the reel acceleration process is executed for the number of times, the execution of the reel acceleration process is terminated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so that the rotation speed of the reel can easily reach a constant speed without executing the reel re-acceleration processing when reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the start of execution of the reel acceleration processing. can.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Reel drive status is updated to reel acceleration → Reel acceleration process is executed → Power is turned off during reel acceleration process → Power is restored → Reel acceleration process continues (until process) → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End reel acceleration processing → Reel drive The state is updated to the reel constant speed state→the reel constant speed maintenance process is executed→the reel rotation failure is detected→the reel reacceleration process is executed. In this way, even when the power-off process is executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state for a predetermined time. By executing the reel re-acceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index within the time limit, the game can proceed smoothly. Further, when the power-off process is executed while the reel acceleration process is being executed, the reel acceleration process is continuously executed after the power is restored, and then the reel driving state is updated to the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. The reel re-acceleration process is not executed when the sensor detects the index, and with such a configuration, the player cannot proceed with the game (cannot operate the stop button) due to the reel re-acceleration process. can be made less likely to occur. Note that power-off processing may be referred to as power-off processing.

<<Action after final stop button operation>>
In the reel-type gaming machine according to this example, after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated, the final reel (the reel that rotates to the end, also referred to as the third reel) stops, and a winning combination is achieved. Although it is configured such that game medals can be paid out when a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the action related to the payment of game medals may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts as a game in which a winning combination is won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → 1st reel is stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is stop display → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) operation is received) → Renew reel drive status to reel deceleration → Power failure occurs → 3rd reel moves (rotates) to the stop display position → Power failure is detected → Power failure processing is executed → Power is restored → Reel The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination may be stopped and displayed, and then the processing relating to the payout of the game medals may be executed as described above. By configuring in this way, in a game in which a small winning combination such as the above-described common bell is won regardless of the operation timing of the stop button, the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted. Even if a power outage occurs immediately after the power outage due to a power outage in the amusement center, regardless of the planned stop position of the third reel (even if the number of sliding frames is the maximum), the relevant power outage is detected before the power outage is detected. It can be configured so that the movement (rotation) to the planned stop position is completed. Further, when the symbol combination (for example, a common bell) that constitutes the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the power is restored, the payout of the game medals can be executed normally, so that the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts as a game in which a winning combination is won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → 1st reel is stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is stop display → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) operation is accepted)→The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→Reel rotation failure occurs→The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→The reel winning combination from the player's point of view Although the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269 (this is the case where it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, For example, in a game in which the bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is the winning role on the reels from the player's point of view, did not stop and display, but the gaming machine responded to the player's operation of the stop button. When the stop control for stop-displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by the internal processing → Execution of the processing related to the payout of the game medals. With this configuration, even if the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of the reels is not stopped and displayed from the player's point of view. Receives the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. When the stop control for stop-displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medals can be paid out, and the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. can do. The timing at which the reel rotation failure occurs is not limited to the above example. This is applicable to all the cases where the reel corresponding to the 3 stops could not be stopped at the expected stop position (also applicable to the actions related to the reel rotation failures exemplified below). In addition, in the action 2, the action in the game in which the winning combination is won is exemplified. In other words, when the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following actions are taken (in other actions, when rotation failure and power failure do not occur, the same action is taken). can also be used).
Reel rotation starts as a game in which a winning combination is won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → 1st reel is stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is stop display → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) operation is accepted)→The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→The 3rd reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player→The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player In step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal.→Processing related to payout of game medals is executed. It may be a winning combination that can win regardless (for example, a common bell), or a winning combination that may or may not win depending on the operation timing of the stop button in the winning game (for example, watermelon A, watermelon B, etc.). cherry). In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, reel backlight ( When configured to execute a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination as a flashing effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined game state is entered. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won by the player, even if the reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to execute a lamp effect. Further, in this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the planned stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop is not limited to this, and the reel corresponding to the first stop is scheduled to stop due to reel rotation failure. It may be applied when it could not be stopped at the position, or it may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop could not be stopped at the planned stop position due to reel rotation failure (similarly for other actions applicable).

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts as a game in which a winning combination is won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel button operation → 1st reel is stopped display → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is stopped display → Power interruption occurs and the stable supply of power to the gaming machine is stopped → 2nd Operate the 3rd stop button as a stop operation of the 3rd reel (accept the operation of the 3rd stop button) → update the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state → detect the power interruption → execute the processing at the time of power interruption → the 3rd reel is in the game Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view.→The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view. (This is the case when it is determined that the stop control of the reels based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bell role is won, the bell role corresponds to the winning role of the reel from the player's point of view. The symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination was not stopped and displayed, but the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination was normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player) → Execution of processing relating to payout of game medals It may be configured to operate as described above. The timing for detecting power interruption, the timing for stopping power supply to the game machine due to power interruption, the timing for judging that the symbol combination is normal in the judgment processing of step 1269, and the timing for power restoration are , The timing is not limited to the above timing, and during the period from the stop display of the second reel to the execution of the processing related to the payout of game medals, the timing of detecting the power interruption, the power interruption occurs, and the power to the gaming machine , the timing of determining that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269, and the timing of power restoration. is not able to stop at the expected stop position (the same applies to actions including power-off illustrated below). With this configuration, the power supply was interrupted immediately before (or immediately after) receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the reels could not be stopped and displayed from the player's point of view. In this case, the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is pressed at the timing when the winning combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation is accepted and the stop control for stop-displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the game medals are paid out after the power is restored (the hopper is driven to pay out the game medals). not only the payout from the ejection port by , but also the display (credit number) of the credit number display device is increased), and it is configured so that the player is unlikely to be disadvantaged can be done. It should be noted that the timing at which the supply of power to the game machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power failure is sometimes referred to as the timing at which the power failure occurs. In addition, in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won in a predetermined gaming state, reel backlight ( When configured to execute a back lamp effect corresponding to the predetermined winning combination as a flashing effect (sometimes referred to as a back lamp effect), the predetermined game state is entered. In the game in which the predetermined winning combination is won by the game, even if the power supply is cut off and the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the back lamp corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not displayed. It may be configured to perform a production. Further, in this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the third stop could not be stopped at the planned stop position was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied when the reel corresponding to the second stop could not be stopped at the planned stop position due to power failure (other actions can be applied in the same way). is). It should be noted that, in this example, "the power supply to the game machine is stopped" and "the stable power supply to the game machine is stopped" do not mean that the power supplied to the game machine is 0, but the power supply The power supply to the gaming machine may be cut off, for example, when the power supplied to the gaming machine becomes less than the power supplied when the gaming machine is in operation due to a power failure or the like.

<Action 4>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → 1st reel is stop display → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is stop display → 3rd stop button is operated to stop the 3rd reel (3rd stop button operation is accepted)→Release driving state is updated to reel deceleration state→Reel rotation failure occurs→The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→The reel becomes a winning combination from the player's point of view Although the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is determined in the determination process of step 1269 that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the stop control of the reels based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, for example In the game in which the game was lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the loss was not stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player, but the symbol corresponding to the loss was not displayed by processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player. If the stop control for stop-displaying the combination is normally executed)→The payout of the game medals is not executed. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the winning combination from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, game medals are awarded even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. can be constructed so as not to execute the payout of the coin, the game machine can be a fair game machine, and the game machine can be a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. It should be noted that the action 4 is not limited to losing only. It is supplemented that this can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Also, in such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed as seen by the player is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to rotation failure. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 5>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → The 1st reel is displayed as a stop → The 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel is displayed as a stop → The power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power failure → The 3rd reel Operation of the third stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button)→renewal of the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state→detection of power failure→execution of power failure processing→reel 3 from the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position when viewed.→The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view. This is the case where it is determined that the stop control of the reels based on the operation of the button has been completed normally. , If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player) → Power supply restored → Game medal payout is not executed. It may be configured to act as With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the power-off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the winning combination of the reels as seen from the player's point of view is handled. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, game medals are awarded even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. can be constructed so as not to execute the payout of the coin, the game machine can be a fair game machine, and the game machine can be a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game parlor. It should be noted that the action 5 is not limited to losing only. It is supplemented that this can be applied even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bell is stopped and displayed. Also, in such a case, the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed as seen by the player is a symbol combination that is inconsistent with the internal lottery result due to rotation failure. Since it is determined that the symbol combination is normal, a display determination error (unrecoverable error) does not occur (it is not determined that a display determination error has occurred).

<Action 6>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → 1st reel is stop display → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is stop display → 3rd stop button is operated to stop the 3rd reel (3rd stop button operation is accepted)→renewal of the reel drive state to reel deceleration state→reel rotation failure occurs→the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→reel bonus role from the player's point of view ( For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB hand) is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally). For example, in a game in which the bonus combination was not won and the player lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination was stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view, but the player's stop button When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of → The bonus does not start and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. It may be configured to act as With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the bonus combination from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be dealt with at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button is accepted, and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the losing combination is normally executed, the bonus is not displayed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. It is possible to configure the game machine so that it does not start, so that the game machine can be a fair game machine and the game machine can be a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the game arcade. Note that the action 6 is not limited to losing only. games, games in which watermelon is won, etc.), it is supplemented that the present invention can be applied even when the reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Incidentally, in the action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is exemplified. That is, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the following effects are obtained (applicable to other actions when rotation failure and power failure do not occur).
Reel rotation starts→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button acceptance becomes effective→First stop button is operated to stop the first reel→First reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation for the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player→the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player, and step 1269 is executed. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process.→The bonus does not start to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, in the game in which the bonus combination is won or in the inside of the bonus, if the reel rotation failure does not occur, the following operations are performed.
Reel rotation starts→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button acceptance becomes effective→First stop button is operated to stop the first reel→First reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation for the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player→The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal→execution of the bonus is started, and a freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus has been exemplified, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be bonuses where freeze is executed and bonuses where freeze is not executed. Whether or not the freeze is executed may be varied depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 7>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → The 1st reel is displayed as a stop → The 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel is displayed as a stop → The power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power failure → The 3rd reel Operation of the third stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button)→renewal of the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state→detection of power failure→execution of power failure processing→reel 3 from the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position when viewed from the player's point of view→The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view, but the combination of symbols is normal in the determination process of step 1269. (This is a case where it is determined that the stop control of the reels based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the bonus combination has not been won and the player has lost, Although the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reels, the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is performed normally by processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player. If executed) → power supply restored → bonus does not start and freezing at the time of bonus start is not executed. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the process at the time of power failure is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and a bonus combination is played on the reels from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stop-displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the losing combination is normally executed, the game is played even if the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped-displayed. The gaming machine can be constructed so as not to start the bonus of medals, and the gaming machine can be a fair gaming machine and a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the gaming parlor. Note that the action 6 is not limited to losing only. games, games in which watermelon is won, etc.), it is supplemented that the present invention can be applied even when the reel rotation failure occurs and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed. Incidentally, in the action 6, the action in the game in which the bonus combination is not won is exemplified. That is, when power failure does not occur, the following actions are taken (applicable to other actions when rotation failure and power failure do not occur).
Reel rotation starts→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button acceptance becomes effective→First stop button is operated to stop the first reel→First reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation for the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player→the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player, and step 1269 is executed. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process.→The bonus does not start to be executed, and the freeze at the start of the bonus is not executed. On the other hand, in the game in which the bonus combination is won or during the bonus, if the power supply to the reels has not been cut off, the operation will be as follows.
Reel rotation starts→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button acceptance becomes effective→First stop button is operated to stop the first reel→First reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation for the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player→The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player. It is determined that the symbol combination is normal→execution of the bonus is started, and a freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. In the above, the case where the freeze is executed at the start of the bonus is exemplified, but depending on the type of bonus (type of bonus combination), there may be bonuses where freeze is executed and bonuses where freeze is not executed. Whether or not the freeze is executed may be varied depending on the game state in which the bonus combination is won.

<Action 8>
As a game executed during the bonus or as a game in which a bonus combination is won, the reels start rotating → update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → execute the constant speed state maintenance process → enable reception of the stop button. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Stop display of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → cause reel rotation failure → move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as seen from the player Impossible→The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, the BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269→Bonus starts, In addition, it may be constructed so as to operate as described above in which the freeze at the start of the bonus is executed. With this configuration, in a game executed in a situation where a bonus has been won or a game in which a bonus combination has been won, reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, Even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stop-displayed on the reels as seen from the player, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stop-displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stop-displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped-displayed. can also be configured to start the bonus and execute a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, which is significant for a player who does not start the bonus due to reel rotation failure when the bonus should be started. To enable a player to proceed with a game without a sense of incongruity by performing a freeze at the start of a bonus in the same manner as in the case where reel rotation failure does not occur. Become.

<Action 9>
As a game executed during the bonus or as a game in which a bonus combination is won, the reels start rotating → update the reel drive state to the constant speed state → execute the constant speed state maintenance process → enable reception of the stop button. → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Stop display on the first reel → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Stop display on the second reel → Power off occurs and the game is played Power supply to the machine is stopped → 3rd stop button is operated to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel driving state is updated to reel deceleration state → Power interruption is detected → Power interruption Time processing is executed→The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (for example, BB combination) is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view However, in the determination process of step 1269, the symbol combination is determined to be normal→the power is restored→the bonus starts, and the freeze at the start of the bonus may be executed as described above. With this configuration, in a game executed in a state where a bonus has been won or a game in which a bonus combination has been won, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button. , even when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view, each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. If the operation of the stop button corresponding to is received and the stop control for stop-displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped-displayed. However, it can be configured to start the bonus and execute a freeze that is executed at the start of the bonus, and it is remarkable for the player that the bonus will not start due to a power failure in the situation where the bonus should be started. To enable a player to proceed with a game without a sense of incongruity by performing a freeze at the start of a bonus in the same manner as in the case where reel rotation failure does not occur. Become.

<Action 10>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → 1st reel is stop display → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is stop display → 3rd stop button is operated to stop the 3rd reel (3rd stop button operation is accepted)→renewal of the reel drive state to reel deceleration state→reel rotation failure occurs→the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→replay role on the reel from the player's point of view The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, but in the determination process of step 1269, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal (when it is determined that the stop control of the reels based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, For example, in a game in which the player loses, the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reels as seen from the player, but the loss is dealt with by processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the player's operation of the stop button. When the stop control for stop-displaying the symbol combination is normally executed)→Automatic betting corresponding to the stop display of the replay combination is not performed, and the re-game lamp D290 is not newly lit. may be configured. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel becomes a replaying combination from the player's point of view. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) will be displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the operation of the corresponding stop button is accepted and the stop control for stop-displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the losing combination is normally executed, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stop-displayed. Automatic betting is not performed, and the replay lamp D290 is not illuminated again. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination to which the RT state is to be shifted when stopped and displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed as seen from the player, The stop button operation corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when it becomes a loss in internal processing and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (when the symbol combination corresponding to the combination to which the RT state other than the replaying combination shifts, is stopped and displayed are equally applicable). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. Note that the action 10 is not limited only to losing, and is applied, for example, to a case where a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role is stopped and displayed due to reel rotation failure in a game in which no replay role has been won. Add what you can do. That is, when no reel rotation failure occurs, the following effects are obtained (applicable to other actions when rotation failure and power failure do not occur).
Reel rotation starts→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button acceptance becomes effective→First stop button is operated to stop the first reel→First reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation for the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player→the symbol combination corresponding to the losing reel is stopped and displayed as seen from the player, and the symbols are displayed in the determination process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal→automatic betting is not performed, and the replay lamp D290 is not lit again.
In addition, the automatic bet means that the specified number (for example, 3) of game medals betted in the game in which the replay role is won is displayed by the bet button (max bet button) when the replay role is stopped and displayed. The bet is automatically placed without the operation of or insertion of game medals from the medal slot.
On the other hand, when the reel rotation failure does not occur in the game in which the replay role is won, the following operations are performed.
Reel rotation starts→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button acceptance becomes effective→First stop button is operated to stop the first reel→First reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation for the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player→The symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed stopped on the reels as seen from the player, and the determination process of step 1269 is performed. , the symbol combination is determined to be normal → an automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up again (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 lights up). continue)
Such action can be exemplified.

<Action 11>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → The 1st reel is displayed as a stop → The 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → The 2nd reel is displayed as a stop → The power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power failure → The 3rd reel Operation of the third stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button)→renewal of the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state→detection of power failure→execution of power failure processing→reel 3 from the player Unable to move (rotate) to the expected stop position when viewed from the player's point of view→The symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view, but the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination process of step 1269 ( This is the case where it is determined that the stop control of the reels based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally. For example, in a game in which the player has lost, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view. However, if the stop control for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the loss is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine corresponding to the operation of the stop button by the player) → power supply restoration → stop display of the replay combination The corresponding automatic bet may not be made, and the replay lamp D290 may not be lit again. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the power failure processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the replaying combination is returned to the reels as viewed from the player. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and displayed, it will be lost in the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed. When the stop button operation corresponding to , and the stop control for stop-displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the losing combination is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stop-displayed. Also, no automatic bet is made, and the re-game lamp D290 does not light up again. Further, in the action 10, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination to which the RT state is to be shifted when stopped and displayed in the current RT state is stopped and displayed as seen from the player, The stop button operation corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is accepted at the timing when it becomes a loss in internal processing and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss can be stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is accepted. is normally executed, the RT state does not shift (when the symbol combination corresponding to the combination to which the RT state other than the replaying combination shifts, is stopped and displayed are equally applicable). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages in the game arcade. Note that the above action 11 is not limited to losing only, and may be applied, for example, to a case where a power failure occurs in a game in which a replay role has not been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is stopped and displayed. Supplement what you can do. That is, when power failure does not occur, the following actions are taken (applicable to other actions when rotation failure and power failure do not occur).
Reel rotation starts→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button acceptance becomes effective→First stop button is operated to stop the first reel→First reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation for the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player→the symbol combination corresponding to the losing reel is stopped and displayed as seen from the player, and the symbols are displayed in the determination process of step 1269. It is determined that the combination is normal→automatic betting is not performed, and the replay lamp D290 is not lit again. On the other hand, in the case where the power failure does not occur in the game in which the replay role is won, the following operations are performed.
Reel rotation starts→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button acceptance becomes effective→First stop button is operated to stop the first reel→First reel is displayed as stopped → the second stop button is operated to stop the second reel → the second reel is displayed as stopped → the third stop button is operated as the stop operation for the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel The drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→The third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player→The symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed stopped on the reels as seen from the player, and the determination process of step 1269 is performed. , the symbol combination is determined to be normal → an automatic bet is executed, and the replay lamp D290 lights up again (if the replay role was won in the previous game, the replay lamp D290 lights up). continue)
Such action can be exemplified.

<Action 12>
Reel rotation starts as a game won for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operate the button → 1st reel is stop display → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is stop display → Operate the 3rd stop button to stop the 3rd reel (3rd stop button) operation is received)→renewal of reel drive state to reel deceleration state→reel rotation failure occurs→3rd reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→replay on the reel from the player's point of view Although the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269.→Automatic betting corresponding to the stopped display of the replaying combination is made, and the replaying lamp D290 is turned on. It may be configured to act as described above for newly lighting. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a replay, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the replaying combination of the reels appears from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed, the replay has been won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel , middle reel, and right reel), and when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is normally executed, it corresponds to the replay role. An automatic bet is made even if the symbol combination to be played is not stopped and displayed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not stopped and displayed, the replay can be performed even if the reels are visually recognized. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually confirming whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. Further, in the action 12, when a replay combination to which the RT state is shifted when the current RT state is stop-displayed is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-play combination is stop-displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will be changed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to construct a gaming machine in which problems are unlikely to occur in the progress of the game, and to constitute a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 13>
Reel rotation starts as a game won for replay → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → 1st stop as stop operation of 1st reel Operation of the button → 1st reel is stopped display → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is stopped display → Power interruption occurs and power supply to the game machine is stopped → 3rd Operate the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accept the operation of the third stop button) → Update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → Detect power interruption → Execute power interruption processing → 3rd reel is the player Not able to move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen from the player's point of view → Although the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination is not stopped and displayed on the reels from the player's point of view, it is determined that the symbol combination is normal in the determination process of step 1269. →Return of the power supply→Automatic betting corresponding to the stop display of the replay combination is performed, and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the lottery is replay, the power-off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel is replayed from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the role is not stopped and displayed, the replay is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left (reel, middle reel, right reel) is received, and when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is normally executed, the replay role is performed. Even if the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, an automatic bet is made and the replay lamp D290 is newly lit. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause an unintended disadvantage to the player, and since the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not stopped and displayed, the replay can be performed even if the reels are visually recognized. Even if it is not possible to determine whether or not the winning combination has been won, it is possible to make it difficult to misunderstand the game situation by visually confirming whether or not the automatic bet is executed and the lighting of the re-game lamp D290. In addition, in the action 13, when a replay combination to which the RT state is to be shifted when stopped and displayed in the current RT state is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed. Even if it is not, the RT state will be changed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to construct a gaming machine in which problems are unlikely to occur in the progress of the game, and to constitute a user-friendly gaming machine.

<Action 14>
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the RT state transition (sometimes referred to as RT transition) is won → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button is accepted Enabled → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Stop display on the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Stop display on the 2nd reel → 3rd reel Operation of the third stop button as a stop operation (accepts the operation of the third stop button)→renewal of the reel drive state to reel deceleration state→reel rotation failure→the third reel moves to the expected stop position as seen from the player. (Rotation) is not possible→From the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not stopped and displayed, but the determination processing in step 1269 determines that the symbol combination is normal→RT state transitions As described above. may be configured to work. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbols corresponding to the RT transition combination are displayed on the reels from the player's point of view. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT transition combination is won by the internal processing of the gaming machine, and each reel (left reel, middle reel) is displayed at the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination can be stopped and displayed. , right reel) is received, and when the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is normally executed, the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition role is executed. Even if is not stopped and displayed, the RT state is shifted. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to progress the game along the transition of the game state inherent in the gaming machine, thereby improving the performance of the gaming facility. The manager can also operate the game machine with peace of mind. It should be noted that the RT transition hand is a hand that transitions to an RT state different from the predetermined RT state by stopping display of the symbol combination in a predetermined RT state. Whether it becomes or not can be different. That is, in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition combination, but in RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be an RT transition combination, and in RT state A, the predetermined combination A is an RT transition combination. However, in the RT state B, the predetermined combination A may not be won.

<Action 15>
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the RT state transition (sometimes referred to as RT transition) is won → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Stop button is accepted Becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button to stop the 1st reel → Display stop on the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button to stop the 2nd reel → Display stop on the 2nd reel → Power off occurs Then the power supply to the game machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power interruption is detected →execution of power-off processing →cannot move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→step 1269, although the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is not stopped and displayed from the player's point of view. In the determination process of , it is determined that the symbol combination is normal → the RT state shifts (the RT state may shift after the power is restored, or the RT state may shift before the power is restored).
It may be configured to operate as described above. With this configuration, in the game in which the RT transition combination is won, the power-off process is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the RT transition combination is matched to the reels from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, each reel (left reel, middle If the operation of the stop button corresponding to the reel, right reel) is received, and the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is normally executed, the symbol corresponding to the RT transition combination is executed. Even if the combination is not stopped and displayed, the RT state will be changed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause unintended disadvantages to the player, and it is possible to progress the game along the transition of the game state originally possessed by the gaming machine, thereby improving the performance of the gaming facility. The administrator can also operate the game machine with peace of mind.

<Action 16>
The rotation of the reels starts as a game in which the RT state transition role (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is pressed. Acceptance becomes valid → 1st stop button is operated to stop the 1st reel → 1st reel is displayed to stop → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is displayed to be stopped → 3rd Operation of the third stop button as a reel stop operation (accepting the operation of the third stop button)→Renewal of the reel driving state to reel deceleration state→Occurrence of reel rotation failure→The third reel is at the expected stop position as seen from the player. →The symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view. It may be configured to act as With this configuration, in a game in which the RT transition combination is not won, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the reel corresponds to the RT transition combination from the player's point of view. Even if the symbol combination to be played is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when push-order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player, in the AT state, the player can press the stop button according to the push-order navigation. In spite of this, even if the RT state shifts (falls down) due to reel rotation failure and the symbol combination is visually stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift, and unintended consequences for the player. To provide a game machine which does not generate profit, to progress a game along the transition of a game state originally possessed by the game machine, and to enable a manager of a game parlor to operate the game machine without anxiety.

<Action 17>
The rotation of the reels starts as a game in which the RT state transition role (sometimes referred to as an RT transition role) has not been won → the reel drive state is updated to the constant speed state → the constant speed state maintenance process is executed → the stop button is pressed. Reception becomes effective → 1st stop button is operated to stop the 1st reel → 1st reel is displayed to stop → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel is displayed to stop → power is turned off occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped → The third stop button is operated to stop the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → The reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → Power is cut off is detected→execution of power failure processing→the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→the symbol combination corresponding to the RT transition combination is stopped and displayed from the player's point of view, In the determination process of step 1269, the pattern combination is determined to be normal, and the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, in a game in which the RT transition role is not won, the power failure processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the RT transition role is displayed on the reel as seen from the player. Even when the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift. With this configuration, for example, when push-order navigation is executed to prevent the player from transitioning to the RT state, which is disadvantageous to the player, in the AT state, the player can press the stop button according to the push-order navigation. In spite of this, even if the RT state shifts (falls down) due to reel rotation failure and the symbol combination is visually stopped and displayed, the RT state does not shift, and unintended consequences for the player. To provide a game machine which does not generate profit, to progress a game along the transition of a game state originally possessed by the game machine, and to enable a manager of a game parlor to operate the game machine without anxiety.

<Action 18>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → The 1st reel is displayed to be stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → Malrotation of the reel occurs → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Play Symbol combinations corresponding to the bonus combination are displayed stationary on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel from the perspective of the player → no tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → The 1st reel is displayed to be stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → Malrotation of the reel occurs → The 2nd reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Play The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel from the perspective of the person (when the second reel moves to the planned stop position, the A combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line.) → A tenpai sound is output from the speaker. Also, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped and displayed → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed stopped on the activated line on the second reel → A tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped and displayed → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line of the second reel→the tenpai sound is not output from the speaker.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbols is the first stop. And when the bonus symbols are stopped at the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbols are ten-up, if the bonus symbols are scheduled not to be ten-up when stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the ten-pai sound is not output. As a result, even when the apparent stop positions of the reels are not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player can quickly perceive that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbols is the first stop and the second stop button. Even when the bonus symbols did not stop, in other words, when the bonus symbols did not become tenpai, when the bonus symbols were scheduled to become tenpai when stopped at the planned stop position in this example, a tenpai sound is output. As a result, even when the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly perceive the occurrence of the reel rotation failure by the output from the speaker.

<Action 19>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → The 1st reel is stopped and displayed → A power cut occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is executed. Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Symbol combinations corresponding to the bonus combinations are stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first and second reels as seen from the player → Power supply Return → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → The 1st reel is stopped and displayed → A power cut occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is executed. Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated lines of the first and second reels as viewed from the player ( When the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first and second reels.)→Power is restored→A tenpai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, as an action when power failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped and displayed → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed stopped on the activated line on the second reel → A tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped and displayed → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line of the second reel→the tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. The timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the execution of the power-off processing is completed, or after the power is restored after the occurrence of the power-off.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the power failure processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbols is the first symbol combination. In other words, even if the bonus symbols are stopped as the stop and the second stop, the tenpai sound is output when the bonus symbols are scheduled not to be tenup if the bonus symbols are stopped at the planned stop position of this example. Therefore, even when the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly perceive the occurrence of the reel rotation failure by the output from the speaker. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbols is the first stop and the second stop button. Even if the game does not stop as a stop, in other words, if the bonus symbols do not tense, if the bonus symbols are scheduled to tense when stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output. As a result, even when the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly perceive the occurrence of the reel rotation failure by the output from the speaker. In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the planned stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the planned stop position (when the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurred immediately after the start.

<Action 20>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not in the bonus and has been lost → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First reel starts Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Occurrence of reel rotation failure → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as seen from the player. Unable to move (rotate)→A symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination is statically displayed on the activated lines of the first and second reels from the player's point of view→No bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the bonus is in progress or the bonus is won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First reel starts. Operation of the first stop button as a stop operation → Stop display of the first reel → Operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → Occurrence of reel rotation failure → The second reel reaches the expected stop position as seen from the player. Unable to move (rotate) → From the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop and display on the activated lines of the first and second reels (when the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination does not stop). The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated lines of the 1st and 2nd reels.)→The sound of the tenpai confirming the bonus is output from the speaker. Also, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the bonus is in progress or the bonus is won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First reel starts. The first stop button is operated as a stop operation → the first reel is stopped and displayed → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the game A combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed stationary on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not in the bonus and has been lost → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First reel starts The first stop button is operated as a stop operation → the first reel is stopped and displayed → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the game From the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel.→Bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. Note that the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is the tenpai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols that make up the predetermined bonus symbols are stopped and displayed (tenpai) on the active line and the predetermined bonus symbols can be stopped and displayed. is the sound.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss and the bonus is not in progress, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbols forming the bonus symbols. In other words, even if the combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, even if the bonus symbols are tense, if the bonus symbols are scheduled not to be tense if the combination is stopped at the planned stop position of this example. Even if the sound of the bonus confirmation tenpai is not output and the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of the reel rotation failure, the player can quickly perceive that the reel rotation failure has occurred by the output from the speaker. can do.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the lottery is a bonus or a game executed during the bonus, the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, forming a bonus symbol. Even if the combination of symbols to be played did not stop at the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbols did not tense, if the bonus symbols stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the bonus symbols will be tense. If it is, the sound of the bonus determination tenpai is output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of reel rotation failure, the player will not be able to detect the reel rotation failure due to the output from the speaker. You can quickly detect that In this operation, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the planned stop position was illustrated, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the planned stop position (when the first stop operation was executed). It may be the case that the reel rotation failure occurred immediately after the start.

<Action 21>
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → The 1st reel is stopped and displayed → A power cut occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is executed. Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → Symbol combinations corresponding to the bonus combinations are stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first and second reels as seen from the player → Power supply Return → Tenpai sound is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → The 1st reel is stopped and displayed → A power cut occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → The 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → Power cut is detected → Power cut processing is executed. Execution → The second reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated lines of the first and second reels as viewed from the player ( When the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first and second reels.)→Power is restored→A tenpai sound is output from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above. In addition, as an action when power failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped and displayed → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player And the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed stopped on the activated line on the second reel → A tenpai sound is output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a lost game→Reel driving state is updated to constant speed state→Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed→Stop button reception becomes effective→1st stop button as stop operation of the 1st reel → 1st reel is stopped and displayed → 2nd stop button is operated to stop the 2nd reel → 2nd reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → 1st reel as seen from the player Also, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the activated line of the second reel→the tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. The timing for outputting the tenpai sound from the speaker may be before the execution of the power-off process is completed, or after the power is restored after the occurrence of the power-off.
With this configuration, in a game in which the result of the winning combination lottery is a loss, the process at the time of power failure is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the symbol combination constituting the bonus symbols is the first symbol combination. In other words, even if the bonus symbols are stopped as the stop and the second stop, if the bonus symbols are scheduled to stop at the planned stop position in this example, the bonus symbols will not be tenpai, the tenpai sound is output. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the occurrence of power failure, the player can quickly perceive that the reel is abnormal due to the power failure due to the output from the speaker. can be done. Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the power supply is cut off immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the combination of symbols constituting the bonus symbols is the first stop and the second stop. In other words, even if the bonus symbols do not tense, if the bonus symbols are scheduled to tenup if the bonus symbols stop at the planned stop position in this example, the tenpai sound is output. Therefore, even if the apparent stop position of the reels is not normal due to the occurrence of the power failure, the player can quickly perceive that the reels are abnormal due to the power failure due to the output from the speaker. can. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the planned stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the planned stop position (when the first stop operation was executed). The power-off process may be executed immediately after the power-off).

<Action 22>
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not in the bonus and has been lost → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First reel starts Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Stop display on the 1st reel → A power failure occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation for the 2nd reel → Power off Detection→execution of power failure processing→cannot move (rotate) the second reel to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→corresponds to the bonus combination on the activated lines of the first and second reels from the player's point of view The pattern combination is displayed stopped → The sound of the bonus confirmed tenpai is not output from the speaker.
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the bonus is in progress or the bonus is won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First reel starts. Operate the 1st stop button as a stop operation → Stop display on the 1st reel → A power failure occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped → Operate the 2nd stop button as a stop operation for the 2nd reel → Power off Detection→execution of power failure processing→cannot move (rotate) the second reel to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→corresponds to the bonus combination on the activated lines of the first and second reels from the player's point of view The symbol combination is not stopped and displayed (when the second reel moves to the expected stop position, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed on the activated lines of the first reel and the second reel)→Bonus is confirmed from the speaker. It may be configured to operate as described above in which a tenpai sound is output. In addition, as an action when power failure does not occur,
Reel rotation starts as a game in which the bonus is in progress or the bonus is won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First reel starts. The first stop button is operated as a stop operation → the first reel is stopped and displayed → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the game A combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed stationary on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel as viewed from the player.
Reel rotation starts as a game that is not in the bonus and has been lost → Reel driving state is updated to constant speed → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of the stop button becomes effective → First reel starts The first stop button is operated as a stop operation → the first reel is stopped and displayed → the second stop button is operated as a stop operation for the second reel → the second reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the game From the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the first reel and the second reel.→Bonus confirmation tenpai sound is not output from the speaker. Note that the bonus confirmation tenpai sound is the tenpai sound that can be output from the speaker when the symbols that make up the predetermined bonus symbols are stopped and displayed (tenpai) on the active line and the predetermined bonus symbols can be stopped and displayed. is the sound.
With this configuration, in a game where the result of the lottery is a loss and the bonus is not in progress, the power-off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the second stop button, and the bonus pattern is formed. When the symbol combination is stopped as the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbols are tense, if the bonus symbols are stopped at the planned stop position in this example, the bonus symbols are scheduled not to be tense. will not output the bonus confirmation tenpai sound, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the output from the speaker will inform the player that there is an abnormality in the reel due to the power failure. can be detected quickly.
Similarly, in a game in which the result of the winning lottery is a bonus winning combination or a game executed during the bonus, power-off processing occurs immediately after the stop operation of the second stop button is received, and the bonus symbols are displayed. Even if the constituting symbol combination did not stop at the first stop and the second stop, in other words, even if the bonus symbols did not reappear, the bonus symbols would reappear if they stopped at the expected stop position of this example. If it was planned, a bonus confirmation tenpai sound is output, and even if the apparent stop position of the reel is not normal due to the power failure, the output from the speaker will notify the player that the reel is abnormal due to the power failure. It is possible to quickly perceive that is occurring. In this action, the case where the reel corresponding to the second stop did not stop at the planned stop position was exemplified, but the reel corresponding to the first stop did not stop at the planned stop position (when the first stop operation was executed). It is also possible to execute the power-off process immediately after the power-off).

<Action 23>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reels is started as a game in which a predetermined replay combination is won.→The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state.→The constant speed state maintenance process is executed.→The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Stop display of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → cause reel rotation failure → move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as seen from the player Impossible → the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination does not stop and display → the max bet lamp does not light up.
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel rotation is started as a game in which the replay role is not won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Stop display of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → cause reel rotation failure → move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as seen from the player Impossible→symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is stopped and displayed→maximum bet lamp lights up. Also, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reels is started as a game in which a predetermined replay combination is won.→The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state.→The constant speed state maintenance process is executed.→The acceptance of the stop button becomes valid. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Stop display of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is displayed stopped → Max bet lamp does not light up
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel rotation is started as a game in which the replay role is not won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Stop display of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed →the max bet lamp lights up.
With this configuration, in a game in which a replay is won, a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stop-displayed. Similarly to the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the player can quickly perceive that the operation of the max bet button is not effective because the max bet lamp does not light up. In addition, in a game in which the replay is not won, if the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the replay is not possible. As in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the game is not stopped and displayed, the lighting of the max bet lamp allows the player to quickly perceive that the operation of the max bet button is effective.

<Action 24>
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reels is started as a game in which a predetermined replay combination is won.→The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state.→The constant speed state maintenance process is executed.→The acceptance of the stop button becomes valid. → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Stop display on the first reel → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Stop display on the second reel → Power off occurs and the game is played Power supply to the machine is stopped → 3rd stop button is operated to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel driving state is updated to reel deceleration state → Power interruption is detected → Power interruption Time processing is executed→The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is not stopped and displayed→The max bet lamp is not lit.
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel rotation is started as a game in which the replay role is not won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate the first stop button to stop the first reel → Stop display on the first reel → Operate the second stop button to stop the second reel → Stop display on the second reel → Power off occurs and the game is played Power supply to the machine is stopped → 3rd stop button is operated to stop the 3rd reel (accepts operation of the 3rd stop button) → Reel driving state is updated to reel deceleration state → Power interruption is detected → Power interruption Time processing is executed→The third reel cannot be moved (rotated) to the expected stop position from the player's point of view→The symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined replay combination is displayed in a stopped state→The max bet lamp lights up. may be configured to In addition, as an action when power failure does not occur,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the rotation of the reels is started as a game in which a predetermined replay combination is won.→The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state.→The constant speed state maintenance process is executed.→The acceptance of the stop button becomes effective. → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Stop display of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The symbol combination corresponding to the role is displayed stopped → Max bet lamp does not light up Also,
The number of credits is 1 or more, and the reel rotation is started as a game in which the replay role is not won → Reel drive state is updated to constant speed state → Constant speed state maintenance processing is executed → Acceptance of stop button becomes effective → Operate the 1st stop button as the stop operation of the 1st reel → Stop display of the 1st reel → Operate the 2nd stop button as the stop operation of the 2nd reel → Stop display of the 2nd reel → Stop operation of the 3rd reel Operate the third stop button (accept the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → move (rotate) the third reel to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the predetermined replay The combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed →the max bet lamp lights up.
With this configuration, in a game in which a replay is won, when the power-off process is executed immediately after accepting the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed. In addition, the player can quickly perceive that the operation of the max bet button is not effective because the max bet lamp does not light up, similarly to the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed. Also, in a game in which the replay is not won, even if the power-off processing is executed immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed. Similar to the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed, the lighting of the max bet lamp allows the player to quickly perceive that the operation of the max bet button is effective.

<Action 25>
A game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination has been won, and game medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination are awarded to the player to satisfy the conditions for ending the bonus. Rotation starts→reel drive state updated to constant speed state→execution of constant speed state maintenance processing→acceptance of stop button becomes effective→operate first stop button to stop reel 1→stop reel 1 Display -> operate the second stop button to stop the second reel -> display that the second reel is stopped -> operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accept the operation of the third stop button) -> reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state → reel rotation failure occurs → the third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as seen from the player → the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not stop and display → the bonus ends, It may be configured to operate as described above in which the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. Also, as an action when reel rotation failure does not occur,
A game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination has been won, and game medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination are awarded to the player to satisfy the conditions for ending the bonus. Rotation starts→reel drive state updated to constant speed state→execution of constant speed state maintenance processing→acceptance of stop button becomes effective→operate first stop button to stop reel 1→stop reel 1 Display -> operate the second stop button to stop the second reel -> display that the second reel is stopped -> operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accept the operation of the third stop button) -> reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→the third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player→the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed stopped→the bonus is completed, and the freeze is executed when the bonus is completed. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, and the reel rotation failure occurs immediately after receiving the stop operation of the third stop button, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. Also in this case, as in the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the bonus is ended and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, so that the player can immediately know that the bonus has ended normally. To provide a game machine which can be perceived and which does not cause a sense of incongruity in the progress of a game.

<Action 26>
A game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination has been won, and game medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination are awarded to the player to satisfy the conditions for ending the bonus. Rotation starts→reel drive state updated to constant speed state→execution of constant speed state maintenance processing→acceptance of stop button becomes effective→operate first stop button to stop reel 1→stop reel 1 Display→Operating the second stop button as the operation to stop the second reel→Displaying that the second reel is stopped→Stopping power supply to the game machine due to power failure→Third stop button as the operation to stop the third reel is operated (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → update the reel drive state to the reel deceleration state → detect power failure → execute power failure processing → move the third reel to the expected stop position as seen from the player ( →The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not statically displayed.→The bonus is over, and the freeze is executed at the end of the bonus. In addition, as an action when power failure does not occur,
A game in which a bonus is being executed, a winning combination has been won, and game medals corresponding to the winning of the winning combination are awarded to the player to satisfy the conditions for ending the bonus. Rotation starts→reel drive state updated to constant speed state→execution of constant speed state maintenance processing→acceptance of stop button becomes effective→operate first stop button to stop reel 1→stop reel 1 Display -> operate the second stop button to stop the second reel -> display that the second reel is stopped -> operate the third stop button to stop the third reel (accept the operation of the third stop button) -> reel drive state is updated to the reel deceleration state→the third reel moves (rotates) to the expected stop position as seen from the player→the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed stopped→the bonus is completed, and the freeze is executed when the bonus is completed. It may be configured to operate as described above.
With this configuration, the winning combination is won in the final bonus game, and immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is accepted, the power-off process is executed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed, the bonus is terminated and the freeze at the end of the bonus is executed, so that the player can recognize that the bonus has been normally terminated. To provide a game machine which can be detected quickly and which does not cause a sense of incongruity in the progress of a game.

In addition, from the configuration regarding the reel acceleration process in the reel-type gaming machine according to the present example described above,
Execution period of reel acceleration processing when reel rotation failure does not occur during execution of reel acceleration processing = A
Execution period of the reel acceleration process until the reel rotation failure occurs when the reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration processing = B
Execution period of the reel acceleration process after the reel rotation failure occurs when the reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the reel acceleration process = C
and
A=B+C
is configured to be
again,
The number of times reel acceleration processing interrupt processing is executed when reel rotation failure does not occur during execution of reel acceleration processing = D
Number of interrupt processing executions of reel acceleration processing until reel rotation failure occurs when reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing = E
In the case where reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing, the number of interrupt processing execution times for reel acceleration processing after occurrence of reel rotation failure = F
and
D=E+F
is configured to be

Next, FIG. 36 is a flow chart of power-off processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, at step 1902, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M saves the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off flag (for example, updates the power-off flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to ON). Next, in step 1906, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and error detection information (for example, the calculated The lower 1 byte of the obtained checksum or its complement) is set in the checksum area. Next, at step 1912, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, at step 1914, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes infinite loop processing to wait for reset.

Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of the pushing order display of the reel-type game machine according to this example. The table on the figure shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the push order navigation to be executed (information related to the push order, in this example, determined by the main control board M and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table showing correspondence with. For example, it indicates that the instruction number is "A5" when "middle→right→left" is notified as the pressing order. Next, the left side of the drawing shows the pressing order display device D270, the advantageous interval display YH, and the effect display device S40 when the pressing order is "left→middle→right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A1"). The image displayed in the Here, the pressing order display device D270 of this example is of a 7-segment display type, and also serves as a payout number display device. Also, when medals are paid out, the number of medals paid out is displayed in a two-digit number on the push order display device D270. Here, when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed with a two-digit numerical value, the display on the push order display device D270 will not be the number of medals to be paid out or the push order. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is a navigation display. Therefore, in order to distinguish between the number of medals to be paid out and the push order navigation display, the push order display device D270 should display "=" in the left digit like "=1". By configuring, when the display of the push order display device D270 is a two-digit numerical value, it is the display of the number of payout medals, and as the display of the push order display device D270, the left side is "=" and the right side is a number. If there is, it is configured to be able to determine that it is the display of the push order navigation, so as to prevent misrecognition by the player. Furthermore, in the advantageous section indicator YH provided in the lower right portion of the push order display device D270, a lamp is lit to indicate that the current game section is the "advantageous section". At the same time, a display of "40 remaining games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" (or "AT state") is displayed on the effect display device S40. Also, the right side of the drawing shows an image displayed on the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the pressing order is "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3"). there is In addition, since the current game section is the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH lights up, and the display of "remaining 25 games" indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is displayed on the effect display device S40. are displayed. In addition, a combination with a pressing order (among the conditional devices that differ in the combination that is stopped and displayed depending on the order of reel stop, a conditional device that accompanies the payout of medals, for example, a bell) and a replay combination with a pressing order (depending on the order of reel stop) Of the conditional devices with different combinations to be stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the conditional device related to the replaying combination may be different, or the pressing order display device D270.
The display method of is not limited to 7 segments. For example, an LED indicator may be used to light a plurality of LEDs according to the lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number to give an instruction. good. It should be noted that an advantageous section display YH may be provided in the lower right portion of the credit amount display device D200. In this case, it is preferable that the advantageous interval indicator YH is turned on until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes valid. When the player quits the game, he/she will confirm whether or not there are any remaining medals by visually recognizing the credit number display device D200. Then, if medals remain, the settlement button D60 is operated. In other words, by turning on the light before the settlement button D60 becomes effective, it is possible to prevent the game from being erroneously stopped even though it is in the "advantageous section" from the next game, thereby providing a user-friendly gaming machine. be able to.

In addition, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section display YH is not limited to this example, and a section display similar to the advantageous section display YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two seven segments (the section display is It may be a configuration with two), and in the case of such a configuration, when the left section indicator lights up, it notifies that the current game section is a "normal section", and on the other hand, the right side It may be configured to notify that the current game section is the "advantageous section" when the section indicator lights up. In addition, the “normal section” and the “advantageous section” are distinguished by the color and lighting mode when the section indicator is lit (for example, “normal section” is set to “green” and “advantageous section” is set to “red”). Alternatively, it may be configured such that it lights up in the "normal section" and "blinks" in the "advantageous section"). Furthermore, it is configured to change the display mode of the section indicator according to the "game during BB during AT", "BB state during AT", "AT precursor state", "state during AT", etc. in the "advantageous section". may Furthermore, it may be configured such that the current game section being the "waiting section" can be recognized separately from the "normal section" and the "advantageous section". However, regarding the distinction between the "normal section" and the "advantageous section", use different section indicators to make it easier to distinguish, so that the player can recognize whether the current game section is the "advantageous section". It is preferable to make it easy to

In addition, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation". A configuration (not informing the player of the disadvantage that the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is reduced when the profit is relatively low for the player) may be adopted. However, even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to turn on the section indicator to inform the player that the "advantageous section" is in progress. At the same time, it is preferable that the section display is configured to be controlled by the main control board M side, and that the section display is installed at a position where the display can be easily viewed by the player.

Next, referring to FIGS. 38 to 57, the control processing executed on the sub control board S side will be described.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing sub-side program start processing. This sub-side program start processing is called and executed when the power is turned on.

First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits interrupts. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM and calculation of checksum.

Next, in step 2008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. If Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes 1-command processing, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power supply was cut off during operation, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the recovery is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permits an interrupt, and was executed when the power was cut off. Return to 1 command processing.

On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined that both checksum values do not match in the determination process of step 2008, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. to run. After executing the process of step 2014, or in the case of No in step 2010, the process is shifted to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub-main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing sub-main loop processing. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

First, at step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, at step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts operating the watchdog timer. Next, at step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S permits interrupts. Next, at step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes command reception processing. This command reception process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M. FIG.

Next, at step 2250, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes 1-command processing, which will be described later. This one-command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control means 100 . Specific processing will be described later. At step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined period of time, for example 16 ms, has elapsed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed, the process returns to step 2102 . Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to the processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing sub-side power-off processing executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects power-off.

First, at step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. At step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start processing is being executed. If Yes in step 2204 , the process proceeds to step 2210 . On the other hand, if No at step 2204, at step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates the checksum. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (checksum calculation result, address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210. FIG.

Next, at step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether 500 ms has passed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has passed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, if No at step 2210, at step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S updates the number of occurrences of momentary interruption. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the watchdog timer operation and returns to the process that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one-command processing called and executed in the processing of step 2250 in FIG.

Next, at step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is time to operate the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is time to operate the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the effect related decision processing at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. do. Next, at step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start lever operation process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100. FIG.

Next, if Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the start lever operation timing, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2254 whether it is not the first reel stop acceptance timing. If No in step 2254, in other words, if it is time to accept the first reel stoppage, then in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine for receiving the first reel stoppage, which will be described later. and go to step 7100 .

Next, if Yes at step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop reception timing, at step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is not the second reel stop reception timing. . If No at step 2258, in other words, if it is time to accept the second reel stop, at step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for accepting the second reel stop, which will be described later. and go to step 7100 .

Next, if Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop reception timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is not the third reel stop reception timing. . If No in step 2262, in other words, if it is time to accept the third reel stop, then in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls a subroutine for determination processing related to third reel stop effect, which will be described later. to run. Next, at step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a third reel stop accepting process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 7100. FIG.

Next, if Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the stop display pattern. . In the case of Yes in step 2266, in other words, when it is the stop timing of the stop display pattern, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes stop display pattern time processing (not shown), and step 7100 is executed. transition to On the other hand, if No in step 2266 , in other words, if it is not the stop timing of the stop display pattern, the CPUSC of the sub control board S immediately proceeds to step 7100 .

Next, at step 7100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes menu screen display control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 7200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes standby screen display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2110).

Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing the effect related determination process at the time of start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 3000 of FIG. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the AT state of the game is a "high probability state". If Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the high security failure counter value command received from the main control board M side, determines the number of remaining high security failure games (high probability state) but how many more games are guaranteed). Next, at step 3050 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine for deciding whether to execute a battle effect, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 3006 . Next, at step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is decided that the battle effect will be executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks the current stay stage, the state regarding the AT of the game, the state regarding the AT of the next game, and the number of the current high security obstacle games. Based on this, the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44) is referred to execute a stay stage transition lottery (lottery to determine whether or not to change the stay stage), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). Incidentally, even if No in step 3006, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No at step 3002, at step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the AT state of the game is "low probability state". In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44 ), a stay stage transition lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, if No at step 3010, at step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state regarding the AT of the game is "state during AT". In the case of Yes at step 3014, at step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of effect determination processing during AT, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state regarding the AT of the game is the "resurrection possible/impossible effect state". In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of the restoration possibility/impossibility determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the advance notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the AT state of the current game, and the AT state of the next game. It decides and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). Incidentally, the stay stage is an effect mainly composed of a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and is configured so that one of the stay stages is always set. It should be noted that if the stay stage is different, the tendencies of various effects such as background effects, advance notice effects, etc. will be different.

Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing the battle effect execution enable/disable determination process called and executed in the process of step 3050 of FIG. First, at step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of high-retention obstacle games is 4 or more. In the case of Yes at step 3052, at step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is BB hand. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S draws a lottery (whether or not to execute a battle effect (win)) that wins with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). lottery). Next, at step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lottery for execution of the battle effect executed at step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes at step 3058, at step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect of the game to be battle effect (win), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines an effect other than the battle effect for the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). Here, the battle production is a continuous production that is executed over a plurality of games. It is configured such that winning is definite. In addition, the configuration related to the battle production is not limited to this, and if you have won the BB role even if you have not won the AT lottery ), the battle effect (victory) may be executed.

If No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the conditional device for the game is a rare combination. Here, in this example, the rare roles are Winning-C (Cherry), Winning-D (Watermelon A) and Winning-E (Watermelon B). It's becoming That is, the player has a sense of anticipation that the rare combination is stopped and displayed, and that the BB combination is simultaneously won. , a lottery for whether or not to execute a guess battle effect (lottery for whether or not to execute a battle effect (defeat)) that wins with a predetermined probability (in this example, it is 1/3, which is a probability lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056). ). Next, at step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the lottery for execution of the gacha battle effect executed at step 3066 has been won. In the case of Yes at step 3068, at step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect of the game to be battle effect (defeat), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). Further, if No in step 3052, step 3064 or step 3068, in step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines an effect other than the battle effect for the game, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executed even in the "normal section".

Thus, when the number of high-retention obstacle games is a predetermined number or more, for example, when it is 4 or more, a continuous effect such as a battle effect can be executed over a plurality of games, while the number of high-retention obstacle games is a predetermined number. If it is less than the number, for example, if it is less than 4, it is configured not to execute a continuous effect such as a battle effect, so even though the continuous effect is being executed, the "low probability state" is entered. The transition (setting the "normal section") prevents the advantageous section indicator YH from turning off, and the battle production is only performed when it is possible to ensure that the advantageous section indicator YH is lit until the battle production ends. By executing this, a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided without impairing the player's sense of expectation for BB winning.

Further, when a rare role is won, a continuous effect such as a battle effect (defeat) can be executed, so that the execution frequency of the battle effect can be ensured and the game can be progressed with a sense of anticipation at all times. can be done.

Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. It should be noted that the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is only an excerpt. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in a "low probability state" and when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high securing obstacle games is 4 or more. There are three types of tables: a table and a table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high securing obstacle games is 3 or less.

In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the "low probability state", the relationship between the current stay stage, the AT-related state of the next game, the stay stage of the corpse game, and the corresponding set number is stipulated. In the case of the "low probability state", the current stay stage consists of two types of production stages, the desert stage and the city stage, and the transition stage is the desert stage, the city stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage. It consists of four types of production stages. There are three states regarding the AT of the next game: "low probability state", "normal BB internal game", and "high probability state".

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to "low probability state" or "normal BB internal game", 0 to 979 are assigned as a setting number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. Also, if the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB internal game", the number 980 to 999 is assigned.

Furthermore, if the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB inside game", the setting number in the case of shifting from the town stage to the desert stage in the game is from 0 to 19 are assigned. If the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state" or "normal BB inside game", 20 to 999 are assigned as the number when the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

In addition, 0 to 249 are assigned as input numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the current game when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the transition to the "high-probability state" occurs in the next game. 250 to 499 are assigned as input numbers in the case of transition from the desert stage to the city stage in the current game when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the transition to the "high probability state" occurs in the next game. If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game is to transition to the "high probability state", 500 to 749 are assigned as the set numbers when transitioning from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. 750 to 999 are assigned as input numbers in the case of transition from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the transition to the "high probability state" occurs in the next game.

If the current stay stage is the town stage and the player moves to the "high probability state" in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as input numbers in the case of the transition from the town stage to the desert stage in the current game. 250 to 499 are assigned as input numbers when the town stage is maintained in the game when the current stay stage is the town stage and the transition to the "high probability state" occurs in the next game. 500 to 749 are assigned as a set number when the current stay stage is the town stage and the transition to the "high probability state" is made in the next game, and the transition from the town stage to the conference room stage is made in the game. 750 to 999 are assigned as a set number when the current stay stage is the town stage and the transition to the "high probability state" is made in the next game, and the transition from the town stage to the cave stage is made in the game.

The stay stage determination table used when the game is in a "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 4 or more defines the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the corpse game, and the set number. It is As the current stay stage and transition stage, there are four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

0 to 879 are assigned as input numbers when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game. 880 to 929 are assigned as input numbers when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the town stage. 930 to 959 are assigned as input numbers when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the meeting room stage. 960 to 999 are assigned as input numbers when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game transitions from the desert stage to the cave stage.

0 to 879 are assigned as input numbers when the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage. 880 to 929 are assigned as the set numbers when the current stay stage is the town stage and the town stage is maintained in the game. 930 to 959 are assigned as the set numbers when the current stay stage is the city stage and the transition from the city stage to the conference room stage in the game. 960 to 999 are assigned as the set numbers when the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts from the town stage to the cave stage.

0 to 49 are assigned as set numbers when the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the game transitions from the conference room stage to the desert stage. If the current stay stage is the meeting room stage and the game moves from the meeting room stage to the city stage, 50 to 99 are assigned as the set numbers. 100 to 949 are assigned as set numbers when the current stay stage is the meeting room stage and the meeting room stage is maintained in the game. 950 to 999 are assigned as set numbers when the current stay stage is the meeting room stage and the game transitions from the meeting room stage to the cave stage.

0 to 49 are assigned as input numbers when the current stay stage is the cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the desert stage. If the current stay stage is the cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the town stage, 50 to 99 are assigned as input numbers. 100 to 199 are assigned as the set numbers when the current stay stage is the cave stage and the game shifts from the cave stage to the conference room stage. 200 to 999 are assigned as the set numbers when the current stay stage is the cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game.

The stay stage determination table used when the game is a "high probability state" and the number of high secured obstacle games is 3 or less includes the current stay stage, the state related to AT in the next game, and the stay stage of the corpse game. , and the relationship with the set number is specified. As the current stay stage and transition stage, there are four types of production stages: a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. There are three states, "high probability state", "advantageous BB internal game", and "low probability state", as the state regarding the AT of the next game.

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", 0 to 979 are assigned as a setting number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", 980 to 999 will be set as the setting number when shifting from the desert stage to the town stage in the game. assigned.

If the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", 0 to 19 are set as the number to shift from the city stage to the desert stage in that game. assigned. If the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", 20 to 999 are assigned as a setting number when the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game", the setting number in the case of shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game is 0 ~ 29 have been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", the set number when shifting from the conference room stage to the town stage in the game is 30 or more. 59 have been assigned. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game", the setting number when the conference room stage is maintained in the game is 60 to 999. assigned.

If the current stay stage is the cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB internal game", 0 to 29 are set as the number to shift from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. assigned. If the current stay stage is the cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game", 30 to 59 are set as the number when shifting from the cave stage to the town stage in the game. assigned. If the current stay stage is the cave stage and the next game shifts to "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game", the setting number when shifting from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game is 60 to 99. is assigned. If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to a "high probability state" or "advantageous BB inside game", 100 to 999 are assigned as a setting number when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

If the current stay stage is the desert stage and the transition to the "low probability state" is made in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the input numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. 500 to 999 are assigned as input numbers in the case of transition from the desert stage to the city stage in the game when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the transition to the "low probability state" is made in the next game.

If the current stay stage is the town stage and the player moves to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as an input number in the case of the transition from the town stage to the desert stage in the current game. 500 to 999 are assigned as a set number when the town stage is maintained in the game when the current stay stage is the town stage and the transition to the "low probability state" is made in the next game.

If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the transition to the "low probability state" is made in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as a set number in the case of transition from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the current game. If the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the "low probability state", 500 to 999 are assigned as the set numbers for the transition from the conference room stage to the town stage in the game.

If the current stay stage is the cave stage and the player moves to the "low probability state" in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the input numbers for the transition from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. 500 to 999 are assigned as a set number when the current stay stage is the cave stage and the transition to the low-probability state occurs in the next game, and the transition from the cave stage to the town stage is performed in the game.

Thus, when it is in the "low probability state", two stages, the desert stage or the city stage, can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when it is a "high probability state", four stages of desert stage, town stage, conference room stage, and cave stage can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, four stay stages can be selected in the "advantageous section", while two stay stages can be selected in the "normal section", and can be selected in the "normal section". Stay stage 2 can also be selected in the "advantageous section". By configuring in this way, even in the "normal section" where there is no expectation of winning the AT lottery, by selecting the stay stage that can be the stay stage in the "advantageous section", it is possible to stay in the "normal section" without getting bored. You can proceed with the game machine. Also, when shifting from "high probability state" to "low probability state", that is, when "advantageous section" becomes "normal section", at the stage of "advantageous section", "normal section" is selected By selecting the performance stage in advance, it becomes difficult for the player to discriminate the transition from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section", and the game can be continued while maintaining expectations.

In addition, some of the production stages selected in the "normal section" overlap with the production stages selected in the "advantageous section" (a production stage that can be selected in the "normal section" but not have).

Further, the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-security obstacle games is 4 or more and the stay stage determination table used when the number of high-security obstacle games is 3 or less are differentiated, and the number of high-security obstacle games If there are fewer (below 3 games), do not move to a stay stage with a high degree of expectation (for example, desert stage → conference room stage), which is an "advantageous section" than the current stay stage. By constructing the stage, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed with the "normal section" after a small number of games even though the stage has shifted to a stay stage with a higher degree of expectation. The stay stages are arranged in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" from the lowest expected "advantageous section" (difficult to select in the "advantageous section").

In addition, the configuration of the stay stage is not limited to this example. It may be configured so as to suggest the degree of expectation. As an example, it is configured so that the stay stage can be shifted in the game in which the BB role or rare role is won (when the BB role wins the AT lottery and when the single rare role is won and the AT lottery is not executed ), configured so that the level of expectation for winning the AT lottery differs depending on the stage of stay, and in order of low level of expectation, "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage". Alternatively, it may be configured so that the degree of expectation for winning the role of BB is different depending on the transitioned stay stage, and configured in the order of "desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage" in descending order of expectation. Good (for example, when moving to the conference room stage, it becomes certain that the BB internal lottery or the AT lottery has been won, etc.).

Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing the effect determination process during AT called and executed in the process of step 3100 of FIG. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is 3 games or less. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the AT final game. In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the continuation lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the effect related to the game to the AT continuation fan effect (success) (AT continues and the initial value is set to the AT counter M60, in other words Then, an effect to notify that the state related to the AT in the next game is "AT in progress state") or an AT continuation agitation effect (failure) (it is certain that the AT counter M60 is set to the initial value while the AT continues). Instead, it decides on an effect for notifying that the state regarding the AT in the next game will be the "state during AT" or the "state for revival possible/impossible effect"), and the process proceeds to step 3126 . Here, when the continuation lottery is won, the AT continuation agitation performance (success) versus the AT continuation agitation performance (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4:1. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the continuation lottery is won, there is a case where the AT continuation agitation effect (failure) is executed, and in such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game, the resurrection effect (success) is executed, and the player feels as if he or she has won the resurrection lottery (actually, the player has won the continuation lottery, and the main control board M As for the control on the side, it is the same as when the AT continuation fan effect (success) is executed). By configuring in this way, it is rare to win the revival lottery in the ``resurrection possible/impossible effect state'' {won the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game}, but win the continuation effect. By configuring so that the resurrection performance (success) can be executed even when the resurrection performance is executed, the ratio of execution of the resurrection performance (success) can be increased, and the player expects the resurrection performance. can heighten your senses.

Further, if No in step 3106 , in step 3110 , the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an AT continuation fan effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126 . Further, if No in step 3104 , in step 3112 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the AT final stage effect as the effect for the game, and proceeds to step 3126 . Further, if No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the next game in which the AT continuation fan effect (failure) has been executed. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the effect related to the game to the resurrection effect (success) (similar to the resurrection effect (success) executed in the “resurrection possible/impossible effect state”). , and in this process, it is determined to be an effect related to the continuation of the “AT state”), and the process proceeds to step 3126 . On the other hand, if step 3114 is No, the process proceeds to step 3126 as well.

Next, at step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been increased in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds an effect related to the game (an effect to notify that the number of AT remaining games has been added, for example, "+50 GET" etc.). ), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an effect during AT (an effect executed during AT such as "AT state"), and performs the next process ( processing of step 2300).

Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing the restoration availability effect determination process called and executed in the process of step 3150 in FIG. First, at step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the revival lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the effect related to the game to a revival effect (success) (a effect mode similar to the effect executed in step 3116 described above, It is an effect that informs that you have won the revival lottery in the "resurrection possibility state", and in the next game, it will shift to the "AT state" and the initial value will be set in the AT counter M60). It decides and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3152, in step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the effect related to the game to the revival effect (failure) It is an effect to notify that effect, and the state will be shifted to the "low probability state" in the next game), and the process shifts to the next process (process of step 2300).

In addition, as described above, the "resurrection possible or not effect state" is also an advantageous section, that is, if you win the continuous lottery in the AT final game (the final game of "AT state") which is the "advantageous section" Even if there is not, the ``advantageous interval'' is extended in the next game, ie, the ``resurrection permission/inhibition effect state'', so the player confirms whether or not the advantageous interval indicator YH is illuminated. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the resurrection effect will be successful only by doing so, and attention is paid to the result of the resurrection effect. In addition, as described above, the execution mode of lottery relating to AT is different between the "AT in progress state" and the "restoration possible/impossible effect state". That is, the next game in which the continuation lottery in which the resurrection effect (successful) is executed is won and the game in which the resurrection lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed are different in the execution mode of the lottery relating to AT. .

In addition, in this embodiment, in the next game after the AT state is finished, the game is shifted to the ``resurrection possibility state'' of one game, and the revival lottery is executed in the ``resurrection possibility state''. By doing so, both the execution game of the resurrection effect (success) and the execution game of the resurrection effect (failure) are set as the "advantageous section", that is, the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. Although it is possible to prevent the determination of whether or not the AT is to end without checking the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) In one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the AT-related state is set to "AT state", in one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the resurrection flag is turned on, and in the game before the resurrection lottery is executed, the resurrection is performed. By turning off the flag, a different lottery mode for AT is provided.
(2) It is configured not to execute the resurrection lottery, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether or not the "AT state" ends depending on whether or not the continuation lottery is won, and The execution timing of the continuation lottery is set to a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game of the set being executed, etc.). With such a configuration, a resurrection effect (success) and a resurrection effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub-control board S side in the AT final game. As an example of production, "previous game of AT final game: AT continuation agitation production (success) → AT final game: production to the effect that AT of the next set is started", "previous game of AT final game: AT continuation agitation Production (continue to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuation agitation production (success)”, “AT previous game: AT continuation agitation production (failure) → AT final game: resurrection production (success)”, “AT The game before the final game: AT continuation provocation effect (failure)→AT final game: resurrection effect (failure)”, etc. may be executed. That is, the main control board M side determines whether or not the "AT state" continues (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuation lottery is won. It may be configured to execute an AT continuation agitation effect or a resurrection effect.
(3) In a game in which a resurrection effect (success) is executed, the resurrection effect (success) is executed until a predetermined timing in the same effect mode as the resurrection effect (failure), and the resurrection effect (success) is executed from the predetermined timing. , that is, to inform the player that the AT will continue at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, the predetermined timing is
(1) It is the bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed, and can be executed when the continuation lottery is won.
(2) It is the start lever operation timing related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed, and when the start lever operation timing comes, the effect in the same effect mode as the resurrection effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) Timing of pressing the stop button that is the first stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing of turning on the first stop),
(4) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button that is the first stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing of turning the first stop ON→OFF),
(5) Timing of pressing the stop button that is the second stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing of turning on the second stop),
(6) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button, which is the second stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (second stop on→off timing),
(7) Timing of pressing the stop button that is the third stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing of turning on the third stop),
(8) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button that is the third stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing of turning the third stop ON→OFF),
etc.,
(9) bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) relating to the next game after the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed;
(10) start lever operation timing for the next game after the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed;
etc. In addition, in the case where it is configured to determine which timing among various timings such as the above (1) to (10) by lottery, after the timing of pressing the stop button that is the first stop Since the advantageous zone indicator YH is continuously illuminated even when neither the continuation lottery nor the revival lottery is won, the player presses the stop button, which is the third stop, and then the stop button. The player can play the game with a sense of anticipation that the AT will continue until the timing when is released or the start lever operation timing for the next game after the game in which the resurrection effect is executed.

<Processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing the start lever operation processing that is called and executed in the processing of step 2300 of FIG.

Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the AT-related state is the AT-in-progress state. If Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the AT-related state is the AT-in-progress state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out and executes AT-in-progress processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. , to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2302, in other words, if the state regarding AT is not the state during AT, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state regarding AT is the special precursor state. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, when the state regarding AT is the special precursor state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads out special precursor processing at the time of start lever operation, which will be described later. Execute and move to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2304, in other words, if the state regarding the AT is not the "predictive state of specialization", in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state regarding the AT is the "additional specialization state". ” is determined. If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state regarding AT is the "addition specialization state", in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the addition specialization processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. Read and execute, and move to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2306, in other words, if the state regarding AT is not the "additional specialized state", in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state regarding AT is "advantageous BB inside". It is determined whether or not it is a game. If Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state of the AT is "advantageous BB internal game", in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a subroutine of advantageous BB internal processing when the start lever is operated. is called and executed to move to the next process (process of step 2110).

If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state regarding AT is not "advantageous BB inside game", in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the RT state is "RT1". judge. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is "RT1", in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the state for AT is "no push order navigation" ("push order navigation"). It is a state related to AT that does not occur, and it is determined whether it is a "low probability state", "normal BB inside game", "normal BB state", etc.). If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state for the AT is no push order navigation, then in step 2312 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. In addition, as described above, when the sub-control board S side receives the reverse-press instruction command, reverse-press avoidance command, forward-press instruction command, and forward-press avoidance command, it is not configured to execute an effect related to the push-order navigation. When the AT addition lottery is won, the main control board M sends a command indicating that the AT addition lottery has been won and the number of AT addition games to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command. Alternatively, the sub-control board S side may be configured to determine the performance execution timing and performance mode regarding the push order navigation.

In the case of Yes in step 2312, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment as a push order navigation display in the first number display mode group. is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). Thus, in the present embodiment, when the AT counter value becomes 0 after the number of games has passed from the state of "RT1" and "AT state", the state is shifted to "RT1" and "low probability state". In the case (before the replay 04 is stopped and displayed), if you win the reverse push white 7 replay or the forward push black 7 replay, the number of AT games will not be added, so white seven or black seven It is configured so that the pressing order that does not form a straight line can be navigated. Also, when the number of games has passed from the state of "RT1" and "AT state" and the AT counter value becomes 0, and the state shifts to "RT1" and "low probability state", the "advantageous section , the push order navigation can occur in the game in which the push order bell is won, but the push order navigation may not occur in the game in which the push order replay is won.

If No in step 2308, No in step 2310, or No in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an effect image and a background image in step 2316 based on the state of the AT, and then (processing of step 2110).

<Processing during AT when the start lever is operated>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT at the time of start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 2350 of FIG.

Next, at step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the condition device related to the game, at step 2354, confirms the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and at step 2356, the instruction number Check the commands related to In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side, When sending the effect group number in a state related to AT where the push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is a "normal section"), even if you do not send a command related to the instruction number good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and the effect group number and the instruction number are transmitted. Based on such a command, it may be possible to comprehend that the pressing order bell (or pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order. For example, the same display mode group is used for the push order navigation display when the push order bell is executed and the push order navigation display for the push order replay (for example, the push order is indicated by numbers and the display colors related to the numbers are the same). ) can be applied when configured to be displayed. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when the effect display device S40 executes the push order navigation, an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which a different performance image is displayed when the push order navigation is executed and when the push order navigation is executed according to the push order replay.

Next, at step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the conditional device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pushing order bell is one of the above-mentioned win-A1 to win-A6.

If Yes at step 2358, in other words, if the conditional device of the game is the push order bell, at step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the pressing orders of 1 is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which the first stop button, the second stop button and the third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win prize-A1, which is the pressing order bell, the numbers suggesting the pressing order corresponding to "left → middle → right", which is the pressing order in which the maximum number of payouts can be obtained, are circled. Display in display mode.

Next, if No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the condition device of the game is the push order replay. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order replay is any one of replay-D1 to D3.

If Yes at step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, at step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays push order replay as push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the three alternative pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the number 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

If No at step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, at step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward-press avoidance command and the reverse-press avoidance command are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment in the first numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processing of steps 2360, 2364 or 2368 described above, and then, in step 2370, displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40.

Next, at step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of AT remaining games is 3 games or less. If Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the AT remaining game number is 3 games or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the AT remaining game number in the display mode B (display mode described later). A) is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a less conspicuous display mode than A).

Next, at step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2376, in other words, when the forward pressing instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the pressing order navigation display in step 2378. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

If No in step 2376 or if the process of step 2378 has been executed, in step 2380 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display in step 2382. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

If the result of step 2380 is No, or if the process of step 2382 is executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S moves to the next process (process of step 2110).

If No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of AT remaining games is four or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of AT remaining games in the display mode A (the display mode described above). B) is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a more conspicuous display mode than B). Here, when the number of games is 4 or more, display mode A is used, and when the number of games is 3 or less, display mode B is used.

Next, at step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a forward push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2386, in other words, when the forward pressing instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to "left→middle→right" as the pressing order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be performed is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40.

If No in step 2386, or if the process of step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a reverse push instruction command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2390, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to "right→middle→left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order to be performed is displayed as an arrow image on the effect display device S40.

In step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (process of step 2110) if No or if the process of step 2392 is executed. Thus, when the AT remaining game number is small, in other words, when the AT remaining game number is displayed in the display mode B that is more conspicuous than the display mode A, the forward press instruction command or the reverse Even if the push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim for 7!" along with the image of the arrow is not executed, and white 7 and black 7 are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line. It was configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, when the number of AT remaining games is small, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player that the number of AT remaining games is small. In this case, the visibility of the display of the number of AT remaining games in the display mode B can be configured so as not to hinder the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games by the display of the arrow image or "Aim for 7!". Similarly, a continuous effect (for example, , battle production), the visibility of the battle production is not hindered by configuring so that the image of the arrow and "Aim for 7!" are not displayed during the execution of the battle production. be able to. Further, with such a configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games on the effect display device S40 becomes 0 and the effect of losing the battle effect and ending the "AT state" is displayed, the battle effect is still in progress. If a forward press instruction command or a reverse press instruction command is received in , the forward press instruction command or reverse press instruction command will be issued at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the end of the "AT state" is displayed. Inform the number of AT games added based on the instruction command (based on winning of forward push black 7 replay or reverse push white 7 replay). Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of AT games has been added at a later timing, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

<Specialized precursor processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation special precursor process that is called and executed in the process of step 2400 in FIG.

Next, at step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the condition device related to the game, at step 2404, confirms the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and at step 2406, the instruction number Check the commands related to In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side, When sending the effect group number in a state related to AT where the push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is a "normal section"), even if you do not send a command related to the instruction number good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and the effect group number and the instruction number are transmitted. Based on such a command, it may be possible to comprehend that the pressing order bell (or pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order.

Next, at step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pushing order bell is one of the above-mentioned win-A1 to win-A6.

If Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the conditional device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410 the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays six push order bells as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the pressing orders of 1 is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which the first stop button, the second stop button and the third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win prize-A2, which is the order of pressing the bell, the numbers suggesting the order of pressing "left → right → middle" that can obtain the maximum payout number are enclosed with a star. Display in display mode. The above-described first number display mode group and second number display mode group may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. may be displayed in blue, a second group of numerical representations may display the numbers in red, and so on.

Next, if No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order bell, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2412 that the condition device of the game is the push order replay. It is determined whether or not. Here, the push order replay is any one of replay-D1 to D3.

If Yes at step 2412, in other words, if the game condition device is push order replay, at step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays push order replay as push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three alternative pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. , the number "1" is displayed at the bottom center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the order push instruction command has been received. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2416, in other words, when the forward pressing instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to "left→middle→right" as the pressing order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the form of an arrow image.

Next, if No in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. In the case of Yes in step 2420, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to "right→middle→left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the form of an arrow image.

Next, if No in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward-press avoidance command and the reverse-press avoidance command are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If Yes in step 2424, in other words, if an avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment in the second numerical display mode as a push order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, and 2426, or when No in step 2424, in step 2428, the background image during AT is displayed. In step S2430, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in display mode A on the effect display device S40, and the next process (process of step 2110) is performed.

<Additional special processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing the special processing for adding when the start lever is operated which is called and executed in the processing of step 2450 in FIG.

Next, at step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the condition device related to the game, at step 2454, confirms the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and at step 2456, the instruction number Check the commands related to In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side, When sending the effect group number in a state related to AT where the push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is a "normal section"), even if you do not send a command related to the instruction number good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and the effect group number and the instruction number are transmitted. Based on such a command, it may be possible to comprehend that the pressing order bell (or pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order.

Next, at step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell or common bell. Here, the pushing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes at step 2458, in other words, if the game condition device is the push order bell or common bell, at step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six alternative pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which the first stop button, the second stop button and the third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the winning prize-A4, which is the pressing order bell, the numbers suggesting the pressing order corresponding to "right → left → middle", which is the pressing order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are enclosed with asterisks. display mode. The above-described first number display mode group and second number display mode group may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. may be displayed in blue, a second group of numerical representations may display the numbers in red, and so on.

Next, if No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device for the game is neither the pressing order bell nor the common bell, then in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the conditions for the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is any one of replay-D1 to D3.

If Yes at step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, at step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays push order replay as push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three alternative pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. , the number "1" is displayed at the bottom center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, in the case of No at step 2462 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, at step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the order push instruction command. Determine whether or not In the case of Yes in step 2466, in other words, when the forward pressing instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to "left→middle→right" as the pressing order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the form of an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is forward pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button and the third stop button are the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 in order, from left to right. The pressing order can be suggested by an image of an arrow pointing to.

Next, if No in step 2466 described above, in other words, if the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. determine whether In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, when the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to "right→middle→left" as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the form of an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button and the third stop button are the right stop button D43, the middle stop button D42 and the left stop button D41 in order, from right to left. The pressing order can be suggested by an image of an arrow pointing to.

Next, if No in step 2470 described above, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474 the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. If Yes in step 2474, in other words, if an avoidance command is received, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an image for avoiding establishment in the first numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. The group is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the avoidance command collectively refers to both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is executed regardless of whether the forward press avoidance command is received or the reverse press avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward pressing avoidance command is received, the number "1" is displayed on the lower right side of the center of the effect display device S40 in order to avoid the forward pressing "left→middle→right". Information as if the pause button is the right stop button D43 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

Next, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processing of steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, and 2476 described above, or if No in step 2474, in step 2480, the background image during AT is displayed. In step 2482, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in display mode A on the effect display device S40, and the next process (process of step 2110) is performed.

<Advantageous BB internal processing when operating the start lever>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing the advantageous BB internal processing when the start lever is operated which is called and executed in the processing of step 2700 in FIG.

Next, at step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding the condition device related to the game, at step 2704, confirms the winning/replay winning information related to the game, and at step 2706, the instruction number Check the commands related to In this way, in a state related to AT in which push order navigation can be executed, such as the "AT in progress state", the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side, When sending the effect group number in a state related to AT where the push order navigation is not executed such as "probability state" (this also applies when the game section is a "normal section"), even if you do not send a command related to the instruction number good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and the effect group number and the instruction number are transmitted. Based on such a command, it may be possible to comprehend that the pressing order bell (or pressing order replay) has been won and the correct pressing order.

Next, at step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined number of games (five games) have elapsed after shifting to the advantage BB inside game. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in other words, when the predetermined game (five games) has not passed since the transition to the game during the advantage BB, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S condition device determines whether it is a push order bell or a common bell. Here, the pushing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

If Yes at step 2710, in other words, if the game condition device is the push order bell or common bell, at step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as the push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the six alternative pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. The pressing order is information in which the first stop button, the second stop button and the third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43. For example, if you win the winning prize-A4, which is the pressing order bell, the numbers suggesting the pressing order corresponding to "right → left → middle", which is the pressing order that can obtain the maximum number of payouts, are enclosed with asterisks. display mode. The above-described first number display mode group and second number display mode group may display numerical values suggesting the pressing order in different display mode groups. may be displayed in blue, a second group of numerical representations may display the numbers in red, and so on.

Next, if No in step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the push order bell nor the common bell, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the condition of the game. The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is any one of replay-D1 to D3.

If Yes at step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is push order replay, at step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays push order replay as push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order among the three alternative pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since there are three options for the pressing order, the information is such that the first stop button corresponds to either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, the number "1" is displayed on the lower left side of the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. , the number "1" is displayed at the bottom center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, it is displayed at the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40. The number "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the push order information is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

Next, if No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not push-order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command regarding 7 replays. Determine whether or not Here, the forward-press instruction command, the reverse-press instruction command, the forward-press avoidance command, and the reverse-press avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in other words, when the command regarding 7 replays is received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image for avoiding establishment as the push order navigation display by the first number. Displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

Next, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processes of steps 2712, 2716, and 2720 described above, or when No in step 2718, in step 2722, the background image during AT is displayed on the effect display device S40. In step S2724, the number of AT remaining games is displayed in the display mode A on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

In the case of No in step 2708, in other words, when the predetermined game (five games) has passed since the shift to the advantage BB internal game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S controls the effect display device S40. , it is notified that BB has been won (in this process, the push order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Processing when accepting the first stoppage of the cylinder>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing the first reel stop accepting process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG.

Next, at step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in other words, when the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S operates the stop button based on the correct push order as the first stop. Determine whether or not

Next, if Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is a stop button operation based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the pressing order navigation display. The display related to the first stop is erased, and the next process (process of step 2110) is performed.

Next, if No in step 2504, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs forward-press navigation or reverse-press navigation. It is determined whether or not push order navigation related to push navigation is being displayed. Here, the 7 replay is a general term for forward pressing black 7 matching replay and reverse pressing white 7 matching replay. If Yes at step 2508, at step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S darkens the push order navigation (it continues to be darkened during the game), and proceeds to the next process (step 2110). migrate.

In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, when the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases all the push order navigation display and push order failure. Effect is executed, and the next process (process of step 2110) is shifted to.

<Processing when accepting second reel stop>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing the second reel stop accepting process that is called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG.

Next, at step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2552, in other words, if push order navigation is being displayed, then in step 2554 the CPUSC of the sub control board S checks whether the conditional device for the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the conditional device related to the game is the pressing order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop. Determine whether or not there is an operation.

Next, if Yes in step 2556, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first button in the pressing order navigation display. 2 Deletes the display related to the stop, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2110).

Next, if No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no stop button operation based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays all the pressing order navigation displays. It is erased, the pressing order failure effect is executed, and the next process (process of step 2110) is performed.

Next, if No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or if No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately , to the next process (process of step 2110).

<Decision processing related to effect at the time of third drum stop>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing the effect related determination process at the time of the third reel stop which is called and executed in the process of step 3200 of FIG.

Next, at step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination is won, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S wins during non-AT ("low probability state" or "high probability state"). It is determined whether or not it is a BB hand. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of the BB hand won during non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during non-AT, and determines the AT of the game. BB start effect (effect to be executed when the BB win is won) is determined and executed based on the relevant state and the BB win, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2600).

Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, the BB role won during AT ("AT state", "additional specialization state", "specialization preparation state" or "resurrection possibility state") If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the AT state of the game and the BB hand, and executes the following. The processing (processing of step 2600) is performed.

Next, if No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB combination does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect executed in the game, The process is shifted to the next process (process of step 2600).

The non-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state regarding AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB wins: BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C). There are two types of AT-related states: "ordinary BB inside game" and "advantageous BB inside game". There are three types of BB start effects: normal effects, high-expectation effects, and premium effects. In addition, depending on the type of BB start effect in the BB won during non-AT, it is configured so that the degree of expectation to shift to the "AT state" after the BB ends is different. → High expectations production → Premier production”.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state regarding AT of the game is normal BB inside game, the probability that BB start effect is normal effect is 179/256. . When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B), and the state regarding AT of the game is "normal BB internal game", the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77. /256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state regarding AT of the game is "normal BB internal game", the probability that the BB start effect is a premium effect is 0/256. is.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B), and the state regarding AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal game", the probability that the BB start effect is normal effect is 179/256. is. When the BB role is a BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and the state regarding AT of the game is "advantageous BB inside medium game", the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77. /256. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B), and the state regarding AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal game", the probability that the BB start effect is a premium effect is 0/256. is.

When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding AT of the game is "normal BB internal medium game", BB start production is high expectation production is 77/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding AT of the game is ``normal BB internal medium game'', the BB start presentation is a premium presentation. The probability is 0/256.

When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB role is a BB with no set difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the AT state of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. is 157/256. When the BB role is BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state regarding AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal medium game", the BB start presentation is a premium presentation. The probability is 32/256.

When it is a "normal section", even if you win BB without set difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), even if you win BB with set difference (1 type BB-B), premium performance is not selected, and the possibility of selecting the normal effect rather than the high-expectation effect is determined to be higher.

Even if it is an advantageous section, if you win BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B), the premium effect will not be selected, and there is a possibility that the normal effect will be selected rather than the high expectation effect. determined to be higher.

In the case of the "advantageous section" and winning the BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), there is a possibility that the premium effect will be selected. With such a configuration, it is confirmed that the player wins the BB with no set difference by selecting the premium performance, and shifts to the 'state during AT' after the BB with no set difference ends. can be shown to the player. In addition, if it is an "advantageous section" and you win a BB with no set difference (1st type BB-A and 1st type BB-C), the possibility that the high-expectation effect will be selected over the normal effect will be higher. (The possibility that the normal effect will be selected becomes low). By doing so, the player can guess whether or not the AT will be started after the BB ends by confirming the BB start performance, and can have expectations for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start effect related to the BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) won in the "normal BB internal game" and the BB without the setting difference won in the "normal BB internal game" ( The distribution is the same as the distribution of the BB start effect related to 1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C). In addition, it is not limited to this, and the distribution of the BB start effect related to the BB with a setting difference (1 type BB-B) won in the "normal BB internal game", and the "normal BB internal game" The allocation of the BB start effect for the winning BBs without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) may be different, and by configuring in such a way, the BB start for BBs with setting difference It is possible to configure such that distribution differs depending on whether it is an effect or a BB start effect related to BB with no setting difference.

The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start time of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB win, the state regarding AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (distribution). There are two types of BB wins: BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C). The state related to AT is one type of "advantageous BB internal game". There are two types of BB start effects, ie, an addable effect and an unaddable effect. The add-on possible performance is a performance suggesting that the AT add-on lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the add-on impossible performance is a performance suggesting that the AT add-on lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. As for the BB that wins during the AT, there is no factor as to whether or not it wins the AT lottery, and whether or not the AT extra lottery is executed depends on the type of BB. In addition, during AT, even in BB with a setting difference in which AT addition lottery is not executed, game medals can be obtained and after BB ends, AT is advantageous to the player, so that BB to be executed is AT addition lottery. is configured to clearly notify whether or not is executed. A specific example will be described in detail below.

When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B), and the state regarding AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal game", the probability that the BB start effect will be an additional effect is 0/ 256, and the add-on effect is never executed. When the BB role is BB with setting difference (1 type BB-B), and the state regarding AT of the game is "advantageous BB internal game", the probability that the BB start effect will not be added is 256/ 256, and the non-additional effect is always executed. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the AT state of the game is "advantageous BB inside medium game", the BB start effect is an effect that can be added. The probability of becoming is 256/256, and the extra possible effect is always executed. When the BB role is a BB with no setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the AT state of the game is "advantageous BB internal game", the BB start effect is a non-additional effect. The probability is 0/256, and the non-additional effect is never executed.

<Processing at the time of reception of the 3rd cylinder stop>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing the processing at reception of the third reel stop which is called and executed in the processing of step 2600 in FIG.

Next, at step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2602, in other words, if push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S checks whether the conditional device for the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the conditional device for the game is the pressing order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub control board S selects the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop. Determine whether or not there is an operation.

Next, if Yes in step 2606, in other words, if there is a stop button operation based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces a successful pressing order presentation. "GET!" is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control board S outputs the "GET" of the pressing order successful presentation. !" is not displayed.

If No at step 2602 described above, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, if No at step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, or step 2608 or 2610 is executed, at step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a command (command set at step 1517) relating to the number of AT-added games has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates the difference from the previously received command indicating the number of remaining AT games. It is also possible to determine whether or not the number of AT games has been added and the number of games to be added to the AT, and display the number of games to be added to the AT.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, when a command relating to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S causes the effect display device S40 to display an AT additional game. The number is displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, when the command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S causes the effect display device S40 to add AT. Without displaying the number of games, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). In addition, as a method of reporting the number of AT-added games, (1) all the number of added games is notified in the relevant game, (2) part of the number of added games is notified in the relevant game, and the remaining number of games is notified after the relevant game. (3) The game does not notify the number of additional games, and the game after the game (for example, when winning 7 replays, when winning a common bell (when winning a role that is not originally added), or when multiple After the game (continuous effect) is executed, the game in which the number of remaining games in the effect display device S40 becomes "0", or the next game after the game becomes "0", operation of the bet button D220 and operation of the start lever D50. ) can be notified.

In addition, if you win a common bell in the "additional specialization state", even if you stop according to the push order navigation, the number of AT addition games will not be displayed (common bells do not have an AT addition lottery. do not have).

With the configuration as described above, according to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the gaming machine configured so that the advantageous interval indicator YH lights up in the "advantageous interval", the period that is advantageous to the player can be configured to be appropriately notified. In addition, by providing the "resurrection possible/impossible effect state", in the case where the continuous effect is won and the resurrection effect (success) is executed after that, the state related to the AT of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is Even if the advantage section indicator YH is lit because of the "AT state" and the continuation effect is not won and the resurrection effect (failure) is executed after that, the resurrection effect (failure) is executed. By setting the state regarding the AT of the game to be played as the "recovery permission/prohibition effect state" and the state regarding the AT as the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH lights up. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the resurrection effect succeeds or fails by visually recognizing the advantageous interval indicator YH in the game in which the resurrection effect is executed. A gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to the player can ensure a highly entertaining gaming machine.

In addition, in this example, when the BB role is won in the "high probability state", it is configured so that the AT lottery can be won, and after the end of the BB, it is configured so that it can shift to the "AT state", but the AT The configuration regarding is not limited to the one of this example, for example, it is configured to be able to win the AT lottery with a rare role such as cherry (can be won even if it is not a BB role), and if the AT lottery is won It may be configured such that the state relating to the AT is shifted to the "AT precursor state", and a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) are played in the "AT precursor state" to shift to the "AT in progress state".

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process related to the subroutine of step 7100 of FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, at step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub-input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items to confirm various settings and information about the game machine. It is a screen that can be used. As an example of a method for selecting and determining an item, the cross key SB2 (having four buttons of up, down, left and right buttons) is operated to move the cursor to the desired item, By operating the sub-input button SB, the currently selected item (on which the cursor is placed) is determined, and the screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. In addition, the menu screen may have a plurality of display modes. For example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may differ depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may differ. Even if there are differences, they are all referred to as menu screens.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
Examples of selectable items on the menu screen are listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: It may be configured so that the player can adjust the volume output from the gaming machine. For example, after displaying a screen corresponding to volume adjustment, the right button of the cross key SB2 is operated to output It may be configured such that the volume increases and the output volume decreases when the left button of the cross key SB2 is operated.
(2) Light amount adjustment: The light amount (brightness) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50) may be adjusted by the player. For example, after displaying a screen corresponding to light amount adjustment, operating the upper button of the cross key SB2 increases the light amount (brightness), and operating the lower button of the cross key SB2 decreases the light amount (brightness). It may be configured to be (dark).
(3) Character customization: Characters that appear during the game (main character, push-order navigation voice, opponent character, character that supports the progress of the game that is always displayed on the effect display device S40, etc.) can be selected and changed. After displaying a screen corresponding to character customization, move the cursor to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2, and select by operating the sub-input button SB.
(4) Reel array table: The reel array may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the reel array table.
(5) Payout table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations that constitute a replay or a winning combination by stopping display) may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided and displayed on a plurality of screens, for example, the screen of the payout table may be switched with the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes at step 7102, at step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the state in which the menu screen can be displayed means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation capable of displaying the menu screen, such as the operation of the sub-input button SB, is executed (the menu screen may be displayed after the passage of time). As a specific example, it may be configured as follows.
(1) Game end timing (timing to turn the third stop button from ON to OFF, display judgment timing, payout completion timing based on winning, set or transmit a command related to game end to the sub control board S side as game end processing timing, the timing at which the sub control board S side receives a command related to the end of the game, etc.), the game does not progress (no new betting operation, no new automatic betting operation based on the replay stop display, new start When a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses while the lever is not operated, the reels are not newly rotated, etc., the menu screen may be displayed (until then, the sub-input button SB is operated. menu screen does not appear). Note that the betting operation includes both betting by operating the bet button D220 and betting by inserting game medals into the medal slot D170 (automatic betting based on replay stop display). may also be included in betting operations).
(2-1) It may be configured such that the menu screen display is not enabled during execution of the game (during the wait period until the start of reel rotation, during which game medals are betted, and during reel rotation).
(2-2) The menu screen may be displayed while the game is being played (game medals are bet, etc.).
(3) During the execution of a predetermined effect (during the execution of the effect to notify whether or not a bonus has been won, during the execution of a continuous effect that is executed over multiple games, and to notify whether the AT game number addition lottery has been won) , etc.) may be configured not to be in the menu screen displayable state. (4) It may be configured such that the menu screen display is not enabled during the stop display of the replay combination.
In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub-input button SB (the LED provided inside the sub-input button SB) is turned on when the menu screen can be displayed. It may be configured to display blinking.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes at step 7104, at step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation of displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub-input button SB, but the operation of displaying the menu screen may be changed, or a plurality of operations of displaying the menu screen may be provided. . In the case of Yes at step 7106, at step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, at step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (timer for measuring the time from the game end timing to the standby screen to be described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, at step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the standby timer clocking flag (flag that turns on when the standby timer is clocking). Next, in step 7111, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the time to shift from the menu screen to the standby screen described later), and the initial value is set at the timing when the menu screen starts to be displayed. is set) is set to a predetermined time B (in this example, it is 300 seconds, which is longer than the predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, at step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the menu standby timer clocking flag (flag that turns on when the menu standby timer is clocking), and the next process (process of step 7200). transition to

Also, in step 7114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen termination condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending display of the menu screen, in other words, a condition for switching the screen (image) displayed by the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image). may be configured as follows.
(1) It may be configured to be satisfied when there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, or a new start of rotation of the reels.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen continues to be displayed, the condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time (in this example, 300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B) has passed since the menu screen started to be displayed.
(3) Selecting and determining a predetermined item on the menu screen and executing a predetermined operation on the screen corresponding to the predetermined item may be sufficient. and operating the sub-input button SB, a screen corresponding to volume adjustment is displayed. The volume is set to medium volume, the display of the menu screen ends, and the screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes referred to as a normal screen) is displayed.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes at step 7114, at step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image displayed before the menu screen display on the effect display device S40. As an example, if the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB while the main character is walking in the forest, the menu screen is displayed again. A screen in which the hero is walking in the forest is displayed. Next, at step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, at step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer clocking flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 7200).

If No at step 7114, at step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 has been operated. If Yes at step 7122, at step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets the menu standby timer to the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 7200). do. Note that even if No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 7200). As described above, in this embodiment, when the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer is set to the predetermined time B (300 in this example). seconds), in other words, the measurement of the time until the standby screen is displayed is restarted from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers for displaying the standby screen. may be configured to use Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer for displaying the standby screen, and the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are waited. It may be configured to set a timer. As a specific example, the third stop button is switched from ON to OFF, and a predetermined time A (180 seconds) is set in the standby timer. When the menu screen is started to be displayed, a predetermined time B (300 seconds) is set in the standby timer.

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7200 of FIG. 41 in this embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby screen is hidden. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game is not progressing), and is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG. A moving image related to the story is repeatedly reproduced, a message "power saving" is displayed, and a logo mark of the game machine manufacturer is displayed. In this example, the player's operation is required as a condition for displaying the above-described menu screen, while the player's operation is not required as a condition for displaying the standby screen.

If Yes at step 7202, at step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer clocking flag (flag that turns on when the standby timer, which will be described later, is clocking) is off. do. In the case of Yes at step 7204, at step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this process, the game end timing is the timing when the third stop button is switched from ON to OFF. In the case of Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the standby timer (a timer for measuring the time from the end of the game to the standby screen, and the initial value is set at the timing of the end of the game). is set to a predetermined time A (in this example, it is 180 seconds, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the standby timer timing flag, and proceeds to step 7212. FIG. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processing of steps 7208 and 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached. , the condition may be that the image displayed before the display of the menu screen is displayed (the display of the menu screen is finished).

Next, at step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby timer has reached zero. In the case of Yes at step 7212, at step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, at step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, at step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer timing flag. Next, at step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the standby timer timing flag, and proceeds to step 7224. FIG. It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 7224 also in the case of No in step 7206 .

Next, at step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu standby timer timing flag is ON. If Yes at step 7224, at step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the menu standby timer has reached zero. In the case of Yes at step 7226, at step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, at step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, at step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the menu standby timer clocking flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, at step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the standby timer clocking flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). Note that even if No in step 7224 or step 7226, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110).

If No in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer timing flag is ON, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby timer timing end condition is satisfied. do. Here, the condition for terminating the timing of the standby timer is a condition for terminating the timing of the standby timer and clearing the timer value of the standby timer to zero. In addition, a new start of rotation of the reel, etc., is a waiting timer timing end condition. If Yes at step 7238 , go to step 7212 ; otherwise, go to step 7216 if No at step 7238 .

If No at step 7202, at step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the waiting screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen termination condition is a condition for terminating the display of the standby screen. In this example, a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation are "Started" and the like are set as conditions for ending the standby screen. It should be noted that the standby screen may be changed to the menu screen (the menu screen may be displayed). For example, the menu screen may be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB while the standby screen is being displayed. may be configured as follows. Next, at step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image displayed before the standby screen is displayed on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2110). As an example, in a situation where a screen in which the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, if the standby screen is displayed because the game A has not progressed for a predetermined period of time, the bet operation can be executed to restart the main character. is walking in the forest.

Next, FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to the standby screen according to this embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed when the sub-input button SB is operated in the menu screen displayable state. Thereafter, while the menu screen is displayed, 5 minutes (predetermined time B, 300 seconds) pass without any operation of the sub-input button SB or bet button D220, and the standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the reels are stopped by the player, all the reels are stopped by the stop operation of the third stop button, and the player presses the third stop button. Three minutes (predetermined time A is 180 seconds) have passed since the release timing, and since the sub-input button SB and bet button D220 were not operated during that time, the standby screen is displayed. Thus, in this example, the predetermined time B has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, and the predetermined time A has elapsed since the game was terminated (after the third stop button was switched from ON to OFF). , and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<<Structure of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example>>
Here, the configuration of the menu screen and standby screen applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of this embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations enumerated below are applicable to all the above-described embodiments, and it is supplemented that there is no problem in combining one or more of them as appropriate.

<Time measurement start timing of standby timer>
As the timing to set the initial value to the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed and start timing, (1) the third stop button (stop corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) as the final stop operation button) is turned on and then turned off, (2) time is started from the execution timing of the display judgment, (3) time is started from the payout completion timing based on the winning, (4) game As end processing, timing is started at the timing when a command relating to the end of the game is set or transmitted to the sub control board S side. You may Also, a predetermined time A (a timer value to be set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as the initial value.

<Menu standby timer start timing>
As the timing for setting an initial value to a menu standby timer for measuring the time until the menu screen is displayed and starting time measurement, it is configured to start time measurement from the timing when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB. You may Also, a predetermined time B (a timer value to be set in the menu standby timer, eg, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A set in the standby timer (a timer value set in the standby timer, eg, 180 seconds).

<Configuration related to sub-input button>
The initial value of the menu standby timer may be reset while the menu standby timer is counting. For example, by operating the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed. may be configured to set a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) as an initial value to the menu standby timer. As an example, when the menu screen starts to be displayed, the menu standby timer is set to 300 seconds to start timing. The operation may be configured to reset the menu waiting timer to 300 seconds. Also, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-input button SB. The menu screen may also be the transition destination screen to which the menu screen is displayed. By operating the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB, the screen to which the screen is transitioned by operating the sub-input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the start of displaying the screen may also be the menu screen. The menu waiting timer may be configured to reset the initial value.

<Configuration related to the stop button>
While the standby timer is counting, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and no betting operation is performed after that. The initial value of the standby timer may not be reset even if the stop buttons (left stop button, middle stop button, and right stop button) are operated under certain circumstances. As an example, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, 180 seconds are set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting, After that, in a situation where no betting operation is executed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, even if the stop button is operated, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured so that it remains as it is.

<Configuration related to bet operation>
When the standby timer is counting, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the betting operation is executed ( When a bet is placed by operating the bet button D220, or when a game medal is placed by inserting game medals into the medal slot D170), the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, while the standby timer is counting, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then the betting operation is executed. , and other operations are not performed, the standby screen may not be displayed due to the passage of time. In such a configuration, the standby screen will not be displayed due to the passage of time from the bet operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has passed since the bet operation. may be configured to be 0 or smaller. By configuring in this way, the number of remaining game medals is less than the specified number (for example, 3) (for example, 1), and the remaining 1 game medal is bet (for example, the bet button is operated). When the game is finished, or when the player has finished the game with less than the specified number of game medals left in the credit (no bet is placed), the bet button is pressed when the game hall clerk cleans the game machine. Even if a bet is made by operating the , the sound will not be output at an unintended volume. Further, even when the third stop button is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and no betting operation is performed after that, from the timing when the third stop button is turned off (it may be the timing when the reels stop). The volume of the sound being output may be set to 0 or reduced when the specific time (100 seconds) or the predetermined time A (180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Display conditions for the standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (standby timer, menu standby timer in this example) regarding the display of the standby screen has changed from "1 to 0". With this configuration, when a bet operation is executed or when some abnormality occurs in timer measurement, the timer value reaches "0" without going through "1" like "20→0". (When zero is cleared), the standby screen will not be displayed, and it is possible to prevent the unintended display of the standby screen. (It may be configured to display the standby screen when A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Configuration related to payment button>
While the standby timer is counting, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off as the final stop operation, and then 1 or more credits exist. In this situation, if the credits are settled by operating the settlement button, a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has passed since the timing of operating the settlement button, or the timing at which the credits have been settled (the last game medal is The standby screen may be displayed at the timing of returning to the ejection port D240.

<Configuration related to setting key switch>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off → on while the power is on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing. Also, as a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), and then open the front door while the power is on. The setting key switch may be turned from off to on, and the standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses after the front door is closed.

Also, as the final stop operation, turn on the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) and then turn it off, and then turn the setting key switch off → on while the power is on. In this case, the standby screen may be displayed after a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has passed since the setting key switch was turned from on to off. Also, as a final stop operation, turn on and turn off the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end), and then open the front door while the power is on. When the setting key switch is turned from off to on, the standby screen is displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses after the front door is closed after the setting key switch is turned from on to off. may be configured as follows. Note that "turning on the stop button" in this example means accepting the operation of the stop button in a situation where the operation of the stop button is valid.

<Structure for When a Predetermined Error Occurs>
As a final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then a predetermined error on the main control board M side (for example, the game medal is the medal selector DS The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing at which the predetermined error is canceled.

<Configuration related to the front door>
As the final stop operation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, so that the standby timer starts timing, and then the front door is opened to open it. may be configured to continue the time measurement of the standby timer even when the is maintained. In addition, as the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, so that the standby timer starts timing, and then the front door is opened, After that, even when the front door is closed, the standby timer may continue to count.

<Construction 1 regarding AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is "normal game state"), as the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off. When a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has passed since the timing was set, the standby screen can be displayed, and in a situation where AT is in progress (e.g., the state related to AT is "AT state"), the final stop operation , when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has passed from the timing when the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off, the standby screen is not displayed. You may Similarly, during execution of the continuous effect, during execution of the bonus, and during ART, the standby screen may not be displayed even after the predetermined time A has elapsed after the end of the final stop operation. In addition, in a situation where AT is in progress (for example, the state related to AT is "AT state"), the third stop button (corresponding to the reel that is spinning to the end) is used as the final stop operation in the game in which push order navigation is executed. If a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the stop button) is turned on and then turned off, the standby screen is not displayed, while the AT is in progress (e.g., the state related to AT is "AT state") In this situation, the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel spinning to the end) as the final stop operation in the game where the push order navigation was not executed is turned on and then turned off for a predetermined time. The standby screen may be displayed when A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed.

<Configuration 2 regarding AT>
When the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-input button or the like in a situation where the AT is in progress (for example, the state regarding AT is "AT state"), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has passed. (2) After a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) elapses, the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) is restored. may

<Construction 3 regarding AT>
In a non-AT state (for example, the state related to AT is "normal game state"), as the final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel spinning to the end) is turned on and then turned off. When a predetermined time A (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed from the timing set, the standby screen is configured to be displayed, and in a situation where the AT is not in progress (e.g., the state related to AT is "normal game state"), A menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the menu screen, the standby screen is configured to be displayed during AT (for example, the state related to AT is "AT state"). ), the menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has passed since the start of the menu screen display, the normal screen during AT (the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed) ) may be configured to return to That is, when the time values are compared, it may be configured such that "predetermined time A=predetermined time B<predetermined time C". Note that the time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B may not be the same, and the predetermined time C may be the longest.

<Other configuration 1>
The menu screen may be displayed by inserting game medals from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed. The menu screen displayed by inserting game medals from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed is (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button; ) A screen displayed by executing a predetermined operation (selecting and determining a predetermined item) from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub-input button, (3) By operating the sub-input button A screen different from the displayed menu screen may be configured. Further, even if game medals are inserted from the medal slot D170 while the menu screen is displayed by inserting game medals from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen continues to be displayed, while the sub screen is displayed. When game medals are inserted from the medal slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the input button is displayed, the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed may be returned. If game medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 and bet while the standby screen is displayed, a menu screen will be displayed. It may also be configured such that a normal screen displayed during a game is displayed when the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on. Further, when game medals are inserted from the medal slot D170 and bet while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the number of game medals accumulated in the credit is three, which is the specified number. In the above situation, if you operate the bet button (for example, the max bet button that allows you to bet 3 cards with one operation) and make a bet, the screen that was displayed before the menu screen was displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on). If it is, the normal screen that is displayed during the game) is displayed, the standby screen is being displayed, and the bet button is pressed when the number of game medals accumulated in the credit is less than 3, which is the prescribed number. (For example, a maximum bet button that allows three bets to be made by one operation) may be operated to display a menu screen when a bet is made.

<Other configuration 2>
It has a plurality of display modes of the standby screen, and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the predetermined condition may be that the game history is inherited from the previous game by entering a password on the menu screen). If not, a moving image introducing a story is displayed as a standby screen, but if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a moving image introducing a character may be displayed as a standby screen. . In addition, both when the predetermined condition is not satisfied and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as a standby screen. Depending on whether or not, the frequency of displaying either the story introduction or the character introduction may be configured to differ.

<Other modification examples>
In this example, there are a first BB combination in which the first BB is executed by winning a prize and a second BB combination in which the second BB, which is lower in profit for the player than the first BB, is executed by winning a prize. Further, it may be constructed so that the 1st BB hand and the 2nd BB hand can be won simultaneously (providing the hand of "1st BB + 2nd BB"). In such a configuration, when "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the high-profit 1BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB is completed, the 1st The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be stop-displayed (even during execution of 1BB, the winning of 2BB is carried over). In addition, when the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won, by executing the highly profitable 1st BB first, for example, in a situation where the closing time of the game hall is approaching, the "1st BB + 2nd BB" is won. In this case, the low-profit 2nd BB is executed first, and the game hall closes during the execution of the 2nd BB, and the game must be finished without being able to execute the high-profit 1st BB. can be prevented.

After the operation of the 1st BB is completed, the winning of the 2nd BB may be notified immediately, or may be notified after hiding (after a predetermined game has passed without notification). In this case, the probability of winning the replay may be increased during the latent period after the operation of the first BB is finished. Also, when hidden, it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB (for example, display "BB Renso Chance Time!!" on the effect display device S40). . In the case of such a configuration, if the 2nd BB is not won after the 1st BB ends, it will be definite that the effect occurs = the 2nd BB is won, so only the 1st BB is won. However, even after the operation of the first BB is completed, it is preferable to construct an effect suggesting the possibility of winning the second BB (the effect mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above) , for example, "BB Renso Chance Time!!" is displayed on the effect display device S40). Also, even if only the 1st BB is won and the 1st BB is won again after the operation of the 1st BB is completed, the execution of the performance suggesting the possibility of winning the 2nd BB is not stopped. may Alternatively, once the winning of the second BB is falsely announced, the winning of the first BB may be notified (for example, display of "BB Renso chance time!!" → display of "sorry" → display of "first 1BB winning!!”, etc.). Furthermore, when the second BB is hidden after the second BB is hidden after the operation of the first BB is completed, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after preparing for the AT (after returning, the effect However, the internal reduction of the remaining number of games may be continued and interrupted. When the 1st BB and the 2nd BB are repeatedly won, the number of payouts from the start of the operation of the 1st BB to the end of the operation of the 2nd BB may be accumulated and displayed on the performance display device S40 or the like.

In addition, in this example,
(1) When the 1st BB and the minor combination A are won in duplicate, the 1st BB is preferentially controlled to be stopped.
(2) When the 1st BB and the small winning combination B are won in duplicate, the small winning combination B is preferentially controlled to be stopped.
That is, there may be provided a small winning combination that is controlled to be stopped with priority over the BB combination and a small combination that is controlled to be stopped with priority given to the BB combination.
(3) In the event that the 1st BB and the minor winning combination A are duplicated, when the minor winning combination A wins, or some of the symbol combinations corresponding to the minor winning combination A (for example, during the first stop, the 2 stop) is stopped, the notification corresponding to the minor winning combination A (notifying that the minor winning combination A can be won) is performed.
That is, the result of the first stop or the second stop (the stop mode after the execution of the first stop or the second stop) is to be notified of the first BB win, which is originally controlled to be stopped with priority over the minor win A. Therefore, if the first BB win cannot be won regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped (small win A can win), notification corresponding to minor win A is made. Further, when the minor winning combination A is won as a result of the game, the notification corresponding to the minor winning combination A is performed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute notification that is most advantageous to the player in accordance with various game situations that change during the game, and to match the content notified by the effect display device S40 and the like to the actual result. It is possible to prevent a contradiction in winning roles.
(4) When the 1st BB and the minor combination B are won in duplicate, a notification corresponding to the minor combination B is made during rotation of all the reels.

In addition, it may be configured to have a display device (such as 7 segments) for displaying the numbers of symbols (or combination of symbols) stopped and displayed, which is controlled by the main control board M. FIG. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradictory effect that does not correspond to the symbols (or combination of symbols) stopped and displayed. For example, when the replay-replay-replay symbol combination is stopped on the active line, an effect (for example, lighting a lamp in green) that is highly likely to be output when a watermelon is won is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack capable of outputting (not inputting) from the sub-control board S side may be provided to have the following features.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of levels by using the sub-input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when playing a game using an earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the game machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided in the game machine). ).
(3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, even when the maximum volume is selected, the error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume.

Also, during the AT state or during the BB execution, the gaming machine may be configured to output a performance sound even when playing a game using an earphone jack. Alternatively, the volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be stored separately. Even if the earphone is pulled out, the volume for using the earphone jack may not be cleared (to the initial value) immediately. For example, when there is no operation for 10 minutes, all volumes may be cleared (to the initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the volume for using the earphone jack does not need to be cleared (to the initial value). It is preferable that the earphone jack be provided in a place that does not interfere with the game (for example, if an earphone is inserted into the earphone jack, the earphone cord will not get entangled in the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever). ).

In addition, in this example,
(1) The winning probability of the replay role can be changed after the BB ends when the number of wins equals or exceeds a specific number during the BB execution, and after the BB ends when the wins of a specific number or less. may be configured.
(2) There may be a plurality of RT states to which a transition is made when the RT state (for example, RT1) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively high ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to "RT0" after "RT1" ends, or to shift to "RT3" (a newly provided RT state).
(3) When a predetermined winning combination is won, the RT state is shifted. That is, 1 with winning the transition of the RT state
Regardless of the condition device and winning prizes, it moves with a certain probability (for example, an RT transition lottery is executed with a certain probability every game).
(4) It is possible to install 0-coin RT transition, duplicate wins with 0-coin, and duplicate wins with 0-coin. That is, a 0-coin combination is provided, which is a combination in which no more than 1 combination is won no matter what position the player stops in any pressing order, and when the 0-coin combination is won, the RT state shifts. It is also possible to make possible the double winning of the 0-card hand and the 7-card hand and the double winning of the 0-card hand A and the 0-card hand B. It should be noted that, when the 0-piece winning combination is won, either the 0-card combination that moves to RT or the 0-card combination that does not move to RT may be awarded depending on the pressing order. It is also possible to win the 0-card hand and the BB hand more than once and give priority to the 0-card hand.

In addition, as in this example, the pressing order of the bell is 6 options ("left → middle → right", "left → right → middle", "middle → left → right", "middle → right → left", 6 choices of ``Right→Left→Center'' and ``Right→Center→Left''), and the push order of the push order replay is configured to have 3 choices (first stop is 3 choices of Left, Center, and Right). In this case, as the push order display on the push order display device D270, the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay are different. The display may be configured to be different from the three-option pressing order navigation display. As an example, as the pressing order display for the six options, "=1" in the case of "left→middle→right", "=2" in the case of "left→right→middle", and "middle→left→ "=3" for "right", "=4" for "middle→right→left", "=5" for "right→left→middle", "right→middle→left" In the case of , it is displayed as "=6", and as a push order display related to the three options, "=7" when the first stop is left, and "=8" when the first stop is middle. , and "=9" if the first stop is right.

Note that the present example may be configured as follows.
(1) The number of AT completed games, which is the number of games played consecutively in the "AT in progress state", "specialization precursor state" or "additional specialization state", can be displayed on the effect display device, and the AT When the AT lottery is won again within a specific game after the transition from the "AT state" to the "normal game state" due to the number of remaining games becoming 0, and the state shifts to the "AT state", the previous AT While the number of games played is taken over and added, the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), and after the transition from the "AT state" to the "normal game state" occurs again within a specific game. When the AT lottery is won and the state shifts to the "state during AT", the number of AT games played in the previous time is not taken over, and the number of AT games played is newly counted from 0 game.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts spinning, a display urging to stop the reel is displayed on the effect display device S40 (for example, "Stop the reel." Please stop."), and if the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time after the reels start spinning in a game in which push-order navigation is occurring, (2-1) effect (2-2) The display prompting to stop the reels is not displayed.
(3) If the power supply is turned "ON→OFF→ON" in a game in which push order navigation occurs, the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. The push order navigation (the display on the push order display device D270 and/or the display on the effect display device S40) is redisplayed at the timing of .
(4) A state related to a certain AT and a state related to another AT differ in frequency of occurrence of push order navigation in a game in which a common bell is won, or a state related to an AT in which push order navigation may occur. The frequency of occurrence of push-order navigation in a game in which a common bell is won differs between the state of a certain AT and the state of another AT in which push-order navigation can occur.
(5) In the case of the RT state (“RT1” in this example) where the winning probability of replay is the highest, the ratio of games in which push order navigation occurs is higher than the ratio of games in which push order navigation does not occur. expensive. For example, the combined winning rate of the bell combination and the replay combination is 1/2 or more. With such a configuration, the player can progress the game without getting bored during the AT.
It may be configured as described above.

Here, the characteristic points of the above-described game section will be described in detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) Do not transmit commands (signals) from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side for conditional devices that cause a difference in the player's profit rate depending on the pressing order.
(4) It is possible to execute a lottery for transition to the "advantageous section" except during the internal winning of the BB and during the execution of the BB.

≪Waiting section≫
(1) Push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) Do not transmit commands (signals) from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side for conditional devices that cause a difference in the player's profit rate depending on the pressing order.
(4) A lottery for transition to the "advantageous section" is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the "waiting state", the next game is the "advantageous section".

≪Advantageous section≫
(1) Push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) Push order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) relating to a conditional device that causes a difference in the player's profit rate depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery that changes the performance of the "advantageous section" (for example, shifts from a "high probability state" to an "AT in progress state" as a state related to AT), a lottery that adds the number of AT games, etc. can be executed.
(5) During the "advantageous section", the advantageous section indicator YH is always lit.
(6) When the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, the "advantageous section" is basically executed unless BB or push order navigation is executed one or more times in the "advantageous section". However, as an exception, if the "advantageous section" continues for a predetermined number of games (1500 in this example), BB and push order navigation are performed once in the "advantageous section". The "advantageous interval" is configured to end even if neither is executed.
(7) The counting of the advantageous interval remaining game number counter YKc-1 is executed in all games in the "advantageous interval" (for example, the counter value of each game is incremented even during BB execution).

Here, the characteristic points related to the setting lottery for the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) Whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is determined based on the result of the combination lottery, and whether or not the "advantageous section" is set is not determined by the number of games played. (2) If a conditional device with different lottery probabilities is established depending on the set value, the setting lottery for the "advantageous section" is not executed when the conditional device is met.
(3) When a certain conditional device is established and a setting lottery for the "advantageous section" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different.
(4) The performance of the "advantageous section" does not differ depending on the setting value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, setting 1 shifts to "high probability state", setting 6 shifts to "AT state", etc., which does not differ depending on the set value).
(5) Setting to "advantageous section" If you win the lottery, it will basically be an "advantageous section" from the next game (set to "advantageous section" with BB role established in "normal section" If you win the lottery, it can be used as a "waiting section" in the next game).

Here, the feature points related to the change of the performance of the "advantageous section" will be described in detail below.
(1) A lottery to change the performance of the "advantageous section" by referring to the setting value is not executed (as a condition common to all setting values, a predetermined number of games has elapsed and a predetermined condition device is established). . (2) If a conditional device with different lottery probabilities is established depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed when the conditional device is satisfied. A lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(3) If the BB is internally elected, the lottery for changing the performance of the "advantageous section" is not executed. A lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(4) During execution of BB, if the lottery probability of the BB role that triggered the BB that is being executed differs depending on the set value, a lottery that changes the performance of the "advantageous section" during the execution of BB is not executed. A lottery for adding the number of AT games is not executed.
(5) During execution of BB, if the lottery probability of the BB role that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, a lottery that changes the performance of the "advantageous section" during execution of the BB can be performed. A lottery for adding the number of AT games and the like can also be executed.

Further, the following configuration may be applied to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example. Moreover, the following configurations may be applied independently, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<<Point 1>>
(1) It is configured to have a "fake high probability state" as a state related to an AT that is in the "advantageous section" but is less likely to win the AT lottery than the "high probability state".
(2) The continuous effect is composed of at least the number of consecutive games equal to or greater than a predetermined number of Gs.
(3) It has a normal role that does not win the AT lottery with 100% and a special role that wins the AT lottery with 100%, and when the continuous performance is executed with the normal role as a trigger and the AT lottery is not won. In this case, if a special role is won during the continuous performance, a performance for informing that the AT lottery is won is executed even during the continuous performance (replaces the continuous performance).
(4) The higher the number of remaining high-securing obstacle games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous effect with a high degree of expectation (expectation for bonus winning, expectation for AT lottery winning), and the remaining number of high-security obstacle games. The smaller the number, the higher the probability of selecting the continuous performance with the lower expectation.
(5) The probability of selecting the one-game complete effect with high expectations (expectations for winning a bonus, expectations for winning an AT lottery) is high as the number of remaining games is small.
(6) If the number of high-security obstacle games remaining is less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the continuous performance that will be a loss is not executed, but the continuous performance that will be a hit (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) can be performed. In other words, when the number of remaining games in the number of high-retention obstacle games is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), the effect of completing one game can be executed both in the case of a loss and in the case of a hit, but in the continuous effect, the effect is a win. can only be executed if
(7) When the ceiling G number (1500 games) in the advantageous section is equal to or less than a predetermined value (4 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The selection tendency of effects differs depending on whether the ceiling G number in the advantageous section is equal to or less than a predetermined value and when it is greater than the predetermined value (occurrence frequency of continuous effects, degree of expectation for a big hit in a predetermined effect, etc.).
(9) In the case of a new shift to the “advantageous section” in the middle of the continuous production of losing (for example, the production of defeat) in the “normal section”,
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (such as a stage change production in the "advantageous section" transition game, "When you turn around, there is a character and Sutechen suggesting lines"). The rate of rewriting the presentation during the continuous presentation (defeat) is higher than the rate of rewriting the presentation during the continuous presentation (victory).
(9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous effect to the end. In the case of shifting to the "advantageous section" during the execution of continuous production, the ratio of notifying the fact that it has shifted on the sub control board S side in the game, and when the continuous production is not being executed, the secondary in the game It differs from the rate at which the control board S side notifies that the shift has occurred.

<<Point 2>>
(1) Configure so that the player can select a stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the "normal section". For example, it can be selected by operating a sub-input button.
(2) Stay stage group A 1: The lottery result of whether or not it will be an “advantageous section” will be announced in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game,
Stay stage A group 2: The lottery result of whether or not it will be an “advantageous section” is notified after the end of the game (or when betting the next game (when the replay stop is displayed, when the start lever is operated)).
(3) When the state of "advantageous section" and stay stage other than stay stage group A becomes "normal section", a stay stage is selected from stay stage group A. When the state of the "advantageous section" and the stay stage other than the production group A becomes the "normal section", the stay stage is maintained.
(4) The AT expectation level when the advantageous interval display is unlit and stay stage group A is different from the AT expectation level when the advantageous interval indicator is unlit and stay stage other than stay stage A group. For example, from low AT expectations, "advantageous interval indicator is off and stay stage A group → advantageous interval indicator is on and stay stage A group → advantageous interval indicator is on and stay stage other than A group"
(5) Triggered by the production in the game that changed from the “normal section” to the “advantageous section” (including the production of 1G completion and continuous production), the transition of the stay stage (stay stage group A → stay stage group B) There is a difference between the rate of occurrence and the rate of transition to the stay stage triggered by the production in the game from the "advantageous section" to the "normal section".

<<Point 3>>
(1) The higher the number of guaranteed games in the “advantageous section” (the remaining number of games with high secured obstacles), the higher the degree of expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, expectation of winning the bonus). The higher the probability of choosing the stay stage, the lower the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (remaining number of games with high secured obstacles), the higher the level of expectation (expectation of winning the AT lottery, winning the bonus probability of choosing a stay stage with a high degree of expectation).
(2) When the number of guaranteed remaining games in the “advantageous section” is equal to or less than a predetermined value (four games or less), the smaller the number of guaranteed remaining games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect that transitions to the stay stage.
(3) Stay with high expectations (expectation for winning AT lottery, expectation for winning bonus) (expectation for winning the AT lottery, expectation for winning the bonus) (expectation of winning a bonus) is high.

<<Point 4>>
(1) If you win BB in the "resurrection state",
(1-1) AT addition lottery may be executed during BB, or may not be executed. (1-2) After completing the BB, the state may be changed to the "AT state", or may not be changed.
(1-3) AT addition lottery may be executed during BB, or may not be executed. (1-4) When the state shifts to the "AT state" after the BB ends, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be subtracted by one game in the "resurrection possible/impossible effect state".
(2) The AT addition lottery may be executed in the "restoration possible/impossible effect state", or may not be executed. If you run an AT extra lottery,
(3) If you win a reverse push white 7 matching replay or a forward push black 7 matching replay in the "state for resurrection possibility production", avoidance navigation will occur, and at the timing after the revival production (success) is executed. The number of additional games is notified.
(4) In the case of winning a combination that can move to the "advantageous zone" in the "state for revival possibility", the advantageous zone indicator will be extinguished at the start of the next game, while the "state for revival possibility" will be displayed. In the case where the revival lottery is not won in the next game, the advantageous zone indicator can be lit at the start timing of the next game when winning a role that can shift to the "advantageous zone" in the next game.
(5) In the "state for revival possibility production state", if it is an advantageous section but the AT addition lottery is not performed,
(5-1) Even if you win a role (for example, watermelon A) that can execute an AT extra lottery in the "state for revival possibility/impossibility effect", the number of AT games will not be added, but the revival effect (success) will be executed 1G ("AT in state") When winning a role that can be added (for example, watermelon A), the number of AT games can be added.
(6) A bonus in the event that a bonus is won in the resurrection effect execution game and the resurrection effect (success) is executed in the case where "battle effect 3G + resurrection effect (failure) 1G" is scheduled to be executed as the effect at the end of the AT. During the bonus, the number of AT games is not added, but when the bonus is won in the battle effect execution game (any of 3G) and the revival effect (success) is executed, the number of AT games is added during the bonus. can. Also, the production tendencies during the bonus may be different.

<<Point 5>>
(1) If there is a game state A and a game state B as the state related to the AT that is the "advantageous section",
(1-1) The degree of expectation for winning the AT extra lottery is "game state A>advantageous state B" a lot).
(1-2) The number of additions that can be added when winning the combination X in the gaming state A and the number of additions that can be added when winning the combination Y in the gaming state A are different.
(1-3) The number of additions that can be added when winning the combination X in the gaming state B and the number of additions that can be added when winning the combination Y in the gaming state B are the same.

<<Point 6>>
(1) The display mode of the fall avoidance display is changed to when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to before the third stop (C). to differ.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestive display is arranged in the order of "A<B<C" from the least conspicuous to the player.
(2) When the state of "AT in progress" and "RT1" changes to "low probability state" and "RT1" where the AT is finished, when winning the push order, press on the push order display device. The order navigation is displayed, but the push order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device (displayed as "???").
(3) In a game in which a fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, if winning 18 (falling combination) wins at the 3rd stop, the display is maintained in the same display mode as after the 2nd stop. .
(4) If the start lever is operated in a situation where the power is restored from a power failure and the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device has not been completed, the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is completed. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed by the voice from the speaker (for example, "It's left!").
(5) Even in a state related to an AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as an "additional specialized state", if the fall combination is won, the fall avoidance suggestive effect is preferentially displayed.
(6) The "advantageous section" is maintained even if the fallen combination wins in the "advantageous section".
(7) In the case where the falling hand is configured to be a pushing hand (whether or not to display a stop display is determined by the pushing order), a pushing hand that is not a falling hand (push order bell, etc.) is won, and the pushing order is selected. When navigation is executed and stopped in a pressing order different from the pressing order navigation, the display of the effect display device may be darkened, while when the falling role is won, the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation is stopped. In this case, the display of the effect display device does not darken (or the display of the fall avoidance suggesting effect does not darken).

<<Point 7>>
(1) When the BB associated with the BB with the setting difference is configured to shift to "RT3" and "AT ready state" after the end of the BB (similar to Modification 1 from the present embodiment).
(1-1) By winning a role with a high probability of winning in "RT3", the AT addition lottery is won (100% may be won, or a predetermined probability may be won).
(1-2) Depending on the type of BB hand, the RT state to be shifted after the BB ends is different, and the execution mode of the AT additional lottery according to the hand that is likely to appear in any RT state (the hand that executes the additional lottery, the additional The lottery winning probability, the number of AT-added games) are made different.
(1-3) Bonus A → RT1 → promotion replay A → RT3 (high replay probability), bonus B → RT2 → promotion replay B → RT3, and promotion replay A and promotion replay B are added. The winning rate or the average number of additional games is different.
(1-4) When bonus A → RT1, bonus B → RT2, and promotion replay A and promotion replay B are provided, the winning probability of promotion replay A and promotion replay B in RT1 and RT2 is differ.
(1-5) Bonus A→RT1 and bonus B→RT2 are configured so that promotion replays and drop replays can be won respectively, and RT1 and RT2 have different winning probabilities for promotion replays and drop replays.
(1-6) After BB with setting difference is completed, it shifts to a dedicated RT state (“RT3” and “AT preparation state”), and then shifts to “additional specialization state” with promotion replay as a trigger.

<<Point 8>>
(1) It has 1 type BB-B1 and 1 type BB-B2, and after finishing 1 type BB-B1, it shifts to "RT3", and after finishing 1 type BB-B2, it shifts to "RT4". If configured as
(1-1) "RT3" and "RT4" are different in the execution mode of the AT additional lottery (the combination for executing the additional lottery, the probability of winning the additional lottery, the number of AT additional games).
(1-2) The BB start effect associated with type 1 BB-B1 and the BB start effect associated with type 1 BB-B2 differ in effect tendency (the selection rate of the BB start effect with high expectations is different).
(2) When the replay 04 is stop-displayed before the replay 06 in the "AT ready state" and "RT3", the process shifts to "RT4", and the treasure box loss presentation is not executed. In "RT4", a replaying role promoted to "RT3" is won. Further, when "RT4" becomes "RT3", even if re-game-E1 to E3 are won after that, the treasure box opening additional effect is not executed.
(3) There are a plurality of types of BB roles, and even if a player wins a BB role, it is difficult for the player to visually determine which BB role has been won, and after the BB has ended, depending on the type of BB. are made different, and the execution mode of the AT extra lottery when winning the promotion replay role is different depending on the RT state. In such a configuration, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect to be executed during the BB is differentiated according to the type of BB (such as acquisition of a gold treasure box, acquisition of a silver treasure box, acquisition of a copper treasure box, etc.). different numbers).

<<Point 9>>
(1) There is a setting difference between the BB start effect for the BB that is won during AT and the setting difference that is not set for the BB that is won during AT, and the ratio of the same effect mode for the start effect for BB that is won during AT, and there is a setting difference for winning during non-AT. The ratio of the BB start effect related to BB and the start effect related to BB with no setting difference won during non-AT is different.

<<Point 10>>
(1) Suggest a set value when winning a BB without a set difference in a “normal section” rather than the probability of selecting an effect that suggests a set value when winning a BB with a set difference in an “advantageous section” The probability that the production will be selected is higher.
(2) A BB won during non-AT selects a different BB start performance according to the set difference, but a BB won during AT selects the same BB start performance regardless of the set difference.
(3) The ratio of the BB start effects that are the same between the BB with set difference won during AT and the BB without set difference won during AT, and the BB with set difference won during non-AT and BB with set difference and non-AT The proportion of the BB start effect being the same effect mode is different between the BB with no set difference won in the middle.

<<Point 11>>
(1) When winning the "no set difference (the win rate does not differ depending on the set value) + BB", select "advantage zone indicator lighting + effect B" that can be executed when the "no set difference" is won. The probability of selecting "advantage zone display extinguished + effect A" that can be executed when winning the "set difference hand (the winning rate is different depending on the set value)" is higher than the probability of choosing {"rare Role + BB time” is a production that arouses the winning of BB (for example, a battle production) rather than a production that agitates the transition to a high probability state (for example, a production that shifts to a stay stage where you can stay in a high probability state). easier to execute}.
(2) When a predetermined combination (for example, cherry) is won, it is configured to shift to a high probability state at 100%, and the number of high security obstacle games is distributed as follows: 50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10% → 50G", and if 3G is selected, the battle is defeated, and in other cases, the battle is won. Also, the degree of expectation for the number of high-probability games (20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who won the battle. Also, in the case of the above example, at the 20th game, a highly accurate 20th game is executed to agitate whether or not the game can be continued (a production to agitate whether the game is 20 or 50, and if successful, it will be definite that it will be the 50th game). .

<<Point 12>>
(1) It has a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the "normal section", and the probability of occurrence of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the "advantageous section", the predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) A predetermined freeze effect is more likely to be executed in the "normal section" than in the "advantageous section". (1-3) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed in a BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) A predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of failure.

<<<Configuration applicable to this example>>>
A configuration applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example will be described in detail below. Any of the configurations described in detail below can be applied to all the embodiments described above, and one configuration described in detail below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations described in detail below can be applied. Add what you can do.

<<Configuration of memory map>>
First, referring to FIG. 59, the configuration of part of the memory map in the RAM (sometimes referred to as first RAM) of the main control board M applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example will be described in detail. The areas shown in FIG. Area for storing related information, (3) "RAM checksum data": Data used in checksum calculation processing executed when power is turned on, calculated from data stored in RAM when power is turned off. (4) "control command buffer": sub Area for storing command information to be sent to the control board side, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer": Information used when power is restored, and is stored in the current stack pointer when power is turned off. (6) "unused area": an area for storing an area that is not used for games; (7) "saving data 1 to save data 8": Areas are used in the order of RAM in which data to be saved can be written to the maximum in terms of design by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, or the like. In this configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is designed to be "7FF8H". There is a possibility that the stack pointer points to the address of In that case, there is a possibility that the saved data will be stored beyond the area of "saved data 1 to saved data 8" that has been secured as an area for data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, the address (address close to "7FF8H") that may be indicated by the stack pointer in the event of the unexpected failure is data that does not affect the progress of the game (there is little impact). data). Specifically, by providing an address for storing "set value data" at an address that is at least one address away from "saved data 1 to saved data 8" secured as an area for data to be saved in advance, the game It is possible to provide a game machine that does not disadvantage not only players but also game parlors. In the figure, (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer" is data that is not used while the game is in progress after the power has been restored, and (4) "control command buffer" (3) "RAM checksum data" can be used while the game is progressing after the power has been restored. (2) "external signal system data" is data to be transmitted to the hall computer, and therefore has little effect on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) "set value data" is data related to set values that affect the outcome of the game, so for example, if the set values are changed to a lower value, the player suffers a significant disadvantage. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, if the set value is changed to a high value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage will occur in the game arcade. As described above, (1) "set value data" is important data for the normal progress of the game. For this reason, in (1) to (7) in the same figure, (1) "set value data" is the highest order data (data stored at the upper address). In other words, (2) "external signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data , (4) 'control command buffer', (5) 'stack pointer temporary storage buffer', and (6) 'unused area'. With this configuration, even if a problem occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, the RAM that is not used for the game is provided. Therefore, it is possible to configure the game machine so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. (2) "external signal system data", (3) "RAM checksum data", (4) "control command buffer", (5) "stack pointer temporary storage buffer", (6) "unused area" There is no problem even if the order of the addresses where the five data are stored is changed. Alternatively, the data may be stored in the order of "(6)→(5)→(3)→(2)→(4)" from the upper address. In addition, (6) "unused area" may not be provided. It should be noted that the data stored in the RAM area of (2) to (5) above does not make it impossible to insert game medals (game medals It is data that does not generate an error that makes it impossible to input

The area for storing the "set value data" shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to store the following data.
(A) Total score data: An area for storing data related to the number of game values, which plays the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed reel-type gaming machine that does not use actual game medals (total When the score data is stored in area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes.)
(B) Minimum game time: Data for counting the minimum game time for one game (decrementing the counter value for each interrupt processing) (minimum game time for one game is 4.1 seconds)
(C) Acquired number counter at the time of BB operation: A counter for determining whether or not the condition for ending BB (number of payouts) is satisfied (counter corresponding to the value given to the player) value is subtracted)
(D) Acquisition number counter at the time of MB operation: A counter for determining whether or not the condition (number of payouts) for ending MB is satisfied (counter corresponding to the value given to the player) value is subtracted)
A plurality of (A) to (D) and "set value data" may be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. good. In addition, when a plurality of data can be stored, each of the plurality of data is stored at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (an area for storing is provided). It is preferable to configure so as to With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage the players or the gaming facility. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is "7FF8H" by design, but an unexpected problem (such as an unexpected power failure) occurred. Although there is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates an address higher than "7FF8H" in some cases, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage players and gaming facilities.

<<Action related to replay stop display>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action in a winning game for replay applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even during the replay stop display.

First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Stop display. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and after that, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. After that, at the timing of (4) in the drawing, the 2 bed lamp D212 and the 3 bed lamp D213 are turned off substantially simultaneously. After that, at the timing of (5) in the figure, a 2 bet ramp is performed as an automatic betting operation related to the replay that has been stopped (when the replay is displayed to be stopped, a bet is made without inserting game medals or operating the bet button). D212 lights up. After that, at the timing of (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up as an automatic bet operation related to the replay that is stopped and displayed, and the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213. Substantially at the same time, the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-start lamp D300 are turned on (the ready-to-start lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

Here, the feature points of the action in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 relating to the next game for which the replay is stopped and displayed are configured to light up at substantially the same timing. If the insertable lamp D300 is lit after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert the game medals, he recognizes that the game medals cannot be inserted by visually confirming that the start lamp D180 has been previously lit. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the start lamp D300 is turned on, the player may recognize that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by turning on the insertable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 substantially simultaneously as described above, it is possible to facilitate the player's judgment regarding the insertion of game medals and the operation of the start lever D50, and thus the wrong game medals. It is possible to prevent the injection and the operation of the start lever D50.

<Configuration 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always lit from the bet operation timing of the game in which the replay is stopped and displayed to the end of the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed due to the winning of the replay, and the fact that the winning of the replay has been won can be quickly notified, so that the progress of the game can be accelerated. can be smoothed out.

<Configuration 3>
Lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the stop display of the replay is before lighting of the start lamp D180. Thus, by lighting the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified that the re-game has been won first, and then the start lamp D180 is lit to enable the operation of the start lever D50 due to the re-game winning. By informing the player of the fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 4>
The lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the stop display of the replay is at a timing before the lighting of the input possible lamp D300. In this way, by first lighting the re-game lamp D290, it is first notified that the re-game has been won, and after that, the insertable lamp D300 is lit to notify that the game medals can be inserted. This makes it possible to smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 5>
The lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the stop display of the replay is before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, the fact that the replay win is announced first, and the player can easily recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed due to the replay win. , since it is possible to quickly notify that the replay has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 6>
Lighting of the replay lamp D290 based on the stop display of the replay is before lighting of the 2 bet lamp D212. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, the fact that the replay win is announced first, making it easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed due to the replay win. , since it is possible to quickly notify that the replay has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 7>
The lighting of the 2-bed lamp D212 and the 3-bed lamp D213 pertaining to the next game for which the replay is stopped and displayed is such that the 3-bed lamp D213 is lit after the 2-bed lamp D212 is lit (the 2-bed lamp D212 and the 3-bed lamp D213 are do not light up at approximately the same time). With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that an automatic betting operation has been performed as a result of winning a replay, and the progress of the game can be facilitated.

<Configuration 8>
The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time after the stop display of the replay. When a plurality of lamps (2-bed lamp D212 and 3-bed lamp D213) are lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the game state. You can quickly grasp the game state.

<Configuration 9>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, the fact that the replay win is announced first, making it easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed due to the replay win. , since it is possible to quickly notify that the replay has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 10>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by lighting the replay lamp D290 first, the fact that the replay win is announced first, making it easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed due to the replay win. , since it is possible to quickly notify that the replay has been won, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 11>
The lighting timings of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 relating to the next game for which the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. With this configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the game progresses smoothly.

<<Other actions 1>>
Here, an effect different from the configuration in FIG. 60 in a replay winning game applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail as other effect 1 below.

<Configuration 12>
The 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 may be always lit from the bet operation timing of the game in which the replay is stopped and displayed to the end of the next game in which the replay is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by winning the replay, and the fact that the replay has been won can be notified as soon as possible, thereby progressing the game. can be facilitated.

<Configuration 13>
The turn-on timing of the replay lamp D290 based on the stop display of the replay and the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the replay may be configured substantially simultaneously. It is desired to notify the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (2 bet lamp D212) is kept lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state, so the 2 bet lamp D212 is turned off once. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the gaming state, and furthermore, the lighting timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 related to the next game after the replay lamp D290 has been stopped and displayed (it may be the lighting timing of the input possible lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that game medals do not need to be inserted by turning on the light earlier.

<Configuration 14>
The turn-on timing of the replay lamp D290 based on the stop display of the replay and the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the replay may be configured substantially simultaneously. It is desired to notify the player that an automatic bet operation is being performed, but if the bet lamp (3-bet lamp D213) continues to be lit, it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state, so the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned off once. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the gaming state, and furthermore, the lighting timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the replaying lamp D290 has been stopped and displayed (it may be the lighting timing of the input possible lamp D300). It is possible to notify in advance that game medals do not need to be inserted by turning on the light earlier.

<Configuration 15>
When a player wins a replay in a certain game and also wins a replay in the next game of the certain game, the replay lamp D290 lights up based on the stop display of the replay of the certain game. The replay lamp D290 may continue to light up until the end of the next game of the certain game. In this way, by continuously lighting the replay lamp D290, the player can be quickly notified of the winning of the replay, and the progress of the game can be facilitated.

<Configuration 16>
Triggered by the third stop operation (or the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed to be stopped), the replay lamp D290, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 1-bet lamp D211, the start lamp D180, the input possible lamp D300, , etc., may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the notification by the lamp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game.

<Configuration 17>
The lighting timings of the replay lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the input possible lamp D300 may be substantially the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is turned on based on the replay stop display.

<Configuration 18>
Based on the stop display of the replay, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off substantially at the same time. It may be configured to turn on substantially simultaneously. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when winning the replay is three.

<Configuration 19>
Based on the stop display of the replay, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off substantially simultaneously, and then the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are restarted. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the input possible lamp D300 may be configured to light substantially simultaneously. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when winning the replay is 3, and to clearly indicate that the lamp is turned on based on the stop display of the replay. can be notified to

<<Other actions 2>>
Here, further action different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in a replay winning game applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described in detail below as other action 2 using FIGS. 61 to 63. describe.

<Action Diagram 2 Regarding Replay Stop Display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the action applicable to the reel-type game machine of this example will be described in detail.

First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Substantially simultaneously with the stop display, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same timing. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the 2 bed lamp D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3 bed lamp D213 lights up. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON→OFF), and then at the timing of (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. The possible lamp D300 lights almost simultaneously. Incidentally, the 1-bed lamp D211 remains on.

<Action Diagram 3 Regarding Replay Stop Display>
First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Stop display. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and after that, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-start lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. The 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, and the 3-bed lamp D213 remain lit.

<Action Diagram 4 Regarding Replay Stop Display>
First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Stop display. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off). The input ready lamp D300 lights up. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid. The 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, and the 3-bed lamp D213 remain lit.

<Action Diagram 5 Regarding Replay Stop Display>
First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Stop display. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bed ramp D211, the 2-bed ramp D212, and the 3-bed ramp D213. turn off at about the same time. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the replay lamp D290 are lit substantially simultaneously. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the 3 bed lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the turn-on lamp D300 light almost simultaneously.

<Action Diagram 6 Regarding Replay Stop Display>
First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Stop display. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and after that, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 2 bet lamp lights up substantially simultaneously with the replay lamp D290. D212 and 3 bed lamp D213 are turned off. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the 2 bed lamp D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3 bed lamp D213 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially at the same time. Incidentally, the 1-bed lamp D211 remains on.

<Action Diagram 7 Regarding Replay Stop Display>
First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Stop display. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON→OFF), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290 is activated. The start lamp D180 and the ready-to-start lamp D300 are turned on substantially at the same time. The 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, and the 3-bed lamp D213 remain lit.

<Action Diagram 8 Regarding Replay Stop Display>
First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Stop display. After that, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and then at the timing of (3) in the figure, the 1-bed ramp D211, the 2-bed ramp D212, and the 3-bed ramp D213. turn off at about the same time. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the replay lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the entry possible lamp D300. and light up at approximately the same time.

<Action Diagram 9 Regarding Replay Stop Display>
First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Stop display. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and after that, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. After that, at the timing of (4) in the drawing, the 2 bed lamp D212 and the 3 bed lamp D213 are turned off substantially simultaneously. After that, at the timing of (5) in the figure, the 2 bed lamp D212 lights up. After that, at the timing (6) in the figure, the 3 bed lamp D213 lights up. After that, at the timing of (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on ready lamp D300 are turned on substantially at the same time. Incidentally, the 1-bed lamp D211 remains on.

<Action Diagram 10 Regarding Replay Stop Display>
First, in a game in which a replay was won (previous game is assumed to be a loss), two reels are stopped, one reel (also called the final reel) is spinning, 1-bet lamp D211, 2-bet lamp D212, While the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the final reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and at the timing of (1) in the figure, the symbol combination for replaying is performed. Stop display. After that, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (on→off), and after that, at the timing (3) in the figure, the replay lamp D290 lights up. After that, at the timing of (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the start lamp D180 and the ready-to-start lamp D300 are turned on substantially at the same time. The 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, and the 3-bed lamp D213 remain lit.

Among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, configurations similar to Configurations 1 to 19 described above can produce effects similar to those of Configurations 1 to 19 described above.

In addition, the stop display timing of the symbol combination related to the replay, the operation timing of the stop button, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the replay lamp D290, the lighting/extinguishing timing of the 3-bet lamp D213, and the lighting/extinguishing of the 2-bet lamp D212 are described above. It is supplemented that there is no problem in combining any configuration (timing) regarding the timing, the lighting/lighting-off timing of the 1 bed lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the turn-on lamp D300.

In the above description, the game medals can be inserted even during the stop display of the replay, but the configuration is not limited to this. configuration (applicable to all configurations described above). In such a configuration, the input possible lamp D300 remains extinguished while the replay is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the above-mentioned "substantially at the same time" means that when the player visually recognizes it as being at the same time, for example, it may be a process (lighting/lighting-out timing) that is executed within a period in which the interrupt process is executed 10 times. For example, there is no problem even if it is almost simultaneous.

<<Configuration related to bed button lamp>>
The bet button lamp S50 in the reel-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

The main control board M performs processing to enable the bet button D220 from disabled, after which the main control board M transmits a command to turn on the bet button lamp S50 to the sub control board S side (main control board M The board M may be configured to transmit a command indicating that the bet button D220 is activated to the sub-control board S side), after which the sub-control board S transmits the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control board M. may be configured to execute processing for lighting the bet button lamp S50 upon receiving a command for lighting the bet button lamp S50. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 is controlled to be turned on/off on the sub-control board S side, but the bet button D220 is activated according to the game status on the main control board M side. can reliably light up the bet button lamp S50, and even if the player visually recognizes the lighting of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether the bet (bet button D220) is valid, the main control board M side It can be configured so as not to cause inconsistency with the game situation.

<<Configuration regarding the stop button lamp>>
The configuration regarding the stop button lamp S60 in the reel-type game machine according to this example may be configured as follows.

A process of enabling the stop button D40 (one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is executed by the processing of the main control board M. A command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the above-mentioned enabling process has been executed) is sent to the S side {the main control board M transmits the stop button to the sub control board S side D40 (either left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, or right stop button D43) may be configured to transmit a command to the effect that it is activated}. It may be configured such that upon receiving the command for lighting the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M, the processing for lighting the stop button lamp S60 is executed. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 is controlled to be turned on and off on the sub-control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is activated according to the game situation on the main control board M side. can reliably light the stop button lamp S60, and when the player visually recognizes the lighting of the stop button lamp S60, the stop button D40 (either the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43) is valid, it can be configured so as not to cause any discrepancies with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<<Structure Regarding Reel Unit RU Applicable to this Example>>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel-type gaming machine according to this example includes reels M50 (M51, M52 and M53) rotatably via reel units RU. Incidentally, FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the reel-type gaming machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably accommodates all three reels M51, M52 and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and is provided with an opening RU10. The three reels M51, M52 and M53 are provided in the reel unit RU so that the patterns of the three reels M51, M52 and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. Although details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel strip MO to a reel frame MW.

As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top portion RU20 and a bottom portion RU30 with an opening RU10 interposed therebetween. By placing the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of the base portion BU, which will be described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the base portion BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end of the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU. there is The three through holes RU40 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

<<Pedestal BU>>
The base portion BU is made of a metal plate or the like and has a substantially plate-like shape. The ends of the pedestal BU are attached to the left side, the right side, and the back of the back box with screws (not shown), and the pedestal BU is fixed to the back box. The pedestal BU is attached to the back box so as to extend horizontally. As described above, the reel unit RU is mounted on the base portion BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
A plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU10 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end portion of the base portion BU. A plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom portion RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed to correspond to the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the base portion BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed to correspond to, for example, the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53.

The numbers and positions of the through-holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 need only correspond to each other and be arranged along the horizontal direction so that the reel unit RU can be stably mounted on the base portion BU. Further, the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the base portion BU may be used to attach only the reel unit RU to the base portion BU, or the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the base portion BU may be used to attach the reel unit RU to the base portion BU. Both the RU and one reel (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, or the right reel M53) may be attached to the base portion BU.

<<How to fix the reel unit RU>>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU, and the reel unit RU is mounted so that each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the screw hole BU10 of the corresponding pedestal portion BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the threaded hole BU10 via the through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position on the base portion BU. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base portion BU.

The reel unit RU may be detachably attached using a member such as a detachable rivet, for example, a push rivet, in addition to the screw BS. It is sufficient that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base portion BU by means of an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

In this example, the configuration in which the reel unit RU is placed on the pedestal portion BU was exemplified, but the configuration is not limited to this. It may be configured to be fixed (fixed so as to hang), or through holes RU40 may be provided in both side surfaces of the reel unit RU and fixed to the inside of the housing by screws BS. In addition, even if such a configuration is used, the configuration regarding the position of the screw BS and the drop position of the screw BS, which will be described in detail below (for example, the configuration regarding the screw BS located at the position closest to the opening/closing position of the front door DU) ) can be applied.

<<Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS>>
FIG. 66(a) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the right side of the back surface, and FIG. 66(b) is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the left side of the back surface. 66(a) and 66(b) also show arrows indicating movement of the screw BS, which will be described later. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66(a) and (b) for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

The hopper H40 (sometimes referred to as a main tank member) is a funnel-shaped tank made of ABS (acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front sidewall H42, a left sidewall H44, a rear sidewall H46, and a right sidewall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to circle, and the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 form an opening H30. be. The opening H30 is formed to open upward. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 are introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30. The hopper H40 may be composed of a plurality of members, and the plurality of members may be collectively referred to as the hopper H40, the main tank member, the main tank unit, or the like.

Further, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom portion H52, a right slope portion H54 and a left slope portion H56. The right inclined portion H54 is arranged on the right side of the hopper H40, and the game medals introduced to the right side of the hopper H40 are guided by their own weight toward the hopper bottom portion H52, which will be described later. The left inclined portion H56 is arranged on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides medals introduced to the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom portion H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is arranged so as to cover an upper portion of substantially the left half of the disk H50, which will be described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being continuously suspended in the hopper bottom portion H52 and unable to drop, and smoothly guide the game medals toward the hopper bottom portion H52.

By providing the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57, all the game medals introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening portion H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom portion H52. The tokens guided by the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 are stored in the hopper bottom portion H52. In this manner, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing game medals inside the hopper H40.

A disk H50 as a rotating body is arranged in the hopper bottom H52. The disk H50 is rotationally driven by the hopper motor H80 described above, and game medals are ejected from the game medal outlet H60 by the rotational movement of the disk H50. In this manner, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged from the game medal outlet H60 one by one.

<Ejection guide part H62>
A discharge guide portion H62 is formed inside the front side wall H42 along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has an elongated shape and an inclined surface H64 formed to be inclined. When the hopper H40 is arranged in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is positioned lower than the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed substantially constant, but is formed so as to widen slightly as it goes downward (going from left to right).

The ejection guide part H62 guides the game medals above the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS and stores them in the hopper H40 before the game medals are accumulated in the hopper H40 and overflow from the hopper H40. It is a member for reducing the number of medals. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS through the discharge port H66. In this manner, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion for discharging the game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the cover portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing the game medals inside the hopper H40, while the ejection guide portion H62 serves to remove the game medals. It functions as a discharging inclined portion for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to that of the right inclined portion H54 and the left inclined portion H56.

In addition, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the ejection guide portion H62 all move the game medals from the left side to the right side. In other words, the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all slope downward to the right. The final target of the left inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. Movement of game medals can be aligned from the left side to the right side.

A projecting wall H58 projecting upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 is erected in the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. The projecting wall H58 can prevent the medals placed on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially quadrangular prism shape and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at the top, and the medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored inside the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<<Drop off of screw BS of reel unit RU>>
A front door DU is attached to the back box of the reel-type game machine so that it can be opened and closed (the front door DU and the back box are sometimes collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box with the left side of the front door DU (the left side as seen from the player) as the center of rotation. Therefore, the right side of the front door DU (the right side from the player's point of view) has the largest movement distance, and when the front door DU is closed, impact due to contact or collision with the back box is generated and propagated to the back box. Since the impact occurs on the right side of the reel-type game machine, the impact on the right side of the reel-type game machine is the greatest, and the impact tends to gradually weaken on the left side of the reel-type game machine.

As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the base portion BU with screws BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal BU at three locations, left, center and right, and the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 receives the greatest impact. Therefore, the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most likely to be loosened by an impact, and when the screw is released, the right screw BS will come off and fall. Also, the central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 may be loosened by the impact and dropped. It is assumed that the left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 will receive less impact to some extent, but it is of course possible that the left screw BS may loosen and fall off depending on the degree of impact propagation and usage time.

<<Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1)>>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (the medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged below the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is positioned below at least the right screw BS among the three screws BS described above.

When the right screw BS falls off due to impact, it first freely falls downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the weight of the right screw BS, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

In this way, even if the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40. It is possible to stably operate the hopper H40 by preventing the rotation of the disk H50 from being hindered and the disk H50 from being damaged.

In the above example, only the right screw BS was targeted. and the reel unit RU may be positioned. Even if any screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this example, the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A member such as a screw attached to the right side (right side as seen from the player) may also be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when dropped.

<<Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2)>>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is positioned below the center screw BS among the three screws BS described above, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is positioned below the right screw BS. In FIG. 67, the same components as in FIG. 64 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

If the right screw BS falls off due to the impact, it will freely fall downward (arrow 2A) and will be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS as it is (without contacting the inclined surface H64).

When the central screw BS falls off due to impact, it first freely falls downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the slanted surface H64 and rolls on the slanted surface H64 while being guided by the weight of the central screw BS itself to move along the slanted surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

The dropped right side screw BS and the central screw BS are prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS prevents the disc H50 from interfering with the rotating operation or damaging the disc H50, thereby preventing the hopper H40 from being damaged. It can operate stably.

In the example described above, the right screw BS and the central screw BS were targeted. good too. Even if any screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As described above, it is preferable to form the projecting wall H58 projecting upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS that has dropped and rested on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the hopper bottom portion H52. The height of the projecting wall H58 is greater than or equal to the height at which the screw BS rebounds when dropped onto the inclined surface H64. The screws BS are prevented from falling into the hopper bottom portion H52, and the screws BS can be prevented from interfering with the operation of the disk H50 or causing failure.

In this way, even if the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration or the like due to the opening and closing of the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not enter the hopper H40 and medal assistance is provided. By configuring the screw BS to drop into the tank HS, the manager of the game arcade can easily collect the detached screw BS.

<<Hopper H400>>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right screw BS falls, it passes outside the hopper H40 (on the right side of the right side wall H48 as seen from the player) (arrow 2A) and stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The hopper H40 shown in FIG. 64 can be shared with the right screw BS that has fallen down by storing it in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing it through the inside of the hopper H40.

On the other hand, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure (right side wall H480) in which the right side wall H48 is extended to the right side may be used. The hopper H400 has a bottom opening H410 formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480. When the right screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400 and further through the bottom opening H410 into the medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this manner, by passing through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40.

<<Extension RU50>>
In the above example, when the screw BS falls off, it freely falls toward the medal auxiliary tank HS below. On the other hand, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 65, an extension EN may be provided below the reel unit RU and the base BU. By providing the extending portion EN, even if the screw BS falls off, it does not fall immediately, but can be dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS after being guided by the extending portion EN. In this way, the extending portion EN can match the position where the screw BS is attached and the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, thereby increasing the flexibility of the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Structure of Medal Auxiliary Tank HS>>
<Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode>
As shown in FIG. 68, at least two fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 are formed in the back surface of the medal auxiliary tank HS. In addition, two fullness detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection substrate CC (see FIG. 65) are provided at the lower part of the rear surface of the back box. The two fullness detection electrodes DE have an elongated shape, extend horizontally and parallel to each other, and are arranged to protrude forward. The two fullness detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two fullness detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged at the bottom of the back box, the two fullness detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding fullness detection electrode through-holes HS20 and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

As medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL (see FIG. 69(c)) of the stored game medals gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. Incidentally, FIG. 69(c) is a sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost portion UL shown in FIG. 69(c) is a line (for example, an envelope line) connecting the contours of the game medals positioned in the uppermost portion UL among the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. (For convenience, the uppermost portion UL is shown as a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come into contact with the two fullness detection electrodes DE and the two fullness detection electrodes DE become conductive through the plurality of medals, the contact between the two fullness detection electrodes DE is detected. An electrical circuit is formed. By forming an electric circuit, the continuity detection board CC outputs a signal indicating that there is continuity between the two fullness detection electrodes DE. By doing so, when the game medals are stored up to the position of the two full detection electrodes DE, the medal full error can be detected.

The number of fullness detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, and may be three or more. For example, when three are provided, in addition to the two fullness detection electrodes described above, one fullness detection electrode is newly provided below the two fullness detection electrodes, and the newly provided one It is possible to configure such that a medal full error can be detected by conducting between the full detection electrode and any one of the two full detection electrodes described above. Even when the game medals are not evenly stored in the tank HS (for example, when the game medals are stored on the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), the full medal error can be detected.

<<Material of screw BS and medal>>
The material of the screw BS is magnetizable and electrically conductive. For example, it is made of steel. Also, the material of the medal is non-magnetizable and conductive. For example, it is made of plated brass or stainless steel. With this configuration, even if the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily removed from the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<<Relationship Between Overall Length BL of Screw BS and Distance EL Between Two Full Detection Electrodes DE>>
The left screw BS, center screw BS, and right screw BS described above are used to attach the reel unit RU to the base BU. FIG. 69(b) is a front view showing the entire screw BS. This screw BS has a total longitudinal length BL (see FIG. 69(b)) shorter than the distance EL (see FIG. 69(a)) between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69(a)). Overall length BL<distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than the space between the full detection electrodes DE, so there are two screws BS alone. (The screw BS is not caught by two fullness detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the head thickness (length) and the nominal length. Also, FIG. 69(a) is a plan view of the back side portion of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state in which the full detection electrode DE protrudes inside the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<Relationship Between Length HR of Bearing Surface of Screw BS and Diameter ED of Full Detection Electrode DE>>
The radial length HR (see FIG. 69(b)) of the bearing surface of the screw BS is shorter than the diameter ED (see FIG. 69(a)) of the full detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69(a)). length HR<diameter ED of full sensing electrode DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS will not be hooked on one of the full detection electrodes DE. Even if the BS comes into contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be immediately detached, and the screw BS alone will not accidentally conduct.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 69(c), one of the two fullness detection electrodes DE (for example, the fullness detection electrode DE on the right side in FIG. 69(c)) is already stored. When in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the left full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69(c)) and the screw BS are temporarily in contact. Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS will not be hooked on the fullness detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately detached from the fullness detection electrode DE (see arrow F in FIG. 69(c)). , a conductive circuit is not formed via the screws BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

In this example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that stores all three reels has been described, but even if it is a separate unit that stores each of the three reels separately, the screw BS is detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw BS. Therefore, the configuration of the medal auxiliary tank HS, screws BS, etc. can be similarly adopted.

<<Configuration of Reel Band>>
FIG. 70(a) is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70(b) is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel band MO is curved. FIG. 70(c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the break M59 of the reel strip MO. FIG. 70(d) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the "white seven" design. The "white seven" symbol is a bonus symbol, and the BB is started by stop-displaying "white seven, white seven, white seven" on the active line. The reel strip MO has a thin plate-like elongated shape (strip shape). As described above, a plurality of patterns are drawn along the longitudinal direction on the reel band MO. The reel band MO is flexible and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and the pattern can be illuminated from the back by the light emitted from the spinning cylinder backlight.

It has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO. A ring-shaped (cylindrical) reel M50 is formed by bending the first end M55 and the second end M57 so as to face each other and attaching it to the reel frame MW. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are made of resin such as plastic to reduce weight. The two frames are arranged parallel to each other and centered on the same axis of rotation. Also, the interval between the two frames is arranged so as to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. The reel M50 can be formed by attaching the reel strip MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames.

<Overlapping portion M58 and cut M59>
The length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion (overlapping portion M58) where the reel band MO partially overlaps occurs near the first end M55 and the second end M57. By doing so, the reel strip MO can be mounted over the entire circumference of the reel frame MW without creating a gap along the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction of the reel strip MO). Further, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO partially overlaps, and the first end portion M55 forms a cut M59.

As shown in FIG. 70(c), the reel strip MO is attached to the upper side of the second end M57, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55. When attaching the reel strip MO to the reel frame MW in this way, first, when starting to stick the reel strip MO, sticking to the reel frame MW is started from the second end M57, and then the reel frame MW is attached to the reel. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel band MO is attached along the circumference of the reel frame MW from the second end M57 toward the first end M55, and finally, the first end M55. The reel band MO is pasted on the upper side of the end M57 of No. 2, and the pasting ends up to the first end M55. When the reel strip MO is stuck in this order, the first end M55 ends in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end is placed on the reel strip MO. A state in which the portions M55 are overlapped is created.

On the other hand, the reel strip MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then the reel frame MW is gradually rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50 while the reel strip MO is attached to the first end. Stick along one circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 toward the second end M57, and finally stick the reel band MO on the upper side of the first end M55 and stick it up to the second end M57. end. When the reel strip MO is pasted in this order, the second end M57 ends in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end is placed on the reel strip MO. It will be in a state where M57 overlaps.

Here, the reel band MO is started to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and thereafter the second end M57 is attached in the same direction as the reel M50, and the second end is attached on the reel band MO. 2 ends M57 are overlapped, when the reel M50 is rotated by executing a game, the air contacts the cross section of the second end M57 (air resistance is large). , air tends to enter between the second end M57 and the reel strip MO below it, and the reel strip MO in the vicinity of the second end M57 is gradually peeled off.

On the other hand, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. In the case where the first end M55 is superimposed on the reel M50, the second end M57 is superimposed on the reel band MO. , air is less likely to contact the cross section of the first end M55 (air resistance is smaller), and air is less likely to enter between the first end M55 and the reel strip MO below it, The reel band MO in the vicinity of the first end M55 becomes difficult to peel off.

As described above, when attaching the reel strip MO to the reel frame MW, the reel strip MO is attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end portion M55 overlaps the reel strip MO after the tape is stuck in the direction.

<Various errors>
Thus, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the overlapped portion M58 is formed between the first end M55 and the second end M57, and the first end M55 or the second end M57 A cut M59 is formed by one of the ends M57. Since the aforementioned reel frame MW is made of resin such as plastic, errors may occur during molding. In addition, when assembling the reel frame MW, deformation may occur and an error may occur. Furthermore, since the reel strip MO is flexible, when the reel strip MO is attached to the reel frame MW, the reel strip MO may be attached while being distorted or the like, or the size of the reel frame MW ( outer circumference) may be installed in a state slightly different from the design value. If a large pattern (for example, "white seven") is positioned on the reel strip MO below the overlapping portion M58, the mounting position of the reel strip MO may not be as desired due to these various errors. If the reel strip MO on the upper side of the superimposed portion M58 overlaps the large symbol, it is assumed that the large symbol is covered by the reel strip MO on the upper side.

In addition, depending on the game state, the player may aim at the bonus symbols when aiming at the bonus symbols. , when the bonus symbols are stopped, etc., there is a possibility that the break M59 is also visually recognized when visually recognizing the bonus symbols. In the event that various errors as described above have occurred, it is conceivable that the player may visually recognize not only the pattern, but also the misalignment of the cut line M59 and the positional misalignment of the symbol. When the bonus symbols are stop-displayed as a symbol combination, the symbol combination is highly profitable for the player, and the player is delighted and pays attention to the bonus symbols. Visually recognizing the deviation of the position of , there is a possibility that the joy of stopping and displaying the bonus symbol combination may decrease.

<For bonus designs>
In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol, such as a bonus symbol, is arranged at the position closest to the break M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (bonus symbol, etc.) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction (longitudinal direction of the reel strip MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is greater than LL. The shortest pattern (longitudinal length SL) is positioned closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

In this way, by arranging the pattern having the shortest length in the longitudinal direction at the position closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57, even if various errors occur, these The symbols can be arranged at a position separated from the superimposed portion M58 (cut M59), and the symbols can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Furthermore, even if the various errors described above have occurred, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the misalignment of the cut line M59 and the misalignment of the symbol position. In the figure, the longitudinal length of the bell pattern (symbols that can form a pattern combination corresponding to the bell) and the longitudinal direction of the cherry pattern (symbols that can form a pattern combination corresponding to the cherry) are shown. Although shown as the same SL, if it is shorter than LL, which is the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven), the longitudinal length of the bell symbol and the longitudinal length of the cherry symbol are made different. is no problem. Also, the symbols to be arranged in the vicinity of the break M59 are not limited to only the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, and may be any non-bonus symbol. or a watermelon pattern (a pattern that can form a pattern combination corresponding to a watermelon) may be arranged near the break M59. Also, in this example, the longitudinal length of the bonus symbol (white seven) and the longitudinal length of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the break M59 were compared, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the short direction may be longer than the length of the short direction of the symbol (for example, the bell symbol) located near the break M59.

In the above example, the longitudinal length of the symbol with the longest longitudinal length (bonus symbol, etc.) is LL, and the longitudinal length of the symbol whose longitudinal length is shorter than LL is SL. The layout of the symbols was determined by comparing the length of the short direction (the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) to LT, and the length of the short direction of the symbol to be shorter than LT. The placement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the direction length ST.

The lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction described above are the lengths of the difference between the portion of the pattern that protrudes most upward and the portion of the pattern that protrudes most downward along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the short direction are the lengths of the difference between the part of the pattern that protrudes most upward and the part of the pattern that protrudes most downward along the short direction.

<In the case of a small role pattern>
Furthermore, in addition to bonus symbols, symbols such as watermelon symbols and cherry symbols, which are not stopped and displayed on the active line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if they are won, in other words, are arranged apart from the maximum number of sliding frames or more. A symbol that has at least one position (sometimes referred to as a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that can be missed, etc.) is also a symbol that is the target of the spotting, and is a symbol that the player tries to see. is. In addition, in a game in which a rare role is won, there are cases where the winning of the rare role is not notified before the stop button is operated. The stop button is often operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button at which it is easy to acquire a winning combination (which is the most profitable for the player). There are also gaming machines that have a large number of winning combinations in which the number of payouts is small, such as one coin, when a prize is won. mode), the stop button is often operated. It should be noted that operating the stop button at the operating timing (operating mode) of the stop button that is most profitable for the player may be referred to as the optimum game method.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when executing the game in the optimum game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the effective lines are the upper left reel, the upper middle reel, and the upper right reel (straight upper line), the middle left reel, the middle middle reel, and the middle right reel (straight middle line), Lower left reel, lower middle reel, lower right reel (straight line at the bottom), upper left reel, middle middle reel, lower right reel (straight downward to the right), lower left reel, middle middle reel, upper right reel (straight upward to the right) ) and , and the prescribed number is three. In addition, as rare roles, there are a watermelon role and a cherry role, and when the watermelon role wins a prize, "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" is linearly stopped and displayed on the activated line, and when the cherry role wins a prize. , "cherry, any, any" ("any" indicates that any pattern is acceptable) is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the effective line. Further, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol are rare combinations, the symbols have at least one or more places that are arranged apart from each other by the maximum number of sliding frames or more.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged part of the reel band MO. In addition, only the left reel is illustrated in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 71, a watermelon, a bell, a replay, a BAR, and a cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are positioned away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. are placed in When a player wins a rare role, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reels where it is easy to sense that the rare role has been won and where it is easy for the player to win the rare role. When a certain watermelon combination or cherry combination is won, the rare combination can be won by playing the game with the above-described optimum game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare combination, the player stops during three frames from the timing when the cherry symbol is positioned on the upper row to the timing when the cherry symbol is positioned on the lower row. By operating the button, it is possible to win a prize regardless of whether the watermelon role or the cherry role is won. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimal game method), the range of 9 frames from the upper row of cherry symbols to the lower row of watermelon symbols can be stop-displayed, as shown in FIG. , regardless of which range of the nine frames is statically displayed (in any of the nine modes of static display), the position distant from the first end M55 or the second end M57 (there is no cut M59 near the pattern placed two frames above the watermelon, and there is no cut M59 near the pattern placed two frames below the cherry), and the gap of the cut M59 It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the deviation of the position of the symbol or the position of the symbol.

As shown in the figure, symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where the rare combination is easily won are placed near the first end M55 and the second end M57. It is possible to configure so that the first end M55 and the second end M57 are not positioned at the position where the reel is frequently stopped and displayed, and the deviation of the break M59 and the position of the pattern Even if there is a deviation of the cut line M59 or a positional deviation of the symbol, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the deviation of the cut line M59.

In this example, the number of steps for one round of the reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336/20 = 16 with a remainder of 16, the 20 frames (symbols) are divided into 16 frames (symbols) of 17 steps and 4 frames (symbols) of 16 steps. The reel is configured. In addition, since it is preferable to make the break M59 invisible to the player as much as possible because it looks good, the pieces (symbols) adjacent to the break M59 are set to 16 steps, which is a relatively small number of steps. is preferred.

It should be noted that, as the configuration of the reel-type gaming machine in this example, it is not necessary to insert and pay out actual game medals used in general reel-type gaming machines. It may be configured to allow the game to progress by pressing the button. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the reel-type gaming machine is increased by the amount of no need to insert and pay out actual game medals (for example, the opening for inserting game medals or a payout opening, and the front door and the back box are integrated, etc., to block the gap where foreign objects are inserted), reduce the risk of illegal game tokens being used, (Sometimes referred to as an enclosed reel-type game machine). It should be noted that the configuration of the enclosed reel-type game machine is applicable to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). It should be noted that the credits and the number of credits display device D200 may not be provided. The increase/decrease processing and display processing of the total score may be executed on the board H (which may also be referred to as a game value control board or game value control means) or another board.

In addition, it corresponds to a physical game medal used in a general reel-type game machine, and has a "score" as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game in an enclosed reel-type game machine. may be configured. The "score" may also be referred to as "score information", "score", "score information", "game value", or "game value information". The game medals that are physically present can be directly handled by the player. On the other hand, in an enclosed reel type game machine, the player can proceed with the game without directly handling actual game medals. The score is not an actual game medal, but a pseudo-game medium converted into data so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. "Credits" are points that are temporarily stored in a bet-enabled state or a settlement-enabled state, and are mainly data managed by the main control board M. FIG. Further, the "total score" means all the scores that can be put into the enclosed reel-type game machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general reel-type gaming machine that uses physical game medals. In addition, when the configuration of the enclosed reel-type game machine is applied to the above-described embodiment, what is called "game medals" in this specification will be replaced with "scores", "score information", and "scores". There is no problem in handling it as "score", "score information", "game value", "game value information", etc., as appropriate, "score", "score information", "score", "score information" , “game value”, and “game value information”. In addition, it is not necessary to have "credit". Also, there is no problem in replacing the credit amount display device with a total score display device.

(Second embodiment)
In this embodiment, it is configured to have an AT-in-progress state or the like as an AT-related state that is advantageous to the player, and in the AT-in-progress state (so-called AT), push-order navigation is executed, thereby providing a state that is advantageous to the player. is provided to improve the interest of the game, but the configuration of the gaming machine capable of executing AT is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of a reel-type game machine capable of executing AT, which is different from the configuration of the present embodiment, will be described as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third card) according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment in the same figure are step 4100 (second) and step 4200 (second). In 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes freeze execution determination processing at the start of rotation, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1550 .

In step 1750, after executing the above-described AT state start control processing, in step 4200 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes freeze execution determination processing at stop time, which will be described later, and the process proceeds to step 3500. Transition. Details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, when the reel starts rotating (when the start lever D50 is operated) and when the reel stops (when the last reel stops, when the third reel stops) (the reel does not start rotating for a predetermined time, and the betting operation for the next game cannot be executed for a predetermined time) can occur.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flow chart of freeze execution determination processing at rotation start according to the subroutine of step 4100 (second) in FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. First, in step 4102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding AT from the game has newly changed to "state during AT". Here, "newly in AT state" means that the state regarding AT becomes "AT in state" for the first time after winning the AT lottery (sometimes referred to as AT first hit), As an example, (1) BB is won in "high probability state" → transition to "advantageous BB internal medium state" → BB symbol (bonus symbol) is stopped and displayed, transition to "advantageous BB state" → BB is Finished, newly moved to "AT state", (2) If cherry is won in "high probability state", AT lottery will be won at 1/2, and after winning AT lottery, precursor state { This is an AT-related state for making the player feel a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the AT lottery has been won. may be configured to have a "fake omen state" which is a production mode (background production, etc.)}, the cherry is won in the "high probability state", and based on the winning of the cherry. Since the AT lottery was won, the game state transition is "new It will be in the state of AT during". On the other hand, as an example of a case that does not correspond to "newly in AT state", (1) staying in "AT in state" → "AT continuous battle state" because the AT counter value has become 0 { Transition to state in which there is a possibility of shifting to "AT state" again (consecutive)} → Shift to "AT state" again, (2) Win BB in "AT state" → " Advantageous BB internal state” → BB symbols (bonus symbols) are stopped and displayed, transition to “advantageous BB state” → BB ends, and transition to “AT state” again. It does not correspond to "became in AT state during".

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes in step 4102, in step 4104, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT start freeze execution flag (a flag that freezes are executed at the start of reel rotation when turned on). ) is turned on. Next, in step 4106, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues an AT start freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side). , the AT start effect will be executed), and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1550). Note that even if No in step 4102, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). It should be noted that the freeze illustrated in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if it is configured to have various types of freezes (execution conditions and execution times).

Next, FIG. 74 is a flow chart of reel rotation start preparation processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 72 in the second embodiment. The differences from this embodiment are steps 1568 (second) to step 1574 (second). It is determined whether or not. If Yes at step 1568 (second), at step 1570 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the AT start freeze execution flag. Next, in step 1572 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the freeze execution timer (which is a decrement timer), and the freeze execution time and the "AT A timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze that is executed when the "medium state" ends), the freeze execution time at the start (in this example, it is 5 seconds, and the new "AT state" Execution time of freeze to be executed in this case) is set, the timer is started, and the process proceeds to step 1574 (second). Next, in step 1574 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer has reached zero. If Yes in step 1574 (second), step 1552 is entered. On the other hand, if No in step 1574 (second), the process of step 1574 (second) is repeatedly executed until the freeze execution time at the start of the "AT state" has elapsed. Note that if step 1568 (second) is No, the process also proceeds to step 1552 .

As described above, in the second embodiment, the freeze (sometimes referred to as the freeze at the start of AT) is executed when the "state during AT" is newly started, and the details will be described later. However, during execution of the freeze, the AT start effect is executed on the sub-control board S side. In this example, the execution time of the freeze at the start of the AT is set to 5 seconds, but there is no problem even if the execution time is changed, and it is preferable to set it in accordance with the execution time of the AT start effect. In this example, the freeze execution time at the end of AT, which will be described later, is 3 seconds, and the freeze execution time at the start of AT is longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT. It is In this way, by setting the freeze execution time at the start of AT, which will be advantageous to the player in the future, to be relatively longer than the freeze execution time at the end of AT, the player's desire to play the game is enhanced. It can be an expensive gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flow chart of the stop-time freezing execution determination process according to the subroutine of step 4200 (second) in FIG. 75 in the second embodiment. First, at step 4202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "AT counter value is newly set to 0" means that the AT counter value is changed from "1 to 0" in a situation where the AT counter value is decrementing, such as "AT in progress state". It does not include the case where the AT counter value is always 0, such as when the AT-related state is "normal gaming state".

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes in step 4202 , the process proceeds to step 4206 . On the other hand, if No at step 4202, at step 4204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the advantageous section remaining game number counter value has newly become 0 in the game. "The counter value for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section has become 0" means that the counter value for the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is decreasing in a situation such as "AT state". This is the case of "1→0", and does not include the case where the advantageous interval remaining game number counter value is always 0, such as the situation where the AT-related state is the "normal game state". If Yes in step 4204 , the process proceeds to step 4206 . Next, in step 4206, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the freeze execution timer (decrement timer), and the execution time of the freeze executed when the "AT state" is newly set and the "AT state" are A timer for measuring the execution time of the freeze that is executed when ending), the freeze execution time at the end (in this example, it is 3 seconds, and the freeze that is executed when the "AT state" ends execution time) and start the timer. Next, in step 4208, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues an AT end freeze execution command (a command to the sub control board S side). , the AT end effect is executed) is set, and the process proceeds to step 4210 . Next, at step 4210, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the freeze execution timer is zero. If Yes in step 4210, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3500). On the other hand, if No in step 4210, the process of step 4210 is repeatedly executed until the execution time of freezing at the end of the "AT state" has passed. If No in step 4204, the process proceeds to the next process (step 3500).

Next, FIG. 76 is an image diagram of AT start effect execution in the second embodiment. In the same figure, an example of a case where power failure does not occur and a case where power failure occurs during execution of the AT start presentation will be described in detail.

First, in (a) of the figure, a detailed description will be given of a case where the power is not cut off during execution of the AT start effect. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the AT-related state is newly set to "AT-in-progress state" is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started to be executed, and the freeze is executed. be done. Also, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, the effect display device S40 displays "Warp execution!" . In this example, the execution time of AT start effect and freeze is 5 seconds. After that, one second has passed since the start of freezing, and the display of "warp execution!" is erased from the effect display device S40. The state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of execution of the freeze, "AT50G START!!" After that, when 5 seconds have passed since the execution of the freeze is started, the execution of the freeze is finished, the execution of the AT start effect is finished, and the rotation of the reels is started. When the execution of the AT start effect is completed, the display of "AT50G START!!" It will switch to a possible background effect. In addition, when the above-described push order navigation is executed in the first game in the AT state, (1) Freeze starts execution → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reel starts spinning and production The display device S40 displays the pressing order navigation. (2) Freeze starts → Freeze ends after 5 seconds have passed → Reel starts rotating → Reel drive state becomes reel constant speed state, and effect display device S40 is displayed. may be configured to display the pressing order navigation. With this configuration, even when the reel rotation start timing is later than before due to the execution of freezing, the player may mistakenly operate the stop button corresponding to the pressing order different from the correct pressing order. It is possible to prevent a situation where

Next, in (b) of the same figure, a case in which a power failure occurs during execution of the AT start effect will be described in detail. First, when the start lever D50 related to the game in which the AT-related state is newly set to "AT-in-progress state" is operated (the game start condition is satisfied), the AT start effect is started to be executed, and the freeze is executed. be done. Also, as an effect mode of the AT start effect, the effect display device S40 displays "Warp execution!" . In this example, the execution time of the AT start effect and freeze is 5 seconds (excluding the time during power off). After that, one second has passed since the start of freezing, and the display of "warp execution!" is erased from the effect display device S40. The state in which only the background effect dedicated to the execution of the AT start effect is displayed on the effect display device S40 is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the freeze, a power failure occurs (for example, a power outage occurs in the game arcade). After that, when the power is restored, the effect display device S40 displays "AT50G START!!" After that, when the total time from the start of the freeze execution, excluding the time when the power is off, reaches 5 seconds, the execution of the freeze ends, the execution of the AT start effect ends, and the rotation of the reels starts. It will happen. Thus, in this example, when the power failure occurs during execution of the freeze (during the execution of the AT start effect), and then the power is restored, the execution time of the freeze is changed from the state before the power failure. It will continue to run. As an example, when the freeze execution time is 5 seconds, if the power is cut off 1 second after the start of the freeze, the freeze will be executed for 4 seconds after the power is restored, and the freeze will be executed. If a power failure occurs 3 seconds after the start, the freeze will be executed for 2 seconds after the power is restored.

Also, the execution time of the AT start effect is the same as the execution time of the freeze, and in the case where the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect and then the power is restored from the power cut, the execution time of the AT start effect is the same as the execution time of the freeze. Execution continues from the state before the occurrence. On the other hand, the effect mode of the AT start effect is different between the case where the power failure occurs during execution of the AT start effect and the case where the power failure does not occur. Specifically, during the execution of the AT start effect, When the power failure does not occur, at the timing when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the AT start effect, "AT50G START!!" is displayed on the effect display device S40, while the AT start effect is being executed. , "AT50G START!" The display of "AT50G START!!" may be referred to as the number of games displayed at the start of AT. In addition, in the figure, as the display of the number of games at the start of AT, it is shown that the number of remaining AT games at the start of AT (at the start of the AT state) is 50 games, but the display mode is It is not limited to this, for example, in the case where the AT game number addition lottery is configured to be executable in the "advantageous BB state" executed immediately before shifting to the AT state, the AT in the "advantageous BB state" The number of remaining AT games obtained by winning the lottery for adding the number of games is added to the initial number of AT games of 50 games, and the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the performance display device S40 as the number of games displayed at the start of AT. good too. As an example, when the number of remaining AT games is 30 games in the AT game number addition lottery in the "advantageous BB state", it is configured to display "AT80G START !!" as the game number display at the start of AT. may In the same figure, only the AT start effect is illustrated, but the AT end effect is similarly performed. (For example, if there is no power failure during the execution of the AT end effect, "AT end GET 〇〇" will be displayed 2 seconds after the start of the AT end effect. On the other hand, when the power is cut off during execution of the AT end effect, ``AT end GET OO'' is displayed after the power is restored regardless of the timing of the power cut. Further, the effect is displayed during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, and if the power is cut off during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, the effect is displayed immediately after the power is restored. If so, the display is not limited to the display of the number of games at the start of the AT, and any display that allows the player to visually recognize and smoothly progress the game is acceptable.

By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the state is newly shifted to the state during AT and when the state during AT ends, freeze can be executed. It is configured to execute an AT start performance during freeze execution when newly shifting to an AT state, and to execute an AT end performance during freeze execution when the AT state ends. In the case of such a configuration, when a power failure occurs during the execution of the AT start effect or the AT end effect, after the power is restored, the AT start effect or the AT end effect is scheduled to be displayed at a predetermined timing. By configuring the display to be displayed immediately after power failure recovery, even if an unintended power failure (for example, a power failure in a game hall, etc.) occurs during execution of a freeze, the number of AT remaining games, etc. It is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the game situation by immediately displaying the information necessary for the player to grasp the game situation.

In the second embodiment, the freeze can be executed when the AT state is newly entered and when the AT state ends, but the execution mode of the freeze is not limited to this. , at the start of the BB, or at the end of the BB, etc., or may be constructed so as to be executed based on the winning condition device or the staying game state.

In addition, from the configuration related to freezing in the reel-type gaming machine according to the above-described example,
Freeze execution period when power failure does not occur during freeze execution = A
Freeze execution period until power failure when power failure occurs during freeze execution = B
If power failure occurs during freeze execution, freeze execution period after power failure = C
and
A=B+C
is configured to be

Incidentally, when the execution of the freeze related to the AT start effect is completed, the aforementioned reel acceleration processing is executed.

<<<<configuration 2 applicable to this example>>>>
A configuration applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example will be described in detail below. Any of the configurations described in detail below can be applied to all the embodiments described above, and one configuration described in detail below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations described in detail below can be applied. Add what you can do.

<<<Lamp unit configuration>>>
First, with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78, a detailed description will be given of a lighting configuration of a lamp unit (generic name for the decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10) applicable to the gaming machine according to this example.

The LEDs of the lamp unit in this example are full-color LEDs (capable of lighting in a plurality of lighting colors), and are configured so that lighting control by the sub-control board S can set the lighting color for each LED. Further, the lamp unit is configured to be lit based on a lighting pattern (details will be described later) that the gaming machine has. You may set with respect to the said one group as one group.

Further, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication may be used for lighting control of the lamp unit (LED). I2C communication is a method in which a master IC transmits a lighting pattern corresponding to each slave IC to a plurality of slave ICs, and each slave IC returns an ACK signal (acknowledge signal) when it receives data. Since the slave ICs are connected to each other, data (lighting patterns) are transmitted in order starting from the master IC, and each slave IC acquires data corresponding to each slave IC and returns an ACK signal. By configuring in this way, high-speed communication can be performed.

FIG. 77 shows an image of the lighting configuration of the lamp unit. In the same figure, the configuration regarding the lighting of the lamp unit applicable to the game machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that each item illustrated in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and for example, the items illustrated in the column of element 1 are not limited to only eight items from "red" to "no color". First, as shown in FIG. 77, there are six types of elements 1 to 6 as elements related to lighting of the lamp unit.

<Element 1>
Element 1 is the lighting color, and there are 8 of "red", "blue", "green", "white", "red + green", "blue + green", "blue + white", and "no color". It has a type of lighting color as an element 1. The lamp unit according to this example is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lighting color is "red", it indicates that all the LEDs are lit in red, and the lighting color is "red + blue , of the total number of LEDs, that is, N LEDs, M LEDs are lit in red and L LEDs are lit in blue (N=M+L). . In addition, the combination of the order of the LEDs that are lit in red and the LEDs that are lit in blue may be only one, or may be a plurality of combinations (when providing a plurality of combinations, the lighting color may be " A plurality of lighting colors may be provided such as "red + blue 1" and "red + blue 2"). In addition, "no color" indicates that the light is turned off (non-lighted), and is a lighting color that is selected when the light is always turned off. As mentioned above, the number of items that make up the elements 1 to 6 in the figure is only a partial excerpt, and in the element 1, three or more colors such as "red + blue + green" There is no problem even if it is configured to have a combination of lighting colors.

<Element 2>
Element 2 is the lighting time, and can be "0.1 seconds", "0.2 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "1 second", "3 seconds", "always", or "no lighting". It has seven types of lighting time as elements 2 . "Always" is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always on, and "No lighting" is the lighting time selected when the lighting is always turned off.

<Element 3>
Element 3 is a turn-off time, and can be set to "0.1 sec", "0.2 sec", "0.3 sec", "1 sec", "3 sec", "always", or "no turn off". It has 7 types of extinguishing time as element 3 . "Always" is the lighting time selected when the light is always turned off, and "No light-off" is the lighting time selected when the light is always turned on.

<Element 4>
The element 4 is a lighting time pattern, and the lighting time pattern is configured by combining the lighting time which is the element 2 and the lighting time which is the element 3. "0.1 sec on → 0.3 sec off", "0.2 sec on → 0.3 sec off", "1 sec on → 0.1 sec off", "3 sec on → 0.3 sec off". It has seven types of lighting time patterns as elements 4, namely, 3 seconds OFF, ALWAYS ON, and ALWAYS OFF. As an example of the lighting time pattern, in the case of “0.1 second lighting → 0.1 second lighting”, the lighting time of “0.1 seconds” which is the element 2 and the lighting time of “0.1 seconds” which is the element 3 is turned off. It is composed in combination with time. The "always on" is a lighting time pattern selected when the lighting is always on, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "always" which is element 2 and the lighting time of "no lighting" which is element 3. It is In addition, "always off" is a lighting time pattern that is selected when it is always off, and is configured by combining the lighting time of "no lighting" that is element 2 and the lighting time of "always" that is element 3. It is

<Element 5>
The element 5 is a lighting element, and the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color that is the element 1 and the lighting time pattern that is the element 4 . In other words, the lighting element is configured by combining the lighting color that is the element 1, the lighting time that is the element 2, and the lighting time that is the element 3. In the figure, for convenience of explanation, specific contents of lighting elements are shown as lighting element contents, and identification elements assigned to each lighting element contents are shown as lighting element types. As a lighting element,
Lighting element type a: "Lights red for 0.1 seconds → turns off for 0.1 seconds"
Lighting element type b: “0.1 second blue light → 0.1 second light off”
Lighting element type c: "Lights red for 0.1 seconds → turns off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type d: "0.1 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type e: "0.2 seconds red + blue lighting → 0.3 seconds off"
Lighting element type f: “0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” Lighting element type g: “1 second white lighting → 0.1 seconds off”
Lighting element type h: "1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 second off"
Lighting element type i: "Lights green for 3 seconds → turns off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type j: "Lights blue + green for 3 seconds → turns off for 0.3 seconds"
Lighting element type k: "always red light"
Lighting element type l: "always blue lighting"
Lighting element type m: "always green lighting"
Lighting element type n: "Always white lighting"
Lighting element type o: "always red + green lighting"
Lighting element type p: "always blue + green lighting"
Lighting element type q: "always blue + white lighting"
Lighting element type r: "always off (no color)"
has 18 types of lighting elements as elements 5 . As an example of the lighting element, in the case of “0.1 second red light → 0.1 second light off”, the element 1 “red” and the element 4 “0.1 second light → 0.1 second light off”. It is configured by combining a lighting time pattern (a lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time and a lighting time, as described above). Further, "always red + green lighting" is configured by combining element 1 "red + green" and element 4 "always lighting". Further, "always off (no color)" is configured by combining element 1 "no color" and element 4 "always off".

<Element 6>
The element 6 has a lighting pattern, and is configured by combining one or a plurality of lighting elements that are the elements 5 . In the figure, for convenience of explanation, the specific contents of the lighting pattern are shown as the lighting pattern contents, and the identification elements assigned to each lighting pattern content are shown as the lighting pattern types. The lighting pattern is
Pattern 1: "a→a→a→a"
Pattern 2: "b→b→b→b"
Pattern 3: "a→b→a→b"
Pattern 4: "a→a→g→g"
Pattern 5: "g→f→j"
Pattern 6: "i→h→b"
Pattern 7: "g→f→b"
Pattern 8: "i→j→g"
Pattern 9: "g→g→g"
Pattern 10: "k"
Pattern 11: "l"
Pattern 12: "m"
Pattern 13: "n"
Pattern 14: "o"
Pattern 15: "p"
Pattern 16: "q"
Pattern 17: "r"
has 17 types of lighting patterns as elements 6 . As an example of the lighting pattern, in the case of pattern 1: “a→a→a→a”, the element 5 “red lighting for 0.1 seconds→lights out for 0.1 seconds” is repeated four times. Further, in the case of pattern 8 “i→j→g”, lighting element type i: “3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” is executed, and then lighting element type j: “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0 lighting element type g: "lighting in white for 1 second→turning off for 0.1 second". The lighting patterns may be further combined to light the lamp units in the pattern 1→pattern 4, or in the pattern 1→pattern 4→pattern 1→pattern 4→pattern 1→... "Pattern 1→Pattern 4" may be repeatedly lit until the lighting end condition is satisfied. The lighting end condition may be configured to be satisfied when the game situation changes such as a predetermined error cancellation, or may be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

As described above, the lamp unit in the gaming machine according to this example is configured to be lit by a combination of lighting patterns, and the lighting pattern of element 6 is configured by a combination of the lighting elements of element 5. is composed of a combination of the lighting color of the element 1 and the lighting time pattern of the element 4, and the lighting time pattern of the element 4 is composed of the combination of the lighting time of the element 2 and the lighting time of the element 3. It is

It should be noted that although the configuration related to the lighting of the lamp unit is described in detail as being composed of elements 1 to 6, it is not limited to this, and the number of elements may be increased or decreased. may be changed (for example, setting element 1 to lighting luminance).

Next, FIG. 78 is an example of a state-based notification mode. In the same figure, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit (also referred to as the lamp unit lighting pattern) and the lighting mode of the reel back lamp S30 (also referred to as the back lamp lighting mode) that are applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment are shown. There is), and an example of the configuration for each game situation regarding the sound output from the speaker S20 (sometimes referred to as the sound of the speaker) will be described in detail. It should be noted that each item shown in the figure is only a partial excerpt. The lighting pattern may be changed according to the type of device) or the game state in which the BB was won, or in one BB, the lighting mode (lighting cycle) combining a plurality of lighting patterns is repeatedly executed until the BB is completed. Note that it may be configured to As for the error, an empty medal error is exemplified as an example, but the lighting pattern of the lamp unit may be changed according to the type of error. In addition, in all of Configuration 1 to Configuration 6, during normal game (no error occurred, not immediately after power on, not displaying standby screen, not in setting confirmation mode, not in setting change mode, The lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected in the situation where the bonus is not being executed) is any one of pattern 2, pattern 5, pattern 6, pattern 7, pattern 8, pattern 9, pattern 11, pattern 15, pattern 16, and pattern 17. or one or more combinations. In addition, since it is configured to have various game states such as a low-probability state and an AT-in-progress state as a normal game, the lighting pattern of the lamp unit that can be selected may be changed according to the game state. In other words, it may be configured to have a lighting pattern that is not selected in a specific game state or a lighting pattern that can be selected only in a specific game state. Note that "at the time of power-on" refers to a situation from when the power is turned on until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses (immediately after the power is turned on).

<<Configuration 1>>
<Medal Empty Error Occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (constant red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with a relatively small amount of light (smaller than normal light amount) Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound for when a medal empty error occurs until the error is cleared
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Outputs a sound dedicated to powering on for a predetermined time <during standby screen display>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 12 (always green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 9 (“White lighting for 1 second → Turning off for 0.1 second” is repeated three times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: Special sound during setting change mode <BB execution>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds lights out”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal amount of light Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above. It should be noted that the effect executed when the power is turned on may be configured so as to be different depending on the effect executed before the power failure occurred and the game state before the power failure occurred.

As in configuration 1, only different lighting patterns are selected as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during the occurrence of an error such as an empty medal error and during the normal game, and the lighting colors constituting the lighting patterns are selected. , While red is used when a medal empty error occurs, red is not used during normal games (a predetermined lighting color is configured so that it is selected only when an error occurs). Therefore, it is possible to easily distinguish between the case where an error occurs and the case where an error does not occur, so that the operation of the game hall and the progress of the game can be made smooth. In addition, by configuring to select different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game, the player or manager can easily distinguish between immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game. It is possible to make the operation of the game hall and the progress of the game smoother. In addition, the player can proceed with the game without stress without erroneously recognizing that an error has occurred even during the normal game, and the administrator can clearly identify the game machine in which the error has occurred. becomes. In addition, by configuring to select a different lighting pattern for the lamp unit between when the standby screen is displayed and during the normal game, the player or manager can easily switch between when the standby screen is displayed and when the normal game is being played. It can be discriminated, and it is possible to smooth the progress of sales and games in the game hall. Also, while the standby screen is being displayed, power consumption due to the flashy lighting pattern can be suppressed even though the player is not playing the game. In addition, by configuring to select different lighting patterns for the lamp unit during the setting confirmation mode and during the normal game, the player or administrator can easily switch between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game. It can be discriminated, and it is possible to smooth the progress of sales and games in the game hall. In addition, the setting confirmation mode not intended by the administrator can be immediately determined, and the unintended setting confirmation mode can be quickly determined. can do. In addition, a player or an administrator can easily switch between the setting change mode and the normal game by selecting different lighting patterns for the lamp unit during the setting change mode and during the normal game. It can be discriminated, and it is possible to smooth the progress of sales and games in the game hall. In addition, a setting change mode not intended by the administrator can be determined immediately, and the unintended setting change mode can be quickly determined. Further, by configuring to select different lighting patterns as the lighting pattern of the lamp unit during BB execution and during normal game (state in which BB is not executed), a player or administrator can control the lighting during BB execution and normal game. It is possible to easily discriminate between the middle (the state in which BB is not being executed), and the player and the manager can clearly discriminate the state of the game.

In addition, as described above, the difference between when an error related to the lamp unit occurs and during the normal game, the difference between immediately after the power is turned on and during the normal game, the difference between when the standby screen is displayed and during the normal game, and the settings The differences between confirmation mode and normal game, the difference between setting change mode and normal game, and the difference between BB execution and normal game are the lighting colors that are not used during normal game (element 1), may be configured to have a lighting time (element 2) that is not used during the normal game, or configured to have a lighting time (element 3) that is not used during the normal game It may be configured to have a lighting time pattern (element 4) that is not used during the normal game, or it may be configured to have a lighting element (element 5) that is not used during the normal game. , It may be configured to have a lighting pattern (element 6) that is not used during the normal game.

<<Configuration 2>>
<Medal Empty Error Occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (constant red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal amount of light Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) special sound during medal empty error occurrence until the error is cleared
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 17 (always off (no color))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During standby screen display>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights (blinks) in a dedicated pattern while the standby screen is displayed
Speaker sound: No output <during setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (constant red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (constant red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 7 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds lights out")
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal amount of light Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

<<Configuration 3>>
<Medal Empty Error Occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (“0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds lighting off” is repeated 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loop (repeatedly played) special sound during medal empty error occurrence until the error is cleared
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting) Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light volume Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” → “3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off”) )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (constant red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 10 (constant red lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights with normal light intensity Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” → “1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off”) )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal amount of light Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

<<Configuration 4>>
<Empty Medal Error Occurred>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 14 (always red + green lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loop (repeatedly played) special sound during medal empty error occurrence until the error is cleared
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During standby screen display>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "lights in blue for 0.1 seconds → lights out for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 3 (“0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds off" → "lights in blue for 0.1 seconds → lights out for 0.1 seconds")
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <BB in progress>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 6 (“3 seconds green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” → “1 second blue + white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.1 seconds blue lighting → 0.1 seconds off”) )
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal amount of light Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above. In addition, the warning sound output from the speaker when the medal empty error occurs and the warning sound output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode are set to the same warning sound, and the medal empty error is generated separately from the warning sound. While in the setting change mode, the speaker will output the voice "Medal empty error is occurring", "Setting confirmation mode in progress" will be output from the speaker during the setting confirmation mode, and "Setting change mode in progress" will be output during the setting change mode. It may be configured to output from the speaker. It should be noted that errors other than the empty medal error may also be configured to output a warning sound and a voice saying "There is a XX error" from the speaker.

<<Configuration 5>>
<Empty Medal Error Occurred>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loop (repeatedly played) special sound during medal empty error occurrence until the error is cleared
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: lit → extinguished (lit when normal game is in progress)
Speaker sound: No output <Standby screen displayed>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 13 (always white lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light volume Speaker sound: Special sound during setting change mode <during BB execution>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” → “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds lights out”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal amount of light Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

<<Configuration 6>>
<Medal Empty Error Occurring>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 1 (“0.1 seconds red lighting → 0.1 seconds lighting off” is repeated 4 times)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light volume Speaker sound: Loop (repeatedly played) special sound during medal empty error occurrence until the error is cleared
<When power is turned on>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: pattern 17 (always off (no lighting))
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During standby screen display>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 11 (always blue lighting)
Back lamp lighting mode: Off Speaker sound: No output <During setting confirmation mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” → ``Lights white for 1 second → Turns off for 0.1 seconds'')
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light intensity Speaker sound: Dedicated sound during setting confirmation mode <During setting change mode>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 4 (“0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “0.1 second red lighting → 0.1 second off” → “1 second white lighting → 0.1 second off” → ``Lights white for 1 second → Turns off for 0.1 seconds'')
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal light volume Speaker sound: Special sound during setting change mode <during BB execution>
Lamp unit lighting pattern: Pattern 5 (“1 second white lighting → 0.1 seconds off” → “0.2 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds off” → “3 seconds blue + green lighting → 0.3 seconds lights out”)
Back lamp lighting mode: Lights up with normal amount of light Speaker sound: Loops (repeatedly plays) a special sound during BB execution
It is configured as described above.

In addition, in the same figure, six types of configurations 1 to 6 are illustrated, but these configurations are only examples, and the lamp unit lighting pattern, back lamp lighting mode, and sound output from the speaker for each game situation may be combined from each configuration, and may be changed in any way. In addition, regarding the lighting pattern of the lamp unit, the difference between when an error occurs and during normal game, the difference between immediately after turning on the power and during normal game, and the difference between when the standby screen is displayed and during normal game. Elements 1 to 6 described above are the differences, the differences between the setting confirmation mode and the normal game, the differences between the setting change mode and the normal game, and the differences between the BB execution and the normal game. (see FIG. 77), it is preferable to select one that is not selected during the normal game.

In addition, in the figure, only an empty medal error is illustrated as an error, but it is not limited to this, and a display determination error and a door open error can also occur when an error occurs and during a normal game related to the lamp unit. Differences between immediately after turning on the power and during normal game Differences between displaying the standby screen and normal game Differences between setting confirmation mode and normal game Differences between setting change mode and normal game As the difference between during BB execution and during normal game, any of the above-mentioned elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) is selected so that the one that is not selected during normal game is selected. Depending on the type of error that has occurred, such as changing one of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) related to the lamp unit for an empty medal error and a display determination error, Any of the above-described elements 1 to 6 (see FIG. 77) relating to the lamp unit may be different.

Further, when the replaying combination is stopped and displayed, the player may be notified that the symbol combination related to the replaying combination has been stopped by the lighting mode of the lamp unit. In the game executed in the game state of , the lamp unit is configured to light up when the replay role is won and the symbol combination related to the replay role is stopped and displayed, and any one of the elements 1 to 6 is included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit, and is not included in the lighting mode of the lamp unit when a symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to the replay role is stopped and displayed without winning the replay role. may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the player can clearly recognize that the replay role has been won.

<<<Configuration related to front door opening and dispensing>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the configuration regarding the payout of game medals applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In addition, "normal" shown in FIG. It shows a case where 11 game medals are paid out. Also, regarding "payout occurs before door is opened" and "payout occurs after door is opened", if Winning-B (common bell) is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the common bell (for example, winning 04) is stopped and displayed. is exemplified. In addition, in the figure, the case where the credit (the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200) is the upper limit (50 in this example) is described in detail.

<<Configuration 1>>
<In case of normal payment>
A case where a normal payout is executed in configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, under the condition that two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button indicates that the third stop button is pressed). (sometimes referred to as being turned on), the win 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (when the player releases the finger from the third stop button, etc., the third stop button changes from being pressed to being non-pressed. The fact that the third stop button is not pressed is sometimes referred to as turning off the third stop button from on), the game medals corresponding to the winning 04 are paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals is emitted from the speaker S20 (same as A sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payment is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and winning 04 is stopped. After that, the third stop button is turned off from on, and the game medals corresponding to the winning 04 are paid out, and the speaker S20 starts outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals is being output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door open notification sound (in the figure Sound A) is output. That is, the dispensing sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the output of the payout sound, the output of the payout sound ends, and the output of the front door opening notification sound ends. Note that the front door DU remains open, that is, the front door open notification sound is started to be output when the front door DU is opened, and then output even if the front door DU remains open. It is configured so that the output ends when a specific time elapses after opening. With this configuration, when the administrator opens the front door DU to confirm or change the settings, the front door opening notification sound is continuously output until the confirmation of the settings or the change of the settings is completed. Therefore, setting confirmation and setting change can be performed without stress. In the figure, the output of the front door opening sound is shown to end at the same time as the output of the payout sound is finished, but this is not restrictive. There is no problem even if the timing is different from the end timing.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in configuration 1 will be described in detail. First, two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and winning 04 is stopped. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is open. be. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened. After that, under the condition that the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is being output, the third stop button is turned off from on, and the game medals corresponding to the win 04 are paid out from the speaker S20. Output of a payout sound corresponding to the payout of game medals is started. That is, the dispensing sound and the front door opening notification sound are output at the same time. After that, a specific time elapses after the front door DU is opened, and the output of the front door opening notification sound is terminated. After that, the output of the payout sound is finished after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the payout sound output.

As in configuration 1, by constructing the payout of game medals irrespective of whether the front door DU is open, the manager of the game parlor can forget to close the front door DU when replenishing the game machine with game medals. Even if it is closed (not tightly closed), the game tokens can be normally paid out, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. In addition, by configuring the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound to be output at the same time, the situation of the game machine can be grasped in real time. In the case of configuration 1 above, it is preferable to use an output mode (timbre, pitch, tempo, etc.) that makes it easy to distinguish between the front door opening notification sound and the dispensing sound.

<<Configuration 2>>
<In case of normal payment>
A case where a normal payout is executed in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, under the condition that two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is pressed (the third stop button indicates that the third stop button is pressed). (sometimes referred to as being turned on), the win 04 is stopped and displayed. After that, the third stop button becomes non-pressed (when the player releases the finger from the third stop button, etc., the third stop button changes from being pressed to being non-pressed. The fact that the third stop button is not pressed is sometimes referred to as turning off the third stop button from on), the game medals corresponding to the winning 04 are paid out, and a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals is emitted from the speaker S20 (same as A sound B) in the figure is output for a predetermined time.

<When payment is executed before the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed before the door is opened in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and winning 04 is stopped. After that, the third stop button is turned off from on, and the game medals corresponding to the winning 04 are paid out, and the speaker S20 starts outputting a payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals. After that, under the condition that the payout sound corresponding to the payout of the game medals is being output, the front door DU is opened, and the front door open notification sound (in the figure When the sound A) is output, the output of the payout sound ends. After that, a specific time has passed since the front door DU was opened, and the output of the front door opening notification sound is terminated. It should be noted that the predetermined period of time during which the payout sound is output ends while the front door opening notification sound is being output.

<When payout is executed after the door is opened>
Next, the case where the payout is executed after the door is opened in configuration 2 will be described in detail. First, two of the three reels are stopped and the other reel is rotating, the third stop button is turned on, and winning 04 is stopped. After that, under the condition that the third stop button is on, the front door DU is opened, and a front door open notification sound (sound A in the figure) is output from the speaker S20 to notify that the front door DU is open. be. That is, regardless of whether the third stop button is turned on or off, the front door opening notification sound is output when the front door DU is opened. After that, under the condition that the front door DU is opened and the front door opening notification sound is output, the third stop button is turned off from on, and the game medals corresponding to the win 04 are paid out. A corresponding payout sound is not output. After that, under the condition that game medals are paid out, a specific time elapses from the opening of the front door DU, the output of the front door opening notification sound is finished, and the payout sound corresponding to winning 04 is output. After that, a predetermined time has passed since the start of payout of the game medals corresponding to the win 04, and the output of the payout sound ends.

As in configuration 2, by constructing the game medals to be able to be paid out regardless of whether the front door DU is open, the administrator of the game arcade may forget to close the front door DU when replenishing the game machine with game medals. Even if it is closed (not tightly closed), the game tokens can be normally paid out, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged. In addition, by configuring so that the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound are not output at the same time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult to determine the state of the game machine due to the mixed tones of the front door opening notification sound and the payout sound. can do. In configuration 2, it is configured to output the payout sound even while the front door open notification sound is being output, and the volume of the payout sound is relatively small compared to the volume of the front door open notice sound (the volume is 0). may be configured to include

<<Other configurations>>
When the configuration illustrated in FIG. 79 is applied, even while the front door DU is open, the insertion of game medals, the operation of the max bet button (in this example, the bet button D220), and the bet button lamp S50 (also called the max bet lamp) It may be configured so that lighting of lamps that can be turned on and bed lamps (1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, 3-bed lamp) are enabled. That is, when game medals are inserted while the front door DU is open, the insertion of game medals can be detected (the blocker is on) and the insertion is effective (credits increase or game medals are bet). In such a configuration, the bet sound (or medal insertion sound) corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) may be output from the speaker S20 (front door DU Even when is not open, the bet sound corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) can be output), corresponding to the insertion of game medals or the operation of the bet button (max bet button) The betting sound may be configured not to be output.

<<<Configuration related to power off and payout>>>
An example of the action when the power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed when winning a minor winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example, will be exemplified below. It should be added that any of the configurations illustrated below are applicable to all embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies the case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, the case where game medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. Also, the performance by blinking the reel backlight S30 may be referred to as a back lamp performance.

<Configuration 1>
In a game in which a small winning combination (for example, the common bell of winning 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small winning combination → Power failure occurs while the third stop button is pressed. (A power outage occurs in the game arcade, etc.)→The power supply is restored while the third stop button is pressed.→The power supply is restored and the game medals corresponding to the small combination are paid out. may

In addition, when the game progresses in a state where the power is not cut off and game medals are paid out based on the winning of the minor winning combination, it is possible to execute the back lamp effect based on the winning of the minor winning combination. In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the minor winning combination can be output, the power is restored while the third stop button is held down as in the configuration 1 described above, and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the minor winning combination. In this case, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the minor winning combination may not be executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the minor winning combination may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

With this configuration, game medals are paid out based on the winning of a small winning combination even when the power is cut off while the player is pressing the third stop button and the power is immediately restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. In addition, even if any of the predetermined operation members controlled by the main control board M side (for example, the start lever, all the stop buttons, the bet button (max bet button), the checkout button, etc.) is operated, other predetermined If the operation member is not operated, the payout of game medals based on winning may be executed. For example, if both the third stop button and the start lever are operated (turned on) when the power is restored from a power failure, the payout of game medals based on winnings is not executed. good too. Also, in the case of such a configuration, (1) after that, by releasing the third stop button or releasing the start lever (one of the operating members controlled by the main control board M side is ON) (2) After that, by releasing the third stop button and the start lever (main control board M side (By turning off all of the controlling operation members), game medals may be paid out based on the winning.

Examples of situations in which the power supply is interrupted include the power switch turning from on to off, the power supply cable being disconnected, the power outage occurring in the game arcade, the power supply cable coming out of the outlet, etc. are conceivable, and in any case, it is applicable to the configuration described above.

<Configuration 2>
In a game in which a small win (for example, the common bell of prize 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small win → Open the front door DU while pressing the third stop button (A door open error occurs when the front door DU is opened), and a power failure occurs (power switch is turned off, etc.) → Power is restored while the third stop button is pressed (power switch is turned on). etc.) → Close the front door DU while pressing the third stop button to release the door open error (for example, insert the door key into the keyhole D260 and twist it in a predetermined direction) → Release the door open error and , the game medals corresponding to the small winning combination may be paid out as described above.

In addition, when the game progresses in a state where the power is not cut off and game medals are paid out based on the winning of the minor winning combination, it is possible to execute the back lamp effect based on the winning of the minor winning combination. In addition, while the payout sound based on the winning of the minor combination can be output, the door opening error is canceled while the third stop button is pressed as in the configuration 2 described above, and the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the minor combination. is executed, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the minor combination may not be executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the minor combination may not be output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the door opening error is cancelled.

<Configuration 3>
In a game in which a small winning combination (for example, the common bell of winning 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small winning combination → Power failure occurs while the third stop button is pressed. (For example, a power outage occurs in the game arcade) → Release the finger from the third stop button (Turn the third stop button from ON to OFF) → Restore the power → Restore the power and pay out the game medals corresponding to the small combination may be configured as described above.

In addition, when the game progresses in a state where the power is not cut off and game medals are paid out based on the winning of the minor winning combination, it is possible to execute the back lamp effect based on the winning of the minor winning combination. In addition, while it is possible to output a payout sound based on the winning of a small winning combination, as in the above-described configuration 3, the power is cut off while the third stop button is pressed, and the power is restored after the third stop button is released. Therefore, when the game medals are paid out based on the winning of the minor winning combination, the back lamp effect based on the winning of the minor winning combination is not executed and the payout sound based on the winning of the minor winning combination is not output. good. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised by the sudden execution of the back lamp effect and the output of the payout sound after the power is restored.

In addition, when configured as in the above configuration 1, configuration 2, or configuration 3, it is determined whether or not the third stop button is pressed (whether it is on) as a process after the power is restored. Before executing the process (the process executed in the game progress control process), the game medal payout process (the process executed in the game progress control process) based on the winning may be executed. In addition, as described above, in a situation where the symbol combination in which the small win is won is stopped and displayed, the power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed, and then the power is turned off while the third stop button is pressed. After that, when the third stop button is released, the payout of game medals based on the winning may be executed. may be configured not to be executed (when the payout of game medals based on winning is executed without turning off the power, output of payout sound and back lamp effect are executed).

<<<Configuration for setting confirmation mode and payout>>>
An example of the action when the setting key switch is turned on while the third stop button is pressed when winning a minor winning combination, which is applicable to the gaming machine according to this example, will be described below. It should be added that any of the configurations illustrated below are applicable to all embodiments according to this example. The configuration described in detail below exemplifies the case where the credit is the upper limit value (for example, 50), in other words, the case where game medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 by winning a small winning combination. In addition, the configuration described in detail below is that the reel is stopped, the power is turned on, and the main control board side of the start lever, all stop buttons, bet button (max bet button), settlement button, etc. When the front door DU is opened and the setting key switch is turned on from off when the various operation members controlled by are not operated (not on), the setting confirmation mode can be entered. This is an example of a case where It should be noted that during the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to notify that the setting confirmation mode is in progress, or may be configured not to notify.

<Configuration 1>
In a game in which a small win (for example, the common bell of prize 04) is won, the third stop button is pressed (turned on) to win a small win → Open the front door DU while pressing the third stop button (A door open error occurs by opening the front door DU) and turn on the setting key switch (does not shift to setting confirmation mode) → Close the front door DU while pressing the 3rd stop button. Canceling the door open error (for example, inserting the door key into the keyhole D260 and twisting it in a predetermined direction)→Do not shift to the setting confirmation mode even when the third stop button is released may be configured as described above.

In addition, in such a configuration, it is possible to place a bet while the setting key switch remains on, and the reels can be started to rotate by operating the start lever while the bet is being placed, and the stop button can be used. It may be configured such that it is possible to stop the reels by operating (to allow the game to proceed). Further, after that, if the setting key switch remains on, betting may be disabled (even game medals cannot be inserted), or betting may be enabled, but the reels will not start rotating even if the start lever is operated. You may In other words, the game may not be executed while the setting key switch is on. It should be supplemented that in such a configuration, the effect display device S40 does not display a display indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. In addition, when the front door DU is opened while the setting key switch is on (after the operation as in the configuration 1 above) and the symbol combination related to the replay is not stopped and displayed, the setting confirmation mode is entered. , or when the front door DU is opened in a situation where the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, the setting confirmation mode may not be entered. Further, when the front door DU is opened and the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the effect display device S40 may be configured to indicate that the setting confirmation mode is set.

<<<Configuration related to lighting of max bed lamp>>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, the operation of lighting the max bet lamp (also referred to as bet button lamp S50) applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The configuration illustrated below illustrates a configuration in which game medals can be inserted even during the replay stop display. The max bet lamp is provided inside or near the max bet button, and is controlled by the sub control board S side or the main control board M side to notify that the operation of the max bet button is effective. is a lamp. In the figure, ON means that the max bed lamp is lit (or blinking), OFF means that the max bed lamp is turned off, ON means that the 1 bed lamp D211 is lit, and 1 bed is turned on. OFF when the lamp D211 is off, ON when the 2 bed lamp D212 is on, OFF when the 2 bed lamp D212 is off, ON when the 3 bed lamp D213 is on, OFF indicates that the 3 bed lamp D213 is off, ON indicates that the start lamp D180 is on (or blinks), and OFF indicates that the start lamp D180 is off. In addition, in the figure, when game medals are inserted one by one from the medal insertion slot D170 (the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 are detected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, etc.) The sensor detects game medals one by one) as an example, but unlike the max bet button, the bet button can bet one game medal with one operation (off → on). A 1-bet button or a 2-bet button that enables betting of two game medals by one operation (off→on) may be provided. Applying the same action as game medal insertion (detection of one game medal by insertion reception sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, or second insertion sensor D30s) to pressing the 1-bet button once is problematic. do not have.

<<Configuration 1>>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where game medals are not bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is extinguished, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is extinguished. , the 3 bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the max bed lamp lights up and the 1 bed lamp D211 lights up. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the max bed lamp lights up and the 2 bed lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the start lamp D180 is turned on.

As in configuration 1, by configuring the max bet lamp to "turn off→on" each time one game medal is inserted, the period in which the game medals are guided into the gaming machine from the medal insertion slot D170 is maximized. Since the operation of the bet button is disabled, the period during which the max bet button is enabled can be accurately notified by extinguishing the max bet lamp during the induced period. In addition, by accurately notifying the period during which the max bet button is valid, the player can grasp the period during which the max bet button is invalid, in other words, the insertion of game medals is invalid. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game medals are inserted during the invalid period and the game medals are not normally inserted, and the game progresses at a good tempo.

Further, as in configuration 1, after the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off, the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, whereby when the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on, Since the max bet lamp is turned off, the player can clearly recognize that the stipulated number of three game medals has been bet.

<<Configuration 2>>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 80 will be described in detail. In a situation where game medals are not bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is extinguished, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is extinguished. , the 3 bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains illuminated, and the 1 bet lamp D211 is illuminated. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp is extinguished.

Like configuration 2, the configuration is such that the max bet lamp is turned off after the third game medal is inserted and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on. By structuring so that it lights up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly lit up in accordance with the player's operation, and the progress of the game can be made smooth, and the player does not have to pay extra. It is possible to prevent a situation in which game medals are thrown into the game machine, or the performance and behavior of the game machine are distrusted due to slow operation.

<<Configuration 3>>
Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where game medals are not bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is extinguished, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is extinguished. , the 3 bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains illuminated, and the 1 bet lamp D211 is illuminated. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the start lamp D180 is turned on. After that, the 3 bed lamp D213 lights up.

As in configuration 3, when the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp before the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned off, the start lamp D180 is turned on substantially at the same time, so that the next game can be played. The fact that the game can be started can be promptly notified to the player, and the progress of the game can be made smooth. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the behavior is distrustful.

<<Configuration 4>>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 81 will be described in detail. In a situation where game medals are not bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is extinguished, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is extinguished. , the 3 bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the max bed lamp lights up and the 1 bed lamp D211 lights up. After that, the second game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the max bed lamp lights up and the 2 bed lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted and the max bet lamp is turned off. After that, the 3 bed lamp D213 lights up and the start lamp D180 lights up.

<<Configuration 5>>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where game medals are not bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is blinking, the 1 bet lamp D211 is lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. , the 3 bed lamp D213 is on, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. After that, the second game medal is inserted, and the 2 bet lamp D212 lights up. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the 3-bet lamp D213 lights up, and the start lamp D180 lights up. After that, when the max bet lamp blinks, the max bet lamp is extinguished before the timing from lighting to extinguishing (in the middle of lighting). In addition, in the same figure, the case where the third game medal is inserted in the blinking state in which the max bet lamp repeatedly turns on and off, and the third game medal is inserted. When the third game medal is inserted while the max bet lamp is turned on and off at the timing when the second game medal is inserted, while the max bet lamp is off , the max bet lamp remains extinguished after the timing when the third game medal is inserted.

As in Configuration 5, even when the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are all turned on in a situation where no bets are made, the number of inserted game medals (first, 2nd and 3rd cards), the player can determine the current game situation (how many game medals is bet).

<<Configuration 6>>
Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 82 will be described in detail. In a situation where game medals are not bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is extinguished, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is extinguished. , the 3 bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains illuminated, and the 1 bet lamp D211 is illuminated. After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains lit, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is lit. After that, the third game medal is inserted, and the start lamp D180 is lit at the timing when the insertion of the game medal is detected (timing earlier than the lighting timing of the start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 in configuration 2), The 3 bed lamp D213 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp is extinguished.

As in Configuration 6, after the third game medal is inserted and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, the max-bet lamp is turned off. By structuring so that it lights up as soon as possible after the operation, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly lit up in accordance with the player's operation, and the progress of the game can be made smooth, and the player does not have to pay extra. It is possible to prevent a situation in which game medals are thrown into the game machine, or the performance and behavior of the game machine are distrusted due to slow operation.

<<Configuration 7>>
Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 83 will be described in detail. In a situation where game medals are not bet on the reel-type gaming machine and the bet is valid, the max bet lamp is lit, the 1 bet lamp D211 is extinguished, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is extinguished. , the 3 bed lamp D213 is off, and the start lamp D180 is off. After that, the first game medal is inserted, and the max bet lamp remains illuminated, and the 1 bet lamp D211 is illuminated. After that, the start lamp D180 lights up (starts blinking). After that, the second game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp remains illuminated, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is illuminated. After that, the third game medal is inserted, the max bet lamp is turned off, and the 3 bet lamp D213 is turned on.

As in configuration 6, after the third game medal is inserted, the maximum bet lamp is turned off and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on substantially at the same time. By configuring the bet button to light up as soon as possible after operating the bet button, the 3-bet lamp D213 can be seamlessly lit up in accordance with the player's operation, and the progress of the game can be made smooth. It is possible to prevent a player from throwing extra game medals or having distrust in the performance and behavior of the game machine due to the slow operation.

In the configurations 1 to 4, 6 and 7 described above, the max bet lamp is on = the max bet lamp is lit, but any lighting mode that allows the player to recognize that the max bet button is valid Alternatively, as in configuration 5, the maximum bed lamp may be turned on=the maximum bed lamp is blinking. Also, in configuration 5, the maximum bed lamp may be turned on=the maximum bed lamp is turned on. Similarly, in the configurations 1 to 6, the start lamp D180 is turned on=the start lamp D180 is lit, but any lighting mode may be used as long as the player can recognize that the operation of the start lever D50 is valid. , Similar to configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be configured to be ON=the start lamp D180 is blinking. Also, in Configuration 7, the start lamp D180 may be turned on=the start lamp D180 is turned on. Also, the max bed ramp may be configured to be controlled on the sub-control board S side, or may be configured to be controlled on the main control board M side.

<<<Configuration when operating the payment button>>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87, the action when the settlement button D60 is operated which is applicable to the reel-type game machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the following configuration, three game medals have been bet on the gaming machine and the number of credits displayed on the credit number display device D200 is four. In the same figure, it is ON when the max bed lamp is lit (or blinking), OFF when the max bed lamp is off, ON when a new operation of the checkout button is detected, and the checkout button. or no new operation of the checkout button is detected, ON when the 1 bed lamp D211 is lit, OFF when the 1 bed lamp D211 is off, ON when the 2 bed lamp D212 is on, OFF when the 2 bed lamp D212 is off, ON when the 3 bed lamp D213 is on, and when the 3 bed lamp D213 is off OFF, ON when the start lamp D180 is lit (or blinking), OFF when the start lamp D180 is extinguished, ON when the ready-to-start lamp D300 is lit (or blinking), Ready-to-start lamp When the D300 is turned off, it is indicated as OFF, and when the credit amount display device D200 is decremented by 1, it is illustrated as decremented by 1 in the order of OFF→ON→OFF. Also, in the figure, the case of inserting game medals one by one from the medal slot D170 is exemplified. A 1-bet button for betting game medals and a 2-bet button for betting two game medals with one operation (off→on) may be provided. There is no problem in applying the same effect as inserting one game medal to D170 to pressing the 1-bet button once. The configuration illustrated below may be configured so that the game medals accumulated in the gaming machine can be settled even during the stop display of the replay, or the game medals accumulated in the gaming machine during the stop display of the replay can be set. It may be configured such that the game medals that are stored cannot be settled. In addition, as a condition for operating the settlement button D60 to pay out the bet game medals from the ejection port D240 (as a condition for determining that the settlement button has been operated), the settlement button has changed from "on to off". It may be "on", or "on for 0.5 seconds or more".

<<Configuration 1>>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. Three game medals are bet on the reel-type gaming machine, and the bet is not effective, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is on. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the entry ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off→on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, the 3-bed lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the input possible lamp D300 are turned on. At the same time, the three betted game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240 (payout is started), and then the credits accumulated in the gaming machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 Certain four game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240. Further, at the timing when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up. In the same figure, the case where the settlement button D60 is turned from off to on while the operation of the settlement button D60 is valid (during the valid period) is illustrated, but the settlement processing is executed. The mode of execution is not limited to this. is pressed for a long time), the settlement process may be executed (the same applies to FIGS. 85 to 87).

As in Configuration 1, by configuring (paying out) the betted game medals before the credits, the player can confirm that the credits have become 0 when the player ends the game. Even if the player immediately leaves the seat, the user will not forget to pay for the game medals that have been bet. In particular, when the game ends in a situation where the number of credits is small, such as 1 or 2, there is a relatively high possibility that the player will end the game without acquiring enough game medals. The person's attention may also be distracted. Even in such a case, in order to prevent unintended disadvantages for the player, the bet game medals are settled (paid out) before the credits. Therefore, in the configuration 1, the 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, the 3-bed lamp D213, and the start lamp D180 are displayed before the credit amount displayed on the credit amount display device D200 is subtracted. , and the lamp D300 that can be turned on are extinguished.

<<Configuration 2>>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 84 will be described in detail. Three game medals are bet on the reel-type gaming machine, and the bet is not effective, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is on. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the entry ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the max bet lamp lights up and the three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the discharge port D240 ( payment is started). After that, the start lamp D180 is extinguished and the turn-on lamp D300 is extinguished. After that, the 3 bed lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2 bed lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1-bed lamp D211 is turned off and the input possible lamp D300 is turned on. In configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the game medals that are bet are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the game medals that are bet are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in configuration 2, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the game medals on the bet are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and when the settlement button D60 is operated, The configuration is such that the max bet lamp is turned on at a timing before the 1 bet lamp D211, the 2 bet lamp D212, the 3 bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180 and the input possible lamp D300 are turned off, so that the player mistakenly presses the checkout button. is operated, only the game medals that have been bet will be paid out, and the player wants to operate the max bet button again to bet credits. The progress of the game can be made smoother by configuring to notify.

<<Configuration 3>>
Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. Three game medals are bet on the reel-type gaming machine, and the bet is not effective, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is on. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the entry ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process is started, the start lamp D180 and the input ready lamp D300 are turned off. Three game medals that have been bet are paid out from the ejection port D240 (payout is started), and then four credits accumulated in the gaming machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 are released. Game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240. Further, after the timing when the finger is released from the settlement button D60, the 3 bed lamp D213→2 bed lamp D212→1 bed lamp D211 are turned off in order. Further, at the timing when the last game medal to be paid out (the game medal whose display on the credit number display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up.

<<Configuration 4>>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 85 will be described in detail. Three game medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine, and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is on. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the entry ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (turned off to on), and at the timing when the settlement process is started, the start lamp D180 and the insertable lamp D300 are extinguished, and the three betted game medals are ejected. It is paid out from D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3 bed lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2 bed lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1-bed lamp D211 is turned off and the input possible lamp D300 is turned on. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 4, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the betted game medals are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

As in the configuration 4, the betted game medals are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the max bet lamp is lit at a timing later than the lighting of the insertable lamp D300. If the player wants to bet 1 coin after betting 3 coins, the payout button D60 is operated once to settle the 3 game medals that have been bet, and then 1 game medal is placed. Since the bet button is to be inserted or the 1-bet button is operated, in such a case, the progress of the game can be made smoother by lighting the bet possible lamp D300 earlier than the max bet lamp.

<<Configuration 5>>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. Three game medals are bet on the reel-type gaming machine, and the bet is not effective, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is on. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the entry ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, the settlement button D60 is operated once (off→on), and at the timing when the settlement process starts, the 1-bed lamp D211, the 2-bed lamp D212, the 3-bed lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the input possible lamp D300 are turned on. At the same time, the betted three game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240 (payout is started). After that, the throwable lamp D300 lights up. After that, the max bet lamp lights up. In configuration 5, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the game medals that are bet are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the game medals that are bet are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<Configuration 6>>
Next, configuration 6 in FIG. 86 will be described in detail. Three game medals have been bet on the reel-type gaming machine, and the bet is not valid, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is on. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the entry ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process is started, the input ready lamp D300 is extinguished. After that, the start lamp D180 is extinguished. Three game medals that have been bet are paid out (payout is started) from the ejection port D240, and then four credits accumulated in the gaming machine displayed on the credit amount display device D200 are released. Game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240. Further, after the timing at which the settlement button D60 is operated, the 3-bed lamp D213→2-bed lamp D212→1-bed lamp D211 is turned off in this order. In addition, after the game medal to be paid out last (the game medal whose display on the credit amount display device D200 changes from 1 to 0) is paid out, the insertable lamp D300 lights up. Note that the max bed lamp remains off.

<<Configuration 7>>
Next, configuration 7 in FIG. 87 will be described in detail. Three game medals are bet on the reel-type gaming machine, and the bet is not effective, the max bet lamp is off, the 1 bet lamp D211 is on, and the 2 bet lamp D212 is on. , the 3-bed lamp D213 is lit, the start lamp D180 is lit, and the entry ready lamp D300 is lit. After that, at the timing when the settlement button D60 is pressed and the settlement process is started, the max bet lamp starts blinking and the start lamp D180 is extinguished. Thereafter, the insertable lamp D300 is extinguished, and the three bet game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240 (payout is started). After that, the 3 bed lamp D213 is turned off. After that, the 2 bed lamp D212 is turned off. After that, the 1 bed lamp D211 is turned off. After that, the throwable lamp D300 lights up. Note that the max bed lamp remains off. In configuration 7, when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once, the game medals that are bet are paid out, but the credits are not paid out, and the game medals that are bet are 0. It is configured to pay out credits when it is determined that the settlement button D60 has been operated once in a certain situation.

<<<<Differences in operation due to power off timing>>>>>
FIG. 88 is a timing chart for explaining the operation of the main control board M and the sub control board S according to the timing of power supply to the game machine and power cutoff. FIG. 88(a) is a timing chart showing the first mode of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power shutdown, and FIG. 2 is a timing chart showing mode 2. FIG.

The first mode is a mode in which the power is turned off after the main program of the main control board M or the sub-program of the sub-control board S is started to be executed. On the other hand, the second mode is a mode in which the power is turned off before the main program of the main control board or the subprogram of the sub-control board starts to be executed.

In this example, a power failure is a state in which the power supply to the game machine is stopped. It's okay. This also includes unintentional power supply interruptions at playgrounds. The timing at which the power supply is interrupted is the timing at which the power supply to the game machine is stopped, the timing at which the power switch of the game machine is turned off, the timing at which the power cable is disconnected, and the power cable is disconnected. It is the timing when the power failure occurred. In this example, "occurrence of power interruption" means interruption of power supply (power supply) to the gaming machine, and "detection of power interruption" means that the gaming machine detects the occurrence of power interruption. to detect.

In FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b), ΔT1 is from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches low level (sometimes referred to as off-level) after power failure. ΔT2 is the time from the start of power supply until the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level, and ΔT3 is the time when the supply voltage to the main control board M rises from the timing when the power supply is cut off. ΔT4 is the time from when the supply voltage to the main control board M reaches the supply level to when the sub-program of the sub-control board S starts up, and ΔT5 is the main control board It is the time from when the supply voltage to M reaches the supply level to when the main program of the main control board M starts up. Here, the relationships ΔT5<ΔT1, ΔT2<ΔT3, ΔT5>ΔT3, and ΔT4<ΔT5 are established.

<<<First Aspect>>><<Change in State of Power Supply>>
At time t1, power supply to the game machine is started, and at time t3, the power supply is interrupted and the power supply to the game machine is stopped.

<<Operation of main control board>>
<Power supply voltage supplied from power supply unit E to main control board>
As described above, power supply to the gaming machine starts at time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2. In addition, in the same figure, the case where the time from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is exemplified, but it is not limited to this, and the main control board It may be configured so that the time from when the power supply is started to when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may vary (randomly). In addition, although the case where the time from the start of power supply to the sub-control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is constant, this is not a limitation, and the power supply is started to the sub-control board. The time from when the power supply voltage reaches the supply level may vary (randomly). Even in such a configuration, the minimum value (minimum time) from the start of power supply to the main control board until the power supply voltage reaches the supply level is It is preferable to configure the power supply voltage to reach the supply level longer than the maximum value (maximum time).

After that, a power failure occurs at time t3. Due to the occurrence of this power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t3) to the maintenance level (time t4), and from time t4, it is almost at the maintenance level. becomes constant. The power supply unit E has a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, and even if the power supply is cut off, the power supply unit E maintains a substantially constant power supply voltage for a certain period of time (time t4 to time t5). (maintenance level) can be output (power-off processing is executed in a state where the voltage of the maintenance level is supplied). In this example, the time period (from time t4 to time t5) for maintaining the maintenance level after the start of execution of the power-off process (power-off is detected) is at least the time required to execute the timer interrupt process 20 times. It is configured so as to guarantee (the time during which the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32) can be called and executed 20 times). In the figure, the time from time t4 to time t5 is set to the time required to execute the timer interrupt process at least 20 times. The time from when the power supply is interrupted (power off occurs) until the power-off process cannot be executed may be configured so that the timer interrupt process can be executed at least 20 times.

After that, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t5, and becomes off level at time t6.

<Starting the main program>
The main program executed by the main control board starts at time ta when ΔT5 has elapsed from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this main program, the main control board START (power-on) process shown in FIG. 13 is executed.

As described above, when the setting key switch is off in the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. is activated.

Further, when the setting key switch is turned on in the judgment process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 and 1100 are executed.

<Activation of timer interrupt>
If the setting key switch is off, the timer interrupt is activated by the processing of step 1040 in FIG. 13, and if the setting key switch is on, the timer interrupt is activated by the processing of step 1104 in FIG. . After the timer interrupt is activated, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is called and executed every predetermined cycle T. FIG. A cycle T for executing the timer interrupt is 1.8 msec.

<Detection of occurrence of power failure>
When a power failure occurs and the voltage drops to a certain level, the power supply unit E outputs a power failure detection signal. The main control board M has an input port to which a power-off detection signal is input. The power-off detection signal is a high-level signal when power-off has not occurred, and is a low-level signal when power-off has occurred. The main control board M can determine whether or not power failure has occurred depending on whether the data read from the input port is a high-level signal or a low-level signal.

In this example, the main control board M detects the power interruption in the judgment process of step 1604 in FIG. Specifically, the main control board M determines that the power failure has occurred when the data read from the input port is a low-level signal in two consecutive timer interrupt processes.

Thus, in this example, the occurrence of power failure is detected by two consecutive timer interrupt processes. Therefore, when a power failure occurs after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. 14, the power failure can be detected. On the other hand, if the power failure occurs before the timer interrupt is activated, there is a possibility that the occurrence of the power failure cannot be detected.

In this way, when the power is cut off after the main program starts running, and after the timer interrupt is activated by the process of step 1040 in FIG. 13 or the process of step 1104 in FIG. , it is possible to detect that the power supply has been interrupted by interrupt processing. When it is detected that a power failure has occurred, the power failure processing shown in FIG. 36 can be executed.

<<Operation of sub control board>>
<Start subprogram>
The sub-program executed by the sub-control board S starts at time tb when ΔT4 has passed from time t2 when the power supply voltage becomes constant. By executing this subprogram, the above-described sub-side program start processing shown in FIG. 38 is executed. ΔT4 is shorter than ΔT5 described above, and by activating the sub-control board S before the main control board M, the sub-control board S does not miss commands transmitted from the main control board M. can receive. In the figure, the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting power supply to the main control board M and the timing at which the power supply voltage reaches the supply level after starting power supply to the sub-control board S are shown. are shown as the same time tb. It may be configured so that the time until reaching the supply level is different, and even in such a configuration, from the start of power supply to the main control board M to the start of the main program of the main control board M is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the sub-control board S to the activation of the sub-program of the sub-control board S, and the power supply voltage on the main control board M side is The time from reaching the supply level to starting the main program of the main control board M is defined as the time from reaching the supply level of the power supply voltage on the sub-control board S side to starting the sub-program on the sub-control board S. It is preferred to configure it to be longer than hours.

<<<Second Aspect>>>
FIG. 88(b) is a timing chart showing a second aspect of the timing of power supply to the gaming machine and power shutdown. A second mode is a mode in which the power is turned off before the main program executed by the main control board M is started. In other words, the power supply is interrupted before ΔT5 elapses from time t2 when the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the sub-control board S reaches the supply level.

As described above, in the second mode, since the power failure occurs before the execution of the main program is started (before the timer interrupt is activated), the power failure is caused by the main program. 36 is not executed, and the game machine stops due to power failure (supply voltage reaches low level).

<<Operation of main control board>>
<Power supply voltage supplied from power supply unit E to main control board>
Power supply to the game machine starts at time t1. By supplying power to the gaming machine, the power supply unit E starts supplying power to the main control board M from time t1. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M increases from the off level (time t1) to the supply level (time t2), and becomes constant at the supply level from time t2.

After that, a power failure occurs at time t13. Due to the occurrence of this power failure, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from the supply level (time t13) to the maintenance level (time t14), and from time t14, it is almost at the maintenance level. constant. Thereafter, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M gradually decreases from time t15 and becomes off level at time t16. For convenience of explanation, the maintenance level is assumed to be substantially constant, but in reality, the voltage level continues to gradually decrease after the occurrence of the power failure, falling below the voltage level at which operation can be guaranteed (operating guaranteed voltage level), and then The voltage level becomes 0. In other words, in practice, it is designed so that 20 or more interrupts are required from the detection of power failure until the voltage drops below the guaranteed operating voltage level. It should be noted that the design may be such that 20 interrupts or more are required from the occurrence of power failure until the voltage falls below the guaranteed operating voltage level.

As described above, in the second mode, the execution of the main program is started after the power is turned off. The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is set to the off level before the power supply unit E is turned on. Note that if a power outage occurs just before the main program starts up (for example, when the main program starts up when the time for one timer interrupt process elapses), the timer interrupt process can be started, and the power outage occurs. Processing can be performed without problems.

In addition, although the first mode and the second mode are illustrated in FIG.
(1) Immediately after power supply to the main control board M is started (for example, after a period of time from the start of power supply to the main control board M to execution of timer interrupt processing once), a power failure occurs → the execution of the main program is interrupted. Before starting, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M becomes off level (the execution of the main program does not start).
(2) Starting power supply to the main control board M → Immediately after the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M reaches the supply level (for example, the power supply voltage supplied to the main control board M reaches the supply level After the timer interrupt processing is executed once after reaching , a power failure occurs → The power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is turned off before the execution of the main program is started. level (main program execution will not start)
It may be configured as described above.

<<<Relationship between setting key switch status and power supply status>>>
FIG. 89(a) is a table showing the relationship between the state of the setting key switch, the power supply state, and the situation in the first mode, and FIG. 89(b) is the state of the setting key switch in the second mode. 4 is a table showing the relationship between , power supply state, and situation.

<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the first mode>>
<State 1>
First, in state 1 of FIG. 89(a), the gaming machine is in a normal state, that is, a state in which a game is being executed or a state in which a game can be executed, and the setting key switch is "OFF". and the "power supply status" is "on".

<State 2>
In state 2, the setting key switch remains "off" and the power is cut off, and the "power supply state" becomes "off". At this time, the power-off process of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In state 3, the setting key switch is operated to switch to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
Next, in state 4, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "on" state, so that the "power supply state" is switched to "on". The main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed when the "power supply state" becomes "on". As described above, the first mode is a mode in which power failure occurs after execution of the main program is started. A control board START process can be performed.

In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13 described above, it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the processes of steps 1028 to 1034 are executed, and the setting change device control process is called and executed in step 1100. , it shifts from the normal state to the setting change mode. In this setting change device control process, the storage area is initialized by the process of step 1102 shown in FIG. In this way, when the "power supply state" is "on" while the setting key switch is "on", the mode shifts to the setting change mode, after which the setting change switch or the start lever is operated. This makes it possible to change the set value. In addition, by transmitting the setting change start command to the sub control board S by the processing of step 1622 in FIG.

<State 5>
Next, when the setting change mode is set and the setting change device control process is being executed, if the power is turned off, the 'power supply state' changes to 'off'. When the power is turned off, the power-off processing of FIG. 36 is called and executed, and the processing of step 1902 changes the address of the processing to be executed next in the setting change device control processing (setting change mode) to the return address. stored in the storage area as

<State 6>
In state 6, the setting key switch is switched to "OFF" by operating the setting key switch while the "power supply state" remains "OFF".

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" switches to "on." The main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed when the "power supply state" becomes "on". In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is "OFF", and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the processing of step 1022, the return address saved in the storage area in state 5 is restored, and the execution is started from the processing of the return address. As described above, the return address stored in the storage area in state 5 is the address of the next process to be executed in the setting change device control process, and the return causes the setting change device control process to be immediately executed. be done. Thus, in the first aspect, the power supply is turned off in the normal state, and when the power supply is turned off, the setting key switch is turned on to turn on the power supply, thereby shifting to the setting change mode. This is the basic operation when shifting to the setting change mode, but even if the power supply is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting key switch is turned off, and then the power supply is turned on, Since the setting change mode is stored as the return address, it is configured to enter the setting change mode. By configuring in this way, even if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode (for example, a power failure occurs in the game hall, etc.), it is possible to return to the state before the power failure, and the game machine malfunctions. It is possible to make it difficult to generate such actions.

<<Relationship between the state of the setting key switch and the power supply state in the second mode>>
<State 1>
State 1 in FIG. 89(b) is a normal state of the gaming machine, that is, a state in which a game is being executed or a state in which a game can be executed, similarly to the first mode, and the setting key switch is set to ""Off", and "Power supply status" is "On".

<State 2>
In state 2, as in the first mode, the power supply is cut off while the setting key switch remains "off", and the "power supply state" is "off". At this time, the power-off process of FIG. 36 is executed, and the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state is stored in the storage area as the return address.

<State 3>
In state 3, the setting key switch is operated to switch to "on" while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 4>
In state 4, power is supplied with the setting key switch turned "on", and the "power supply state" is switched to "on".

<State 5>
In state 5, the setting key switch is turned "on" and the power is cut off, and the "power supply state" is switched to "off". As described above, in the second mode, the power is turned off before the main control board M starts executing the main program. Therefore, in the second mode, the "power supply state" is once turned "on" (state 4), but immediately after the "power supply state" related to state 4 becomes "on" (for example, timer interrupt processing is executed). After the time to execute once has elapsed), the "power supply state" is switched to "off". In other words, the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply unit E to the main control board M is off level before the main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. becomes (state 5). Therefore, the setting change device control process is not executed, the return address stored in the storage area is not changed, and the return address stored in state 2 is stored in the storage area as it is.

<State 6>
Next, in state 6, the setting key switch is turned off by operating the setting key switch while the "power supply state" remains "off".

<State 7>
In state 7, power is supplied with the setting key switch in the "off" state, and the "power supply state" switches to "on." The main control board START (power-on) process of FIG. 13 is executed when the "power supply state" becomes "on". In the determination process of step 1014 in FIG. 13, it is determined that the setting key switch is off, and the process of step 1022 is executed. By the processing of step 1022, the return address saved in the storage area in state 2 is restored, and execution is started from the return address. As described above, the return address stored in the storage area in state 2 is the address of the process to be executed next in the normal state, and the process to be executed next in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the second mode, even when the "power supply state" is "on" while the setting key switch is "on", before the main program of the main control board M is executed, If the power supply is turned "off" at the beginning, even if the power supply is turned "on" after the setting key switch is turned "off", the setting change mode is not entered. . By configuring as in the second aspect, if the game machine is switched to the setting change mode when the power is cut off immediately after the power is turned on, there is a possibility that an unintended problem will occur in the game machine. Thus, it is possible to configure the game machine so that it does not shift to the setting change mode even if the setting key switch is on, thereby making it possible to configure a game machine that is less prone to problems.

<<<Control of giving medals and output control of payout sound>>
As described above, when a minor winning combination is won (when the symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination is stopped and displayed), the player is provided with the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning minor winning combination.

<<Medal granting process>>
The process of awarding medals includes the process of awarding the medals by adding them as the number of credits and the process of awarding the game medals by actually paying them out of the gaming machine.

<Credit addition processing>
The CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum number of stored credits when the current number of credits is less than the maximum stored number (for example, less than 50). This credit number addition processing is executed by the arithmetic processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M. FIG.

<Payment processing of game medals>
The CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 and pays out medals from the medal payout device H when the current number of credits exceeds the maximum stored number, thereby awarding medals. The payout process from the medal payout device H is executed by outputting a drive signal from the main control board M to the hopper H40.

<<Aspect of awarding medals>>
Depending on the current number of credits and the number of medals to be given, the mode of only adding credits, the mode of only paying out game medals, or shifting from the adding of credits to the paying out of game medals ( There are three modes, namely, a mode in which both the credit amount addition process and the medal payout process are executed.

<Aspect of credit amount addition processing only>
If the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum accumulated number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum accumulated number. If the number of coins to be paid out does not reach the maximum accumulated number even after adding the number of coins to be paid out, only the number of credits is added, and the medal awarding process ends.

<Aspect of Shifting from Credit Addition Processing to Game Medal Payout Processing>
When the current number of credits is equal to or less than the maximum accumulated number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits according to the number of payouts until the number of credits reaches the maximum accumulated number. When the number of credits reaches the maximum stored number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the process of adding the number of credits to the process of paying out game medals. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M drives the hopper H40 to pay out the remaining number of game medals obtained by subtracting the credit addition from the number of payouts from the medal payout device H. The total sum of the added amount of credits and the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H is the payout number corresponding to the winning minor combination.

In this way, when shifting from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<Aspect of Payout Processing Only for Game Medals>
When the current number of credits has already reached the maximum number, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 to cause the medal payout device H to pay out game medals corresponding to the number of payouts.

<<Specific example>>
For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the current number of credits is 47 and five medals are to be paid out to the player, first, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M changes the number of credits to 1. Add one by one. Specifically, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M increases the number of credits to 48, 49, and 50. In the example shown in FIG. 90, the number of credits displayed on the credit display device is 47→48 (first card (time t1))→49 (second card (time t2))→50 (third card (time t2) t3)). When the number of credits reaches 50, the maximum number of stored cards (50) is reached, and the number of credits cannot be increased any more.

Next, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M switches from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40, and subtracts the three credits from the five payout medals. are paid out from the medal payout device H.

In the example shown in FIG. 90, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a drive signal to the hopper H40 at time t4 to start payout processing. The fourth game medal is paid out from time t4 to time t5, and the fifth game medal is paid out from time t6 to time t7. The CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of medals paid out from the medal payout device H, detects that the fifth game medal has been paid out at time t7, and terminates the payout process. .

<<Various times>>
<Unit processing time for credit addition processing and unit processing time for game medal payout processing>
In the credit addition processing by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, the unit processing time a is required to increase the credit number m to the credit number m+1. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, it takes time t2−time t1=a to increase the number of credits from 48 (first sheet) to 49 (second sheet), resulting in 49 credits (second sheet). It takes time t3−time t2=a to increase the number of credits from 50 (3rd sheet). In the credit addition process, the unit processing time a is substantially constant.

In addition, in the process of paying out game medals from the medal payout device H, unit processing time c is required from the nth game medal payout to the (n+1)th game medal payout. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, time t6−time t4=c is required from the payout of the fourth game medal to the payout of the fifth game medal. In the game medal payout process, the unit processing time c is substantially constant.

One unit processing time a can be defined by the timing difference between two consecutive addition processes. For example, the unit processing time a is the difference between the timing (time t1) of addition processing from 47 to 48 (first sheet) and the timing (time t2) of addition processing from 48 to 49 (second sheet). Also, it is the difference between the timing (time t2) of addition processing from 48 to 49 (second sheet) and the timing (time t3) of addition processing from 49 to 50 (third sheet).

Also, one unit processing time c can be defined by the difference between the start timings of two consecutive payout processes. For example, the unit processing time c is the difference between the start timing (time t6) of processing for the fifth image and the start timing (time t4) of addition processing for the fourth image. In this way, the unit processing times a and c may be defined so as to have a constant cycle. The contents of the following regulations and the configuration illustrated in FIG. 90 are all based on the situation where game medals are sufficiently stored in the medal dispensing device H and game medals are placed in all the grooves of the disc D50. A case of paying out game medals is illustrated.

In addition, as the timing of the start of the payout process such as t4 and t6,
(1) t4 is the timing at which the first payout sensor H1 turns from ON to OFF as the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing at which the first payout sensor H1 turns from ON to OFF as the fifth game medal is paid out. at a time when
(2) t4 is the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 turns from OFF to ON as the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 turns from OFF to ON as the fifth game medal is paid out. at a time when
(3) t4 is the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 turns from ON to OFF as the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing at which the second payout sensor H2 turns from ON to OFF as the fifth game medal is paid out. at a time when
(4) t4 is the timing at which the first payout sensor H1 turns from OFF to ON as the fourth game medal is paid out, and t6 is the timing at which the first payout sensor H1 turns from OFF to ON as the fifth game medal is paid out. at a time when
(5) t4 is the timing when part of the game medals that will be the fourth payout is paid out to the outside of the disc H50, and t5 is the timing when part of the game medals that will be the fifth payout is paid out to the outside of the disc H50. at the time it was issued,
(6) t4 is the timing when all the fourth game medals are paid out outside the disk H50, and t5 is the timing when all the fifth game medals are paid out outside the disk H50. at the right time,
(7) In the case where the payout process is executed each time one game medal is paid out, t4 is the start timing of the payout process for the fourth coin, and t6 is the start timing of the payout process for the fifth coin.
It may be configured as described above. Details of the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be described later. In addition, since the various time values and timings as described above are only design values, there may be some blurring when the gaming machine is actually in operation. It should be added that the comparison of time values and the comparison of timings described in detail above are comparisons of design values. Further, it should be supplemented that even if any of the configurations described above are adopted, the comparison of time values, which will be described later, can be established.

<Switching time e from credit amount addition processing to game medal payout processing>
As described above, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the maximum accumulated number, and if the total number of payouts has not been given, the process is switched to payout processing of game medals. It takes a switching time e for the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to switch from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process.

<<Comparison of time>>

<Unit processing time a and unit processing time c>
The unit processing time a described above is different from the unit processing time c. The unit processing time a is the time determined by the arithmetic processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, and the unit processing time c is the time required for the arithmetic processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M and the time required for driving the token payout device H. consists of both The unit processing time c can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By doing so, it is possible to accurately control the payout including the driving time of the medal payout device H.

Incidentally, as described above, by adjusting the time required for driving the token payout device H, the unit processing time c can be made equal to the unit processing time a. By doing so, the payout process can be expedited.

<Switching time e>
The switching time e is different from the unit processing time a. The switching time e can be made longer than the unit processing time a. By lengthening the switching time e, it is possible to stably switch from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, and to smoothly switch from the arithmetic processing of the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to the driving of the hopper H40. .

Also, the switching time e can be made shorter than the unit processing time a. By shortening the switching time e, it is possible to quickly switch from the credit addition process to the game medal payout process, and by ending the game medal payout process early, the next game can be immediately started. , the consumption of game medals can be increased, the profit of the game hall can be increased, and the operating efficiency of the game machine can be improved.

Thus, by making the switching time e different from the unit processing time a, when switching to the payout process of the game medals, the payout process is different from the fixed period, and the payout of the game medals to the medal receiving tray starts to give an exhilarating feeling. It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game.

The switching time e can be matched with the unit processing time a. When the switching time e is matched with the unit processing time a, medals can be given to the player at a constant cycle, and the process of adding the credit amount and the process of paying out the game medals are equivalent to the giving of medals. A sense of security can be given to the player by showing this fact to the player.

<< Output of sound given to game media >>
The CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout start command to the sub control board S when starting the credit addition process (time t1). When the sub-control board S receives the payout start command, the sub-control board S starts outputting the game medium giving sound from the speaker S20.

Further, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs a payout end command to the sub control board S when the payout of game medals is completed (time t7). When the sub-control board S receives the payout end command, it ends the output of the game medium giving sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M counts the number of game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, and distributes all of the game medals of the number corresponding to the winning minor combination to the player. Judge whether or not it has been granted. When the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that all of the game medals of the number of payouts corresponding to the winning minor combination have been awarded, the output of the payout end command to the sub control board S is terminated, and the output from the speaker S20 is terminated. End the output of the game medium imparted sound. If the game medium imparted sound is repeatedly reproduced (output) at a constant cycle, the game medium imparted sound is immediately produced at the timing when the payout end command is received by the sub-control board S side. The output may be terminated, or the output of the game medium provision sound is terminated at the timing when the cycle of the game medium provision sound output at the timing when the payout end command is received by the sub control board S side ends. may be configured to

The game medium imparted sound is a sound output from the speaker S20 by reproducing the unit imparted sound data at least once. The unit-applied sound data is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board S in advance. As shown in FIG. 90, the playback time for one unit given sound data is d, and the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads out the unit given sound data from the RAM, and receives the payout end command from the time when the payout start command is received. is received, the unit imparted sound data is repeatedly reproduced a plurality of times, thereby outputting the game medium imparted sound from the speaker S20.

<First Aspect>
A first mode of the game medium imparted sound shown in FIG. 90 is a mode in which the unit imparted sound data is repeatedly reproduced for each reproduction time d from when the payout start command is received. By playing back in this way, the game medium applied sound is output at a constant cycle. As described above, even when the processing for adding the credits is switched to the processing for paying out the game medals, the game medium imparting sound is output at a constant cycle. It is possible to give the player a sense of security by showing the player that the process of adding the number and the process of paying out the game medals give the same value.

<Second Aspect>
In addition, in the second mode of the game medium imparted sound shown in FIG. 90, the unit imparted sound data is reproduced every playback time d from the time the payout start command is received, and after the credit number addition process is completed, the unit imparted sound data is reproduced for the time f. In this mode, the unit-applied sound data is reproduced, and then, at time t4, the game medal payout process is started, and the reproduction of the unit-applied sound data is started again. When switching to the game medal payout process, the game medium imparting sound is output at a timing different from the fixed period, so that the game can be given a sense of excitement and anticipation when the game medals start to be paid out to the medal receiving tray. .

It should be noted that, while the game medals are being paid out from the medal payout device H, if the hopper H40 runs out of game medals and a hopper error occurs (for example, if it is determined as Yes in the processing of step 1279), the secondary The control board S stops outputting the game medium imparted sound and outputs a sound indicating that a hopper error has occurred. When game medals are supplied to the hopper H40 and ready to be paid out, the main control board M again transmits a payout start command to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S starts outputting a game medium imparting sound. . It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and even if a hopper error occurs, the sound given to the game medium is continuously output. By outputting at a volume smaller than the volume (volume may be set to 0) and canceling the hopper error, the output of the sound indicating that the hopper error has occurred is terminated, and the sound given to the game medium is output. It may be configured to restore the volume.

<<<Arrangement of Integrated Circuit on Substrate>>
91 is a front view showing the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG. 92 is a side view showing the arrangement of electronic components mounted on the main control board M. FIG.

The main control board M has a substantially plate-shaped rectangular printed board MP. A CPUC 100, an IC, a resistor, a connector, etc. are mainly mounted on the front side of the printed board MP, and a circuit pattern mainly made of conductors is formed on the back side of the printed board MP. The main control board M (printed board MP) consists of two longitudinal ends ML1 and ML2 parallel to each other in the longitudinal direction, and two short ends MS1 and MS2 parallel to each other in the lateral direction. It has a rectangular shape.

In this example, the main control board M is attached so as to stand upright within the housing of the gaming machine. When the main control board M is installed in an upright position, the long ends ML1 and ML2 are arranged in the horizontal direction, and the short ends MS1 and MS2 are arranged in the vertical direction. Longitudinal end ML1 is positioned on the upper side, and longitudinal end ML2 is positioned on the lower side. In addition, when viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP, the short end MS1 is positioned to the left of the short end MS2, and the short end MS2 is positioned to the right of the short end MS1.

Hereinafter, the side of the longitudinal end ML1 is called the upper side, the side of the longitudinal end ML2 is called the lower side, the side of the short end MS1 is called the left side, and the side of the short end MS2 is called the right side.

<CPUC100>
The CPUC 100 has an elongated shape with a length of CLL in the longitudinal direction and a length of CSL in the lateral direction. The CPUC 100 has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins protrude from the main body. When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connections are formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, in the operation of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to attach the CPUC 100 in an appropriate orientation so that the CPUC 100 can operate as desired. The first pin (1P shown in FIG. 91) of the CPUC 100 is used as a reference pin for arranging the CPUC 100. FIG. The main body of the CPUC 100 is formed with a mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P), and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the CPUC 100 .

In this example, the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP such that the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 is aligned with (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 91, by arranging the CPUC 100 so that the first pin of the CPUC 100 is positioned on the lower left side, the CPUC 100 is arranged in line with the direction of the IC described later. When mounting the CPUC 100 on the printed circuit board MP, mistakes in mounting the CPUC 100 in the wrong direction can be reduced.

Furthermore, in general, various character information (not shown) such as model number and manufacturer name is printed on the main body of the CPUC 100 . The character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 . It is preferable that the character information such as the model number and the manufacturer's name can be easily viewed with the CPUC 100 attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the CPUC 100 so that the first pin of the CPUC 100 is positioned on the lower left side, the CPUC 100 can be arranged in an orientation in which the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. can be easily viewed.

When the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the CPUC 100 increase in order counterclockwise from the first pin (1P) as viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<IC>
Various ICs (integrated circuits) are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP. The IC has an elongated shape with a longitudinal length of ILL and a lateral length of ISL. Similar to the CPUC 100, the IC also has a plurality of pins (not shown), and the plurality of pins protrude from the main body. When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, electrical connections are formed by a plurality of pins, and different electrical signals flow through the plurality of pins. Therefore, even in the work of mounting the IC on the printed circuit board MP, it is necessary to mount the IC in a proper orientation so that the IC can operate as desired. Therefore, the first pin of the IC (1P shown in FIG. 91) is also used as a reference pin for arranging the IC. A mark for visually recognizing the first pin (1P) and a notch (not shown) for visually recognizing the orientation of the IC are formed on the body of the IC.

In this example, the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP such that the longitudinal direction of the IC matches (is parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the CPUC 100 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board M. Furthermore, the IC is arranged on the printed circuit board MP so that the first pin of the IC is positioned on the lower left side. In this way, by arranging the ICs so that the first pin of the IC is always positioned on the lower left side, all the ICs are arranged in the same direction, and the work of mounting the ICs on the printed circuit board MP is performed. At the time of mounting, it is possible to reduce mistakes such as mounting the IC in the wrong direction.

Furthermore, generally, various character information (not shown) such as a model number and a manufacturer's name is printed on the main body of the IC. Character information is printed so as to be separated from the first pin side along the longitudinal direction of the IC. It is preferable to make the character information such as the IC model number and the manufacturer's name easily visible while the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP. As described above, by arranging the IC so that the first pin of the IC is located on the lower left side, the IC is arranged so that the printed model number, manufacturer name, etc. are easily visible. can also

When the IC is attached to the printed circuit board MP, the pin numbers of the IC increase in order counterclockwise from the first pin (1P) as viewed from the front side of the printed circuit board MP. .

<Resistance>
Various resistors are also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP, and are electrically connected to other electronic components. The IC has an elongated shape with a longitudinal length RLL and a lateral length RSL.

<Connector>
A connector is also attached to the front side of the printed circuit board MP to form an electrical connection with other electronic components. The main control board M is connected to the sub-control board S and the like via a connector, and can transmit and receive various signals.

<Space between CPUC 100 and IC>
As indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 91, only resistors and no ICs are arranged inside a predetermined range CSR1 around CPUC100. The predetermined range CSR1 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the length CSL of the CPUC 100 in the lateral direction. Various currents (such as time-varying currents such as high-frequency signals) flow through the IC, and the IC can become a source of noise, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100 . In this way, by not arranging the IC inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, the IC is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC 100 by a certain distance (for example, the length CSL), and the noise emitted from the IC is suppressed. , so that the operation of the CPUC 100 is not affected.

Also, the predetermined length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 may be at least the length RLL of the resistance in the longitudinal direction. Since current flows through the resistor, the resistor can become a heat source, which may affect the operation of the CPUC 100 . Therefore, by not arranging the resistor inside the predetermined range CSR1 around the CPUC 100, the resistor is arranged at a position separated from the CPUC 100 by a certain distance (for example, the length RLL), and the The heat generated can be prevented from affecting the operation of the CPUC 100 .

<Relationship between height of CPUC 100, height of IC, and height of other parts>
92 is a side view showing the height of various electronic components shown in FIG. 91. FIG. As shown in FIG. 92, the height CHT of the CPUC 100 is the highest, the height IHT of the IC is the second highest, and the height RHT of the resistance is the lowest. As shown in FIG. 91, only the parts whose height is less than the height CHT of CPUC100 are arranged inside a predetermined range CSR2 around CPUC100. The predetermined range CSR2 is a range in which the length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, the longitudinal length RLL of the resistor.

An attachment tool (not shown) is used in the work of attaching the CPUC 100 to the printed circuit board MP. The mounting tool is a tool for mounting the CPUC 100 close to the printed circuit board MP by sandwiching the CPUC 100 with the tip of the mounting tool. Since the structure is such that the CPUC 100 is clamped by the tip of the mounting tool, the tip of the mounting tool is arranged around the CPUC 100 when the CPUC 100 is clamped. Therefore, when mounting the CPUC 100, the tip of the mounting tool must also be close to the printed circuit board MP. need to ensure.

Therefore, in the region CSR2 around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed circuit board MP, only the components whose height is less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 are arranged. By doing so, even when the tip of the mounting tool is closest to the printed circuit board MP, the tip of the mounting tool does not interfere with other components. The area CSR2 is a range whose length from the outer circumference COR of the CPUC 100 is equal to or less than a predetermined length. Here, the predetermined length can be, for example, at least the longitudinal length RLL of the resistor.

It should be noted that only the parts below the height CHT of the CPUC 100 are arranged only in the area around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed board MP, and the area around the position where the CPUC 100 is attached to the printed board MP on the printed board MP. The configuration may be such that components having a height CHT or more of the CPUC 100 are attached to the outside, or all components attached to the printed circuit board MP may be configured to have a height less than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 .

In this way, by arranging only the electronic components that are lower than the height CHT of the CPUC 100 inside the predetermined range CSR2 around the CPUC 100, it is possible to secure a space where the tip of the mounting tool can be brought close. The CPUC 100 can be attached to the printed circuit board MP without damaging other electronic components by using the attachment tool.

In the above example, the main control board M was explained as an example, but all boards on which electronic parts such as CPUs and ICs are mounted, such as the sub control board S, the door board D, the reel board K, and the power supply board E can be applied to

<<<Configuration related to AT lottery>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the configuration of AT state transition control processing applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that the configuration illustrated in the figure can be applied to all of the above-described configurations when an AT is included.

First, FIG. 93 is a flow chart of AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 of FIG. 18 in this embodiment. First, in step 1401-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state of the AT is a state in which an AT lottery is possible. Note that FIG. 1 does not have a plurality of game states with different probabilities of winning an AT lottery such as a low probability state and a high probability state. It is configured so that the AT lottery can be executed only at . Also, as a difference from the present embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed based on the winning of the BB.

If Yes at step 1401-1, at step 1401-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets "2" as the AT lottery type and temporarily stores it in a predetermined RAM area. Here, the AT lottery type is a type for identifying the winning probability when executing the AT lottery, which is provided to reduce the data capacity required for executing the AT lottery. Next, in step 1401-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device related to the game has no set difference (condition device with no set difference in lottery probability). In the modified example shown in the figure, the conditional devices for no setting difference are watermelon B, cherry, watermelon A, replay (all replay hands or part of replay hands may be used), The pressing order is the bell, and in this process, it is determined whether or not the conditional device with no setting difference is won. There is a set difference between the lottery probabilities of the lost and common bells (there is a set difference), but in this processing, it is configured not to determine whether or not the lost or common bell is won. ing. It should be noted that it is preferable that the predetermined RAM area for storing the AT lottery type and the RAM area for storing the winning number and effect group number described above are different areas. With such a configuration, an area for storing winning numbers, which is an area in which information on a condition device with a setting difference in winning probability and information on a condition device with no setting difference in winning probability are stored separately, and a performance group. A region for storing numbers, and a region for storing AT lottery types, which is a region in which information on conditional devices with set differences in winning probabilities and information on conditional devices with no set differences in winning probabilities are stored without distinction. can be constructed so as not to confuse

In the case of Yes in step 1401-3, in step 1401-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the AT lottery type table, sets the AT lottery type, and stores it in the predetermined RAM area (step 1401-2). (the same RAM area as the predetermined RAM area) is temporarily stored (overwritten), and the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Note that even if No in step 1401-3, the process proceeds to step 1401-5. Here, the AT lottery table in the middle right part of the figure will be described in detail. In this modified example, if the AT lottery type is set to "0" if the AT lottery is executable and the conditional device with no set difference is won, if Watermelon B is won, "0" is set as the AT lottery type, and if Cherry is won. If you win the AT lottery type "0", if you win the watermelon A, "1" as the AT lottery type, if you win the replay, "2" as the AT lottery type, if you win the push order bell It is configured to set "2" as the AT lottery type.

Next, at step 1401-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an AT lottery based on the set AT lottery type. Here, as shown in the lower right part of the figure, the probability of winning the AT lottery is 56/256 when the AT lottery type is "0" and 18/256 when the AT lottery type is "1". It is 256, and when the AT lottery type is "2", it is 1/256, and the AT lottery type is "0→1→2" in descending order. Next, at step 1401-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the AT lottery executed at step 1401-5 has been won. If Yes at step 1401-6, at step 1401-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the AT counter to a predetermined value (eg, 50) as the number of AT initial games. In this modified example, unlike the present embodiment, the AT state transition control process sets the AT initial game number in the AT counter, and the AT state start control process sets the AT initial game number. It is configured so that it does not (the number of AT games may be added when winning the addition of the number of AT games). Next, in step 1401-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the state regarding AT after the next game to be "state during AT", and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1430). Note that even if No in step 1401-1 or step 1401-6, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1430).

In a conventional game machine, as an AT lottery, a common lottery process that does not refer to a winning combination, and a lottery process that is executed when a conditional device with no set difference is won (a lottery process that refers to a winning combination) is performed. However, by providing the AT lottery type as shown in the figure, common lottery processing (in the figure, Step 1401-2 corresponds to the process), and the lottery process executed when the conditional device with no set difference is won (in the same figure, the step 1401-4 corresponds to the process). can be executed in one lottery process (corresponding to the process of step 1401-6 in the figure).

As described above, the configuration of a reel-type gaming machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but the above-described configuration can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, rock-paper-scissors gaming machines, arrange-ball gaming machines, gaming machines, and casino machines. can.

Among the above-described configurations, the configuration related to settings such as the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, the setting key switch, and the setting/reset button (for example, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 59) can also be applied to pachinko game machines having set values. Applicable.

<<<Configuration Related to Push Order Navigation Applicable to Gaming Machine According to this Example>>>
The gaming machine according to this example is configured to be able to execute push order navigation. Here, the manner in which the push order navigation that can be applied to this example is executed will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the configuration described in detail below is applicable to all embodiments.

Further, regarding the push order navigation in this example, the following configuration is called push order navigation.
(1) Displaying a stop button operation mode advantageous to the player on the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M is called push order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "=3", it is possible to indicate the pressing order of "middle→left→right". Also, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction or instruction display, and a game in which the push order navigation is executed on the push order display device D270 may be referred to as an instruction game.
(2) Displaying (an image suggesting an operation mode of) the stop button advantageous to the player on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S is referred to as push-order navigation. As a specific example, by displaying "123", it is possible to instruct (suggest) the pressing order of "left→middle→right".
(3) Outputting a sound from the speaker S20 controlled by the sub-control board S to suggest an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player is called push-order navigation. As a specific example, it is possible to instruct (suggest) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button by outputting "left" when the start lever is operated.
(4) Lighting (blinking) of the reel window frame lamps D310 controlled by the sub-control board S to suggest a mode of operation of the stop button that is advantageous to the player is called push-order navigation. As a specific example, when the start lever is operated, the reel window frame lamp D310 corresponding to the left reel and the left stop button lights up, thereby instructing (suggesting) that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop button. It is possible.
(5) The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) controlled by the main control board M or the sub control board S Lighting (blinking) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the user is called push-order navigation. As a specific example, it is possible to indicate (suggest) that the left stop button D41 should be operated as the first stop button by lighting the left stop button D41 corresponding to the left reel when the start lever is operated.

In the following, push order navigation is displayed in a game in which a push order role (a role that can change the payout number and RT state transition mode depending on the push order, such as a push order bell, a push order replay role, etc.) is determined as a winning role. The timing at which is started and the timing at which the push order navigation ends will be described. By determining the winning combination as the winning combination in the AT state, it is possible to execute the pressing order navigation for notifying the player of the operation mode of the stop button (reel stop order and stop button operation timing) that is most advantageous to the player. is configured as follows.

<<Configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
<Mode of execution of push order navigation when there is no wait>
First, when there is no wait, in other words, when the minimum game time has passed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is 0), the pressing order when the game is executed by operating the start lever. The manner in which navigation is performed will be described below.

<Configuration 1>
First, the configuration of FIG. 94 will be described. The AT-related state is the AT-in-progress state (game state in which push-order navigation is executed when winning the push order role), and in a situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated to start spinning the drum. Processing is executed and the reels start rotating (executed at step 1260 in FIG. 18). It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

Then, immediately after the drum rotation process is executed, "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the push order display device D270,
"=1": Indicate the pressing order of "left → middle → right""=2": Indicate the pressing order of "left → right → middle""=3": Indicate the pressing order of "middle → left → right" Instruction "=4": Indicate the order of pressing "middle → right → left""=5": Indicate the order of pressing "right → left → middle""=6": Indicate the order of pressing "right → middle → left" The instructions are configured as follows.

It should be noted that the display mode when executing the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is not limited to the display mode described above. Only the numbers may be displayed, or only the right digits (lower digits) may be configured to display a display mode other than the numbers corresponding to the stop button (or reel). In addition, the right digit (lower digit) is configured to display corresponding to the stop button (or reel) to be stopped next time, and the left digit (upper digit) is configured to display the push order of the entire game. good too. In such a configuration, the display mode of the right digit (lower digit) can change for each stop operation of the stop button, while the left digit (higher digit) remains the same regardless of the stop operation of the stop button. display mode.

After "=3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, as an example of the push order navigation in the effect display device S40,
"123": Indicate the pressing order of "left → middle → right""132": Instruct the pressing order of "left → right → middle""213": Indicate the pressing order of "middle → left → right""312" ”: Indicate the pressing order of “middle → right → left” “231”: Instruct the pressing order of “right → left → middle” “321”: Configure as instructing the pressing order of “right → middle → left” It is

It should be noted that the display mode for executing the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to the display mode described above, and may be a display mode other than Arabic numerals, for example, Chinese numerals. , an image of characters other than numbers, an image of a symbol, or the like may be used. In addition to the display mode corresponding to all stop buttons, for example, "1-
-" (push order navigation for notifying that the left stop button should be operated as the first stop).

Note that "display" may be the completion of displaying all the elements to be displayed, or the start of display of the elements to be displayed. For example, displaying "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" is displayed on the effect display device S40, or display of "123" has started on the effect display device S40 ( It may be assumed that an effect occurs at the time of display start, etc.). Similarly, "end of display" may mean that all the elements whose display should end are not displayed, or that a display transition has started so that the elements whose display should end should not be displayed. For example, ending the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" is not displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of "123" is displayed on the effect display device S40. It may also be that the part has started to be erased (eg, an effect at the end of display has occurred). Similarly, "clear display" may mean that all elements whose display should be cleared are no longer displayed, or that a display transition has been started so that the elements whose display should be cleared are no longer displayed. . For example, erasing the display of "123" on the effect display device S40 may mean that all "123" is not displayed on the effect display device S40, or one of the displays of "123" on the effect display device S40. It may be that the part has started to be erased (eg, an effect has occurred when the display is erased). Likewise, erasing the display of "1" on the effect display device S40 means that after the left stop button is operated in a situation where all "123" are displayed on the effect display device S40, the effect display device It may be that "1" is no longer displayed in S40, or part of the display of "1" has started to be erased in the effect display device S40 (such as an effect occurring when the display is erased).

After the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, the operation of the stop button becomes valid. After the reel starts to rotate, the operation of the stop button becomes effective when the reel drive state changes from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state. In the instruction game, the player operates the stop button after confirming the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 or the effect display device S40. By enabling the push order navigation to be displayed in front, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the push order (a situation in which the push order is mistaken).

Also, in FIG. 94, the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is displayed (started to be displayed) before the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. Here, the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 will be described. When "winning-A3" is determined as a winning combination, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, as a timer interrupt process, sends a command relating to winning/replay winning information as a control command to the sub-control board at step 1622. Send to S side. The CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the command processing of step 2250 based on the command related to the winning/re-game winning information received from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M (as the command processing, the push order navigation of step 2360 etc. is performed. Execute the push order navigation display processing for displaying).

Here, a detailed description will be given of the process of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side. First, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives a command related to the winning/re-game winning information from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M, the command data is saved, the command analysis process is performed, and the sub-main board (the board) to the performance control board (substrate in the sub-control board S) to sequentially perform processing for transmitting commands related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and display the push order navigation from the reception of the command related to the winning/replay winning information. It takes about 16ms to send the command according to the aspect. Also, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes drawing processing, which takes about 32 ms. As an example, the command transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S side is a command related to winning/replay winning information. Well, it may be appropriately designed according to the execution timing of the desired effect.

Further, in the case where the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side displays the push order navigation, the push order display device D270 is configured to be illuminated dynamically. If the period is 2 ms, the five 7-segment LED units are sequentially lit for each timer interrupt process, so it takes about 10 ms at maximum until the lighting is completed. Because of this configuration, the push order navigation is displayed after an opportunity (for example, operation of the start lever) for displaying the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 controlled by the main control board M side occurs. Rather than the time until completion, the opportunity to display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side (for example, reception of a command related to winning/replay winning information from the main control board M side ) is generated and the display of the push order navigation is completed is longer.

Here, the processing executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M will be described in detail as a period during which the push order navigation display in this example can be started. The gaming machine is designed so that the CPUC 100 of the main control board M controls peripheral devices and the like to progress the game. It should be noted that the processing executed by the CPUC 100 of the main control board M in this example will be described only for specific steps for the sake of simplification, but it should be noted that the processing is not limited to this. For example, when the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines in step 1251 that the start lever D50 has been operated, in step 1550 reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. Then, by determining that the reel rotation start standby state start timing of step 6102 has been reached, it is determined whether or not the reel acceleration state start timing of step 6106 has been reached. Then, in steps 6108 and 6110, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state, and the reel starts rotating. Here, the period from step 6102 to step 6108 is a period corresponding to the wait period until the start of reel rotation. It is a period that occurs because the time (in this example, 4.1 seconds) that should be secured by the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing) is not met, and is sometimes called the minimum game time. Next, at step 6114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel acceleration state end timing of step 6114 has been reached. Then, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the reel drive state to the reel constant speed state in steps 6116 and 6118, performs processing to maintain the reel constant speed state, and then validates the operation of the stop button. processing is executed. In this example, any timing within the period during which the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above processing, in other words, any timing from when the start lever is operated to when the stop button operation becomes effective It is sufficient that the push order navigation is displayed (started to be displayed) at the timing of .

In this way, the period from the timing when the start lever D50 is operated until the operation of the stop button becomes effective has been described according to the processing executed by the CPUC100 of the main control board M, but in this example, the main control board M According to the processing executed by the CPUC 100, start lever operation→minimum game time elapsed→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant speed state→stop button operation is valid (also referred to as reel stop button operation is valid). We will define the periods separately. For example, in FIG. 94, the pushing order navigation by the pushing order display device D270 is executed at the timing immediately after the reel rotation start processing is executed, and the pushing order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed during the reel acceleration state. there is

Note that FIG. 94 illustrates the case where the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is executed in the reel acceleration state, but the main control board M transmits a command to the sub control board S side, and then the sub control board. S executes the drawing process and the push order navigation is displayed during the period when the reel is in the accelerated state. good too.
(1) Start lever operation→Minimum game time elapsed→Main control board M executes reel rotation start processing to start reel rotation→Renew reel drive state to acceleration state→Main control board M push order display device D270 The push order navigation is displayed by dynamic lighting → The main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S receives the command related to winning/replay winning information →The sub-control board S side executes the drawing process with the command as a trigger, and the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40 →The reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state (2) Start lever operation →The minimum game time has passed → The main control board M executes reel rotation start processing to start reel rotation → updates the reel drive state to the acceleration state → the main control board M displays the push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 → main control The board M transmits a command related to the winning/re-game winning information to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the command related to the winning/re-game winning information → The main control board M sends a predetermined command to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S side receives the predetermined command → The sub-control board S side executes drawing processing with the given command as a trigger, and displays the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 → The reel drive state is displayed. Update to constant speed state (3) Start lever operation → Minimum game time elapses → Main control board M executes reel rotation start processing to start reel rotation → Renew reel drive state to acceleration state → Main control board M The push order navigation is displayed by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270→The main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side→The sub control board S side receives the winning/replay winning information Receipt of command related to → Update reel drive state to constant speed state → Triggered by the command, the sub control board S side executes drawing processing and displays push order navigation on effect display device S40 (4) Start lever operation → Minimum Playing time elapses→Main control board M executes reel rotation start processing to start reel rotation→Renews reel drive state to acceleration state→Main control board M dynamically lights push order navigation on push order display device D270 → The main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/re-game winning information to the sub-control board S side → The sub-control board S receives the command related to the winning/re-game winning information → The main control board M sub-controls A predetermined command is transmitted to the board S side → the sub control board S side receives the predetermined command → the reel driving state is updated to the constant speed state → the sub control is triggered by the predetermined command The circuit board S side may execute the drawing process and the effect display device S40 may display the push order navigation as described above. That is, the time value from when the sub control board S side receives a predetermined command from the main control board M side to when the drawing process is executed is designed, and the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub control board S side is determined. Alternatively, the timing at which the main control board M side transmits a predetermined command to the sub control board S side may be designed to determine the display timing of the push order navigation on the sub control board S side.

<Configuration 2>
Next, the configuration of FIG. 95 will be described. The AT-related state is the AT-in-progress state (game state in which push-order navigation is executed when winning the push order role), and in a situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated to start spinning the drum. Processing is executed and the reels start rotating. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

Thereafter, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, a command is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S side, and "213" is displayed as push order navigation on the effect display device S40. After "213" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, "=3" is dynamically lit and displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. In FIG. 95, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. For example, in FIG. 95, the pressing order navigation by the effect display device S40 is performed at the timing after the reel rotation start process is executed, and the pressing order navigation by the pressing order display device D270 is performed at the timing immediately before the operation of the reel stop button becomes effective. executed.

<Effect 1>
By configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time elapsed → reel Start of rotation → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → operation of the stop button is valid), for example, the push order navigation is started on both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. To provide a user-friendly game machine capable of surely preventing a situation in which a player cannot recognize push-order navigation regardless of which display device he/she sees due to a delay in the timing to play the game, and which does not give disadvantage to the player. can be done.

<Effect 2>
Also, by configuring as shown in FIG. 94 or 95, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which two display devices must be viewed at the same time, and the player is relieved of the game burden of being able to visually recognize the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can be reduced.

<Configuration 3>
In the AT state, when a winning combination (push order bell, push order replay combination, etc.) is determined as a winning combination, not only the production display device S40 but also the production display device S40, for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 98, a lamp (hereinafter referred to as a reel window frame lamp D310) provided on the middle panel (middle decorative panel) or a voice output from the speaker S20 informs the pressing order. configuration is also possible. In the configuration 3, when the instruction game is executed, the pressing order navigation can be executed with the reel window frame lamp D310. The reel window frame lamps D310 are provided at positions (near the reels) corresponding to the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and are composed of, for example, LEDs like the start lamp D180. The lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound output from the speaker S20, and the like are controlled and managed by the sub-control board S in the same manner as the performance display device S40. In other words, when the push order navigation is executed by these effect means, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the step based on the command received from the CPUC100 of the main control board M, as in the case of the effect display device S40. 2108 and step 2250 execute command processing (here, referred to as reel window frame lamp lighting processing and voice output processing) to enable push order navigation. In addition, since it is preferable that the reel window frame lamp D310 is provided at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it, for example, the upper side or the lower side of the reel window D160 (when viewed from the player, the reel can be visually recognized) It is preferable that the space above or below the window D160 be provided so as to correspond to each reel.

Configuration 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The AT-related state is the AT-in-progress state (game state in which push-order navigation is executed when winning the push order role), and in a situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated to start spinning the drum. Processing is executed and the reels start rotating. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

After that, immediately after the drum rotation start process is executed, "=3" is displayed (started to be displayed) by dynamic lighting as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. After "=3" is displayed as push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) lights (starts lighting) as push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. . After that, "213" is displayed (started to be displayed) as push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 97, the order in which the pressing order navigation is displayed is "pressing order display device→reel window frame lamp→effect display device", and the pressing order navigation display starts when the reel window frame lamp D310 lights up. The timing is later than the pressing order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Here, when the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side displays the push order navigation, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning/re-game winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, the command data is saved and the command analysis process is sequentially performed, and then the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the lamp control board (board in the sub-control board S). Approximately 16 ms is required from the reception of the command related to the winning/replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the display mode of the push-order navigation and the transmission of the command related to the lighting mode of the push-order navigation. Also, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes drawing processing, which takes about 32 ms. On the other hand, the lamp control board receives a command related to the lighting mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the contents of the command, immediately executes the lighting process (the lighting process can be executed in a shorter time than the drawing process). Therefore, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command as a trigger, and the effect display device S40 and the reel window frame lamp D310 When the pressing order navigation is executed by the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation is displayed (lighted display) by the reel window frame lamp D310 before the pressing order navigation is displayed by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command relating to the winning/replay winning information, and may be a command relating to the effect group number.

In this manner, the display (lighting display) of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40, thereby providing a simple notification to the player. It can be executed more quickly, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the order of pushing (a situation in which the order of pushing is wrong).

The order in which the push order navigation is displayed may be configured to be "the push order display device → the effect display device → the reel window frame lamp". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may transmit a command related to push order navigation to the lamp board after the sub main board transmits a command related to push order navigation to the effect control board. Then, a command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and a command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310. and may be different commands.

As described above, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) was described as "press order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed ( The order of display start) is not limited to this. For example, as modifications of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (started to be displayed), "reel window frame lamp → push order display device → effect display device", "effect display device → push order display device → reel window frame lamp", It may be configured such that "reel window frame lamp→effect display device→press order display device" or "effect display device→reel window frame lamp→press order display device". In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to push order navigation to the lamp board and effect control board, the main control board M dynamically displays push order navigation on the push order display device D270. It may be configured to display (start display) by lighting, or a command from the main control board M side and the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. may be a different command from the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of . In this way, depending on the timing of sending a command from the sub-main board and the timing of displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the main control board M,
(1) Push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 is executed first (2) Push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed first (3) Push order by the effect display device S40 It is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), such as executing navigation first.

<effect>
In this way, in a situation where the minimum playing time has passed, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant speed state). → period until the operation of the stop button becomes valid), for example, even in a game machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation can be performed by turning on the lamp ( In this example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310), etc., and it is difficult for the player to recognize the push order navigation (advantageous operation mode of the stop button). can provide.

<Configuration 4>
Next, as configuration 4, a configuration for executing notification of push order navigation by voice output from the speaker S20 will be described. Configuration 4 is configured to notify the pressing order by voice in the instruction game. Push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be operated (the stop button to be operated) is executed.

Configuration 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The AT-related state is the AT-in-progress state (game state in which push-order navigation is executed when winning the push order role), and in a situation where the minimum game time has elapsed, the start lever is operated to start spinning the drum. Processing is executed and the reels start rotating. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

After that, immediately after the drum rotation start process is executed, the pressing order display device D270 displays (starts to display) "=3" as the pressing order navigation by dynamic lighting. After "=3" is displayed as the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270, the push-order navigation outputting the voice from the speaker S20 is "Middle" (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop operation). A voice suggesting that the After that, "213" is displayed (started to be displayed) as push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 98, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "the push order display device → the sound → the effect display device". As with the lamp D310, the timing is later than the push order display device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

Here, when the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub-control board S side displays the push order navigation, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S relates to the winning/re-game winning information from the CPUC100 of the main control board M. After receiving the command, the command data is saved and the command analysis process is sequentially performed, and then the push order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the production control board (board in the sub-control board S). A process of transmitting a command related to the display mode and a process of transmitting a command related to the output mode of push-order navigation from the sub-main board (board in the sub-control board S) to the voice control board (board in the sub-control board S). Approximately 16 ms is required from the reception of the command related to the winning/replay winning information to the transmission of the command related to the push-order navigation display mode and the transmission of the command related to the push-order navigation output mode. Also, the effect control board receives a command related to the display mode of the push order navigation, and if there is no problem with the content of the command, executes drawing processing, which takes about 32 ms. On the other hand, the voice control board receives a command related to the output mode of push-order navigation, and if there is no problem with the contents of the command, immediately executes voice output processing (voice output processing is executed in a shorter time than drawing processing). possible), the main control board M transmits a command related to the winning/replay winning information to the sub control board S side, and when the sub control board S receives the command, the effect display device S40 and the speaker S20 When the push order navigation is executed, the output (audio output) of the push order navigation by the speaker S20 is executed before the push order navigation is displayed by the effect display device S40. The command transmitted from the main control board M is not limited to the command relating to the winning/replay winning information, and may be a command relating to the effect group number.

In this way, by constructing the output (audio output) of the push-order navigation by the speaker S20 before the display of the push-order navigation by the effect display device S40, simple notification to the player can be executed more quickly. In addition, the player can recognize the pressing order by voice without looking at the effect display device S40, and the situation where the stop button is operated before confirming the pressing order (the pressing order is wrong). situation) can be prevented.

As described above, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) was explained in the case of "press order display device → sound → effect display device", but the push order navigation is displayed (started). The order in which they are performed is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example of the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (started to be displayed), it may be configured such that "the push order display device→the effect display device→the voice". In such a configuration, the sub-main board may be configured to transmit a command related to push-order navigation to the voice control board after the sub-main board transmits a command related to push-order navigation to the effect control board. A command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and a command from the main control board M that triggers the display of the push order navigation in the voice from the speaker S20. command may be a different command.

Furthermore, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) is as follows: "voice → push order display device → effect display device", "voice → effect display device → push order display device", "effect display device → sound → press It is also possible to configure such as "order display device", "effect display device -> push order display device ->sound", and the like. In such a configuration, after the sub-main board transmits a command related to push order navigation to the voice control board and effect control board, the main control board M causes the push order display device D270 to carry out push order navigation. It may be configured to display (start display) by dynamic lighting, or the command from the main control board M side and the pressing order in the voice from the speaker S20 that triggers the display of the pressing order navigation in the effect display device S40. A command different from the command from the main control board M side that triggers the display of the navigation may be used. In this way, depending on the timing of sending a command from the sub-main board and the timing of displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the main control board M,
(1) First to execute push order navigation by dynamic lighting on the push order display device D270 (2) First to execute push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 (3) Push order by the effect display device S40 It is possible to change the order in which the push order navigation is displayed (display start), such as executing navigation first.

<effect>
In this way, in a situation where the minimum playing time has passed, the start timing of the push order navigation by voice is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → stop button For example, even in a game machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be performed by voice (in this example, from the speaker S20). It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine in which it is difficult for the player to fail to recognize the push order navigation.

<<Mode of execution of push order navigation when there is a wait>>
First, when there is a wait, in other words, the start lever is operated in a state where the minimum game time has not elapsed (the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a value greater than 0), and then the game is executed. The manner in which the push order navigation is executed in the case where the buttons are pressed will be described below.

<Configuration 1>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 99 will be described. The state related to AT is the AT-in-progress state (game state in which push-order navigation is executed when winning the push-order role), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

First, when the start lever D50 is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the main control board M detects the operation of the start lever D50 in timer interrupt processing, and the push order display device D270 displays "= 3” to display (start displaying) the push order navigation with dynamic lighting. After that, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, "213" is displayed (started to be displayed) as push order navigation on the effect display device S40. In FIG. 99, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation of the effect display device S40.

<Configuration 2>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 100 will be described. The state related to AT is the AT-in-progress state (game state in which push-order navigation is executed when winning the push-order role), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S executes the process of displaying (starting to display) "213" as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (the drawing described above). process). After that, the minimum game time has passed, the reel rotation start processing is executed, the reels start to rotate, and the main control board M starts to operate the stop button before the reel driving state becomes a constant speed state and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Before (immediately before the operation of the stop button becomes valid), the process of displaying (starting to display) "=3" by dynamic lighting as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is executed. In FIG. 100, the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. It should be noted that here, the sub-control board S executes the process of displaying (starting to display) "213" as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 based on the reception of the command relating to the effect group number. , The command that triggers the process of displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 is not limited to this, but at the timing of displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 Accordingly, the command to be transmitted from the main control board M to be triggered may be determined.

<Configuration 3>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 101 will be described. The state related to AT is the AT-in-progress state (game state in which push-order navigation is executed when winning the push-order role), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

When the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start lever D50 is operated, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S executes the process of displaying (starting to display) "213" as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 (the drawing described above). process). After that, at the timing when the minimum game time has passed and the reel rotation start processing is executed, the main control board M dynamically sets "=3" as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270. Execute processing to display (start display) by lighting. In FIG. 101, when the start lever is operated in a situation where it takes a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is the time value for five times of timer interrupt processing) or more before the minimum game time elapses, the effect display device The push order navigation of S40 is displayed earlier than the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. In addition, when the start lever is operated in a situation in which only a time less than a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms, which is a time value for five timer interrupt processing) remains until the minimum game time elapses, or the minimum game time When the start lever is operated in a state where the operation) occurs to the completion of the display of the push order navigation, the trigger for displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side (for example, the main control board M Since the time from the receipt of a command relating to the winning/replay winning information from the side to the completion of the display of the push order navigation is longer than the push order display device D270. is displayed earlier than the pressing order navigation of the effect display device S40.

As described above, an example of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (started to be displayed) on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 has been described. This is not the only timing. For example, as a modification of the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (started to be displayed) in FIG. During the period before the minimum game time elapses in which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed), the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed) simultaneously on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. Alternatively, the push order navigation is displayed (displayed) on the push order display device D270 during the period before the minimum game time elapses, and the push order navigation is displayed (displayed) on the effect display device S40 after the minimum game time has passed. Furthermore, during the period before the minimum game time elapses, the push order navigation is displayed (display start) on the effect display device S40, and after the minimum game time elapses, the push order navigation is displayed on the push order display device D270. may be displayed (started to be displayed), and the display (started to be displayed) of the push order navigation may be divided between before and after the minimum game time elapses.

<effect>
In this way, the start timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation→period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed→reel rotation start→reel acceleration). state→reel constant speed state→operation of the stop button is valid). By configuring in this way, the timing of displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation can be made different between the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. As an effect of differentiating the timing of displaying (starting to display) the pressing order navigation between the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40,
(1) When the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is displayed before the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 By timer interrupt processing (for example, about 2 ms) immediately after determining the effect group number based on the determination of the bell role), the push order navigation can be displayed (started) on the push order display device D270. , it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that promptly notifies the player of information related to push order navigation.
(2) When the push order navigation in the effect display device S40 is displayed before the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 In the case of a game machine equipped with a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, Since the information about the current game state or the winning combination is often suggested on the effect display device S40, the player progresses the game while visually recognizing the effect display device S40. I will go. The performance display device S40, which has a larger size (display area) than the push order display device D270 and is easily visually recognized by the player, is configured so as to promptly inform the player of the information related to the push order navigation. Even when the push order navigation is newly executed while the device S40 is being viewed, the push order navigation can be confirmed while the effect display device S40 is being visually recognized. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine capable of reducing a player's playing load without having to look at a display device.
In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the player cannot recognize the push order navigation regardless of which display device he sees. , it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not give any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, by making the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 different, the two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine capable of reducing a game burden on a player by avoiding a state where the push-order navigation is not performed and allowing the player to visually recognize the push-order navigation on an individual display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs. .

<Configuration 4>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 102 will be described. Note that configuration 4 has a reel window frame lamp D310. The state related to AT is the AT-in-progress state (game state in which push-order navigation is executed when winning the push-order role), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

The start lever D50 is operated when the minimum game time has not elapsed, and the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S lights (starts lighting) the lamp corresponding to the middle reel (middle stop button) as push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310. process. Thereafter, a process of displaying (starting to display) "213" as the push order navigation is executed on the effect display device S40. The timing at which the push order navigation display is started by lighting the reel window frame lamp D310 is the timing prior to the effect display device S40. This is because, as described above, when the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the reel window frame lamp lighting processing in the reel window frame lamp D310 is the push order navigation. can be executed faster than the process of drawing on the effect display device S40. After that, the minimum game time elapses, reel rotation start processing is executed, and the reels start rotating. = 3” by dynamic lighting (display start). In FIG. 102, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "reel window frame lamp→effect display device→press order display device", and the display of the push order navigation starts when the reel window frame lamp D310 lights up. The timing to be performed is earlier than the pressing order display device D270 and is earlier than the effect display device S40.

102, the start lever is operated just before the period before the minimum playing time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum playing time elapses). When the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "press order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect display device" or There is a case of "reel window frame lamp→push order display device→effect display device". Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so just before the period before the minimum playing time ends ( For example, when the start lever is operated (the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side) before the minimum game time elapses, the pressing order display device There is a case where the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 is displayed (started) after the push order navigation is displayed by D270 or the reel window frame lamp D310.

Also, in the reel window frame lamp D310, the start lever was operated (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time passed) just before the period before the minimum game time passed (for example, the main control board M In the case of sending a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), it takes time for the sub control board S side to receive the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. There is a case where the pressing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp is displayed (started) after the pressing order navigation is displayed by the order display device D270.
As described above, the timing at which the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 and the reel window frame lamp D310 is started is as follows: start lever operation→minimum game time elapsed→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant speed state →If it is a period until the operation of the stop button is effective, the timing to display the push order navigation can be determined as appropriate.

<effect>
In this way, the display (lighting display) of the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed before the display of the push order navigation by the effect display device S40. It can be executed more quickly, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player operates the stop button before confirming the pressing order (a situation in which the pressing order is mistaken).

Also, even in a game machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the push order navigation can be executed by lighting a lamp (in this example, lighting the reel window frame lamp D310). Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it difficult for the player to recognize the push order navigation.

<Configuration 5>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 103 will be described. In addition, in configuration 5, it is configured to execute push order navigation by voice output from the speaker S20 in the instruction game. The state related to AT is the AT-in-progress state (game state in which push-order navigation is executed when winning the push-order role), and the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side in timer interrupt processing during a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed. After receiving a command related to the production group number from the main control board M, the sub-control board S outputs the voice from the speaker S20 as push-order navigation, such as "Middle!" (sound suggesting operation) and outputting a sound. Thereafter, a process of displaying (starting to display) "213" as the push order navigation is executed on the effect display device S40. The timing at which the display of the push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 is started is the timing prior to the effect display device S40. When the sub control board S receives a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sound output process from the speaker S20 draws the push order navigation on the effect display device S40. because it runs faster than After that, when the minimum playing time elapses, the reels start rotating, the operation of the stop button becomes effective, and the main control board M receives a signal that the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant and the operation of the stop button becomes effective. Before that, the push order display device D270 displays (starts to display) "=3" by dynamic lighting as the push order navigation. In FIG. 103, the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "sound → effect display device → push order display device". The timing is earlier than the device D270 and earlier than the effect display device S40.

103, the start lever is operated just before the period before the minimum game time elapses (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time elapses). When the main control board M has transmitted a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side), the order in which the push order navigation is displayed is "press order display device → sound → effect display device" or "sound → There is a case of "pressing order display device→effect display device". Here, in the case of displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, as described above, after the sub control board S receives the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the effect display device S40 It takes about 32 ms to display (start displaying) "213" as the push order navigation (until the drawing process is executed), so just before the period before the minimum playing time ends ( For example, when the start lever is operated (the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side) before the minimum game time elapses, the pressing order display device There is a case where the push order navigation is displayed (started) by the effect display device S40 after the display of the push order navigation by D270 or the notification of the push order navigation by voice.

Also, in the speaker S20, the start lever was operated (for example, about 10 ms remaining until the minimum game time passed) just before the period before the minimum game time passed (for example, the main control board M When the command related to the effect group number is transmitted to the S side), it takes time for the sub control board S side to receive the command related to the effect group number from the main control board M side. There is a case where the push order navigation by voice from the speaker S20 is reported after the display of the push order navigation by D270.

As described above, the timing at which the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is started is as follows: start lever operation → period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed → start of reel rotation → reel acceleration state → reel constant speed state → As long as the operation of the stop button is effective, the timing for displaying the push order navigation can be determined as appropriate.

<effect>
In this way, when the start lever is operated in a situation where the minimum game time has not elapsed, the start timing of the voice push order navigation is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → minimum game time elapsed → reel rotation start → Reel acceleration state → Reel constant speed state → Operation of the stop button is valid), for example, even in a gaming machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, The push order navigation can be executed with a simple notification mode of sound (in this example, the sound output from the speaker S20), and in a situation where the player is not looking at the effect display device S40 while paying attention to the reels or the stop button. Even when the push order navigation is executed, the player can recognize the push order navigation by voice while paying attention to the reel or the stop button, so the player cannot recognize the push order navigation. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that is unlikely to occur.

An example of the timing for displaying the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 and the timing for displaying the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 has been explained with and without a wait. The timing for displaying the push order navigation on each display device is not limited to these. From the start of operation of the start lever D50 described above, start lever operation→elapse of minimum game time→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant speed state→operation of stop button valid. You can set the timing to display the navigation. Further, it is preferable to set the display timing of the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 so as to be shorter than the period described above. This is because it takes a predetermined time (for example, 32 ms or more) from when the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a predetermined command from the CPUC 100 of the main control board M to when the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40. is. Furthermore, the greater the number of drawing frames displayed on the effect display device S40, the more time is required. The winning combination is determined after the start lever D50 is operated. Considering the time required from the determination of the winning combination as described above until the push order navigation is displayed on the effect display device S40, As an example of the timing at which the display of the push order navigation is started on the effect display device S40, a period in which the minimum playing time has not elapsed (with a wait)→reel rotation start (with no wait)→reel acceleration It is preferable to define the period from the state→reel constant speed state→the operation of the stop button to become effective. By defining in this way, the period until the display of the push order navigation is started on the push order display device D270 and the period until the display of the push order navigation is started on the effect display device S40 can be made different. can be done. During these periods, it is possible to appropriately determine the timing for starting the display of the push order navigation on each display device.

For example, during the period from start lever operation→minimum game time elapsed→reel rotation start→reel acceleration state→reel constant speed state→stop button operation is effective, the pressing order display device D270, effect display device S40, voice, reel An example of the order in which the push order navigation is notified on the window frame lamp D310 is as follows.
(1) Pressing order display device → Effect display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (2) Pushing order display device → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (3) Pressing order display device → Sound → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Sound (6) Push order display device → Reel window Frame lamp → Sound → Effect display device (7) Effect display device → Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (8) Effect display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (9) Effect display device → sound → push order display device → reel window frame lamp (10) effect display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → push order display device (11) effect display device → reel window frame lamp → push order display device → sound (12) ) Effect display device → reel window frame lamp → sound → push order display device (13) Sound → push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp (14) sound → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect Display device (15) Sound→Effect display device→Press order display device→Reel window frame lamp (16) Sound→Effect display device→Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device (17) Sound→Reel window frame lamp→Press order Display device→effect display device (18) sound→reel window frame lamp→effect display device→push order display device (19) reel window frame lamp→push order display device→effect display device→sound (20) reel window frame lamp→ Pressing order display device → Sound → Effect display device (21) Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Push order display device → Sound (22) Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Sound → Push order display device (23) Reel Window frame lamp→sound→push order display device→effect display device (24) Reel window frame lamp→sound→effect display device→push order display device, start lever operation→minimum game time elapsed→reel rotation start→ It is possible to set the timing for displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation as appropriate during the period from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state to the effective operation of the stop button.

In addition, as one of the effect means controlled by the sub-control board S, it is controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). It is also possible to add push order navigation such that the stop button lamp S60 lit up (blinks) so as to suggest an operation mode of the stop button that is advantageous to the player. By operating the start lever D50, the main control board M transmits a command related to the effect group number to the sub control board S side in timer interrupt processing. After receiving a command related to the effect group number from the main control board M, the sub control board S lights (or blinks) the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button to perform the first stop operation. Execute the process that causes the An example of the order of displaying (starting to display) the push-order navigation with the push-order navigation by the stop button D40 is described below.
(25) Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (blinks)) → Effect display device (26) Push order display device → Sound → Stop button lamp (first stop) Button only lit (blinking)) → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (27) Push order display device → Sound → Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights (blinking)) and reel window frame lamp almost simultaneously → Effect Although it is possible to configure like a display device, the order here is an example and is not limited to this. For example, in (27) above, the reel window frame lamp D310 and the stop button lamp S60 are lit (blinking) at the same timing, but it is also possible to output the sound from the speaker S20 at the same time. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing (push order display device D270) related to display (display start) of push order navigation on the main control board M side (push order display device D270), or sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel The order of displaying (starting to display) the pressing order navigation may be determined in any way according to the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the pressing order navigation of the window frame lamp D310, the sound from the speaker S20, and the stop button D40). It should be noted that when executing the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, instead of lighting (blinking) the stop button lamps corresponding to all the reels, only the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel to be stopped is turned on. It is preferable to control so as to light up (flashing). When the stop button lamp S60 is used to perform push order navigation of, for example, "213": "middle → left → right", the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button D42 (lights up) → the middle stop button D42 is operated → middle stop. Stop button lamp (light off) corresponding to button D42→Stop button lamp (light on) corresponding to left stop button D41→Operation of left stop button D41→Stop button lamp (light off) corresponding to left stop button D41→Right stop button Stop button lamp corresponding to D43 (lit)→Operation of right stop button D43→Stop button lamp (light off) corresponding to right stop button D43 Based on the progress of the game, the stop button lamp corresponding to the reel lights up. (flashing) and configured to turn off.

Also, the case where the control of the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) is executed by the sub control board S was described above. The stop button lamp S60 provided inside the button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) may be controlled by the main control board M. The start timing of push order navigation by controlling the stop button lamps S60 provided inside the stop buttons D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) on the main control board M will be described below.

When the stop button lamp S60 is controlled by the main control board M, the timer interrupt after the start lever is operated and the performance group number is determined based on the determination of the winning combination (here, the pressing order bell combination). Processing (for example, if it is the first cycle from the determination of the effect group number, it takes about 2 ms until the lighting process of the stop button lamp S60) executes the processing of lighting (or blinking) the stop button lamp S60. It becomes possible to By configuring in this way, an example of the order of displaying (starting to display) the push-order navigation with the addition of the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is as follows.
(28) Push order display device → stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (blinks)) → voice → reel window frame lamp → effect display device (29) stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (blinks)) → Pressing order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (30) Stop button lamp (only the first stop button lights up (flashing)) and pressing order display device almost simultaneously → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Effect Although it is possible to configure like a display device, the order here is an example and is not limited to this. For example, in the above (28) to (30), the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 controlled by the main control board M side is performed by the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S side and the voice from the speaker S20. , is started before the push order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310, but the main control board M side changes the timing of executing timer interrupt processing for lighting (blinking) the stop button lamp S60, The push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 may be started after the push order navigation on the sub control board S side (for example, the effect display device S40, the sound from the speaker, the reel window frame lamp D310) is started. Execution timing of timer interrupt processing related to display (start of display) of push order navigation on main control board M side (push order display device D270, stop button lamp S60), or sub control board S (effect display device S40, reel window frame) The order of displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation may be determined in any way according to the transmission timing of the command related to the notification of the push order navigation (lamp D310, sound from the speaker S20).

<<Configuration related to end of push order navigation display>>
Next, the end timing of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and effect display device S40 will be described. The timing at which the push-order navigation ends can be designed to some extent freely according to the period in which the player finishes the game, similar to the timing at which the push-order navigation starts. An example of the period during which the player ends the game is the timing at which the player operates the third stop button. When the third stop button is operated to completely stop all the reels and a prize is won, the payout of game medals based on the prize is completed, and the game ends.

The period during which the display of the push order navigation is ended is the period of "3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning judgment → completion of payout based on winning" starting from the operation timing of the 3rd stop button. Any timing can be specified. In this example, the timing at which the push order navigation ends is different for each push order role (push order bell, push order replay role). For example, the timing for ending the display of the push order navigation by the push order display device D270 differs depending on whether the determined winning combination is the push order bell or the push order replay combination.

In configurations 1 to 5 described below, in order to explain the end timing of the push order navigation, the first stop button and the second stop button are already pressed, and the effect display device It is supplemented that the pressing order navigation corresponding to the first stop button and the second stop button in S40 is also completed.

<Configuration 1>
First, configuration 1 in FIG. 104 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-in-progress state (game state in which pushing order navigation is executed when the pushing order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the second stop button is operated. The right stop button is operated as the third stop in a situation where the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 ends, and the push order navigation elimination effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed (display start) on the effect display device S40. be done. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

Here, the push-order navigation disappearing effect is displayed for a predetermined time as an effect display related to the end when the display of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device ends. In the figure, the right stop button is operated in a situation where "3" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, and the sensor for detecting the operation of the right stop button is turned on from off. is detected by interrupt processing on the main control board M side, a command related to the detection is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side receives the command related to the detection. Then, by executing the process of erasing the display of "3", the push order navigation disappearing effect that is erased after the display of "3" has passed through is displayed.

After that, the display of the push-order navigation disappearing effect ends (the push-order navigation ends on the effect display device S40) in a state where the push-order navigation on the push-order display device D270 has ended. Here, both the pressing order navigation of the pressing order display device D270 and the pressing order navigation of the effect display device S40 are ended by "pressing the third stop button" (when the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off). 104, the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 precedes the push order navigation of the effect display device S40. Erasing the display is completed. This is the same as when the push-order navigation is started, and even if the end timing of the push-order navigation is set to "when the third stop button is pressed", the CPUSC of the sub-control board S will not be able to draw a plurality of frames. It can be said that this is because the end of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is delayed by the amount of processing for displaying .

More specifically, when the pressing order display device D270 turns on the pressing order display device D270, the pressing order navigating process ends when the pressing order display device D270 turns on→starts turning off→completes turning off. The order navigation is displayed → the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect starts → the display of the push order navigation disappearing effect ends (erasure is completed), and the push order navigation ends. In this example, the timing at which the push order display device D270 starts to be extinguished is called extinguishing of the push order display device, and the start of display of the push order navigation disappearance effect is called display (display start) of the push order navigation disappearance effect. The turn-off of the push-order display device may be replaced with the timing when the push-order display device D270 is turned off, and the display of the push-order navigation disappearance effect may be replaced with the timing when the display of the push-order navigation disappearance effect is finished. The timing of turning off the push order display device and displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation disappearance effect may be as follows: turning off the push order display device → displaying (starting to display) the push order navigation disappearance effect, or displaying the push order disappearance effect. (Display start)→The push order display device may be extinguished, or the push order display device extinguishment and the display (display start) of the push order navigation elimination effect may be performed at the same time.

Also, the configuration in which the push order navigation display ends when the third stop button is operated has been described above. This is the timing at which the sensor for turning off is detected by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, and hereinafter may also be referred to as "when the third stop button is pressed"), and the third stop The state in which the third stop button is released after the button is pressed (after the interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off) , is the timing at which it is detected that the switch is turned off from on, and hereinafter may also be referred to as "when the third stop button is not pressed"), and the push order navigation ends for each of these states. It can also be configured to define timing. For example, in the order of the timing at which the push order navigation ends in the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, in more detail,
(When push order navigation does not end at the same time)
(1) Through interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off → the push order display device is turned off → sub-control from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → the command is received by the sub control board S side → the push order navigation disappearance effect is displayed (display start)
(2) Interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from OFF→Press order display device goes off→Interrupt processing on the main control board M side Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from OFF → Sends a command related to detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → Sub Control board S side receives the command → display of push order navigation disappearance effect (display start)
(3) Interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off from on → push order display device goes off → sub control from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → the command is received by the sub control board S side → the push order navigation disappearance effect is displayed (display start)
(4) Interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off to the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. Sending a command related to the detection of the stop button→Receiving the command on the sub control board S side→Displaying the effect of erasing the pressing order (display start)→Extinguishing the pressing order display device (5) By the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, the 3 Detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button has been turned on from OFF → Sending a command related to the detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → sub control board S side receives the command → display (start of display) of the effect of erasing the pressing order → detection that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from on by interrupt processing on the main control board M side → Turning off the push order display device (6) Detecting that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side → from the main control board M side to the sub control board A command related to the detection of the third stop button is sent to the S side → The command is received by the sub control board S side → Display of the push order disappearance effect (display start) → Push order display device turns off (Push order navigation ends at the same time case)
(7) Interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from the off state → From the main control board M side to the sub control board S side A command related to the detection of the stop button is sent → the command is received by the sub control board S side → the push order disappearing effect is displayed (display starts) and the push order display device is turned off at the same time (8) By interrupt processing on the main control board M side, Detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off from ON → Sends a command related to detection of the third stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → Sub control board It is possible to stipulate that the S side receives the command and turns off the push order display device simultaneously with the display (start of display) of the push order disappearance effect.

In addition, the display mode of the push order navigation when, for example, the first stop button is pressed and the second stop button is pressed, instead of when the third stop button is pressed, will be described as a supplement. First, in the push order display device D270, after lighting is started, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned on (or vice versa) by interrupt processing on the main control board M side. It remains lit until it is detected and turned off. On the other hand, in the effect display device S40, for example, the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is switched from off to on (or from on to off) by pressing the first stop button (by interrupt processing on the main control board M side). Detecting that it has occurred) Send a command related to the detection of the first stop button from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side → The sub control board S side receives the command → The order of pressing corresponding to the first stop button disappears Display of the effect (display start) and start of changing the display mode of the push order navigation (for example, display of "2") corresponding to the reel to be stopped next (hereinafter referred to as "the display mode of the second reel push order navigation (also referred to as "start change"). The order in which they are executed is
(9) Display (start of display) of the effect of erasing the pressing order corresponding to the first stop button → Start of changing the display mode of the second reel pressing order navigation (10) Start of changing the display mode of the second reel pressing order navigation → Second 1 Display of the pressing order disappearance effect corresponding to the stop button (display start)
It may be configured as either of Similarly, when the second stop button is operated, (11) display (start of display) of the pressing order elimination effect (the display mode has been changed) corresponding to the second stop button → navigating the pressing order of the third reel. Start of change of display mode (12) Start of change of display mode of 3rd reel push order navigation→Display (display start) of push order elimination effect (display mode has been changed) corresponding to 2nd stop button
can be configured as

<Configuration 2>
Next, configuration 2 in FIG. 105 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-in-progress state (game state in which pushing order navigation is executed when the pushing order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the second stop button is operated. The right stop button is operated as the third stop in a situation where the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, the effect display device S40 displays (starts to display) the push-order navigation elimination effect related to the right reel (right stop button). It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

After that, while the right stop button is pressed, the display of the push-order navigation elimination effect ends (the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). Thereafter, when the right stop button is released, the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 ends.

<Configuration 3>
Next, configuration 3 in FIG. 106 will be described. In FIG. 106, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is "3" instead of "=3". That is, the right digit of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a push order navigation, and the left digit is not displayed. In addition, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display the push order navigation display and the display of the number of obtained cards.

The instruction game is executed in the AT-in-progress state (game state in which pushing order navigation is executed when the pushing order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the second stop button is operated. The right stop button is operated as the third stop in a situation where the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off → Sub-control from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → the command is received by the sub-control board S side → the pressing order elimination effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start) be done. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning "winning - A3") is exemplified.

After that, while the right stop button is pressed, the symbol combination related to the pressing order bell (11 payout symbol combinations) is stopped and displayed, and "0" is displayed on the pressing order display device D270. After that, when the right stop button is released, the payout related to the stop-displayed symbol combination is started, and the push order display device D270 displays "1"→"2"→"3"→..."10"→"11". ” will be displayed. After "11" is displayed on the push order display device D270 (after the number of winning cards is displayed), the display of the push order display device D270 is terminated (not displayed). In this way, the push order display device D270 is configured to be able to display both the push order navigation and the display of the number of winnings, and the display mode of the push order navigation display is displayed only in the lower digits of the push order display device D270. is displayed, when the combination of symbols for which game medals are paid out in the instruction game is stopped and displayed, the push order display device D270 displays both the push order navigation and the number of winning medals. There is a risk that the user may misunderstand the push order navigation or the number of acquisitions. Therefore, by terminating the display of the push order navigation and displaying " 0" while starting the display of the winning number, regardless of the number of payouts related to the stopped symbol combination (for example, 1 11), the player can recognize that the display of the winning number will start. It should be noted that the numerical value of "0" may be changed, and it is preferable that the display mode is different from the display mode that can be displayed as the push order navigation.

It should be noted that the end timing of the display of the push order navigation on the push order display device D270 is changed from the display of "3" (function of the push order display device) to the display of "0". (the function of the payout number display device), but it may be the timing of "completion of payout based on winning", at which the display of the push order display device D270 disappears completely. By setting the end timing of the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 to "when the third stop button is pressed", the push order navigation of the effect display device S40 is earlier than the push order navigation of the push order display device D270. you know it will end.

As another example, the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 is configured as "13", "23", and "33" instead of "=3". The displayed push order navigation will be described in detail. The digits "1", "2", and "3" on the left correspond to the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, respectively, and indicate the position of the reel to be stopped. (For example, "1" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the left reel M51, and "2" indicates that the reel to be stopped is the middle reel M52). The digit "3" on the right side corresponds to the pressing order "middle → left → right" (the corresponding instruction number is "A3") displayed on the effect display device S40, as in the previous configuration. It is a thing. By configuring in this way, the display order of the push order navigation is "23" → "13" → "33", and the stop button is operated according to the push order. At the timing, the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation has been performed disappears, and the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel to be stopped is displayed. Then, when the final stop operation is performed, the display of the push order navigation ("33" in this example) corresponding to the final stop operation disappears, thereby ending the push order navigation by the push order display device D270.

<effect>
In this way, the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (third stop button operation (press) → third stop button non-press → winning judgment → winning). (period until payout is completed based on ), so that the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40, for example, are different. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation in which two display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can visually confirm the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can reduce the

In addition, the sensor for detecting the operation of the stop button is turned on by interrupt processing on the main control board M side to terminate the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 (the push order navigation display on the effect display device S40). If it is specified that the game will be turned off (release the stop button), even if the player holds down the final stop button (third stop button) in anticipation of the outcome of the game, the game will stop. It can be configured so that the push order navigation does not end until the button changes from on to off. Here, if the push order navigation is deleted immediately after the stop button is turned on from off, the expectation that the result of the game will not be advantageous to the player is reduced. Since there is a possibility that the event of falling off may occur, the game result will not be advantageous for the player by configuring so that the push order navigation does not end until the stop button is turned off from on. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of events that reduce the sense of expectation.

<Configuration 4>
Next, configuration 4 in FIG. 107 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-in-progress state (game state in which pushing order navigation is executed when the pushing order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the second stop button is operated. The right stop button is operated as the third stop in a situation where the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off → Sub-control from the main control board M side A command relating to the detection of the third stop button is sent to the board S side → the command is received by the sub-control board S side → the pressing order elimination effect relating to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display start) At the same time, the push order navigation in the push order display device D270 ends. It should be noted that, in the game, a predetermined push order replay has been won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (RT state with a high replay winning probability can be maintained) (for example, the case of winning "replay-D2", which is a three-choice push-order replay in which the middle first stop is the highest profit).

After that, while the right stop button is pressed, the display of the push-order navigation elimination effect ends (the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). After that, when the right stop button is released (by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from on), and the symbol combination related to the replay is performed. is stopped, automatic betting is executed and the 1-bed lamp D211 lights up (when automatic betting is executed, for example, the order of 1-bed lamp D211 → 2-bed lamp D212 → 3-bed lamp D213 lights up).

<Configuration 5>
Next, configuration 5 in FIG. 108 will be described. The instruction game is executed in the AT-in-progress state (game state in which pushing order navigation is executed when the pushing order is won), the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, and the second stop button is operated. The right stop button is operated as the third stop in a situation where the push order navigation for the third stop is displayed on the effect display device S40 and the push order navigation for the game is displayed on the push order display device D270. (pressed). By pressing the stop button, interrupt processing on the main control board M side detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned on from off → Sub-control from the main control board M side A command related to the detection of the third stop button is transmitted to the board S side → The command is received by the sub control board S side → The push order navigation elimination effect related to the right reel (right stop button) is displayed on the effect display device S40 (display starts ) is done. It should be noted that, in the game, a predetermined push order replay has been won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (RT state with a high replay winning probability can be maintained) (for example, the case of winning "replay-D2", which is a three-choice push-order replay in which the middle first stop is the highest profit).

After that, while the right stop button is pressed, the display of the push-order navigation elimination effect ends (the push-order navigation on the effect display device S40 ends). After that, when the right stop button is released (by the interrupt processing on the main control board M side, it is detected that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button has been turned off from on), and the symbol combination related to the replay is performed. is stopped, automatic betting is executed, the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, and after the 1-bet lamp D211 lights up, the pushing order navigation in the pushing order display device D270 ends.

In this way, for example, in the case of having configuration 1 of FIG. 104 and configuration 5 of FIG. It is possible to provide a game machine that enables even a player who does not have a winning combination to determine which minor winning combination has won based on the difference in the end timing of the push order navigation.

As described above, the end timing of the push order navigation in the case of the push order bell or the push order replay role as the push order role has been explained. In the effect display device S40, as an example of the timing at which the push order navigation ends, only "when the third stop button is pressed" has been described as an example, but this is not the only case. As the period during which the game ends, if the third stop button is operated (pressed) -> the third stop button is not pressed -> winning determination -> payout completion based on the winning, the timing to end the push order navigation can be arbitrarily determined. is possible. In addition, in the pressing order display device D270, the pressing order navigation ending timing is set to be different between when the winning combination is the pressing order bell and when the pressing order replaying combination. ing. As an example of the case where the winning combination is a replaying role in the order of pushing, the timing at which the navigation of the order of pushing ends is set to "when the 1-bet lamp lights up", and the timing of lighting the 1-bet lamp D211 is arbitrarily set to display the order of pushing. The end timing of the push order navigation of the device D270 greatly changes. As an example, if the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211 is at the start of the next game, the end period of the pushing order navigation when the winning combination is the pushing order bell "3rd stop button operation (pressing) → 3rd The timing will be later than "stop button non-pressing → winning judgment → payout based on winning", "3rd stop button operation (pressing) → 3rd stop button not pressing → winning judgment → payout based on winning completed → 1 bet lamp If the lighting timing of the 1-bet lamp D211 is when the 3rd stop button is not pressed, then ``operation (press) of the 3rd stop button→non-pressing of the 3rd stop button→when the 1-bet lamp lights up→winning Judgment→Completion of payout based on winning", and the winning combination will be included within the end period of the push order navigation at the time of the push order bell.

Similar to the timing at which the push order navigation is displayed (starts to be displayed), the order of the timing at which the push order navigation ends is based on the following: 3rd stop button operation (pressed) → 3rd stop button not pressed → winning judgment → winning. In the payout completion period, an example of the order in which the pressing order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the sound, and the pressing order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 ends is as follows.
(1) Pressing order display device → Effect display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (2) Pushing order display device → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (3) Pressing order display device → Sound → Effect display device → Reel window frame lamp (4) Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device (5) Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Sound (6) Push order display device → Reel window Frame lamp → Sound → Effect display device (7) Effect display device → Push order display device → Sound → Reel window frame lamp (8) Effect display device → Push order display device → Reel window frame lamp → Sound (9) Effect display device → sound → push order display device → reel window frame lamp (10) effect display device → sound → reel window frame lamp → push order display device (11) effect display device → reel window frame lamp → push order display device → sound (12) ) Effect display device → reel window frame lamp → sound → push order display device (13) Sound → push order display device → effect display device → reel window frame lamp (14) sound → push order display device → reel window frame lamp → effect Display device (15) Sound→Effect display device→Press order display device→Reel window frame lamp (16) Sound→Effect display device→Reel window frame lamp→Press order display device (17) Sound→Reel window frame lamp→Press order Display device→effect display device (18) sound→reel window frame lamp→effect display device→push order display device (19) reel window frame lamp→push order display device→effect display device→sound (20) reel window frame lamp→ Pressing order display device → Sound → Effect display device (21) Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Push order display device → Sound (22) Reel window frame lamp → Effect display device → Sound → Push order display device (23) Reel Window frame lamp→Voice→Press order display device→Effect display device (24) Reel window frame lamp→Voice→Effect display device→Press order display device It is possible to determine the timing at which the push order navigation ends as appropriate during the period of pressing → winning determination → completion of payout based on winning.

In addition, as one of the effect means controlled by the sub-control board S, it is controlled by the sub-control board S provided inside the stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43). An example of the order in which the push-order navigation including the push-order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 is completed will be described. As for the processing up to the end of the push order navigation by the stop button lamp S60, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the third stop button is turned off from on → main control board M sends a command related to the operation of the third stop button to the sub-control board S in the timer interrupt process → the sub-control board S receives the command → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the third stop button turns on. Lights out (starts to turn off). In addition, the main control board M detects that the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is turned off from on → the main control board M sends the first stop to the sub control board S side by timer interrupt processing. A command related to button operation is sent → the command is received by the sub-control board S → the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the first stop button is extinguished (begins extinguishing), and the light provided inside the second stop button is turned off. Then, the stop button lamp S60 is turned on (starts to be turned on).
(25) Pressing order display device→Effect display device→Sound→Reel window frame lamp→Stop button (the third stop button lamp is turned off)
(26) Pressing order display device→Effect display device→Reel window frame lamp→Sound→Stop button (the third stop button lamp is turned off)
It is possible to configure as follows. The timing of the termination of the push order navigation by the stop button D40 includes the push order display device D270, the effect display device S40, the voice, the reel, and the reel window frame lamp D310 that executes the push order navigation by turning on and off the lamp. It may be before or after the window frame lamp D310. Further, when the third stop button is operated, the light may be turned off by pressing the third stop button, or may be turned off by not pressing the third stop button.

As described above, in this example, one game progresses based on <<configuration for starting display of push order navigation>> and <<configuration for ending display of push order navigation>>. . A specific example of the flow of one game from the display (start of display) of the push-order navigation to the end of the push-order navigation is as follows.
1. Display of push order navigation (display start)
Start lever operation → Display of push order navigation (display start) (press order display device D270) → Push order navigation display (display start) (effect display device S40)
2. From operation of the first stop button to operation of the second stop button 2-1. Effect display device S40
Display (start of display) of the effect of disappearing the pressing order corresponding to the operation of the first stop button → End of display of the disappearing effect of the pressing order corresponding to the operation of the first stop button → Change the display mode of the second reel pressing order navigation → Display (start of display) of the effect of disappearing in the order of pressing corresponding to the operation of the second stop button (the display mode has been changed) → End of display of the effect of disappearing in the order of pressing corresponding to the operation of the second stop button → Third reel Change of display mode of push order navigation 2-2. Push order display device D270
The push order display device D270 is lit.
3. 3rd stop button operation ~ end of display of push order navigation 3rd stop button operation → push order display device extinguished → display of push order navigation disappearing effect corresponding to operation of 3rd stop button (display start) → 3rd stop button End of the display of the pressing order elimination effect corresponding to the operation In this way, the flow of one game proceeds. It should be noted that the example described above is only one example. The display (start of display) of the push order navigation may include the reel window frame lamp D310 and the sound output from the speaker S20. The order of displaying (starting to display) the navigation is not limited to this. In addition, 2. In the first stop button operation to the second stop button operation, the effect display device S40 displays (starts to display) the pressing order elimination effect corresponding to each stop button, and changes the display mode of the pressing order navigation corresponding to the next reel. The order of doing so is not limited to this. Also, 3. From the operation of the third stop button to the end of the display of the push order navigation, the order of the display of the push order navigation of the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is not limited to this. It may also be specified (the third stop button can be further classified by pressing the third stop button, not pressing the third stop button, etc.).

By configuring as in this example, the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the start timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 can be made different. It is possible to avoid a state in which the display devices must be visually recognized at the same time, and the player can reduce the game burden of being able to visually recognize the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. The end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is set for a predetermined period (3rd stop button operation (press) → 3rd stop button non-press → winning judgment → completion of payout based on winning) period), for example, by making the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 and the end timing of the push order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 different, two display devices can be used. This is a user-friendly feature that can reduce the burden on the player by visually recognizing the end of push-order navigation on individual display devices at the timing when push-order navigation occurs. Amusement machines can be provided.

<Display mode when pressing order is incorrect>
Here, in a game in which the push order navigation is performed, an example of the configuration of the display mode of the push order navigation when the game is executed with a different push order (or different operation timing) from the push order navigation will be described in detail. describe. Here, a case is exemplified in which the pressing order bell is won, and a game in which the correct pressing order is "left→middle→right" is executed.

In the situation where "123" is displayed as the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 and "=1" is displayed as the push order navigation on the push order display device D270, the middle stop button is displayed as the first stop operation. (The order of pressing the correct answer corresponds to the left stop button) is operated, and the sensor for detecting the operation of the first stop button is detected to be turned on from off as interrupt processing on the main control board M side → main control A command relating to the detection of the first stop button is transmitted from the board M side to the sub control board S side →the sub control board S side receives the command →the sub control board S side displays all "123" on the effect display device S40. Execute the process to erase.
It may be configured as described above. As described above, in a game in which push order navigation is executed, if a stop button that is not in the correct push order is operated, all reels (or stop buttons) are operated on the sub-control board S side. While erasing the push order navigation corresponding to , the display of the push order navigation is maintained on the main control board M side. Note that the push order navigation on the main control board M side (the push order navigation by the push order display device D270) is performed at the time of the third stop operation (for detecting the operation of the third stop button as interrupt processing on the main control board M side). It is configured to clear when the sensor detects a transition from ON to OFF).

<<Configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>>
Next, a configuration relating to reel stop control and display control (effect display device S40) of push order navigation will be described. It should be noted that, in the game, if the predetermined pressing order of the bell is won, and the stop operation in the order of "middle → left → right" is most advantageous to the player (the number of payouts is large) (for example, The case of winning the "won-award-A3") is exemplified.

<Configuration 1>
First, in the upper left diagram of FIG. 109, an instruction game relating to the pressing order bell is executed in the AT state, and "213" is displayed as pressing order navigation on the effect display device S40. The middle stop button is pressed at the timing when the 11th replay symbol is positioned in the middle row of the middle reel, and the display corresponding to the push order navigation "1" of the middle reel changes to the push order navigation elimination effect. Note that the middle reel stop button remains depressed. Further, the middle reels are controlled so as to stop the symbols constituting the combination of symbols to be paid out of 11 symbols, which is the maximum winning number, by performing the stop operation of the middle reels, which is the pressing order of the correct answer. In this example, the 15th bell is configured to stop at the middle stage (effective line) of the middle reel. That is, when the middle stop button is operated at this timing, the slide of the maximum number of frames (4 frames in this example) is generated from the 11th replay A, and the 15th bell is stopped and displayed on the winning line. control is performed to allow

Here, operation control of the stepping motor until the reel stops after the stop operation is performed will be described with reference to FIG. For example, at the timing when the reel stop operation is performed, the reel constant speed state (4) in FIG. In this reel deceleration standby state, the distance between the position where the stop operation was performed and the position of the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game is calculated, and a predetermined period (for example, within 190 ms) is calculated. By judging that it is possible to stop and display the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game in the winning line, the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the game is constituted. The rotation is continued so that the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, at the timing when the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the condition device won in the relevant game approach the winning line, the reel deceleration state of (6) is changed, and the reel stop state of (7) is controlled. do.

After that, as described in the upper right part of FIG. 109, in the effect display device S40, the push order navigation elimination effect of the middle reel is erased (the display ends), and the middle reel stops displaying the 15th bell on the winning line. to continue the slip control. Note that the middle stop button is being pressed. Next, as shown in the lower left part of FIG. 109, the effect display device S40 changes the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next. The display mode that changes at this time may be any mode as long as the player can recognize the stop button that should be operated to stop (change the numbers greatly, add movement to the numbers, make the numbers glow, etc.). ). On the other hand, the middle reel continues the sliding control in order to stop display the 15th bell on the winning line. Note that the middle reel stop button is being pressed. It should be noted that the timing of changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next may be before the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (end of display), or It may be after the navigation disappearing effect is erased (end of display), or may be at the same time as the push order navigation disappearing effect is erased (end of display).

After that, after the middle stop button is kept depressed for a predetermined period of time, the 15th bell of the middle reel is stop-displayed on the winning line. Here, the predetermined time is the time (for example, 190 ms) during which the maximum slippage control of the middle reel is performed. In this way, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation, before the reel on which the stop operation was performed is stopped (before the next stop button operation becomes effective), the stop operation It is possible to erase the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the operation has been performed and change the display mode of the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next.

Here, as an example that can be implemented in this example, the case where the stop operation is performed at the position where the slip of the maximum number of frames occurs has been described. When the stop operation is performed at the position, the timing of changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next is after the reel is stopped and displayed. Note that even in the case of 0 frames, the pressing order navigation corresponding to the reel on which the next stop operation should be performed is highlighted before the timing at which the next stop button operation becomes effective. configured to change. With this configuration, even when the reel is 0, the stop button is operated after recognizing the reel to be stopped next, and the player stops in the wrong pressing order. can be prevented. In addition, it is preferable that the timing of changing the display mode to highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the reel to be stopped next is earlier. is preferred.

Also, in this example, the push order bell was explained as an example, but it is applicable not only to push order bells but also to all condition devices that generate push order navigation. Also, lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310 or sound output from the speaker S20 may be used as a means of effecting notification of the pressing order. For example, if the pressing order navigation using the sound output from the reel window frame lamp D310 or the speaker S20 is included, the effect display device S40 changes the display mode of the pressing order navigation corresponding to the next reel. (if it is a reel window frame lamp D310, the lamp corresponding to the next reel is lit, and if it is a voice, the dialogue corresponding to the next reel is output as a voice). It is configurable.

Further, in this example, as a configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>>, the push order navigation by the effect display device S40 as an effect means for executing the push order navigation has been described as an example. For example, the reel window frame lamp D310, the sound, and the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) may be configured to include push order navigation. good. The pressing order navigation by the reel window frame lamp D310 is executed by turning on (blinking) and turning off the reel window frame lamp, and the pressing order navigation by voice is "left", "right", "middle" from the speaker S20. The pressing order navigation by the stop button lamp S60 provided inside the stop button D40 (the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, the right stop button D43) is performed by outputting the left stop button corresponding to the reel. This is executed by turning on (blinking) and turning off D41.

For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> includes reel window frame lamp D310, voice, stop button D40 (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43 ), if configured with
(1) Reel window frame lamp D310
(1-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (1-2) Lighting the lamp corresponding to the reel to be stopped next (2) Sound (2-1) Next Output of sound corresponding to the reel to be stopped (3) Stop button D40
(3-1) Turning off the lamp corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation was performed (3-2) Turning on the lamp corresponding to the reel to be stopped next (4) Effect display device S40
(4-1) Display (end of display) the effect of disappearing push order corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation has been performed (4-2) Highlight the push order navigation corresponding to the next reel to be stopped. Change in display mode As described above, the configuration related to the push order navigation for each effect means can be defined. The execution order of these configurations (1-1) to (4-2) may be determined in any order. For example, the order of execution may be determined for each effect means (for example, processing is performed in the order of reel window frame lamp → sound → stop button → effect display device), or the order of execution may be determined for each reel. Alternatively, (for example, the processing is performed in the order of the reel on which the stop operation has been performed→the processing regarding the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next), or these may be combined.

Also, <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example has been described with reference to FIG. 109, and in FIG. , the configuration to which this example can be applied is not limited to the first stop operation. For example, it is applicable even when the second stop operation is performed or when the third stop operation is performed. At the time of the third stop operation, the process corresponding to the reel on which the stop operation is to be performed next (for example, the change to the "display mode highlighting the push order navigation" in the effect display device S40, the reel window frame lamp, etc.) The process of "lighting of the lamp corresponding to the reel to be stopped next") in D310 is not executed.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even when the reel corresponding to the stop button executes the stop control with the slippage of the maximum number of frames, the effect display device S40 End of the push order navigation display corresponding to the stop button (from the start to the end of display of the disappearance effect), and change in the display mode of the push order navigation display corresponding to the next stop button to be stopped (start of highlighting) can be executed before the next operation of the stop button becomes effective, preventing the player from erroneously operating the stop button before recognizing the stop button to be operated next. .

<<<<Third Embodiment: Medal Addition Processing by Insertion Sensor>>>>
Next, as a third embodiment, the timing of processing for adding the game medals inserted into the medal slot D170 as credits will be described (see FIG. 113). The game medals inserted from the medal slot D170 pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medals, and meet a predetermined passage condition (the passing game medals satisfy the standard, is not determined to be an error), the game medals flow downward through the medal flow path DR in the medal selector DS without generating an error. A first insertion sensor D20s and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided further behind the insertion reception sensor D10s, and game medals that meet the size standards and are accepted are detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. When it is determined that the game medals have been inserted normally when passing through, the inserted game medals are detected as bet medals, and credits can be added. When the game medal passes, the insertion of the game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, and the signal (information on the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, the first insertion sensor D20s information on the time from turning on to turning off, information on timing when the second insertion sensor D30s turned on, information on time from turning on to turning off the second insertion sensor D30s, etc.) It is designed to be supplied to the main control board M. Here, the timing at which credit addition can be performed can be determined according to the on/off state of each of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<<Third Embodiment: Timing Chart for Detecting Game Medals by Insertion Sensor>>>
FIG. 110 is a timing chart when game medals pass through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects passage of game medals (OFF→ON) at timing 1 in the figure. Next, assume that the second insertion sensor D30s detects passage of game medals (OFF→ON) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information and the like relating to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the aforementioned signals. Next, assume that the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting the game medals (ON→OFF) at timing 3 in the figure. Here, the time A from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects the game medal to when the detection of the game medal is completed is calculated by the main control board M, and A is within a predetermined range (in the third embodiment, 4 ms≦A<183 ms), it is determined that passage of game medals is normally detected. In addition, the time B from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects the game medal to when the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting is calculated by the main control board M, and B is within a predetermined range (2 ms≦B< If it is 115 ms), it is determined that the passage of game medals is normally detected. After that, it is assumed that the second insertion sensor D30s ends the detection of the game medals (ON→OFF) at the timing of 4 in the figure. A time C from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects a game medal to when the second insertion sensor D30s finishes detection is calculated by the main control board M, and C is within a predetermined range (4ms≦C<183ms). If so, it is determined that passage of game medals is detected normally. In this manner, at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off, it is determined whether the game medals are normally passing through the medal selector DS. A game medal inserted at any timing when D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned on or off is detected as a bet medal, and credits are added.

<<<An example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor of the third embodiment>>>
<<Configuration 1>>
Next, in the third embodiment, an example of the timing at which inserted game medals are detected as bet medals and credits are added will be described in detail. 111 and 112 are flow charts reflecting the processing at the credit addition timing in the third embodiment in the game progress control processing related to the subroutine of step 1200. FIG. FIG. 113 is an image diagram of the timing at which credit addition is performed when the inserting process is normally executed for the inserted game medals. In the flow chart of FIG. 111, descriptions of the same contents as in FIG. 17 are omitted (steps 1220 to 1225 and steps 1232 and after). First, in FIG. 111, at step 1226-1 (fourth), the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226-1 (fourth), in step 1226-2 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is off. (image diagram in the upper middle row of FIG. 113, the first insertion sensor D20s turns from off to on at the timing when the game medal approaches the first insertion sensor D20s). If Yes in step 1226-2 (fourth), in step 1226-3 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks whether the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are on. Judgment (image diagram in the upper right part of FIG. 113, the second insertion sensor D30s turns from off to on at the timing when the game medal approaches the second insertion sensor D30s). If Yes in step 1226-3 (fourth), in step 1226-6 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M checks whether the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on. Judgment (image diagram in the lower left of FIG. 113, the first insertion sensor D20s turns from ON to OFF at the timing when the game medal exceeds the detection range of the first insertion sensor D20s). In the case of Yes in step 1226-6 (fourth), in step 1226-8 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that one normal gaming medal has been inserted, and the credit addition process is completed. done. Further, in step 1226-9 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is off (image diagram in the middle and lower part of FIG. 113). When the medal exceeds the detection range of the second insertion sensor D30s, the second insertion sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF). If Yes in step 1226-9 (fourth), it is determined that one normal game medal has been inserted. , etc., and the process proceeds to step 1232 .

<Effect 1>
In the third embodiment, an example has been described in which the credit addition process is executed at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off and the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on. Conventionally, credit addition processing was executed at the timing of "the first insertion sensor D20s is OFF and the second insertion sensor D30s is ON → the first insertion sensor D20s is OFF and the second insertion sensor D30s is OFF". However, by configuring as in the third embodiment, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but an error occurs at this timing. If this happens, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and execution processing of predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D100 and paying out the game medals to the ejection port D240 by the blocker D100) is executed. It is possible to prevent the game medals from entering (swallowing) into the gaming machine in spite of the fact that the credit addition process is not executed in time.

<Effect 2>
Also, since the credit addition process is not executed at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s remains off and only the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on, the position closer to the medal insertion slot 170 than the second insertion sensor D30s is. It is possible to prevent cheating (for example, cremangoto) by the first insertion sensor D20s provided in the device, to provide a game machine resistant to fraud, and furthermore to provide a user-friendly game machine.

<<<Third Embodiment Subroutine due to input sensor error>>>
If No in step 1226-3 (fourth), step 1226-6 (fourth), step 1226-9 (fourth), step 1226-4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth) , step 1226-10 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined medal insertion error generation condition is satisfied. Note that the medal insertion error here includes, for example, an inserted medal reverse flow error, an inserted medal error, an inserted medal retention error, etc., and the ON/OFF status (including time) of sensors such as the first inserted sensor and the second inserted sensor. (Occurrence conditions differ depending on the type of error). These errors are detected, for example, based on ON/OFF detection of the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s in FIG. If Yes in any of step 1226-4 (fourth), step 1226-7 (fourth), and step 1226-10 (fourth), medal insertion error processing is executed in step 1226-5 (fourth). be done. FIG. 112 is a flowchart relating to a subroutine when a medal insertion error occurs. First, at step 1226-12 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M detects which error flag is on, and at step 1226-13 (fourth), an error detection command (to the sub side and a command indicating that an error has been detected) is set (for example, set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1226-14 (fourth). 1226-13 (fourth) is configured to transmit information related to an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to an error flag that is on to the sub control board side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the It is not necessary to execute information set processing. Error processing is executed according to the type of error that has occurred, but the error detection command may execute set processing only when any error occurs from a state where no error has occurred. , even if the set process is executed when the type of error changes from the first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) to the second error (for example, paid-out medal retention error). good. At step 1226-14 (fourth), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the currently occurring error has been cleared. If it is determined that the error has been cleared, the currently occurring error flag is turned off at step 1226-15, and the subroutine ends. As described above, an example of error detection based on detection of game medals by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s has been described. It is also possible to detect an error based on detection of game medals by the insertion reception sensor D10s provided nearby, and an example of error detection based on detection of game medals by the insertion reception sensor D10s will be described below. .

<<<Third Embodiment Error Detection Based on Input Monitoring Counter>>>
<<Configuration 2>>
An insertion receiving sensor D10s is provided as a first sensor through which game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass. The insertion reception sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on the size and accepting only the game medals conforming to the standard dimensions. The medals (or other foreign objects) that have been dropped are configured to be paid back to the ejection port D240 by the blocker D100. At this time, when it is determined that a matching game medal has passed, the insertion acceptance sensor D10s is turned on from off, and the signal is supplied to the main control board M. The main control board M performs addition processing from 0 to 1 in a counter that counts the passage of game medals (hereinafter referred to as an insertion monitoring counter) when receiving a signal that the insertion reception sensor D10s is turned on. Then, the main control board M monitors insertion at the timing (corresponding to timing 4 in FIG. 110) when the game medals flow down the path in the medal selector DS and, for example, the second insertion sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF. The counter performs subtraction processing from 1 to 0. At this time, for example, in the period from 1 to 4 in the timing chart of FIG. 110, if some kind of problem occurs regarding the insertion of game medals, the game medal count processing of the insertion monitoring counter is not performed normally. . For example, if the second insertion sensor D30s does not change from ON to OFF, the insertion monitoring counter is not decremented, and the insertion monitoring counter continues to be incremented, an inserted medal retention error can be detected. Further, when the second input sensor D30s turns off before the input reception sensor D10s and the subtraction process of the input monitoring counter is performed first, the input monitoring counter becomes negative. It is possible to detect inserted medal backflow errors.

<effect>
In this way, by configuring so that an error can be determined based on the detection of the game medals by the three sensors of the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the insertion reception sensor D10s, it is possible to determine whether the game medals are inserted. Various errors can be reliably detected, a game machine resistant to fraud can be provided, and a user-friendly game machine can be provided.

<<<Third Embodiment Output of medal insertion sound>>>
In the third embodiment, the output timing of the medal insertion sound that is output after the inserted game medals are detected as bet medals will be described in detail. In the third embodiment, an example of executing the credit addition process at the timing when the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on has been described. An error may occur while the sensor D30s is on (for example, an inserted medal retention error due to an abnormally long ON time of the second inserted sensor D30s). In the third embodiment, since the credit addition process is performed at the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off and the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, for example, an error may occur after the credit addition process is executed. be. In the third embodiment, the output timing of the coin insertion sound output after the credit addition process and the error sound output from the speaker S20 upon error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s will be described.

<<Configuration 3>>
First, as timing A, the medal insertion sound is output prior to the error sound output from the speaker S20 upon error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. Specifically, according to the timing chart of FIG. 110, subtracting 115 ms, which is the upper limit of the period of C, from 183 ms, which is the upper limit of the period of C, gives 68 ms. In other words, during this period, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M "receives medal insertion → sets a command related to reception of medal insertion → transmits the command to the sub-control board side → sets an error detection command (if there is an error)". By executing the processing as described above, it is possible to output the medal insertion sound before the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s.

<<Configuration 4>>
As a modified example of timing A, the timing of credit addition processing may be varied. In other words, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M processes as follows: ``set a command relating to reception of medal insertion→execute credit addition processing→send a command to the sub-control board side→set an error detection command (if there is an error)”. may be performed.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, at the timing when "the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on and the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on → the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off and the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on", the reception of medal insertion is performed. After such processing is executed, a command relating to token insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side by the subsequent timer interrupt processing, and the sub control board S side outputs a token insertion sound. . On the other hand, if the above-described situation of "the first inserted sensor D20s is off and the second inserted sensor D30s is on" continues and the inserted medal retention error occurs, the inserted medals are detected after the medal insertion sound has already been output. In order to determine that a retention error has occurred (because the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on for a predetermined time or longer), the player outputs an error sound related to the insertion medal retention error. The sound of inserting medals can be confirmed in advance, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game medals are not properly inserted due to the accumulated error of inserted medals and the game medals are lost.

<<Configuration 5>>
Next, at timing B, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more of time from when the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected in the second input sensor D30s. , so as not to transmit the command related to medal insertion acceptance to the sub-control board side. After that, after setting an error detection command based on error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s, a command relating to receipt of medal insertion is transmitted to the sub control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M executes credit addition processing→detects an error flag→sets an error detection command→sends an error detection command to the sub control board side→sets a command related to medal insertion→sub control A command relating to reception of medal insertion is transmitted to the board side", so that the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to the error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s. can be output. At this time, it is preferable that the timing for transmitting the command related to medal insertion reception to the sub-side is configured to transmit at the time of timer interrupt, which is different from the timing for transmitting the error detection command.

<<Configuration 6>>
As a modified example of timing B, the timing of credit addition processing may be varied. That is, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M detects an error flag→sets an error detection command→sends an error detection command to the sub control board side→sets a command related to reception of medal insertion→executes credit addition processing→sub control A command relating to receipt of medal insertion may be transmitted to the board side.

<effect>
With this configuration, at the timing of "the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on", the medals are first inserted. It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. is transmitted, and an error sound related to an inserted medal retention error is output. After that, after the processing related to medal insertion reception is executed, a command related to medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side outputs a medal insertion sound. becomes. If the state of "the first inserted sensor D20s is off and the second inserted sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, the inserted medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. (because the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), the player should check the error related to the inserted medal retention error before the medal insertion sound is output. The sound can be confirmed, and the player can quickly perceive that game medals have not been properly inserted.

<<Configuration 7>>
Next, at timing C, the medal insertion sound is output after the error sound output from the speaker S20 due to error detection by the second insertion sensor D30s and after the error is cancelled. It is determined that there is at least 67 ms or more of time from when the credit addition process is performed until an error is detected by the second insertion sensor D30s. It is the same as the second timing that the command related to medal insertion acceptance is not transmitted to the sub control board side. Secondly, it is configured to transmit a command related to reception of coin insertion to the sub control board side. That is, the CPU 100 of the main control board M "executes credit addition processing→detects an error flag→sets an error detection command→sends an error detection command to the sub control board side→... (error release processing during this time).・・・→ Set the error undetected command → Send the error undetected command to the sub control board side → Set the command related to medal insertion reception → Send the medal insertion reception command to the sub control board side. It is possible to output the medal insertion sound after canceling the error by configuring to execute.

<<Configuration 8>>
As a modified example of timing C, the timing of credit addition processing may be varied. That is, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M detects an error flag → sets an error detection command → transmits an error detection command to the sub control board side → (error cancellation processing during this time) → error not detected Set a command → Send an error undetected command to the sub control board side → Set a command related to medal insertion reception → Execute credit addition processing → Send a command related to medal insertion reception to the sub control board side. good too.

<effect>
With this configuration, at the timing of "the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on → the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on", the medals are first inserted. It is determined that a retention error has occurred (because the state where the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or longer), and an error detection command is sent from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. is transmitted, and an error sound related to an inserted medal retention error is output. After the error is eliminated, an error undetected command is transmitted to the sub side, and the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error is terminated. Then, after the processing related to medal insertion reception is executed, a command related to medal insertion reception is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S side outputs a medal insertion sound. becomes. If the state of "the first inserted sensor D20s is off and the second inserted sensor D30s is on" continues and an inserted medal retention error occurs, the inserted medal retention error occurs before the medal insertion sound is output. (because the state in which the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on continues for a predetermined time or more), and the error is resolved and the output of the error sound is terminated. Since the player can confirm the error sound related to the inserted medal retention error before the medal insertion sound is output, and can confirm the medal insertion sound after the error is resolved, the player can confirm the medal insertion sound normally after the error is resolved. It can be recognized that game medals have been inserted.

<<<Third Embodiment Medal Error Detection by Shoot Sensor>>>
Next, error detection using the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail as a third embodiment. FIG. 114 shows the channel member (referred to as the chute main body in the third embodiment) of the medals after passing the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s on the path of the game medals in the medal selector DS. It is a diagram. In FIG. 114, a shoot sensor D40s is provided below the first throw sensor D20s and the second throw sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s, like the first throw sensor D20s and the second throw sensor D30s, is a normal medal throw. In particular, in the third embodiment, an error caused after the credit addition process has already been executed (for example, inserted medal retention error, inserted medal reverse flow error, etc.) can be detected. ing.

Error detection by the shoot sensor D40s will be described in detail. For example, let us consider a case where game medals are accumulated further downstream of the chute sensor D40s in the chute main body communicating with the hopper H40. The width of the path of the game medals in the chute main body is approximately the width of one game medal, and when one game medal stays in the path of the game medals in the chute main body, the game medals that pass through the path after that are one after another. This results in an inserted medal retention error. In the third embodiment, the position where the shoot sensor D40s detects three game medals from the position where the game medals are stuck is the position where the shoot sensor D40s is provided is not limited to this.

The detection of game medals by the shoot sensor D40s is similar to the detection of game medals by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. is turned on, information on the time from when the shoot sensor D40s is turned on until it is turned off, etc.) is supplied to the main control board M. The main control board M determines whether the game medals have been inserted normally based on the information on the signal detected by the shoot sensor D40s and the information on the signal detected by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. I judge. Specifically, the main control board M controls the period from the timing when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s starts detecting game medals to the timing when the shoot sensor D40s starts detecting game medals, It is compared with a predetermined period (time to be detected by the shoot sensor D40s, hereinafter also referred to as theoretical period). For example, in the case of detecting the fourth game medal in FIG. 114, the fourth game medal is detected from the timing when the fourth game medal is detected by the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s. is detected by the shoot sensor D40s with the theoretical period, and if the difference in the period exceeds the range that is not detected as an error, an error (shoot sensor medal in the third embodiment Dwell error) will be detected. The timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s detects game medals, the timing at which the second insertion sensor D30s starts detecting game medals, or the timing at which the first insertion sensor D20s finishes detecting game medals, the second insertion sensor Either of the timings at which the D30s finishes detecting game medals may be set as the start timing of the theoretical period.

<<Third Embodiment: Timing Chart of Detecting Game Medals by Shoot Sensor>>
FIG. 115 is a timing chart when game medals pass through the first insertion sensor D20s, the second insertion sensor D30s, and the shoot sensor D40s. For example, it is assumed that the first insertion sensor D20s detects passage of game medals (OFF→ON) at timing 1 in the figure. Next, assume that the second insertion sensor D30s detects passage of game medals (OFF→ON) at timing 2 in the figure. Time information and the like relating to these timings are supplied to the main control board M as the aforementioned signals. After that, suppose that the shoot sensor D40s detects the passage of the game medal (OFF→ON) at the timing of 3 in the figure. A period D from when the first insertion sensor D20s detects game medals to when the shoot sensor D40s starts detecting, and a period from when the second insertion sensor D30s detects game medals to when the shoot sensor D40s starts detecting. E is calculated by the main control board M, and using these periods as theoretical periods, it is determined whether or not the game medals are normally passing through the shoot main body based on the detection of the shoot sensor D40s. Also, the provision of the shoot sensor D40s makes it possible to detect an error that may occur after it is determined that the game medals have passed through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s normally.

<effect>
By constructing in this way, for example, some kind of error related to the passage of game medals in the vicinity of the shoot sensor D40s (shot sensor medal retention error) is detected, and the occurrence of the error is notified to the player. becomes possible. In addition, the normal passage of game medals by the shoot sensor D40s is determined based on information relating to the timing at which detection of the game medals by the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s is started. Although the passage of game medals is not detected by the sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, when the passage of the game medals is detected by the shoot sensor D40s, in other words, an error related to the reverse flow of inserted medals can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud and, in turn, a user-friendly gaming machine.

<<<<Fourth Embodiment Medal Return Member>>>>
Next, as a fourth embodiment, an example of the mechanism of the medal returning member D340 through which the game medals pass when the game medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray D230 or returned to the medal receiving tray D230 will be described. .

First, FIGS. 116 to 119 for explaining in detail the medal returning member D340 according to the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 viewed from the direction in which the medal reception opening D341 (described later) is provided. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving opening D341 (described later), and flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230. FIG. 119 depicts the trajectory of game medals inside the side view of FIG.

<<<Front view of fourth embodiment medal return member>>>
FIG. 116 is a front view of the medal return member D340 in the fourth embodiment. As an example of the medal return member D340, game medals (blocker off state) for which addition processing to the bet or credit has not been executed by the medal selector DS that detects medals inserted from the medal slot D170 and performs simple authentication When returning the game medals to the medal receiving tray D230, the game medals pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as the first flow path) and are dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40. The game medals received pass through a predetermined flow path (hereinafter referred to as a second flow path), and are finally paid out to the medal receiving tray D230.

The medal returning member D340 has a first passage through which the improper game medals detected by the medal selector DS are returned to the medal receiving tray D230, and the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass through. The game medals passing through the two flow paths pass through the medal return member D340 and join together when flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230. It is configured.

The second flow path in the medal returning member D340 includes at least a medal receiving port D341 for receiving game medals dispensed from the hopper H40 and a medal drop surface D342 for dropping the game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40. is configured to have Further, a medal non-falling surface D343 positioned facing the medal dropping surface D342, a wall surface provided with a medal receiving opening, and a medal dropping surface D342 onto which game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 fall. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 pass through this space.

The medal reception port D341 is configured to communicate with the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40. Further, since the medal receiving opening D341 is open, the game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 can surely pass through the medal receiving opening D341. In particular, in the fourth embodiment, the periphery of the opening of the medal receiving slot D341 is referred to as the edge (for example, in the fourth embodiment, the outer peripheral part of the shape of the opening of the medal receiving slot D341 is referred to as the edge). ). In defining the length and distance of the medal receiving opening D341, any position corresponding to the edge of the medal receiving opening D341 is taken as a starting point.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the shape of the medal drop surface D342 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and the medal non-fall surface D343 positioned facing the medal drop surface D342 is also formed in a substantially rectangular shape. However, the shape of the medal drop surface D342 and the medal non-drop surface D343 is not limited to this.

In the fourth embodiment, the medal receiving opening D341 is provided in a downward-sloping shape, and the game medals that collide with a collision portion (not shown) provided in the front view direction of FIG. 116 drop. It is configured to incline substantially parallel to the medal drop surface D342. With this configuration, the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and dropped onto the medal drop surface D342 slide down from the medal drop surface D342 due to gravity, and the game medals are surely guided to the medal receiving tray D230. It becomes possible to The direction in which the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal dropping surface D342 are inclined is not limited to this direction, and the medal receiving opening D341 and the medal dropping surface D342 may be configured so as not to be inclined. Inappropriate medals detected by the medal selector DS are configured to drop toward the medal receiving tray D230 from above as seen from the player in a direction perpendicular to the inclination direction of the medal receiving opening D341. .

<<<Fourth Embodiment Side View of Medal Returning Member Trajectory Diagram (Perspective View) of Downstream of Game Medals>>>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the dimensional regulation in the configuration of the medal receiving member of the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 117 is a side view of the medal return member D340 viewed from the direction in which the medal reception opening D341 is provided. First, in game medals, the thickness and diameter are defined as a and b, respectively (see FIG. 116). The thickness a of the game medal is preferably about 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm, and the diameter b of the game medal is preferably about 24.5 mm to 25.5 mm. be.

Next, after being paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40, the distance from the medal drop surface D342 where the game medals fall to the edge of the medal reception port D341 is c, and the distance is perpendicular to the medal non-drop surface D343. The longest distance from the medal non-falling surface D342 to the edge of the medal receiving opening in the direction is d, and at the edge of the opening of the medal receiving opening D341, at least one direction (for example, the first In the fourth embodiment, the height of the opening of the medal receiving port D341, which has a substantially rectangular shape, is defined as e, and the maximum length of the medal dropping surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341. Define the length as f respectively. In the fourth embodiment, predetermined conditions are provided for the dimensions defined in this way. For example, the medal return member D340 is configured based on the following conditions:
c≧a Formula (1)
b>d Expression (2)
f≧2b Expression (3)
b>e Expression (4)
In the fourth embodiment, game medals of either 25Φ size or 30Φ size can be applied.

First, by satisfying the equations (1) and (3), it is possible to prevent the collision between the first game medal and the second game medal. The distance from the medal drop surface D342 to the bottom side of the medal reception opening 341 is configured to be larger than the thickness a of the game medals, and the game medals paid out from the medal dispensing device H are pushed from the medal reception opening D341 to the collision part. Since there is a sufficient distance until the game medal collides, the weight of the game medal causes free fall. state), it is out of the area through which the game medals dispensed next from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 pass, so collision can be prevented.

Next, by satisfying the expression (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 (regardless of whether the game medal is lying down or standing), and then The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 do not clog the medal receiving opening D341. is.

Next, by satisfying the formula (3), the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal. It is possible to prevent the game medals from rebounding to the medal reception opening D341.

By stipulating the dimensions in the configuration of the medal return member D340 as shown in the formulas (1) to (4), smooth payout of game medals from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and smooth gaming medals can be achieved. It becomes possible to guide to the tray D230. FIG. 118 is a trajectory diagram of game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving opening D341, and flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230. For example, as an effect of regulating the dimensions of formulas (1) to (4), the first game medal paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 and the second game medal paid out after that The medals do not collide with each other, and the game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 do not block the medal receiving opening D341.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 117, in this example, the outer periphery of the medal receiving opening D341 on the outside side of the medal returning member D340 is configured to be provided with a protruding edge portion. A protruding edge may be provided on the entire outer periphery of the medal receiving slot D341. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H to flow back into the medal receiving opening D341 after colliding with the collision part.

<<<Fourth Embodiment Trajectory Diagram (Side View) of Flowing Game Medals>>>
In FIG. 118, the trajectory of game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40, passing through the medal receiving opening D341, and flowing down toward the medal receiving tray D230 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 depicts the trajectory of game medals inside the side view of FIG. First, as shown in the upper left figure, the first game medal is released from the medal receiving slot D341. Next, as shown in the upper right diagram, the second game medal is ejected from the medal receiving slot D341 in the same manner as the first game medal, and the first game medal is prepared in the front view direction of FIG. It hits a built-in impingement part (not shown). The interval between the release of the first game medal from the medal receiving slot D341 and the release of the second game medal can be determined by the rotational speed of the disc H50 of the medal payout device H. The rotation speed can be determined arbitrarily. The second game medal is paid out from the payout device H. The timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is (1) substantially at the same time as the first game medal collides with the collision part, ( 2) the timing before (immediately before) the first game medal collides with the collision part; and (3) the timing after the first game medal collides with the collision part. The distance f (see FIG. 117) may be adjusted in accordance with the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H. Regarding the above (2), after the first game medal is dispensed from the medal dispensing device H and passes through the medal receiving opening D341, the diameter of the game medal (above b) or more advances in the horizontal direction ( It is preferred that the timing be after it has been fired). Also, the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is the timing when the time has elapsed since the first game medal was paid out from the medal payout device H, the more one medal is given. It is possible to reduce the possibility of collision between the first game medal and the second game medal. On the other hand, if the time after the first game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H is too long, the interval between the game medal payout times becomes too long, and the tempo at which the game medals are paid out becomes too long. It gets worse. In addition, since the internal size (depth) of the housing of the game machine is limited, the f (maximum length of the medal drop surface D342 in the direction perpendicular to the opening surface of the medal receiving port D341) is also predetermined. It is difficult to guarantee more than the distance. For the above reasons, it is most preferable to set the timing at which the second game medal is paid out from the medal payout device H immediately after the first game medal collides with the collision portion. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the first game medal from colliding with the second game medal after colliding with the collision part. It should be noted that it is desirable that game medals to be paid out after the third game medal do not collide with each other. It is preferable to configure the game medals so as not to collide with each other. Although the medals do not collide in the first and second payouts, even if the medals collide in the second and third payouts, they are paid out into the return member D340. It is possible to create an effect that game medals are less likely to be clogged. This means that in the gaming machine, the frequency of paying out 2 coins is higher than that of paying out 3 coins. In addition, in order to increase the durability of the medal return member D340 against the collision of game medals, the collision part may be protected by, for example, metal.

Next, as shown in the lower left row, after the first game medal collides with the collision part, it falls on the medal drop surface D342. The second game medal passes above the first game medal and heads toward the collision part in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, it is possible to prevent the first game medal and the second game medal from colliding with each other due to the configuration of the formula (1). Next, as shown in the lower right, the first game medal dropped onto the medal drop surface D342 is inclined in the direction of inclination of the medal drop surface D342 due to gravity, and drops from the medal drop surface D342 onto the medal receiving tray D230. and is induced. After colliding with the collision part, the second game medal drops onto the medal drop surface D342 in the same manner as the first game medal. At this time, since the first game medal is configured to be inclined by gravity in the direction of inclination of the medal drop surface D342, the first game medal and the second game medal collide with each other. It is possible to prevent backflow in which medals that have collided with the collision part and bounced back enter the opening of the medal reception port D341.

<<Effect 1>>
The second game medal is discharged from the medal receiving opening D341 toward the collision part, and the first game medal falls on the medal drop surface D342 after colliding with the collision part. At this time, it is constructed so as to satisfy the equations (1) and (3), in other words, the distance from the medal drop surface D342 to the bottom of the medal reception opening 341 is made larger than the thickness a of the game medals. In addition, the game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H have a sufficient distance from the medal receiving opening D341 until they collide with the collision part, so that the game medals fall freely under the weight of the game medals. , when the game medal that has collided with the collision part falls on the medal drop surface D342 (the game medal is lying down), the game medal next paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 is out of the area through which it passes. Therefore, collision can be prevented.

<<Effect 2>>
For example, by being configured as shown in formulas (2) and (4), it is possible to prevent backflow in which the medals that have collided with the collision part and bounced back enter the opening of the medal receiving slot D341. can be provided.

<<Effect 3>>
For example, by being configured as shown in formula (3), the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the collision part is collided with the collision part. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of preventing a situation in which the second game medal bounces back to the medal receiving slot D341.

<<Effect 4>>
The first game medal dropped onto the medal drop surface D342 drops from the medal drop surface D342 and flows down toward the medal receiving tray D230, and the second game medal is shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. , the game medal drops onto the medal drop surface D342 at approximately the same position as the position where the first game medal dropped. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40 from being put out to the medal receiving tray D230 due to staying near the medal receiving port D341. Amusement machines can be provided.

<<Effect 5>>
To provide a game machine capable of preventing breakage and deterioration of a medal return member D340 because it has a shock absorbing material at a collision part where game medals paid out from a medal payout device H at high speed collide with each other. can do.

<<Effect 6>>
The game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H of the hopper H40 once collide with the collision part and lose the initial momentum of dispensation, resulting in a collision between the game medals (the game medals returned from the medal selector DS and the hopper H40 Collision with the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H, or collision between the game medals paid out from the medal payout device H of the hopper H40) occurs, and the game medals flow down to the medal receiving tray D230 not rhythmically. A user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

Note that the collision portion where the game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H collide may be a part of the front door DU, a part of the medal return member D340, or a separate collision portion. It may be attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340 as a body member.

Further, in this example, the collision portion where the game medals dispensed from the medal dispensing device H collide has a planar shape substantially perpendicular to the medal dropping surface D342. It is sufficient that the game medals collide and flow down toward the medal receiving tray D230. Alternatively, any surface or portion of the medal return member D340 may be curved to play the same role as the collision part. Further, as described above, only the collision part may be configured as a separate member attached to the front door DU or the medal return member D340, and the collision part may be configured to have a curved shape.

<<<< Fifth Embodiment Drive Control of Medal Dispensing Device>>>>
<<<Fifth Embodiment Timing Chart of Driving Control of Medal Dispensing Device>>>
Next, drive control of the medal payout device H will be described as a fifth embodiment. First, operation control of the medal payout device H will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a hopper motor H80 driven when game medals are paid out from the medal payout device H, and a timing chart relating to detection by the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2. Details of the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 will be described later. The sensor H20s→the first payout sensor H1, and at the initial position where game medals are not paid out (the initial position when the disc is not rotating), the first payout sensor H1 is ON and the second payout sensor H2 is OFF. It's becoming First, in the hopper motor H80, it is assumed that the hopper drive flag is ON while the hopper motor H80 is being driven. When the game medals are paid out by the medal payout device H, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disc H50 around the disc rotating shaft H50a, and the game medals in the medal payout device H are released by the release urging means H70. is displaced to flow down from the game medal outlet H60 toward the ejection port D240, thereby distributing the game medals. In the fifth embodiment, the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 are detected to be on or off based on the displacement of the ejection urging means H70, for example. Specifically, at timing 1 in the figure, the first payout sensor H1 is turned on in a state where the release urging means H70 has not been displaced to the position where the game medals are paid out (referred to as the initial position in the fifth embodiment). A signal indicating the state of is transmitted to the main control board M. Then, the release urging means H70 starts to be displaced to the position where the game medals are paid out, and when the release urging means H70 starts moving from the initial position, the main control outputs a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the OFF state. It is transmitted to the substrate M (the first payout sensor H1 turns from ON to OFF). A signal indicating that the second payout sensor H2 is in the ON state by displacing the release urging means H70 to a position (referred to as a payout position in the fifth embodiment) at which game medals are paid out at timing 2 in the figure. is sent to the main control board M (the second payout sensor H2 turns from off to on). At the timing of 3 in the figure, the payout of the game medals is completed, and the release urging means H70 starts to move back to the initial position. It is transmitted to the board M (the second payout sensor H2 turns from ON to OFF). Then, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the release urging means H70 is displaced to the initial position again, and a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the ON state is transmitted to the main control board M (the first payout sensor H1 turns from off to on). In the fifth embodiment, for example, the period from timing 1 to timing 2 is within a predetermined range A (A<26 ms), and the period from timing 2 to timing 3 is within a predetermined range B (9 ms≦ B<60 ms), and the period from the timing of 3 to the timing of 4 is within a predetermined range C (9 ms≦C<60). game medals are paid out.

<<< Fifth Embodiment Medal Dispensing Device ~ Stop of Medal Dispensing Device >>>
<<Configuration>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a series of flows from the start of medal payout by the medal payout device H of the fifth embodiment to the stop of the medal payout device H will be described. First, referring to FIG. 121, in the fifth embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation of a series of flows from the payout of game medals to the stop of the medal payout device H, medals unnecessary for the configuration of the fifth embodiment are provided. The configuration related to the dispensing device H is eliminated as much as possible. FIG. 121 is a front view of the disk H50 that is rotationally driven when paying out game medals.

In the fifth embodiment, the number of game medals to be paid out from the medal payout device H is five. The disc H50 has a plurality of circular cavities larger in size than the game medals. The disc H50 is configured to cover the game medals. By moving, game medals are paid out from the ejection port D240. First, in the upper left diagram, the hopper motor H80 is not yet driven, and the first payout sensor H1 is on. In the fifth embodiment, this state is the initial position of the release urging means H70, and for clarity of explanation, the initial position (disk H50) before rotation of the disk H50 is provided on the outer circumference of the disk H50. do. This initial position (disk H50) is displaced in the rotational direction of disk H50 each time game medals are paid out. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the driving state of the hopper motor H80 is the constant speed state, and the timing for paying out the fourth game medal will be described.

In the upper diagram of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed, and the release urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fourth game medal. At this time, it can be seen that at the initial position (disc H50), the disc is rotated by an angle A from the position where the third game medal was paid out. That is, when the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed, the disk H50 rotates by an angle A before the discharge urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the discharge position. Further, the disc H50 does not rotate until the ejection urging means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position.

Next, in the lower left part of FIG. 121, the hopper motor H80 is driven at a constant speed, and the release urging means H70 is displaced from the initial position to the payout position to pay out the fifth game medal. At this time, after the fourth game medal is paid out, the release urging means H70 is displaced from the payout position to the initial position. It can be seen that, in the same manner as when the .

After the fifth game medal is paid out, the hopper motor H80 is turned off to complete the game medal payout, as shown in the lower right. After the drive of the hopper motor H80 is turned off, the disk H50 stops rotating. Stop. The reason for this configuration is that when the first game medal is paid out, the hopper motor H80 does not enter the constant speed state immediately after the start of driving, but it takes a predetermined time to reach the constant speed state. need. That is, when the first game medal (the hopper motor H80 is in the acceleration state to the constant speed state) is paid out, if the release urging means H70 is at the initial position, the second and subsequent medals (the hopper motor H80 is in the constant speed state). As compared with the case of paying out game medals, the hopper motor H80 is in an accelerated state.

Here, a detailed description will be given of the process from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out. When the hopper motor H80 is driven, the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped changes to a constant speed state via an acceleration state. Here, let A (m/t) be the rotation speed in the constant speed state. The acceleration state is a state in which acceleration processing is performed from a speed of 0 to a constant speed A, and the average rotational speed in the period from the speed 0 to the constant speed state (the period of the acceleration state) is B (m/t ), then B<A. Therefore, the average rotation speed C (m/t) from when the hopper motor H80 is stopped to when the first game medal is paid out is B<C<A.

Next, a detailed description will be given from when the first game medal is paid out until when the second game medal is paid out. Since the hopper motor H80 is in a constant speed state when the first game medal is paid out, the constant speed state is maintained from the time the first game medal is paid out until the second game medal is paid out. remains. Therefore, the average rotation speed from when the first game medal is paid out to when the second game medal is paid out is A.

As described above, the second game medal after the first game medal is paid out is faster than the average rotation speed C from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out. Since the average rotational speed A until the medals are paid out is faster, the distance the disk H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out If the distance that the disk H50 rotates from the payout of the medal to the payout of the second game medal is set to be the same distance, the first game medal is played from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped. The time required to pay out the medals is longer than the time required from the time the first game medal is paid out until the time the second game medal is paid out.

As shown in FIG. 121, in this example, after the last game medal (fifth game medal in FIG. 121) is paid out as the game medal payout process, the disk H50 is rotated at a predetermined angle ( In the fifth embodiment, it is shifted in the direction of rotation by an angle B) and stopped (the distance of rotation is increased). By configuring in this way, the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the state where the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out is reduced by two discs after the first game medal is paid out. The distance that the disc H50 rotates until the second game medal is paid out (the distance that the disc H50 rotates from the second game medal paid out until the third game medal is paid out, etc. is also the same distance. ), and the time required from the state in which the hopper motor H80 is stopped until the first game medal is paid out can be shortened by the second game medal after the first game medal is paid out. It is possible to approximate (approximate) the time required until the medals are paid out, and by paying out the game medals at a good tempo, the player can proceed with the game without a sense of incongruity.

The width of deviation (angle B) in the rotational direction when the disk H50 stops after the hopper motor H80 is driven depends on the period from the acceleration state to the constant speed state by driving the hopper motor H80. During this period, by considering the difference between the width of rotation of the hopper motor H80 in the accelerated state and the width of rotation of the hopper motor H80 in the constant speed state, the urging means H70 releases the disk H50 after the hopper motor H80 is driven. It is determined how much the rotation direction should be shifted from the initial position to stop. The difference between the width in which the hopper motor H80 rotates in the accelerated state and the width in which the hopper motor H80 rotates in the constant speed state corresponds to the payout position of the ejection urging means H70 from the position corresponding to the initial position of the ejection urging means H70 of the hopper motor H80. Preferably, angle B is much smaller than angle A because it is much smaller than the width to the point where it is located. It should be noted that even if there is a deviation of the angle B in the rotational direction, the detection of the game medals by the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2 is not affected. Based on this, detection of game medals is performed.

<< effect >>
With this configuration, when the predetermined number of game medals are paid out to the player who receives the payout of the game medals, the game medals can be paid out at substantially constant intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. For example, by combining the configuration according to the fifth embodiment and the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, (1) game medals do not collide with each other, and (2) medal clogging due to collision between game medals does not occur. It can be configured and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, after the last game medal is paid out, the disk H50 is configured to deviate by a predetermined angle (angle B in the fifth embodiment) in the rotational direction and stop, so that illegal implements can be removed from the ejection opening D240. It is possible to prevent a situation in which game medals are obtained illegally by intrusion.

<<<<Sixth Embodiment Control when communication between the main control board and the sub control board is not possible>>>>>
Next, processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible will be described as a sixth embodiment. As a case where communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible here, it is assumed that various commands set from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side cannot be transmitted. there is The main control board M, for example, in the game progress control process of FIG. Furthermore, as processing related to the subroutine, various commands are sent from the main control board side to the sub control board side at regular intervals of a predetermined time (in this example, T, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set). is configured to send The sub control board S is configured to receive various commands transmitted from the main control board M and to execute effects based on the commands. Communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is one-way from the main control board side, and although the sub control board S can receive commands from the main control board M, It is configured so that it is not possible to send commands to In the gaming machine, the main control board M and the sub control board S each have programs related to execution processing (the program held by the main control board M is called the main side program, and the program held by the sub control board S is called the sub side program). For example, the sub-side program is configured such that the sub-side control board S executes an effect with the reception of a predetermined command from the main control board M as a trigger. In other words, under the condition that commands cannot be received from the main control board M, the sub control board S cannot execute the processing configured in the sub-side program. A situation in which the sub control board S cannot receive commands from the main control board M may occur, for example, due to poor contact of the harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S. Problems, etc. can be considered. However, even if the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible, the main side program of the main control board M controlling the progress of the game can be executed. , the game itself related to the main-side program can be executed even when the communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible. In addition, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored from the situation where the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disabled, the progress of the program on the main side will be changed. Based on this, a command related to processing after communication is restored is transmitted from the main control board side to the sub control board side, and the sub control board S receives the command related to processing after communication is restored from the main control board M. perform processing based on 122 to 126, when communication with the sub-control board S becomes impossible while various commands are being executed on the main control board M, An example of processing performed on the control board S will be described as a sixth embodiment.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub control board during execution of processing related to settlement When the command and the channel are one to one >>>
FIG. 122 shows the flow of processing in chronological order as an example of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible during execution of processing related to settlement. First, it is assumed that the number of games starts from the Nth game as a predetermined number of games, and the processing is performed over the N+1th game. In the sixth embodiment, as processing performed by the main control board M, in particular, commands based on the progress of the game are transmitted to the sub control board S, and as processing performed by the sub control board S, commands are received from the main control board M. One set of processing (one order in the sixth embodiment) is to execute an effect based on the given command. The sub control board S does not execute the effects based on all the commands received from the main control board M, and may execute the effects based on the received commands or may not execute the effects. be. For example, in FIGS. 122 to 126, the sub control board S is an example of executing an effect for each command transmitted by the main control board M. Supplement that there are cases where the performance is not executed. In a situation where one or more credits exist, when the settlement button is operated to execute settlement of credits, a sound during settlement corresponding to the settlement of game medals is output from the speaker S20. However, it is assumed that the audio channel that outputs the sound during payment is a channel that corresponds only to the sound during payment. For example, the sub control board S executes an effect based on a command received from the main control board M. The command is associated with the audio channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sound is output from the speaker S20 from the sound channel corresponding to the received command. Note that commands and audio channels do not have to be in a one-to-one relationship. Specifically, a plurality of commands (for example, a command related to start of settlement, a plurality of commands related to predetermined error detection, etc.) may be associated with one audio channel. By configuring in this way, even when the number of commands related to audio output increases, it is possible to configure so as to output audio without increasing the number of channels.

<<Configuration 1>>
FIG. 122 will be described in detail. First, as order 1 of processing, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command based on the start of settlement. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound during payment from the speaker S20.
<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub control board during execution of processing related to settlement When the command and the channel are one to one>>, the sound that outputs the sound during settlement It is assumed that the channel corresponds only to commands related to the start of settlement, and does not correspond to other commands. While the sub-control board S is outputting the sound of settlement, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, as a case where communication is cut off, there is an electrical connection between the main control board M and the sub control board S, such as a connection failure of a harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S. A case in which communication is cut off is not limited to this. Any situation may occur as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound during settlement, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payout of game medals for the number of credits is completed. By judging, a command related to the end of settlement is transmitted to the sub control board side, and the sub control board S receives the command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during settlement. Execute the process to terminate.

In order 2, the main control board M transmits a command for completing the settlement to the sub control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M completes cannot be sent to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command for ending the payment from the main control board M, it does not stop outputting the sound during the payment and continues to output the sound during the payment. While the main control board M executes settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determines that the payout of game medals for the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub control Although the communication with the board S is disconnected, the processing performed by the main control board M, which governs the progress of the game, is in progress.

The main control board M executes settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payout of the game medals corresponding to the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub control board S has not received a command for the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the processing related to the settlement has ended, and the Nth game Set a command for the next process.

As order 3, the N-th game is started, and by judging that the game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command relating to reception of medal insertion. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the medal insertion acceptance command from the main control board M, while issuing a command from the main control board M to end the payment. Since the sound cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the sound output during the settlement. The main control board M judges that the processing related to receiving medals has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing of the Nth game.

As order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by judging that the start lever D50 has been operated. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, while receiving the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible, the output of the sound during the payment is continued without ending the output of the sound during the payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by judging that the rotation of the reel has started due to the operation of the start lever. When the sub control board S receives a command for starting reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for starting reel rotation, and receives a command for completing settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible, the output of the sound during the payment is continued without ending the output of the sound during the payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As an order 6, it is assumed that the processing relating to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By judging that the stop operation of the first reel (the first reel is the reel on which the player stops first among the plurality of reels) has been accepted, the main control board M stops the first reel. A command for accepting the stop operation is transmitted to the sub-control board S. When the sub control board S receives a command for accepting the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for accepting the first reel stop operation. Since the command relating to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the output of the sound during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As order 7, by determining that the stop operation of the second reel (the second reel is the reel on which the player performs the second stop operation among the plurality of reels) has been accepted, the main control board M transmits to the sub-control board S a command for accepting the second reel stop operation. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command related to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the output of the sound during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As order 8, the main control board M transmits to the sub-control board S a command relating to acceptance of the third reel stop operation. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command relating to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the output of the sound during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. As a command set at this time, all the reels are stopped, and a command related to the stop of the stop display pattern, which is transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated to stop the display pattern, is taken as an example. As a command for outputting a voice from the sub-control board S based on the command from the control board M, winning of a winning combination (for example, a bell combination in pushing order) in which game medals are paid out in the Nth game is determined, and reel stop operation is performed. A command related to the case where the symbol combination related to the winning condition device is stopped and displayed (in the sixth embodiment, it is referred to as a "command related to winning") etc. is transmitted (as a command for the next process of the Nth game) It is also possible to configure

As order 9, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command for stopping the stop display symbols by judging that all the reels have been stopped. Upon receipt of the command for stopping the stop display pattern, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for the command for stopping the stop display pattern, while the main control board M issues a command for finishing the payment. Since the sound cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the sound output during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display pattern is completed, and ends the process related to the N-th game. In the N-th game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M due to the temporary disconnection of both communications. At this time, the command that has not been received from the main control board M from the sub control board S is a command related to the end of settlement, and during the period from the insertion of game medals in the Nth game to the stop operation of all the reels, It is configured to continue outputting the sound during the payment without ending the output of the sound during the payment.

Next, as the N+1th game, the processing proceeds to order 10 and order 11. As order 10, the main control board M transmits a command for starting settlement to the sub control board S in the same manner as order 1 in the N-th game. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound during payment from the speaker S20. At this time, the sound during settlement output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 in the same channel as the sound during settlement output in the N-th game, as described above. In other words, by transmitting a command based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button in the N+1th game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the settlement of the N+1th game received from the main control board M. Based on the command related to the start, while the output of the sound during settlement is started, the output of the sound ends during the settlement related to the Nth game (as the processing of the sub control board S, the Output of sound → Receive a command to start the settlement of the N+1th game → End the output of the sound during the settlement of the Nth game → Start the output of the sound during the settlement of the N+1th game).

In order 11, the main control board M executes settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, determines that the payout of game medals for the number of credits has been completed, and issues a command related to the end of settlement. Send to the sub control board side. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S executes a process of terminating the output of the sound during the settlement relating to the N+1th game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during execution of a process accompanied by sound output, the player will not be able to hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the user to recognize that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is not stopped due to an error, but the game progresses on the main control board M, it is possible to proceed with the game. By restoring communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of terminating sound output while the game is progressing.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub control board during execution of processing related to settlement If the command and the channel are not one to one >>>
<<Configuration 2>>
Next, FIG. 123 will be described in detail. First, as order 1 of processing, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command based on the start of settlement. Based on the received command, the sub-control board S outputs a sound during payment from the speaker S20.
<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub control board during execution of processing related to settlement When the command and the channel are not one to one>>, the sound that outputs the sound during settlement The channel corresponds not only to commands based on detection of the operation of the checkout button, but also to other commands (here, "error detection command based on detection of door open error flag"). While the sub-control board S is outputting the sound of settlement, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the sound during settlement, the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and the payout of game medals for the number of credits is completed. By judging, a command related to the end of settlement is transmitted to the sub control board side, and the sub control board S receives the command related to the end of settlement from the main control board M, thereby outputting the sound during settlement. Execute the process to terminate.

As order 2, the main control board M transmits a command for completing the settlement to the sub control board S, but since communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M cannot be sent to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command for ending the payment from the main control board M, it does not stop outputting the sound during the payment and continues to output the sound during the payment. While the main control board M executes the settlement process based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button and determines that the payout of game medals for the number of credits has been completed, the main control board M and the sub control Although the communication with the board S is disconnected, the processing performed by the main control board M, which governs the progress of the game, is in progress.

The main control board M executes settlement processing based on the detection of the operation of the settlement button, and after the payout of the game medals corresponding to the number of credits is completed, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is restored. . At this time, the sub control board S has not received a command for the end of the settlement from the main control board M, but the main control board M determines that the processing related to the settlement has ended, and the Nth game Set a command for the next process.

As order 3, the N-th game is started, and by judging that the game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command relating to reception of medal insertion. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the medal insertion acceptance command from the main control board M, while issuing a command from the main control board M to end the payment. Since the sound cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the sound output during the settlement. The main control board M judges that the processing related to receiving medals has been completed, and sets a command related to the next processing of the Nth game.

As order 4, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by judging that the start lever D50 has been operated. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the start lever operation based on the reception of the command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, while receiving the command related to the end of the settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible, the output of the sound during the payment is continued without ending the output of the sound during the payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start lever operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

In order 5, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the start of reel rotation to the sub control board S by judging that the rotation of the reel has started due to the operation of the start lever. When the sub control board S receives a command for starting reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for starting reel rotation, and receives a command for completing settlement from the main control board M. Since it is not possible, the output of the sound during the payment is continued without ending the output of the sound during the payment. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As an order 6, it is assumed that the processing relating to the start of rotation of the reels has ended and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation. When the sub control board S receives a command for accepting the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for accepting the first reel stop operation. Since the command related to termination cannot be received, the output of the sound during the check is continued without ending the output of the sound during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As order 7, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command relating to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation by judging that the second reel stop operation has been accepted. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command relating to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the output of the sound during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

In order 8, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation by determining that the third reel stop operation has been accepted. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M. Since the command relating to the end cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the output of the sound during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. As an example of the command set at this time, all the reels are stopped, and a command related to the stop of the stop display pattern transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated to stop the display pattern is taken as an example. As a command for the sub-control board S to output sound based on the command from the control board M, it is also possible to transmit a command related to winning (as a command for the next process of the Nth game).

As order 9, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command for stopping the stop display symbols by judging that all the reels have been stopped. Upon receipt of the command for stopping the stop display pattern, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for the command for stopping the stop display pattern, while the main control board M issues a command for finishing the payment. Since the sound cannot be received, the output of the sound during the settlement is continued without ending the sound output during the settlement. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display pattern is completed, and ends the process related to the N-th game. In the N-th game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M due to the temporary disconnection of both communications. At this time, the command that has not been received from the main control board M from the sub control board S is a command related to the end of settlement, and during the period from the insertion of game medals in the Nth game to the stop operation of all the reels, It is configured to continue outputting the sound during the payment without ending the output of the sound during the payment.

Next, the process proceeds to order 10 as the N+1th game. Assume that a predetermined error occurs as order 10 . As an error at this time, a door opening error will be explained as an example, but the content of the error is not limited to this, and any error such as an abnormal loading error, an abnormal dispensing error, an input reception sensor retention error, etc. good. When the main control board M determines that a door opening error has occurred because the front door DU is open, it sends an error detection command to the sub control board S by detecting the door opening error flag. Upon receipt of the error detection command by detecting the door opening error flag, the sub control board S performs processing to output a door opening error notification sound from the speaker S20. As described above, the command based on the detection of the checkout button and the error detection command based on the detection of the door open error flag are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. That is, the sub-control board S receives an error detection command by detecting the door open error flag in the N+1 game while the output of the sound during settlement is continued from the N game, so that in the N game It is configured to end the output of the sound during the settlement and start outputting the door opening error notification sound in the N+1th game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during execution of a process accompanied by sound output, the player will not be able to hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the user to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
Also, when an error occurs, by associating the audio channel output from the speaker S20 with a plurality of commands such as a command related to error detection, an error notification sound is reliably output and the player is notified of the error. To provide a user-friendly game machine capable of surely notifying the occurrence of a problem and ending the output of voice while the game is progressing by restoring communication between the two. can be done.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub control board during the period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed When the command and the channel are one to one >>>
<<Configuration 3>>
Next, FIG. 124 will be described in detail. Here, communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S becomes impossible, especially during a period in which the minimum game time has not elapsed from when the start lever D50 is operated to when the reels start to rotate. The flow of processing in the case of First, as the order 1 of processing, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S by judging that the start lever D50 has been operated. When the sub control board S receives a start lever operation command from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a start lever operation sound effect (referred to as a wait sound here) from the speaker S20.
<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub-control board during the period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed If the command and the channel are one to one>>, a wait sound is output. It is assumed that the audio channel corresponds only to commands related to the start lever operation, and does not correspond to other commands. While the sub control board S is outputting the wait sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected. At this time, for example, as a case where communication is cut off, there is an electrical connection between the main control board M and the sub control board S, such as a connection failure of a harness that electrically connects the main control board M and the sub control board S. A case in which communication is cut off is not limited to this. Any situation may occur as long as the electrical communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub-control board S finishes outputting the wait sound, the main control board M has started a state in which preparations for starting the rotation of the reels have been completed based on the start lever operation (here, reel rotation start waiting state start), a command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state is transmitted to the sub control board S, and the sub control board S receives the command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state, thereby waiting It is configured to execute a process of terminating sound output.

As order 2, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M M cannot transmit to the sub-control board S a command relating to the start of reel rotation start standby state. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, it continues to output the wait sound without ending the output of the wait sound. Communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected while the main control board M is executing the processing related to the start of the reel rotation start waiting state based on the detection of the start lever operation. However, the processing performed by the main control board M, which governs the progress of the game, is in progress.

After the main control board M completes the processing related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state based on the detection of the start lever operation, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub control board S has not received a command for starting the reel rotation start waiting state from the main control board M, but the main control board M has completed the process for starting the reel rotation start waiting state. , and sets a command for the next process of the Nth game.

In order 3, the main control board M transmits a command for starting reel rotation to the sub control board S by judging that the reel has started to rotate due to the operation of the start lever. When the sub control board S receives a command for starting reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for starting the reel rotation, while the main control board M for starting the reel rotation start standby state. Since the command cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the start of reel rotation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As an order 4, it is assumed that the processing relating to the start of rotation of the reels is completed, and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation. When the sub control board S receives a command for accepting the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for accepting the first reel stop operation, and rotates the reel from the main control board M. Since the command relating to the start of the start waiting state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As order 5, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command relating to the reception of the second reel stop operation by judging that the second reel stop operation has been accepted. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, and the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command relating to the start of the start waiting state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the second reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game.

As order 6, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S by judging that the operation to stop the third reel has been accepted. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the third reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, and the reel rotation from the main control board M. Since the command relating to the start of the start standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. As a command set at this time, all the reels are stopped, and a command related to the stop of the stop display pattern, which is transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated to stop the display pattern, is taken as an example. As a command for the sub-control board S to output sound based on the command from the control board M, it is also possible to transmit a command related to winning (as a command for the next process of the Nth game).

As order 7, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command for stopping the stop display symbols by judging that all the reels have been stopped. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the stop of the stop display pattern based on the reception of the command related to the stop of the stop display pattern, while the main control board M issues a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. Since the reception is not possible, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the stop of the stop display pattern is completed, and ends the process related to the N-th game. In the N-th game, a situation occurs in which the sub-control board S cannot receive from the main control board M due to the temporary disconnection of both communications. At this time, the command that has not been received from the main control board M from the sub control board S is a command related to the start of the reel rotation start waiting state, and is a command from the insertion of the Nth game medal to the stop operation of all the reels. In the period, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound.

Next, the process proceeds to order 8 and order 9 as the N+1th game. In order 8, the main control board M transmits a command relating to reception of medal insertion to the sub control board S by judging that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the medal insertion reception command from the main control board M, and the reel rotation of the Nth game from the main control board M is started. Since the command for starting the standby state cannot be received, the output of the wait sound is continued without ending the output of the wait sound. The main control board M judges that the process related to accepting medal insertion is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N+1 game.

In order 9, the main control board M transmits to the sub-control board S a command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on the reception of the command relating to the start of reel rotation start standby state. At this time, the wait sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 in the same channel as the wait sound output in the N-th game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state in the N+1th game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the N+1th game reel rotation received from the main control board M Based on the command related to the start of the start standby state, the output of the wait sound is started, while the output of the wait sound related to the N-th game ends (as the processing of the sub control board S, the output of the wait sound related to the N-th game → Receipt of a command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state related to the N+1th game → End of output of the wait sound related to the Nth game → Start of output of the wait sound related to the N+1th game).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during execution of a process accompanied by sound output, the player will not be able to hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the user to recognize that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is not stopped due to an error, but the game progresses on the main control board M, it is possible to proceed with the game. By restoring communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of terminating sound output while the game is progressing.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of communication disconnection between the main control board and the sub control board during execution of the payout process When the command and the channel are not one to one >>>
<<Configuration 4>>
Next, FIG. 125 will be described in detail. In particular, the flow of processing when communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S becomes impossible while game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40 will be described. First, as the order 1 of the process, when a winning combination (for example, a push-order bell combination) in which game medals are paid out in the N-th game wins and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the hopper H40. , to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a sound effect (referred to as a medal payout sound here) related to the payout of game medals from the speaker S20 based on the reception of the command for start of payout of the medals from the hopper H40.
<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub control board during execution of payout process If the command and the channel are not one to one>>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is It is assumed that not only the command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40 but also other commands are supported (here, "command related to start lever operation"). While the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub control board S finishes outputting the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals associated with the winning, and the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning is paid out from the hopper H40. By determining that it has been completed, a command relating to the completion of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command relating to the completion of payout of game medals from the hopper H40. It is configured to execute a process of ending the output of the medal payout sound.

As order 2, a command relating to completion of medal payout from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M sends the hopper H40. It is not possible to transmit to the sub-control board S a command relating to the completion of medal payout from. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command relating to completion of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, it continues to output the medal payout sound without ending the medal payout sound output. Note that the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out according to the winning, and while the determination that the game medals to be paid out due to the winning are being paid out from the hopper H40 is completed, the main control board M controls the progress of the game. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

After the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals related to the winning and determines that the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning has been paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M and the sub-controller Communication with the board S is restored. At this time, the sub control board S has not received a command to end the medal payout from the main control board M, but the main control board M has paid out the game medals from the hopper H40 to be paid out by the winning. Therefore, the processing of the N-th game is completed, and the command related to the N+1-th game is set.

Next, the process proceeds to order 3 and order 4 as the N+1th game. As order 3, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command relating to receipt of medal insertion by judging that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170. The sub control board S outputs a medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion based on the reception of the medal insertion reception command from the main control board M, and the medal payout of the Nth game from the main control board M ends. cannot receive the command, the medal payout sound output is continued without ending the medal payout sound output. The main control board M judges that the process related to accepting medal insertion is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N+1 game.

As order 4, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command relating to the start of reel rotation start standby state. The sub-control board S outputs a wait sound based on the reception of the command relating to the start of reel rotation start standby state. As described above, the command related to the start of payout of medals from the hopper H40 and the command related to the start of the reel rotation start standby state are associated with the same channel of the speaker S20. In other words, the sub-control board S receives a command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state in the N+1 game while the output of the medal payout sound is continued from the N game, so that the medal payout in the N game is performed. It is configured to finish outputting the sound and start outputting the wait sound in the N+1th game.

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during execution of a process accompanied by sound output, the player will not be able to hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the user to recognize that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, by associating with multiple commands such as commands related to the progress of the game, communication between the two can be restored, making it a user-friendly game that allows audio output to end as the game progresses. machine can be provided.

<<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of communication disconnection between the main control board and the sub control board during execution of the payout process When the command and the channel are one to one>>>
<<Configuration 5>>
Next, FIG. 126 will be described in detail. Here, in particular, the main control board M and the sub control board S are connected for a predetermined period (here, until the start of rotation of the reels (acceleration processing is performed)) from the state in which game medals are being paid out from the hopper H40. The flow of processing when communication becomes impossible will be described. First, as the order 1 of the process, when a winning combination (for example, a push-order bell combination) in which game medals are paid out in the N-th game wins and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M controls the hopper H40. , to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 on the basis of receiving a command relating to start of medal payout from the hopper H40.
<<Sixth Embodiment Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub control board during execution of payout processing When the command and the channel are one to one>>, the audio channel that outputs the medal payout sound is Only commands related to medal payout start are supported, and other commands are not supported. While the sub-control board S is outputting the medal payout sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected. When the sub control board S ends the output of the medal payout sound, the main control board M counts the number of payout game medals related to the winning, and the number of game medals to be paid out due to the winning is paid out from the hopper H40. By determining that the game medals have been paid out, a command relating to the completion of payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S receives the command relating to the completion of payout of game medals from the hopper H40. , the processing for ending the output of the medal payout sound is executed.

As order 2, a command for ending the payout of game medals from the hopper H40 is transmitted to the sub control board S. However, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M A command relating to the completion of medal payout from the hopper H40 cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command relating to completion of medal payout from the hopper H40 from the main control board M, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. Note that the main control board M counts the number of game medals to be paid out according to the winning, and while the determination that the game medals to be paid out due to the winning are being paid out from the hopper H40 is completed, the main control board M controls the progress of the game. The processing performed by the control board M is in progress.

Next, as the N+1th game, the processing proceeds from order 3 to order 10. As order 3, by judging that game medals have been inserted from the medal insertion slot D170, the main control board M transmits a command relating to reception of medal insertion to the sub control board S, but the main control board M and the sub control board Since the communication with S is disconnected, the main control board M cannot transmit to the sub control board S a command related to receipt of token insertion. At this time, since the sub-control board S cannot receive a command related to medal insertion acceptance from the main control board M, it cannot output the medal insertion sound corresponding to the medal insertion, but does not finish outputting the medal payout sound. Continue to output the medal payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S is in a state where it is unable to receive a command related to completion of medal payout and a command related to reception of medal insertion from the hopper H40. Therefore, the state in which only the medal payout sound is output continues.

As order 4, by determining that the start lever D50 has been operated, the main control board M transmits a command related to the start lever operation to the sub control board S, but communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is in the disconnected state, the main control board M cannot transmit a command for operating the start lever to the sub control board S. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive a command related to the start lever operation from the main control board M, it cannot output the sound effect related to the start lever operation. Continue to output the payout sound. That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S responds to the command related to the completion of medal payout from the hopper H40, the command related to acceptance of medal insertion, and the operation of the start lever. Since the command cannot be received, the state in which only the medal payout sound is output continues.

As order 5, the main control board M transmits a command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state to the sub control board S, but since the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is disconnected, the main control board M M cannot transmit to the sub-control board S a command relating to the start of reel rotation start standby state. At this time, since the sub control board S cannot receive a command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state from the main control board M, it is unable to output the wait sound. continue to output That is, since the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the sub-control board S receives commands related to completion of medal payout from the hopper H40, commands related to receipt of medal insertion, and commands related to start lever operation. Since the command and the command relating to the start of the reel rotation start standby state cannot be received, the state in which only the medal payout sound is output continues.

After the main control board M determines that the reel rotation start standby state has started, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is restored. At this time, the sub-control board S receives from the main control board M a command related to the completion of medal payout from the hopper H40, a command related to receipt of medal insertion, a command related to the start lever operation, and a command related to the start of reel rotation start standby state. Although not completed, the main control board M determines that the reel rotation is ready based on the start lever operation, and sets a command for the next process of the N+1 game.

In order 6, the main control board M transmits a command for starting reel rotation to the sub control board S by judging that the rotation of the reel has started due to the operation of the start lever. When the sub control board S receives a command for starting reel rotation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for starting reel rotation. Since the command cannot be received, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the processing related to the start of reel rotation has ended, and sets a command related to the next processing of the N+1 game.

As an order 7, it is assumed that the processing relating to the start of rotation of the reels is completed and the player can perform a reel stop operation. By determining that the stop operation of the first reel has been accepted, the main control board M transmits to the sub control board S a command related to the acceptance of the first reel stop operation. When the sub control board S receives a command for accepting the first reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for accepting the first reel stop operation. Since the command relating to the end of medal payout cannot be received from, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the reception of the first reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N+1 game.

In order 8, the main control board M transmits a command related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation to the sub control board S by determining that the second reel stop operation has been accepted. The sub control board S outputs a sound effect related to the reception of the second reel stop operation based on the reception of the command related to the reception of the second reel stop operation from the main control board M, while outputting the hopper H40 from the main control board M. Since the command relating to the end of medal payout cannot be received from, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the second reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the N+1 game.

As order 9, the main control board M transmits a command related to acceptance of the third reel stop operation to the sub control board S by judging that the operation to stop the third reel has been accepted. When the sub control board S receives the command for accepting the third reel stop operation from the main control board M, the sub control board S outputs a sound effect for accepting the third reel stop operation. Since the command relating to the end of medal payout cannot be received from, the output of the medal payout sound is continued without ending the output of the medal payout sound. The main control board M determines that the process related to the acceptance of the third reel stop operation is completed, and sets a command related to the next process of the Nth game. For the sake of simplicity, the next processing of the N+1 game is a command related to the start of payout of medals from the hopper H40. For example, it is possible to transmit a command related to the stop display pattern or a command related to winning a prize.

As order 10, in the case where a winning combination (for example, a bell combination in push order) that pays out game medals is determined in the N+1 game, and the game medals are paid out from the hopper H40, the main control board M receives the game medals from the hopper H40. A command for starting the payout of game medals is transmitted to the sub-control board S. The sub-control board S outputs a medal payout sound from the speaker S20 on the basis of receiving a command relating to start of medal payout from the hopper H40. At this time, the medal payout sound output from the speaker S20 is output from the speaker S20 in the same channel as the medal payout sound output in the N-th game, as described above. That is, by transmitting a command related to the medal payout start from the hopper H40 in the N + 1th game from the main control board M to the sub control board S, the sub control board S receives the N + 1 game hopper from the main control board M Based on the command related to the start of medal payout from H40, the output of the medal payout sound is started, while the output of the medal payout sound related to the Nth game ends (as processing of the sub control board S, the output of the medal payout sound related to the N game Output of medal payout sound → Receipt of a command to start medal payout from the hopper H40 for the N+1th game → End output of the medal payout sound for the Nth game → Start output of the medal payout sound for the N+1th game Become).

<Effect 1>
With this configuration, for example, when the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during execution of a process accompanied by sound output, the player will not be able to hear the sound. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the user to recognize that some problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the game is not stopped due to an error, but the game progresses on the main control board M, it is possible to proceed with the game. By restoring the communication, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine capable of terminating the output of the voice while the game is progressing.

<<Structure related to set numbers applicable to this example>>
Here, the configuration related to the internal lottery numbers applicable to this example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that the following configuration is applicable to all embodiments in this example.

First, with reference to FIG. 127, the configuration related to the numbers applicable to this example will be described in detail.

<When BB is not activated>
The gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 127 has 1 type BB (sometimes referred to as BB) and 2 types BB (sometimes referred to as MB). A symbol combination that activates BB can be stopped and displayed, and is sometimes referred to as a 1st class BB hand). Type BB+Cherry" (a conditional device in which a type BB combination and Cherry are duplicated). In addition, as a role related to 2 types BB (a combination of symbols that activates 2 types BB after winning can be stopped and displayed, sometimes referred to as 2 types BB role), "2 types BB alone" (2 types BB wins alone) and ``2 types of BB + cherry'' (conditions devices that result in double winning of 2 types of BB wins and cherries).

In addition, there are four types of winning combinations (combinations of symbols in which game medals are paid out when stopped), ie, bell, watermelon, symbol, and cherry. (Winning at 10400/65536) is sometimes called a main minor winning combination.

"When BB is not in operation" shown at the top of the figure is a table relating to numbers set in a state in which 1st type BB and 2nd type BB are not in operation (sometimes referred to as a normal game state or the like). "Number of insertions" is the number of insertions when it is assumed that the game is executed with 3 bets in order to calculate various expected values described later, and is the number of insertions during 1 type BB operation and 2 type BB operation. Although the number is 2, the "number of inputs" is 3. Also, the "number of payouts" is the number of game medals paid out when the "number of insertions" is set to 3. For example, in a game when the type 1 BB is activated, 15 medals are paid out for a bet of 2. However, since the "number of inputs" is assumed to be 3, the "number of payouts" is also "15×3/2=22.5".

"Set number" is a set number determined by an internal lottery for each condition device, and the denominator is 65,536. "Probability" is the probability that the conditional device will be determined by an internal lottery.

The "number of games" is the number of games required to calculate various expected values, which will be described later. For "1 type BB alone", "1 type BB + cherry", "2 type BB alone", and "2 type BB + cherry", 1 type BB or 2 type BB in the game where 1 type BB or 2 type BB is won The "number of games" is set to 1, since the case where the symbol combination relating to . In addition, "1 type total" is executed after winning the "1 type BB alone" or "1 type BB + cherry", and after the symbol combination that will activate the 1 type BB is stopped and displayed ( The "number of games" is 24 because the case of digesting the game is exemplified. In addition, after winning "2 types of BB alone" or "2 types of BB + cherry", 2 types of BBs are executed after the symbol combination that causes 2 types of BBs to operate is stopped and displayed ( The "number of games" is set to 8 because the case of digesting the game is exemplified.

The "expected number of inserted coins" is the expected value of the number of inserted coins per game considering the probability determined by the internal lottery for each condition device, and is calculated by "number of inserted x probability x number of games". In addition, the "expected number of payouts" is the expected value of the number of payouts per game, taking into account the probability determined by internal lottery for each conditional device, and is calculated by "number of payouts x probability x number of games". there is

It should be noted that the configuration shown in the figure may be applied to the case where the game is played as follows.

<Game method 1>
Game medals are paid out in games where bells, watermelons, symbols, or cherries are won in games that are executed in a game method that is the most profitable for the player, and are not push order bells. The game is executed in a stop operation mode (operation mode of the stop button, order of pressing the stop button, timing of stop button operation, etc.) to stop display (win) a certain symbol combination. In addition, in a game in which a winning combination such as a pushing order bell (not shown in the figure, but may be configured to have a pushing order combination), the stop operation mode in which the number of payouts is the largest is selected. to run the game.

<Game method 2>
In a game in which bells, watermelons, symbols or cherries are won instead of pushing order such as bells, a stop operation mode (operating mode of the stop button) to stop display (win) a symbol combination with payout of game medals is performed. , and the game is executed according to the order of pressing the stop button, the timing of the stop button operation, etc.). In addition, in a game in which a push-order role such as a push-order bell (not shown in the figure, but may be configured to have a push-order role), random numbers are given regardless of whether push-order navigation is executed or not. The game is executed in a random stop operation mode (the order of pressing the stop button and the timing of the stop button operation are random). Note that "random" means, for example, that with respect to the pressing order of the stop button, all six kinds of pressing orders are selected at an equal rate, and with regard to the stop timing, all of the stop operation timings of 20 frames are selected at an equal rate. It is to be.

"Internal" is a game after winning one of "1 type BB alone", "1 type BB + cherry", "2 types BB alone", and "2 types BB + cherry", and 1 type BB Or a game in which the symbol combination that will activate the 2nd type BB and the symbol combinations related to bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays do not stop and display (in situations where the winning of the 1st type BB or the 2nd type BB is carried over It is a game that did not win a small win or replay). In the figure, at 290/65536, a game in which a small winning combination or a replay was not won is executed in a situation where winning of type 1 BB or type BB is carried over, and the "expected number of inputs" is about 0. 013275146, and the “expected payout value” is 0.

<Type 1 BB in operation>
"Type 1 BB in operation" shown in the second row from the top of the figure is a table relating to the set numbers in the state in which the type 1 BB is in operation. During the operation of type 1 BB, the specified number is two, and it is configured so that any one of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries can be won without winning a losing game. In addition, the "number of payouts" is 15 for all of Bell, Watermelon, Symbol, and Cherry, and Bell is the easiest to win (easily determined). Also, one or a plurality (or all) of the "placement numbers" for winning watermelons, symbols and cherries may be configured to be the same as "when BB is not activated". In addition, as described above, in games where the type BB is in operation, 15 bets are paid out for a 2-bet in all games. ”, the “payout number” of “1 type total”) is 22.5.

<2 types of BB in operation>
"During operation of 2nd type BB" shown at the bottom of the figure is a table relating to the setting numbers in the state where 2nd type BB is in operation. During the operation of the 2 types of BB, the specified number is 2, and when the game is executed in a predetermined stop operation mode (for example, when the game is executed in the pressing order of "left → middle → right"), , and only symbol combinations related to bells are stopped and displayed. In addition, the "number of payouts" is 15 when the symbol combination related to the bell is stopped and displayed. In addition, as described above, in games where the 2 types of BB are in operation, 15 coins are paid out for a 2-coin bet in all games. ”) is 22.5.

<BB not working>
Again, the “when BB is not activated” will be described in detail. "Without replay" indicates four types of winning combinations of bell, watermelon, symbol and cherry, and "with replay" indicates five types of winning combination of bell, watermelon, symbol, cherry and replay. showing. The "winning OUT" in the "no replay" is a value obtained by summing the payout amount expected values of bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries, which is approximately 1.237258911. In addition, the "winning ball rate" in "no replay" is the "total value of the expected number of payouts (winning OUT)" as the "total value of the expected number of inserted bells, watermelons, symbols, and cherries". This is the value obtained by multiplying the divided value by 100, that is, the payout rate of the sum of the winning combinations, which is about 222.8%.

The "winning prize OUT" in the "replay included" is a value obtained by summing the payout amount expected values of bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays, which is approximately 1.649246216. Note that game medals are not actually paid out even if the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, but when the game is executed with three bets and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed, Since automatic bets for 3 coins are executed, the “number of payouts” for replay is 3. In addition, the "winning ball rate" in "replay included" is the sum of the "expected value of the expected number of payouts (winning OUT)" and the "expected number of inserted bells, watermelons, symbols, cherries, and replays." value" multiplied by 100, that is, the payout rate of the sum of the winning combination and the replay, which is about 170.5%.

The "1 type combined ball rate" is a value obtained by dividing the expected payout number of "1 type combined" by the expected input number and multiplying it by 100, which is 750.0%. In addition, the “two types of combination ball rate” is a value obtained by dividing the expected value of the number of payouts of the “two types of combination” by the expected value of the number of inputs and multiplying the value by 100, which is 750.0%.

<Comparison of various values>
Here, when the values described above are compared, the following relationships are obtained.
(1) “Expected number of payouts” of “Two types of total” < “Expected number of payouts” of “No replay” (winning prize OUT)
(2) “Expected number of payouts” of “2 types of total” < “Expected number of payouts” of total of “replay included” (winning prize OUT)
(3) Expected payout value of “2 types of total” < Expected payout value of main minor combination
(4) “Expected number of inputs” of “internal medium” < “Expected number of inputs” of main minor combination
(5) "Expected Number of Inputs" of "Internal"<"Expected Number of Inputs" of "Replay"

Also, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the 1st type BB is not won while the 2nd type BB is activated. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's sense of expectation for the game will be weakened. Therefore, as in (1) above, by designing the "expected number of payouts" of the "two types of summation" < the "expected number of payouts" of the sum of "no replays", the two types of BBs are in operation. It is possible to increase the "expected number of payouts" of the small combination, and even during the operation of the two types of BB, not during the operation of the BB (during the operation of the bonus) but during the non-operation of the BB (during the non-operation of the bonus) This makes it easier for the player to feel it, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

Also, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the 1st type BB is not won while the 2nd type BB is activated. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's sense of expectation for the game will be weakened. Therefore, as in (2) above, by designing so that the "expected number of payouts" of the "two types of summation" < the "expected number of payouts" of the sum of "replay included", two types of BB are in operation It is possible to increase the "expected number of payouts" of the small combination, and even during the operation of the two types of BB, not during the operation of the BB (during the operation of the bonus) but during the non-operation of the BB (during the non-operation of the bonus) This makes it easier for the player to feel it, and allows the player to play the game without being aware of the special state.

Also, when the 2nd type BB is activated, the number of game medals that the player can obtain is smaller than when the 1st type BB is activated, and the 1st type BB is not won while the 2nd type BB is activated. Therefore, there is a concern that the player's sense of expectation for the game will be weakened. Therefore, as in (3) above, by designing the "expected number of payouts" of the "two types of summation" < the "expected number of payouts" of the main minor combination, It is possible to increase the "expected number of payouts" of the role, and even during the operation of the type 2 BB, it is assumed that the BB is not in operation (bonus is not in operation) rather than BB is in operation (bonus is in operation). It becomes easy for the player to feel it, and the player can play the game without being conscious of the special state.

In addition, as a gaming machine having one or more of the configurations of (1) to (3) above, during the operation of the two types of BB, the specified number is two and the average number of payouts per game is two. It may be configured to lower the ball payout rate (two-type combined ball rate) during the operation of the two-type BB. Such a configuration further enhances the effects of having the configurations (1) to (3) described above.

In addition, when a player with low skill, such as a player who cannot press eyes, plays in the "inside middle", the symbol combination of the winning type 1 BB or type 2 BB cannot be stopped and displayed. There is concern that low players will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, as in (4) above, by designing the "expected number of inputs" of the "internal medium" < the "expected number of inputs" of the main minor combination, even in the "internal medium", the main small combination It is possible to increase the percentage of games in which a bell is won, and the gaming machine can be made such that even if a player with low skill plays the game, disadvantages are unlikely to occur.

In addition, when a player with low skill, such as a player who cannot press eyes, plays in the "inside middle", the symbol combination of the winning type 1 BB or type 2 BB cannot be stopped and displayed. There is concern that low players will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, as in (5) above, by designing such that the "expected number of inputs" of "inside" < "expected number of inputs" of "replay", replays can be made even in "inside". It is possible to increase the percentage of games in which .

<<<Seventh Embodiment Gate Technology>>>
Next, as a seventh embodiment, the gate mechanism of the main board case M40 that houses the main control board M installed inside the gaming machine (casing) will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the entrance portion into which the resin material (plastic) flows when molding the main substrate case M40 is called a gate.

<<Molding the main board case>>
As described above, the main board case M40 in the seventh embodiment is made of a resin material (plastic). The main board case M40 is formed by injecting a resin material (plastic) from a gate into a metal mold (hereinafter referred to as a mold) for forming a specific shape, followed by cooling and solidification. It is generally molded in an injection molding process to obtain the article. The molding method of the main substrate case M40 is not limited to the injection molding method. Any molding method such as a blow molding method for obtaining a molded product may be used as long as it is molded by pouring a resin material (plastic) from a gate. After injecting the resin material (plastic), the gate is cut, and the cut portion will have a slight depression compared to the flat surface without the gate.

<<Gate method>>
When injecting a resin material (plastic) from a gate by injection molding, various restrictions are placed on the gate. Examples of constraints here include the inflow speed of the resin material (plastic), the temperature of the resin material (plastic), and the size and shape of the gate portion M80. In other words, the optimum conditions (inflow speed, temperature, gate size and shape) are determined according to the size of the main substrate case M40 to be molded, and the molding process is performed according to the conditions to achieve high quality molding. You can get the goods.

Methods for injecting resin materials (plastics) can be broadly classified into two types: restriction gates that limit the inflow of resin materials (plastics) by making the gate size as small as possible, and direct resin material (plastic) bypassing the gates. There is an unrestricted gate into which plastics) are poured. From the standpoint of size, etc., it is possible to reduce the size of the gates to some extent with the various case members used in game machines, and there are cases where limiting gates are used in consideration of the aesthetic appearance of finished products. Although there are many, in the seventh embodiment, as long as the main substrate case M40 has a gate, there is no problem with the method of injecting the resin material (plastic) in any manner.

<<Gate type>>
When a resin material (plastic) is injected from a restricted gate, there are various types of gates having various characteristics. Examples include a side gate type in which resin material (plastic) is injected from a gate placed on the side of a molded product, a pin gate type in which multiple molded products are molded from a single mold, and a tunnel arrangement in a mold. There is a submarine gate type that injects a resin material (plastic) from a gate that is designed. The main substrate case M40 used in the seventh embodiment may be molded using any of these gate types.

As described above, the main board case M40 described as the seventh embodiment is formed. Hereinafter, the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail.

<<Construction of the Main Circuit Board Case M40>>
First, the configuration of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a front view of the main board case M40 used in the seventh embodiment. As described above, the main board case M40 is molded using a resin material (plastic) as a raw material. The surface of the main circuit board case M40 (for example, the surface on the front side that can be seen by a player or an administrator of the game arcade when the front door DU is opened) has, for example, a sticker on which the model information of the game machine is described. A seal member (not shown) having information related to the game machine, such as a crimped recording sheet for recording crime prevention measures taken at the production factory, etc., is affixed, including a model sticker, etc., which is a member. It also has a gate portion M80 that includes a gate trace (state after the gate is cut) in which a resin material (plastic) is injected. Note that the shape of the surface of the main board case M40 in FIG. 128 is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, it may be square, rectangular, or trapezoidal.

<<Accommodation diagram of main control board M>>
Next, FIG. 129 is a front view when the main control board M is accommodated in the main board case M40. When housing the main control board M in the main board case M40, the main control board M is housed so as to be sandwiched between the main board case M40 and other case members (not shown). Generally, the main control board M is fixed inside the main board case M40 by being integrated with the case member by screw fitting.

The main control board M includes a microprocessor CPUMC as an IC element having a CPU function, other IC elements IC01 to IC05 not having a CPU function, resistors R1 to R6, capacitors C01 to C02, and a connector CN01. to CN04 are implemented. Further, on the main control board M, there are arranged a setting display LED M90 capable of displaying setting values, a performance display device SH in which 4-digit segments (to be described later) are arranged in a horizontal line, and the like. Other electronic components such as diodes and LEDs may also be mounted on the main control board M, but they are omitted from the drawing.

<<Gate Arrangement of Main Circuit Board Case M40>>
The main board case M40 is arranged so as to cover the main control board M (the dotted line in FIG. 129 corresponds to the main board case M40). It is configured so that the components and the like mounted on the main control board M can be visually recognized through it.

As described above, the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment is configured to have the gate portion M80 on the surface. These gate portions M80 are preferably arranged at positions that do not hinder the visibility of the members arranged on the main control board M in particular. For example, as shown in FIG. 129, the model sticker, the performance display device SH, the setting display LED M90, etc., which are confirmed by the administrator of the game arcade or the National Police Agency through the main board case M40, are arranged at positions that do not hinder the visual recognition. An example is a pattern that More specifically, the gate part M80 is not arranged at a position where the type sticker, the performance display device SH, and the setting display LED M90 are projected onto the main board case M40 in the direction perpendicular to the main control board M. It is

<effect>
By arranging the gate portion M80 in this way, the visibility is obstructed by the gate portion M80 when the manager of the player confirms the information related to the gaming machine from the performance display device SH or the setting display LED M90. It is possible to prevent In addition, by configuring the gate portion M80 so as not to overlap various seal members such as a model seal, it is possible to prevent the seal members from peeling off.

In addition, it is preferable not to place the gate part M80 at a position where the CPUMC is projected onto the main board case M40 in the direction perpendicular to the main control board M (place the gate part M80 at a position other than the projected position). be. Although the details will be described later, in the main substrate case M40, the gate portion M80 is a fragile portion, so that the main control substrate M inside the main substrate case M40 is tampered with through the gate portion M80. There is a possibility that it will be broken. Therefore, the gate part M80 is not arranged at the position where the CPUMC is projected onto the main board case M40 in the direction perpendicular to the main control board M (the gate part M80 is arranged at a position other than the projected position). Therefore, it has a main control chip C that controls the operation of the game machine and a built-in ROMC 110 that stores a program related to the operation control of the game machine, so that the gate part M80 can be kept away from the CPUMC that affects the game result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent so-called tampering such as falsification of the program through the gate section M80.

Further, when a current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) arranged on the main control board M, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such an IC element is installed near the CPUMC, the noise generated by the IC element may adversely affect the operation of the CPUMC. should not be placed in the vicinity of

In the seventh embodiment, no IC elements are arranged in the vicinity of the CPUMC on the main control board M. FIG. Specifically, in any IC element, the length of the short side of the upper surface of the rectangular package body W1 (dotted line in FIG. 129 The length of W1 is equal to or greater than the length of one resistor (R1 to R6) (the length when mounted).

Thus, in the seventh embodiment, all of the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board M are arranged at a distance of W1 or more from the CPUMC. With this configuration, even if noise is generated from the IC element, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise will adversely affect the operation of the CPUMC.

<<Structure of Gate Portion M80>>
Next, the structure of the gate portion M80 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the main circuit board case M40 in the seventh embodiment, and a side view of the main circuit board case M40 viewed from the direction of side A. FIG. The main board case M40 has a gate part M80 on its surface (for example, the surface that can be visually recognized by a player or a manager of the game arcade when the front door DU is opened), as described with reference to FIG. , the gate portion M80 has a slight recess compared to the portion other than the gate portion M80 on the surface.

In the side view of the main board case M40 in FIG. 130, the main board case A side (the surface described above) has the gate portion M80, and the main board case B side does not have the gate portion. Here, the surface A of the main board case will be described in detail. The surface A of the main circuit board case is, for example, the surface close to the direction of the front door DU from the center of the short axis in the side view of the main circuit board case M40 in FIG. , is the surface near the main control board M direction. In other words, the A side of the main board case is closer to the front door DU, and similarly the B side of the main board case is closer to the main control board M. In other words, the main control board M is provided on the B side of the main board case from the center of the short axis.

FIG. 131 shows the details of the structure of the gate portion M80. The detailed structure of the gate portion M80 of the main substrate case M40 in the seventh embodiment may be configured as described in detail below.

<<Structural Pattern 1 of Gate Portion M80>>
First, as a structural pattern of the first gate portion M80, the surface B of the main substrate case is flat. The gate portion M80, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 131, is composed of one protrusion and two recesses, and is formed on a plane extending horizontally from the surface A of the main substrate case (the portion other than the gate portion M80). On the other hand, it is separated by a distance A from the tip of the convex portion and by a distance B from the tip of the concave portion. At this time, in the relationship between A and B, it is preferable that the relationship A<B holds true. It should be noted that the one convex portion forming the gate portion M80 is a trace of the gate after the gate has been cut. Alternatively, it may be designed so that A=0.

<Effect 1>
Since the convex portion of the gate portion M80 is separated from the surface A of the main substrate case by a distance A, for example, when removing the main substrate case M40 from the game machine, when the confirming person holds the part related to the gate portion M80, It is possible to prevent accidents such as dropping the main board case M40 due to a slip of the hand.

<Effect 2>
In addition, since the concave portion of the gate portion M80 is separated from the surface of the main substrate case A by the distance B, it is possible to smoothly flow in resin molding (plastic) when molding the main substrate case M40.

<Effect 3>
Further, since the main substrate case B surface directly below the gate portion M80 of the main substrate case A surface is flat, when the main control substrate M is viewed through the main substrate case M40, the surface related to the gate portion M80 is flat. Even when viewed from above, the main control board M can be viewed without reducing visibility due to light refraction.

<<Structural Pattern 2 of Gate Portion M80>>
Next, as a second structural pattern of the gate portion M80, the main substrate case B is recessed (bulging outward from the main substrate case M40). The gate portion M80 in the lower part of the figure is composed of one protrusion and two recesses on the side of the main substrate case A surface, and is formed on the surface extending in the horizontal direction from the main substrate case A surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80). On the other hand, it is the same as the first pattern that it is separated from the main substrate case A surface (flat surface) by a distance A from the tip of the projection and by a distance B from the tip of the recess.

In addition, the main board case B surface is recessed, and the distance from the deepest part of the recess (the part that bulges out the most outward) to the protrusion on the main board case A side is C, and the main board The distance from the tip of the concave portion of the case B surface to the horizontal extension surface of the main substrate case B surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) is D, and in the relationship between C and D, D<C. It is preferable that the relationship is established. Further, in the seventh embodiment, from the horizontally extending surface of the main substrate case A surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) to the horizontally extending surface of the main substrate case B surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) is also C, but it is not limited to this. ) in the horizontal direction, C<C', C>C', or C≈C'.

<effect>
In this way, the tip of the concave portion of the main circuit board case B surface is separated from the horizontally extended surface of the main circuit board case B surface (the portion other than the gate portion M80) by the distance D, so that, for example, the main circuit board case A surface It is possible to compensate for the decrease in member strength related to the gate portion M80. In other words, the gate portion M80 is recessed compared to the flat surface, and if a force that tries to destroy the main substrate case M40 is applied, the gate portion M80 will be thinned by the distance of the recess (for example, the distance B of the structural pattern 1). Therefore, compared with the horizontally extending surface of the A surface of the main substrate case (the portion other than the gate portion M80), it is configured to be prevented from being easily destroyed. In this way, since the surface of the main substrate case B is recessed by a predetermined distance even from the surface related to the gate portion M80, the material strength equivalent to that of the portion other than the gate portion M80 of the surface of the main substrate case A can be obtained. can be kept.

In the seventh embodiment, the arrangement and configuration of the gate portion M80 in the main substrate case M40 have been described in detail. member), and it is possible to obtain the same effect as the gate portion M80 in the main substrate case M40 described above.

<<<<Eighth Embodiment Power Off and Sensor Detection>>>>>
Next, as an eighth embodiment, sensors related to the detection of game medals installed inside the game machine (for example, insertion reception sensor D10s, first insertion sensor D20s, second insertion sensor D30s, shoot sensor D40s, first payout Sensor H1 and second payout sensor H2) are in the OFF state before detecting the passage of game medals, or after detecting the notification of game medals, the sensor is in the OFF→ON state, and furthermore, the game When a medal passes through the detection area of the sensor and the sensor is turned on or off and the power is turned off, processing at the time of power interruption and processing related to detection of passage of game medals (eighth embodiment Now, the credit addition processing of game medals related to the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s, the count processing of the insertion monitoring counter related to the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, the first payout sensor H1, the second The relationship with the counting process of the number of payout game medals related to the payout sensor H2 will be described.

<<<Relationship between power failure processing and game medal credit addition processing>>>
First, game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s (OFF→ON→OFF) in the medal selector DS, which is the path of the game medals, and the game medals are inserted without causing an error. It flows downward through the medal flow path DR in the selector DS.

The timing at which game medal credits are added is as described in detail in the third embodiment. When the state is changed from off to on, the inserted game medals are detected as bet medals and can be added to the credits, but the present invention is not limited to this. A game medal inserted at the timing when either the on/off state of the second insertion sensor D30s is switched may be detected as a bet medal and added to the credit. The timing at which credits are added to the game medals in the eighth embodiment, which will be described in detail below, is when the first insertion sensor D20s is turned from ON to OFF and the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from OFF to ON. configured as possible. As described above, "occurrence of power failure" in this example means that the supply of power to the gaming machine is interrupted, and "detection of power failure" means that the gaming machine detects power failure. to detect the occurrence.

The time from when the power failure occurs to when the power failure is detected can be determined with some degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power failure to the detection of a power failure varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that greatly deviates from the design value may occur on rare occasions, 90% or more of the values are kept within the range of the design value under a basic environment. Below, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and as a comparison of time values, even if an event that deviates from the exemplified range occurs, it will not deviate as a design value. it is not. In addition, the same applies to the time other than the time from when the power failure occurs to when the power failure is detected. Applicable to configuration.

In order to define the relationship between the processing at the time of power failure and the credit addition processing for game medals, T1 is the time from when the power failure occurs until the power failure is detected, and the insertion reception sensor D10s from OFF→ON to the second insertion sensor Let T2 be the time from ON→OFF of D30s, and T3 be the time from ON→ON of second introduction sensor D30s from OFF→ON of first insertion sensor D20s. The relationships among T1, T2, and T3 applicable to this example are detailed below. Although the details will be described later, it should be added that the starting point of T2 is only an example.

<<Action pattern 1 of power failure processing and credit addition processing for game medals>>
FIG. 133 shows an example of the action pattern of the power-off process and the game medal credit addition process reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to insertion included in this configuration are an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s, and the state of detection of game medals by these sensors is illustrated. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (a1) to (a8), and the timing changes from (a1) to (a8) as time elapses.

Under the condition that power is supplied to the game machine and the blocker is on, the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned off→on at the timing of (a1). Both the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off. Next, at the timing of (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at the timing of (a3), power failure occurs. Next, at the timing of (a4), the first insertion sensor D20s is turned from off to on.

Next, at the timing of (a5), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from off to on (the first insertion sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing of (a6), the first insertion sensor D20s is switched from ON to OFF (the second insertion sensor D30s remains ON), and credit addition processing is executed. Next, at the timing of (a7), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from on to off. Next, at the timing of (a8), the game machine detects the power cutoff and executes power cutoff processing. That is, in the same figure, even if the game medals pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s and the power is turned off after the insertion reception sensor D10s is switched from ON to OFF, the second insertion sensor D30s is detected at the timing of (a7). After the is switched from on to off, the game machine detects the power interruption and the power interruption processing is executed, so the credit addition processing can be executed normally. In the eighth embodiment, interrupt processing for detecting power interruption is configured to execute power interruption processing in the same interrupt processing, but the present invention is not limited to this. can be processed by separate interrupts.

Further, in the figure, the relationship among the periods T1, T2, and T3 is T3<T1<T2. By setting T3<T1, the power-off process can be executed after the credit addition process is executed. In addition, it can be said that the relationship of T1<T2 and T3<T2 is a clear relationship based on the flow-down process of game medals.

<effect>
In this way, even when the power is cut off while the game medals are flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after passing the insertion acceptance sensor D10s), the power is turned off after the credit addition process for the game medals is executed. By configuring to perform time processing, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals, and even though the game medals are inserted into the gaming machine (not returned) because the blocker is on. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that credits are not added.

It should be noted that the configuration relating to the input sensor and the power-off may be configured as in the following (1-1) to (1-3) or (2-1) to (2-3).
(1-1) After the input reception sensor D10s is turned from off to on, the power is cut off (timing of (a3) in FIG. 133).
(1-2) Before the first insertion sensor D20s turns from OFF to ON, the game machine detects power interruption and executes power interruption processing (timing between (a3) and (a4) in FIG. 133).
(1-3) By turning the blocker from ON to OFF, game medals can be returned without executing credit addition processing.
(2-1) After the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned from off to on, the power is cut off (timing of (a3) in FIG. 133).
(2-2) The gaming machine detects power interruption before the second insertion sensor D30s turns from off to on, and executes power interruption processing (timing between (a4) and (a5) in FIG. 133).
(2-3) By turning the blocker from ON to OFF, game medals can be returned without executing credit addition processing.

<<Action pattern 2 of power failure processing and credit addition processing for game medals>>
FIG. 134 is an example of the action pattern of the power-off process and the game medal credit addition process reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors related to insertion included in this configuration are an insertion reception sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s, and the state of detection of game medals by these sensors is illustrated. In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (b1) to (b8), and the timing changes from (b1) to (b8) as time elapses.

Under the condition that power is supplied to the game machine and the blocker is on, the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned off→on at the timing of (b1). Both the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off. Next, at the timing of (b2), the input acceptance sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at the timing of (b3), the first insertion sensor D20s is turned from off to on. Next, at the timing of (a4), power failure occurs.

Next, at the timing of (b5), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from off to on (the first insertion sensor D20s remains on). Next, at the timing of (b6), the first insertion sensor D20s is switched from ON to OFF (the second insertion sensor D30s remains ON), and credit addition processing is executed. Next, at the timing of (b7), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from on to off. Next, at the timing of (a8), the gaming machine detects power cutoff and executes power cutoff processing. That is, in the same figure, even when the game medal reaches the first insertion sensor D20s and the power supply is cut off after the first insertion sensor D20s is switched from off to on, the second insertion is performed at the timing of (b7). After the sensor D30s is switched from ON to OFF, the gaming machine detects power interruption and the power interruption processing is executed, so that the credit addition processing can be executed normally.

Further, in the figure, the relationship among the periods T1, T2, and T3 is T3<T1<T2. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that T1<T3<T2 holds. In either configuration, as shown in the same figure, the credit addition processing is completed even when the power is turned off after the first insertion sensor D20s is switched from off to on at the timing of (b3). Power-off processing can be executed later.

<effect>
In this way, even when a power failure occurs while the game medals are flowing down the medal flow path DR (immediately after the first insertion sensor D20s turns from off to on), the game medal credit addition process is executed. By configuring to perform power-off processing after the blocker is turned on, it is possible to reliably add credits to the inserted game medals. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credit is not added despite the fact that the credit is not added.

<<Modified example of operation pattern of power failure processing and credit addition processing for game medals>>
In addition, as a modification of the action pattern of the power-off process and the game medal credit addition process, for example, the power-off occurs when the first insertion sensor D20s is on and the second insertion sensor D30s is on. In this case, after the first insertion sensor D20s is turned off and the second insertion sensor D30s is turned off, the power-off processing is executed, that is, the power-off processing is executed after the credit addition processing is executed. may be configured.

<effect>
Even if a power failure occurs while game medals are being inserted, the inserted game medals can be reliably added to the credits by executing the power failure processing after executing the credit addition processing for the game medals. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credits are not added even though the game medals have been inserted into the gaming machine.

In addition, as a modified example of the operation patterns of the power-off processing and the game medal credit addition processing, it is possible to configure the power-off detection timing to be different. For example, the timing at which the power failure occurs is the same as <<action pattern 1 of power failure processing and game medal credit addition processing>>. And when the timing is before reaching the first insertion sensor D20s, the flow of processing based on the timing of occurrence of various events based on pattern 1 is that power is supplied to the gaming machine and the blocker is on. Under certain circumstances, at the timing of (a1), the input reception sensor D10s turns from off to on. Both the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are off. Next, at the timing of (a2), the input reception sensor D10s is turned from on to off. Next, at the timing of (a3), power failure occurs. Next, at the timing of (a4), the gaming machine detects the power failure, the power failure processing is executed, and then the blocker is turned off. With this configuration, even if the power is interrupted immediately after the inserted game medals pass the insertion reception sensor D10s, the power interruption processing is executed before the game medals reach the first insertion sensor D20s. Since it can be executed, the credit addition processing is not executed, and since the blocker is turned off, the game medals are returned from the return slot, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

<effect>
By executing the power-off process before the game medals reach the first insertion sensor D20s in this way, when the credit addition process for the inserted game medals is not executed due to the occurrence of the power-off, The game medals can be returned to the player, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantageous situation for the player that the credits are not added even though the game medals have been inserted into the game machine. .

In the eighth embodiment, "the time from the insertion reception sensor D10s OFF→ON to the second insertion sensor D30s ON→OFF" is set to T2, but is not limited to this, and "the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot. T2 may be the time from when the game medals inserted through the medal slot become invisible to the player until the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on and then turned off. T2 may be the time from the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on to off", or "the time when part of the game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot can no longer be visually recognized by the player. D30s ON→OFF" may be set to T2.

<<<Relationship between power failure processing and count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter>>>
Next, the relationship between the timing related to the counting process by the game medal insertion monitoring counter and the timing at which power is not supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of a power failure will be described. Referring to FIG. 135, in the path of the game medals in the medal selector DS, the passage member of the medals after passing the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s (in the third embodiment, this is referred to as the chute main body). ). In FIG. 135, a shoot sensor D40s is provided downstream of the first throw sensor D20s and the second throw sensor D30s. It is a sensor related to detection of whether or not tokens are inserted normally in the same way as , and in particular, it can detect errors that have occurred after the credit addition process has already been executed (for example, an inserted token retention error, an inserted token reverse flow error, etc.). is configured as follows.

The timing at which the game medal insertion monitoring counter performs the counting process is as described in detail in the third embodiment. Addition processing from 0 to 1 is performed by the monitoring counter. Then, the game medals flow down the path in the medal selector DS, and, for example, at the timing when the shoot sensor D40s turns from off to on, subtraction processing from 1 to 0 is performed at the insertion monitoring counter. The timing of adding (subtracting) the game medals by the input monitoring counter is not limited to this. As will be described later, for example, at the timing when the first shooting sensor D40s turns from off to on, addition processing from 0 to 1 is performed by the shooting monitoring counter, and at the timing when the shoot sensor D40s turns from on to off. Any configuration that can monitor whether or not the game medals have passed normally may be employed, such as a configuration in which the insertion monitoring counter performs subtraction processing from 1 to 0. Further, the count processing of the game medals by the inserted monitoring counter may be performed in the order of subtraction→addition (0→−1 and then −1→0) instead of performing in the order of addition→subtraction. As a configuration for judging that an error has occurred by the input monitoring counter, for example, an error occurs when the counter value C of the input monitoring counter becomes "C<-3 or C<3". It may be configured to determine that there is

In order to define the relationship between the processing at the time of power failure and the count processing by the insertion monitoring counter of game medals, T4 is the time from when the power failure occurs until the power failure is detected, and from the second insertion sensor D30s on→off. Let T5 be the time from off to on of the shoot sensor D40s, and the relationship between T4 and T5 will be described in detail below. The time from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure can be determined with some degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power failure to the detection of a power failure varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that greatly deviates from the design value may occur on rare occasions, 90% or more of the values are kept within the range of the design value under a basic environment. Below, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it will not deviate as a design value. There will be no In addition, the same applies to the time other than the time from when the power failure occurs to when the power failure is detected. Applicable to configuration.

<<Action Pattern 1 of Power-Off Process and Counting Process by the Insertion Monitoring Counter for Game Medals>>
FIG. 136 is an example of a timing chart of each sensor reflecting action patterns of power-off processing and count processing by a game medal insertion monitoring counter. The sensors related to insertion shown in the figure are the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected passage of game medals (ON or OFF). Further, the input monitoring counter is configured to perform addition/subtraction processing at specified timing (in this action pattern, the addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF, and the shoot sensor Subtraction processing is performed at the timing when D40s turns from off to on). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are defined as (c1) to (c6). ), a power failure occurs (the timing of the various sensors at this time is that the first insertion sensor D20s is on, the second insertion sensor D30s is off, and the shoot sensor D40s is off). Next, at the timing of (c2), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from off to on. Next, at the timing of (c3), the second insertion sensor D30s is switched from ON to OFF, and the insertion monitoring counter executes the game medal addition processing, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter changes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first insertion sensor D20s is turned from on to off at the timing between (c2) and (c3). Next, at the timing of (c4), the shooting sensor D40s is turned from off to on, and the game medal subtraction process is executed by the inserted monitoring counter, and the counter value of the inserted monitoring counter changes from 1 to 0.

Next, at the timing of (c5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned from on to off. Next, at the timing of (c6), the gaming machine detects power interruption, and power interruption processing is executed. In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting power failure and the process for power failure are executed in the same interrupt process. , power-off processing can be executed by separate interrupt processing. Also, in the figure, the subtraction process of the counter value of the injection monitoring counter is executed at the timing of (c4), but the injection monitoring counter is decremented at the timing of (C5) (timing when the shoot sensor turns from ON to OFF). It may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the counter value.

As described above, in the same figure, even when the power is cut off at the timing before the game medals reach the second insertion sensor D30s, after the shoot sensor D40s turns from ON to OFF at the timing of (c5), Since the gaming machine detects power interruption and executes power interruption processing, credit addition processing and counter value addition/subtraction processing of the insertion monitoring counter can be executed normally.

Further, in the figure, the relationship between the periods T4 and T5 is T4>T5. With this configuration, even if the power supply is interrupted immediately before executing the adding process of the insertion monitoring counter (the first insertion sensor D20s is turned on and the second insertion sensor D30s is turned off), the insertion of game medals can be monitored. The power-off processing can be configured to be executed after the addition processing and subtraction processing by the counter are completed.

<effect>
After the count processing (0→1→0) by the game medal insertion monitoring counter is executed, the power failure processing is performed, thereby normally executing the game medal count processing by the insertion monitoring counter based on the detection by various sensors. Therefore, it becomes possible to normally detect an error or the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

<<Action Pattern 2 of Power-off Process and Counting Process by the Insertion Monitoring Counter for Game Medals>>
FIG. 137 is an example of a timing chart of each sensor reflecting action patterns of power-off processing and count processing by a game medal insertion monitoring counter. In this action pattern, the timing for detecting power failure is different from that in action pattern 1. FIG. The sensors here are the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected passage of game medals (on or off). Also, in the input monitoring counter, addition/subtraction processing is performed at specified timing (in this action pattern, addition processing is performed at the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF, and when the shoot sensor D40s turns from OFF to ON. Subtraction processing is performed at the timing when it becomes). In this action pattern, the timings at which various events occur are (d1) to (d5). is a state in which the first throw sensor D20s is on, the second throw sensor D30s is off, and the shoot sensor D40s is off). Next, at the timing of (d2), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from off to on. Next, at the timing of (d3), the second insertion sensor D30s is switched from ON to OFF, and the insertion monitoring counter executes the game medal addition processing, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter changes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first insertion sensor D20s is switched from ON to OFF at the timing between (d2) and (d3). Next, (d4) the gaming machine detects power interruption, and power interruption processing is executed. Next, at the timing of (d5), game medals reach the shoot sensor D40s, but the game medals are not detected by the shoot sensor D40s because the power-off process has been executed. In addition, in the example of the figure, the case where the game medals pass the blocker before the blocker is turned off is illustrated.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting power failure and the process for power failure are executed in the same interrupt process. , power-off processing can be executed by separate interrupt processing.

As described above, in the same figure, even if the power is cut off at the timing before the game medals reach the second insertion sensor D30s, the gaming machine detects the power cut off at the timing of (d4) and the power is turned off. Since the time processing is executed, the subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter cannot be executed before the power-off processing is executed, but the credit addition processing can be executed before the power-off processing. Also, the insertion monitoring counter is configured so that, for example, an error occurs when the counter value reaches 5 (even if the counter value deviates due to the insertion of one game medal, the error is not immediately detected). Therefore, even in the event of a power outage such as a power outage during operation of the amusement arcade, a single power outage will not be judged as an error related to the input monitoring counter, so credit addition processing will be performed. can be executed normally, the normal continuation of the game can be ensured.

<<Action Pattern 3 of Power-off Processing and Counting Processing by Game Medal Insertion Monitoring Counter>>
FIG. 138 is an example of a timing chart of each sensor reflecting action patterns of power-off processing and count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter. In this action pattern, the timing of detecting the power interruption is different from <<action pattern 1 of power interruption processing and count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter>>, and the timing of performing the count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter. is configured to be the same as <<action pattern 1 of processing at the time of power failure and counting processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter>>. In this action pattern, addition processing is performed by the game medal insertion monitoring counter at the timing when the second insertion sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF, and subtraction processing is performed at the timing for the shoot sensor D40s from OFF to ON. The sensors here are the second insertion sensor D30s and the shoot sensor D40s, and indicate whether or not these sensors have detected passage of game medals (on or off). In this action pattern, timings at which various events occur are designated as (e1) to (e6), and as a flow of processing, the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from off to on at the timing of (e1). Next, at the timing of (e2), the second insertion sensor D30s is turned from on to off, and the insertion monitoring counter executes the game medal addition processing, and the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter changes from 0 to 1. Although not shown, the first insertion sensor D20s is switched from ON to OFF at the timing between (e2) and (e3). Next, power failure occurs at the timing of (e3). Next, at the timing of (e4), the shot sensor D40s is turned from off to on, and the game medal subtraction processing is executed by the inserted monitoring counter, and the counter value of the inserted monitoring counter changes from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing of (e5), the shoot sensor D40s is turned from on to off. Next, at the timing of (e6), the gaming machine detects power failure, and power failure processing is executed.

In the eighth embodiment, the process for detecting power failure and the process for power failure are executed in the same interrupt process. , power-off processing can be executed by separate interrupt processing.

As described above, in the same figure, after the game medals have passed the second insertion sensor D30s, even if the power supply is cut off after the execution of the credit addition process, the gaming machine is turned off at the timing of (e6). is detected and the power-off process is executed, the power-off process can be executed after the addition process and the subtraction process of the on-monitoring counter are executed.

Moreover, in the same figure, it is preferable that the above-described periods T4 and T5 have a relationship of T4>T5. Since the detection of the power failure is performed after the shoot sensor D40s is switched from on to off, the period T4 from the occurrence of the power failure to the detection of the power failure is the game token count processing (addition and addition) by the insertion monitoring counter. Subtraction) is preferably longer than the period (for example, the period of (e2) to (e4)). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the power-off process can be performed after the game medal count process by the insertion monitoring counter is reliably performed.

With this configuration, by performing the power-off processing after the count processing by the game medal insertion monitoring counter is executed, the game medal count processing by the insertion monitoring counter based on detection by various sensors can be performed normally. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect an error or the like related to the shoot sensor D40s.

136 to 138, the timing of the addition process of the input monitoring counter is the timing when the second input sensor D30s turns from ON to OFF, the timing of the subtraction process and the timing when the shoot sensor D40s changes from OFF to ON. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured as follows, and there is no problem with any combination of the timing of addition processing and the timing of subtraction processing. (A1) Timing of addition process of input monitoring counter: First input sensor D20s OFF→ON (A2) Timing of addition process of input monitoring counter: First input sensor D20s ON→OFF (A3) Addition process of input monitoring counter Timing: Second input sensor D30s OFF→ON (A4) Timing of addition processing of input monitoring counter: Second input sensor D30s ON→OFF (B1) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s OFF→ON (B2 ) Timing of decrement processing of input monitoring counter: Shoot sensor D40s ON→OFF

136 to 138, the configuration of the insertion monitoring counter for the gaming machine having the shoot sensor D40s was described in detail, but the configuration of the insertion monitoring counter may be applied to a gaming machine having the insertion reception sensor D10s. In that case, the timing of addition processing/subtraction processing of the input monitoring counter may be configured as follows, and the timing of addition processing and the timing of subtraction processing may be combined in any way.
(C1) Timing of addition processing of input monitoring counter: Input reception sensor D10s OFF→ON (C2) Timing of addition processing of input monitoring counter: Input reception sensor D10s ON→OFF (D1) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: First input sensor D20s OFF→ON (D2) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: First input sensor D20s ON→OFF (D3) Timing of subtraction processing of input monitoring counter: Second input sensor D30s OFF→ON (D4 ) Timing of decrementing processing of insertion monitoring counter: Second insertion sensor D30s ON→OFF In addition, when the game medals pass the insertion reception sensor D10s, the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter is incremented by 1, and then the blocker is turned off. Therefore, when the game medals are returned, the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter remains incremented by one. Even in such a case, the gaming machine according to the present example is configured to correct the counter value of the insertion monitoring counter to 0 when the blocker is turned from OFF to ON thereafter. It is possible to configure so that an abnormality does not occur in the input monitoring counter determination process.

In this example, the counter value of the loading monitoring counter is incremented by 1 and then decremented by 1. ”), and any of the above-described configurations can be applied.

<<<Relationship between power failure processing and game medal payout count processing>>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, a description will be given of the timing of counting the number of game medals to be paid out as the timing at which power is not supplied to the gaming machine due to the occurrence of a power failure. The process of counting the number of payout game medals is performed at the timing of 4 in FIG. 120, for example. Specifically, when the release urging means H70 is displaced to the initial position again, a signal indicating that the first payout sensor H1 is in the ON state is sent to the main control board M, and the payout number counting process is started. configured to take place. Incidentally, as the payout number counting process, for example, it is common to count using an addition process of adding normally paid out game medals such as 0→1→2 . . . Note that the payout count process is a process of counting by 1 (which may be added to or subtracted from the counter value) when it is determined that the game machine has paid out one game medal.

The time from when the power failure occurs to when the power failure is detected can be determined with some degree of freedom by the program that controls the operation of the game machine, and the design value is determined according to the capacity of the mounted capacitor. Note that the time from the occurrence of a power failure to the detection of a power failure varies somewhat depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value is a value that includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that greatly deviates from the design value may occur on rare occasions, 90% or more of the values are kept within the range of the design value under a basic environment. Below, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range illustrated as a comparison of time values occurs, it will not deviate as a design value. There will be no In addition, the same applies to the time other than the time from when the power failure occurs to when the power failure is detected. Applicable to configuration.

4 and 120, the first payout sensor H10s in FIG. 4 is the second payout sensor H2, the second payout sensor H20s in FIG. , the first payout sensor H1=on and the second payout sensor H2=off. That is, by the displacement of the release urging means H70,
First payout sensor H1 = ON / Second payout sensor H2 = OFF (initial position)
1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = on 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = ON Second payout sensor H2 = OFF (initial position)
This is the sensor state.

<<Pattern of operation of power failure processing and game medal payout count processing>>
FIG. 139 shows an example of the action pattern of the power-off process and the process of counting the number of payout game medals reflected along the timing chart of each sensor. The sensors here are the first payout sensor H1 and the second payout sensor H2. In addition, in this action pattern, the timing at which power failure occurs is
Action pattern A: The first payout sensor H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is off. Action pattern B: The first payout sensor H1 is on→off and the second payout sensor H2 is off. The relationship between the process and the process of counting the number of payout game medals will be described.

<<Pattern A of power failure processing and processing to count the number of game medals to be paid out>>
First, as the processing flow of the action pattern A, first, after the release urging means H70 starts to displace from the initial position, a power failure occurs (the timing of the various sensors at this time is the first payout sensor H1 is on and the second payout sensor H2 is off.). After that, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70,
1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = on 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = ON Second payout sensor H2 = OFF (initial position)
Then, the payout number counting process is executed.

After that, the game machine detects the power cutoff and executes the power cutoff processing. In the eighth embodiment, power interruption is detected and power interruption processing is executed at the same interrupt interval. However, the present invention is not limited to this. can be processed by separate interrupts.

<effect>
With this configuration, even if the power is cut off after the discharge urging means H70 starts to move from the initial position, the power cut-off process can be executed after the payout count process is executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the situation where the player obtains an unfair profit, such as the number of paid-out game medals not being counted even though the game medals have been paid out.

<<Action Pattern B of Power-Off Process and Process of Counting the Number of Discharged Game Medals>>
First, as the processing flow of action pattern B, first, the release urging means H70 starts to displace from the initial position,
First payout sensor H1 = ON / Second payout sensor H2 = OFF (initial position)
After the first payout sensor H1=off and the second payout sensor H2=off, the power is cut off. After that, due to the displacement of the release urging means H70,
1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = on 1st payout sensor H1 = off, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off 1st payout sensor H1 = on, 2nd payout sensor H2 = off (initial position)
Then, the payout number counting process is executed.

After that, the game machine detects the power cutoff and executes the power cutoff processing. In the eighth embodiment, power interruption is detected and power interruption processing is executed at the same interrupt interval. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform processing at the execution timing of separate interrupt processing.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, even if power is cut off after the release urging means H70 starts to displace from the initial position, the power cut-off processing can be executed after the payout count processing is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player obtains an unfair advantage, such as the number of paid-out game medals not being counted even though the game medals have been paid out.

The execution timing (execution trigger) of the payout counting process is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. Second payout sensor H2 = ON Timing (2) First payout sensor H1 = OFF/Second payout sensor H2 = ON → First payout sensor H1 = OFF/Second payout sensor H2 = OFF It may be the timing.

<<<Ninth Embodiment Stop Button Operation and Reel Stop Control>>>
Next, a configuration relating to stop button and reel control applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail below as a ninth embodiment.

In the ninth embodiment, reel stop control in operating the reel stop buttons (here, the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 correspond) will be described. In the operation control of the stepping motor related to the reel stop control, as described above, the rotation of the reel is stopped after transitioning to the "reel deceleration state", which is the reel drive state shown in (6) of FIG. All the phases of the stepping motor (for example, four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) are excited (four-phase excitation) to stop the reel. In the ninth embodiment, the process in which all the phases (for example, the four phases of Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3) are excited (4-phase excitation) may be referred to as "4-phase excitation process". be.

In the reel-type game machine, the stop button sensor built into each stop button is turned off→on in response to the operation of the stop button (corresponding to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Alternatively, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute control for stopping the spinning reels, based on the information indicating that it has changed from on to off. Note that the operation of the stop button in the ninth embodiment indicates a physical operation, such as pressing the left stop button D41 or leaving the left stop button D41 pressed. . A state in which the stop button is not operated may be referred to as, for example, a state in which the stop button is not pressed. Also, the change of the stop button sensor from off to on in a situation where the stop button is valid may be referred to as acceptance of the stop button operation.

In the ninth embodiment, mainly the operation of the stop button for stopping the spinning reel and the stop control of the reel will be described. In the ninth embodiment, in order to explain in detail the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the reel stop control,
Pattern 1: 4-phase excitation processing is executed after the stop button sensor turns from ON to OFF Pattern 2: 4-phase excitation processing is executed before the stop button sensor turns from ON to OFF. . In the ninth embodiment, it is assumed that the relationship between the operation of the stop button and the reel stop control has these two patterns. The four-phase excitation process is step motor control executed when the reel driving state is the reel deceleration state, as described above.

The operation of the stop buttons (corresponding to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) and the timing at which the stop button sensor changes from off to on and from on to off will be described. The stop button sensor is a sensor built into each stop button, and when the stop button is pressed by a predetermined distance from the initial position (position corresponding to the non-operating state), it turns from off to on (in the initial position OFF), and when the stop button sensor is turned from OFF to ON, the main control board M is configured to be able to execute reel rotation stop processing according to the flow of FIG. Although the details will be described later, the predetermined distance for satisfying the condition that the stop button sensor turns from off to on can be changed as appropriate. As an example, the maximum distance at which the stop button can be pressed may be set, or a distance half the maximum distance at which the stop button can be pressed may be set.

<<Pattern in which the 4-phase excitation process ends after the stop button sensor is turned off>>
FIG. 140 is an example of an image diagram drawn in time series when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. In FIG. 140, the operations from the operation of the stop button to the stop of the reels in the ninth embodiment are divided into frames (a1) to (f1) for each focused event. In the ninth embodiment, the left reel M51 is the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels, and the left stop button D41 is the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first. is not limited to For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be noted that the configuration is not only applicable to reels and stop buttons, but is applicable to first stop, second stop and third stop for all pressing orders.

Also, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration waiting state, until the left reel stops. shows a case of stopping after rotating the designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum sliding). In addition, in the case of rotating the maximum distance in the design, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state. The time value until the reel stops (sometimes referred to as the sliding time) should have some leeway so that it does not exceed the maximum legal value when the maximum legal sliding time is 190 ms. As an example in this example, the design maximum sliding time is set to 185 ms, and the distance corresponding to 185 ms is set as the design maximum distance.

(a1) to (f1) in FIG. 140 will be described in detail. First, in (a1), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is at the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and in the state of being pressed by the distance x from the initial position (b1), the left stop button sensor turns from off to on. Become. Here, the distance by which the left stop button D41 is pushed from the initial position is x. As will be described later, the left stop button D41 is configured so that it can be pushed by a maximum distance d from the initial position, and it is assumed that 0<x<d is established as a relation of the pushed distance. At the timing of (b1), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant speed rotation). When the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state, the reel (left reel M51) is stopped regardless of the operation state of the stop button (time required before being pushed). is executed, and the reel (left reel M51) is stopped after moving the designed maximum distance from the timing of (b1).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pushed down until the left stop button D41 is pushed down by the maximum distance d from the initial position (c1). In (c1), the left stop button sensor remains on, and the reel drive state of the left reel M51 maintains the reel deceleration standby state. Note that the time value from (b1) to (c1) varies depending on the manner in which the player operates the left stop button D41. A case is illustrated in which the stop operation is performed on the left stop button D41 in a short time (for example, 5 ms), which is a general time value required for execution.

After that, as soon as the state of (c1) is reached, the left stop button D41 is released, and the urging force of the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position. (d1), the left button sensor turns from ON to OFF. Both (b1) and (d1) show the state in which the left stop button is positioned at a distance of x from the initial position. Since it indicates OFF, more precisely, the stop button sensor is ON at a distance of x or more from the initial position, and the stop button sensor is OFF at a distance of less than x from the initial position. Note that x may be adjusted as appropriate, and the stop button sensor is on when the stop button is in the initial position, and the stop button sensor is on when the stop button is not in the initial position (when it is pressed even slightly). may be configured to be The time required for the left stop button D41 to return to the initial position from the position where the left stop button D41 is pushed by the maximum distance d varies according to the spring constant of the spring of the left stop button D41.

Further, in (d1), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 is maintained in the reel deceleration standby state.

After that, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force of the left stop button D41, and in the state (e1) where the left stop button returns to the initial position, the left stop button sensor remains off and the left The reel drive state of the reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. The timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in FIG. Timing is fine. In addition, when the reel drive state is switched from the reel deceleration waiting state to the reel deceleration state (when the pattern to be stopped and the passing pattern match), the counter of the reel drive pulse output counter After setting the value to 100 (a value corresponding to about 223.5 ms), the 4-phase excitation is turned on. After 0.5 ms the 4-phase excitation is turned on. After that, the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter is decremented by the interrupt processing executed while the four-phase excitation is on, and when the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter becomes 0, It is configured to turn off the 4-phase excitation.

After that, while the left stop button remains stopped at the initial position, the step motor for the left reel is decelerated by four-phase excitation, and the left reel stops at the position where it has rotated the maximum designed distance as described above, and stops in the middle. The operation of the button D42 and the right stop button D43 is enabled (acceptance of stop operation is enabled).

In the same figure, after accepting the operation of one stop button, until the reel corresponding to the one stop button stops (stop control ends), the stop button other than the one stop button It is configured so that the operation is not valid (the stop operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons are not activated until the reel corresponding to the one stop button is stopped, thereby driving a plurality of reels at one timing. Controls can be applied to prevent the stepper motor from being overloaded. In addition, even in such a configuration, when the stop button 1 is executed and immediately released (when it is pushed by the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately released), the stop button is released from the release. The design value for the shortest time required for the sensor to turn from on to off can be made shorter than the design value for the time from when the stop button is turned off to on until the 4-phase excitation of the step motor ends. . That is, even if the stop operation of one stop button is executed and immediately separated, before the reel stops after rotating the designed maximum distance, in other words, before the stop operation of the other stop buttons becomes effective. Since the one stop button is configured to be able to return to the initial position, the player stops the stop button corresponding to the other reel immediately after the reel on which the other stop operation was performed stops. is configured to be able to

In addition, when the stop button 1 is immediately released after executing the stop operation, the time value of the shortest time required for the stop button sensor to turn from ON to OFF from the separation, and the time value of the stop button from OFF to ON. The value of the time from the end of the four-phase excitation of the step motor varies slightly depending on the environment (for example, room temperature, humidity, etc.), but the design value includes these factors. In addition, although there is a possibility that an event that greatly deviates from the design value may occur on rare occasions, 90% or more of the values are kept within the range of the design value under a basic environment. In this example, the part expressed as time is this design value (design time), and even if an event that deviates from the range exemplified as a comparison of time values occurs, the deviation as a design value It means that it has not been done.

In the same figure, the stop button returns to the initial position before the reel stops after being pushed by the maximum distance d from the initial position, and the stop button is energized. It is not limited to this, and it is satisfied that the stop button sensor is turned from on to off before the reel is pushed by the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately separated, and before the reel stops after rotating the maximum designed distance. may be configured as follows.

<<Pattern 1 where the 4-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off>>
FIG. 141 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. In FIG. 141, the operations from the operation of the stop button to the stop of the reels in the ninth embodiment are divided into frames (a2) to (f2) for each focal event. In the ninth embodiment, the left reel M51 is the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels, and the left stop button D41 is the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first. is not limited to For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be noted that the configuration is not only applicable to reels and stop buttons, but is applicable to first stop, second stop and third stop for all pressing orders.

Also, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration waiting state, until the left reel stops. shows a case of stopping after rotating the designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum sliding).

(a2) to (f2) in FIG. 141 will be described in detail. First, in (a2), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is at the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and in the state of being pressed by the distance x from the initial position (b2), the left stop button sensor turns from off to on. Become. At the timing of (b2), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains at the constant speed rotation).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pushed down until the left stop button D41 is pushed down by the maximum distance d from the initial position (c2). In (c2), the left stop button sensor remains on, the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and the step motor executes four-phase excitation. The timing at which the reel drive state switches from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state is not limited to the example shown in FIG. Timing may be sufficient, as long as the reel is rotating in (c2).

After that, as soon as the state of (c2) is reached, the left stop button D41 is released, and the urging force of the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position, and returns to the distance y from the initial position. At some point (d2), the left reel stops at a position rotated by the design maximum distance (also referred to as maximum slippage) after the reel drive state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state. Note that the distance y may be y<d, and may be y=x.

After that, it slides toward the initial position by the biasing force of the left stop button D41, and when the left stop button reaches a distance of less than x from the initial position (e2), the left stop button sensor turns from ON to OFF. . After that, it slides toward the initial position due to the biasing force of the left stop button D41, and at (f2), the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position, and the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 are valid. becomes. Note that the timing at which the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 become effective is not limited to this, and the timing at which the left stop button D41 turns from ON to OFF (and the left reel is stopped). may be

In the same figure, after accepting the operation of one stop button, until the reel corresponding to the one stop button stops (stop control ends), the stop button other than the one stop button It is configured so that the operation is not valid (the stop operation is not accepted).

In this way, after receiving the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons are not activated until the reel corresponding to the one stop button is stopped, thereby driving a plurality of reels at one timing. Controls can be applied to prevent the stepper motor from being overloaded. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, even when the stop operation of the stop button 1 is executed and immediately separated (when it is pushed by the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately separated), the reel is the design maximum. Since the one stop button is configured to return to its initial position after it has rotated a distance and stopped, the player can stop the other stop buttons if the stop button has returned to its initial position. The game can proceed smoothly.

<<Pattern 2 where the 4-phase excitation process ends before the stop button sensor is turned off>>
FIG. 142 is an example of an image diagram drawn in chronological order when an operation is performed to stop the spinning reel. In FIG. 142, the operations from the operation of the stop button to the stop of the reels in the ninth embodiment are divided into frames (a3) to (f3) for each focal event. In the ninth embodiment, the left reel M51 is the reel to be stopped first among the spinning reels, and the left stop button D41 is the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first. is not limited to For example, the reel to be stopped first may be the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, and the stop button corresponding to the reel to be stopped first may be the middle stop button D42 or the right stop button D43. It should be noted that the configuration is not only applicable to reels and stop buttons, but is applicable to first stop, second stop and third stop for all pressing orders.

Also, in the same figure, the operation of the left stop button is accepted (the stop button sensor turns from off to on), and the reel driving state changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration waiting state, until the left reel stops. shows a case of stopping after rotating the designed maximum distance (also referred to as maximum sliding).

(a3) to (f3) in FIG. 142 will be described in detail. First, in (a3), the left stop button D41 is not operated to stop (not pressed), and the left stop button D41 is at the initial position, so the left stop button sensor is off and the reel is rotating. (The left reel M51 is rotating).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pressed (sometimes referred to as operation or sliding), and in the state of being pressed by the distance x from the initial position (b3), the left stop button sensor turns from off to on. Become. At the timing of (b3), the reel drive state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel constant speed state to the reel deceleration standby state (the reel rotation speed remains constant speed rotation).

After that, the left stop button D41 is pushed down until the left stop button D41 is pushed down by the distance y from the initial position (c3). Until (c3), the reel driving state of the left reel M51 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state, and at (c3), the left reel M51 is stopped. Also, the left stop button sensor remains on. In addition, the distance y should just be y<d.

After that, the left reel M51 is pushed in, and the left stop button D41 is pushed by the maximum distance d from the initial position (d3). At (d3), the left stop button sensor remains on.

After that, it slides toward the initial position by the biasing force of the left stop button D41, and when the left stop button reaches a distance of less than x from the initial position (e3), the left stop button sensor turns from ON to OFF. . Thereafter, the left stop button D41 slides toward the initial position due to the urging force of the left stop button D41. At (f3), the left stop button D41 returns to the initial position, and the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 are effective. becomes. Note that the timing at which the stop operations of the middle stop button D42 and the right stop button D43 become effective is not limited to this, and the timing at which the left stop button D41 turns from ON to OFF (and the left reel is stopped). may be

In the same figure, after accepting the operation of one stop button, until the reel corresponding to the one stop button stops (stop control ends), the stop button other than the one stop button It is configured so that the operation is not valid (the stop operation is not accepted).

In this way, after accepting the operation of one stop button, the other stop buttons are not activated until the reel corresponding to the one stop button is stopped, thereby driving a plurality of reels at one timing. Controls can be applied to prevent the stepper motor from being overloaded. Also, even in the case of such a configuration, even if the stop operation of the stop button 1 is executed and immediately separated (when it is pushed by the maximum distance d from the initial position and immediately separated), the reel is designed , the stop button is returned to its initial position after it has been rotated and stopped by the maximum distance of You can play the game smoothly.

<<<<Tenth Embodiment Performance Display Device SH>>>>
The gaming machine according to this example may be configured to be provided with a performance display device SH that displays the operating status of the gaming machine such as the ratio of the characters. I will elaborate.

First, with reference to FIG. 143, a display example of the performance display device SH applicable to the gaming machine according to this example will be illustrated. The performance display device SH is formed by 4-digit segments arranged in a horizontal line, the upper two digits (left two digits) being an identification segment SH10, and the lower two digits (right two digits) being a ratio segment SH20. It's becoming The identification segment SH10 is configured to display information by which the currently displayed item can be identified, and the ratio segment SH20 is configured to display numerical information corresponding to the currently displayed item. In addition, a dot point SH30 is provided in the lower right portion of the lower digit (right digit) of the identification segment SH10. ing. There is no problem even if the dot point SH30 is not provided.

<<<Installation position>>>
The installation position of the performance display device SH may be configured so as to be directly attached to the main control board M. In such a configuration, the visibility is enhanced by a sticker or the like attached to the main board case M40 covering the main control board M. It should be mounted in an unobstructed position.

<<<Display items>>>
Examples of items displayed on the performance display device SH include the following items.
(a) = Cumulative advantageous section ratio It can be calculated by "total number of games played/total number of games x 100 (%)". As an example, if the game progresses in the order of "game machine operation start→normal section A→advantage section A→normal section B→advantage section B", then "(the number of games played in advantageous section A + the number of games played in advantageous section B number of games)/(number of games played in normal section A + number of games played in advantageous section A + number of games played in normal section B + number of games played in advantageous section B) x 100 (%).

It should be noted that the "cumulative total" means that from the start of operation of the game machine in the game hall to the execution of the calculation of the items to be displayed on the latest performance display device SH from the predetermined measurement start timing to the latest performance display device SH. It shows the cumulative total from the start of the measurement for display on the performance display device SH to the execution of the calculation of the item to be displayed on the performance display device SH, such as until the calculation of the item displayed on the performance display device SH.

(b) = Continuous role ratio for 6000 games "Continuous role ratio" is the ratio of the total number of payouts paid out when the first type special role is activated to the total number of payouts. The ratio of consecutive bonuses between games" can be calculated by "the number of payouts during operation of the first type special bonuses in 6000 games/total number of payouts in 6000 games x 100 (%)". As an example, if the number of game medals to be paid out when the type 1 special accessory is activated in 6000 games: 6000, and the number of game medals to be paid out due to other triggers: 8000, then "6000 ÷ (6000 + 8000) x 100 ≈ 42.9 (%)". It should be noted that "6000 games" indicates the period of 6000 games before the timing at which the most recent continuous role ratio was calculated.

(c) = Character ratio for 6,000 games "Accessory ratio" means "(the number of payouts during 6000 games when the first special accessory is activated + the number of payouts when the second special accessory is activated during 6000 games + the number of payouts when the normal accessory is activated during 6000 games. number)/total number of payouts during 6000 games x 100 (%)". As an example, the number of game medals paid out when the first class special accessory is activated for 6000 games: 5000, the number of game medals paid out when the second special accessory is activated for 6000 games: 3000, between 6000 games If the number of payouts due to other triggers: 8000, it is calculated as "(5000+3000)÷(5000+3000+8000)×100=50(%)". It should be noted that "between 6000 games" indicates the period between 6000 games before the timing at which the character ratio was most recently calculated.

(d) = Cumulative continuous accessory ratio “Cumulative continuous accessory ratio” is calculated by “cumulative number of payouts at the time of activation of the first type special accessory / cumulative total number of payouts x 100 (%)” can. As an example, if the total number of game medals paid out at the time of activation of the first class special accessory is 600000, and the number of payouts due to other triggers is 800000, then "600000/(600000+800000)×100≈42. 9 (%)”.

(e) = Cumulative role ratio The number of payouts at the time of normal accessory operation) ÷ total total number of payouts × 100 (%)”. As an example, the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the first type special accessory is activated: 500000, the cumulative number of game medals paid out when the second type special accessory is activated: 300000, and the cumulative number of payouts due to other triggers. Number of sheets: When the number is 800,000, it is calculated as "(500,000+300,000)÷(500,000+300,000+800,000)×100=50(%)".

In addition, "7U" displayed in the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed, and "6Y" displayed in the identification segment SH10 indicates the continuous role ratio over 6000 games. "7Y" displayed in the identification segment SH10 indicates that the character ratio for 6000 games is displayed, and "6A" displayed in the identification segment SH10 ” indicates that the cumulative continuous role product ratio is displayed, and “7A” displayed in the identification segment SH10 indicates that the cumulative role product ratio is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 143, although it is configured to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio as (a), it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display the cumulative instructed accessory ratio as (a). good. Here, the total instructed role ratio is
Cumulative number of payouts + cumulative number of payouts for the game in which push order navigation (sometimes referred to as instruction) on the main control board M is executed}/total cumulative number of payouts x 100 (%)
, and which of the total advantageous section ratio and the total instructed accessory ratio is to be displayed on the performance display device SH may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the game in which the push order navigation is executed, since the stop operation is performed in a push order different from the push order navigation, the number of game medals to be paid out is smaller than the number of payouts related to the symbol combination that can be won if the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation. is paid out, the number of payouts related to the symbol combination that can be won when the stop operation is performed according to the push order navigation is calculated as the number of payouts in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. .

<<<display format>>>
The display mode in the performance display device SH may be configured as follows.
・The display is switched every 5 seconds in the order of "(a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(e)→(a)...". It should be noted that there is no problem even if the display switching interval is changed. For example, the display may be switched every 3 seconds.
・For non-applicable items, "--" is displayed in the ratio segment. The non-applicable item is, for example, the advantageous section ratio in a gaming machine that does not have an advantageous section.
・Ratio display numerical value {advantageous section ratio (%), continuous role ratio (%), role ratio (%), displayed in ratio segment SH20} is displayed by truncating the decimal point (in the case of 100% displayed as "99")
・If the ratio display value is 70% for the advantageous section, 60% for the continuous character, or 70% for the character, the ratio segment SH20 will blink. The ratio display will display "00". If the total number of games played is less than 6000 games, the identification segment SH10 when displaying the continuous character ratio for 6000 games and the character ratio for 6000 games is displayed. Blinking display {Including non-applicable items (for example, in a game machine that does not have an advantageous section, the advantageous section ratio is not applicable because there is no advantageous section ratio)}
・If the total number of games played is less than 175,000 games, the identification seg blinks when displaying the total advantageous section ratio. In addition, when the total number of games played is less than 17,500 games, the identification segment is displayed blinking when displaying the cumulative continuous role ratio and when displaying the cumulative role ratio (games without continuous roles) machine). That is, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games played over 175,000 games in order to display the cumulative advantageous section ratio, and to measure the cumulative number of games played over 17,500 games in order to display the cumulative continuous role ratio and the cumulative role ratio. configured to be possible.

In the tenth embodiment, the performance display device SH is configured to display the information (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) described above. The configuration in which the main control board (CPUMC of the main control board M) executes processing such as calculation and display of information related to (a), (b), (c), (d), and (e) will be described in detail below. describe.

<<<memory map>>>
First, an example of the memory map of the main control chip C will be described with reference to FIG. The memory map shows an address space from "0000H" to "FFFFH". Among these, the internal ROMC 110 is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "27FFH", and the register area built into each circuit in the main control chip C is allocated to the space from "2800H" to "28FFH". The internal RAMC 120 is allocated to the space from "F000H" to "F2FFH", and the XCS decode area (decoding that interprets the given machine language as an internal representation) is allocated to the space from "FDD0H" to "FDFBH". area) is allocated. By causing the CPUC 100 to execute an instruction to access these addresses, access to the corresponding hardware can be executed.

The built-in ROMC 110 has a first ROM area that mainly controls the progress of the game, and a second ROM area that mainly controls error-related processing that differs from the normal progress of the game. The first ROM area is allocated to the space from "0000H" to "1FFFH", and the second ROM area is allocated to the space from "2000H" to "27FFH". The first ROM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second ROM area (in other words, the data capacity that exists in the first ROM area and is accessed by the CPUC 100 exists in the second ROM area and is accessed by the CPUC 100). (configured to be larger than the data capacity accessed from).

In addition, the first ROM area stores the first control area storing the program code (instruction code set for the CPUC 100) and the program data used by the program (read by the CPUC 100 processing based on this program code). A first data area stored therein, an area in which various identification information (company name, manufacturing date, model name, etc.) is stored, and various settings used when operating the main control chip C (random number generation circuit C140 operation setting, operation setting of the watchdog timer C222, etc.). Although the same figure shows a memory map image in the first ROM area, the number of bytes in each area and the presence or absence of unused areas are only examples.

The second ROM area stores a second control area storing program code (instruction code set for the CPUC 100) and program data used by the program (read by the CPUC 100 processing based on this program code). The second control area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first control area (in other words, it exists in the second control area and the CPUC 100 The program code capacity accessed from the first control area is smaller than the program code capacity accessed from the CPUC 100), and the second data area is configured to have a smaller capacity than the first data area. (In other words, the amount of program data that resides in the second data area and is accessed by the CPUC 100 is smaller than the amount of program data that resides in the first data area and is accessed by the CPUC 100).

On the other hand, the built-in RAMC 120 has a first RAM area that mainly stores information based on the progress of the game, and a second RAM area that mainly stores information based on processing different from the normal progress of the game, such as errors. and a stack area used when the program needs to store data internally. A second RAM area is allocated to the space from "F200H" to "F2C9H", and a stack area is allocated to the space from "F2CAH" to "F2FFH" (however, the number of bytes in each area is just an example. ).

In addition, the first RAM area has a first work area which is a work area for temporarily storing information mainly related to the progress of the game, and the second RAM area mainly temporarily stores information related to errors and the like. and a checksum area for error detection of the information temporarily stored in the first RAM area and the second RAM area. The first RAM area is configured to have a larger capacity than the second RAM area. In addition, in this embodiment, only the second RAM area has the checksum area (the first RAM area does not have it), and the checksum area has both the first RAM area and the second RAM area ( It is configured to manage a checksum (total of information temporarily stored on both sides). Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when calculating the checksum, the unused area is included in the calculation. work area and second work area) may be configured to calculate a checksum. In addition, the error detection method is not limited to the checksum check method, and other methods (for example, parity check, etc.) may be used. This is an area for storing information for error detection (for example, parity bits, etc.) required when using the method.

There is no problem even if the address of the area storing various identification information (company name, date of manufacture, model name, etc.) is after the address of the built-in RAM. Although there is no problem even if the addresses in the unused area are changed, it is preferable to provide an unused area between the first data area and the second control area (intervening addresses). That is, in the case of the memory map configuration as shown in FIG. 144, the program code existing in the first control area and accessed by the CPUC 100 and the program code existing in the second control area and accessed by the CPUC 100 are: Since they are arranged separately on the memory map (with non-consecutive addresses) and have an unused area in between, it is not possible to visually see the arrangement positions of both program codes on the program source code or dump list. (In addition, the same can be said when an unused area is sandwiched between them).

Here, regarding the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent a modified program or the like from being written by an illegal act, it is possible to configure the ROM so as not to provide an unused area (unfilled area). It is preferable (eg, filling unused areas with all 0's, writing used areas down to younger addresses, etc.). In addition, in the first control area and the first data area, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced from being referenced due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data that is referenced in a game machine with different specifications) data used only for testing in the development stage, etc.) is preferably not provided. The first control area, the first data area, the second control area, the second data area, the first work area, and the second work area are used by moving to a lower address, and within the area (within the area) addresses) are not provided with unused areas (for example, "0010H" to "0050H" in the first control area in the range of "0000H" to "0FA7H" are not set as unused areas) It is preferable to In this example, all bits of the unused area are "0", and any bit of the area other than the unused area is "1" (not "0"). ing).

In the tenth embodiment, in particular, the main control board (CPUMC of the main control board M) executes the arithmetic processing of information to be displayed on the performance display device SH or the display processing of displaying information on the performance display device SH. When doing so, it is configured to perform processing in the second ROM/RAM area. Details of the processing performed in the second ROM/RAM area will be described below.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
FIG. 145 is a flow chart of processing at the time of timer interrupt according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the tenth embodiment (execution timing of this subroutine is the same as in other embodiments). The processing of this subroutine is executed when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and after that, a predetermined time (T in this example, but for example, a time of about 2 ms is set). is performed periodically).

First, in step 1602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes processing at the start of an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPUC 100, checking an input port for a power-off detection signal, etc.). Next, at step 1604, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a power cutoff is currently detected (in this interrupt process). In the case of No in step 1604, in step 1900, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes power-off processing, which will be described later. On the other hand, if Yes at step 1604, at step 1606, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes the settlement button D60, the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the door switch D80, the setting key switch M20, the setting/reset button M30, the power failure detection signal, the input reception sensor D10s, and the first input sensor. D20s, second input sensor D30s, first payout sensor H10s, second payout sensor H20s, etc. (that is, the presence or absence of operation with these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at interrupt intervals T is done).

Next, at step 1610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on/off the door switch flag and setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU can be opened without being affected by noise. can also be detected). Next, at step 6100, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes spinning drum drive control processing for all reels (left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) (processing related to drive control of the reel M50). will be described later). Next, at step 1612, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes at step 1612 , at step 1613 , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (the number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D 280 , and proceeds to step 1614 . It should be noted that even if No in step 1612 , the process proceeds to step 1614 . Incidentally, if the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of steps 1612 and 1613 is unnecessary. Next, at step 1614, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off all the error flags (not shown, but the inserted medals reverse flow error flag, the number of inserted medals error flag, the inserted medals It is determined whether or not flags related to errors such as payout abnormality error flag, payout medal retention error flag, door switch flag, etc. are all off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error undetected command (a command to the sub side, indicating that no error has been detected) (for example, register area) and go to step 1622 . On the other hand, if No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, indicating that an error has been detected) (for example, register area) and go to step 1622 . In step 1620, the information on the error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the error flag that is turned on is transmitted to the sub side. In addition, the error undetected command may be set only when the error is cleared from the state in which the error occurred (only when it is determined that the flag is turned off), and when the error is not detected, the Information setting processing may not be executed (step 1618 may be omitted). Furthermore, the error detection command may be executed only when an error occurs from a state in which no error has occurred, or may be executed from a state in which a first error (for example, inserted medal retention error) has occurred. The set process may be executed when the type of error changes, such as a second error (for example, paid-out medal retention error).

Next, at step 1622, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (sub-side command) (for example, if set in the register area at step 1618 or step 1620, control command is sent). Here, as commands to be sent to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (sent immediately after the start lever is operated), a command related to the first reel stop acceptance timing (the stop button is operated as the first stop) command related to the second reel stop reception timing (sent immediately after the stop button is operated as the second stop), command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button is transmitted as the third stop) (Sent immediately after operation), Sent immediately after all reels have stopped), Command related to the stop timing of the stop display pattern (Sent immediately after the stop button is operated to stop the display pattern), winning/replay Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (only during the advantageous section)), commands related to bonus winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever), commands related to RT status (all reels (sent after stopping until the next game starts), commands related to the state of AT (sent after all reels stop until the next game starts), High security counter value command (sent immediately after start lever operation), AT remaining game number command (between all reels stopping and next game starting, or immediately after start lever operation) command (sent after all reels are stopped and before the next game is started), etc. Next, at step 1624, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from the reel-type game machine P to an external hall computer or the like). Although not shown, the error information output by the external signal includes a door opening error, an abnormal insertion error, an abnormal dispensing error, an insertion reception sensor retention error, and the like. The door open error is configured to occur when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. is configured to cause an error in Next, in step 1626, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on output data of LEDs (7-segment LED lamps, etc.) (for example, among a plurality of 7-segment LED units, a predetermined 7-segment LED unit is lit, and 7-segment LED units are turned on. (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, at step 1628, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changing the lighting color of the LED). Note that step 1628 need not be executed. Next, at step 1630, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes software random number management processing (update processing of random numbers managed by software, etc.). Next, at step 1632, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M acquires internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, at step 1634, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, the abnormality flag bit is set. If Yes at step 1634, at step 1636, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether the internal random number update state is normal (whether the error flag bit indicating the update state error is set). judge.

If Yes in step 1636, then in step 1637 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M calls the count upper limit check process of the second ROM/RAM area as the process in the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in Second ROM/RAM Area>>
Although not shown, when the process in the second ROM/RAM area is called, first, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the stack pointer and switches the stack area. Make settings for using . Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M saves the values of the registers used in the processing in the first ROM/RAM area to the second stack area. Next, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a process of creating and outputting a signal for external output from the values of the first RAM area and registers used in the process in the first ROM/RAM area.

After that, as shown in the figure, at step 1637-1 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the counter value of the counter (sometimes referred to as the total number of games counter) related to the total number of games played up to the present. and a counter value of a counter (sometimes referred to as a total payout counter) relating to the total number of game medals paid out up to the present time, and a count upper limit check as a check process relating to whether or not a predetermined upper limit value has been reached. process. As details of the count upper limit check process, for example, a predetermined number of repetitions is performed on the address of the total payout counter and the address of the total number of games counter set in a predetermined register (HL register) in the second ROM/RAM area. A check process is performed based on the data of the count upper limit flag calculated based on the minute calculation process. The number of repetitions and the data of the count upper limit flag can be stored, for example, in the B register and C register as unused areas.

Next, at step 1637-2 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the total number of games played up to the present. The details of the number-of-games counting process include, for example, the addition value stored in the A register as an unused area (here, 1) is added, and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register.

Next, at step 1637-3 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the number of games played in the advantageous section up to the present. The number of games played in the advantageous section is the total number of games played in the advantageous section. As for the details of the processing for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section, first, among the data stored at the address of the game section flag set in the predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area, the flag indicating the advantageous section When the relevant bit is "1", for example, the address of the advantageous section game number counter is set in the DE register. Thereafter, data addition processing is executed in the same manner as in step 1637-2 (thirteenth), and the addition result is updated as the data at the address set in the predetermined register.

Next, at step 1637-4 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the cumulative number of payouts up to the present and the number of payouts for the 6000 games. Note that the number of payouts is the number of all payouts regardless of the timing for paying out game medals. The details of counting the number of payouts are as follows. The address of the total payout counter (counter for total number of payouts and counter for number of payouts for 6000 games) is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. After that, the data stored in the payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. After that, similarly to step 1637-2 (thirteenth), a process of adding data (here, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed, and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register.

Next, at step 1637-5 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the total number of payouts of the character to date and the number of payouts of the character over the 6000 games. As for the details of the process of counting the number of payout bonuses, first, the data of the bonus operation state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the accessory is in operation. After that, in step 1637-1 (thirteenth), if the bit associated with the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register is not "0", a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area , the address of the accessory payout counter (the counter for the total number of the accessory paid out and the counter for the number of the accessory paid out in 6000 games) is set. After that, the data stored in the prize payout number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. After that, similarly to step 1637-2 (thirteenth), a process of adding data (here, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed, and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register. Incidentally, the "accessories" in this processing are the first class special accessories, the second class special accessories, and the ordinary accessories.

Next, at step 1637-6 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M counts the total number of consecutive bonuses paid out up to the present and the number of consecutive bonuses paid out over 6000 games. As for the details of the counting process of the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, first, the data of the RB operating state flag is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Here, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the set data, and if the result of the logical operation is not "0", it is determined that the RB is in operation. After that, in step 1637-1 (thirteenth), if the bit associated with the flag of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag set in the HL register is not "0", a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area , set the address of the continuous accessory payout counter (the counter for the total number of consecutive accessory payouts and the counter for the number of continuous accessory payouts over 6000 games). After that, the data stored in the continuous award number buffer is set in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. After that, similarly to step 1637-2 (thirteenth), a process of adding data (here, adding the number of coins to be paid out) is executed, and the addition result is updated as the data of the address set in the predetermined register. Incidentally, the "continuous accessory" in this process is the first type special accessory (sometimes referred to as RB).

Next, at step 1637-7 (thirteenth), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs ratio calculation processing. In addition, the ratio here has shown the following.
(1-1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio: number of games played in advantageous section ÷ total number of games played × 100 (%)
(1-2) Cumulative instruction-inclusive role item ratio: {number of payouts in games in which push-order navigation (sometimes referred to as instructions) on the main control board M is executed + number of payouts by role items}/total number of payouts ×100 (%)
(2) Cumulative continuous accessory ratio: Cumulative number of payouts during operation of the first type special accessory ÷ Cumulative total number of payouts x 100 (%)
(3) Cumulative role ratio: (Total payout number during operation of the first type special role + Cumulative payout number during operation of the second type special role + Cumulative payout during operation of normal role number) ÷ cumulative total number of payouts x 100 (%)
(4) Consecutive Accessory Ratio for 6000 games: Number of payouts during 6000 games during operation of Type 1 Special Accessory/Total number of payouts for 6000 games x 100 (%)
(5) Accessory ratio between 6000 games: (Number of payouts during 6000 games during operation of type 1 special accessory + Number of payouts during 6000 games during operation of type 2 special accessory + Number of payouts during operation of normal accessory Number of payouts during 6000 games during operation)/total number of payouts during 6000 games x 100 (%)
The above (1-1) to (5) are the targets of the ratio calculation in the tenth embodiment. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in the advantageous section ratio of (1-1) and the instructed accessory ratio of (1-2), the ratio calculation process is performed for each game, and in (2) to (5) is configured to perform ratio calculation processing every 400 games, for example, (2) to (5) may also be configured to perform ratio calculation processing for each game. As described above, either one of the above (1-1) and (1-2) may be calculated and displayed according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 146 is a subroutine flow of ratio calculation processing by the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 1637-7 (13th). First, at step 1637-7-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of ratio calculations in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. Next, in step 1637-7-2 (thirteenth), the data set in the predetermined register of step 1637-7-1 (thirteenth) (data here is the data regarding the calculation number of the advantageous section ratio) get. Next, the data acquired in step 1637-7-3 (13th) is subjected to a predetermined comparison operation to determine whether or not it is a calculation number related to the calculation of the advantageous section ratio. If it is determined in step 1637-7-3 (13th) that it is not a calculation number related to the advantageous section ratio (if it is determined as No), in step 1637-7-4 (13th), Set the data (for example, 2 bytes) stored in the 400 game counter, determine whether the data value at this time is "0", and if the data value is "0", in other words Then, when the number of games played at this time is a multiple of 400 games (if determined as Yes), in step 1637-7-5 (13th), the address data of the ratio calculation address table stored in advance in the second ROM. is set in a predetermined register. After that, in step 1637-7-6 (thirteenth), predetermined arithmetic processing for calculating a ratio is performed on the set address data.

After that, in step 1637-7-7 (thirteenth), the data obtained by the arithmetic processing is set in the same register in which the data obtained in step 1637-7-2 (thirteenth) was set. After that, in step 1637-7-8 (13th), it is determined whether the ratio is 100% based on the data obtained by the arithmetic processing, and if the ratio is 100%, step 1637- In 7-9 (13th), the data for displaying the ratio at 99% as described above may be set in a predetermined register (for example, the same register in which the data obtained in step 1637-7-2 (13th) is set. ) (because the ratio segment SH20 is two digits). After that, in step 1637-7-10 (13th), the obtained ratio data is stored in the HL register, and the next process is performed.

If Yes at step 1637-7-3 (13th), the process proceeds to step 1637-7-5 (13th), and if No at step 1637-7-4 (13th), The process proceeds to step 1637-7-9 (13th), and if No in step 1637-7-8 (13th), the process proceeds to step 1637-7-10 (13th).

Next, at step 1637-8 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs ratio display processing. FIG. 147 is a flowchart relating to the subroutine of the ratio display processing by the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 1637-8 (13th). First, at step 1637-8-1 (13th), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the ratio display number in a predetermined register in the second ROM/RAM area. At this time, it is assumed that the data of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, for example. Next, at step 1637-8-2 (thirteenth), it is determined whether or not a display request for 1000 digits on the performance display device SH has been received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that the display request for 1000 digits on the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-3 (13th), the performance display device SH is displayed based on the data stored in the D register. It is determined whether or not a display request for 100 digits in SH has been received. If it is determined that the display request for 100 digits on the performance display device SH has not been received, then in step 1637-8-4 (13th), the data stored in the D register is acquired, and a predetermined Perform arithmetic processing. Next, at step 1637-8-5 (thirteenth), it is determined whether or not a one-digit display request for the performance display device SH has been received based on the data stored in the D register. If it is determined that a one-digit display request has not been received on the performance display device SH, then in step 1637-8-6 (13th), a logical product operation is performed on the data stored in the register in which the ratio display number is set. (for example, an operation such as interchanging the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits).

Next, in step 1637-8-7 (thirteenth), the address of the ratio display segment data table is set in a specific register (eg HL register). Next, at step 1637-8-8 (thirteenth), the data stored in the HL register is subjected to predetermined arithmetic processing, and the data obtained by the arithmetic operation is acquired. Next, in step 1637-8-9 (thirteenth), the pre-stored data related to the flashing request flag is stored in a predetermined register, and the process proceeds to the next step.

Returning to the description of the flowchart in FIG. 145, next, in step 1637-9 (13th), the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
Next, at step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt termination processing, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1602). On the other hand, if No at step 1634 or step 1636, at step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal random number error indication (eg, sets an error number in the register area). Next, at step 1300, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the above-described unrecoverable error processing.

<<Processing in Second ROM/RAM Area Modification 1>>
Next, a modification will be described in which the arithmetic processing of information to be displayed on the performance display device SH or the display processing of displaying information on the performance display device SH is performed in the second ROM/RAM area. As modification 1 (sometimes referred to as modification 1 from the tenth embodiment) of <<processing in the second ROM/RAM area>> in the tenth embodiment, for example, the game progress control process of the main control board M (Fig. 16 to 18). A modification of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area will be described below.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (third card) according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 14 in Modification 1 from the tenth embodiment. A detailed description of the processing similar to that of FIG. 18 is omitted. Further, since the contents of the processing in the second ROM/RAM area (other than the display processing on the performance display device SH) are the same as in the tenth embodiment, detailed description will be omitted. Note that unlike the tenth embodiment in which the processing in the second ROM/RAM area is executed by interrupt processing, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, the processing in the second ROM/RAM area related to the performance display device SH is performed. It is executed in main loop processing (processing on the main control board M side and different from interrupt processing).

In FIG. 148, the arithmetic processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH is configured to be executed after the game interval transition control processing of step 3500 is performed. Note that the timing for performing arithmetic processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH is not limited to this timing. As long as it is within the main loop process, it may be before the game interval transition control process of step 3500 is performed, for example.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
As for the explanation of the flowchart, at step 3500, after the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the game interval transition control process, at step 3501, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the process in the first ROM/RAM area, the second ROM・Call the count upper limit check process of the RAM area.

<<Processing in Second ROM/RAM Area>>
Next, in step 3501-1 (thirteenth) (variant 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes count upper limit check processing. Next, at step 3501-2 (thirteenth) (variant 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the number-of-games counting process. Next, at step 3501-3 (thirteenth) (variant 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the advantageous section game number counting process. Next, at step 3501-4 (thirteenth) (variant 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a payout number counting process. Next, at step 3501-5 (thirteenth) (variant 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the process of counting the number of payout bonuses. Next, at step 3501-6 (thirteenth) (variant 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a process of counting the number of successive payouts. Next, in step 3501-7 (thirteenth) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes ratio calculation processing. Next, in step 3501-8 (thirteenth) (variation 1), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

Thus, in Modification 1 from the tenth embodiment, the arithmetic processing related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH (calculation of information to be displayed on the performance display device SH), which is the processing in the second ROM/RAM area, processing) as main loop processing. Further, although the details will be described later, display processing on the performance display device SH, which is processing in the second ROM/RAM area, is configured to be executed as interrupt processing.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
Next, at step 1293, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes game end processing, and shifts to the next processing.

Next, FIG. 149 is a flow chart of processing at the time of timer interrupt according to the subroutine of step 1600 in Modification 1 from the tenth embodiment. Since the content of the display processing on the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM/RAM area, is the same as in the tenth embodiment, the details are omitted.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
Specifically, in step 1636, if the update state of the built-in random number is normal (Yes), in step 1637 (thirteenth) (variant 2), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M changes the As processing, the ratio display processing of the second ROM/RAM area is called.

<<Processing in Second ROM/RAM Area>>
Next, at step 1637-1 (thirteenth) (variant 2), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a ratio display process. Next, at step 1637-2 (thirteenth) (variant 2), the CPUC 100 of the main control board M returns to the calling source of the first ROM/RAM area.

<<Processing in the first ROM/RAM area>>
Next, at step 1638, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes interrupt termination processing and proceeds to the next processing.

As described above, in the modification 1 from the tenth embodiment, as the processing related to the performance display device SH, which is the processing in the second ROM/RAM area, the arithmetic processing related to the items to be displayed on the performance display device SH is performed by the main loop processing. , and the display process on the performance display device SH is executed as an interrupt process.

With this configuration, in the first modification from the tenth embodiment, display processing on the performance display device SH, which needs to be constantly executed (updated), is executed by interrupt processing. Calculation processing related to items displayed on the performance display device SH is executed (updated) for each game as a main loop processing. can be reduced.

<<<Tenth Embodiment: Test Display of Performance Display Device SH>>>
Next, the test display of the performance display device SH will be described. In the tenth embodiment and modification example 1 from the tenth embodiment, as a configuration related to the display on the performance display device SH, is there a problem with the segment of the performance display device SH (for example, the lighting position of the segment)? is evenly lit, etc.). The configuration of the test display mode applicable to the gaming machine of this example will be described in detail below.

The test display mode of the performance display device SH is configured to be executed (displayed) at the following timings.
(1) Display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds. ) The display starts when the setting confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the setting confirmation mode. display until cleared

FIG. 150 is an example of test display on the performance display device SH when the performance display device SH is in the test display mode. First, test display pattern 1 will be described. A test display pattern 1 exemplifies a case in which a test display is executed when the power is turned on. As described above, when the test display is executed when the power is turned on, it is preferable to finish the display within 5 seconds from the start of the display. A case where the test display ends after 5 seconds is exemplified.

<<Tenth Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 1>>
The test display pattern 1 is composed of three display modes, a lighting pattern (a), a lighting pattern (b), and an extinguishing pattern (c) (this is the display mode at the end of the test display). The lighting pattern (a) is a display mode in which part of the identification segment SH10 and part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit. The lighting pattern (b) also has a display mode in which a part of the identification segment SH10 and a part of the ratio segment SH20 are lit, and the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are alternately executed. As a result, all segments of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once, so that it is possible to find a segment that is not lit due to a failure. The lighting pattern constituting the test display pattern is not limited to (a) and (b), but as a test display, at least the lighting locations of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 ( It is preferable that the lighting pattern is a display mode in which all of the segments SH10 and SH20 are lit (the two lighting patterns may be combined to light up all the lighting positions of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20).

Further, the test display pattern 1 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (a) and the lighting pattern (b) are alternately displayed in the order of (a)→(b)→(a) . . . , the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds. After 5 seconds from the timing when the power is turned on (0 second), the display mode of the extinguishing pattern (c) indicating the end of the test display is displayed so that the test display of the performance display device SH ends. It is configured. In test display pattern 1, since the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.5 seconds, for example, the period from (a) to (b) to (a), which is one lighting cycle, is set to 1 second. Since the number of lighting cycles that can be used for test display in 5 seconds is 5, that is, the number of lighting cycles is an integer, the test display is finished after the display mode of the lighting pattern (b) is displayed for 0.5 seconds. .

In the same figure, when the test display ends, as shown in (c), the case where the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are turned off is exemplified, but it is not limited to this. First, when the test display ends, it may be configured to display in the display pattern described above with reference to FIG. 143 (for example, the display starts from (a) in FIG. 143).

<<Tenth Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Modified example of test display pattern 1>>
As a configuration of the performance display device SH that can be applied to the gaming machine of this example, a modified example relating to test display will be described in detail below.

It is assumed that the lighting period of each lighting pattern of (a) and (b) illustrated in FIG. 143 is 1 second. When defined in this way, the period from (a) to (b) to (a), which is one lighting cycle, is 2 seconds. lighting cycle) cannot be executed to the end. In such a case, the lighting cycle of (a)→(b)→(a) is executed twice to finish the test display. The test display may be terminated when the test display is executed, or after the lighting cycle of (a)→(b)→(a) is executed twice, lighting is performed for 1 second (a) and the test display is performed. In other words, the lighting cycle may be repeated for a predetermined 5 seconds, and the test display may be terminated when the 5 seconds have elapsed.

<<Tenth Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 2>>
Next, test display pattern 2 will be described. It is assumed that the test display pattern 2 is executed during the setting confirmation mode, or during an error related to an abnormality in the RAM of the main control board M, or the like. It should be noted that the test display may be executed even during all errors (or some errors) that may occur in the gaming machine according to this example.

The test display pattern 2 is composed of three display modes, a lighting pattern (d), a lighting pattern (e), and an extinguishing pattern (c) (display mode at the end of the test display). The lighting pattern (d) is a display mode in which all the lighting positions of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit. Further, the lighting pattern (e) is a display mode in which the lighting portions of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are all turned off. In this way, the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) are alternately executed as test display patterns, so that all segments of the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are lit at least once. It is configured to detect a segment that fails and does not light up.

Further, the test display pattern 2 is configured such that, for example, the lighting pattern (d) and the lighting pattern (e) are alternately lit in the order of (d)→(e)→(d) . . . , the lighting period of each lighting pattern is 0.3 seconds. Then, starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered (0 second), the test display is alternately performed for 0.3 seconds in the order of (d)→(e)→(d) . . . When the setting confirmation mode ends at a predetermined timing (here, 3.1 seconds after the setting confirmation mode is entered), the test display also ends. In other words, the test display ends at the timing when the end condition of the test display is satisfied, regardless of the timing of the lighting cycle.

In the same figure, when the test display ends, as shown in (c), the case where the identification segment SH10 and the ratio segment SH20 are turned off is exemplified, but it is not limited to this. First, when the test display ends, it may be configured to display in the display pattern described above with reference to FIG. 143 (for example, the display starts from (a) in FIG. 143).

<<Tenth Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3>>
Next, FIG. 151 shows the test display pattern 3. As shown in FIG. Test display pattern 1 and test display pattern 2 will be described as test display pattern 3, which is a test display in which the timing at which test display can be executed overlaps. The display mode of the lighting pattern in the test display, the lighting period of each lighting pattern, and the like are the same as those of the test display pattern 1 and the test display pattern 2. FIG. FIG. 151 will be described in detail below.

First, the period during which the test display pattern 3 is performed will be described. As in the case of the test display pattern 1, the timing at which the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0 seconds). Then, the setting confirmation mode is entered within 5 seconds after the power is turned on (here, the timing is 2.7 seconds after the power is turned on). That is, before the test display, which has been started with the power-on as a trigger, ends due to the passage of time, the start condition of the test display is newly satisfied with the start of the setting confirmation mode as a trigger. After that, starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered, after a predetermined time has passed (here, 3.1 seconds after the timing when the setting confirmation mode is entered), the setting confirmation mode ends and the test display is displayed. The process ends.

In the test display pattern 3, since the setting confirmation mode is set 2.7 seconds after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is not started at the end timing of the above-described lighting cycle. Even in such a case, when the test display is started when the setting confirmation mode is started, the performance display device SH is lit as the test display from the first timing of the lighting cycle. More specifically,
Lights for 0.5 seconds (a) → Lights for 0.5 seconds (b) → Lights for 0.5 seconds (a) → Lights for 0.5 seconds (b) → Lights for 0.5 seconds (a )→lights for 0.2 seconds (b)→lights for 0.3 seconds (a) due to setting confirmation mode→lights for 0.3 seconds (b)→... → The test display is executed as if the test display is ended by the end of the setting confirmation mode.

<<Tenth Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Modification 1>>
In the test display pattern 3 in this configuration, the period from the timing when the power is turned on to the end of the setting confirmation mode is 2.7 seconds + 3.1 seconds = 5.8 seconds. If the test period of 5 seconds is exceeded, but the setting confirmation mode ends early, for example, if the test display period related to the setting confirmation mode is 1.5 seconds, the power is turned on. The period from the timing to the end of the setting confirmation mode is 2.7 seconds + 1.5 seconds = 4.2 seconds, which does not exceed the range of 5 seconds which is the test period after power-on. In such a situation, the test display is not executed from the end of the setting confirmation mode to the end timing of the test display period after the power is turned on (regardless of the end timing of the setting confirmation mode, the end of the test display), or the test display after power-on may be performed in 0.8 seconds, which is the remaining period of the test display period after power-on (until 5 seconds have passed since power-on). Alternatively, the test display may be restarted after the power is turned on until the test display ends when the power is turned on. When resuming the test display after the power is turned on, for example, the timing at which the setting confirmation mode ends is the starting point (at this time, it is determined that the test display in the setting confirmation mode is finished and the power is turned on again. , the test display period is newly set to 0.8 seconds instead of 5 seconds), and according to the display mode of the test display pattern 1, (a) → (b) → (a) ... and 0.8 It may be configured to perform a test display for a second.

<<Tenth Embodiment Test display of performance display device SH Test display pattern 3 Modification 2>>
The configuration in which test displays are overlapped, exemplified as modification 2 of test display pattern 3 in this configuration, is merely an example, and is applicable to all combinations in which test displays are overlapped.

Further, in the tenth embodiment,
(1) Display starts when the power is turned on and ends within 5 seconds (2) Starts display when the setting change device control process starts (starts the setting change mode) and ends within 5 seconds (3 ) The display starts when the setting confirmation mode starts, and is always displayed during the setting confirmation mode. Although the configuration is such that the above four test indications that are displayed until the problem is resolved can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that only one or more of the above test indications can be executed. Further, it should be supplemented that any of the configurations related to the above-described test display may be applied even in such a configuration.

Also, in the test display of (3) above, the same test display may be executed during the setting change mode and during the setting confirmation mode (the test display may be performed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). display). Also, the display period of 5 seconds in the above (1) and (2) is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the time value is changed.

In the tenth embodiment, the lighting pattern (1) and the lighting pattern (3) are different lighting patterns. may be

It should be noted that the lighting pattern of the test display may be a pattern other than the one described above, but it should be different from the normal lighting pattern as described above with reference to FIG. It is preferable to configure (differentiate the period for switching the lighting mode, differentiate the segments that are lit, etc.).

It should be noted that even when the performance display device SH is executing the test display, the calculation processing of the items displayed on the performance display device SH (the calculation processing of the information displayed on the performance display device SH) can be executed. good too. As a specific example of such a configuration, the configuration may be as follows. (1) A power failure occurs→(2) Receiving the operation of the final stop reel→(3) Executing power failure processing before executing the arithmetic processing of the items displayed on the performance display device SH→(4) Gaming machine → (5) Recover from power failure → (6) Performance display device SH enters test display mode → (7) Calculation of items to be displayed on performance display device SH during test display mode Execute processing → (8) End test display mode → (9) Display information to be displayed on the current performance display device SH corresponding to the latest calculation result on the performance display device SH. Since the information displayed on the performance display device SH is the information after the execution of the arithmetic processing, it may be different from the information before the power failure. In addition, even if power failure occurs after receiving the final stop reel, if the power failure processing is executed before executing the arithmetic processing of the items displayed on the performance display device SH, the above (3) and subsequent follows the same flow.

<<11th Embodiment Configuration for Stopping/Automatic Settlement>>
As a configuration applicable to the gaming machine of this example, a configuration related to a gaming machine capable of executing a game suitable for a business form desired by the administrator of the gaming facility will be described below.

As an example of the business form of the amusement park,
(1) Quantitativeness: Stop the progress of the game when a predetermined number of balls are obtained, and terminate the operation of the gaming machine for the day (2) One-time exchange: End the game once at a specific timing (3) Lucky number system: A variety of business forms are conceivable, such as a game that can be continued when a specific privilege is granted, but the game is temporarily terminated when a predetermined privilege is granted. As a configuration of a gaming machine capable of realizing such a business form, a gaming machine capable of executing and setting stoppages and automatic settlement is suitable.

Note that "stopping" means stopping the progress of the game when a predetermined condition is met, and "automatic settlement" means that settlement processing is performed through the player's operation when a specific condition is met. to execute without Stopping the progress of the game means invalidating the reception of the operation of the start lever or invalidating the bet (because the blocker is turned off, it is impossible to insert game medals and the reception of the operation of the bet button is invalid). is.

Here, to give an example of the operation of stopping after a certain game is over, the reels related to a certain game start spinning, then the stop operation is performed, each reel stops, and finally rotates. A stop operation is performed on the reel (here, the right reel M53) that is on the right reel M53, and the reel drive state of the right reel M53 changes from the reel deceleration standby state to the reel deceleration state (the symbols to be stopped and the passing symbols match), After setting 100 (a value corresponding to about 223.5 ms) as the counter value of the drum drive pulse output counter, the 4-phase excitation of the step motor is turned on. After that, the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is decremented by interrupt processing executed while the four-phase excitation is on.
(1) If the certain game is a game in which no game medals are paid out, the stopping process should be executed when the counter value of the reel drive pulse output counter is 90 or more (between 100 and 90). However, when it becomes less than 90, the stopping process is executed, and if the game is a game in which game medals are paid out, after the game medals are paid out (the counter value of the spinning drum drive pulse output counter becomes 0) (2) After the counter value of the spinning drum drive pulse output counter reaches 0 ( After the game medals have been paid out, the stopping process may be executed as described above. In addition, in the case of the above configuration (1), there is a possibility that the reel is moving (rotating) while the counter value of the reel driving pulse output counter reaches 100 to 90. , the stopping process is not executed, and the stopping process is performed after the reels have completely stopped below 90, so that the player is notified that the reels have stopped and the game is over. This makes it easier to recognize, and allows the player to quickly recognize that it is not necessary to insert game medals for the next game.

In addition, the settlement process related to automatic settlement (the settlement process executed when a specific condition is met) and the settlement process executed by operating the settlement button are configured to be executable as the same process. Alternatively, they may be configured to be executable as separate and different processes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, a detailed description will be given of the configuration related to the stop/automatic settlement applicable to this example.

First, the predetermined conditions for execution of a selectable stop in this example are: (1) none, (2) when all target BBs are finished, (3) when BB1 is finished, (4) when BB2 is finished, (5) (6) more than 1,000 difference sheets; (7) at the end of 3 or more sets of ATs; and (8) at the end of a specific AT.

In addition, the predetermined conditions for executing the automatic settlement that can be selected in this example are (1) none, (2) when all target BBs are completed, (3) when BB1 is completed, (4) when BB2 is completed, (5) ) more than 500 sheets difference, (6) more than 1000 sheets difference, (7) at the end of 3 or more sets of AT, (8) at the end of a specific AT, (9) at the time of stopping, can be selected from 9 items. there is

Regarding (5) and (6) above, when the difference number exceeds the prescribed number and the situation is advantageous to the player, such as during the execution of BB or during an advantageous section, the advantageous state is completed, it may be determined that a predetermined condition or a specific condition is satisfied. Also, in this example, the difference number is set to 500 or 1000, but it may be configured so that the administrator can set any number. In addition, a counter (sometimes referred to as MY counter or difference number counter) capable of counting the maximum number of difference sheets in one advantageous section is provided, The counter may be used to count the difference number, or a counter dedicated to counting the difference number controlled by the main control board M different from the counter may be used. Further, the predetermined condition may be a difference number of 500 or more and a difference number of 1000 or more instead of the difference number of more than 500 and the difference number of 1000 or more.

Since the MY counter is updated only with one bet number, for example, when the one bet number is "3", the counter value of the MY counter will stop as a result of playing a predetermined game with three bets. Although the number reached 500, the actual winning number may be less than 500 because the game was executed before the timing of reaching 500, other than betting 3. In the case where the game is configured to be stopped based on the counter value of the MY counter, as described above, the game may be stopped even if the actual number of acquired cards is small. Therefore, by providing a counter related to the number of difference different from the MY counter and counting the number of inserted and the number of payouts regardless of the number of bets, it is possible to ensure consistency between the actual number of winnings and the execution of the stop. . It should be noted that the two-coin bet game (games other than the three-coin bet) is designed to be disadvantageous to the player, so the two-coin bet game may be regarded as some kind of strategy/fraud and may be stopped based on the MY counter. .

Regarding (7) above, for example, it is preferable to set the timing at which the AT (or ART) continues for three or more sets and the AT and the advantageous section end. Also, in the case of having an AT that is not so-called set number management, the condition may be that the game continues for a predetermined number of games or more.

Also, the specific AT in (8) above may be an AT that is relatively advantageous to the player, such as an AT with a high possibility of winning a predetermined number of game medals or more (for example, 500 or more). .

In addition, information on the predetermined conditions for execution of cancellation and the specific conditions for execution of automatic settlement are stored in a specific RAM area (dedicated RAM area), and the specific RAM area is referred to when the power is turned on. to determine the predetermined condition and the specific condition. The dedicated RAM area is configured to be provided in the first ROM/RAM area.

The timing for determining the predetermined condition and the specific condition by referring to the specific RAM area is not limited to when the power is turned on. , when the set/reset button M30 is operated, or when selecting a decision item in the stop/automatic settlement setting mode, or at a plurality of timings.

Further, as a method of changing the predetermined condition and the specific condition stored in the specific RAM area, the setting can be changed by operating a stop button or the like during the setting change mode. .

Note that the predetermined conditions and specific conditions illustrated in FIG. 152 are merely examples, and the number of types (number of options) may be changed. Also, it may be configured to determine only one item as a condition, or may be configured to determine a plurality of items as a condition.

A modification of the predetermined condition or the specific condition may be configured as follows.
(1) Predetermined bonus that is satisfied when inside the predetermined bonus (as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device related to the predetermined bonus is determined, and the symbol combination related to the condition device is not displayed stop) It is suitable when the inside is in a relatively disadvantageous state for the player (the expected value of winning game medals is negative (the number of game medals inserted is greater than the number of payouts), the winning probability of AT is low, etc.). be.
(2) A relatively disadvantageous state for the player during execution of a predetermined bonus that will be satisfied when a predetermined bonus starts (the expected value of winning game medals is negative (the number of inserted medals is greater than the number of payouts) high), the winning probability of the AT is low, etc.).
(3) Sufficient when moving from a normal section to an advantageous section This is suitable when the lottery winning rate for shifting to an advantageous section in a normal section is high (for example, 99/100).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155, an example of a method for changing the predetermined condition and the specific condition will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 153 is an image diagram of each mode transition. When the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, as shown in (a) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays "stop/automatic settlement setting mode". After that, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (b) in the figure, the option of the above-described predetermined condition is displayed as the "stop setting mode" on the effect display device S40. In (b), the predetermined condition is "none" because no stopping is set, and the cursor also selects "1 none". It should be noted that if the predetermined condition is set to "none", the stop will not be executed.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (c) in the drawing, the selection of the above-described specific condition is displayed as the "automatic settlement setting mode" on the effect display device S40. In (c), since the automatic settlement is not set, the specific condition is "none" and the cursor selects "1 none". In addition, if the specific condition is set to "None", the automatic payment will not be executed.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the effect display device S40 is set to "1 without" and "2 with" as the "notification setting mode" as shown in (d) in the drawing. If "none" is determined as the "notification setting mode", even if it becomes a stop or automatic settlement, the effect display device S40 does not perform the notification related to the stop or automatic settlement, and the "notification setting mode" is determined as "yes", the performance display device S40 is configured to notify the stop or automatic settlement when the game is stopped or automatic settlement occurs.

In addition, the position of the cursor when the right stop button D43 is operated to shift the mode may be configured to select the uppermost "1, none", or may be configured to select a predetermined condition currently determined, a specific It may be configured to select the setting of the condition or notification setting mode.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, the "stop/automatic settlement setting mode" shown in (a) in the figure is entered again. It will switch like (d) -> (a)....

In this example, the right stop button D43 is used as an operation member for mode transition, but this is only an example, and the left stop button D41 and the middle stop button D42 can also be used.

Next, FIG. 154 is an image diagram of item selection in the mode. In the same figure, the configuration regarding the operation when selecting an item in one mode in the "stop/automatic settlement setting mode" described above with reference to FIG. 153 is exemplified.

By shifting to the setting change mode and operating the right stop button D43 in a state in which "stop/automatic settlement setting mode" is displayed, "stop setting mode" is displayed on the effect display device S40 as shown in (e) in the figure. ' is displayed as options for the above-described predetermined condition (similar to FIG. 153(b)). In (b), the predetermined condition is "none" because no stopping is set, and the cursor also selects "1 none". It should be noted that if the predetermined condition is set to "none", the stop will not be executed.

After that, by operating the middle stop button D42, the cursor in the "stop setting mode" is moved as shown in (f) in the figure, and "2 when all target BB is finished" is selected.

After that, by operating the right stop button D43, as shown in (g) in the figure, the effect display device S40 displays options for the above-described specific conditions as "automatic settlement setting mode". In (g), since automatic settlement is not set, the specific condition is "none" and the cursor selects "1 none". In addition, if the specific condition is set to "None", the automatic payment will not be executed.

After that, by operating the left stop button D41, as shown in (h) in the figure, the option of the above-described predetermined condition is displayed as the "stop setting mode" on the effect display device S40. That is, each time the right stop button D43 is operated, the mode changes in the order of "stop/automatic settlement setting mode"→"stop setting mode"→"automatic settlement setting mode"→"notification setting mode"→"stop/automatic settlement setting mode". By operating the left stop button D41, the transition is made to the previous mode. Also, by operating the middle stop button D42, the cursor in the current mode can be moved (in this example, it is moved down by one). In addition, since the cursor has selected "2 When all BBs are finished" in (f), the cursor is also selecting "2 When all BBs are finished" when the transition is made to (h). Also, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cursor may be configured to always select the initial position (“1, none”, etc.) when the mode is newly changed.

153 and 154, the method of determining the setting of the predetermined condition, the specific condition, and the presence/absence of notification (the method of changing the information stored in the specific RAM) is configured as follows. good too.
(1) Determine the item selected by the cursor when the mode transitions (2) Determine that the time selected by the cursor continues for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) (3) A predetermined operation member (start lever) etc.) to determine the item selected by the cursor while staying in each mode. (5) As an operation to end the setting change mode, turn the setting key switch from ON to OFF to determine the item selected by the cursor when staying in each mode Configured as above You may

153 and 154, settings related to cancellation (predetermined condition settings, sometimes referred to as cancellation function settings), automatic settlement settings (specific In the state where it is possible to set conditions and set the automatic settlement function), if it is decided in the current situation, whether the stop function will be effective and whether the automatic settlement function will be effective may be displayed on a display section (for example, the payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M. As an example of the display mode, valid is indicated by "A" and invalid is indicated by "F". It may be configured to display the validity/invalidity of the automatic settlement function in the digit of the place. More specifically, the display mode is as follows.
Stop function: Enabled, Automatic settlement function: Enabled, Display of payout number display device D270 "AA"
Stop function: Enabled, Automatic settlement function: Disabled, Display of payout number display device D270 "AF"
Stop function: disabled, automatic settlement function: enabled, display "FA" on payout number display device D270
Stop function: Disabled, Automatic settlement function: Disabled, Display of payout number display device D270 "FF"

It should be noted that the valid/invalid display of the stop function and the automatic settlement function as described above may be configured to be displayed in the stop/auto settlement setting mode before the stop function and the automatic settlement function are determined. In such a configuration, for example, in a situation other than "1 None" is selected in the stop setting mode, the tenth digit of the payout number display device D270 becomes "A", and the stop setting mode is entered. When "1 None" is selected in the payout number display device D270, the tens place digit of the payout number display device D270 is "F", and in a situation where anything other than "1 None" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, The ones digit of the number display device D270 is "A", and in the situation where "1 none" is selected in the automatic settlement setting mode, the ones digit of the payout number display device D270 is "F". Become.

In addition, when it is determined whether the stop function and the automatic settlement function are valid or invalid, it may be configured to display a display indicating whether the stop function and the automatic settlement function are valid or invalid as described above. In this case, for example, if anything other than "1 None" is determined in the stop setting mode, "A" is displayed in the tens place of the payout amount display device D270 for a predetermined time (eg, 5 seconds) from the determination. is displayed, and when "1 None" is determined in the stop setting mode, "F" is displayed in the tens place of the predetermined time payout number display device D270 from the determination, and in the automatic settlement setting mode If anything other than "1 None" is determined, "A" is displayed in the ones place of the predetermined time payout number display device D270 from the determination, and "1 None" is determined in the automatic settlement setting mode. In such a case, it may be configured to display "F" in the ones place digit of the number-of-payouts display device D270 for a predetermined time after the determination.

It should be noted that the valid/invalid display of the stop function and the automatic settlement function as described above may be configured to be displayed on a display section controlled by the main control board M other than the number-of-payouts display device D270. Also, the display mode is only an example, and display modes other than the display of the number of game medals to be paid out, the display of push order navigation, the display of credits, and the like may be used as appropriate.

In addition, when displaying the valid/invalid display of the stop function and the automatic settlement function as described above on the display unit controlled by the main control board M, the display unit controlled by the sub control board S (for example, The performance display device S40) may also be configured to display (at the same time) whether the stop function and the automatic settlement function are valid or invalid. In the case of such a configuration, the display mode on the display unit controlled by the sub-control board S is appropriately displayed in a display mode that makes it easy for the manager of the game hall to recognize whether the stop function and the automatic settlement function are valid or invalid. You may

Next, FIG. 155 shows the effect display device when the game is actually stopped when the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 with" and the "stop setting mode" is set to "3 at the end of BB1". It is a display image figure in S40.

As shown in the figure, on the effect display device S40, there is a display of "BB1 end" which is the trigger for stopping, a display of "300 won" which is the number of game medals obtained in BB1, When the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 ON", the display of "Please call the staff during stoppage" is displayed. In this way, when the "notification setting mode" is set to "2 with", the game can be progressed without the player being confused by notifying the player that the game has stopped. Further, although not shown, similarly, when the automatic settlement is executed, the effect display device S40 is configured to be able to display information to the effect that the automatic settlement has been executed.

It should be noted that the configuration of the operating members exemplified in the eleventh embodiment is merely an example, and any combination of operating members controlled by the main control board M may be used.

In addition, as a cancellation method in the event of a stop, it is sufficient that the player cannot cancel the cancellation but the manager can cancel it. OFF→ON) or by operating the setting/reset button M30.

Further, when the automatic settlement is executed, the game may be executed (the game medals can be inserted) as soon as the settlement is completed in the same manner as when the player operates the settlement switch. , the game may be configured to be executable after the administrator's operation is performed in the same manner as the stop.

It should be noted that the transition conditions to the "stop/automatic settlement setting mode" illustrated in FIGS. 153 to 155 are only examples,
(1) Shift to the setting confirmation mode (2) Long press the setting/reset button M30 (for example, keep it on for 3 seconds) while all reels are stopped (3) Open the front door DU and Operation of any of the operation members controlled by the control board M may be used as the transition condition. In addition, in the case of the above configuration (2) or (3), it is possible to shift to the stop/automatic settlement setting mode even during the operation of the game arcade, and to switch the setting regarding the stoppage or automatic settlement.

Further, the information in the specific RAM area described above may be configured to be cleared when the setting is changed, or may be configured not to be cleared.

<Other applicable configurations related to suspension/automatic settlement>
A configuration related to stop/automatic settlement applicable to the gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below. It should be noted that one or more configurations detailed below can be applied to all embodiments according to this example.

It may be configured such that after executing the processing relating to lighting/extinguishing of the advantageous section indicator YH, the stop and automatic settlement processing are executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to match the lighting or extinguishing state of the advantageous section indicator YH with the game section of the next game.

When the difference number is equal to or greater than a specified value (for example, 500) and the state advantageous to the player ends, the predetermined condition or the specific condition is satisfied, and the difference number is specified. When the value is exceeded, the stop flag or automatic settlement flag is turned on, and if the difference number falls below the specified value again before the state advantageous to the player (for example, the advantageous section) ends, the stop flag Alternatively, the automatic settlement flag may be turned off (cancellation or automatic settlement is not executed), or may remain on (cancellation or automatic settlement is executed). As a specific example, one of "5 difference number over 500", "6 difference number over 1000", "5 difference number 500 or more", or "6 difference number 1000 or more" is set as a predetermined condition ( ), even if a certain game is executed and the difference number satisfies a prescribed condition, a prescribed bonus is being executed (sometimes referred to as a prescribed game state) after the end of the certain game. In some cases, the stopping process may not be executed immediately (a flag is turned on), but may be executed when the predetermined bonus is completed.

In the case where the game is configured to stop due to stoppage or automatic settlement, if the symbol combination related to replaying is stopped and displayed in the game that is stopped or automatically settled, the stoppage or automatic betting related to the replay is performed It may be configured to execute automatic settlement, or may be configured to stop or execute automatic settlement after executing automatic betting.

Even when the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, the menu screen and QR code (registered trademark) can be displayed by the player's operation of the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S such as the sub-input button SB. may be configured. With such a configuration, even if the player does not recognize that the game will be stopped and the game is stopped due to a stoppage, the game history can be saved without any problem. Further, in such a configuration, even if the power is cut off, the data related to the game history may be retained.

From the start of the display of the end screen (bonus end screen, advantageous section end screen, AT end screen, etc.) that informs the player that the state advantageous to the player is over, without operating the operation member (without proceeding with the game) ) In the case where the standby screen can be displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed, if the end screen is displayed when the game is stopped due to a stoppage, the standby screen is not displayed even after the predetermined period of time has passed. may Also, if power is cut off while the end screen is being displayed, the normal screen (a screen different from the end screen and the standby screen) or the standby screen may be displayed after the power is restored.

When the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, if it is configured to satisfy the output conditions of the external signal related to stoppage or automatic settlement, the external signal is output even if the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement may be configured to be continuable.

In the case where the game is configured to stop by stopping or automatic settlement, when the game is stopped, the lamp unit is lit in red, the back lamp is turned off, etc., so that the game hall manager can easily recognize the game stop. It may be configured to perform lighting and extinguishing in a lighting mode (combination of the lighting mode of the lamp unit and the lighting mode of the back lamp) that can be easily distinguished from that during traveling.

The voice data during settlement may be the same or different between the settlement executed by the player operating the settlement button and the automatic settlement.

In a situation where one or more game medals are electrically stored in the credit and one or more game medals are betted,
(1) When automatic settlement is executed, both credit and bet game medals are settled, and even when settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, credit and bet are settled. Any game medal may be configured to be settled. (2) When automatic settlement is executed, both credit and bet game medals are settled, and when settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, bet game medals It may be configured to settle only
(3) When automatic settlement is executed, game medals for both credits and bets are settled, and when settlement is executed by the player operating the settlement button, credits are accumulated. It may be configured such that only game medals are settled.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154, when the conditions for ending the stop/automatic settlement setting mode are satisfied during the setting in the stop/automatic settlement setting mode (when the game starts, the power is turned off) , etc.), it may be configured to execute a process of confirming the item that was being selected (selected by the cursor) in the stop/automatic settlement setting mode.

It may be configured to provide a mechanical switch for physically switching on and off. As an example, a mechanical switch for stopping and a mechanical switch for automatic settlement may be provided. In such a configuration, the predetermined condition and the specific condition are predetermined for the gaming machine. may be used as a condition. Further, a mechanical switch for stopping or automatic settlement may be provided, and setting of stopping or automatic settlement may be possible in the aforementioned stop/automatic settlement setting mode (setting is possible by software). In addition, when a mechanical switch is provided, the execution condition for stopping or automatic settlement is set when the switch is turned from off to on.

The gaming machine according to this example is configured to execute an error display on a display unit (for example, the payout number display device D270) controlled by the main control board M when an error is detected (for example, when an inserted medal retention error is detected). but
(1) When the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, the display unit does not display that the game has stopped. (2) When the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, the display is not displayed. (3) When the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, the display unit displays the same display mode as when the error was detected. It may be configured as

If a predetermined error (for example, an inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to automatic settlement, the execution of the settlement process is stopped and a predetermined error state is set (announcement of the predetermined error may be configured to execute Also, in the case of such a configuration, the payout sensor detects the first payout of game medals after detecting a predetermined error (one game medal is detected by turning on/off the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). may be configured to stop the payout related to the settlement process immediately after the payment is deemed to have been paid out.

If a predetermined error (e.g. inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of the settlement process related to automatic settlement, a predetermined error state is set after the settlement process is completed (announcement of the predetermined error is executed). be configured). In addition, in such a configuration, when the game is configured to stop (execute the stop processing) after the execution of the automatic settlement, a predetermined error state is generated after the stop processing is executed. Also in the state, it is possible to make it possible to execute the notification related to the stopping (the notification related to the game stop).

If a predetermined error (for example, inserted medal retention error) is detected during the execution of settlement processing related to automatic settlement, a predetermined error state is set after the settlement processing is completed (announcement of the predetermined error is executed ), and when the game is configured to stop (execute the stopping process) after the execution of the automatic settlement, it may be configured to cause a predetermined error state before executing the stopping process. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the error state as soon as possible.

When a predetermined error (for example, an inserted medal retention error) is detected at a timing after the reels related to the game to be stopped and before the stop processing is executed, a predetermined error is detected after the stop processing is executed. By setting the error state, it is possible to make it possible to execute the notification regarding the stopping (the notification regarding the game stop) even in a predetermined error state.

If a predetermined error (for example, an inserted medal retention error) is detected at a timing after the reels related to the stoppage game are stopped and before the stoppage processing is executed, a predetermined error is detected before the stoppage processing is executed. error state. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the error state as soon as possible.

When the game is stopped by stopping or automatic settlement, the operation of the operation member controlled by the sub-control board S such as the sub-input button SB may be disabled.

It is preferable to configure the blocker to be turned off (a state in which game medals cannot pass) when the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement.

When a predetermined error (for example, an inserted medal retention error) is detected in a situation in which a notification relating to a stoppage or an automatic settlement is being executed (for example, being notified by the effect control device S40), an error occurs. Notification may be performed and an external signal related to the error may be output. In addition, when executing error notification in such a case,
(1) Terminate the notification related to the stoppage or automatic settlement and execute the error notification (the notification may be displayed on the effect display device S40, or may be voiced by the speaker).
(1-1) After that, when the error is canceled and the game due to stoppage or automatic settlement is stopped, the notification related to stoppage or automatic settlement is resumed (1-2) After that, the error is canceled and the game is stopped Or, when the game by automatic settlement is stopped, the notification related to stoppage or automatic settlement is not restarted. In different regions (or partially overlapping regions), it may be configured as described above that the notification related to the stoppage or automatic settlement and the error notification are notified. In this example, even when the game is stopped due to stoppage or automatic settlement, the process of determining whether or not there is a predetermined error can be executed.

In the stop/automatic settlement setting mode, in other words, even in the situation where any of the screens of (a) to (d) in FIG. Alternatively, a new screen not shown in FIG. 153 (for example, (e) different from (a) to (d)) is provided, and the volume and It may be configured so that the amount of light can be adjusted.

During stop setting (situation other than "1 None" is determined in stop setting mode), setting It may be configured to relatively increase the appearance rate of the suggestive effect (a effect that suggests the current set value, and the presence or absence of execution and the execution frequency differ depending on the current set value). As a result, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play during the stop setting.

In the case where the predetermined conditions for executing the stop processing and the specific conditions for executing the automatic settlement processing are set as the same conditions, if the same conditions are satisfied, after executing the automatic settlement processing It may be configured to execute a stop process. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the stopping process may be executed after the last game medal related to the automatic settlement process is paid out (passes through the first payout sensor and the second payout sensor). good.

If only the cancellation function is valid (predetermined conditions for cancellation are set, and specific conditions for automatic settlement are not set), or predetermined conditions for execution of cancellation processing and automatic settlement processing In the case where a specific condition to be executed is set as a different condition and the stop processing is executed, the settlement processing may be executed by operating the settlement button during the stop processing.

During the execution of the settlement processing related to the automatic settlement, the settlement processing by operating the settlement button may not be executed (no new settlement processing is executed by operating the settlement button).

The situation in which the stop setting is in effect is sometimes referred to as 'stop function is valid', and the situation in which stop setting is not in progress is sometimes called 'stop function is disabled' or 'stop function is not effective'. Determining the predetermined condition may be referred to as "satisfying the predetermined condition", and options for the predetermined condition described above in FIG. 152 may be referred to as "specific condition candidates". may or may not contain "1 none". Further, satisfying the determined predetermined condition may be referred to as "satisfying a specific condition".

152, the predetermined conditions of "5: more than 500 difference sheets" and "6: more than 1,000 difference sheets" are set to "the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number." ”, and the predetermined conditions of “5 difference number of 500 or more” and “6 difference number of 1000 or more” are defined as “the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period has reached a predetermined number or more”. It is sometimes called

Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 152, in the present example, selection candidates for a predetermined condition (sometimes referred to as a specific condition A selection candidate) relating to the cancellation and selection candidates for a specific condition regarding automatic settlement (specific condition (sometimes referred to as B selection candidates) are configured to partially overlap, but the selection candidates for the predetermined conditions related to the cancellation and the selection candidates for the specific conditions related to automatic settlement,
(1) all candidates are different, (2) all candidates are the same, and (3) only some of the candidates are the same. In addition, even in the case of the above (2) or (3) configuration, it is possible to make the determined (set) predetermined condition and the determined (set) specific condition the same. It should be added that it is also possible to make them different.

Moreover, the stop function can also be applied to pachinko game machines. As a specific example of the stopping process, the shooting function is stopped (the game ball is not shot even if the shooting handle D44 is operated), and the entry of the game ball into various ball entrances is invalidated (entering the winning entrance). A game ball is not paid out even if a ball is played, a random number is not acquired even if a ball enters the ball entrance, etc.). As an alternative to the difference number of the reel-type game machine, the accumulated difference between the number of balls fired and the number of payout balls related to winning (subtracting the number of fired balls from the number of payout balls related to winning), or the number of balls related to winning The total number of paid-out balls obtained by accumulating the number of paid-out balls is exemplified.

(12th embodiment)
In the tenth embodiment, the configuration having the performance display device SH has been described in detail, but the configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to this example is not limited to that of the tenth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of the performance display device SH applicable to this example will be described in detail below as a twelfth embodiment.

First, FIG. 156 shows a display example of the performance display device SH in the twelfth embodiment. Only the differences from the tenth embodiment will be described in detail in FIG.

<Display mode>
The display mode of the performance display device SH in the twelfth embodiment is configured as follows.

As a display item,
(a) = Cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instructed role ratio (b) = Continuous role ratio in 6000 games (c) = Accessory ratio in 6000 games (d) = Cumulative continuous role ratio (e) = Cumulative accessory ratio (f) = Display the cumulative accessory condition ratio.

In the performance display device SH in the twelfth embodiment, after the game machine is powered on, "(a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(e)→(f)→(a) . . .・” is switched in order of about 5 seconds each. It should be noted that the following configuration may be used when a power failure occurs in the middle of the lighting pattern. Here, an example is given in which the power is cut off two seconds after the lighting pattern (c) is established.
(1) Start lighting from the beginning of display item (a) (2) Start lighting from the beginning of display item (c) (3) Resume lighting after 2 seconds of display item (c) may
It should be noted that, in the case of the above configurations (2) and (3), when the RAM is cleared (at the end of the setting change mode), it may be configured to start lighting from the beginning of the display item (a). good.

The total number of games played may be the number of games played since the power was turned on, the number of games played after clearing the RAM, or the number of games played since shipment from the factory. It may be the number of games backed up.

(f) = Cumulative Accessory Status Ratio Number of games + Total number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + Total number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated + Cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated + Cumulative number of second type accessory continuous operation device The number of games when the second type special accessory is not activated at the time of operation) ÷ total number of games x 100 (%)". As an example, the cumulative number of games played when the first type special role is activated: 300 games, the cumulative number of games played when the second type special role is activated: 100 games, and the cumulative number of games played when the normal role is activated: 100 games. , Cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special role is not activated when the type 1 role continuous operation device is activated, cumulative 2nd type special role is not activated when the type 2 role continuous activation device is activated When the number of games played: 50 games and the total number of games played is 30000 games, the calculation is as follows: "(300+100+100+200+50)÷(30000)×100=2.5(%)".

It should be noted that, when calculating the above-described total state ratio of accessories, etc., if the specs of the gaming machine do not have the second type special accessories, the total number of games played when the second type special accessories are activated , The cumulative number of games when the second type special role is not activated when the second type special role is continuously activated is not used, and "(the number of games when the first type special role is activated + The number of games played when the accessory is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated when the type 1 accessory continuous operation device is activated) ÷ the total number of games played x 100 (%) It will be done. In this way, when calculating the display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH, the display items are calculated without using elements that are not included in the specs of the gaming machine (display items other than the cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc.). The same applies to items).

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the game executed inside the BB or RB (such as RT2 in FIG. 28) is the numerator (cumulative first The number of games when the type special role is activated + the total number of games when the type 2 special role is activated + the total number of games when the normal role is activated + the total number of games when the type 1 role continuous operation device is activated The number of games when the type special role is not activated + the total number of games when the type 2 special role is not activated when the type 2 role continuous operation device is activated) Not counted (the number of games is not counted) is configured as follows.

In addition, when the storage area for storing the total number of games, which is the denominator information used when calculating the display item, is the upper limit value (for example, if the storage area is 3 bytes, "FFFFFF (H)") When "+1" is performed as an update process and overflow occurs, the total number of games played may not be updated after the next game of the game. In the case of such a configuration, it may be configured not to update the cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special accessory is activated, which is numerator information, or information indicating that the total number of games has overflowed. may be configured to store "1" in the storage area for storing the . Also, the storage area for storing the total number of games played may be referenced to manage whether the display on the performance display device SH should be lit or blinked (storage area and display items used for lighting/blinking management). may also be used as a storage area used for the calculation of ). Note that the configuration regarding the overflow is not limited to the storage area for storing the total number of games played, and can be applied to any information that is used when calculating display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH. It is possible.

In addition, "5H" ("5H.") displayed in the identification segment SH10 indicates that the total state ratio of the accessories, etc. is displayed.

In addition, in the performance display device SH according to the twelfth embodiment, when the ratio display numerical value is equal to or more than 50% of the total state ratio of the character object, etc., the ratio segment SH20 is displayed blinking.

Further, as described above, the display item (a) may be configured to display either the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed accessory ratio, and the cumulative advantageous section ratio is displayed. In the case of displaying "7P" ("7P.") in the identification segment SH10, and in displaying the total instructed accessory ratio, "7U" ("7U.") is displayed in the identification segment SH10. is configured as follows.

Further, as described in the tenth embodiment, the processing relating to the performance display monitor SH according to the twelfth embodiment may be configured to be executed as processing in the second ROM/RAM area. In such a configuration, the ratio calculation process of step 1637-7 (13th) is executed as a process in the second ROM/RAM area. Also, as described above, when calculating the "total state ratio of accessories, etc." Number of games + Total number of games played when the normal accessory is activated + Total number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated + Cumulative number of games played when the first type special accessory is not activated + Cumulative number of second type accessory continuous operation device The number of games when the second type special role is not activated at the time of operation) ÷ the total number of games played x 100 (%)", and the numerator is used as the "cumulative number of times when the first type special role is activated Number of games + Total number of games when the second type special role is activated + Cumulative number of games when the normal role is activated + Cumulative number of times when the first type special role is not activated when the first type continuous action device is activated The number of games + the total number of games when the second type special role product is not activated when the second type role product continuous operation device is activated” and the “total number of games played” used as the denominator are stored in the second RAM area. The Rukoto.

Here, after the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal by referring to the checksum after power-on (for example, after execution of the processes of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13), the power-off process is executed. The period before calculating the checksum (for example, before executing the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36) (in other words, the period during which the game can be executed, the period during which the game is executed, the setting change mode or during the setting confirmation mode), due to the occurrence of noise, the numerator data used to calculate the "total state ratio of accessories, etc.", in other words, the data stored in the second RAM area "Total number of games when the first type special role is activated + cumulative number of games when the second type special role is activated + cumulative number of games when the normal role is activated + cumulative first type continuous action device Abnormality in one or more information of "number of games when the first type special role is not activated when activated + cumulative number of games when the second type special role is not activated when the second type special role is not activated" occurs and the value is changed, and the numerator, ``the cumulative number of games played when the first type special role is activated + the cumulative number of games played when the second type special role is activated, The number of games played at time + the total number of games played when the normal role is activated + the total number of games played when the type 1 role continuous activation device is activated and the type 1 special role is not activated + the total number of games played when the type 2 role is continuous Even if the number of games played when the second type special accessory is not activated when the actuator is activated" becomes a larger value, in the twelfth embodiment, the ratio calculation which is the process in the second ROM/RAM area In the processing, a calculation regarding the "total state ratio of accessories, etc." is executed, and the display processing on the performance display monitor SH based on the result of the calculation processing {for example, the ratio display processing of step 1637-8 (13th)} (perform the same processing as when noise does not occur). It should be noted that the "cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc." is only an example, and the cumulative advantageous section ratio, cumulative instructed accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio in 6000 games, accessory ratio in 6000 games, Regarding the cumulative continuous role product ratio and the cumulative role product ratio, if noise occurs and the information used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area changes, the above-mentioned "cumulative role product ratio" It may be configured to have the same action as in the case of "equal state ratio". In other words, the power-off process is executed after the power-off recovery data is determined to be normal by referring to the checksum after the power is turned on (for example, after the processes of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 are executed). The period before calculating the checksum (for example, before executing the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36) (in other words, the period during which the game can be executed, the period during which the game is executed, the setting change mode period and the period of the setting confirmation mode), the determination (error check process) of whether the numerator value is greater than the denominator value is not executed. With such a configuration, even if the value of the numerator becomes larger than the value of the denominator due to noise or the like during a game, for example, just before the store closes, the error does not give a disadvantage to the player. , it is possible to progress the game.

Note that after the power-off process is executed to calculate the checksum (for example, after the process of step 1906 in FIG. 36 is executed), the power is turned on, the checksum is referenced, and the power-off recovery data is normal (for example, before the processing of steps 1016 and 1028 in FIG. 13 is executed) (in other words, the period when the power is off), the noise Due to the occurrence of an error, one or more of the numerator data and denominator data used to calculate the "total accessory condition ratio" has an abnormality and the value is changed. (1) If step 1016 returns No, an unrecoverable error occurs. (2) If step 1016 returns No, an unrecoverable error occurs, and if step 1028 returns No, it is used for the calculation stored in the second RAM area. It may also be configured to perform RAM initialization without including the information.

As an example of the configuration related to the action when noise occurs, the case of calculating the "cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc." has been described in detail. The configuration is not limited only to the case of calculating the "cumulative state ratio of accessories, etc." This can also be applied to the calculation of the character object ratio among 6000 games, the cumulative consecutive character ratio, and the cumulative total character ratio.

In the twelfth embodiment, the configuration related to the display on the performance display device SH has been described in detail, but the configuration of the twelfth embodiment can also be applied to gaming machines that do not have the performance display device SH. More specifically, even in a game machine that does not have the performance display device SH, as in the twelfth embodiment, the calculation of display items is executed, and the calculation result is transmitted from the game machine to the outside of the game machine. Alternatively, the information used to calculate the display items may be measured (counted), and the measurement result (count result) may be transmitted from the game machine to the outside of the game machine (the calculation may be performed outside the game machine). will be executed).

(13th embodiment)
The reel-type game machine of this example may be a medal-less reel-type game machine that does not use game medals. An example of such a configuration will be described in detail below as a thirteenth embodiment. Any of the configurations described above may be applied to the configuration that does not affect whether or not game medals are used. Note that the medal-less reel-type game machine is a reel-type game machine that does not use game medals (including physical medals and metal pieces for sensor detection) but uses scores.

<<<Functional block diagram of a medal-less reel-type game machine>>>
First, FIG. 157 is a functional block diagram applicable to the medalless reel-type gaming machine of this example. The figure shows a hard interface that illustrates physical connections with cables, and a soft interface that illustrates how commands are transmitted.

<<Inside the gaming machine>>
Inside the medal-less reel-type game machine, there are a main control board that controls the progress of the game, a payout control board that executes control related to scoring, a connection terminal board that can transmit and receive information to and from the outside of the game machine, have. Although not shown, it may have an external terminal board for outputting an external signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

<Main control board>
When the 1-bet button is operated in a valid state, a single-insert switch signal, which is a signal to bet one score, is sent to the main control board. In addition, in the situation where one bet has already been made, if a new one-insert switch signal is sent to the main control board, the number of bets will be two. Also, when the 3-bet button (sometimes referred to as the max-bet button) is operated in a valid state, a 3-bet switch signal is sent to the main control board, which is a signal to the effect that 3 points will be betted. be. In addition, the specified number of the game machine according to the figure is 3 points. Further, when the return button is operated in a valid state, a return button signal for returning the bet score to the player is transmitted to the main control board. The bet score is sent to the payout control board, which will be described later, and the payout control board adds the score as a return of the score (hereinafter, may be referred to as return to the payout control board or return to the payout control board). Yes), the score of the returned item is added to the total score display device and displayed.

In addition, the main control board transmits the inserted number data, which is information relating to the display of the betted score, to the inserted number display device, whereby the betted score is displayed on the inserted number display device. In addition, when points are given to the player due to the stop display of the winning combination (by winning), the main control board displays the winning number data, which is information regarding the display of the winning number. By transmitting to the device, the points to be given are displayed on the win number display device. As an example of the display mode, when the score to be given is 8 points, the score to be given may be directly displayed like “0→8”, or “0→1→2→ . . . You may display the score given step by step, such as →8” (“0” in the above may be hidden).

In addition, although not shown, the main control board has a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that a score has been bet (inserted), and an operation signal, which is a signal regarding the state of the game (for example, whether or not a bonus is being played). The state, the door open signal, which is a signal relating to the opening of the front door, and the security signal, which is a signal relating to the occurrence of an error, may be transmitted to the external terminal board.

In addition, the main control board is configured to be able to transmit and receive control commands to and from the payout control board (two-way communication is possible). Here, the control commands are commands relating to the progress of the game, commands relating to payout of scores, commands relating to settling of scores, insertion request commands for requesting the insertion of scores, and electromagnetic signals relating to scores stored in the game machine. It is a command for the number of medals, and so on. In addition, the payout control board is configured to be able to transmit a game enable signal, which is a command indicating that the game can be played at present, to the main control board.

It should be noted that the main control board and the payout control board may be connected to the connection terminal board without going through the external terminal board. In this case as well, the number of parts can be reduced, the configuration can be simplified, and signal deterioration can be prevented to enable appropriate communication. When the main control board and the dispensing control board are connected to the connection terminal board via the external terminal board, the external terminal board connects the main control board and the rental machine via the connection terminal board. . The external terminal board receives a medal insertion signal, an operating state, a door open signal and a security signal from the main control board. Also, the external terminal board receives a medal payout signal, which is a signal indicating that points are to be paid out (given to the player), from the payout control board. In addition, the external terminal board includes a medal insertion signal which is a signal indicating that a score has been bet (inserted), an operating state which is a signal regarding the state of the game (for example, whether or not a bonus is being played), and a front door. A door open signal, which is a signal related to opening, a security signal, which is a signal related to an error occurrence situation, and a medal payout signal, which is a signal to the effect that points will be paid out (given to the player) In the example, it is configured to be able to output to a rental machine).

<Dispensing control board>
The payout control board is connected to the main control board so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. Also, the payout control board is electrically connected to an external terminal board, a total score display device, and a counting button (sometimes referred to as a settlement button). When the count button is operated in a valid state, a count button signal, which is a signal indicating that the settlement operation has been executed, is transmitted to the payout control board. In addition, the payout control board can transmit game medal count data, which is information relating to the display of the current total score possessed by the player, to the total score display device, and the total score is displayed on the total score display device. is configured as follows. When the counting button is operated and the score is calculated, (1) the score being bet and the score stored in the payout control board (the total score display device stored in the payout control board (2) when there is a bet score, only the bet score is settled, and when there is no bet score, it is stored in the payout control board. It may be configured to settle the score that has been set. In addition, when the counting button is operated and the points are settled, only a part of the points stored in the payout control board may be settled, or all of the points may be settled. Furthermore, when an error occurs in the game machine or when the game is in progress, the operation of the count button can be disabled so that the settlement process is not executed. By doing so, the score can be added or subtracted at an appropriate timing, so that doubts about the qualified calculation result can be avoided. It should be noted that even when an error has occurred or the game is in progress, the counting button may be activated so that the settlement process can always be executed.

In this example, the above-described total score display device displays the game medals (the game medals displayed on the credit number display device D200) electrically stored by the storage device in the gaming machine using the game medals. The score corresponding to the total number of game medals including the game medals paid out outside the game machine such as the medal receiving tray D230 is displayed, but is not limited to this, and the total score display device and storage device. and may be used together. In such a configuration, the total score display device displays the score corresponding to the number of game medals paid out to the outside of the game machine, such as the medal receiving tray D230 in the game machine using the game medals. .

<<Rental Machine Operation Department>>
The members provided in the rental machine operating section provided outside the medalless reel-type gaming machine will be described in detail below. When the replay switch is operated in a valid state, a replay switch signal indicating that the replay switch has been operated is transmitted to the lending machine. By transmitting the replay switch signal to the lending machine, the player plays the game using the points accumulated in the previous game (for example, the points accumulated electrically in the member card). Scores related to replay are stored in the gaming machine (for example, stored in the storage area of the payout control board). In addition, when the game machine is configured to accumulate a predetermined number of points (for example, 50 points) by operating the replay switch once, the points accumulated by the player in the previous game are is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 50 points), (1) the replay switch signal is not transmitted to the lending machine, (2) the points are not stored (added) in the gaming machine, and (3) the predetermined A score less than the number may be stored (added) in the gaming machine.

Further, when the lending button is operated in a valid state, a lending button signal is transmitted to the lending machine, which is a signal used when the points to be lent out are stored in the lending machine. When the lending button signal is transmitted to the gaming machine, the points are transferred from the accumulated points purchased by the player on the day to the gaming machine. In addition, when the game machine is configured to accumulate a predetermined number of points (for example, 50 points) by operating the lending button once, the score accumulated in the card is less than the predetermined number (for example, 50 points). points), (1) the lending button signal is not transmitted to the lending machine, (2) the points are not stored (added) in the gaming machine, and (3) the points less than the predetermined number are stored in the gaming machine. (added). Also, when the return switch is operated in a valid state, the card that the player purchased on the day and has accumulated points will be returned to the player (the remaining points that have not been lent out will be returned to the player). stored). Further, it may be configured such that the player can change the score to be stored in the gaming machine by operating the lending button once.

In addition, the lending machine transmits the remaining points data, which is information related to the display of the points stored in the card purchased on the day, to the remaining points display device, thereby allowing the card purchased on the day to be displayed on the remaining points display device. A stored score (sometimes referred to as a remaining score) is displayed (when the card purchased on the day is inserted in the lending machine). In addition, when the lending machine can lend the score (score can be transferred to the gaming machine), the lending machine transmits a lending available LED signal to the lending available LED, so that the lending available LED can be rented (for example, , lights up), and the player can recognize that it can be borrowed. It should be noted that the lendable mode may be lit and the lendable mode may be turned off, or the lendable mode may be lit in green and the mode in which rent is not possible may be lit in red. As an example of whether or not it is possible to rent, if points are accumulated in the membership card inserted in the machine or the card purchased on the day (more than a predetermined number of points are accumulated), it is possible to rent. It may be configured to be

When communication cannot be established between the gaming machine and the lending machine, it is preferable not to proceed with the game in terms of score management. For example, the progress of the game can be prevented by not accepting the operation of the start lever or the bet button.

＜＜Rental machine＞＞
In addition, from the lending machine to the hall computer, ball output performance information, which is various information about the ball output of the gaming machine, a medal insertion signal, which is a signal indicating that the score has been bet (inserted), and the score is paid out ( a medal payout signal that is a signal to the effect that it is given to a player; an operating state that is a signal regarding the state of the game (for example, whether or not a bonus is being played); and a door open signal that is a signal regarding the opening of the front door. , and a security signal, which is a signal relating to an error occurrence situation, are transmitted. In addition, the rental machine is configured to transmit information on the maximum difference in the number of sheets on the day (sometimes referred to as MY), game machine installation information described later, etc. to the management computer, each company's center, and the game machine information center. there is

Also, as shown in the figure, the main control board, the payout control board, the connection terminal board on the game machine side, the connection terminal board on the lending machine side, the SC board, the hall computer, the management computer, the company center, and the game machine information center are: connected by a connection cable. Here, the mode of communication between the connection terminal board on the gaming machine side and the connection terminal board on the lending machine side will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 158 shows an example of communication contents of a connection cable used for communication between the connection terminal board on the game machine side and the connection terminal board on the rental machine side. The connector of the connection cable consists of 9 pins. (1) Pin 1 serves as an insulating GND (a pin for insulating from GND), and is connected from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side). used for signals sent to
(2) No. 2 pin is a signal sent from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side) as the GND (sometimes referred to as ground) of the transmission signal sent using the No. 6 pin. used for
(3) The 3rd pin is used as the GND of the reception signal transmitted using the 7th pin for the signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (gaming machine side).
(4) Pin No. 4 is a signal sent from the payout control board side (gaming machine side) to the lending machine as a connection confirmation signal for confirming that the lending machine is connected to the gaming machine (payout control board). used for (5) Pin No. 5 is used as an insulating GND (a pin for insulating from GND) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (game machine side).
(6) Pin No. 6 is a signal (transmission signal) transmitted from the payout control board (gaming machine) to the SC board (renting machine), and is a signal sent from the payout control board side (gaming machine side) to the lending machine. used for (7) Pin No. 7 is transmitted from the SC board (rental machine) to the payout control board (game machine) as a signal (receiving signal) that the payout control board (gaming machine) receives from the SC board (rental machine). It is used for signals that
(8) No. 8 pin is used as an insulating 5V (pin for insulating from other 5V) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (game machine side).
(9) The 9th pin is used as an insulating 5V (pin for insulating from other 5V) for a signal transmitted from the lending machine to the payout control board side (game machine side). The 6th and 2nd pins are twisted (the cables are twisted together), and the 7th and 3rd pins are twisted (the cables are twisted together). there is

In this example, the signal to be transmitted from the gaming machine to the lending machine is transmitted from the 6th pin, in other words, all of the multiple types of signals that can be transmitted from the gaming machine to the lending machine are transmitted from the 6th pin. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be transmitted from the game machine to the rental machine.

In this example, the signal to be transmitted from the lending machine to the gaming machine is transmitted from the 7th pin. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to have a transmission line for each type of signal that can be transmitted from the rental machine to the gaming machine.

Next, FIG. 159 illustrates the contents of the gaming machine information notification command (sometimes referred to as gaming machine information notification). The game machine information notification command is a command transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side as a transmission signal transmitted using the No. 6 pin of the communication cable described above with reference to FIG.

The command length of the game machine information notification command is variable, and may differ depending on the command content, but is composed of multiple bytes. The transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and consists of command length, command type, serial number, gaming machine type information, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, and checksum. Specifically, it is configured as follows.
The command length of No. 1 is 1-byte data of 0xXX to 0xYY (X and Y are arbitrary numbers).
The second command type is 1-byte data of 0x01.
The serial number No. 3 is 1-byte data from 0x00 to 0xFF.
Game machine type information No. 4 is information indicating the type of game machine, and is 1-byte data.
The game information type No. 5 is 1-byte data of 0x00 gaming machine performance information, 0x01 gaming machine installation information, and 0x02 HC/fraud monitoring information (HC is a hall computer). The gaming machine information No. 6 has the content of either gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, or HC/fraud monitoring information, and is 40-byte or 42-byte data, in other words, 2-byte or more data. It has become.
The 7th checksum is 1-byte data.
Note that the above serial number may be referred to as a serial number.

Regarding the command length of No. 1 above, when transmitting 40-byte gaming machine performance information or HC/fraud monitoring information as gaming machine information, the total command length is "0x2E", and the gaming machine information is When transmitting the gaming machine installation information of 42 bytes, the total command length is "0x30".

In addition, the game machine type information of No. 4 above is composed of code, game machine, group name, and management medium, and as a specific example,
0x01: Spindle type game machine, A group, game medals 0x02: Spindle type game machine, B group, game medals.

Further, in the gaming machine information No. 6, one kind of content corresponding to the gaming machine information type No. 5 is transmitted. For example, when the gaming machine information No. 5 is gaming machine performance information , the above No. 6 is the contents of the gaming machine performance information, and information on the game state and the like is transmitted. In addition, the contents of the game machine installation information include the manufacturer code of the main control board CPU, the manufacturer code of the payout control board CPU, the product code, the chip ID number, etc. The contents of the HC/fraud monitoring information include IN・OUT information, game status, etc.

The content of the gaming machine performance information includes, for example, display items to be displayed on the performance display device SH ("total state ratio of accessories, etc.", "total advantageous section ratio or total instructed role , ``Ratio of consecutive characters among 6000 games'', ``Ratio of characters among 6000 games'', ``Total ratio of consecutive characters'', ``Total ratio of characters''), and to calculate the display items The information to be used (sometimes referred to as an element, for example, the cumulative number of games played when the type 1 special accessory is activated, the total number of games played, etc.) may be configured to be transmittable to the outside of the gaming machine as gaming machine performance information. .

A more specific configuration example of the gaming machine performance information may be configured as follows.
Total number of input points: total input points (IN, sometimes referred to as total input points) since the power was turned on, and is 2-byte data.
Total number of points paid out: Total number of points paid out since the power was turned on (OUT, sometimes referred to as total number of points put out), which is 2-byte data.
When the replay combination is won and an automatic bet is executed when the replay symbols are stopped (after the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed), IN=0 points. In addition, when the replay symbols are stopped (the game in which the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped and displayed), OUT=0 points. In this way, the total input points and the total payout points are calculated by accumulating IN and OUT from when the power is turned on. When the power is turned off and then the power is restored, the total number of input points and the total number of payout points are cleared, and after the power is turned on, they are accumulated and calculated again from 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simply output the IN/OUT of the game hall for one day to the outside of the game machine.
MY in one business day: A value obtained by subtracting the smallest difference number for the player from the largest difference number for the player from when the power is turned on until the power is turned off again, and is a 2-byte value. data. If a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, MY for one business day will be cleared. Note that the counter value of the MY counter described above may also be used.
Cumulative number of payouts: The cumulative number of payouts is the total number of payouts during the operation of the first type special role + the cumulative number of payouts while the second type special role is in operation + the number of ordinary payouts "Total number of payouts during operation", which is 2-byte data. In addition, even if the power supply is cut off and then the power is restored to normal, or even after changing the settings in the situation where there is no RAM abnormality, the total number of accessories paid out will not be cleared. there is
Cumulative continuous accessory payout number: The cumulative continuous accessory payout number is the cumulative payout number during operation of the first type special accessory, and is 2-byte data. In addition, even if the power is cut off and then the power is restored to normal, or even after changing the settings in a situation where there is no RAM abnormality, the cumulative number of consecutive bonus payouts will not be cleared. ing.
Cumulative role ratio: Cumulative role ratio is "(Total number of payouts during operation of the first type special role + Cumulative number of payouts during operation of the second type special role + During operation of the normal role cumulative payout number)/cumulative total payout number x 100 (%)", which is 1-byte data. In addition, even if the power is cut off and then the power is restored to normal, or even after changing the settings in a situation where there is no RAM abnormality, the cumulative accessory ratio will not be cleared. .
Cumulative continuous accessory ratio: The cumulative continuous accessory ratio is "cumulative number of payouts during the operation of the first type special accessory / cumulative total number of payouts x 100 (%)", and is 1-byte data. ing. In addition, even if the power supply is cut off and then the power is restored to normal, or even after changing the settings in the situation where no RAM abnormality has occurred, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio will not be cleared. there is
Cumulative instructed accessory ratio or cumulative advantageous section ratio: The cumulative advantageous section ratio is "advantageous section game number / total game number × 100 (%)", and the cumulative instructed accessory ratio is "{main control Number of payouts + Number of payouts of accessories in a game in which pushing order navigation (sometimes referred to as an instruction) is executed on the board M ÷ Total number of payouts x 100 (%)", which is advantageous to the ratio of the accessories including instructions. Whether to display the section ratio or the section ratio may be determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine, and is 1-byte data. In addition, even if the power is turned off and then the power is restored to normal, or even after the setting is changed under the condition that no RAM abnormality has occurred, the total ratio of instructed accessories or the total ratio of advantageous section is not cleared.
Accessory status ratio: Accessory status ratio is "(Total number of games when the first type special accessory is activated + Cumulative number of games when the second type special accessory is activated + Cumulative number of games when the normal accessory is activated Number of games + Cumulative number of games when the first type special role is not activated when the first type role continuous operation device is activated + Cumulative number of the second type special role when the second type role continuous operation device is activated The number of games played at the time)÷total total number of games played×100 (%)", which is 1-byte data. In addition, even if the power supply is interrupted and then the power is restored to normal, or even after the setting is changed in a situation where no RAM abnormality has occurred, the character item status ratio will not be cleared. .
Note that the cumulative accessory ratio, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio, the cumulative instructed accessory ratio, the cumulative advantageous section ratio, and the accessory state ratio are rounded down (rounded off) after the decimal point. Also, the payout number may be referred to as payout points or payout points. In addition, in the gaming machine performance information, the cumulative role ratio, the cumulative continuous role ratio, the cumulative instructed role ratio, the cumulative advantageous section ratio, and the role condition ratio are displayed on the performance display device. It may be configured to transmit the data to be used. In addition, when calculating the state ratio of accessories, etc., if one game is executed in a situation where both the type 1 special accessory and the type 1 accessory continuous operation device are operating, Add 1 to the cumulative number of games when the first type special role is activated, and do not add to the number of games when the first type special role is not activated when the cumulative first type special role is activated. 1 is added to the numerator of the above formula (2 is not added). In other words, when either the role object is operating or the role object continuous operating device is operating, 1 is stored in the storage area of the RAM that stores the numerator of the above formula. will be added.

As the HC/fraud monitoring information, error information may be configured to be able to be transmitted. In the case of such a configuration, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The error information regarding the main control board and the error information regarding the payout control board are separated and transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, it is possible to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information including 1-byte error information related to the main control board and 1-byte error information related to the payout control board.
(2) Separate the restorable error information about the main control board from the restorable error information about the main control board, and transmit them as HC/unauthorized monitoring information. As a specific example, HC/unauthorized monitoring information including 1-byte recoverable error information related to the main control board and 1-byte unrecoverable error information related to the main control board can be transmitted.
(3) Separate the restorable error information about the main control board, the unrecoverable error information about the main control board, and the error information about the payout control board, and transmit them as HC/fraud monitoring information. As a specific example, it is possible to transmit HC/fraud monitoring information including 1-byte recoverable error information related to the main control board, 1-byte unrecoverable error information related to the main control board, and 1-byte error information related to the payout control board. configured to

Although the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to this example is configured to have a payout control board, it is not limited to this, and does not have a payout control board. The configuration to be handled may be configured to be executable by the main control board.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the gaming machine information notification command is 1 byte. , game information type, and game machine information, but the game machine information is data of 2 bytes or more. For example, when transmitting gaming machine performance information as gaming machine information, the gaming machine performance information is 40-byte data, but the 1st byte to the 40th byte are divided into 40 pieces of 1-byte data. The data and the command length, command type, serial number, and game machine information type, which are 1-byte data, are used to calculate the checksum of the game machine information notification command. By configuring in this way, even if there is data of 2 bytes or more as a command, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte.

Next, FIG. 160 illustrates the contents of a count notification command (sometimes referred to as count notification). The count notification command is a command transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side as a transmission signal transmitted using the 6th pin of the communication cable described above in FIG. Commands that can be sent.

The command length of the count notification command is 7 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. It is configured, more specifically, as follows.
The command length of No. 1 is 1-byte data of 0x07.
The second command type is 1-byte data of 0x02.
The third counting serial number is 1-byte data of 0x00 to 0xFF.
The number of counting points of No. 4 is 1-byte data of 0x00 to 0xFA.
The fifth cumulative count is 2-byte data ranging from 0x00 to 0xFFFF. The sixth checksum is 1-byte data.
In addition, the counting serial number may be called the counting serial number, and the serial number and the lending serial number may be collectively called the serial number.

As shown in the figure, the checksum of the count notification command is 1 byte. However, the accumulated count points are data of 2 bytes or more. For example, although the count cumulative score is 2-byte data, 1-byte data obtained by dividing the first and second bytes into two pieces, and 1-byte data of the command length, command type, and count It is configured to calculate the checksum of the count notification command using the serial number and the count number. By configuring in this way, even if there is data of 2 bytes or more as a command, the checksum can be configured as 1 byte. Although the details will be described later, 9999 is the upper limit of the accumulated points.

Next, FIG. 161 illustrates the content of the rental notification command (sometimes referred to as rental notification). The rental notification command is a command that the gaming machine side receives from the rental machine side as a reception signal transmitted using the 7th pin of the communication cable described above in FIG. 158, and is transmitted based on the operation of the rental button. command to get

The command length of the lending notification command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side, and consists of command length, command type, lending serial number, number of lending points, and checksum. , more specifically, is configured as follows.
The command length of No. 1 is 1-byte data of 0x05.
The second command type is 1-byte data of 0x13.
The 3rd lending serial number is 1-byte data of 0x00 to 0xFF.
The number of borrowed points of No. 4 is 1-byte data of 0x00 to 0xFF.
The fifth checksum is 1-byte data.
The above-mentioned lending serial number is sometimes referred to as the lending serial number, and the serial number and the counting serial number are also collectively referred to as the serial number.

Next, FIG. 162 illustrates the content of the loan receipt result response command (sometimes referred to as loan receipt result response). The lending reception result response command is a command sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side as a transmission signal sent using the 6th pin of the communication cable described above with reference to FIG.

The command length of the lending receipt result response command is 5 bytes, and the transmission direction is a command sent from the gaming machine to the lending machine. It is configured, more specifically, as follows.
The command length of No. 1 is 1-byte data of 0x05.
The second command type is 1-byte data of 0x13.
The 3rd lending serial number is 1-byte data of 0x00 to 0xFF.
The number 4 lending score reception result is 1-byte data with 0x00: normal and 0x01: abnormal (other values are judged to be abnormal).
The fifth checksum is 1-byte data.

Next, FIG. 163 is a flow regarding notification of gaming machine information. In the figure, transmission and reception of information between the reel-type game machine side and the lending machine side are illustrated. It should be noted that FIG. 1 shows a case where HC/fraud monitoring information is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side as gaming machine information notification.

First, the gaming machine is powered on, and gaming machine information notification is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side at a predetermined timing. Note that the serial number in the gaming machine information notification immediately after power-on is 0. After about 100 ms, a count notification is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Note that the count serial number is 0 in the count notification immediately after the power is turned on. After that, within 170 ms, a lending notification is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Note that the lending serial number in the lending notice immediately after the power is turned on is 0. After that, within 10 ms, the lending reception result response is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Note that the lending serial number is 0 in the lending receipt result response immediately after the power is turned on. After that, when 20 ms or more have passed, and about 300 ms after the previous transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is transmitted again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is 1.

As described above, in this example, the serial number of the gaming machine information notification is 0 for the first time after the power is turned on, and is then incremented by 1 for each command transmission, such as "0→1→2→3→...→255". It is configured to be Similarly, the first time after the power is turned on, the counting serial number is 0, and after that, it is configured to be incremented by 1 each time a command is sent, such as "0→1→2→3→...→255". Similarly, the first time after the power is turned on, the lending serial number becomes 0, and after that, it is incremented by 1 each time a command is sent (each time a lending notice is sent), such as "0→1→2→3→...→255". It is configured.

After that, the game machine information notification is transmitted every approximately 300 ms, and the game machine information notification with the serial number 255 is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side. After that, the counting notification, the lending notification, and the lending receipt result response are transmitted and received, and about 300 ms after the game machine information notification with the serial number of 255 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, the gaming machine information notification is sent again to the gaming machine side. , the serial number is set to 1. That is, the serial number is set to 0 only immediately after one power supply is turned on, and thereafter changes in the order of "1->2->..->255->1->2->.".

Although not shown, as gaming machine information notification, gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side every 30 seconds, and gaming machine performance information is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side every 120 seconds. configured to be When the transmission timing of any of gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information overlaps, (1) priority is set and only commands with high priority are sent; It may be configured such that all are transmitted in one interrupt process. As a specific example of the priority when configured as in (1) above, the configuration is such that "gaming machine performance information → gaming machine installation information → HC/illegal monitoring information" is arranged in descending order of priority. Alternatively, the information may be configured in the order of "HC/fraud monitoring information→gaming machine installation information→gaming machine performance information" in descending order of priority.

In this way, in this example, a serial number is provided in the gaming machine information notification, and the serial number is used to ensure the consistency of the commands (for example, when the gaming machine information notification with serial number 5 is issued next time). If the serial number of the gaming machine information notification is not 6, it can be determined that there is an abnormality). The serial number is configured to be stored in a predetermined storage area.

Further, when transmitting the serial number, the serial number transmitted last time (serial number stored in a predetermined storage area) is subjected to special addition processing before being transmitted.
(1) When the previous serial number is N (N is a value less than 255), the result of executing the special addition process is "N+1".
(2) When the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, 255 in this example), the result of executing the special addition process is "1".
is configured as With this configuration, when 0 is transmitted as the serial number, the equipment outside the game machine can also recognize that the game machine has been turned off, so that fraud can be quickly detected. can be configured to

Here, the special addition processing will be described in detail. First, to describe the conventional general addition process in detail, when N=100,
(A1) When normal addition processing is performed to add "+1" to "100(D)", "101(D)" is obtained.
(A2) Also, when normal addition processing is performed to add "+1" to "255 (D)" corresponding to M, a carry occurs and "0 (D)" is obtained.
On the other hand, when the special addition processing is executed in detail,
(B1) If a special addition process for adding "1" to "100(D)" is executed, the result is "101(D)".
(B2) Also, when executing the special addition process of "+1" to "255 (D)" corresponding to M, carrying is generated by executing the normal addition process of "+1" first. As a result, the carry flag becomes 1 due to the occurrence of a carry. The special addition process according to this example is configured such that when the carry flag is 1, the operation result is "1(D)" as an arbitrary value. )”, the operation result is “1(D)”.

The special addition processing according to this example is configured so that when the carry flag is 1, the operation result is "1 (D)" as an arbitrary value, but any value can be changed. Instead, it may be configured to be "100 (D)".

In addition, the serial number, counting serial number, and lending serial number according to this example may be 2-byte information.
(1) When the previous serial number is N (N is a value less than 65535), the result of executing the special addition process is "N+1".
(2) When the previous serial number is M (M is the maximum value, 65535 in this example), the result of executing the special addition process is "1".
It may be configured as

Although the serial number relating to the gaming machine information notification has been described in detail here, the counting serial number relating to the counting notification and the rental serial number relating to the rental notification have the same effect.

Note that the execution timing of the special addition process described above may be any timing from after transmitting the gaming machine information notification to before transmitting the next gaming machine information notification. That is, it is configured to execute special addition processing in order to update the next serial number at the timing after the serial number is transmitted.

Further, when the storage area for storing the serial number related to the gaming machine information notification is the first storage area and the storage area for storing the counting serial number related to the counting notification is the second storage area, the first storage area and the second storage area It may be configured to be continuous. Further, if the gaming machine is configured to have a storage area for storing the rental serial number related to the rental notification, and the storage area for storing the rental serial number related to the rental notification is the third storage area, the first storage area and the third The storage areas may be continuous, or the second storage area and the third storage area may be continuous. When the power is turned on again after being turned off, as described above, the serial number stored in the first storage area and the count serial number stored in the second storage area are changed. It may be configured to execute a process of resetting the lending serial number stored in the third storage area to 0 (if the gaming machine does not have the third storage area, the first storage area and the second storage area may be set to 0).

For example, as a configuration in which the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area have consecutive addresses, for example, the serial number is "F1A0", the counting serial number is "F1A1", and the lending serial number is " F1A2", when the power is turned on and the serial number, the counting serial number, and the lending serial number are cleared to 0, the address corresponding to the serial number, ``F1A0'', is specified and 0 is executed. The serial number, counting serial number, and lending serial number can be cleared to 0 by repeating the process of clearing and then similarly clearing the next address to 0 twice. The amount of data required for the program can be reduced compared to the case where each is specified and cleared to 0.

In addition, as the game machine information notification, information regarding the performance display device may be configured to be transmittable from the game machine side to the outside of the game machine (rental machine, SC board). In such a configuration, among the gaming machine information notifications, the gaming machine performance information may be transmitted, the gaming machine installation information may be transmitted, or the HC/fraud monitoring information may be transmitted. good. Information about the performance display device may be configured as follows.
(1) Display items described above in FIG. Cumulative accessory ratio, cumulative accessory state ratio) is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, the display items are calculated within the game machine, and the calculation result is transmitted outside the game machine.
(2) Elements for displaying the display items described above in FIG. 156 (elements used for calculation such as the total number of games played when the first type special accessory is activated) are transmitted from the gaming machine side to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, the display items are transmitted without being calculated within the gaming machine, and are calculated outside the gaming machine (for example, on the SC board).
(3) Display items described above in FIG. Cumulative Accessory Ratio, Cumulative Accessory State Ratio) and elements for displaying display items (elements used for calculation, such as the number of games played when the cumulative type 1 special accessory is activated) from the gaming machine side Send outside the gaming machine.

As described above, the gaming machine is configured to be able to transmit the gaming machine information notification to the outside every predetermined time (for example, every 300 ms). While the notification is sent, if the gaming machine information notification cannot be sent to the outside due to the influence of noise or the like, subsequent counting notifications are not sent. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, if the game machine information notification cannot be transmitted to the outside due to the influence of noise, etc., then the addition of the total score based on the operation of the lending button will not be executed. It is configured.

In addition, as the game machine information notification, the IN/OUT information may be configured to be transmittable to the outside of the game machine. Alternatively, it may be transmitted as gaming machine installation information, or may be transmitted as HC/fraud monitoring information. It should be noted that the configuration regarding the IN/OUT information may be configured as follows. (1) The symbol combination for the replay is stopped and displayed as a game machine information notification at the timing after the operation of the start lever for the next game is accepted after winning the replay role and the symbol combination for the replay is stopped and displayed. Sending the fact that it is a later game (sometimes referred to as replay operation state information) and the IN information of the number of bets in the game (for example, 3 points) to the outside from the gaming machine side (2) Replay role , and at the timing after the symbol combination related to the replay has been stopped and displayed, the gaming machine side will transmit to the outside that the game will be played after the symbol combination related to the replay has been stopped and displayed as a gaming machine information notification. After that, at the timing after the reception of the operation of the start lever, IN information of the number of bets (for example, 3 points) in the game is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the outside as gaming machine information notification (3) Replaying At the timing after winning and the symbol combination related to the replay are stopped and displayed, the OUT information indicating that the point is 0 is transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside as the gaming machine information notification, and the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped. At the timing after accepting the operation of the start lever for the displayed next game, the game machine transmits IN information to the outside to indicate that the player has scored 0 points as a game machine information notification.

Next, FIG. 164 is a flow regarding a rental notification command. In the figure, a configuration applicable to the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is shown for transmission and reception of information between the reel-type gaming machine side and the lending machine side.

<A: Configuration 1 in which the lending button can be enabled during reel rotation>
A certain game is executed and the reels start spinning. After that, the lending button of the lending machine is turned from off to on while the reel is rotating. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points. The "total score" is, as described above, the total score that can be put into the medalless reel-type gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or payout control board. The "total score" corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general reel-type gaming machine that uses physical game medals. When the configuration of the medal-less reel-type game machine is applied to the above-described embodiment, what is called "game medals" in this specification will be replaced with "scores", "score information", and "game medals". Points", "point information", "game value", "game value information", etc. There is no problem in calling them "game value" and "game value information". In addition, it is not necessary to have "credit". The stored total score is configured to be displayed on the total score display device.

After that, the game machine information notification including the information of the total score = 30, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and after about 100 ms, the counting serial number becomes m, the counting point = 0, the cumulative counting point = A counting notification including information of 0 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170 ms after that, a lending notification including information of the lending number = 50, which becomes the lending serial number p, is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. Thereafter, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, which is the lending serial number p, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and 50 points, which is the lending score, is added to the total score. Then, the total score becomes 30+50=80 points (the display of the total score display device also becomes 80 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values. After that, when 20 ms or more have passed, and about 300 ms after the previous transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is transmitted again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1.

<B: Configuration 2 in which the lending button can be enabled during reel rotation>
A certain game is executed and the reels start spinning. After that, the lending button of the lending machine is turned from off to on while the reel is rotating. The total score stored in the game machine is 9980 points.

After that, a gaming machine information notification including information of total score = 9980, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and after about 100 ms, the counting serial number becomes m, the counting point = 0, the cumulative counting point = A counting notification including information of 0 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170 ms after that, a lending notification including information of the lending number = 50, which becomes the lending serial number p, is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score receipt result is abnormal is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the lending score of 50 points is added to the total score. and the total score remains at 9980 (the display of the total score display device also remains at 9980). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values. After that, when 20 ms or more have passed, and about 300 ms after the previous transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is transmitted again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1.

In the configurations of A and B above, the score can be borrowed by operating the lending button even while the reels are rotating. The value is 9999. As in A above, if 50 points, which is the score added based on the operation of the lending button, does not exceed the upper limit, 30 + 50 = 80. While 50 points are lent and added to the total score, as in B above, if 50 points, which is the score added based on the operation of the lending button, is added, the upper limit of the total score , the 50 points are not lent (not added) and the total score remains at 9,980.

By configuring as above A and B, in order to execute the next game as smoothly as possible even while the reels are rotating, it is possible to perform a score lending operation, and the total score is the upper limit. can be configured so as not to cause the problem of exceeding the

In addition, in the same figure, when the total score exceeds the upper limit value when the 50 points added based on the operation of the lending button are added, the score is not borrowed. However, if the total score is a predetermined value (for example, 9950), it is configured not to lend the score (the lending is not performed even if the lending button is operated). good too.

In addition, in the figure, as a configuration in which the lending points are not added to the total score, the gaming machine is configured to transmit information including the fact that the lending points reception result is abnormal as a lending receipt result response. Not limited to this, the lending machine side transmits information to the effect that the lending score is 0 as a lending notification sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. , the lending machine side transmits information to the effect that the lending score is 50 as a lending notice to the gaming machine side, and if the lending score is not added, the lending machine side sends a lending notice to the gaming machine side. It may be configured to transmit information indicating that the score=0.

<C: Configuration 1 in which the lending button is not enabled during reel rotation>
A certain game is executed and the reels start spinning. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points.

After that, the game machine information notification containing the total score = 30 information and the rental button operation disabled information (information indicating that the operation of the rental button is not effective because the reels are rotating), which becomes the serial number n, is sent from the rental machine side. After about 100 ms, a counting notification including information of counting points = 0 and cumulative counting points = 0, which becomes the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170 ms after that, the lending serial number A lending notice including information that the number of lending points=0, which is p, is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side.

After that, within 10 ms, the lending reception result response containing the information that the lending score receipt result with the lending serial number p is normal is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 30 ( The display of the total score display device is still 30 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values.

After that, the lending button of the lending machine is turned from off to on while the reel is rotating. After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the game machine information notification is n+1, and includes the information of total score = 30 and the information that the lending button operation is disabled (information that the operating of the lending button is not valid because the reel is rotating). Then, after about 100 ms, a counting notification including information that the counting number is set to m+1, the number of points to be counted is 0, and the cumulative number of points to be counted is 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. , a lending notice including the information that the number of lending points=0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Thus, in the configuration C, since the lending button operation disabled information is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, 0 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side as the number of lending points.

After that, within 10 ms, the lending reception result response containing the information that the lending score receipt result with the lending serial number p is normal is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 30 ( The display of the total score display device is still 30 points).

In this way, while the reels are rotating, the gaming machine information notification including the lending button operation disabled information (information indicating that the lending button operation is not valid because the reels are rotating) is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. By doing so, it is possible to clarify the period between the progress of the game and the lending operation.

In addition, in the figure, the lending score is added to the total score based on the sending of the lending receipt result response, but the configuration is such that the lending score is added to the total score based on the receipt of the lending notice. You may

<D: Configuration in which the bet button can be disabled during lending>
Next, FIG. 165 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 30 points, the bet button is enabled, and the game machine information notification including the information of the total score = 30, which is the serial number n, is sent from the gaming machine side. After about 100 ms, a counting notification including information of counting points = 0 and cumulative counting points = 0, which becomes the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170 ms after that, the lending serial number A lending notice including information that the number of lending points=0, which is p, is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Thereafter, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, with the lending serial number p, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 30 points. (The display of the total score display device is still 30 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values.

After that, the lending button of the lending machine is changed from off to on. After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1, and includes information of total score=30. Then, after about 100 ms, a counting notification including information that the counting number is set to m+1, the number of points to be counted is 0, and the cumulative number of points to be counted is 0 is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. , a lending notice including information on the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, with the lending serial number p+1, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the lending score of 50 points is added to the total score. Then, the total score becomes 30+50=80 points (the display of the total score display device also becomes 80 points).

In this configuration, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) immediately after the timing when the total score is added. Approximately 300 ms after the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is transmitted again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The bet button becomes valid again when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the total score was added.

As described above, in the configuration of D, when addition to the total score is executed by the lending operation, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time. During the invalid period of the bet button, the player may be notified that the score is being lent out. For example, the display of the total score display device may blink. Alternatively, the display of the total score may be displayed so as to increase in stages from 30 to 80. Also, the sub control board S side may be configured to output a sound corresponding to an increase in the total score. Note that the predetermined period is not limited to 200 ms, and may be changed as appropriate. The timing at which the lending operation is added to the total score and the predetermined period during which the bet button is disabled may overlap, or they may not overlap (when the lending operation is added to the total score). The bet button may be disabled immediately after the bet is made).

In addition, in the figure, it is configured such that the lending score is added to the total score at the timing when the lending receipt result response is sent, but it may be configured so that the lending score is added to the total score at the timing when the lending notice is received. . Further, although the operation of the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period from the timing when the lending receipt result response is transmitted, the operation of the bet button may be disabled for a predetermined period from the timing when the lending notification is received.

Further, as described above, in the configuration of D, when the gaming machine side receives a lending notification including a score of 1 or more as the lending score and the total score is added, the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the gaming machine side receives a lending notice including information indicating that the lending score is 0 and the total score is not added, the bet button is not disabled (it does not change from valid to invalid upon receipt of the lending notice). ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure so as not to redundantly execute processing that affects the game, such as addition processing to the total score and betting processing.

In addition, in the same figure, the configuration in which the bet button is disabled for a predetermined period of time when the score is borrowed has been described in detail. may be configured to be invalid for a predetermined period of time at the time of lending.

It should be noted that, when the gaming machine information notification is sent, the game is being rented out, and if the renting state ends before the rental notification command is received, points can be added based on the lending operation. .

The bet buttons described above also include the max bet button described above, and can be applied to the configuration relating to the lighting of the max bet lamps described above with reference to FIGS. That is, it is possible to combine with the configuration described above with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83, such as a configuration in which the max bet lamp is turned off during the period in which the bet button is disabled.

<E: Configuration 1 regarding loan receipt result response>
Next, FIG. 166 will be described in detail. The total score stored in the game machine is 30 points, and the lending button is changed from off to on. After that, the game machine information notification including the information of the total score = 30, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and after about 100 ms, the counting serial number becomes m, the counting point = 0, the cumulative counting point = A counting notification including information of 0 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170 ms after that, a lending notification including information of the lending number = 50, which becomes the lending serial number 5, is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. Thereafter, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result, which is lending serial number 5, is normal is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the lending score of 50 points is added to the total score. Then, the total score becomes 30+50=80 points (the display of the total score display device also becomes 80 points). In addition, the above n and m may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the lending button of the lending machine is changed from off to on. After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1 and includes information of total score=80. After about 100 ms, the game machine sends a counting notification including information that the counting number is set to m+1, the number of points to be counted is 0, and the accumulated number of points is to 0. Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine is set to the lending serial number of 1. , a lending notice including information on the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Thereafter, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result is abnormal, with lending serial number 1, is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the lending score is not added to the total score. The score remains 80 points (the display of the total score display device also remains 80 points). Thus, in the configuration of E, when the lending notification with the lending serial number 5 is received and then the next lending notice is received, the lending serial number should originally be 6, but noise, etc. If you receive a loan notification with a loan serial number of 1 due to the influence of the It is configured so that it is transmitted from the machine side to the lending machine side and is not added to the total score.

<F: Configuration 2 regarding loan receipt result response>
The total score stored in the game machine is 30 points, and the lending button is changed from off to on. After that, the game machine information notification including the information of the total score = 30, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and after about 100 ms, the counting serial number becomes m, the counting point = 0, the cumulative counting point = A counting notification including information of 0 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and within 170 ms after that, a lending notification including information of the lending number = 50, which becomes the lending serial number 255, is sent from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. be done. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score reception result is normal, which is the lending serial number 255, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the lending score of 50 points is added to the total score. Then, the total score becomes 30+50=80 points (the display of the total score display device also becomes 80 points). In addition, the above n and m may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical value.

After that, the lending button of the lending machine is changed from off to on. After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1 and includes information of total score=80. After about 100 ms, the game machine sends a counting notification including information that the counting number is set to m+1, the number of points to be counted is 0, and the accumulated number of points is to 0. Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine is set to the lending serial number of 1. , a lending notice including information on the number of lending points=50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response including information that the lending score receipt result is normal, which becomes lending serial number 1, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the lending score of 50 points is added to the total score. Thus, the total score is 80+50=130 points (the display of the total score display device is also 130 points). Thus, in the configuration of F, when the lending notification with the lending serial number 255 is received and then the next lending notice is received, the lending serial number is 1, and in this example, the upper limit of the lending serial number is 255, and the next number after 255 is 1, so the lending notification of number 1, which is the correct lending serial number, was received next time for 255, so the lending receipt result including the information that the lending score receipt result is normal A response is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. In this way, by circulating the lending serial number from 1 to 255, it is possible to ensure consistency between the gaming machine and the outside without pressure on the capacity of the storage area for storing the lending serial number.

<A: Flow 1 regarding count notification command>
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the flow regarding the count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and the gaming machine information notification including the information of the total score=200, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and then the count button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, about 20 ms passes while the count button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is decremented by 50, from 200 to 150 (based on the operation of the count button, the display of the total score display device and the total The fact that the score is subtracted may be referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.). Thereafter, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification including information of counting points = 50 and cumulative counting points = 50, which becomes the counting serial number m, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and counting is performed. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, resulting in a total score of 150 points. It should be noted that the subtraction timing of the display of the total score display device and the subtraction timing of the stored total score may be made at the same time. The timing may be about 20 ms after the count button is turned off to on, in other words, the timing when the long press of the count button is detected, or the timing when the count notification is sent.

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification containing the information of the lending number=0, which becomes the lending serial number p, to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, which becomes the lending serial number p, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 150 points. (The display of the total score display device is still 150 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values.

After that, the count button remains on, and the timing is 20 ms or more after the previous transmission of the lending receipt result response, and about 300 ms after the timing of the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again. It is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1 and includes information of total score=150. After that, 50 is subtracted from the display of the total score display device about 300 ms after the previous subtraction timing of the display of the total score display device, and 150→100. After that, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification containing the information of the counting serial number m+1, counting points = 50, and counting accumulated points = 100 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and counting is performed. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 100 points.

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification including the information that the lending number is 0 and the lending serial number p+1 to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, with the lending serial number p+1, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 150 points. (The display of the total score display device is still 150 points).

After that, the counting button turns from ON to OFF, and at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the previous transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side. is sent from to the lessor side. The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+2 and includes information of total score=100. Approximately 300 ms after the timing of subtraction of the display of the previous total score display device, since the count button was turned off, the display of the total score display device is not subtracted. After that, about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification containing information such as counting points = 0 and cumulative counting points = 100, which becomes the counting serial number m+2, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. The score remains at 100 points.

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification including the information that the lending number is 0 and the lending serial number p+2 to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal is sent from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, with the lending serial number p+2, and the total score remains 100 points. (The display of the total score display device is still 100 points). After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+3, and includes information of total score=100.

<B: Flow 2 regarding count notification command>
The total score stored in the gaming machine is 200 points, and the gaming machine information notification including the information of the total score=200, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and then the count button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, about 20 ms pass while the counting button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is decremented by 50, from 200 to 150. After that, the count button turns from ON to OFF, and about 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification including information of counting points = 50 and cumulative counting points = 50, which becomes the counting serial number m, is sent from the gaming machine side. The total score is 150 points by subtracting 50 points, which is the number of points to be counted, from the total score. Thus, in the configuration B, after transmitting the gaming machine information notification, the count button is turned off→on, and after that, the long press of the count button is detected (20 ms has passed since the turn off→on), and then the counting is performed. Even when the counting button is turned from ON to OFF before sending the notification, the counting notification including the information of counting points = 50 and cumulative counting points = 50 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side as the counting notification, It is configured so that the total score is 150 points by subtracting 50 points, which is the counting score, from the total score.

It should be noted that the subtraction timing of the display of the total score display device and the subtraction timing of the stored total score may be made at the same time. It may be the timing of detecting a long press of the button or the timing of sending the count notification. When configured in such a manner, the configuration is as follows.
(1) Even if the counting button is turned off → on after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned on → off before sending the counting notification, at the timing when the long press of the counting button is detected , the total score and the display of the total score display can be updated.
(2) Even if the count button is turned off→on after sending the gaming machine information notification, and then turned on→off before sending the count notification, the total score is calculated at the timing of sending the count notification. and the display of the total score display device can be updated.

Also, the total score display device may be configured to be capable of both storing the total score and displaying the total score. After 20 ms, in other words, the total score may be updated and the display of the total score may be updated at the timing of detecting the long press of the count button, or the total score may be updated and updated at the timing of sending the count notification. It may be configured to update the display of the total score.

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification containing the information of the lending number=0, which becomes the lending serial number p, to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, which becomes the lending serial number p, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 150 points. (The display of the total score display device is still 150 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values.

After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1 and includes information of total score=150.

With this configuration, even if the count button is turned off→on after transmitting the gaming machine information notification, and then turned on→off before transmitting the count notification, the total score and the total score The display on the display device can be updated, the counted points and the accumulated counted points can be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine by the counting notification, and at the timing when the player visually recognizes that the settlement has been executed. Even when the operation of the count button is finished (the hand is released), the information can be accurately transmitted to the outside of the game machine.

Further, the configuration related to the count button according to this example may be configured as follows.
<Configuration 1>
(1) If the count button is activated and operated continuously for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted, and a count notification containing a predetermined number of points is transmitted. Send machine information notification to rented machine (3) When game machine information notification is sent, send count notification after predetermined time elapses (4) Count after sending game machine information notification and before receiving rental notification When the button turns from ON to OFF, the total score will be subtracted at the next count notification transmission timing.

<Configuration 2>
(1) If the count button is activated and operated continuously for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted, and a count notification containing a predetermined number of points is transmitted. Send machine information notification to rented machine (3) When game machine information notification is sent, send count notification after predetermined time elapses (4) Count after sending game machine information notification and before receiving rental notification If the button changes from on to off, the total score will not be subtracted at the next count notification transmission timing.

<Configuration 3>
(1) If the count button is activated and operated continuously for a predetermined period of time, the total score is subtracted, and a count notification containing a predetermined number of points is transmitted. Send the machine information notification to the lending machine (3) If the gaming machine information notification is sent, send the counting notification after a predetermined time elapses (4) After sending the gaming machine information notification, the counting button turns from off to on However, the total score will not be subtracted at the next count notification transmission timing.

<Configuration 4>
(1) If the counting button is operated continuously for a predetermined time while the counting button is enabled, the total score is subtracted, and a counting notification command including the counting points is transmitted. (2) Power is turned off while the counting button is on. After that, even if the power is restored while the count button is pressed, the total score is not subtracted.

<Configuration 5>
(1) If the count button is activated and operated continuously for a predetermined time, the total score is subtracted, and a count notification command including the count is sent (2) Waiting (minimum timer value between games > 0), the reel starts rotating even if the count button is pressed, and if the count button is kept pressed, the stop button cannot be operated. And the total score is not subtracted

<Configuration 6>
During the execution of the freeze at the start of rotation and the freeze at stop described above, it may be configured to be able to execute settlement processing based on the operation of the count button, or it may be configured not to execute the settlement processing based on the operation of the count button. good too. It should be noted that during the execution of the freeze at the start of rotation and the freeze at stop described above, the addition of the total score based on the operation of the lending button may be executed, or the addition of the total score based on the operation of the lending button may be performed. You can configure it not to run.

<Configuration 7-1>
It may be configured such that score settlement can be executed when the count button is operated in a state where the front door DU is open (a state in which a door open error has occurred). By doing so, regardless of whether the front door DU is open or not, the player or the manager can settle the score at any timing.
<Configuration 7-2>
If the count button is operated while the front door DU is open (a door open error has occurred), it may be configured such that the score is not calculated. Thus, even if the front door DU is opened and a fraud is committed inside the game machine, it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous situation for the game hall by not executing the settlement of the score.

<Configuration 8-1>
If the front door DU is opened (a door open error occurs) while the count button remains on (the count button is pressed long), the score will continue to be calculated. It may be configured so that it can be executed, and with such a configuration, regardless of whether the front door DU is open or not, the player or the manager can execute the settlement of the points at any timing.

<Configuration 8-2>
If the front door DU is opened (a door open error occurs) while the count button remains on (the count button is pressed long), the score will not be calculated. With such a configuration, even if the front door DU is opened and a fraud is committed inside the gaming machine, by configuring so as not to execute the settlement of the points, it is possible to improve the game hall. Disadvantageous situations can be prevented.

<Configuration 9-1>
In the situation where the counting button remains on (the counting button is being pressed and button has been pressed for a long time), the accumulated count score in the first count notification after the power is turned on is 0, and the count serial number is also 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the accumulated points and the like as information related to settlement after the power is turned on.
<Configuration 9-2>
In a situation where the counting button remains on (the counting button is pressed and held for a long time), the power is cut off, then the counting button is turned off (the counting button is not operated), and the power is turned on again. When the power is turned on, the count accumulation point in the first count notification after the power is turned on is 0, and the count serial number is also 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the accumulated points and the like as information related to settlement after the power is turned on.

<Configuration 10>
In a situation where the power is off, even if you start operating (pressing) the counting button and turn on the power while the counting button is pressed (continued to press and hold), the settlement may not be executed. . That is, when executing the settlement based on the operation of the count button, the count button is kept ON for a predetermined time or longer (detects a long press) after detecting the rise of the count button from OFF to ON, and the settlement is executed. may be configured as follows.

<<Configuration related to door open error>>
Further, the configuration related to the door open error according to this example may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 1>
Even in a state where the front door DU is open (a state in which a door open error has occurred), the above-mentioned signal transmitted from the gaming machine to the outside (rental machine) and the signal transmitted from the outside (rental machine) and received by the gaming machine It may be configured so that information to be transmitted can be transmitted and received. More specifically, before sending or receiving gaming machine information notifications (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending receipt result responses It may be configured to be executable even in a state in which the door DU is open (a state in which a door open error has occurred).

<Configuration 2>
If it is an unrecoverable error (for example, an error that occurs when the checksum after turning on the power is abnormal), the above-mentioned signal sent from the gaming machine to the outside (rental machine) and from the outside (rental machine) It may be configured not to transmit and receive information that is transmitted and received by the gaming machine. More specifically, before sending or receiving gaming machine information notifications (information including HC/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine performance information, or gaming machine installation information), counting notifications, lending notifications, and lending receipt result responses It may be configured not to be executed when the door DU is open (when a door open error occurs).

In this example, as described above, the interval at which the HC/fraud monitoring information is transmitted from the game machine to the outside (rental machine) is set to 300 ms. In other words, the interval at which the game machine information notification is transmitted from the game machine to the outside (rental machine) is set to 300 ms. Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 35, when the reel is to be rotated, the reel acceleration processing is executed, and then the reel constant speed maintenance processing is executed. configured to transition to the fast state. As described above, there are 336 steps for one rotation of the reel (one round), and the execution interval of interrupt processing is approximately 2.23 ms. In the reel constant speed state, one interrupt process rotates the reel by one step. Therefore, the time required to rotate the reel once in the reel constant speed state is 2.23×336≈749 ms. Thus, in this example, the game machine information notification can be transmitted from the game machine to the outside (rental machine) at least twice in the time required for the reel to rotate once in the constant reel speed state. With this configuration, even if the game machine information notification transmitted from the game machine has abnormal contents due to noise or the like, the reel can be rotated by one rotation in the reel constant speed state. Since the game machine information notification can be transmitted from the game machine at least one more time within the time required for the game machine, the information to be transmitted to the outside of the game machine can be made more accurate. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 35, the average reel rotation speed in the reel acceleration state is slower than the average reel rotation speed in the reel constant speed state. Since the time required for the reel to rotate once in the constant speed state is longer than 749 ms, which is the time required for the reel to rotate once in the constant reel speed state, Even within the time required for the reel to rotate once from the reel acceleration state to the reel constant speed state from the start of rotation, the gaming machine information notification sent from the gaming machine has abnormal content due to noise, etc. Even when it is closed, it is possible to transmit the gaming machine information notification from the gaming machine at least one more time within the time required for the reel to rotate once in the constant reel speed state, so it is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine. Information can be made more accurate.

<Establishment of normal loan>
In the medalless reel-type game machine according to this example,
(1) Determining that normal lending has been established when the gaming machine sends information including the fact that it is normal as a lending receipt result response to the lending machine side, (2) The lending machine receives the lending receipt from the gaming machine side It may be configured such that it is determined that normal lending has been established when the result response is normally received.

<Establishment of normal counting>
In the medalless reel-type game machine according to this example,
(1) The gaming machine sends information including the fact that the number of points is 1 or more as a counting notification to the lending machine side, and determines that normal counting has been established when the lending notification is normally received from the lending machine side (2) When the lending machine receives information from the gaming machine side as a counting notification indicating that the number of points is 1 or more and sends the lending notification to the gaming machine side, it is determined that normal counting has been established. may be configured to

(Example of modification from the thirteenth embodiment)
In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the configuration of the medal-less reel-type gaming machine that does not use game medals has been described in detail. The configuration of the medalless reel-type game machine is not limited to the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration of a medal-less reel-type game machine applicable to this example will be described in detail below as an example of modification from the thirteenth embodiment. Any of the configurations described above may be applied to the configuration that does not affect whether game medals are used or not, or may be combined with the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment described above. The medal-less reel-type game machine is a reel-type game machine that does not use game medals (including physical medals and metal pieces for sensor detection) but uses scores.

In the following, what is referred to as a "gaming machine" may be replaced with a "main control board" or a "payout control board". Also, what is called "rental machine" may be replaced with "SC board".

One or more of the error determination process and the error display process may be configured to be executed in the second ROM/RAM area of the main control board. Specifically, the error determination process may be executed by a program stored in the second ROM, and the error display may be executed by a program stored in the first ROM. In addition, areas corresponding to the first ROM/RAM area and the second ROM/RAM area are provided in the payout control board, and one or more of the error determination process and the error display process are performed in the second ROM/RAM area of the payout control board. may be configured to run Specifically, the error determination process may be executed by a program stored in the second ROM, and the error display may be executed by a program stored in the first ROM.

A counting LED display section is provided near or inside the counting button, and when the counting button operation is valid (score settlement processing can be executed), the counting LED display section indicates that the counting button operation is valid (for example, , “Payable” may be displayed). Further, it may be possible to notify that the operation of the counting button is valid by turning on/off the LED lamp. In such a configuration, it may be configured to execute counting processing (sometimes referred to as settlement processing) when an operation of the counting button is accepted in a state in which the operation of the counting button is valid. Alternatively, the counting process (accounting process) may be executed when a long-pressing operation of the counting button is accepted in a state in which the operation of the counting button is valid.

<Configuration 1 regarding counting processing>
3 points have been betted, the total score is 30 points, and the count button operation is accepted when the count process (sometimes referred to as settlement process) can be executed (the count button operation is valid). If the operation is not accepted immediately after being placed (for example, "off → 0.1 seconds on → off"), the bet score will be counted, but the score stored in the total score display device will be counted. may be configured not to be counted. More specifically, when the operation of the count button is not accepted immediately after the operation of the counting button is accepted (for example, when "OFF → ON for 0.1 seconds → OFF"), 3 points, which is the number of bets, After counting, the counting process ends with the total score remaining at 30 points. In addition, when the number of bets is 0 and the total score is 30 points, if the operation of the count button is not accepted immediately after the operation is accepted (for example, "OFF → 0.1 seconds ON → OFF". case), the total score of 30 points may be counted.

<Configuration 2 related to counting process>
When 3 points are betted, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process can be executed (the operation of the counting button is valid), the operation of the counting button is stopped immediately after the operation of the counting button is accepted. (For example, when "off → 10 ms on → off"), only a part of the bet score is counted, and the score stored in the total score display device may not be counted. . More specifically, when the count button operation is accepted and then immediately stopped accepting the operation (for example, when "off → 0.1 seconds on → off"), the number of bets becomes 2 points, One point is counted, and the counting process ends with the total score remaining at 30 points.

<Configuration 3 regarding counting processing>
When 3 points are betted, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process can be executed (the operation of the counting button is valid), the operation of the counting button is stopped immediately after the operation of the counting button is accepted. (eg, "OFF→ON for 0.1 seconds→OFF"), the bet score and the score stored in the total score display device may be counted. More specifically, when the operation of the count button is not accepted immediately after the operation of the count button is accepted (for example, when "OFF → ON for 0.1 seconds → OFF"), the bet number of 3 points and A total of 33 points for 30 points, which is the total score, is counted, and the counting process ends.

<Configuration 4 regarding counting processing>
When 3 points are betted, the total score is 30 points, and the counting process can be executed (the operation of the counting button is valid), the operation of the counting button is accepted. The counting process is executed step by step in the order of "score", and the counting process ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer accepted. Specifically, "count button off → count button on → number of bets 3, total score 30 → number of bets 2, total score 30 → number of bets 1, total score 30 → number of bets 0, total score 30 → number of bets 0, Total score 29 → . . . → number of bets 0, total score 20 → counting button off → counting processing completed.

The game machine performance information, the game machine installation information, and the HC/fraud monitoring information may be transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board.

The counting notification, the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, the HC/fraud monitoring information, and the lending receipt result may be transmitted from the payout control board side to the lending machine side.

<Applicable error>
Further, the medalless reel-type game machine according to this example may be configured to have the following error-related actions.

<Serial communication error>
A framing error (an error in which the stop bit was not found at the position where the stop bit should be at the timing at which the stop bit should be received) or an overrun error (the next data is received before the CPU reads out the data captured in the receive buffer). (1) Add 1 to the counter value of the serial communication error counter A on the game machine side and store it. (2) It may be configured such that the counter value of the serial communication error counter B is incremented by 1 and stored on the rental machine side.

<Checksum error>
If the checksum included in each command is abnormal, it is determined as a checksum error, and (1) the game machine side adds 1 to the counter value of the checksum abnormality counter A and stores it, (2) the lending machine side The counter value of the checksum abnormality counter B may be added by 1 and stored.

<Command sequence error>
If an unexpected command is received (such as when the order of the commands is wrong), it may be determined as a command sequence error. In that case, the gaming machine side may be configured to discard the rental notification received from the lending machine side. For example, after transmitting the game machine information notification, if the rental notification is received without transmitting the counting notification, the rental notification is discarded. Further, the lending machine may be configured to determine that the command is valid when receiving the gaming machine information notification, and to discard the command when receiving a command other than the gaming machine information notification. good.

<Command timeout error>
If the command is not received within the specified time, it may be a command timeout error. If the game machine does not receive the rental notification within 170 ms after sending the count notification, it determines that there is a command timeout error, adds 1 to the counter value of the rental notification reception abnormality counter, and invalidates the transmitted count notification. , may be configured to resend from the gaming machine information notification again. Also, if the lending machine side does not receive a command from the gaming machine side for a period of 300 ms or more, it determines that a command timeout error has occurred, and adds 1 to the counter value of the command timeout counter (executes only addition of the counter value, Other processing may not be executed for the error).

<Serial number error in game machine information notification>
On the lending machine side, if the received serial number is not consecutive with the previously received serial number, the counter value of the serial number abnormality counter may be incremented by one. It should be noted that only the addition processing of the counter value is executed, and the command transmission/reception processing is executed in the same manner as when the command is normally received.

<Count serial number error>
On the lending machine side, if the received counting serial number is not consecutive with the counting serial number received last time, it may be configured to add 1 to the counter value of the counting serial number abnormality counter. It should be noted that only the addition processing of the counter value is executed, and the command transmission/reception processing is executed in the same manner as when the command is normally received.

<Rental serial number error>
On the lending machine side, when the lending serial number of the lending reception result response received is not continuous with the lending serial number received last time, 1 may be added to the counter value of the lending serial number abnormality counter. It should be noted that only the addition processing of the counter value is executed, and the command transmission/reception processing is executed in the same manner as when the command is normally received.

<Rental Receipt Result Response>
On the lending machine side, when information including an abnormality is received as a lending reception result response, it may be determined that the lending is not established, and 1 is added to the counter value of the lending abnormality counter. Even in this case, the subtraction process may not be performed for the lendable score (sometimes referred to as the lending machine score) or the stored balance of the player.

In addition, in the above-mentioned serial communication error, checksum error, command sequence error, command timeout error, game machine information notification serial number error, counting serial number error, lending serial number error, lending receipt result response, the display of the effect display device etc. The apparatus may be configured to display the fact that an abnormality has occurred, the counter value associated with the abnormality, or the like. With such a configuration, it can be known how many errors have occurred at the end of a day in the development stage of the game machine or at the end of the day at the game arcade. In addition, even if it is not displayed on the effect display device, etc., the game machine can be collected by storing it in the RAM of the main control board side (by storing it in a RAM area that is not deleted by changing the setting). Sometimes it is possible to grasp the number of times each anomaly has been dealt with based on the number of times of these counters.

<<Communication between game machine and SC board>>
As game machine installation information to be transmitted from the game machine to the SC board, the main control chip ID number and the payout control chip ID number may be configured to be able to be transmitted. It may be configured as

As an example of the method for generating the main control chip ID number, the individual chip numbers of the CPU are read from the smallest number, the upper 4 bytes of the number are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is an identification code (a code that identifies the type of chip). ) to make it 9 bytes. As a specific example,
When the chip individual number is 0x12345678, from the upper
4 bytes: fill with 0: 0x00000000
4 bytes: chip individual number: 0x12345678
1 byte: identification code: 0x22
is generated as

As an example of the method of generating the payout control chip ID number, the individual chip numbers of the CPU are read from the smallest number, the upper 4 bytes of the number are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is an identification code (a code that identifies the chip type). ) to make it 9 bytes. As a specific example,
When the chip individual number is 0x87654321, from the upper
4 bytes: fill with 0: 0x00000000
4 bytes: chip individual number: 0x87654321
1 byte: identification code: 0x11
is generated as

Next, FIG. 168 shows an example in which HC/unfairness monitoring information is set as the game information of the game machine information notification. The game machine information notification command is a command sent from the game machine side to the SC board side.

HC/fraud monitoring information includes total score, score entry signal (IN), score payout signal (OUT), main control state 1, main control state 2, gaming machine error state, fraud detection state 1 (main control), fraud detection. State 2 (payout control), fraud detection state 3 (payout control), and number of game information are transmitted. More specifically, it is configured as follows.
The total score is the current total score, and is 3-byte data from 0x000000 to 0xFF3F00.
The score entry signal (IN) is the number of bets and is 1-byte data of 0x01 to 0x03 (1 to 3 points). The number of bets is determined when the reel rotating device is operated (when the start lever is operated), and the number of bets is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. In addition, when information including the fixed bet number is transmitted from the gaming machine to the SC board side, it is desirable to clear the bet number stored in the predetermined area of the RAM (preventing multiple transmissions). For).
The score payout signal (OUT) is the number of payout points, and is 1-byte data of 0x00 to 0x0F (1 to 15 points). The number of payout points is determined after all spinning reels are stopped (after all reels are stopped), and the number of payout points is stored in a specific area of the RAM. It should be noted that when the determined payout points are transmitted from the game machine to the SC board side, it is desirable to clear the payout points stored in the specific area of the RAM (to prevent multiple transmissions).
The main control state 1 is a state related to the game state, and is 1-byte data. in particular,
Bit 0: RB
Bit 1: BB
Bit 2: AT
Bit3: game state signal 1
Bit4: Game state signal 2
Bit5: Game state signal 3
Bit6: Game state signal 4
Bit 7: Configured as unused.
The main control state 2 is a state related to the game state, and is 1-byte data. in particular,
Bit 0: Replay in operation Bit 1: Character in operation Bit 2: Continuous character in operation Bit 3: Instruction function in operation Bit 4: Character in continuous operation Bit 5: Unused Bit 6: Unused Bit 7: Unused It is
The game machine error state is 1-byte data, Bits 0 to 5: error code (000000 (B) = no error, Bit 6: 0 = payout control, 1 = main control, Bit 7: 0 = notification only, 1 = notification +HC output If Bits 0 to 7 are 0, no error occurs.
A fraud detection state 1 (main control) is a state related to an error in the main control board, and is 1-byte data. in particular,
Bit 0: security signal Bit 1: setting change signal Bit 2: setting confirmation signal Bit 3: RAM error Bit 4: reel rotating device error Bit 5: unused Bit 6: unused Bit 7: unused.
In addition, the security signal, RAM abnormality, drum rotation device abnormality, etc. are the same as in fraud detection state 1 described above.
Specific examples of security signals include when it is determined that the front door is open, or that the setting key switch is turned on (not only during setting changes or setting confirmation, but also during game play (reel rotation). (including when the setting key switch is turned on), etc., and becomes "1".
RAM abnormality is an error (unrecoverable error) when the checksum after power-on is abnormal, as described above.
Spindle rotation device failure means that the reel sensor did not detect the index provided on the reel within a predetermined period under the condition that the reel is expected to reach a constant speed (the reel driving state is a constant speed state). This is an error that is determined to be abnormal in some cases.
A fraud detection state 2 (payout control) is a state related to an error in the payout control board, and is 1-byte data. in particular,
Bit0: Door open signal Bit1: Set door open Bit2: Total score clear detection Bit3: RAM error Bit4: Rental signal error Bit5: Overflow error Bit6: Unused Bit7: Unused.
The total score clear detection indicates that the total score clear has been detected. Based on the total score clear detection. Further, the total score clear switch is operated (satisfying a predetermined condition including the operation of the total score clear switch) to clear the score (or score and the number of bets) of the gaming machine. It has a function to clear the stored storage area. Note that the score may be referred to as the total score.
A fraud detection state 3 (payout control) is a state related to an error in the payout control board, and is 1-byte data. in particular,
Bit0: Unused Bit1: Unused Bit2: Unused Bit3: Unused Bit4: Unused Bit5: Unused Bit6: Unused Bit7: Unused.
The number of game information is 1-byte data, and is the number (n) of type information/count information, where n is fixed to zero.

As described above, in this example, the gaming machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information) is configured to be transmitted from the gaming machine to the lending machine every 300 ms. Every time there is a payout (OUT), the HC/fraud monitoring information is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine immediately after. In this example, when the replay combination is won and the symbol combination relating to the replay is stopped and an automatic bet is executed (when an automatic bet of 3 points is executed), a score payout signal is generated. 3 points of information are transmitted as (OUT), and 3 points of information are transmitted as a score input signal (IN) when the reels are subsequently rotated. It should be noted that, even when 3 points are thrown in, information on 1 point may be divided into three commands and transmitted as a score throwing signal (IN), or when 3 points are paid out. Alternatively, the score payout signal (OUT) may be configured so that the information of one point is divided into three commands and transmitted. In this way, by configuring the IN/OUT information to be transmitted at any time as the game machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information), even when the power is cut off, the generated IN/OUT information can be sent to the lending machine. can be accumulated and stored.

In addition, the information related to IN/OUT may be configured to be able to be transmitted (included) in addition to the game machine information (HC/fraud monitoring information). Information on IN/OUT may also be transmitted (including) as gaming machine performance information, which is a signal transmitted to the machine. More specifically, when a replay combination is won and an automatic bet is executed when the symbol combination relating to the replay is stopped, OUT=0 points, and after that, IN=0 points when the reels are rotated. It may be configured such that IN and OUT are accumulated and calculated from power-on, and the calculation result is transmitted every three minutes. If the power is turned off, then when the power is turned on, the accumulated IN/OUT information is cleared (the RAM area related to IN information and the RAM area related to OUT information are cleared), and the accumulation starts from 0 again. and calculate. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simply output the IN/OUT of the game hall for one day to the outside of the game machine. Note that the accumulated IN (total IN) may be referred to as a total input score, and the accumulated OUT (total OUT) may be referred to as a total payout score. In addition, in the above-mentioned MY in one business day (a value obtained by subtracting the smallest difference number for the player from the largest difference number for the player from the time when the power is turned on until it is turned off) Also, in the event of a power failure, when the power is turned on after that, the RAM area related to MY for one business day is cleared (the RAM area related to the information necessary to calculate MY is cleared). may With regard to the information accumulated and stored as information for one business day in this way, when power is turned off, the area of the RAM corresponding to the information to be accumulated and stored is cleared after the power is turned on. may be configured. The information to be accumulated and stored as the information for one business day may be configured to store the ball rate for one business day, the performance rate for one business day, and the continuous performance rate for one business day. The information may also be configured so as to clear the corresponding RAM area after the power is turned on when the power is turned off. On the other hand, the information necessary for calculating the items to be displayed on the performance display device, such as the cumulative number of payouts during operation of the type 1 special bonus, is not cleared even when the power is cut off ( It may be configured so that the RAM related to the information is not cleared. may be configured not to be).

The lending reception result response command sent from the payout control board to the SC board may include the case where the game machine is executing (counting) settlement processing as a condition for the lending score reception result to be 0x01: abnormal. That is, when the gaming machine transmits a lending reception result response command from the payout control board to the SC board during the settlement process, the lending points reception result may be 0x01: Abnormal.

When the power supply of the gaming machine is turned from OFF to ON, the gaming machine is activated in the first period, and after the activation of the gaming machine is completed, the game machine information notification of serial number 0 is transmitted to the SC board. In addition, when the power of the SC board is changed from OFF to ON, the SC board is activated in the second period, and after the activation of the SC board is completed, it waits for connection to the game machine.

<When the game machine finishes booting first>
After the activation of the game machine is completed, the game machine information notification with the serial number 0 is transmitted to the SC board. It is not possible to receive commands from gaming machines such as Even in such a case, the gaming machine continues to send various commands to the SC board at a predetermined timing (the serial number is also incremented from 0, 1, 2, etc.), and after the timing when the SC board has been activated, , the SC board starts receiving commands from the gaming machine. Further, at the timing when the activation of the SC board is completed, the progress of the game becomes possible, and the operation of the counting button becomes valid.

<When the SC board completes startup first>
If activation of the game machine is not completed even if activation of the SC board is completed, the SC board waits for connection to the game machine and can receive commands such as notification of game machine information from the game machine.

<<Regarding the priority of gaming machine information notifications>>
As described in the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to be able to transmit gaming machine information notifications to the SC board. configured to transmit any of the information; The HC/fraud monitoring information includes HC/fraud monitoring information including game information (in which the game information is updated) and HC/fraud monitoring information not including game information. The transmission conditions (transmission timing) of the gaming machine information notification including these are configured as follows.
(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including game information: Sent at a cycle of 300ms after the game machine is started (2) Game machine installation information: Sent at a cycle of 60 seconds after the game machine is started (3) Game machine performance information: (4) HC/fraud monitoring information that does not include game information: Transmitted at a cycle of 300 ms after the game machine is started up. command is transmitted, the transmission timing of a plurality of commands may overlap at one timing. Priorities may be established to resolve such situations. More specifically, in descending order of priority, "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information → (2) gaming machine installation information → (3) gaming machine performance information → (4) gaming information including If the transmission timing overlaps, only commands with higher priority may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the SC board as the gaming machine information notification.

Examples of game information include information indicating that any one of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel has been operated, and information regarding the position at which any one of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel has been operated. , information on the stop position of any one of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, information on whether the display result of the stopped symbol combination is normal, etc., or information combining a plurality of these good too.

In this example, the HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured so as not to have gaming information.
(1) Gaming machine installation information: Sent at a cycle of 60 seconds after the game machine is started (2) Gaming machine performance information: Sent at a cycle of 180 seconds after the game machine is started (3) HC/fraud monitoring information: The game machine is started After completion, there are three types of game machine information notifications that are sent at a cycle of 300 ms. information.

Note that when the transmission timings overlap, a command with a lower priority is transmitted when the next transmission timing does not overlap with the transmission timing of a command with a higher priority. The next transmission timing is the timing with the shortest period, and in this example, it is 300 ms later.

As a specific example, when the transmission timing (timing A) of "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including game information" and "(2) gaming machine installation information" overlap, at timing A, If "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is transmitted, and "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is not transmitted after 300ms (timing B), "(2) gaming machine installation information" is transmitted. If "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is also transmitted at timing B, "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" is sent 300 ms after timing B (timing C). is not transmitted, "(2) gaming machine installation information" is transmitted.

In the above-described specific example, when "(2) gaming machine installation information" is transmitted at timing C, the timing at which "(2) gaming machine installation information" is transmitted next time is 60 seconds after timing A. It may be after the timing C (configuration 1) or 60 seconds after the timing C (configuration 2). Even at this transmission timing, if it overlaps with the transmission timing of "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information", which has a higher priority, "(1) HC/fraud monitoring information including gaming information" will be sent.

In addition, when adopting the configuration 1 that transmits "(2) game machine installation information" 60 seconds after the timing A described above, at the timing A (at the timing of transmitting the game machine installation information) It is also possible to store the fact that it is the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information in a predetermined storage area of the main control board or a predetermined storage area of the payout control board. By adopting configuration 1, it is possible to simplify the processing. More specifically, in the normal case, the command is configured to be sent at predetermined time intervals, and even if an irregular event occurs, the next command is sent at the same timing as in the normal case. It is possible to make it difficult to shift the predetermined time interval.

Further, when adopting the configuration 2 in which "(2) gaming machine installation information" is transmitted 60 seconds after the timing C, the gaming machine at the timing C (based on the fact that the gaming machine installation information was actually transmitted) It may be configured to store information to the effect that it is the transmission timing of the installation information in a predetermined storage area of the main control board or a predetermined storage area of the payout control board. By adopting the configuration 2, when it is normal, it is configured to transmit a command at a predetermined time interval, and when an irregular event occurs, an appropriate cycle according to the situation in which the command is actually output after that. command can be output.

<A: Flow 1 regarding counting notification command and lending notification command>
Next, in FIG. 169, the flow regarding the count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the game machine is 50 points, and the game machine information notification including the information of the total score=50, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side, and then the count button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, about 20 ms pass while the count button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is decremented by 50 and becomes 50 → 0 (based on the operation of the count button, the display of the total score display device and the total The fact that the score is subtracted may be referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.). After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but the count button is operated (remains on and settlement is being performed), so the lending of points is not possible. Not executed. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification including information of counting points = 50 and cumulative counting points = 50, which becomes the counting serial number m, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and counting is performed. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. It should be noted that the subtraction timing of the display of the total score display device and the subtraction timing of the stored total score may be made at the same time. The timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned off to on, in other words, it may be the timing of detecting a long press of the counting button, the timing of sending the notification of counting, or the timing of receiving the notification of lending. may be Further, the subtraction of the display of the total score when the score settlement is executed may be configured to be executed step by step. →49→48 . When the timing of subtraction of the stored total score and/or the timing of subtraction of the display of the total score display device is set as the timing of receiving the rental notification, the gaming machine receives the rental notification, i.e., the rental machine normally operates. Since there is a relatively high possibility that the lending notification is sent after receiving the counting notification, the score stored or displayed in the total score display device is subtracted after confirming that it can be counted. can be configured as follows:

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification containing the information of lending points=0, which becomes the lending serial number p, to the gaming machine side (because the lending button was not enabled). After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score reception result is normal, which becomes the lending serial number p, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display of the total score display device is still 0 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values. As described above, in this configuration, even when the lending button is operated, if the lending of points is not executed, the lending score included in the lending notice becomes 0, and the lending reception result response indicates that the lending is normal. It is configured to output information.

After that, the count button remains on, and the lending button is operated again (off→on→off). In this case, the counting button remains operated (remains on), but since there are no points to settle (the total score is 0), the lending button is enabled, and the lending of the points is executed. It will be done. After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1. After that, about 100 ms after the game machine information notification is transmitted, the counting notification including the information of the counting serial number m+1, counting points=0, and counting accumulated points=50 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side.

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification containing the information of the lending number of points=50, which becomes the lending serial number p+1, to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score reception result is normal, with the lending serial number p+1, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score changes from 0 points to 50 points ( The display of the total score display device is also 50 points).

<B: Flow 1 regarding count notification command and lending notification command>
Next, in FIG. 169, the flow regarding the count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the game machine is 50 points, and the game machine information notification including the information of the total score=50, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side, and then the count button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, about 20 ms pass while the count button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is decremented by 50 and becomes 50 → 0 (based on the operation of the count button, the display of the total score display device and the total The fact that the score is subtracted may be referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.). After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but the count button is operated (remains on and settlement is being performed), so the lending of points is not possible. Not executed. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification including information of counting points = 50 and cumulative counting points = 50, which becomes the counting serial number m, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and counting is performed. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. It should be noted that the subtraction timing of the display of the total score display device and the subtraction timing of the stored total score may be made at the same time. The timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned off to on, in other words, it may be the timing of detecting a long press of the counting button, the timing of sending the notification of counting, or the timing of receiving the notification of lending. may be

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification containing the information of lending points=0, which becomes the lending serial number p, to the gaming machine side (because the lending button was not enabled). After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score reception result is normal, which becomes the lending serial number p, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display of the total score display device is still 0 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values. As described above, in this configuration, even when the lending button is operated, if the lending of points is not executed, the lending score included in the lending notice becomes 0, and the lending reception result response indicates that the lending is normal. It is configured to output information.

In addition, in the same figure, it may be configured to have one or more of the following configurations.
(1) When the operation of the stop button is accepted, the reel stops and the operation of the stop button is continued, and if the operation of the lending button is accepted, lending can be executed (counting is also possible) may be executable)
(2) The operation of the stop button is accepted in a situation where the operation of the stop button is not valid, the reel does not stop newly, and the operation of the lending button is accepted in a situation where the operation of the stop button continues lending is feasible (counting may also be feasible)
(3) While the game is in progress (for example, when all the reels are rotating at a constant speed), the setting key switch is turned from off to on, and the operation of the setting key switch shifts to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. If the operation of the lending button is accepted in a situation where the lending button is not activated, lending can be executed. When the operation of the lending button is accepted in a situation where the setting key switch is turned on and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has not been entered by the operation of the setting key switch, lending cannot be executed (5) Setting confirmation mode is in progress. If the operation of the lending button is accepted at
(6) If the operation of the lending button is accepted during the setting change mode, lending cannot be executed (counting may be enabled or disabled).
It may be configured as described above. Also, the above configuration may be applied to all configurations in FIGS. 169 to 171. FIG.

After that, the count button remains on, and the lending button is operated again (off→on→off). In this case, there are no points to settle (the total score is 0), but the count button is still being operated (remains on), so the lending button is disabled and the lending of the scores is executed. not. After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1. After that, about 100 ms after the game machine information notification is transmitted, the counting notification including the information of the counting serial number m+1, counting points=0, and counting accumulated points=50 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side.

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification including the information that the lending number is 0 and the lending serial number p+1 to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, with the lending serial number p+1, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display of the total score display device also remains 0 points).

The configuration shown in FIG. 169 may be configured as follows.
(1) The game machine can output a count notification when it is time to output the count notification (2) When the settlement process is not executed, it is possible to output a count notification including 0 as the count score ( 3) When settlement processing is executed, it is possible to output a count notification including a value other than 0 as the count number. It is possible to output a counting notification including a value other than 0 as the counting point. (5) After outputting a counting notification including a value other than 0 as the counting point, a lending notification including a value other than 0 as the lending point is received. In this case, the loan of points is not carried out and the loaned points are not added to the total score.
(6) When a lending notification including a value other than 0 as a lending score is received after a counting notice including 0 as the counting score is output, the lending of the score is executed and the lending score is added to the total score. . With this configuration, even when the count button is pressed long, if there are no more points to settle, the points can be lent out. In order to execute the settlement process again, it is necessary to press and hold the count button again after turning it off.

<C: Flow 2 regarding count notification command and lending notification command>
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the flow regarding the count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the game machine is 50 points, and the game machine information notification including the information of the total score=50, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side, and then the count button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, about 20 ms pass while the count button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is decremented by 50 and becomes 50 → 0 (based on the operation of the count button, the display of the total score display device and the total The fact that the score is subtracted may be referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.). After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but the count button is operated (remains on and settlement is being performed), so the lending of points is not possible. Not executed. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification including information of counting points = 50 and cumulative counting points = 50, which becomes the counting serial number m, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and counting is performed. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. It should be noted that the subtraction timing of the display of the total score display device and the subtraction timing of the stored total score may be made at the same time. The timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned off to on, in other words, it may be the timing of detecting a long press of the counting button, the timing of sending the notification of counting, or the timing of receiving the notification of lending. may be

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification including information of lending points=50, which becomes the lending serial number p, to the gaming machine side (the lending button is not valid). After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score receipt result is abnormal is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, with the lending serial number p, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display of the total score display device is still 0 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values. As described above, in this configuration, when the lending button is operated and the lending of points is not executed, the lending score included in the lending notification becomes 50, and the lending reception result response indicates that there is an abnormality. is configured to output

After that, the count button remains on, and the lending button is operated again (off→on→off). In this case, the counting button remains operated (remains on), but since there are no points to settle (the total score is 0), the lending button is enabled, and the lending of the points is executed. It will be done. After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1. After that, about 100 ms after the game machine information notification is transmitted, the counting notification including the information of the counting serial number m+1, counting points=0, and counting accumulated points=50 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side.

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification containing the information of the lending number of points=50, which becomes the lending serial number p+1, to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score reception result is normal, with the lending serial number p+1, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score changes from 0 points to 50 points ( The display of the total score display device is also 50 points).

<D: Flow 2 regarding count notification command and lending notification command>
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the flow regarding the count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the game machine is 50 points, and the game machine information notification including the information of the total score=50, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side, and then the count button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, about 20 ms pass while the count button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is decremented by 50 and becomes 50 → 0 (based on the operation of the count button, the display of the total score display device and the total The fact that the score is subtracted may be referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.). After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but the count button is operated (remains on and settlement is being performed), so the lending of points is not possible. Not executed. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification including information of counting points = 50 and cumulative counting points = 50, which becomes the counting serial number m, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and counting is performed. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. It should be noted that the subtraction timing of the display of the total score display device and the subtraction timing of the stored total score may be made at the same time. The timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned off to on, in other words, it may be the timing of detecting a long press of the counting button, the timing of sending the notification of counting, or the timing of receiving the notification of lending. may be

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification including information of lending points=50, which becomes the lending serial number p, to the gaming machine side (the lending button is not valid). After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score receipt result is abnormal is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, with the lending serial number p, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display of the total score display device is still 0 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values. As described above, in this configuration, when the lending button is operated and the lending of points is not executed, the lending score included in the lending notification becomes 50, and the lending reception result response indicates that there is an abnormality. is configured to output

After that, the count button remains on, and the lending button is operated again (off→on→off). In this case, there are no points to settle (the total score is 0), but the count button is still being operated (remains on), so the lending button is disabled and the lending of the scores is executed. not. After that, at the timing when 20 ms or more have passed since the previous lending reception result response was sent, and about 300 ms after the timing of sending the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification is sent again from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. . The serial number in the gaming machine information notification is n+1. After that, about 100 ms after the game machine information notification is transmitted, the counting notification including the information of the counting serial number m+1, counting points=0, and counting accumulated points=50 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side.

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification including the information that the lending number is 0 and the lending serial number p+1 to the gaming machine side. After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, with the lending serial number p+1, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score remains 0 points. (The display of the total score display device also remains 0 points).

<E: Flow 3 regarding count notification command and lending notification command>
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the flow regarding the count notification in this example will be described in detail. The total score stored in the game machine is 50 points, and the game machine information notification including the information of the total score=50, which becomes the serial number n, is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side, and then the count button is pressed. turns from off to on. After that, about 20 ms pass while the count button is kept on, and the display of the total score display device is decremented by 50 and becomes 50 → 0 (based on the operation of the count button, the display of the total score display device and the total The fact that the score is subtracted may be referred to as being settled, the settlement process being executed, etc.). After that, the lending button is operated at a predetermined timing (off → on → off), but the count button is operated (remains on and settlement is being performed), so the lending of points is not possible. Not executed. Thereafter, approximately 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, a counting notification including information of counting points = 50 and cumulative counting points = 50, which becomes the counting serial number m, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and counting is performed. The score of 50 points is subtracted from the total score, and the total score becomes 0 points. It should be noted that the subtraction timing of the display of the total score display device and the subtraction timing of the stored total score may be made at the same time. The timing may be about 20 ms after the counting button is turned off to on, in other words, it may be the timing of detecting a long press of the counting button, the timing of sending the notification of counting, or the timing of receiving the notification of lending. may be

Within 170 ms after that, the lending machine side transmits a lending notification including information of lending points=50, which becomes the lending serial number p, to the gaming machine side (the lending button is not valid). After that, within 10 ms, a lending reception result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, with the lending serial number p, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, and the total score changes from 0 points to 50 points ( The display of the total score display device also changes from 0 points to 50 points). Note that the above n, m, and p may be different numerical values, or may be the same numerical values. As described above, in this configuration, even if the count button is operated and the settlement process is being executed, the score can be lent out by operating the lending button. In this case, the display of the total score on the total score display device may be configured so that after the settlement process is executed and the score changes from 50 to 0, the score related to lending is added and the score changes from 0 to 50, It may be configured so that the score can be added based on the receipt of the rental notification even during the execution of the settlement process (for example, subtraction such as "50 → 49 → ... → 30 → 31 → 30" and addition are performed to end up with 50).

Note that the accumulated count points included in the count notification according to this example are cleared by turning the power off and then on. may be configured as follows. That is, even when the settlement process is executed once (when the settlement process ends when the total score is 100→50, or when the settlement process ends when the total score is 500→450→400→350), the cumulative score is It will be carried over to the next settlement process. In other words, even when a certain player executes the settlement process and ends the game, the previous player transmits the accumulated value with respect to the value settled by the settlement process. By doing so, it is possible to mutually monitor the cumulative number of points settled on the gaming machine side and the lending machine side in one business day. Further, the total number of points counted by one long-pressing operation of the count button may be configured to be the accumulated count score. →150→200, and the cumulative score may be set to 0 when counting is completed.

<When the communication between the game machine and the SC board is interrupted>
Next, FIG. 172 illustrates an example of action when communication between a game machine and a rental machine (which may be an SC board) is interrupted (for example, when a communication line is disconnected). First, the total score stored in the game machine is 1000 points, and the game machine information notification with the serial number n is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a counting notification with a counting serial number m is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a rental notification with a rental serial number p is transmitted from the rental machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, a lending receipt result response including information indicating that the lending score receipt result, which is the lending serial number p, is normal is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a game machine information notification with a serial number n+1 is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side.

After that, the communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine is interrupted (for example, the communication line is disconnected), the game stops on the gaming machine side, and the operation of the count button becomes invalid. Stopping a game means that a new game is not executed. For example, the operation of the start lever is invalidated, the betting operation is invalidated, and the like. Also, when the communication between the gaming machine and the rental machine is interrupted while the counting button is on, the operation of the counting button is invalidated and the settlement is not executed. Also, the rented machine cannot communicate with the gaming machine. As a specific example, the lend button is disabled.

After that, a count notification with a counting serial number m+1 is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, but the lending machine cannot receive it. Since the counting button is disabled, the counting point is 0 regardless of whether the counting button is operated or not. After that, the gaming machine information notification with the serial number n+2 is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, but the lending machine cannot receive it. After that, a count notification with a counting serial number of m+2 is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, but the lending machine cannot receive it.

Thereafter, the communication between the gaming machine and the lending machine is restored, the game can be played on the gaming machine side, and the operation of the count button becomes effective. After that, the game machine information notification with the serial number n+3 is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a counting notification with a counting serial number m+3 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. Since the count button has not been operated, the count number is 0.

After that, a rental notification is sent from the rental machine side to the gaming machine side, but the rental serial number is 0 because the communication has been cut off. As described above, in this example, after the communication is restored, the rental notification of the rental serial number 0 is transmitted from the rental machine side to the gaming machine side. In this case, the gaming machine side stores p, which is the normal lending serial number received from the lending machine side last time, and also stores information that the next lending serial number should be p+1. That is, both the lending serial number received from the lending machine side and the information obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number received from the lending machine side are stored (RAM of the game machine (main control board or payout control board) has a separate storage area for storing each lending serial number in the area). With this configuration, when receiving information different from information obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number from the lending machine, the gaming machine receives information indicating that the lending score reception result is abnormal and It is configured to transmit the lending serial number received from the lending machine side to the lending machine side.

Returning to the explanation of the figure, since the lending notification with the lending serial number of 0 was received in a situation where p+1 should be received as the lending serial number, the gaming machine informs the lending machine that the lending serial number is p and that the lending points have been received. Send a loan receipt result response containing information that the result is abnormal.

After that, the game machine information notification with the serial number n+4 is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a counting notification with a counting serial number m+4 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a rental notice having a rental serial number p+1 is transmitted from the rental machine side to the gaming machine side. In this way, since the lending machine has received p as the lending serial number included in the lending receipt result response received from the gaming machine the previous time, it determines that p is the correct number as the previous lending serial number, and It is configured to transmit a rental notification, which is p+1 obtained by adding 1 to p as the rental serial number, to the gaming machine side. After that, the gaming machine transmits to the lending machine side a lending receipt result response including information that the lending serial number is p+1 and the lending points receipt result is normal.

<If a communication error occurs during payment>
Next, FIG. 173 illustrates an example of action when a communication error occurs between a gaming machine and a rental machine (which may be an SC board) during execution of settlement processing. First, an operation of the count button is accepted (for example, the count button is pressed long). After that, the total score stored in the gaming machine is 1000 points, the lending machine score (loanable score) of the lending machine is 100 points, and the gaming machine information notification with the serial number n is played. Sent from the machine side to the rental machine side. After that, a count notification with a count number of 50 points and a count cumulative score of 50 points is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side. The total score stored in the game machine is 950 points, and the rental machine score stored in the rental machine is 150 points. After that, a rental notification with a rental serial number p is transmitted from the rental machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score reception result is normal, which becomes the lending serial number p, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a game machine information notification with a serial number n+1 is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side.

After that, a count notification with a count number of 50 points and a count cumulative score of 100 points is output from the game machine side to the lending machine side, but the lending machine cannot receive it due to a communication abnormality. Although the total score stored in the game machine is 900 points, the rental machine score stored in the rental machine remains 150 points. Thereafter, 300 ms after the transmission timing of the previous gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine information notification with the serial number n+2 is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, but a communication error occurs and the lending machine cannot receive it. Here, the lending machine detects that a communication error has occurred, and within 300 ms thereafter, communication with the game machine becomes impossible, and the game machine also disables the count button and stops the game. After that, a counting notification with a counting point of 0 points and an accumulated counting point of 100 points, which becomes the counting serial number m+2, is output from the game machine side to the lending machine side, but the lending machine cannot receive it due to a communication abnormality. As described above, in the counting notification output from the gaming machine side after the game is stopped, the counting serial number is updated (added), but the counting point becomes zero. After that, the lending machine enters a state of waiting for error recovery, and communication with the game machine becomes impossible until the error is recovered.

<If a communication error occurs during rental>
Next, FIG. 174 illustrates an example of the action when a communication error occurs between the gaming machine and the lending machine (which may be an SC board) during the lending process. First, an operation of the lending button is accepted (for example, the lending button is turned off→on→off). After that, the total score stored in the game machine is 1000 points, and the game machine information notification with the serial number n is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a counting notification with a counting serial number m is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a lending notice with a lending serial number p and a lending score of 50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. After that, a lending receipt result response containing information indicating that the lending score receipt result is normal, which becomes the lending serial number p, is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, but the lending machine receives the receipt due to a communication error. Can not. The total score stored in the game machine is 1050 points. Since the lending machine does not receive the lending reception result response from the gaming machine, it determines that the lending is incomplete (or does not determine that the lending is completed).

After that, the gaming machine information notification with the serial number n+1 is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side, the communication abnormality is resolved, and the lending machine receives the gaming machine information notification.

After that, a counting notification with a counting serial number m+1 is output from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. After that, a lending notice with a lending serial number p and a lending score of 50 is transmitted from the lending machine side to the gaming machine side. Since the lending machine has not received the lending receipt result response and it is unclear whether the previous lending notice has been received, the lending notice with the same lending serial number as the previous lending notice is resent. After that, a lending reception result response including information indicating that the lending score reception result is abnormal, which becomes the lending serial number p, is transmitted from the gaming machine side to the lending machine side. On the gaming machine side, since the lending notification received last time and the lending serial number are not consecutive (not p+1), the lending reception result response indicating that the lending score reception result is abnormal is transmitted. The lending machine completes the lending (determines that the lending has been completed) because the previously transmitted lending notification matches the received lending serial number.

After that, a game machine information notification with a serial number n+2 is transmitted from the game machine side to the lending machine side.

<<Configuration of serial number update processing>>
FIG. 175 shows the configuration of serial number update processing applicable to this example. In the figure, it is a process of updating the serial number used when transmitting a predetermined command from the gaming machine (eg payout control board) to the lending machine (eg SC board). The predetermined command is, for example, a serial number used when transmitting gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and HC/fraud monitoring information as a gaming machine information notification command. In both pattern 1 and pattern 2, which will be described later, the maximum value of the serial number counter value is 255, and when the counter value is 255, adding 1 results in a counter value of 0.

<Pattern 1>
First, pattern 1 will be described in detail. When the serial number update process is executed, first, in step 5001, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter. Next, at step 5003, the game machine determines whether or not the serial number counter value has become zero. If Yes at step 5003 , at step 5005 the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter and proceeds to step 5007 . On the other hand, if No in step 5003 , the process proceeds to step 5007 without executing the process of step 5005 . Next, at step 5007, the gaming machine stores the current serial number counter value and proceeds to the next process.

<Pattern 2>
Next, pattern 2 will be described in detail. When the serial number update process is executed, first, at step 5002, the gaming machine determines whether or not the serial number counter value is the maximum value (255 in this example). In the case of Yes at step 5002 , at step 5004 , the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter and proceeds to step 5006 . On the other hand, if No in step 5002 , the process proceeds to step 5006 without executing the process of step 5004 . Next, at step 5006, the gaming machine adds 1 to the counter value of the serial number counter. Next, at step 5008, the gaming machine stores the current serial number counter value and proceeds to the next process.

<Example of changes to communication between game machines and rental machines>
In the medalless reel-type gaming machine according to the present example, the following configuration may be used as a configuration relating to communication between the gaming machine and the lending machine.

<Configuration 1>
The rental notification sent from the rental machine to the game machine may include the reception result of the counted points, which is information about whether or not the previously received counted notification is normal, in addition to the rental serial number and the number of rented points. With this configuration, it is possible to transmit and receive information as to whether or not the reception result is normal in both the rental notification and the counting notification without increasing the number of commands transmitted and received between the gaming machine and the rental machine. , while reducing the data capacity (reducing the number of times of command transmission/reception), it is possible to reduce problems related to command transmission/reception.

In addition, in the case of such a configuration, when the gaming machine receives information indicating that the result of receiving the counted points is normal, it determines that the counting is established, and the total score display device at the reception timing. (subtract from the total score stored in the total score display device and/or subtract from the display of the total score displayed in the total score display device) may be configured as follows. In addition, on the lending machine side, when information is sent to the effect that the counted points are received normally, it is judged that the counting is established, and the counted points (counted points received from the gaming machine) (sometimes referred to as machine rental score).

Further, when configured as in configuration 1 above, it may be configured to operate as follows.
(1) The lending machine receives a count notification from the gaming machine → The lending machine sends a lending notification to the gaming machine containing information indicating that the result of receiving the counted points is normal → Immediately after the transmission, the lending machine receives the count notification The power supply is interrupted → The gaming machine receives a rental notification from the lending machine that includes information indicating that the number of points received is normal, and stores it in a predetermined storage area → The gaming machine detects the power interruption (2) The lending machine receives a count notification from the gaming machine → The lending machine sends the gaming machine as a result of receiving the counted points Sends a rental notification that includes information to the effect that it is normal → The power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted immediately after the transmission → The gaming machine detects the power interruption and starts executing the power interruption processing → Receives a lending notification from the machine that includes information indicating that the counted points are received normally, and stores it in a predetermined storage area. Even if the supply of power to the gaming machine is interrupted immediately after the gaming machine has sent a rental notification containing information to the effect that the number of points received is normal as a result of receiving the counted points, the gaming machine will still execute the power failure processing. By the time is completed, the gaming machine may receive a rental notification from the rental machine including information indicating that the reception result of the counted points is normal, and store it in a predetermined storage area. good. In this example, in the power-off processing on the gaming machine side, after the gaming machine detects the power-off, control by the CPU on the gaming machine side (the CPU of the main control board or the CPU of the payout control board) is executed. Until it becomes impossible (a reset signal is sent to the CPU), or after the gaming machine detects a power failure, the gaming machine is unable to store various notifications from the lending machine side in the storage area. Until then, various notifications from the rental machine side can be received, but new notifications to the rental machine side may not be made during this period. It should be added that this configuration can be applied to all configurations in this example.

<Configuration 2>
In addition to the rental serial number and the number of rental points, the rental notification transmitted from the rental machine to the gaming machine may include the counting serial number of the counting notification received by the rental machine. With this configuration, by comparing the counting serial number transmitted by the gaming machine and the counting serial number received thereafter, it is possible to confirm whether the counting notification has been successfully transmitted. It is possible to send and receive information on whether or not the reception result is normal in both lending notification and counting notification without increasing the number of commands sent and received in , reducing the data volume (reducing the number of times of sending and receiving commands). However, problems related to command transmission/reception can be reduced.

<Configuration 3>
It may be configured as follows. (1) The game machine can output a count notification when it is time to output the count notification (2) When the settlement process is not executed, it is possible to output a count notification including 0 as the count score ( 3) When settlement processing is executed, it is possible to output a count notification including a value other than 0 as the count number. It is possible to output a count notification that includes a value other than 0 as the count. , it is possible to output the lending score reception result indicating that it is normal.
(6) If a lending notification including a value other than 0 as the loaned score is received after a count notification including a value other than 0 as the counted score is output, it is possible to output the lending score receipt result indicating that there is an abnormality. is.
With the above configuration, it is possible to smoothly carry out the processing by eliminating the situation in which the player is lent out while the counting is being performed, resulting in both an increase and a decrease in the score.

<Configuration 4>
When the lending machine determines that the counting notification received from the gaming machine side is abnormal (for example, when the checksum is abnormal or when the serial numbers are not continuous), the lending machine is configured not to transmit the lending notification. You may With this configuration, if the gaming machine side does not receive the rental notification after sending the count notification, it can recognize that there was an abnormality in the transmission and reception of the transmitted count notification.

<Composition of counting button and return button>
The configuration of the count button and the return button in this example may be configured as follows.

<Configuration 1>
In a situation where 1 point is betted and the total score is 50 points, if the counting button is operated (operation of the counting button is accepted), the 1 point that is betted and the total score of 50 points are totaled. It may be configured so that the 51 points calculated will be settled. It should be noted that "settled" means that the points are transferred to the rental machine.

<Configuration 2>
In a situation where 1 point is betted and the total score is 50 points, if the counting button is operated (operation of the counting button is accepted), only the total score of 50 points will be settled and bet1. Points may be configured not to be settled. In such a configuration, it may be configured such that operating the return button shifts the bet of 1 point to the total score.
Further, in such a configuration, when one point is betted and the total score is 50 points, when the counting button is operated (operation of the counting button is accepted), the total score is 50 points. Only the points are settled, the one bet is not settled, and a voice saying "Score is bet" is output (may be output by the main control board, or output by the payout control board may be output on the sub-control board).
Also, in a situation where no points have been betted and the total score is 50 points, if the count button is operated (the operation of the count button is accepted), the total score of 50 points will be settled, ” is output (may be output by the main control board, may be output by the payout control board, or may be output by the sub control board). That is, the sound after settlement may be different depending on whether a score is betted or not.
It should be noted that the volume of the voice of "The score is betted" and the voice of "Payment has been made" may be different.

<Construction of counting buttons>
As a case where a symbol combination that pays out points by stopping is stopped, a small winning combination is won, a symbol combination (for example, a bell symbol) pertaining to the minor winning combination is stopped and displayed, and 10 points are paid out. In this situation, when an operation of the count button is accepted (for example, an operation related to settlement processing such as accepting a long press is executed), (1) the score is displayed after the payout (or payout display) is completed. (2) execute the settlement process (settlement display) at the timing when the operation of the count button is accepted; (3) do not execute the settlement process. good too. Further, when the settlement process is executed, the 10 points related to the bell may be included in the settlement process, or the 10 points related to the bell may not be included in the settlement process.

In addition, in a situation where the replay role is won, the symbol combination related to the replay is stopped, and the automatic bet is being executed, the operation of the counting button is accepted (for example, an operation related to settlement processing, such as accepting a long press) is executed), (1) the score settlement process (or settlement display) is executed after the automatic bet is completed, and (2) the settlement process (settlement display) is performed at the timing when the operation of the count button is accepted. and (3) not executing the settlement process. Also, when the settlement process is executed, the total score is settled while the automatically bet number is maintained.

As described above, in this example, the HC/fraud monitoring information may be configured so as not to have gaming information.
(1) Gaming machine installation information: Sent at a cycle of 60 seconds after the game machine is started (2) Gaming machine performance information: Sent at a cycle of 180 seconds after the game machine is started (3) HC/fraud monitoring information: The game machine is started After completion, there are three types of game machine information notifications that are sent at a cycle of 300 ms. information.

176 and 177, the configuration of game machine information notification control processing, which is processing related to game machine information notification applicable to this example, in the case of such a configuration will be described in detail.

<Configuration 1 of game information notification control processing>
First, in FIG. 176, the configuration of the gaming machine information notification control process applicable to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that the processing in the figure is processing executed as interrupt processing in the main control board. First, at step 6002, the gaming machine determines whether or not the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification has been reached. In this example, the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification is configured to arrive every 300 ms. More specifically, it is configured to be able to generate and transmit three types of information as game machine information notifications: HC/fraud monitoring information, game machine installation information, and game machine performance information. As described above, the HC/fraud monitoring information is transmitted every 300 ms, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted every 60 seconds (60000 ms), and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted every 180 seconds (180000 ms). 300 ms, which is a short period of transmission of the HC/fraud monitoring information, is set as the gaming machine information notification generation timing. The transmission cycle of gaming machine installation information and the transmission cycle of gaming machine performance information are multiples of the cycle of HC/fraud monitoring information, which is the shortest cycle (multiple of the gaming machine information notification generation cycle). With such a configuration, it is possible to determine which game machine information notification to generate and transmit every 300 ms, which is the shortest period, and to simplify the processing related to the game machine information notification. can.

In this example, the HC/fraud monitoring information is set every 300 ms, the gaming machine installation information is set every 60 seconds (60000 ms), and the gaming machine performance information is set every 180 seconds (180000 ms). The transmission cycle is 200 times the transmission cycle of the HC/fraud monitoring information, and the transmission cycle of the gaming machine performance information is 600 times the transmission cycle of the HC/fraud monitoring information. In this way, a plurality of types of game machine information notifications are provided, and the time value of the transmission cycle of all game machine information notifications is set to be an integral multiple of the time value with the shortest transmission cycle among the game machine information notifications. By configuring, it is possible to transmit an appropriate game machine information notification by determining whether to transmit the game machine information notification every 300 ms, which is the time value with the shortest transmission cycle among the game machine information notifications. can be configured, and the data capacity required for the program can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to output the gaming machine information notification to the outside of the gaming machine at a constant period of 300 ms, the lending machine can receive commands from the gaming machine at intervals of 300 ms. It is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of communication abnormality in

Returning to the description of the flowchart, if Yes at step 6002, at step 6004, the gaming machine generates HC/fraud monitoring information. Next, in step 6006, the game machine determines whether or not the game machine installation information generation timing has been reached. If Yes at step 6006, at step 6008, the HC/fraud monitoring information generated at step 6002 is discarded. Next, at step 6010, the gaming machine generates gaming machine installation information. Next, at step 6012, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine installation information, and proceeds to the next process. In this way, since the game machine installation information has the highest priority as the game machine information notification, when the timing for transmitting the game machine installation information comes, the HC/illegal monitoring information is discarded and the game machine installation information is transmitted. is configured to

Further, if No in step 6006, in step 6014, the gaming machine determines whether or not the gaming machine performance information generation timing has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 6014 , at step 6016 , the gaming machine discards the HC/fraud monitoring information generated at step 6002 . Next, at step 6018, the gaming machine generates gaming machine performance information. Next, at step 6020, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine performance information, and proceeds to the next process. In this way, since the gaming machine performance information has the highest priority next to the gaming machine installation information as a gaming machine information notification, when it is not the gaming machine installation information transmission timing but the gaming machine performance information transmission timing, It is configured to discard the HC/fraud monitoring information and transmit the gaming machine performance information.

If No in step 6014, in step 6022, the gaming machine determines whether or not there is delayed gaming machine performance information. If it is the timing of transmitting the gaming machine performance information and the result is Yes in step 6006, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, so the transmission of the gaming machine performance information is delayed, and the next transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification ( 300 ms later). In the case of Yes at step 6022, at step 6024, the gaming machine discards the HC/fraud monitoring information generated at step 6002, and proceeds to the next process. If No in step 6022 , the process proceeds to step 6016 . If No in step 6002, the process proceeds to the next step.

In this way, in the same figure, HC/fraud monitoring information is generated every 300 ms, and when it is time to send a command with a higher priority than the HC/fraud monitoring information, the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is configured to discard That is, the HC/fraud monitoring information is generated for each transmission timing of the game machine information notification, and if it cannot be transmitted (when the gaming machine information notification with higher priority is transmitted), the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is discarded. is configured to Also, the game machine performance information may be generated and discarded if not transmitted. The action in such a configuration may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
(1) In a situation where a door open error occurs as a predetermined error (door open error), the timing for sending HC/fraud monitoring information and game machine performance information (game machine installation information is also acceptable) has come, so the door Although HC/fraud monitoring information including information indicating that an opening error has occurred is generated, the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is discarded because gaming machine performance information is transmitted. (2) The door open error is resolved 100 ms later. (3) At the timing 300 ms after the timing of (1), the transmission timing of the HC/fraud monitoring information that could not be transmitted in (1) came. - Newly generate fraud monitoring information (does not include information indicating that a door open error has occurred) and transmit it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to output information that matches the latest situation.

As a modification of FIG. 176, information is generated when the transmission timing (timing to be transmitted) comes for any of the HC/fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine performance information, and the gaming machine installation information. If the information cannot be transmitted because it has a higher priority than the information that was sent, the information that could not be transmitted is stored without being discarded, and the timing at which transmission is possible thereafter (timing every 300 ms) It may be configured to transmit in The action in such a configuration may be configured as follows.

<Action 2>
(1) In a situation where a door open error has occurred as a predetermined error, a door open error has occurred because it is time to send HC/fraud monitoring information and game machine performance information (game machine installation information is also acceptable). Although the HC/fraud monitoring information including the information indicating that the player is playing is generated, the generated HC/fraud monitoring information is stored because the gaming machine performance information is transmitted.
(2) The door opening error is resolved 100 ms later. (3) At the timing 300 ms after the timing of (1), the HC controller containing the information to the effect that the door opening error stored in (1) has occurred. Send fraud monitoring information. At the timing of (3), the HC/fraud monitoring information may not be newly generated, or may be newly generated. You can keep it or discard it. By configuring in this way, even if information could not be transmitted when it was time to transmit (for example, if information could not be transmitted due to transmission of information with a high priority), Even if there is, it is possible to send information according to the situation at the time when it should be sent at the timing of actual transmission, and the situation where the content of the information differs due to the delay in the transmission timing can be prevented.

<Configuration 2 of game information notification control processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the configuration of the gaming machine information notification control process applicable to this example will be described in detail. It should be noted that the processing in the figure is processing executed as interrupt processing in the main control board. First, at step 6026, the gaming machine determines whether or not the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification has been reached. In this example, as in FIG. 176, the generation timing of the gaming machine information notification is configured to reach 300 ms. In the case of Yes at step 6026, at step 6028, the gaming machine determines whether or not the gaming machine installation information generation timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6028, in step 6030, the gaming machine determines whether or not the gaming machine performance information generation timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 6030, in step 6032, the gaming machine is the timing of transmitting the gaming machine installation information, which has a higher priority than the gaming machine performance information. A flag indicating that the gaming machine performance information will be transmitted at the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 6034 . If No in step 6030 , the process proceeds to step 6034 without executing step 6032 .

Next, at step 6034, the gaming machine generates gaming machine installation information. Next, at step 6036, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine installation information, and proceeds to the next process.

Also, in the case of No in step 6028, in step 6038, the gaming machine determines whether or not the gaming machine performance information generation timing has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 6038, at step 6040, the gaming machine generates gaming machine performance information. Next, at step 6042, the gaming machine sets the generated gaming machine performance information, and proceeds to the next process.

Also, in the case of No in step 6038, in step 6044, the gaming machine determines whether or not the performance information delay flag is off. If No at step 6044 , at step 6046 the performance information delay flag is turned off and the process proceeds to step 6040 . That is, the delayed gaming machine performance information is generated and transmitted. On the other hand, in the case of Yes at step 6046, at step 6048, the gaming machine generates HC/fraud monitoring information. Next, at step 6049, the gaming machine sets HC/fraud monitoring information and proceeds to the next process.

As described above, in the figure, it is determined which of the HC/fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information should be transmitted every 300 ms, and the gaming machine information to be transmitted based on the determination result. Configured to generate and send notifications. The action in such a configuration may be configured as follows.

<Action 3>
(1) Transmission of gaming machine performance information because it is time to send HC/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information (or gaming machine installation information) in a situation where a door open error has occurred as a predetermined error. is given priority, and HC/fraud monitoring information including information indicating that a door opening error has occurred is not generated.
(2) The door open error is resolved 100 ms after that. - Newly generate fraud monitoring information (does not include information indicating that a door open error has occurred) and transmit it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to output information that matches the latest situation.

In addition, the medal-less reel-type gaming machine according to this example may be configured so that one or more of the following are active low.
(1) Sensor for detecting door opening (2) Sensor for detecting operation of stop button (3) Sensor for detecting operation of start switch (4) Sensor for detecting operation of counting button (5) Sensor for operation of return button Detecting Sensor In this way, by constructing one or more sensors in an active-low configuration, it is possible to create a game machine that is highly resistant to noise.

<Combination of configurations according to this example>
As described above, the gaming machine having the configuration according to the present embodiment to the configuration according to the thirteenth embodiment has been described. The configurations from this example to the thirteenth embodiment can be combined as appropriate. Hereinafter, an example of a gaming machine that combines the configuration according to this example to the configuration according to the thirteenth embodiment. list.

<Combination configuration 1>
For example, in this example <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> and <<<example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor of third embodiment>>> in the third embodiment A game machine configured by combining the configuration related to Configuration 1>>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player looks at. In the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and execution processing of a predetermined token insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D 100 and withdrawing the game tokens to the ejection port D 240 by the blocker D 100, etc.) cannot be completed in time, and the credit addition processing is executed. To provide a user-friendly game machine capable of preventing game medals from entering (swallowing) into the game machine even though the game is not executed.

<Combination configuration 2>
For example, in this example <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Combining the configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and the configuration related to <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine configured with

<effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player looks at. The depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collides with the collision part can be reliably prevented. , it is possible to provide a game machine capable of preventing a situation in which the medal rebounds to the medal receiving opening D341.

<Combination configuration 3>
For example, in this example, <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and configuration related to <<<<fifth embodiment medal payout device drive control>>>> in the fifth embodiment A game machine configured by combining

<effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player looks at. It is possible to surely prevent the situation that the game medals cannot be paid out, and when the predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player who receives the game medals can receive the payout of the game medals from the first medal to the predetermined number at the same intervals. , it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

<Combination configuration 4>
For example, in this example, <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait>, <<<sixth embodiment main control board and sub control during execution of processing related to payment Processing at the time of communication disconnection with the board The game machine is configured by combining the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> in the case where the command and the channel are one-to-one>>>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player looks at. In the event that communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during execution of a process accompanied by sound output, the player can prevent the situation where the voice cannot be output. Since the output does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the user to recognize that no problem has occurred in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 5>
For example, the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> of <<<an example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor of the third embodiment>>> in the third embodiment, and the <<<<fourth Embodiment A game machine configured by combining the configuration related to the medal return member>>>>.

<effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and execution processing of predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D 100 and withdrawing the game medals to the ejection port D 240 by the blocker D 100, etc.) cannot be completed in time, and credit addition processing is performed. is not executed, the game medals can be prevented from entering (swallowing) into the game machine, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is equal to the diameter of the game medals. It is possible to provide a game machine which has a sufficient distance and can prevent a situation in which the first game medal colliding with the collision part bounces back to the medal reception opening D341.

<Combination configuration 6>
For example, the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> of <<<an example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor of the third embodiment>>> in the third embodiment, and the <<<<fifth Embodiment Drive control of medal payout device>>>>> A game machine configured by combining.

<effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and execution processing of predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D 100 and withdrawing the game medals to the ejection port D 240 by the blocker D 100, etc.) cannot be completed in time, and credit addition processing is performed. to prevent the game medals from entering (swallowing) into the game machine even though the To provide a user-friendly game machine which can receive payout of game medals from the first medal to a predetermined number of medals at the same interval and which does not give a sense of incongruity to the player.

<Combination configuration 7>
For example, the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> of <<<an example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor of the third embodiment>>> in the third embodiment, and the <<<sixth implementation in the sixth embodiment Form Processing when communication between the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected during execution of processing related to settlement When the command and the channel are 1:1 Configured by combining the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> It is assumed to be a game machine that has been

<effect>
With this configuration, for example, when the first insertion sensor D20s is off and the second insertion sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, , the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and execution processing of predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D 100 and withdrawing the game medals to the ejection port D 240 by the blocker D 100, etc.) cannot be completed in time, and credit addition processing is performed. to prevent the game medals from entering (swallowing) into the game machine even though the A user-friendly game machine that allows a player to recognize that there is no problem in the game machine because the output of voice does not end when the communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected. can be provided.

<Combination configuration 8>
For example, <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and <<<<fifth embodiment medal payout device drive control>> in the fifth embodiment. >> is a game machine configured by combining the configurations related to >>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collides with the collision portion However, it is possible to prevent the situation that the medals are bounced back to the medal receiving port D341, and when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out to the player who receives the game medals, the same interval is provided from the first medal to the predetermined number. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine which allows the player to receive payout of game medals and does not give the player a sense of incompatibility.

<Combination configuration 9>
For example, in the fourth embodiment, <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>>> configuration, and in the sixth embodiment, the main Processing at the time of communication disconnection between the control board and the sub-control board The game machine is configured by combining the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> in the case where the command and the channel are one-to-one >>>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collides with the collision portion However, it is possible to prevent the situation where the medal rebounds to the medal receiving slot D341, and during the execution of the process accompanied by the output of the sound, the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off. In such a case, since the output of the voice does not end, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows the player to recognize that there is no problem in the gaming machine.

<Combination configuration 10>
For example, <<<<fifth embodiment: drive control of medal payout device>>>>> in the fifth embodiment, and <<<sixth embodiment: execution of processing related to payment in the sixth embodiment. Processing at the time of disconnection of communication between the main control board and the sub control board in the game machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> in the case of one-to-one command and channel >>>.

<effect>
With this configuration, for example, when a predetermined number of game medals are paid out to the player who receives the payout of the game medals, the game medals can be paid out at the same intervals from the first medal to the predetermined number. Since it is possible, the player does not feel uncomfortable, and when the communication between the main control board M and the sub control board S is cut off during the execution of the process accompanied by the sound output, the player can hear the sound. Since the output of .

<Combination configuration 11>
For example, in this example, <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> and <<<example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor of third embodiment>>> in the third embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining the configuration related to configuration 1>> and the configuration related to <<<<fourth embodiment medal returning member >>>> in the fourth embodiment.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player looks at. In the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and execution processing of a predetermined token insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D 100 and withdrawing the game tokens to the ejection port D 240 by the blocker D 100, etc.) cannot be completed in time, and the credit addition processing is executed. It is possible to prevent the game medals from entering (swallowing) into the game machine even though it is not executed, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medals. Therefore, it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine that can prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from rebounding to the medal reception opening D341.

<Combination configuration 12>
For example, in this example, <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait>, and <<<example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor according to third embodiment>>> Configuration 1>>, configuration related to <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and <<<<fifth embodiment medal in the fifth embodiment The game machine is configured by combining the configuration related to drive control of the payout device>>>>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player looks at. In the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and execution processing of a predetermined token insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D 100 and withdrawing the game tokens to the ejection port D 240 by the blocker D 100, etc.) cannot be completed in time, and the credit addition processing is executed. It is possible to prevent the game medals from entering (swallowing) into the game machine even though it is not executed, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medals. It is possible to prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from rebounding to the medal receiving port D341, and the player receiving the payout of the game medals can receive a predetermined number of game medals. To provide a user-friendly game machine which does not make a player feel uncomfortable because game medals can be paid out from the first medal to a predetermined number at the same intervals when the medals are paid out.

<Combination configuration 13>
For example, in this example <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <configuration 1> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> and <<<example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor of third embodiment>>> in the third embodiment Configuration 1>>, configuration related to <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment, and <<<<fifth embodiment medal in the fifth embodiment Configuration related to drive control of dispensing device >>>> and processing command when communication is disconnected between main control board and sub control board during execution of processing related to <<<sixth embodiment payment according to sixth embodiment and the configuration related to <<Configuration 1>> in the case of one-to-one channel>>>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, for example, the timing of starting the push order navigation is delayed in both the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40, and the push order navigation is recognized regardless of which display device the player looks at. In the state where the first input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, The CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and execution processing of a predetermined token insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D 100 and withdrawing the game tokens to the ejection port D 240 by the blocker D 100, etc.) cannot be completed in time, and the credit addition processing is executed. It is possible to prevent the game medals from entering (swallowing) into the game machine even though it is not executed, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the game medals. It is possible to prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from rebounding to the medal receiving port D341, and the player receiving the payout of the game medals can receive a predetermined number of game medals. When the game medals are paid out, the game medals can be paid out from the first medal to a predetermined number at the same interval, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable, and the main player can enjoy the game medals during the execution of the processing accompanied by the sound output. When the communication between the control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player can recognize that there is no problem in the gaming machine because the voice output does not end. It is possible to provide friendly gaming machines.

<Combination configuration 14>
For example, in this example, <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait> and <<<example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor of third embodiment>>> in the third embodiment A game machine configured by combining the configuration related to Configuration 1>>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant). (duration until the operation of the stop switch becomes valid), for example, even in a game machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation can be performed by lighting the lamp (this For example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310) can be used to prevent the player from recognizing the push order navigation. In the state, credit addition processing has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred, and performs predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, turning off the blocker D 100). to prevent the game medals from entering (swallowing) into the game machine even though the credit addition process is not executed due to the delay in executing processing such as paying out the game medals to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible.

<Combination configuration 15>
For example, in this example <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Combining the configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and the configuration related to <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine configured with

<effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not passed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant). (duration until the operation of the stop switch becomes valid), for example, even in a game machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation can be performed by lighting the lamp (this For example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310) can be used to prevent the player from recognizing the push order navigation. a user-friendly game machine that has a sufficient distance with respect to the diameter of the ball and can prevent the first game medal that collides with the collision part from rebounding to the medal receiving slot D341. can provide.

<Combination configuration 16>
For example, in this example <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no weight> and configuration related to <<<<fifth embodiment medal payout device drive control>>>> in the fifth embodiment A game machine configured by combining

<effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 is set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not elapsed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant). (duration until the operation of the stop switch becomes valid), for example, even in a game machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation can be performed by lighting the lamp (this For example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310) can be used to prevent the player from recognizing the push order navigation. To provide a user-friendly game machine which does not make a player feel uncomfortable because the player can receive the payout of game medals from the first medal to a predetermined number at the same intervals when the medals are paid out.

<Combination configuration 17>
For example, in this example, <<configuration related to display start of push order navigation>>
Configuration related to <configuration 3> of <execution mode of push order navigation when there is no wait>, and <<<sixth embodiment main control board and sub control during execution of processing related to payment in sixth embodiment Processing at the time of communication disconnection with the board The game machine is configured by combining the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> in the case where the command and the channel are one-to-one>>>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, the start timing of the push order navigation on the reel window frame lamp D310 can be set for a predetermined period (start lever operation → period when the minimum playing time has not passed → reel rotation start → reel acceleration state → reel constant). (duration until the operation of the stop switch becomes valid), for example, even in a game machine that does not have a liquid crystal unit such as the effect display device S40, the pressing order navigation can be performed by lighting the lamp (this For example, the lighting of the reel window frame lamp D310) can be used, and it is difficult for the player to be unable to recognize the push order navigation. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is disconnected, the player can recognize that there is no problem in the gaming machine because the sound output does not end. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that

<Combination configuration 18>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to end of display of push order navigation>>, and in the third embodiment, <<<example of medal addition processing by insertion sensor according to third embodiment>>> A game machine configured by combining the configuration related to <Configuration 1>>.

<effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different, so that two display devices can be used. can be avoided at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. When the input sensor D20s is off and the second input sensor D30s is on, the credit addition process has not yet been performed, but if an error occurs at this timing, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that an error has occurred. , predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, the blocker D100 is turned off and the game medals are returned to the ejection port D240 by the blocker D100, etc.) is not executed in time, and the game medals are not processed in spite of the fact that the credit addition processing is not executed. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine capable of preventing (swallowing) from entering (swallowing) into the game machine.

<Combination configuration 19>
For example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to end of display of push order navigation>> in this example and the configuration related to <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine configured by combining.

<effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different, so that two display devices can be used. can be avoided at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push order navigation occurs. The depth of the surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is sufficiently long with respect to the diameter of the game medal, and the first game medal that collides with the collision part bounces back to the medal reception opening D341. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to prevent

<Combination configuration 20>
For example, in the present example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to end of display of push order navigation>>, and in the fifth embodiment, related to <<<<fifth embodiment medal payout device drive control>>>> A game machine configured by combining the configuration.

<effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different, so that two display devices can be used. can be avoided at the same time, and the player can visually recognize the end of the push-order navigation on each display device at the timing when the push-order navigation occurs. When a predetermined number of game medals are paid out, the player receiving the payout can receive the payout of the game medals from the first medal to the predetermined number at the same interval, which is user-friendly and does not give the player a sense of incompatibility. Amusement machines can be provided.

<Combination configuration 21>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to the end of display of the push order navigation>>, and in the sixth embodiment, <<<the main control board and the secondary Processing at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board A game machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> in the case where the command and the channel are one-to-one>>>.

<effect>
With this configuration, the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the push-order display device D270 and the end timing of the push-order navigation displayed on the effect display device S40 are made different, whereby two display devices can be used. can be avoided at the same time. When the communication between the main control board M and the sub-control board S is cut off during the execution of the process involving the output, the player does not finish outputting the sound. It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that makes it possible to recognize that no problem has occurred.

<Combination configuration 22>
For example, in this example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>>, and in the third embodiment, <<<example of medal addition processing by the insertion sensor of the third embodiment>>> A game machine configured by combining the configuration related to <Configuration 1>>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, even if the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Since it is clear, it is difficult for the player to experience unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum winning number due to an error in the pressing order. If an error occurs at this timing, although the addition process is not performed, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that there is an error, and performs predetermined medal insertion error processing (for example, by turning off the blocker D100 and using the blocker D100 To prevent game medals from entering (swallowing) into a game machine even though credit addition processing is not executed due to a delay in executing processing such as paying out game medals to a discharge port D240. User-friendly gaming machines can be provided.

<Combination configuration 23>
For example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example and the configuration related to <<<<fourth embodiment medal return member>>>> in the fourth embodiment are combined. A gaming machine configured in combination.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, even if the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Since it is clear, unintended disadvantages for the player, such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of wins due to an error in the pressing order, etc., are unlikely to occur, and the depth of the medal drop surface D342 toward the inside of the game machine is less than the diameter of the game medals. It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine which has a sufficient distance and can prevent a situation in which the first game medal colliding with the collision part bounces back to the medal reception opening D341. .

<Combination configuration 24>
For example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>> in this example, and the configuration related to <<<<fifth embodiment medal payout device drive control>>>> in the fifth embodiment A game machine configured by combining the configuration.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, even if the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Since it is clear, it is difficult for the player to experience unintended disadvantages such as not being able to obtain the maximum number of wins due to an error in the pushing order, etc. A user-friendly gaming machine can be provided that does not give the player a sense of incongruity because the player can receive the payout of game medals from the first medal to a predetermined number at the same intervals.

<Combination configuration 25>
For example, in the present example, the configuration related to <<configuration related to reel control and push order navigation>>, and in the sixth embodiment, <<<the main control board and the secondary Processing at the time of disconnection of communication with the control board A game machine configured by combining the configuration related to <<configuration 1>> in the case where the command and the channel are one-to-one>>>.

<effect>
By configuring in this way, the stop button is operated according to the push order navigation, and even if the stop button is being pressed, even if the reel to be stopped next is being pressed by the stop operation of the reel. Since it is clear, unintended disadvantages for the player, such as not being able to obtain the maximum winning number due to an error in the pressing order, etc., are unlikely to occur. A user-friendly game that enables a player to recognize that there is no problem in the game machine because the output of sound does not end when the communication with the sub-control board S is disconnected. machine can be provided.

An example of a game machine in which the configuration according to the present example and the configuration according to the sixth embodiment are combined has been described above, but these are only examples, and the configuration according to the present example to the configuration according to the sixth embodiment can be changed as appropriate. , can be combined.

(summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (higher-level concepts), but also the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. may

The game machine according to this aspect (1) is
Having a belt-shaped reel tape (e.g., reel band MO) wound around the outer circumference of the reel base (e.g., reel frame MW),
A plurality of types of patterns are arranged on the reel tape along the longitudinal direction of the reel tape,
As the type of the pattern, at least a first pattern (for example, white seven pattern) and a second pattern (for example, bell pattern),
The maximum width value of the first design is larger than the maximum width value of the second design,
The second pattern is arranged on at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first pattern is not arranged on each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the length of the reel tape in the longitudinal direction is longer than the outer circumference of the surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound.

The game machine according to this aspect (2) is
a gaming machine body;
a front door (for example, front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be able to be opened and closed;
In a reel-type gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside a gaming machine main body,
Inside the main body of the gaming machine,
a pedestal on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal BU);
a main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) installed below the pedestal for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for evacuating surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
A portion of the main tank member is provided with a slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by locking parts (for example, screws BS),
The game machine is characterized in that the slope portion is positioned vertically below the locking part that is closest to the opening/closing side of the front door.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
a game machine main body;
a front door (for example, front door DU) attached to the gaming machine main body so as to be able to be opened and closed;
In a reel-type gaming machine provided with a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside a gaming machine main body,
Inside the main body of the gaming machine,
a pedestal on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal BU);
a main tank member (e.g., hopper H40) installed below the pedestal for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank member (for example, a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for evacuating surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by locking parts (for example, screws BS),
The game machine is characterized in that the auxiliary tank member is positioned vertically below the locking part that is closest to the opening/closing side of the front door.

The game machine according to this aspect (4) is
a plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
a plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect;
Equipped with an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is finally stopped. One game can be finished by performing a final stop switch operation, which is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel, and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, , standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (eg, sub-input button SB) is operated after one game is finished, a predetermined image (eg, menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display section,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated while the predetermined image is displayed. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (5) is
a plurality of reels (eg, reel M50);
a plurality of stop switches (eg, stop button D40);
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device S40) capable of displaying an effect;
Equipped with an operation member (for example, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2) that can change the display content of the effect,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is finally stopped. One game can be finished by performing a final stop switch operation, which is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel, and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, , standby screen) can be displayed,
When a predetermined operation member (eg, sub-input button SB) is operated after one game is finished, a predetermined image (eg, menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display section,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated while the predetermined image is displayed. Then, the effect display unit is configured to be able to display the specific image,
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the predetermined image is displayed for the second predetermined time from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. If a specific operation member (for example, cross key SB2) is operated before the predetermined operation member is operated, the predetermined image is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. 2. While the specific image is not displayed in the effect display unit even after a predetermined time has passed,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly set before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display section after the first predetermined time has elapsed without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. is configured to
When the final stop switch operation is performed, a bet is placed before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. , a game characterized in that the specific image is not displayed on the effect display section even after the first predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. machine.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
A setting switch (for example, setting key switch) and
The main game unit is configured to be able to execute an interrupt process, which is a process executed at predetermined intervals,
A power outage occurs in a predetermined game state other than the setting change mode, and the setting switch is turned on in a situation where power is not supplied to the game machine, power is started to be supplied to the game machine, and the game machine shifts to the setting change mode. After the setting switch is turned off, when power supply to the gaming machine is started after the setting switch is turned off, the game machine is configured to shift to the setting change mode,
A power outage occurs in a predetermined game state other than the setting change mode, the setting switch is turned on under a situation where power is not supplied to the game machine, power is started to be supplied to the game machine, and the power supply is started. The game machine is configured not to shift to the setting change mode when a power failure occurs before the predetermined time elapses and power supply to the game machine is started after the setting switch is turned off. It is a gaming machine characterized by

The gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
a stop switch (for example, a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, a right stop button D43) provided corresponding to each reel and operated by the player when stopping the rotation of the reel;
a storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing game media within a predetermined number;
A main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
A speaker (for example, a speaker S20) that outputs a production sound;
A sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) that controls the output of the effect,
The main game department
a role lottery means for executing a lottery for a role;
reel control means for stopping and controlling the reels so as to correspond to the result of the combination lottery drawn by the combination lottery means when the stop switch is operated;
a stored number increasing process for increasing the number of game media stored in the storage means;
a payout process for executing payout of game media,
When a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed by the reel control means, the game medium is provided to the player,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stop-displayed, and when a specific number of game media is provided, a stored number increase process is executed. is configured to execute the payout process without
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stop-displayed and the specific number of game media is provided. In this case, the storage number increase processing is executed and the dispensing processing is not executed,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stop-displayed and the specific number is displayed. is provided, the payout process is executed after executing the stored number increase process,
The main game department
After the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium provision information can be transmitted to the sub-game unit,
The sub-game department
Based on the reception of the game medium provision information, the speaker is configured to output a game medium provision sound, which is a production sound related to provision of the game medium,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and when the specific number of game media are awarded, the game medium provision information is received, a predetermined game medium imparting sound (for example, a game medium imparting sound output when the credit increases by 1, a game medium imparting sound output when one game medal is paid out) is generated. can be output,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means is equal to or less than the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stop-displayed and the specific number of game media is provided. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined game medium provision sound based on the reception of the game medium provision information,
In a situation where the number of game media stored in the storage means exceeds the value obtained by subtracting the specific number from the predetermined number and is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined symbol combination is stop-displayed and the specific number is displayed. when the game medium is awarded, the predetermined game medium provision sound can be output based on the reception of the game medium provision information,
The time value from when the number of game media stored in the storage means reaches A (A is a natural number) until it reaches A+1 during execution of the stored number increase process, and N (N is a natural number and 2≦N M+1 game media from the start of execution of the payout process for M (M is a natural number, 1≦M≦(N−1)) game media during execution of the payout process for paying out ) game media This gaming machine is characterized in that the time value until the start of execution of the payout process for the second game medium is different.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the production,
A game lamp (for example, a lamp unit) that can be turned on when the production is executed,
A setting value display unit (for example, setting display LED) capable of displaying the setting value,
The game lamp has a plurality of lighting patterns (eg, element 6 in FIG. 77),
The lighting pattern is configured by combining a plurality of lighting modes (for example, element 5 in FIG. 77),
The lighting mode is a combination of a lighting color (e.g., element 1 in FIG. 77) and a lighting time pattern (e.g., element 4 in FIG. 77),
The lighting time pattern is a combination of a lighting time (e.g., element 2 in FIG. 77) and an extinguishing time (e.g., element 3 in FIG. 77),
having a plurality of lighting colors, having a plurality of lighting times, having a plurality of lighting times,
As the lighting pattern, a first lighting pattern that can be performed in the event of a predetermined abnormality, a second lighting pattern that can be performed when the set value is displayed in the set value display section, and a set value display that is not in the event of the predetermined abnormality. at least a third lighting pattern that can be implemented when the set value is not displayed in the part,
The first lighting pattern is configured to include a predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern are configured not to include the predetermined lighting mode,
The second lighting pattern is configured to include a specific lighting mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first lighting pattern and the third lighting pattern do not include the specific lighting mode.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
a storage means capable of electrically storing game media within a range of a predetermined number (for example, in this example, game medals can be electrically stored as credits in the gaming machine);
a bet switch (e.g., a max bet button) which is operated when betting game media stored in the storage means and which allows a plurality of game media to be bet;
a predetermined lamp (for example, a 3-bet lamp D213) capable of notifying that a specified number, which is the maximum bet number per game in a predetermined gaming state, has been bet;
A specific lamp (for example, max bed lamp) that can notify that the operation of the bed switch is effective,
and a winning combination determining means capable of determining a winning combination,
As a winning combination determined by the combination determination means, a replaying combination can be determined,
The game state is the predetermined gaming state, the replay role has not been won in the game executed immediately before, and the sum of the game media stored in the storage means and the number of bets is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, And in a situation where the number of bets is less than the specified number, the specific lamp is configured to light,
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the number of bets reaches the specified number in a situation where the specific lamp is lit, the specific lamp is turned off after the predetermined lamp is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect is provided,
The time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program in the main game section should be longer than the time from the power failure to the end of the power supply to the game machine. is composed of
The time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program of the main game part is longer than the time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the start of the program of the sub-game part. The gaming machine is characterized by being configured as follows.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to give the game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
Symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels in the game in which the predetermined game state is established and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. After that, the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, and even in a situation where the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a game value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power failure processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure in spite of the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player,
Symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels in the game in which the predetermined game state is established and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. , even if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, and the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off is executed, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a game value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to give the game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the final stop operation by the player after that is a specific combination. After the specific symbol combination is displayed by the stop operation at the timing, it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (for example, freeze at the start of the bonus),
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the final stop operation by the player after that is a specific combination. Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation at the timing, the predetermined freeze can be executed. there is

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A4) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to give the game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that After the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation, the next game can be executed without inputting the game value,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value It is configured so that the next game can be executed regardless of whether

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least the probability of determining a specific result is different from that of the first lottery state, and
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to give the game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In the game which is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are placed on the respective reels. After the game has been stopped, and after the player performs a final stop operation at a specific timing and displays the specific symbol combination, the second lottery state can be entered,
In the game which is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are placed on the respective reels. In spite of the fact that the game has been stopped and the player has performed the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation after that, the predetermined rotation failure of the reels corresponding to the final stop operation causes a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A6) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
Reel control means for controlling the reels, and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be lit based on the determination of a specific result,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to give the game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that After a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is turned on,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Despite the stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation, even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that the lamp of is lit.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A7) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
Reel control means for controlling the reels, and a predetermined lamp (for example, a replay lamp D290) that can be lit based on the determination of a specific result,
When a power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power failure processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure in spite of the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that After a stop operation is performed at a specific timing as a final stop operation and the specific symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined lamp is turned on,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power failure processing based on the detection of the power failure despite the stop operation being performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the power supply The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that the predetermined lamp is turned on after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A8) is
N (N is a natural number of 3 or more) reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A speaker (for example, a speaker S20) that outputs a production sound;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to give the game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stopping operation is performed at a specific timing as a player's N-1th reel stop operation, and symbols corresponding to a specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the stopped reels. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined effect sound (for example, tenpai sound) from the speaker,
In the game executed in the specific game state, a predetermined rotation of the N-1th reel despite the fact that the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the stop operation of the N-1th reel by the player. The gaming machine is configured to output a predetermined effect sound from a speaker even after symbols other than symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each stopped reel due to a defect. .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A9) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
a storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined number;
a bet switch (e.g., max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming values stored in the storage means and which allows a plurality of gaming values to be bet;
A specific lamp (for example, max bed lamp) that can notify that the operation of the bed switch is effective,
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to give the game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are provided with the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols are respectively stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the effect of the specific lamp is not notified. is composed of
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are provided with the specific symbol combination. Although the corresponding symbols are stopped and the stop operation is performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation by the player after that, the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation causes the specified failure. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to notify that the specific lamp is valid even after a symbol combination other than the symbol combination is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A10) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
a storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined number;
a bet switch (e.g., max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming values stored in the storage means and which allows a plurality of gaming values to be bet;
A specific lamp (for example, max bed lamp) that can notify that the operation of the bed switch is effective,
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power failure processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure in spite of the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are provided with the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols are respectively stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the effect of the specific lamp is not notified. is composed of
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are provided with the specific symbol combination. The corresponding symbols are respectively stopped, and despite the player performing the stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation after that, the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off is executed. The gaming machine is characterized in that even when a combination of symbols other than the specified combination of symbols is displayed, it is not notified that the specified lamp is effective after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A11) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
a storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined number;
a bet switch (e.g., max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming values stored in the storage means and which allows a plurality of gaming values to be bet;
A specific lamp (for example, max bed lamp) that can notify that the operation of the bed switch is effective,
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to give the game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game state is the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are provided with the predetermined symbol combination. The corresponding symbols are respectively stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation after that and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, it is informed that the specific lamp is valid. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has Although the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are respectively stopped and the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the player's final stop operation after that, a predetermined predetermined number to the reel corresponding to the final stop operation is performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to notify that the specific lamp is effective even after a combination of symbols other than the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed due to a rotation failure.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A12) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
a storage means (for example, a credit amount display device D200) capable of electrically storing gaming value within a predetermined number;
a bet switch (e.g., max bet button) which is operated when betting the gaming values stored in the storage means and which allows a plurality of gaming values to be bet;
A specific lamp (for example, max bed lamp) that can notify that the operation of the bed switch is effective,
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure in spite of the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player,
In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game state is the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the reels are provided with the predetermined symbol combination. The corresponding symbols are respectively stopped, and after the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation after that and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, it is informed that the specific lamp is valid. In a game in which one or more game media are stored in the storage means, the game is in the predetermined game state, and the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, each of the reels has The symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are respectively stopped, and although the stop operation is performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player after that, the power-off processing is executed based on the detection of the power-off. This game machine is characterized in that even if a combination of symbols other than the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed as a result of the game being played, it is informed that the specified lamp is effective after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A13) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a game state, it has at least a special game state that is advantageous for the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to give the game value corresponding to the symbol combination to the player,
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, freeze at the end of the bonus) is configured to be executable,
A game newly executed in a special game state in which a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player to satisfy a termination condition of the special game state, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is configured to be executable,
A game newly executed in a special game state in which a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player to satisfy a termination condition of the special game state, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels. Nevertheless, the predetermined freeze can be executed even after a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. It is a game machine that

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A14) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a game state, it has at least a special game state that is advantageous for the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power failure processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure in spite of the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player,
When the end condition of the special game state is satisfied, a predetermined freeze (for example, freeze at the end of the bonus) is configured to be executable,
A game newly executed in a special game state in which a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player to satisfy a termination condition of the special game state, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels. After the symbol combination is displayed, the predetermined freeze is configured to be executable,
A game newly executed in a special game state in which a game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is awarded to the player to satisfy a termination condition of the special game state, and the internal lottery means. In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined by, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels. Nevertheless, even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to the execution of the power failure processing based on the detection of the power failure, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A15) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by performing the stop operation at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. is configured as
Symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels in the game in which the predetermined game state is established and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. After that, the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to give the player a game value corresponding to .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A16) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
When power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power failure processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by performing the stop operation at a predetermined timing as the final stop operation of the player, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. is configured as
Symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combinations are stopped on the respective reels in the game in which the predetermined game state is established and a specific result different from the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means. After that, after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by performing a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation by the player and executing the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to give a game value corresponding to a combination to a player.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A17) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In the game in which the game is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation corresponds to the specific symbol combination. The symbols are respectively stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by performing the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the next game can be played regardless of the input of the game value. configured to run,
Symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels in the game in which the predetermined game state is established and a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means. After that, a stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player, and after the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reels corresponding to the final stop operation, the game value is inserted. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the next game cannot be executed regardless of whether the game is played.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A18) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In the game in which the game is in the predetermined game state and the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation corresponds to the specific symbol combination. The symbols are respectively stopped, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by performing the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the next game can be played regardless of the input of the game value. configured to run,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even after the symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to the predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation despite the stop operation at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the game value The gaming machine is characterized in that it is constructed so that the next game can be executed without depending on the insertion of the .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A19) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
As a game state, it has at least a state in which it is possible to shift to a special game that is advantageous for the player,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in the game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
Since the internal lottery means determines a specific result until the specific symbol combination is stopped, the special game transition possible state is possible,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. After that, as the final stop operation of the player after that, after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing and the special symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a game in which the special game transition is not possible and the combination lottery result by the combination lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are provided on each of the reels. After being stopped respectively, a stop operation is performed at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation by the player, and the specific symbol combination is displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation. , a game machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute the predetermined freeze.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A20) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on the player's stop operation in the game after the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. After that, as the player's final stop operation, the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed, a predetermined freeze (for example, freeze at the start of the bonus) can be executed. ,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels. Even after the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation, the predetermined freeze can be executed in spite of the timing of the stop operation. It is a game machine characterized by that there is

The gaming machine according to this aspect (A21) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least the probability of determining a specific result is different from that of the first lottery state, and
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
Each game that is stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation in the game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means Symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are respectively stopped on the reels, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by a stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the second symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to be able to move to the lottery state,
In a game executed in the first lottery state and in which a predetermined result different from the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the specific symbol combination is provided on each of the reels. symbols corresponding to are respectively stopped, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing as a final stop operation after that, and symbols other than the specific symbol combination due to a predetermined rotation failure of the reel corresponding to the final stop operation The game machine is characterized in that it is configured so as not to shift to the second combination lottery state after the combinations are displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B1) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
It is possible to execute a freeze that delays the progress of the game,
When a power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power failure processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure in spite of the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop the specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the final stop operation by the player after that is a specific combination. After the specific symbol combination is displayed by the stop operation at the timing, it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined freeze (for example, freeze at the start of the special game),
In a predetermined game after a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the reels, and the final stop operation by the player after that is a specific combination. Even if the specific symbol combination is not displayed due to the execution of the power-off processing based on the detection of the power-off in spite of the timed stop operation, the predetermined freeze can be executed after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B2) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power failure processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure in spite of the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that After the specific symbol combination is displayed after the stop operation is performed at a specific timing as the final stop operation, the next game can be executed without inputting the game value,
In the game in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means in the predetermined game state, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure despite the stop operation being performed at the specific timing as the final stop operation, the power supply The gaming machine is characterized in that it is constructed so that the next game can be executed without depending on the insertion of game value after returning.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B3) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least the probability of determining a specific result is different from that of the first lottery state, and
When a power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power failure processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure in spite of the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player,
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
In the game which is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are placed on the respective reels. After the game has been stopped, and after the player performs a final stop operation at a specific timing and displays the specific symbol combination, the second lottery state can be entered,
In the game which is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are placed on the respective reels. Symbols other than the specific combination of symbols due to execution of power-off processing based on detection of power-off even though the symbols have been stopped and the player performed a stop operation at a specific timing as a final stop operation after that. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that even when a combination is displayed, it is possible to shift to the second lottery state after power is restored.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B4) is
N (N is a natural number of 3 or more) reels (for example, left reel M51, middle reel M52, right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
A speaker (for example, a speaker S20) that outputs a production sound;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
When a power failure is detected, it is configured to be able to execute power failure processing.
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a predetermined result has been determined by the internal lottery means,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are displayed on each reel stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation. are respectively stopped, and after the final stop operation by the player is performed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is given to the player. ,
In the game which is in the predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination are stopped on the respective reels, and the player's after that Even if a symbol combination other than the predetermined symbol combination is displayed due to execution of power failure processing based on detection of power failure in spite of the stop operation being performed at the predetermined timing as the final stop operation, the power supply After returning, the game value corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination is provided to the player,
In a game executed in a specific game state, a stopping operation is performed at a specific timing as a player's N-1th reel stop operation, and symbols corresponding to a specific symbol combination are stopped on each of the stopped reels. After that, it is configured to be able to output a predetermined effect sound (for example, tenpai sound) from the speaker,
In the game executed in the specific game state, despite the stop operation at the specific timing as the stop operation for the N-1th reel by the player, the power interruption processing based on the detection of the power interruption is executed, even if symbols other than symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are stopped on the stopped reels, the predetermined effect sound can be output from the speaker after the power is restored. It is a gaming machine characterized by

The gaming machine according to this aspect (B5) is
A plurality of reels (for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53) provided with a plurality of types of symbols;
an internal lottery means;
and reel control means for controlling the reel,
The lottery state has at least a first lottery state and a second lottery state in which at least the probability of determining a specific result is different from that of the first lottery state, and
The reel control means is configured to be able to stop a specific symbol combination based on a player's stop operation in a game in which a specific result is determined by the internal lottery means,
Each game that is stopped by a player's stop operation other than the final stop operation in the game that is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means Symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are respectively stopped on the reels, and after the specific symbol combination is displayed by a stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation of the player, the second symbol combination is displayed. It is configured to be able to move to the lottery state,
In the game which is executed in the first lottery state and in which the specific result is determined by the internal lottery means, the symbols corresponding to the specific symbol combination are placed on the respective reels. In spite of the fact that the game has been stopped and the player has performed the stop operation at a specific timing as the final stop operation after that, the predetermined rotation failure of the reels corresponding to the final stop operation causes a symbol combination other than the specific symbol combination. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to shift to the second lottery state even after is displayed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C1) is
It is configured so that the stopping function becomes effective when a predetermined condition is met,
It is configured to be able to execute stop processing for stopping the progress of the game when a specific condition is met when the stop function is valid,
The gaming machine is characterized in that at least one specific condition candidate out of a plurality of types of specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C2) is

It is configured so that the stopping function becomes effective when a predetermined condition is met,
It is configured to be able to execute stop processing for stopping the progress of the game when a specific condition is met when the stop function is valid,
At least one specific condition candidate from among a plurality of types of specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific condition candidate is that the number of game media obtained in a predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.
The gaming machine according to this aspect (C3) is
It is configured so that the stopping function becomes effective when a predetermined condition is met,
It is configured to be able to execute stop processing for stopping the progress of the game when a specific condition is met when the stop function is valid,
At least one specific condition candidate from among a plurality of types of specific condition candidates can be set as the specific condition,
The specific condition candidate is that the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined number,
Under a situation where the specific condition is that the number of game media acquired in a predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a predetermined game state is established after a certain game is executed, and the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured not to execute the stopping process when the condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C4) is
It is configured so that the stopping function becomes effective when a predetermined condition is met,
It is configured to be able to execute stop processing for stopping the progress of the game when a specific condition is met when the stop function is valid,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute determination processing relating to a predetermined error even when progress of the game is stopped by executing stop processing.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (C5) is
It is configured so that the stopping function becomes effective when a predetermined condition A is satisfied,
It is configured so that the automatic settlement function is enabled when the predetermined condition B is satisfied,
When the stop function is valid and a specific condition A is satisfied, a stop process for stopping the progress of the game can be executed,
It is configured to be able to execute automatic settlement processing when specific condition B is met when the automatic settlement function is valid,
At least one specific condition A candidate from among a plurality of types of specific condition A candidates can be set as the specific condition A,
At least one specific condition B candidate can be set as the specific condition B from a plurality of types of specific condition B candidates,
At least one of the specific condition A candidate and the specific condition B candidate is the same,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that conditions different from the specific condition A and the specific condition B can be set.

There is a demand for gaming machines that can transmit appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine or receive information from the outside of the gaming machine. There was a demand to build a process (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-182215).

According to the gaming machine having the following configuration, it is possible to transmit appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine or receive information from the outside of the gaming machine, and to transmit appropriate information to the outside of the gaming machine or receive information from the outside of the gaming machine. It is possible to build a control process to receive the

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D1) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
a start switch,
In a gaming machine equipped with storage means capable of storing serial numbers,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside of the game machine,
The predetermined information includes at least a serial number,
making it possible to execute a special addition process for adding "1" to the value stored in the storage means;
When the special addition process is executed when N (N is a value less than 255) is stored in the storage means, "N+1" is stored in the storage means and M (M is a value less than 255) is stored in the storage means. 255) is stored, if the special addition process is executed, "1" is stored in the storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the storage means.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D2) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
a start switch,
In a gaming machine equipped with storage means capable of storing serial numbers,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside of the game machine,
The predetermined information includes at least a serial number,
After outputting predetermined information, the serial number stored in the storage means can be updated,
When the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the storage means,
The value stored in the storage means is cyclically updated from "1" to "M (M is an integer equal to or greater than 2)" when the power is on. It is a gaming machine that

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D3) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
In a gaming machine comprising a start switch,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside of the game machine,
It is configured to be able to output specific information to the outside of the game machine,
As types of serial numbers, it has at least a serial number related to predetermined information and a serial number related to specific information,
The predetermined information includes at least a serial number related to the predetermined information,
The specific information includes at least a serial number relating to the specific information,
A first storage means for storing a serial number related to predetermined information and a second storage means for storing a serial number related to specific information, the addresses of the first storage means and the addresses of the second storage means being consecutive cage,
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the power is turned on after being turned off, "0" is stored in the first storage means and "0" is stored in the second storage means. .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D4) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
In a gaming machine comprising a start switch,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to output predetermined information to the outside of the game machine,
The predetermined information includes at least information consisting of X (X>1) bytes and checksum information,
The checksum information consists of 1 byte,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when calculating the checksum information, the information composed of X bytes is calculated by dividing it into 1-byte units.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D5) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
a start switch,
a total score display device;
In a game machine equipped with
Based on the operation of the start switch, the reel can be rotated,
while the reel is spinning
When the score managed by the total score display device is less than a predetermined value, the score can be added based on the received lending signal,
This game machine is characterized in that, when the score managed by the total score display device is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the score cannot be added based on the received lending signal.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D6) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
In a gaming machine comprising a start switch,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to rotate the reel,
Under a predetermined situation in which the reels are not rotating, points can be added based on the received lending signal,
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured such that points cannot be added based on the received lending signal while the reels are rotating.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D7) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
In a gaming machine comprising a start switch,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to receive lending notification commands from the outside,
Information included in the lending notification command includes at least the number of lending information,
When a lending notification command including "0" as lending number information is received under a predetermined situation, bet processing based on a betting operation can be executed,
Under certain circumstances, if a lending notification command containing a value of "1" or more as the lending number information is received, the bet processing based on the bet operation will not be executed until a predetermined period has passed from the timing of the reception. It is a game machine characterized by making it so.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D8) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
a start switch,
a counting button;
In a gaming machine equipped with a total score display device,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
Even if the operation of the counting button is accepted after the specified information is output to the outside and the operation of the counting button is no longer accepted after that, the total score is making it possible to start updating the score displayed on the display device,
Even if the operation of the counting button is accepted after the predetermined information is output to the outside and before the specific information is output to the outside, even if the operation of the counting button is no longer accepted after that, the counting information It is a game machine characterized by being able to output specific information including .

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D9) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
a start switch,
In a gaming machine equipped with score management means for managing score information,
Based on the operation of the start switch, the reel can be rotated,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is capable of transmitting a command including score information to the outside a plurality of times within a period from when the reels start rotating to when the reels make one turn.

There has been a demand for a gaming machine that does not hinder the progress of a game while displaying necessary information on a performance display device (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-202185).

According to the gaming machine having the following configuration, it is possible to display the necessary information on the performance display device while not hindering the progress of the game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (D10) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
In a gaming machine comprising a start switch,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
a first storage means capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory is activated or the accessory continuous operation device is activated;
a second storage means capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of games played;
Based on the value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory is operating or the accessory continuous operating device is operating and the value corresponding to the total number of games, the role product etc. state ratio can be calculated,
The value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory stored in the first storage means is operating or the accessory continuous actuating device is operating under a predetermined condition in which the power is on is a predetermined abnormality even if the value corresponding to the total number of games changed by and stored in the second storage means becomes larger than the value corresponding to the total number of games, the progress of the game can be continued;
The value corresponding to the number of games in which the accessory stored in the first storage means is operating or the accessory continuous operation device is operating under the condition that the power is off is changed due to a predetermined abnormality. and when the value becomes larger than the value corresponding to the total number of games stored in the second storage means, a predetermined error state is set after the power is turned on. be.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E1) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
In a gaming machine comprising a start switch,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
The first information is configured to be output to the outside of the gaming machine every first time,
The second information is configured to be able to be output to the outside of the game machine every second time,
The third information is configured to be output to the outside of the gaming machine every third time,
The second time is X times the first time (X is a natural number),
It is configured so that the third time is Y times the first time (Y is a natural number),
When the scheduled output timings of the first information, the second information, and the third information overlap, the second information is output, and then the third information is output at the timing when the first time has elapsed. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is capable of outputting the first information after the first time has passed.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E2) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
In a gaming machine comprising a start switch,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
The first information is configured to be output to the outside of the game machine at predetermined time intervals,
The second information is configured to be able to be output to the outside of the game machine at specific time intervals,
When the scheduled output timings of the first information and the second information overlap, the first information is output, and then the second information is output at a predetermined timing. ,
Even when the second information is output at the predetermined timing, the timing after the specific time from the scheduled output timing of the first information and the second information is the next output of the second information. The game machine is characterized by being configured to be set at a predetermined timing.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E3) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
In a gaming machine comprising a start switch,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
The first information is configured to be output to the outside of the game machine at predetermined time intervals,
The second information is configured to be able to be output to the outside of the game machine at specific time intervals,
When the scheduled output timings of the first information and the second information overlap, the first information is output, and then the second information is output at a predetermined timing. ,
It is characterized in that, when the second information is output at the predetermined timing, the timing after the specific time from the predetermined timing is set as the next scheduled output timing of the second information. It is a gaming machine that

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E4) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
In a gaming machine comprising a start switch,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
The first information is configured to be output to the outside of the game machine at predetermined time intervals,
The second information is configured to be able to be output to the outside of the game machine at specific time intervals,
the first information includes information as to whether a predetermined error has occurred;
If the scheduled output timings of the first information and the second information overlap at the predetermined timing when the predetermined error occurs, the second information is output, and then at a specific timing. is configured to output the first information in
When the predetermined error is resolved after the predetermined timing and before the specific timing, information indicating that the predetermined error has not occurred at the specific timing is provided. The gaming machine is characterized by being configured to be capable of outputting first information including:

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E5) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
a start switch,
a counting switch;
In a gaming machine equipped with a total score display device,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to output information including settlement information related to settlement to the outside of the gaming machine,
It is configured to be able to output information including response information regarding lending to the outside of the gaming machine,
When the settlement process is not executed, it is possible to output information that the settlement information regarding the settlement is 0,
When executing settlement processing, it is possible to output information that the settlement information related to settlement is a value other than 0,
After outputting information in which the settlement information related to settlement is 0, when receiving information in which the information related to lending is a value other than 0, it is possible to output information including information indicating normality as response information related to lending,
After outputting information with a value other than 0 for settlement information related to settlement, when receiving information having a value other than 0 for information related to lending, it is possible to output information including information indicating an abnormality as response information related to lending. It is a game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E6) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
a start switch,
a counting switch;
In a gaming machine equipped with a total score display device,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to output information including settlement information related to settlement to the outside of the gaming machine,
It is configured to be able to output information including response information regarding lending to the outside of the gaming machine,
When the count switch is operated in a situation where the total score display device stores a value other than 0, it is configured so that the settlement process may be executed,
When the settlement process is not executed, it is possible to output information that the settlement information regarding the settlement is 0,
When executing settlement processing, it is possible to output information that the settlement information related to settlement is a value other than 0,
In a situation where the count switch is operated, after outputting information with a value other than 0 for the payment information related to payment, if information related to rental is received with a value other than 0, the received rental information The score displayed on the total score display device is not updated based on the information that the information is a value other than 0, and thereafter the count switch is operated continuously, and the settlement information regarding the settlement is 0. After outputting certain information, when information indicating that the information on lending has a value other than 0 is received, the total score display device displays the information on the basis of the received information indicating that the information on lending has a value other than 0. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the score can be updated.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (E7) is
a reel;
a stop switch;
a start switch,
a counting switch;
In a gaming machine equipped with a total score display device,
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to output information including information on settlement to the outside of the gaming machine,
After outputting information including information on settlement, it is configured to be able to receive information on lending before a predetermined period elapses,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the information on lending includes information by which it can be determined whether or not the information including the information on settlement that has been output is normal, a serial number, and information on the number of lending.

P reel-type game machine, DU front door (door)
D door substrate, D10s input reception sensor D20s first input sensor, D30s second input sensor D40 stop button D41 left stop button D42 middle stop button D43 right stop button D50 start lever D60 checkout button D70 display panel D80 door switch D90 Coin shooter, D100 Blocker D130 Upper panel, D140 Lower panel D150 Decorative lamp unit, D160 Reel window D170 Medal slot, D180 Start lamp D290 Replay lamp D300 Can be inserted lamp D200 Credit number display device, D210 Insertion number indicator D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 Discharge port, D250 Special game state display device D260 Keyhole, D270 Payout number display device (push order display device)
D280 AT counter value display device D310 Reel window frame lamp D340 Medal return member D341 Medal receiving slot D342 Medal drop surface D343 Medal non-drop surface M Main control board M20 Setting key switch, M30 Setting/reset button C Main control chip, M50 Reel M51 Left reel, M52 Middle reel M53 Right reel, M60 AT counter M70 Minimum game interval timer S Sub-control board, S10 LED lamp S20 Speaker, S30 Spindle backlight S40 Effect display device, SC Sub-control chip E Power board, E10 Power switch H Medal payout device H10s First payout sensor H20s Second payout sensor H40 Hopper H50 Disk H50a Disk rotating shaft H60 Game medal exit H70 Release urging means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bet button lamp S60 Stop button lamp K Spindle board , K10 Spindle motor K20 Spindle sensor IN Relay board, SB Sub-input button KHc Height securing obstacle counter, YKc-1 Advantageous zone remaining game number counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU Reel unit, BU Base, H62 Discharge guide, H64 Inclined surface HS Auxiliary medal tank BS Screw DE Full detection electrode M55 First end M57 Second end M58 Overlapping portion M59 Cut MW Reel frame MO Reel band M Main control board MN11ta-A First Main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B Second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery table MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination Lottery table, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game pattern determination lottery table MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery Table, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP22t-B 2nd main game start opening electric accessory release timer MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34t Special game Timer MP52c Time saving number counter, MT10 Command transmission buffer A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry detection device, A20 1st main game pattern display device A 21g 1st main game symbol display section, A21h 1st main game symbol reservation display section B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start gate B11s 2nd main game start gate entrance detection device, B11d 2nd main game Starter electric accessory B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit B21h 2nd main game symbol reservation display unit C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device, C10 1st big winning opening C11s First big winning opening winning detection device, C11d First big winning opening electric accessory C20 Second big winning opening, C21s Second big winning opening winning detection device C21d Second big winning opening electric accessory, D30 Game area D44 Launch handle D32 Outer rail, D34 Inner rail H Auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 Auxiliary game start port H11s Auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 Auxiliary game design display device H21g Auxiliary game design display unit, H21h Auxiliary game design reservation display unit S Sub Control board, SM effect display control means (sub-main control board)
SG Performance display device SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern display area SG12 First reservation display part SG13 Second reservation display part KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device KE10 Payout unit D16 Transparent plate KR Prize ball rail KT Prize ball tank, KH Prize ball payout control board Ea Power switch, D42 Launcher E Power supply unit, D40 Launch control board DL10 Left-handed area, DR10 Right-handed area ML10 Left-handed route (first flow route), MR10 Right-handed route (Second downstream route)
D50 Right-handed route outflow outlet NKc Number of balls entered counter P10 Left general winning opening P20 Right general winning opening HSc Left-handed instruction counter MSc Right-handed instruction counter MP51c Probability variable number counter MN52c Limited frequency counter MP41t Small winning game timer MP41t -2 Emission standby timer C22 Specific area (V winning opening), C20-1 Box-shaped member C23 Second large winning opening discharging opening, C23s Second large winning opening discharging detection device C24 Upper shielding member, C25 Lower shielding member C22s V winning Entering ball detection device SM26c Prefetch effect execution counter SM24t Power-on timer SM23c Stay stage management counter SM23c2 Consecutive house number counter SB Sub-input button, SBs Sub-input button input detection device KH Prize ball payout control board, KE Prize ball payout device 3100 Transmission/reception control means 3110 Reception control means 3111 Main side reception information temporary storage means 3112 ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means 3210 Transmission control means 3300 Payout control means 3310 Payout processing related information temporary storage means 3311a First main game start port Winning counter 3311b 2nd main game starting opening winning counter 3311c First big winning opening winning counter 3311d Second big winning opening winning counter 3311e General winning opening winning counter 3312 Ball number counter 3313 Enclosed game ball number counter 3400 Launch Control means 3410 Launch control-related information temporary storage means 3500 Power failure/recovery initial processing control means 3510 Power failure information temporary storage means 40 Launch control device 42 Launcher KS Prize ball permission sensors EU ECO unit 50 operation unit device 2121 normal winning detection device 2122 normal electric accessory 2221 distribution winning detection device 2222 distribution electric accessory 2224a shielding member 2224-1 specific area entry detection device 2224-2 ejected ball detection device M40 Main board case, M80 Gate part CPUMC Microprocessor, SH Performance display device SH10 Identification segment, SH20 Ratio segment M90 Setting display LED

Claims (1)

a reel;
a stop switch;
start switch and
In a game machine equipped with
Based on the operation of the start switch, it is configured to be able to determine the lottery result,
It is configured to be able to output counting notification information to the outside of the game machine,
Hall control/fraud monitoring information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine every first cycle,
The gaming machine installation information is configured to be able to be output to the outside of the gaming machine every second period,
The gaming machine performance information is configured to be able to be output to the outside of the gaming machine every third cycle,
The counting notification information includes the counting serial number and the number of counting points.
The counting serial number included in the first counting notification information after the power is turned on is "0", and the counting serial number included in subsequent counting notification information is a value within the range of "1" to "M (M is a numerical value)". is configured to be
The gaming machine installation information includes information on the ID number of the main control chip,
The game machine performance information includes information on the total number of input points after the power is turned on,
At the first timing when the first cycle and the second cycle overlap, the gaming machine installation information is output, and at the second timing when the first cycle has passed from the first timing, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is output. configured to be
At the third timing when the first cycle, the second cycle, and the third cycle overlap, the gaming machine installation information is output, and at the fourth timing when the first cycle has passed from the third timing, the gaming machine Configured so that performance information may be output
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images